PSS Adept

PSS/ADEPT 5.
USERS MANUAL
June 2005
Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc. Power Technologies International 1482 Erie Boulevard P.O. Box 1058 Schenectady, NY 12301-1058 US Phone 518-395-5000 www.pti-us.com
Copyright 1998-2005 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International Information in this manual and any software described herein is confidential and subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International. The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, for any purpose other than the purchasers personal use, without the express written permission of Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International. Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Visual C++ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
1.1 About the PSS/ADEPT Application .............................................................................1-1 1.1.1 Application Capabilities ..................................................................................1-1 1.1.2 Optional Features ...........................................................................................1-1 Getting Help ................................................................................................................1-2 1.2.1 Using This Documentation .............................................................................1-2 1.2.2 Using the Online Help ....................................................................................1-3 1.2.3 Contacting Siemens PTI for Support ..............................................................1-3 1.2.4 Submitting Bug Reports and Feature Requests .............................................1-4 Installing and Using PSS/ADEPT ................................................................................1-5 The PSS/ADEPT Application Window .........................................................................1-6 1.4.1 Views ..............................................................................................................1-6 1.4.2 The Status Bar .............................................................................................1-16 1.4.3 The Main Menu ............................................................................................1-17 1.4.4 Toolbars .......................................................................................................1-18 Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties ..................................................................1-27 Setting Diagram View Properties ..............................................................................1-32 1.6.1 Setting Default Diagram Properties ..............................................................1-34 1.6.2 Resetting Diagram Properties ......................................................................1-34 Setting Default Item Properties .................................................................................1-35 Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT ................................................................1-38 1.8.1 Opening Native PSS/ADEPT Files ...............................................................1-38 1.8.2 Opening PSS/U Raw Data Files ...................................................................1-39 1.8.3 Opening PSS/Engines Hub Files .................................................................1-39 1.8.4 Saving Files ..................................................................................................1-40 1.8.5 Merging Files ................................................................................................1-40 1.8.5.1 Duplicate Node Names Not Allowed ............................................1-42 1.8.5.2 Duplicate Node Names Allowed ...................................................1-43
1.2
1.3 1.4
1.5 1.6
1.7 1.8
Chapter 2 - Creating a Network Model

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 Overview: Creating a Network Model ..........................................................................2-1 Creating a New Diagram .............................................................................................2-1 Setting Network Model Properties ...............................................................................2-2 Adding a Node .............................................................................................................2-4 Adding a Shunt Device ................................................................................................2-5 Adding a Branch ..........................................................................................................2-6 Defining a Group .........................................................................................................2-8
Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
Table of Contents
PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual
2.8 2.9
Defining a Load Category ..........................................................................................2-11 Defining Network Economics ....................................................................................2-14
2.10 Defining Item Ordering Method .................................................................................2-15 2.11 Completing the Network Diagram .............................................................................2-18 2.12 Saving the Network Model ........................................................................................2-19 2.13 Printing the Diagram ..................................................................................................2-20 2.13.1 Specifying Print Options ...............................................................................2-20 2.13.2 Specifying Print Settings ..............................................................................2-21 2.13.3 Previewing the Diagram Before Printing ......................................................2-22 2.13.4 Printing a Network Diagram .........................................................................2-23 2.14 Adjusting the PSS/ADEPT Display ............................................................................2-23 2.14.1 Hiding Views .................................................................................................2-23 2.14.2 Docking Views ..............................................................................................2-24 2.14.3 Floating the Progress View ..........................................................................2-25 2.14.4 Zooming the Diagram ...................................................................................2-26 2.14.5 Scaling/Offsetting Diagram Coordinates ......................................................2-27 2.14.6 Panning the Diagram ....................................................................................2-28 2.14.7 Navigating Using the Mouse Wheel .............................................................2-28 2.14.8 Centering Items in the Diagram View ...........................................................2-28 2.14.9 Saving Diagram Views .................................................................................2-28 2.14.10 Working with Layers .....................................................................................2-29 2.14.11 Importing and Exporting Image Files ............................................................2-31 2.14.12 Using Knee Points ........................................................................................2-32 2.14.13 Locking the Diagram ....................................................................................2-34 2.14.14 Working with Item Labels .............................................................................2-34 2.14.14.1 Setting Multiple Label Fonts .........................................................2-36 2.14.14.2 Controlling Result Label Visibility .................................................2-37 2.14.14.3 Configuring Point Node Labels ....................................................2-37 2.14.14.4 Applying Separate Labels to Node Names and Results ..............2-38 2.14.14.5 Positioning Branch Result Labels ................................................2-38 2.15 Autopositioning Diagram Symbols ............................................................................2-39 2.16 Rotating Diagram Items .............................................................................................2-39 2.17 Using Ports and Links ...............................................................................................2-39
Chapter 3 - Editing a Network Model

3.1 Overview: Editing a Network Model ............................................................................3-1 3.1.1 Basic Editing Features ...................................................................................3-1 3.1.2 Editing Item Properties ...................................................................................3-2 3.1.3 Using the Grid Editor ......................................................................................3-2 3.1.3.1 Opening the Grid Editor .................................................................3-3 3.1.3.2 Modifying Network Items ................................................................3-4 3.1.3.3 Using Copy and Paste in the Grid View .........................................3-7 3.1.3.4 Finding Data in a Cell .....................................................................3-8 3.1.3.5 Exporting the Grid View .................................................................3-8 3.1.3.6 Changing Format and Display Settings of Grid Cells .....................3-9 3.1.3.7 Printing the Grid View ..................................................................3-11 3.1.3.8 Zooming Capabilities ....................................................................3-14
ii
Table of Contents
3.2 3.3
Opening an Existing Network Diagram .....................................................................3-15 Selecting Items ..........................................................................................................3-15 3.3.1 Selecting a Single Item .................................................................................3-16 3.3.2 Selecting Multiple Adjacent Items ................................................................3-17 3.3.3 Selecting Multiple Nonadjacent Items ..........................................................3-18 3.3.4 Selecting All Items ........................................................................................3-19 3.3.5 Deselecting All Items ....................................................................................3-19 3.3.6 Selecting a Group .........................................................................................3-19 3.3.7 Selecting an Island .......................................................................................3-20 3.3.8 Selecting by Load Category .........................................................................3-21 3.3.9 Selecting Nodes in a Given Base Voltage Range ........................................3-22 3.3.10 Selecting a Tree ...........................................................................................3-23 3.3.11 Selection Filters ............................................................................................3-24 Annotating the Diagram .............................................................................................3-25 Editing Nodes ............................................................................................................3-27 3.5.1 Moving Nodes ..............................................................................................3-27 3.5.2 Copying Nodes .............................................................................................3-27 3.5.3 Resizing Nodes ............................................................................................3-29 3.5.4 Deleting Nodes .............................................................................................3-29 3.5.5 Toggling Node Symbols ...............................................................................3-29 3.5.6 Changing Node Properties ...........................................................................3-30 Editing Branches .......................................................................................................3-32 3.6.1 Moving Branches ..........................................................................................3-32 3.6.2 Copying Branches ........................................................................................3-33 3.6.3 Deleting Branches ........................................................................................3-33 3.6.4 Changing Line Properties .............................................................................3-34 3.6.5 Changing Switch Properties .........................................................................3-38 3.6.6 Changing Transformer Properties ................................................................3-41 3.6.7 Changing Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties ............................................3-50 Editing Shunt Devices ...............................................................................................3-54 3.7.1 Moving Shunt Devices ..................................................................................3-54 3.7.2 Copying Shunt Devices ................................................................................3-55 3.7.3 Deleting Shunt Devices ................................................................................3-55 3.7.4 Changing Static Load Properties ..................................................................3-56 3.7.5 Changing MWh Load Properties ..................................................................3-60 3.7.6 Changing Source Properties ........................................................................3-63 3.7.7 Changing Induction Machine Properties ......................................................3-67 3.7.8 Changing Synchronous Machine Properties ................................................3-74 3.7.9 Changing Capacitor Properties ....................................................................3-81 3.7.10 Changing Standard Fault Properties ............................................................3-83 Workspace Management ..........................................................................................3-85 Load and Machine Scaling ........................................................................................3-87 3.9.1 Load Scaling .................................................................................................3-87 3.9.2 Machine Scaling ...........................................................................................3-89 3.9.3 MWh Load Scaling .......................................................................................3-90 3.9.4 Automatic Load Scaling ................................................................................3-91
3.4 3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8 3.9
3.10 Rephasing the Network .............................................................................................3-98 3.10.1 Device Rephasing Details ............................................................................3-99 3.11 Creating Load Snapshots ........................................................................................3-102 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International iii
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 - Analyzing Network Models

4.1 4.2 Overview: Analyzing Network Models .........................................................................4-1 4.1.1 PSS/ADEPT Analysis Conventions ................................................................4-2 Built-In Data Validation Options ..................................................................................4-2 4.2.1 Automatic Validation of Input Data .................................................................4-2 4.2.2 User-Initiated Network Validation ...................................................................4-4 Viewing Results on the Diagram .................................................................................4-5 4.3.1 Setting General Analysis Options ...................................................................4-5 4.3.2 Color Coding the Analysis Results .................................................................4-7 4.3.3 Reporting Results on the Network Diagram ...................................................4-8 4.3.3.1 Flow Arrows ...................................................................................4-8 4.3.3.2 Load Flow and Short Circuit Result Options ..................................4-9 Calculating Load Flow ..............................................................................................4-15 4.4.1 Setting Load Flow Analysis Options .............................................................4-15 4.4.2 Performing a Load Flow Analysis .................................................................4-19 4.4.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Load Flow Solutions ......................................4-20 Calculating Short Circuits ..........................................................................................4-25 4.5.1 Setting Short Circuit Analysis Options ..........................................................4-26 4.5.2 Performing a Short Circuit Analysis ..............................................................4-28 4.5.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Short Circuit Solutions ...................................4-29 4.5.4 Thevenin Equivalent Impedance ..................................................................4-30 Calculating Motor Starting .........................................................................................4-33 4.6.1 Setting Motor Starting Analysis Options .......................................................4-33 4.6.2 Performing a Motor Starting Analysis ...........................................................4-34 4.6.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Motor Starting Solutions ................................4-35 Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO) ......................................................................4-37 4.7.1 Setting CAPO Network Economics ..............................................................4-37 4.7.2 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates CAPO Financials ...........................................4-38 4.7.3 Setting CAPO Analysis Options ...................................................................4-39 4.7.4 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Capacitor Placement .....................................4-40 4.7.5 Performing an Optimal Capacitor Placement Analysis .................................4-43 4.7.6 Reporting CAPO Analysis Results ...............................................................4-43 Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) ........................................................................4-44 4.8.1 Setting TOPO Network Economics ..............................................................4-45 4.8.2 Setting TOPO Analysis Options ...................................................................4-45 4.8.3 Performing a Tie Open Point Optimization Analysis ....................................4-46 4.8.4 Reporting TOPO Analysis Results ...............................................................4-47 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Voltage and Current Unbalances ...............................4-48 4.9.1 Voltage Unbalance .......................................................................................4-48 4.9.2 Current Unbalance .......................................................................................4-51
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Power Factor Limits ...................................................4-54
Chapter 5 - Results Reporting

5.1 5.2 Overview: Reporting Results .......................................................................................5-1 Selectable Tabular Reports .........................................................................................5-1 5.2.1 Branch Current Reports .................................................................................5-2
iv
Table of Contents
5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11 5.2.12 5.2.13 5.2.14 5.2.15 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9
Branch Power Report .....................................................................................5-2 Branch Power Losses Report .........................................................................5-2 Input List of Network Data Report ..................................................................5-2 Node Voltage Reports ....................................................................................5-2 Shunt Current Reports ...................................................................................5-3 Shunt Power Report .......................................................................................5-4 Status Reports ................................................................................................5-4 Network Summary Report ..............................................................................5-4 Power Flow Summary ....................................................................................5-4 Power Flow Details .........................................................................................5-5 Fault All Current Report ..................................................................................5-5 Capacitor Placement Optimization (CAPO) Report ........................................5-5 Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) Report .................................................5-5 Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA) Report ................................................5-5
Setting the Report File Location ..................................................................................5-5 Setting Report Units ....................................................................................................5-6 Setting Report Options ................................................................................................5-8 Reporting on a Selection .............................................................................................5-9 Previewing the Report .................................................................................................5-9 Exporting a Report to Another Format ......................................................................5-10 Creating and Designing Reports Using Crystal Reports ...........................................5-11
Chapter 6 - Line Properties Calculator

6.1 6.2 Overview: Line Properties Calculator ..........................................................................6-1 6.1.1 Nomenclature .................................................................................................6-2 Using the Line Properties Calculator ...........................................................................6-3 6.2.1 Corridor View ..................................................................................................6-5 6.2.2 Status Bar .....................................................................................................6-12 6.2.3 Menu Bar ......................................................................................................6-12 6.2.3.1 File Menu .....................................................................................6-12 6.2.3.2 Edit Menu .....................................................................................6-12 6.2.3.3 View Menu ...................................................................................6-12 6.2.3.4 Analysis Menu ..............................................................................6-12 6.2.3.5 Options Menu ...............................................................................6-12 6.2.3.6 Window Menu ..............................................................................6-12 6.2.3.7 Help Menu ....................................................................................6-13 6.2.4 Toolbar .........................................................................................................6-13 6.2.5 Zoom and Refresh Capabilities ....................................................................6-13 6.2.6 Setting Options .............................................................................................6-14 6.2.6.1 Users Options ..............................................................................6-14 6.2.6.2 Circuit Options ..............................................................................6-16 6.2.6.3 Corridor Options ...........................................................................6-17 Corridor Files .............................................................................................................6-21 6.3.1 Opening/Saving/Printing Corridor Files ........................................................6-21 6.3.1.1 Opening a Corridor File ................................................................6-21 6.3.1.2 Saving a Corridor File ...................................................................6-22 6.3.1.3 Printing a Corridor File .................................................................6-23
6.3
Table of Contents
6.3.2
6.3.3
Modifying Corridor Files ...............................................................................6-25 6.3.2.1 Selecting a Circuit ........................................................................6-25 6.3.2.2 Adjusting Circuit Properties ..........................................................6-26 6.3.2.3 Copying a Circuit ..........................................................................6-26 6.3.2.4 Pasting a Circuit ...........................................................................6-27 6.3.2.5 Deleting a Circuit ..........................................................................6-27 6.3.2.6 Deleting All Circuits ......................................................................6-28 Analyzing Corridor Files ...............................................................................6-28 6.3.3.1 Automatic Validation ....................................................................6-28 6.3.3.2 User-Initiated Validation ...............................................................6-29 6.3.3.3 Performing an Analysis ................................................................6-29 6.3.3.4 Calculation Results ......................................................................6-32 6.3.3.5 Saving Output to a File .................................................................6-39 6.3.3.6 Saving Impedances to the Construction Dictionary .....................6-40
Chapter 7 - Protection and Coordination

7.1 7.2 7.3 Overview: Protection and Coordination .......................................................................7-1 Adding Protection Equipment Packs ...........................................................................7-1 Editing Protection Equipment Packs ...........................................................................7-3 7.3.1 Editing Selected Devices ................................................................................7-9 7.3.1.1 Editing Fuses ...............................................................................7-11 7.3.1.2 Editing Relays ..............................................................................7-12 7.3.1.3 Editing Transformer Damage Curves ...........................................7-14 7.3.1.4 Editing Cable/Conductor Damage Curves ...................................7-18 7.3.1.5 Editing Reclosers .........................................................................7-21 7.3.1.6 Editing Machine Protection Curves ..............................................7-24 Performing a Coordination Study ..............................................................................7-27 7.4.1 Preparing for a Coordination Study ..............................................................7-27 7.4.2 The Coordination View .................................................................................7-27 7.4.2.1 The Coordination Menu Bar .........................................................7-29 7.4.2.2 Coordination Curve Plot Annotation .............................................7-29 7.4.2.3 Changing Protective Device Settings ...........................................7-29 7.4.2.4 The Coordination List View ..........................................................7-30 7.4.2.5 Printing the Coordination View .....................................................7-31 The Protective Device Database ...............................................................................7-32 7.5.1 Fuse Tables ..................................................................................................7-32 7.5.1.1 Fuse .............................................................................................7-32 7.5.1.2 Fuse Catalog ................................................................................7-33 7.5.1.3 Fuse Curve ...................................................................................7-34 7.5.2 Relay Tables ................................................................................................7-35 7.5.2.1 Relay ............................................................................................7-35 7.5.2.2 Relay Catalog ...............................................................................7-36 7.5.2.3 Relay Curve .................................................................................7-37 7.5.3 Recloser Table .............................................................................................7-38 7.5.3.1 RecloserMfrSpecs ........................................................................7-38 7.5.3.2 RecloserRatings ...........................................................................7-39 7.5.3.3 RecloserTCCCurve ......................................................................7-40 7.5.4 Using the Protective Device Database Interface ..........................................7-41 7.5.4.1 Adding Fuses ...............................................................................7-42 7.5.4.2 Adding Relays ..............................................................................7-43
7.4
7.5
vi
Table of Contents
7.5.5 7.5.6
7.5.4.3 Adding Reclosers .........................................................................7-44 7.5.4.4 Viewing and Modifying Fuses .......................................................7-45 7.5.4.5 Viewing and Modifying Relays .....................................................7-46 7.5.4.6 Viewing and Modifying Reclosers ................................................7-47 7.5.4.7 Updating Device Manufacturers ...................................................7-48 7.5.4.8 Removing Devices .......................................................................7-49 Printing the Contents of the Database .........................................................7-52 Importing Customized Database Tables ......................................................7-53
Chapter 8 - Harmonic Analysis

8.1 8.2 Overview: Harmonic Analysis ......................................................................................8-1 Adding Harmonic Injections .........................................................................................8-2 8.2.1 Adding Harmonic Injections to Shunt Items ....................................................8-3 8.2.2 Adding Harmonic Injections to Transformers .................................................8-4 8.2.3 Adding Harmonic Injections to Nodes ............................................................8-5 Editing Harmonic Injections .........................................................................................8-6 Adding Harmonic Filters ..............................................................................................8-7 Editing Harmonic Filters ..............................................................................................8-8 Setting Harmonic Analysis Options ...........................................................................8-10 Performing a Harmonic Analysis ...............................................................................8-11 Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis ...................................................................8-12 8.8.1 Harmonic Voltage .........................................................................................8-13 8.8.2 Harmonics Spectrum ....................................................................................8-15 8.8.3 Impedance versus Frequency ......................................................................8-16 8.8.4 Nodal Impedance .........................................................................................8-17 Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT ....................................................................8-18 8.9.1 Static Loads ..................................................................................................8-18 8.9.2 Induction Machines ......................................................................................8-19 8.9.3 Synchronous Machines ................................................................................8-20 8.9.4 Shunt Capacitors ..........................................................................................8-21 8.9.5 Lines and Cables ..........................................................................................8-22 8.9.6 Transformers ................................................................................................8-24
8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8
8.9
Chapter 9 - Distribution Reliability Analysis

9.1 9.2 9.3 Overview: Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA) ........................................................9-1 9.1.1 Nomenclature .................................................................................................9-1 Using the Distribution Reliability Analysis Module .......................................................9-3 Using DRA Protection Equipment and Switches .........................................................9-5 9.3.1 Specifying Automatic Reclosing Devices .......................................................9-5 9.3.2 Specifying Breakers .......................................................................................9-5 9.3.3 Specifying Switches .......................................................................................9-6 9.3.4 Specifying Fuses ............................................................................................9-6 9.3.5 Specifying FuseSwitches ...............................................................................9-6 9.3.6 Specifying Tie Switches .................................................................................9-6 Specifying Reliability Parameters and Device Types ..................................................9-7 9.4.1 Entering Reliability Parameters: Default .........................................................9-8 vii
9.4
Table of Contents
9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9
Entering Reliability Parameters: Property Sheet ..........................................9-14 Entering Reliability Parameters: Construction Dictionary .............................9-17 Entering Reliability Parameters: Static Loads ..............................................9-19
Network and Analysis Limitations ..............................................................................9-21 Setting DRA Analysis Options ...................................................................................9-22 Setting DRA Analysis Result Display Options ...........................................................9-24 Performing a DRA Analysis .......................................................................................9-26 Calculating Reliability Indices: Application Examples ...............................................9-26 9.9.1 Using DRA for Basic Historical Analysis ......................................................9-26 9.9.2 Example of Basic Analysis ...........................................................................9-27 9.9.3 Example of Predictive Analysis ....................................................................9-29
Appendix A - Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT

A.1 Transformer Modeling ................................................................................................ A-1 A.1.1 Transformer Changes From PSS/U to PSS/ADEPT ..................................... A-1 A.1.2 Transformers in PSS/ADEPT ........................................................................ A-1 A.1.3 Reading Transformers From PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT .......... A-6 A.1.3.1 Conversion of Transformer Types ................................................. A-6 A.1.3.2 Calculation of Transformer Grounding Impedance ....................... A-8 A.1.4 Transformer Conversions Not Supported ...................................................... A-8 Transformer Modeling Rules and Hints .................................................................... A-10 A.2.1 Specifying Transformer Size ....................................................................... A-10 A.2.2 Transformer Impedance .............................................................................. A-10 A.2.3 Three-Winding Transformers ...................................................................... A-10 A.2.4 Three-Legged Core Transformers ............................................................... A-11 A.2.5 Regulating Transformers ............................................................................. A-12 A.2.6 Grounding Transformers ............................................................................. A-13 A.2.7 Autotransformers ......................................................................................... A-13 Machine Modeling .................................................................................................... A-14 A.3.1 Synchronous Machines ............................................................................... A-14 A.3.1.1 Synchronous Machine Load Flow Behavior ................................ A-14 A.3.1.2 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Load Flow Calculations .. A-15 A.3.1.3 Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Behavior ............................. A-15 A.3.1.4 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Calculation Between PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U .............................................. A-15 A.3.1.5 Synchronous Machine Starting in PSS/ADEPT .......................... A-16 A.3.1.6 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Starting Between PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U ............................................................. A-18 A.3.2 PSS/ADEPT Induction Machine Model and Changes from PSS/U ............. A-18 A.3.2.1 PSS/ADEPT Induction Machine Model ....................................... A-18 A.3.2.2 The Basic Method to Specify an Induction Machine ................... A-19 A.3.2.3 The Available Induction Machine Designs .................................. A-20 A.3.2.3.1 NEMA Designs ........................................................ A-20 A.3.2.3.2 IEC Designs ............................................................. A-21 A.3.2.4 Induction Machine Loadflow Comparison of PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U .................................................................................. A-21 A.3.2.5 Locked Rotor Codes and Motor Starting Comparison ................ A-22
A.2
A.3
viii
Table of Contents
A.3.2.6 A.3.2.7 A.3.2.8 A.3.2.9
PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U Induction Machine Modeling or Short Circuit Calculations ........................................................ A-23 Advanced Machine Specification ................................................ A-25 Relationship between the New PSS/ADEPT Model and the PSS/U Raw Data File ..................................................... A-26 Examples of Induction Machine Specification ............................. A-27 A.3.2.9.1 Induction Machine Short Circuit Behavior ................ A-30 A.3.2.9.2 Induction Machine Starting Behavior ....................... A-30
A.4 A.5 A.6
Data and Parameter File Differences ....................................................................... A-31 Editing Data Dictionaries .......................................................................................... A-31 Diagram Differences ................................................................................................. A-32 A.6.1 Transformer Symbol Types ......................................................................... A-32 A.6.2 Node Labels ................................................................................................ A-32 A.6.3 Load and Branch Labels ............................................................................. A-32 A.6.4 Load Flow Results ....................................................................................... A-32 A.6.5 Shunt Device Labels ................................................................................... A-33 Acceleration Factors ................................................................................................. A-33 Unique Name Identifiers ........................................................................................... A-33 Network Limits .......................................................................................................... A-33 A.9.1 Network Size/Number of Loops ................................................................... A-33 A.9.2 Loads ........................................................................................................... A-33
A.7 A.8 A.9
A.10 MWh Loads .............................................................................................................. A-34 A.11 Sources .................................................................................................................... A-34 A.11.1 Source Angle ............................................................................................... A-34 A.11.2 Multiple In-Service Sources ......................................................................... A-34 A.12 Load Categories and Device Groups ....................................................................... A-34 A.13 Network Economics .................................................................................................. A-34 A.14 Load Snapshots ....................................................................................................... A-34 A.15 Static Loads .............................................................................................................. A-35
Appendix B - PSS/U Input File Formats

B.1 PSS/U Raw Data File Format ..................................................................................... B-1 B.1.1 Sample Three-Phase Feeder Raw Data File ................................................. B-1 B.1.2 Title Section ................................................................................................... B-2 B.1.3 System Parameters Section .......................................................................... B-2 B.1.4 Node Declaration Section .............................................................................. B-3 B.1.5 Source Data Section ..................................................................................... B-3 B.1.6 Branch Data Section ..................................................................................... B-4 B.1.6.1 Line or Cable Data ........................................................................ B-4 B.1.6.2 Switch Data ................................................................................... B-5 B.1.6.3 Tie Switch Data ............................................................................. B-5 B.1.6.4 Series Capacitor or Series Reactor Data ...................................... B-6 B.1.6.5 Transformer Data .......................................................................... B-6 B.1.6.5.1 Rules: ......................................................................... B-6 B.1.7 Transformer Tap Changing Data Section ...................................................... B-7 B.1.8 Transformer Type Codes .............................................................................. B-8
ix
Table of Contents
B.1.9
Load Data Section ....................................................................................... B-10 B.1.9.1 Load Categories .......................................................................... B-10 B.1.9.2 Load Type Definitions ................................................................. B-10 B.1.9.3 kW, kvar Load ............................................................................. B-11 B.1.9.3.1 kW, kvar Load - Unbalanced (types 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13) ......................................... B-11 B.1.9.3.2 kW, kvar Load - Balanced (types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33) ................................... B-11 B.1.9.4 Machine Loads ............................................................................ B-12 B.1.9.4.1 Rules ........................................................................ B-12 B.1.9.4.2 Asynchronous Machine Load (types 51-90, 151-190) ............................................ B-12 B.1.9.4.3 Synchronous Machine Load (types 91-99, 191-199) ............................................ B-12 B.1.10 MWh Load Data Section ............................................................................. B-13 B.1.10.1 MWh Load Data - Unbalanced (types 5, 6, 15, 16) ..................... B-13 B.1.10.2 MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36) ..................... B-14 B.1.11 Capacitor Data Section ............................................................................... B-14 B.1.11.1 Fixed Capacitors ......................................................................... B-14 B.1.11.2 Switched Capacitors ................................................................... B-14
B.2
Construction Data Dictionary File Format ................................................................ B-15 B.2.1 General Information ..................................................................................... B-15 B.2.2 Data Assumptions ....................................................................................... B-15 B.2.3 Typical Construction Dictionary Data Record .............................................. B-16 B.2.4 Basic Data Record ...................................................................................... B-16 B.2.5 Two-Phase Data Records (if different from three-phase values) ................ B-17 B.2.6 One-Phase Data Records (if different from three- or two-phase values) .... B-17 B.2.7 Rating Data Record ..................................................................................... B-17 B.2.8 Reliability Data Record ................................................................................ B-17
Appendix C - Validation Criteria

C.1 C.2 Data Validation Criteria .............................................................................................. C-1 User-Specified Network Validation Criteria ................................................................ C-4
Appendix D - Modeling
D.1 D.2 D.3 Nodes ......................................................................................................................... D-1 D.1.1 Three-Phase Node ........................................................................................ D-1 Sources ...................................................................................................................... D-2 D.2.1 Three-Phase Source ..................................................................................... D-2 Loads .......................................................................................................................... D-5 D.3.1 Single-Phase Load ........................................................................................ D-6 D.3.2 Three-Phase Load ......................................................................................... D-6 Shunt Capacitors ........................................................................................................ D-7 D.4.1 Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor ....................................................................... D-7 Shunt Capacitor Controllers ....................................................................................... D-8 D.5.1 Controller for a Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor .............................................. D-8 Synchronous Machines .............................................................................................. D-9 D.6.1 Three-Phase Synchronous Machine ........................................................... D-10 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
D.4 D.5 D.6
Table of Contents
D.6.2 D.6.3 D.7 D.8
Short Circuit Model of Synchronous Machine ............................................. D-13 Simplified Synchronous Machine Modeling ................................................. D-15
Induction Machines .................................................................................................. D-16 D.7.1 Three-Phase Induction Machine ................................................................. D-17 Lines ......................................................................................................................... D-18 D.8.1 Single-Phase Line ....................................................................................... D-18 D.8.2 Three-Phase Line ........................................................................................ D-18 Switches ................................................................................................................... D-19 D.9.1 Three-Phase Switch .................................................................................... D-19
D.9
D.10 Transformers ............................................................................................................ D-20 D.10.1 Transformer Node Connection .................................................................... D-20 D.10.2 Transformer Taps ........................................................................................ D-20 D.10.3 Transformer Phasing ................................................................................... D-20 D.10.4 Transformer Grounding ............................................................................... D-21 D.10.5 Summary of Transformers Types ................................................................ D-22 D.11 Transformer Details .................................................................................................. D-26 D.11.1 Wye-Wye Transformers ............................................................................... D-26 D.11.2 Delta-Delta Transformers ............................................................................ D-27 D.11.3 Wye-Delta Transformers ............................................................................. D-27 D.11.4 Delta-Wye Transformers ............................................................................. D-29 D.11.5 Wye Autotransformer .................................................................................. D-30 D.11.6 Autoregulators ............................................................................................. D-31 D.11.7 Specifying the Impedance of the Autoregulator Transformers .................... D-33 D.11.8 Center-Tapped Split-Phase Transformers ................................................... D-34 D.11.9 Z-Wye (ZY) Transformers (Zig-zag) ............................................................ D-36 D.11.10 All Transformers Single-Phase, Two-Phase and Three-Phase ................... D-38 D.12 Transformer Tap Controllers .................................................................................... D-51 D.13 Series Capacitor/Reactor ......................................................................................... D-52 D.13.1 Three-Phase Series Capacitor/Reactor ....................................................... D-53 D.14 Faults ........................................................................................................................ D-53 D.14.1 Line-to-Line Fault ........................................................................................ D-53 D.14.2 Line-to-Ground Fault ................................................................................... D-54 D.14.3 Line-to-Line-to-Ground Fault ....................................................................... D-55
Appendix E - NEMA Machine Classes Appendix F - Device Properties Summary

F.1 F.2 F.3 F.4 F.5 F.6 F.7 F.8 Network ...................................................................................................................... F-1 Nodes ......................................................................................................................... F-3 Lines/Cables ............................................................................................................... F-4 Transformers .............................................................................................................. F-5 Static Loads ................................................................................................................ F-9 MWh Loads .............................................................................................................. F-11 Source ...................................................................................................................... F-13 Induction Machines .................................................................................................. F-14 xi
Table of Contents
F.9
Synchronous Machines ............................................................................................ F-16
F.10 Shunt Capacitors ...................................................................................................... F-20 F.11 Switches ................................................................................................................... F-22 F.12 Series Capacitors/Reactors ...................................................................................... F-23 F.13 Standard Faults ........................................................................................................ F-24 F.14 Protection Equipment ............................................................................................... F-25 F.15 Fuses ........................................................................................................................ F-26 F.16 Over Current Relays ................................................................................................. F-27 F.17 Transformer Damage ............................................................................................... F-29 F.18 Conductor/Cable Damage ........................................................................................ F-31 F.19 Reclosers ................................................................................................................. F-33 F.20 Machines .................................................................................................................. F-34
Appendix G - Database Field Formats

G.1 G.2 G.3 G.4 G.5 G.6 G.7 G.8 G.9 Branch Results ........................................................................................................... G-1 G.1.1 Filename: branch.dbf ..................................................................................... G-1 Capacitor Placement Optimization Results ................................................................ G-4 G.2.1 Filename: capo.dbf ........................................................................................ G-4 Capacitor Placement Optimization Summary ............................................................. G-4 G.3.1 Filename: caposum.dbf ................................................................................. G-4 Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule ............................................. G-5 G.4.1 Filename: caposw.dbf ................................................................................... G-5 Capacitor Properties ................................................................................................... G-5 G.5.1 Filename: cap.dbf .......................................................................................... G-5 Device Groups ............................................................................................................ G-6 G.6.1 Filename: group.dbf ...................................................................................... G-6 Device Limits ..............................................................................................................G-6 G.7.1 Filename: limits.dbf ....................................................................................... G-6 Fault All Current Results ............................................................................................ G-7 G.8.1 Filename: fault.dbf ......................................................................................... G-7 Induction Machine Properties ..................................................................................... G-8 G.9.1 Filename: indmach.dbf .................................................................................. G-8
G.10 Line/Cable Properties ................................................................................................. G-9 G.10.1 Filename: line.dbf .......................................................................................... G-9 G.11 Load Flow Summary ................................................................................................ G-10 G.11.1 Filename: lfsum.dbf ..................................................................................... G-10 G.12 Load Properties ........................................................................................................ G-11 G.12.1 Filename: load.dbf ....................................................................................... G-11 G.12.2 Filename: mwh.dbf ...................................................................................... G-11
xii
Table of Contents
G.13 Load Snapshots .......................................................................................................G-12 G.13.1 Filename: snap.dbf ...................................................................................... G-12 G.14 Network Economics .................................................................................................. G-12 G.14.1 Filename: econ.dbf ...................................................................................... G-12 G.15 Node Properties .......................................................................................................G-13 G.15.1 Filename: bus.dbf ........................................................................................ G-13 G.16 Node Results ............................................................................................................ G-13 G.16.1 Filename: node.dbf ...................................................................................... G-13 G.17 Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties ........................................................................ G-15 G.17.1 Filename: reactor.dbf .................................................................................. G-15 G.18 Shunt Status ............................................................................................................. G-16 G.18.1 Filename: shunt.dbf ..................................................................................... G-16 G.19 Source Properties ..................................................................................................... G-18 G.19.1 Filename: source.dbf ................................................................................... G-18 G.20 Standard Fault Properties ........................................................................................ G-19 G.20.1 Filename: stdfault.dbf .................................................................................. G-19 G.21 Static Load Summary ............................................................................................... G-19 G.21.1 Filename: lsum.dbf ...................................................................................... G-19 G.22 MWh Load Summary ................................................................................................ G-20 G.22.1 Filename: mwhsum.dbf ............................................................................... G-20 G.23 Switch Properties ..................................................................................................... G-21 G.23.1 Filename: switch.dbf .................................................................................... G-21 G.24 Synchronous Machine Properties ............................................................................ G-22 G.24.1 Filename: synmach.dbf ............................................................................... G-22 G.25 System Totals ........................................................................................................... G-23 G.25.1 Filename: count.dbf ..................................................................................... G-23 G.26 Tie Open Point Optimization Results ....................................................................... G-24 G.26.1 Filename: topo.dbf ....................................................................................... G-24 G.27 Titles and Comments ............................................................................................... G-25 G.27.1 Filename: comment.dbf ............................................................................... G-25 G.28 Transformer Properties ............................................................................................ G-25 G.28.1 Filename: trnsfrmr.dbf ................................................................................. G-25 G.29 Voltage Levels .......................................................................................................... G-28 G.29.1 Filename: volts.dbf ...................................................................................... G-28 G.30 Distribution Reliability Analysis Results .................................................................... G-28 G.30.1 Filename: dra.dbf ........................................................................................ G-28
Appendix H - Conductor Database
xiii
This page intentionally left blank.
xiv
List of Figures
Figure 1-1. Figure 1-2. Figure 1-3. Figure 1-4. Figure 1-5. Figure 1-6. Figure 1-7. Figure 1-8. Figure 1-9. Report a Bug or Feature Request Window ............................................................1-4 PSS/ADEPT Application Window Views ...............................................................1-6 View Drop-Down Menu ..........................................................................................1-7 Diagram View Pop-Up Menu .................................................................................1-8 Equipment List View ............................................................................................1-10 Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu .........................................1-11 Expanded Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu ........................1-12 Individual Item Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu ..................................1-13 Progress View .....................................................................................................1-14
Figure 1-10. Progress View Pop-Up Menu ..............................................................................1-14 Figure 1-11. Report Preview Window ......................................................................................1-15 Figure 1-12. Application View After a Load Flow Analysis .......................................................1-16 Figure 1-13. Main Menu and Available Toolbars .....................................................................1-17 Figure 1-14. Network Diagram with Tooltips ............................................................................1-19 Figure 1-15. Customize Dialog: Toolbars Tab .........................................................................1-20 Figure 1-16. Save Workspace Dialog ......................................................................................1-22 Figure 1-17. File Toolbar ..........................................................................................................1-23 Figure 1-18. Diagram Toolbar ..................................................................................................1-23 Figure 1-19. Program Settings Dialog ......................................................................................1-24 Figure 1-20. Analysis Toolbar ..................................................................................................1-25 Figure 1-21. Zoom Toolbar ......................................................................................................1-26 Figure 1-22. Results Toolbar ...................................................................................................1-26 Figure 1-23. Reports Toolbar ...................................................................................................1-27 Figure 1-24. Program Settings: Selecting a Dictionary ............................................................1-29 Figure 1-25. Tooltip Settings Dialog .........................................................................................1-31 Figure 1-26. Diagram Property Sheet ......................................................................................1-32 Figure 1-27. Default Items Options ..........................................................................................1-35 Figure 1-28. Default Node Property Sheet ...............................................................................1-36 Figure 1-29. Default Transformer Property Sheet ....................................................................1-37 Figure 1-30. Selecting a PSS/ADEPT File ...............................................................................1-38 Figure 1-31. Merging Feeders .................................................................................................1-41 Figure 1-32. Common Tie Switch List ......................................................................................1-42 Figure 1-33. Duplicate Node Names Allowed ..........................................................................1-43 Figure 2-1. Figure 2-2. Figure 2-3. Network Property Sheet: System Tab ...................................................................2-2 Network Property Sheet: Reliability Tab ................................................................2-3 Diagram Toolbar: Node Symbols ..........................................................................2-4
xv
List of Figures
Figure 2-4. Figure 2-5. Figure 2-6. Figure 2-7. Figure 2-8. Figure 2-9.
Creating a Vertical Node on the Diagram ..............................................................2-5 Diagram Toolbar: Shunt Device Symbols ..............................................................2-5 Creating Shunt Devices .........................................................................................2-6 Diagram Toolbar: Branch Symbols ........................................................................2-6 Creating a Multipoint Branch .................................................................................2-7 Groups Dialog ........................................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-10. Group Membership Dialog .....................................................................................2-9 Figure 2-11. Add Item(s) to Group Dialog ................................................................................2-10 Figure 2-12. Load Categories Dialog .......................................................................................2-11 Figure 2-13. Load Category Membership Dialog .....................................................................2-12 Figure 2-14. Add Load(s) to Category Dialog ..........................................................................2-13 Figure 2-15. Economics Dialog ................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-16. Sample Network to Illustrate Item Ordering Methods ..........................................2-16 Figure 2-17. Ordering Method Dialog ......................................................................................2-17 Figure 2-18. Completed Sample Network Diagram .................................................................2-18 Figure 2-19. Save As Dialog ....................................................................................................2-19 Figure 2-20. Print Options Dialog .............................................................................................2-20 Figure 2-21. Print Setup Dialog ................................................................................................2-21 Figure 2-22. Print Preview Window ..........................................................................................2-22 Figure 2-23. Progress View "Docked" in PSS/ADEPT Application Window ............................2-24 Figure 2-24. Progress View "Floated" in PSS/ADEPT Application Window ............................2-25 Figure 2-25. Zooming the Diagram ..........................................................................................2-26 Figure 2-26. Zoom Toolbar ......................................................................................................2-26 Figure 2-27. Adjust Coordinates Dialog ...................................................................................2-27 Figure 2-28. Saved Views Dialog .............................................................................................2-28 Figure 2-29. Layers Dialog .......................................................................................................2-30 Figure 2-30. Image Property Sheet ..........................................................................................2-31 Figure 2-31. Knee Points .........................................................................................................2-32 Figure 2-32. Knee Point Selected ............................................................................................2-33 Figure 2-33. Knee Point Selection for Delete ...........................................................................2-34 Figure 2-34. Label Property Sheet ...........................................................................................2-35 Figure 2-35. Apply Font Dialog ................................................................................................2-36 Figure 2-36. Label Configurations ............................................................................................2-38 Figure 2-37. Ports and Links ....................................................................................................2-40 Figure 2-38. Port After Selection of Line Segment ..................................................................2-40 Figure 3-1. Figure 3-2. Figure 3-3. Figure 3-4. Figure 3-5. Figure 3-6. Figure 3-7. Grid Editor View .....................................................................................................3-3 Transformer Grid Editor View ................................................................................3-4 Drop Down List ......................................................................................................3-5 Sorting Data in a Column ......................................................................................3-6 Accessing a Network Item Property Sheet ............................................................3-7 Find Dialog ............................................................................................................3-8 Cell Format Dialog .................................................................................................3-9
xvi
List of Figures
Figure 3-8. Figure 3-9.
Display Settings Dialog ........................................................................................3-10 Page Setup Dialog ...............................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-10. Header/Footer Options Dialog .............................................................................3-13 Figure 3-11. Print Preview Window ..........................................................................................3-14 Figure 3-12. Open Dialog .........................................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-13. Single Item Selected ............................................................................................3-16 Figure 3-14. Multiple Adjacent Item Selection .........................................................................3-17 Figure 3-15. Multiple Nonadjacent Item Selection ...................................................................3-18 Figure 3-16. Select Groups Dialog ...........................................................................................3-19 Figure 3-17. Select Load Categories Dialog ............................................................................3-21 Figure 3-18. Select Nodes Dialog ............................................................................................3-22 Figure 3-19. Select Tree Dialog ...............................................................................................3-23 Figure 3-20. Selection Filters Dialog ........................................................................................3-24 Figure 3-21. Diagram Showing Annotations ............................................................................3-25 Figure 3-22. Text Annotation Property Sheet ..........................................................................3-26 Figure 3-23. Copying and Pasting a Node ...............................................................................3-28 Figure 3-24. Node Property Sheet ...........................................................................................3-30 Figure 3-25. Moving a Branch ..................................................................................................3-32 Figure 3-26. Line Property Sheet: Main Tab ............................................................................3-34 Figure 3-27. Line Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ..................................................................3-36 Figure 3-28. Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab ............................................................................3-37 Figure 3-29. Switch Property Sheet: Main Tab ........................................................................3-38 Figure 3-30. Switch Property Sheet: DRA Tab ........................................................................3-40 Figure 3-31. Transformer Property Sheet: Main Tab ...............................................................3-41 Figure 3-32. Transformer Property Sheet: Tap Control Tab ....................................................3-44 Figure 3-33. Transformer Property Sheet: Regulation Tab ......................................................3-45 Figure 3-34. Delta Autoregulator with AB Phasing ..................................................................3-47 Figure 3-35. Transformer Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ......................................................3-48 Figure 3-36. Transformer Property Sheet: DRA Tab ...............................................................3-49 Figure 3-37. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: Main Tab ..........................................3-50 Figure 3-38. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab .................................3-52 Figure 3-39. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: DRA Tab ...........................................3-53 Figure 3-40. Moving a Shunt Device ........................................................................................3-54 Figure 3-41. Static Load Property Sheet: Main Tab .................................................................3-56 Figure 3-42. Static Load Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab .......................................................3-58 Figure 3-43. Static Load Property Sheet: DRA Tab .................................................................3-59 Figure 3-44. Mwh Load Property Sheet ...................................................................................3-61 Figure 3-45. Source Property Sheet: Main Tab .......................................................................3-64 Figure 3-46. Source Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ..............................................................3-66 Figure 3-47. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Main Tab .....................................................3-68 Figure 3-48. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Impedances Tab ..........................................3-70 Figure 3-49. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Start-Up Tab ................................................3-72
xvii
List of Figures
Figure 3-50. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ............................................3-73 Figure 3-51. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Main Tab ...............................................3-74 Figure 3-52. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Impedances Tab ...................................3-76 Figure 3-53. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Start-Up Tab .........................................3-79 Figure 3-54. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ......................................3-80 Figure 3-55. Capacitor Property Sheet: Main Tab ...................................................................3-81 Figure 3-56. Fault Property Sheet ............................................................................................3-84 Figure 3-57. Open Workspace Dialog ......................................................................................3-85 Figure 3-58. Scale Loads Dialog: Magnitude Scaling ..............................................................3-87 Figure 3-59. Scale Loads Dialog: Reactive Power Scaling ......................................................3-88 Figure 3-60. Scale Machines Dialog ........................................................................................3-89 Figure 3-61. Scale MWh Loads Dialog ....................................................................................3-90 Figure 3-62. Automatic Load Scaling Dialog ............................................................................3-93 Figure 3-63. Warning Message ................................................................................................3-93 Figure 3-64. Options Dialog .....................................................................................................3-95 Figure 3-65. Load Scaling Results Dialog ................................................................................3-96 Figure 3-66. Continue Dialog ...................................................................................................3-97 Figure 3-67. Example of Incorrect Rephasing .........................................................................3-98 Figure 3-68. Unbalanced Load Changes for "Rotate Forward" Situation ................................3-99 Figure 3-69. Rephasing Dialog ..............................................................................................3-101 Figure 3-70. Load Snapshots Dialog .....................................................................................3-102 Figure 4-1. Figure 4-2. Figure 4-3. Figure 4-4. Figure 4-5. Figure 4-6. Figure 4-7. Figure 4-8. Figure 4-9. Raw Data File Validation .......................................................................................4-3 Network Validation .................................................................................................4-4 Analysis Options Property Sheet: General Tab .....................................................4-5 Diagram Property Sheet: Color Tab ......................................................................4-7 Diagram Result Display Options ............................................................................4-9 Analysis Options: Reports Tab ............................................................................4-12 TOPO Diagram Displaying New Configuration Results .......................................4-13 CAPO Diagram Displaying Optimized Network Results ......................................4-14 Analysis Options Property Sheet: Load Flow Tab ...............................................4-15
Figure 4-10. Detailed Convergence Monitor Progress Messages ...........................................4-16 Figure 4-11. Solution Paused Dialog .......................................................................................4-16 Figure 4-12. Graphical Convergence Monitor ..........................................................................4-18 Figure 4-13. Sample Load Flow Analysis Diagram ..................................................................4-19 Figure 4-14. Reactive Capability Curve for a Synchronous Machine ......................................4-22 Figure 4-15. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Short Circuit Tab ............................................4-26 Figure 4-16. Sample Short Circuit Analysis Diagram ...............................................................4-28 Figure 4-17. Thevenin Equivalent ............................................................................................4-30 Figure 4-18. Use of Thevenin Equivalent to Get Short Circuit Current ....................................4-31 Figure 4-19. Line-to-Line Fault Currents ..................................................................................4-32 Figure 4-20. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Motor Starting Tab .........................................4-33 Figure 4-21. Sample Motor Starting Analysis Diagram ............................................................4-34
xviii
List of Figures
Figure 4-22. Machine Property Sheet Showing Series Starting Autotransformer Option ........4-36 Figure 4-23. Analysis Options Property Sheet: CAPO Tab .....................................................4-39 Figure 4-24. Diagram and Progress Views After Optimal Capacitor Placement ......................4-43 Figure 4-25. Analysis Options Property Sheet: TOPO Tab .....................................................4-45 Figure 4-26. Diagram and Progress Views After TOPO Analysis ............................................4-47 Figure 5-1. Figure 5-2. Figure 5-3. Figure 5-4. Figure 5-5. Figure 5-6. Figure 6-1. Figure 6-2. Figure 6-3. Figure 6-4. Figure 6-5. Figure 6-6. Figure 6-7. Figure 6-8. Figure 6-9. Voltage Profile .......................................................................................................5-3 Report Units Dialog ...............................................................................................5-6 Report Options Dialog ...........................................................................................5-8 Report Preview Window ........................................................................................5-9 Export Dialog .......................................................................................................5-10 Open File Dialog ..................................................................................................5-11 Example Corridor for Illustration of Line Property Calculations .............................6-3 Initial Corridor View ...............................................................................................6-4 Add New Circuit Dialog ..........................................................................................6-5 Initial Circuit View ..................................................................................................6-6 Circuit_1 Properties Sheet .....................................................................................6-7 Circuit_2 Properties Sheet .....................................................................................6-8 Conductor Bundle Diagram ...................................................................................6-9 Select Conductor Type Dialog .............................................................................6-10 Corridor View .......................................................................................................6-11
Figure 6-10. LineProp Menu Bar ..............................................................................................6-12 Figure 6-11. LineProp Toolbar .................................................................................................6-13 Figure 6-12. LineProp Options Dialog: User Tab .....................................................................6-14 Figure 6-13. LineProp Options Dialog: Circuit Tab ..................................................................6-16 Figure 6-14. LineProp Options Dialog: Corridor Tab ...............................................................6-17 Figure 6-15. Equivalent Circuit for Short Transmission Line ....................................................6-18 Figure 6-16. Pi-Form Transmission Line Equivalent Circuit .....................................................6-18 Figure 6-17. "Exact" Pi-Equivalent Circuits for 400-Mile Length of Example Transmission Line at 60 and 65 Hz (Skin Effect Neglected) ...............................6-19 Figure 6-18. Difference Between 60 and 65 Hz Values of Rex, Lex, and Cex as a Function of Line Length ...............................................................................6-20 Figure 6-19. Open Dialog .........................................................................................................6-21 Figure 6-20. Save As Dialog ....................................................................................................6-22 Figure 6-21. Print Preview .......................................................................................................6-23 Figure 6-22. Print Dialog ..........................................................................................................6-24 Figure 6-23. Selected Circuit View ...........................................................................................6-25 Figure 6-24. Current Circuit Properties Sheet ..........................................................................6-26 Figure 6-25. Copy Circuit Dialog ..............................................................................................6-27 Figure 6-26. Verify Circuit to Delete Message Box ..................................................................6-27 Figure 6-27. Verify to Delete All Circuits Message Box ...........................................................6-28 Figure 6-28. Validation of Circuit Properties ............................................................................6-29 Figure 6-29. Corridor Circuit Data ............................................................................................6-30
xix
List of Figures
Figure 6-30. Sample Zero- and Positive-Sequence Impedances Report ................................6-32 Figure 6-31. Sample Zero- and Positive-Sequence Admittance Report ..................................6-33 Figure 6-32. Sample Self and Mutual Impedances Report ......................................................6-34 Figure 6-33. Sample Self and Mutual Admittances Report ......................................................6-35 Figure 6-34. Sample Average Mutual Impedance and Admittance Report ..............................6-36 Figure 6-35. Sample Corridor Impedance Report ....................................................................6-37 Figure 6-36. Sample Corridor Admittance Report ....................................................................6-38 Figure 6-37. Save Results Dialog ............................................................................................6-39 Figure 6-38. Update Construction Dictionary Dialog ................................................................6-40 Figure 7-1. Figure 7-2. Figure 7-3. Figure 7-4. Figure 7-5. Figure 7-6. Figure 7-7. Figure 7-8. Figure 7-9. Branch with Two Protection Equipment Packs ......................................................7-2 Protection Equipment Pack Property Sheet ..........................................................7-4 Curve Plot View .....................................................................................................7-5 Protection Equipment Pack Plot Options Tab .......................................................7-7 Plot Options Tab ....................................................................................................7-9 More Info Tab ......................................................................................................7-10 Fuse Property Sheet ............................................................................................7-11 Overcurrent Relay Property Sheet ......................................................................7-12 Transformer Damage Curve Tab .........................................................................7-16
Figure 7-10. Conductor Damage Curve Tab ............................................................................7-20 Figure 7-11. Protection Equipment Pack Showing Two Recloser Curves ...............................7-22 Figure 7-12. Recloser Properties Sheet ...................................................................................7-23 Figure 7-13. Machine Starting Curve Property Sheet ..............................................................7-25 Figure 7-14. Coordination View ...............................................................................................7-28 Figure 7-15. Coordination View Menu .....................................................................................7-29 Figure 7-16. Print Parameters Dialog ......................................................................................7-31 Figure 7-17. Prompt to Print the List View ...............................................................................7-31 Figure 7-18. Main Switchboard ................................................................................................7-41 Figure 7-19. Add Fuse Form ....................................................................................................7-42 Figure 7-20. Add Relay Form ...................................................................................................7-43 Figure 7-21. Add Recloser Manufacturer Form .......................................................................7-44 Figure 7-22. Add Recloser Form ..............................................................................................7-44 Figure 7-23. View/Modify Fuse Form .......................................................................................7-45 Figure 7-24. View/Modify Relay Form ......................................................................................7-46 Figure 7-25. View/Modify Recloser Form .................................................................................7-47 Figure 7-26. Delete Fuse Records Form .................................................................................7-49 Figure 7-27. Delete Relay Records Form ................................................................................7-50 Figure 7-28. Delete Recloser Records Form ...........................................................................7-51 Figure 7-29. Verify Removal of Recloser Ratings Records .....................................................7-51 Figure 7-30. Delete Recloser Curve Form ...............................................................................7-52 Figure 8-1. Figure 8-2. Figure 8-3. Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Shunt Item .........................................................8-3 Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Transformer .......................................................8-4 Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Node ..................................................................8-5
xx
List of Figures
Figure 8-4. Figure 8-5. Figure 8-6. Figure 8-7. Figure 8-8. Figure 8-9.
Harmonic Injection Property Sheet ........................................................................8-6 Harmonic Filter Property Sheet .............................................................................8-8 Analysis Options Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab ..............................................8-10 Sample Harmonics Analysis Diagram .................................................................8-11 Harmonic Plot Dialog ...........................................................................................8-12 Harmonics Toolbar ..............................................................................................8-12
Figure 8-10. Harmonic Voltage Waveform ...............................................................................8-13 Figure 8-11. Harmonic Voltage Waveform (extra detail) ..........................................................8-14 Figure 8-12. Harmonics Spectrum ...........................................................................................8-15 Figure 8-13. Impedance versus Frequency .............................................................................8-16 Figure 8-14. Nodal Impedance Plot .........................................................................................8-17 Figure 9-1. Figure 9-2. Figure 9-3. Figure 9-4. Figure 9-5. Figure 9-6. Figure 9-7. Figure 9-8. Figure 9-9. Illustration of Protection Zones ..............................................................................9-3 Default Items Tree View .....................................................................................9-8 Default Items Expanded Tree View ....................................................................9-9 Default Line Properties Sheet ..............................................................................9-10 Default Line Properties Sheet - Modifying the Construction Type .......................9-11 Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, from the Construction Dictionary .....9-12 Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, New Values for the Reliability Parameters ..............................................................................9-13 Line Property Sheet: Main Tab ............................................................................9-14 Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab, New Values for Reliability Parameters ..............9-15
Figure 9-10. Selecting a Construction Type .............................................................................9-18 Figure 9-11. DRA Tab Indicating Parameters Obtained from Dictionary .................................9-19 Figure 9-12. Static Load Property Sheet: DRA Tab .................................................................9-21 Figure 9-13. DRA Analysis Options Property Sheet ................................................................9-22 Figure 9-14. DRA Result Options ............................................................................................9-24 Figure 9-15. Example of a Simple Distribution System ............................................................9-27 Figure 9-16. Fault at Line9 .......................................................................................................9-27 Figure 9-17. Fault at Line3 .......................................................................................................9-28 Figure 9-18. Expansion of the Circuit Mainline ........................................................................9-29 Figure 9-19. DRA Results Shown with Text Labels and Color-Coding ....................................9-30 Figure 9-20. Expansion of the Circuit Mainline with Protection Added ....................................9-31 Figure 9-21. DRA Results with New Protection Device Added ................................................9-32 Figure 9-22. DRA Results with Specified Customers Served ..................................................9-33 Figure A-1. Figure A-2. Figure A-3. Figure A-4. Figure A-5. Figure B-1. Figure B-2. Figure D-1. Transformer Conversion During the Read Operation ........................................... A-9 Modeling of Three-Winding Transformer ............................................................ A-11 Induction Machine Model .................................................................................... A-19 ISO and US Transformer Types ......................................................................... A-32 Power Flow ......................................................................................................... A-33 Node Name Orientation Key ................................................................................. B-3 PSSUT Transformer Bank Connections ............................................................... B-9 Nodes ................................................................................................................... D-1
xxi
List of Figures
Figure D-2. Figure D-3. Figure D-4. Figure D-5. Figure D-6. Figure D-7. Figure D-8. Figure D-9.
Sequence Representation of a Three-Phase Source ........................................... D-3 Three-Phase Representation of Source ............................................................... D-4 Single-Phase and Three-Phase Loads ................................................................. D-6 Shunt Capacitors .................................................................................................. D-7 Phase Representation of Synchronous Machine ............................................... D-11 Sequence Representation of a Synchronous Machine ...................................... D-12 Sequence Representation of Induction Machine ................................................ D-16 Single-Phase and Three-Phase Lines ................................................................ D-18
Figure D-10. Three-Phase Switches ....................................................................................... D-19 Figure D-11. Wye-Wye Transformer with ABC Phasing .......................................................... D-26 Figure D-12. Delta-Delta Transformer with ABC Phasing ....................................................... D-27 Figure D-13. Delta-Delta Transformer with A Phasing ............................................................ D-27 Figure D-14. Wye-Delta Transformer with ABC Phasing ........................................................ D-28 Figure D-15. Wye-Delta Transformer with A Phasing ............................................................. D-28 Figure D-16. Wye-Delta +30 Transformer with ABC Phasing ................................................ D-29 Figure D-17. Delta-Wye Transformer with ABC Phasing ........................................................ D-29 Figure D-18. Wye Autotransformer with ABC Phasing ............................................................ D-30 Figure D-19. Delta Autoregulator with ABC Phasing ............................................................... D-31 Figure D-20. Delta Autoregulator with AB Phasing ................................................................. D-32 Figure D-21. Center-Tapped Delta with A Phasing ................................................................. D-35 Figure D-22. "A Phase" Center-Tapped Delta and "BC Phase" Delta-Delta in Parallel to make a Three-Phase Bank ............................................................ D-35 Figure D-23. Center-Tapped Wye with A Phasing .................................................................. D-36 Figure D-24. Center-Tapped Delta -30 with A Phasing .......................................................... D-36 Figure D-25. Z-Wye -30 Transformer with Voltage on the TO Side 30 Behind FROM Side . D-37 Figure D-26. Three-Phase Series Capacitors/Inductors .......................................................... D-52 Figure D-27. Line-to-Line Faults .............................................................................................. D-53 Figure D-28. Line-to-Ground Faults ......................................................................................... D-54 Figure D-29. Line-to-Line-to-Ground Faults ............................................................................ D-55 Figure E-1. Induction Machine Equivalent Circuit ................................................................... E-1
xxii
List of Tables
Table 2-1. Table 2-2. Table 3-1. Table 3-2. Table 3-3. Table 7-1. Table 7-2. Table 7-3. Table 7-4. Table 7-5. Table 7-6. Table 7-7. Table 7-8. Table 7-9. Table 7-10. Table 7-11. Table 7-12. Table 7-13. Table 9-1. Table 9-2. Table 9-3. Table A-1. Table A-2. Table A-3. Table A-4. Table A-5. Table A-6. Table A-7. Table A-8. Table A-9. Table B-1. Table B-2. Table B-3. Iteration Order of Nodes .......................................................................................2-16 Iteration Order of Branches ..................................................................................2-17 Device Rephasing Starting from ABC for All Devices but Wye-Delta and Delta-Wye Transformers................................3-99 Changes to Delta-Wye Transformers .................................................................3-100 Changes to Wye-Delta Transformers .................................................................3-100 Transformer Categories Minimum Nameplate kVA .....................................................................................7-14 Transformer Damage Curve Points......................................................................7-15 ANSI Factors ........................................................................................................7-15 Recommended Conductor Temperatures ............................................................7-18 Fuse Table............................................................................................................7-32 Fuse Catalog Table ..............................................................................................7-33 Fuse Curve Table .................................................................................................7-34 Relay Table ..........................................................................................................7-35 Relay Catalog Table .............................................................................................7-36 Relay Curve..........................................................................................................7-37 RecloserMfrSpecs ................................................................................................7-38 RecloserRatings Table .........................................................................................7-39 RecloserTCCCurve Table ....................................................................................7-40 Data Item Requirements for DRA...........................................................................9-7 Sample Reliability Data ..........................................................................................9-7 Construction Type Mapping..................................................................................9-17 PSS/ADEPT Transformer Types ........................................................................... A-2 Conversion of Transformers from PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT .......... A-6 PSS/U Transformer/Phasing That Will Be Changed After PSS/ADEPT Read Operation on Raw Data File......................................................................... A-9 Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Calculation Results .................................... A-16 ............................................................................................................................. A-20 ............................................................................................................................. A-21 ............................................................................................................................. A-22 ............................................................................................................................. A-24 ............................................................................................................................. A-25 System Parameters ............................................................................................... B-2 Node Data ............................................................................................................. B-3 Source Data........................................................................................................... B-3
Table A-10. PSS/U Dictionary................................................................................................. A-29
Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc. Power Technologies International
xxiii
List of Figures
Table B-4. Table B-5. Table B-6. Table B-7. Table B-8. Table B-9.
Line or Cable Data................................................................................................. B-4 Switch Data ........................................................................................................... B-5 Tie Switch Data ..................................................................................................... B-5 Series Capacitor or Series Reactor Data .............................................................. B-6 Transformer Data .................................................................................................. B-7 Transformer Tap Changing Data Section.............................................................. B-7
Table B-10. PSS/U Transformer Types .................................................................................... B-8 Table B-11. Load Categories .................................................................................................. B-10 Table B-12. kW, kvar Load - Unbalanced (types 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13) ...................................... B-11 Table B-13. kW, kvar Load - Balanced (types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33) .................................... B-12 Table B-14. Asynchronous Machine Load (types 51-90, 151-190)......................................... B-12 Table B-15. Synchronous Machine Load (types 91-99, 191-199)........................................... B-13 Table B-16. MWh Load Data - Unbalanced (types 5, 6, 15, 16) ............................................. B-13 Table B-17. MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36) ............................................. B-14 Table B-18. Fixed Capacitors or Switched Capacitors Data ................................................... B-15 Table B-19. Basic Data Record............................................................................................... B-16 Table B-20. Two-Phase Data Record ..................................................................................... B-17 Table B-21. One-Phase Data Records ................................................................................... B-17 Table B-22. Rating Data Record ............................................................................................. B-17 Table B-23. Reliability Data Record ........................................................................................ B-18 Table E-1. Table F-1. Table F-2. Table F-3. Table F-4. Table F-5. Table F-6. Table F-7. Table F-8. Table F-9. Table F-10. Table F-11. Table F-12. Table F-13. Table F-14. Table F-15. Table F-16. Table F-17. Table F-18. Table F-19. Table F-20. Table F-21. Impedance Values for NEMA Machines................................................................ E-2 Network Properties: System .................................................................................. F-1 Network Properties: Reliability............................................................................... F-2 Node Properties..................................................................................................... F-3 Lines/Cables Properties ........................................................................................ F-4 Transformer Properties: General........................................................................... F-5 Transformer Properties: Tap Control..................................................................... F-7 Transformer Properties: Regulation ...................................................................... F-8 Load Properties: Rectangular Representation ...................................................... F-9 Load Properties: Polar Representation ............................................................... F-10 MWh Load Properties.......................................................................................... F-11 Source Properties................................................................................................ F-13 Induction Machines: General............................................................................... F-14 Induction Machines: Impedances ........................................................................ F-15 Induction Machines: Start-Up .............................................................................. F-15 Synchronous Machines: General ........................................................................ F-16 Synchronous Machines: Impedances.................................................................. F-18 Synchronous Machines: Start-Up........................................................................ F-19 Shunt Capacitor Properties ................................................................................. F-20 Switch Properties................................................................................................. F-22 Series Capacitors/Reactors Properties ............................................................... F-23 Fault Properties ................................................................................................... F-24
xxiv
List of Figures
Table F-22. Table F-23. Table F-24. Table F-25. Table F-26. Table F-27. Table F-28. Table F-29. Table F-30. Table F-31. Table F-32. Table F-33. Table G-1. Table G-2. Table G-3. Table G-4. Table G-5. Table G-6. Table G-7. Table G-8. Table G-9.
Protection Equipment Properties......................................................................... F-25 Fuses: General .................................................................................................... F-26 Fuses: Plot Options ............................................................................................. F-26 Over Current Relays: General ............................................................................. F-27 Over Current Relays: Plot Options ...................................................................... F-28 Transformer Damage Curves: General ............................................................... F-29 Transformer Damage Curve: Plot Options .......................................................... F-30 Conductor/Cable Damage Curve: General.......................................................... F-31 Conductor/Cable Damage Curve: Plot Options................................................... F-32 Reclosers: General.............................................................................................. F-33 Reclosers: Plot Options ....................................................................................... F-33 Machines: General .............................................................................................. F-34 Branch Results ......................................................................................................G-1 Capacitor Placement Optimization Results ...........................................................G-4 Capacitor Placement Optimization Summary........................................................G-4 Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule ........................................G-5 Capacitor Properties..............................................................................................G-5 Device Groups.......................................................................................................G-6 Device Limits .........................................................................................................G-6 Fault All Current.....................................................................................................G-7 Induction Machine Properties ................................................................................G-8
Table G-10. Line/Cable Properties ............................................................................................G-9 Table G-11. Load Flow Summary............................................................................................ G-10 Table G-12. Load Properties ................................................................................................... G-11 Table G-13. Load Snapshots................................................................................................... G-12 Table G-14. Network Economics............................................................................................. G-12 Table G-15. Node Properties................................................................................................... G-13 Table G-16. Node Results .......................................................................................................G-13 Table G-17. Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties ................................................................... G-15 Table G-18. Shunt Status ........................................................................................................G-16 Table G-19. Source Properties................................................................................................ G-18 Table G-20. Standard Fault Properties.................................................................................... G-19 Table G-21. Static Load Summary ..........................................................................................G-19 Table G-22. MWh Load Summary........................................................................................... G-20 Table G-23. Switch Properties................................................................................................. G-21 Table G-24. Synchronous Machine Properties........................................................................ G-22 Table G-25. System Totals...................................................................................................... G-23 Table G-26. Tie Open Point Optimization Results................................................................... G-24 Table G-27. Titles and Comments........................................................................................... G-25 Table G-28. Transformer Properties........................................................................................ G-25 Table G-29. Voltage Levels ..................................................................................................... G-28 Table G-30. Distribution Reliability Analysis Results............................................................... G-28
xxv
xxvi
Chapter 1
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
1.1 About the PSS/ADEPT Application
The Power System Simulator/Advanced Distribution Engineering Productivity Tool (PSS/ADEPT) software was developed for engineers and technical personnel who design and/or analyze electrical distribution systems. PSS/ADEPT enables you to graphically create, edit, and analyze power system models and diagrams. PSS/ADEPT is available in stand-alone and network configurations for Microsoft Windows 2000 and Windows XP. Compatibility with PSS/U (Power System Simulator for Utilization) is provided through raw data files and an associated Construction Dictionary. PSS/ADEPT is the next generation of the PSS/U product line.
1.1.1 Application Capabilities

PSS/ADEPT offers a full spectrum of design and analysis capabilities. Using PSS/ADEPT, you can: Create and modify power network models graphically. Perform engineering analyses using multiple sources and unlimited nodes. Display the results of engineering analyses on the network diagram. Obtain output reports that display the results of a previously solved engineering analysis. Define and update single and multiple system component data via property sheets.
1.1.2 Optional Features

Several optional features are not included in the base PSS/ADEPT application package, but may be purchased at any point after installation. Optional features include: Tie Open Point Optimization: Finds the minimum loss configuration for a three-phase radial system. For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.8. Optimal Capacitor Placement: Places fixed and switched three-phase capacitor banks of specified size to minimize system losses. For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.7. Line Properties Calculator: Calculates transmission line constants. For more information, refer to Chapter 6. Protection and Coordination: Performs a coordination study on a given network. For more information, refer to Chapter 7. 1-1
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5 Getting Help
PSS/APEPT-5.2 Users Manual
Harmonics: Performs harmonic analysis on a given network. For more information, refer to Chapter 8. Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA): Performs reliability analysis. For more information, refer to Chapter 9.
1.2 Getting Help

Help for the PSS/ADEPT application is available in several forms: Printed manual or CD Online context-sensitive help Siemens PTI Customer Support
1.2.1 Using This Documentation

This users manual is structured to help you learn to build an electrical distribution network, beginning with the basics (how to add a node/shunt/branch), and progressing to the analysis features of PSS/ADEPT. A network building exercise will give you hands-on practice using the PSS/ADEPT software. For PSS/ADEPT, this documentation is also available on CD in Adobe Acrobat Reader format (*.pdf files). Use the online manuals for quick intermanual references using the hypertext link feature and for printing reference material. To view the CD documentation, place the CD in the CD-ROM drive. The readme.txt file has information on installing the Adobe Acrobat reader and accessing the CD documentation. Conventions used in this documentation (and in the CD version) include: bold italic text denotes a menu option the user must select, or a button the user must click. Examples: Choose File>Open from the Main Menu. Click the Open button on the File Toolbar. Italic text is used to emphasize a word or phrase. Indicates additional information of interest. "Click" is a user instruction to click the left mouse button. "Double-click" is a user instruction to click twice the left mouse button. "Right-click" is a user instruction to click the right mouse button. Abbreviations for engineering units used throughout this user manual include: pu: per unit pf: power factor, leading/lagging S: apparent power (kVA) P: real power (kW) Q: reactive power (kvar) 1-2 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
1.2.2 Using the Online Help

PSS/ADEPT provides context-sensitive online help while you are working in the application. Related topics are "hot-linked" for quick access. To access PSS/ADEPT Help: 1. Choose Help>Help Topics from the Main Menu. The Help Topics window displays. 2. To locate the help topic you want, click the Contents tab to display a hierarchical list of topic headings from which you may select or click the Index tab to look up topics alphabetically or click the Find tab to perform a word search. 3. Follow the online instructions to navigate to and display the help topic you want. 4. To return to the PSS/ADEPT application and close the Help Topics window, press the Esc key. To access Help for a dialog or property sheet in which you are working, press the F1 key or click the Help button (if available). The appropriate help topic will display. To view PSS/ADEPT version information (including a list of required DLLs), choose Help>About PSS/ADEPT from the Main Menu or click the Help button on the standard Windows Toolbar.
1.2.3 Contacting Siemens PTI for Support

The PSS/ADEPT documentation will assist you with the installation and use of the application. If after consulting the documentation and online help you need more information, you may contact Siemens PTI by any of the following methods: Send e-mail for technical support to: pti-adept-support.ptd@siemens.com. Fax to: (518) 346-2777. For telephone support between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. Eastern Time Monday through Friday, call (518) 395-5075. Siemens PTI Web Site: http://www.pti-us.com.
1-3
1.2.4 Submitting Bug Reports and Feature Requests

Included in PSS/ADEPT is a feedback tool that you may use to report bugs, request an enhancement, or request technical support assistance. This feedback tool is called SoloBug. You can directly access SoloBug from the Main Menu under Help>Report a problem Once you have selected this option the SoloBug report a bug or feature request window displays (Figure 1-1).
Figure 1-1. Report a Bug or Feature Request Window At this point, you will be asked to enter personal information such as your name, your company name, your e-mail address and your phone and fax numbers. Next, you will be asked for your computer configuration such as the operating system you have and other information regarding your hardware setup. After you have specified all of the information above to the best of your knowledge, you are now ready to enter a bug or feature request. In the case of a bug report, you may enter a description of the problem and how to reproduce it. If you desire, you may also attach a file containing an example of the problem that our technical support services can use to help diagnose whether the problem is in fact a bug. If you are submitting a feature request, use the description area to describe what enhancement you would like us to consider implementing in future releases. In addition, make sure that you specify a summary of the problem or feature, the product name that you are using, the type of problem, the severity of the problem, and the version number of the application that you are currently using. The version number of the application may be found in the About box by selecting Help>About PSS/ADEPT. When you have finished entering the information, save the bug/feature report to a SoloBug file (*.sbg). The next step is to e-mail this.sbg file to the following address: pti-adeptsupport.ptd@siemens.com. Once we receive the e-mail message, you will be automatically logged into our technical support database. This is the fastest and most convenient way for you to submit problems and feature requests into our technical support queue. For further information regarding SoloBug, including more documentation on how you can use SoloBug to report bugs and request features, look for the SoloBug help file under your PSS/ADEPT installation under the short cut labeled SoloBug Help. You may also access the SoloBug executable from outside the application by using the short cut labeled SoloBug.
1-4
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5 Installing and Using PSS/ADEPT
1.3 Installing and Using PSS/ADEPT

You can install PSS/ADEPT on your stand-alone PC for single-user access, or on a network drive for multiuser access. For information on installing PSS/ADEPT on your PC or on the network, and on hardware and software requirements, refer to the Installation Guide. Yo u m u s t h a v e a n u n d e r s ta n d i n g o f b a s i c M S W i n d o w s c o n c e p ts ( f o r e x a m p l e , windows/dialogs/menus/toolbars/scroll bars/etc., navigating with the mouse, open/save/close files, select files/text, cut/copy/paste, etc.) to use the PSS/ADEPT application successfully. If you are not familiar with MS Windows, check locally (schools, libraries, computer stores, etc.) to find an introductory class that covers: starting and exiting MS Windows; the screen, common icons, and scroll bars; opening, saving, and closing files; switching between windows; using the keyboard; using the mouse to select and drag objects; etc. Alternatively, check your local library or bookstore for books on MS Windows. New users should begin by reading Chapter 2, Creating a Network Model, and Chapter 3, Editing a Network Model, and reviewing the sample files provided with your PSS/ADEPT installation. The sample files are located in the ...\Example subdirectory. The default path for the sample files is: \Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Example. Converting/updating users should refer to AppendixA, Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT for information on importing existing PSS/U networks into PSS/ADEPT, and exporting PSS/ADEPT networks to PSS/U. Starting PSS/ADEPT To start the PSS/ADEPT application, select Start>Programs>PSS-ADEPT 5.0>PSS-ADEPT. A blank diagram displays. If you want to display an existing network diagram, choose File>Open from the Main Menu or, click the Open button on the File Toolbar, and select the filename. Exiting PSS/ADEPT To exit the PSS/ADEPT application, choose File>Exit from the Main Menu. If you have not yet saved your system data, the program will prompt you to save before exiting.
1-5
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5 The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
1.4 The PSS/ADEPT Application Window

The PSS/ADEPT application window contains several main elements: Views containing application processing information, graphical and tree representations of your network. A Status Bar that displays program status information while PSS/ADEPT is running. A Main Menu that provides access to all PSS/ADEPT functions. Toolbars that provide quick access to PSS/ADEPT functions.
1.4.1 Views
The PSS/ADEPT application window contains four views (Figure 1-2): Diagram View (always displays) Equipment List View (you may hide the view) Progress View (you may hide the view) Report Preview (displays when you request a report of analysis results)
Equipment List View Diagram View
Progress View
Figure 1-2. PSS/ADEPT Application Window Views Each view displays certain information about the data contents and/or operation of the PSS/ADEPT application. All views except the Report Preview have a pop-up menu that provides quick access to additional features.
1-6
The Diagram View is the main view in the PSS/ADEPT application window. It displays whenever you are using PSS/ADEPT (for example, whenever you open an existing diagram or create a new one). The Report Preview displays only when you have requested a report. You can toggle on and off (show or hide) the display of the Equipment List and Progress Views. To set the display of the Equipment List and/or Progress Views: 1. Choose View from the Main Menu. The drop-down View Menu displays (Figure 1-3).
Figure 1-3. View Drop-Down Menu 2. Click in the box that precedes Equipment List and/or Progress View. A check mark in front of the option indicates that the view will display in the application window. An empty box indicates that the view will not show in the application window. In the Equipment List or Progress View, you may also right-click and then click the Hide option to hide the view. The Diagram View The Diagram View displays a graphical representation of the network power system. You create and modify a network model in the Diagram View by selecting the network symbols from the item toolbar and placing them on the diagram. Additionally, you can view analysis results in the Diagram View. The Diagram View pop-up menu (Figure 1-4) provides access to additional editing functions available only in the Diagram View. Right-click anywhere in the diagram to view this menu. "Grayed" options are not available for use, usually because an item has not been selected before the pop-up menu displays. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.
1-7
Figure 1-4. Diagram View Pop-Up Menu Cut: Cut current selection (network and diagram items) to an internal clipboard used only by PSS/ADEPT. Copy: Copy current selection (network and diagram items) to an internal clipboard used only by PSS/ADEPT. Copy to Clipboard: Copies entire image of the current view to the Windows clipboard. The copied image can then be pasted into other Windows applications, Word for example. Paste: Paste the contents of the clipboard. Delete: Delete a selected device. A device may be deleted only when all devices connected to it have been removed. For example, to delete a node, you must delete all branches and shunt items connected to it first. Undo: Undo the previous editing action (item creation, deletion, cut/paste, relink, relocation, zoom/pan). The number of levels of undo can be specified in the Program Settings dialog. Select All: Select all items in the diagram.
1-8
Toggle: Specify to toggle hidden items, show items, or hide items. In-service: Indicate item is in-service or out-of-service. Autoposition: Indicate autoposition option is on or off for the selected item.
Add Items to: Group: Add selected item to a group. Layer: Add selected item to a layer. Load Category: Add selected item to a load category. Motor Starting: Add selected item to motor starting analysis. CAPO: Add selected item to capacitor optimization analysis.
Z order: Send to Front: Renders selected diagram component on "top" of all other components within its layer. Send to Back: Renders selected diagram component on the "bottom" of all other components within its layer. Center: Centers the selected items in the diagram.
Re-phase: Selects re-phasing analysis on the selected branch. Properties...: Display the property sheet for the selected device. Load Flow: Perform load flow analysis. Fault: Perform fault analysis. Motor Starting: Perform motor starting analysis. Diagram Properties...: Display Diagram Properties sheet. Lock Diagram: Disables editing operations such as item creation, relocation, or deletion. Print...: Print a hard copy of the diagram. The Equipment List View Within the Equipment List View (Figure 1-5), the Network tab provides a hierarchical display of each major type of network item nodes, branches, and shunts. Additionally, there are different types of branches and shunt devices that may be specified in the network diagram: Branches may contain lines/cables, switches, transformers, and series capacitors. Branches may also contain protection equipment packs, which define protective devices. Shunt devices may contain capacitors, machines, static loads, MWh loads, harmonics injections, harmonic filters, and standard faults. Defaults contain the default properties for node, branch and shunt devices. Default properties are used when a new device is placed on the diagram.
1-9
Figure 1-5. Equipment List View Each network item in the Equipment List View has its own icon that is the same as the symbol used to represent the item in the Diagram View. Notice the + and symbols in front of each network item type. Click the + symbol to expand the tree display; and click the symbol to collapse the tree display. For example: Click the + symbol in front of Nodes to display a list of each individual horizontal/vertical/point node in the diagram. Click the to collapse the view to its original state. Click the + symbol in front of Sources to display a list of individual sources. Click the symbol in front of Sources to collapse the tree.
If an individual network item symbol is "grayed" in the tree hierarchy, the item is not in service. If there is no symbol in front of the item, it is not drawn on the diagram. This situation commonly arises when there are nodes in a PSS/U raw data file with x- and y-coordinates at (0,0). The item will display in the Equipment List View as [ ], indicating an undrawn device. This item can be drawn by right-clicking on the item and selecting Draw Item(s) from the pop-up menu.
1-10
The Equipment List pop-up menu provides access to additional features, depending on your current level and position in the Equipment List View. For example: 1. Right-click on Network to position at the network level and display the Equipment List Views pop-up menu (Figure 1-6). Here you can dock or hide the Equipment List View, and access the Network Property sheet. ("Grayed" menu options are not available at the Network level.)
Figure 1-6. Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu
1-11
2. Right-click on Static Loads to position at the type level and display the Equipment List Views pop-up menu (Figure 1-7). Here you can dock or hide the Equipment List View, sort the individual static load items, and toggle the display of the item node connections: FROM/TO for branches and node location for shunts, or device names. ("Grayed" menu options are not available at this level.) For example:
Figure 1-7. Expanded Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu
1-12
3. Expand the static load type level and right-click on first individual network item to display the Equipment List Views pop-up menu (Figure 1-8). Here you can dock or hide the Equipment List View, sort the individual items, toggle the display of the item node connections: FROM/TO for branches and node location for shunts, or device names, delete the item, zoom to the item on the diagram, and adjust the properties for the item. For example:
Figure 1-8. Individual Item Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu Docking, hiding, sorting, adjusting the PSS/ADEPT display, etc., are all described further in Chapter 2, Section 2.1. A check mark in front of an option in the Equipment List View pop-up menu indicates that the option is active. Although the Cut, Copy, and Paste operations affect both the Equipment List View and the Diagram View, these operations may only be performed from the Diagram View. Hence, these operations are not available in the Equipment List View pop-up menu. The Results tab is used to set what results, if any, should be displayed on the diagram. For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.3.
1-13
The Progress View The Progress View (Figure 1-9) displays messages during program activities. These messages may be error or warning messages about a selected activity, or informational messages about the progress of certain analysis activities. The Progress View also displays detailed convergence monitors that show the progress of load flow, short circuit, and motor starting solutions.
Figure 1-9. Progress View The Progress View pop-up menu (Figure 1-10) provides access to additional features such as docking and hiding the Progress View; floating the Progress View in a miniwindow on the main Diagram View; and printing, copying, and clearing the contents of the Progress View. Right-click to display the Progress View pop-up menu.
Figure 1-10. Progress View Pop-Up Menu Allow Docking: Allows view to be anchored at the edge of any application window. Hide: Hides the window. Copy: Copies selection to the Windows clipboard. Clear: Clears the view. Print...: Prints the selection to the printer. Float In Main Window: Floats the Progress window in the main application window.
1-14
These features are covered further in Chapter 2, Section 2.1.
The Report Preview The Report Preview window (Figure 1-11) displays an output report in print preview format. From this window, you may generate printed output by selecting File>Print, or by clicking the Printer button.
First Page Previous Page Next Page Last Page Print Zoom Level Export
Figure 1-11. Report Preview Window The Report Preview window has its own menu. Reports may be viewed on the screen, printed to a printer, or exported to a variety of formats. For more information on all of these features, refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.1.
1-15
1.4.2 The Status Bar

The Status Bar displays explanatory text while you are using PSS/ADEPT. For example, when you are pointing to a toolbar button or menu option, the button or option name displays in the Status Bar. The Status Bar also identifies the last engineering analysis that was performed. For example, if you just performed a load flow analysis, the Status Bar will display "Load Flow". If you select another analysis, the Status Bar will be updated accordingly. The Status Bar displays the phase at which the results are displayed and the units on the diagram. Refer to Figure 1-12 to view a sample Status Bar after a load flow analysis has been performed. Notice that the display is set to report results on the diagram at Phase A. Voltage units are pu; power units are kW, kvar.
Figure 1-12. Application View After a Load Flow Analysis
1-16
1.4.3 The Main Menu

PSS/ADEPT uses menus to provide access to additional application functions. The Diagram, Equipment List, and Progress Views all share the same Main Menu, but have individual drop-down menus. The Report Preview window has its own menu bar. To see an illustration of individual menu bars, click on a report window, then click on the diagram window (notice that the Main Menu is different when the active window has changed). Pop-up menus are further described in this manual under the views for which they apply. The Main Menu also showing available toolbars is shown in Figure 1-13.
Main Menu File Toolbar Diagram Toolbar Results Toolbar
Harmonics Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar
Zoom Toolbar
Reports Toolbar
Figure 1-13. Main Menu and Available Toolbars To access a drop-down menu, click any Main Menu option. File Menu The File Menu provides options for creating new files, opening existing files, and saving and closing files. Recently opened workspaces are also listed for quick access. Use the menu to print the diagram, preview the diagram before you print it, and adjust the printer settings. The File Menu also contains the Workspace Manager and Program Settings options that enable you to set your workspace, specify pathnames for file locations, and other program preferences. Edit Menu The Edit Menu provides options for editing the network diagrams (e.g., cut/copy/paste/delete), editing the network using a spreadsheet format, and selecting items in the diagram (e.g., All, Tree, Nodes, Groups). View Menu The View Menu provides options that allow you to display or hide the Equipment List and Progress Views, the Status Bar, and any of the available toolbars (Main Menu, File, Item, Analysis, and View). The View Menu is also used for toolbar customization and zooming the diagram. Diagram Menu The Diagram Menu provides options for importing and exporting .bmp, .jpg, .gif, and .png type files. This menu also provides mechanisms for showing and hiding items, defining layers, and adjusting coordinates. Additionally, options for the diagram such as font size and color coding are provided on this menu. Network Menu The Network Menu provides options that allow you to modify network properties such as system base kVA, the default node base voltage, and reliability information. The Network Menu provides
1-17
functions for defining device groups, load categories, and load snapshots. Load scaling, machine scaling, economic parameters, and network tracing preferences are also defined here. Analysis Menu The Analysis Menu options allow you to perform analysis functions and set solution options. Report Menu The Report Menu options allow you to select from several available reports. Some reports cannot be selected unless a solution was previously performed. For more information about the Report Menu, refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.1. Tools Menu The Tools Menu allows you to access the Line Constants module. Window Menu The Window Menu options allow you to control the placement of windows in the application. New instances of diagram windows may be created and multiple windows may be cascaded or tiled. Windows that have been previously iconized (minimized) may be arranged by choosing Arrange Icons. Help Menu The Help Menu options provide access to the online help and general information about the application, including the names and versions of static and dynamic link libraries (LIBS, and DLLs) used by the application.
1.4.4 Toolbars
The PSS/ADEPT application has seven toolbars: File Diagram Analysis Zoom Results Reports Harmonics (if licensed for this option)
Each toolbar contains buttons that provide quick access to PSS/ADEPT functions. As you move the pointer over a button on the toolbar, a "tooltip" text box will appear that describes the function of the button (Figure 1-14). The Status Bar also displays explanatory text about the toolbar button. PSS/ADEPTs default setting displays all of the toolbars.
1-18
Tooltip
Figure 1-14. Network Diagram with Tooltips Additionally, you can move a toolbar to another location on the screen, create a new toolbar, hide one or all of the toolbars, and copy a button from one toolbar to another, reset the buttons on a standard Siemens PTI toolbar, and delete a toolbar.
1-19
To select the toolbars you want to show on your screen: 1. Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays (Figure 1-15).
Figure 1-15. Customize Dialog: Toolbars Tab 2. Click the Toolbars tab. 3. Click in the box that precedes the Main Menu, File, Diagram, Analysis, Zoom, Results, and/or Reports toolbar options. A check mark in front of the toolbar indicates that it will display in the application window; an empty box indicates that the toolbar will not display. 4. Adjust the display of your toolbars by doing any one or all of the following: To turn off the tooltips display: Click the Show Tooltips box (remove the check mark). To display borders around the toolbar buttons: Click the Cool Look box (remove the check mark). To increase the size of the buttons on the toolbar: Click the Large Buttons box (a check mark will be placed). 5. Click the OK button to accept the changes. To move a toolbar to another part of the screen: 1. Left-click on the || (at the left side of the toolbar), and hold down the mouse button. 2. Drag the toolbar to its new location and release the mouse button.
1-20
To create a toolbar: 1. Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays. 2. Click the Toolbars tab. 3. Click the New button. The New Toolbar box displays. 4. Type the name of your toolbar in the Toolbar name field, and click the OK button. Your toolbar displays in the Toolbar tab. 5. Click the Commands tab. 6. In the Categories column, click on a toolbar category. The buttons associated with the toolbar display in the Buttons column. 7. Left-click on a button in the Button column and hold down the mouse button. 8. Drag the button out of the column to the new toolbar and release the mouse. The system adds the button to your new toolbar. 9. Repeat Step 8 to add icons to your toolbar. 10. Click the OK button to save the new toolbar. To hide a toolbar, do one of the following: Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays. Click the Toolbars tab. Click in the box that precedes the name of the toolbar you want to hide until the box is empty. An unchecked box indicates that the toolbar will not show in the application window. Right-click anywhere in the toolbar area. A pop-up menu appears, select each toolbar to show or hide. No checkmark before the name of the toolbar indicates that the toolbar will not show in the application window.
To copy a button from one toolbar to another toolbar: 1. Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays. 2. Click the Commands tab. 3. Click on a toolbar category. The buttons associated with the toolbar display at the right of the box. 4. Click a button in the box and hold down the mouse button. 5. Drag the button out of the box to the toolbar in which you want to place it, and release the mouse button. The system adds the button to the toolbar. You cannot add to or rearrange the options on the Main Menu.
1-21
To reset any of the Siemens PTI toolbars (File, Diagram, Analysis, Zoom) to their original buttons: 1. Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays. 2. Click the Toolbars tab. 3. Make sure theres a check mark in the box preceding the toolbar you want to reset. 4. Click the Reset button. 5. Click the OK button. To delete a button from a toolbar: 1. On the toolbar, click the button you want to delete and hold down the mouse button. 2. Drag the button off the toolbar area. To save your toolbar configuration: 1. Choose File>Workspace>Save. The Save Workspace dialog displays (Figure 1-16).
New (Insert)
Figure 1-16. Save Workspace Dialog 2. Click the New (Insert) button and enter a name for your workspace. 3. Click the Help button. The Workspace Manager window prompts you to save the new workspace. 4. Click the Save button to save the workspace.
1-22
File Toolbar The File Toolbar (Figure 1-17) provides basic file operations such as creating, opening, and saving both PSS/U raw data (*.dat) and native PSS/ADEPT binary files (*.adp). Basic MS Windows editing functionality such as cut, copy, paste, delete, and printing are also located on the File Toolbar. The About button provides information on the PSS/ADEPT version you are using.
New Open Save
Print
Print Preview
Toggle Network View
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete Undo
About
Toggle Progress View
Figure 1-17. File Toolbar Diagram Toolbar The Diagram Toolbar (Figure 1-18) consists of the Select button and the symbol buttons for all of the network items you can model using the PSS/ADEPT application. Using the Diagram Toolbar, you can easily and quickly select the item you want and drag it into position on your diagram. Refer to Chapter 2 for more information on adding items to the network diagram. Use the Select button to select (not place) an item in the Diagram View. When you click the Select button on the Diagram Toolbar, any symbol previously selected on the toolbar will no longer be active. Use a Symbol button to add a specific device a node, branch, or shunt to your network diagram. When you click any symbol button, any previously selected symbol or selected item will no longer be active. The Text Annotation button allows you to place text anywhere in the diagram. Click the Text Annotation button, move the pointer to the place on the diagram where you want to add your own comments, and click. The word "Annotation" displays on the screen. Double-click on the word "Annotation" to display the Annotation box and enter your own text. Click the OK button to save your comments and display them in the diagram.
Protection Text Equipment Annotations Harmonic Injection
Show/Hide Select Show Grid Grid Snap
Transformer Load
Source
Show Results Line Switch
Synchronous Machine
Rotate Rotate +90
Horizontal Node Rotate -90
Vertical Node
Point Node
Capacitor MWh Load Standard Fault
Harmonic Filter Knee Point
Series Capacitor/ Induction Reactor Machine
Figure 1-18. Diagram Toolbar
1-23
If you are using US or ISO transformer symbols on your diagram, make sure the PSS/ADEPT program settings are set to display the symbols correctly. To check the program settings and, if necessary, adjust the symbol display: 1. Choose File>Program Settings from the Main Menu. The Program Settings dialog displays (Figure 1-19).
Figure 1-19. Program Settings Dialog 2. In the Transformer symbol type field, select US if you are using US transformer symbols in your diagram or select ISO if you are using ISO transformer symbols in your diagram. 3. Exit and restart the application to update the toolbar.
1-24
Analysis Toolbar The Analysis Toolbar (Figure 1-20) provides access to functions on the network. Each analysis type has its own set of analysis and result display options. Load Flow Calculation: Perform steady state power flow solution. Flat Transformers: Command sets all transformer taps to 1.0 pu. If the transformer tap range does not include 1.0, then the tap is set as close to 1.0 pu as possible. Fault Calculation: Perform short circuit calculations on each node where a fault has been specified. Fault All: Perform short circuit calculations on all nodes using selected fault types. Toggle Fault Status: Toggle (in or out) the standard fault device status. Clear Faults: Delete standard fault devices from the network. Motor Starting Calculation: Perform motor starting calculation using selected motors to start. CAPO Analysis: Perform capacitor placement optimization. TOPO Analysis: Perform tie open point optimization. DRA Analysis: Perform distribution reliability analysis. Harmonics Calculation: Perform harmonics analysis. Coordination: Perform protection device coordination analysis. Load Snapshots: Define "pictures" of load data that may be optionally chosen to use in an analysis activity. See Chapter 3, Section 3.11. Analysis Options: Show analysis options dialog. Network Validation: When selected, checks the network for unusual circumstances. See Chapter 4, Section 4.2.2.
Motor Start CAPO TOPO Load Snapshots Analysis Options
Flat Transformers Flat Capacitors
Fault Calculation Load Flow
Fault All
Toggle Fault Status
Clear Faults
DRA
Coordination
Harmonics
Network Validation
Figure 1-20. Analysis Toolbar
1-25
Zoom Toolbar The Zoom Toolbar (Figure 1-21) consists of control buttons that allow you to set zoom areas of your network diagram and set other diagram properties such as color selection and font selection.
Pan
Zoom Previous
Zoom 100%
Zoom Extent
Zoom In
Zoom Area Zoom Out Diagram Properties
Figure 1-21. Zoom Toolbar Results Toolbar The Results Toolbar (Figure 1-22) allows you to customize the result display on the diagram. Show Phase A: Show results for Phase A. Show Phase B: Show results for Phase B. Show Phase C: Show results for Phase C. Show Max (A, B, C): Show results as the maximum of A, B, C phases. Show Min (A, B, C): Show results as the minimum of A, B, C phases.
Show Max (A, B, C)
Show Phase A
Show Phase C Show Phase B Show Min (A, B, C)
Figure 1-22. Results Toolbar
1-26
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5 Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties
Reports Toolbar The Reports Toolbar (Figure 1-23) allows you to view a report following an analysis. Branch Current by Phase: Show text report of branch current by phase. Node Voltage by Phase: Show text report of node voltage by phase. Power Flow Details: Show text report of power flow details. Power Flow Summary: Show text report of power flow summary. Branch Power Losses: Show text report of branch power losses. Input List: Show text report of input data list. Voltage Profile: Show text report of voltage profile.
Power Flow Summary Input List
Branch Current by Phase
Power Flow Details
Voltage Profile
Node Voltage Branch by Phase Power Losses
Figure 1-23. Reports Toolbar
1.5 Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties

You can specify program properties so that each time you start PSS/ADEPT it operates according to those program properties. Program properties are stored with your user profile and are unique for each user who logs onto your machine. You can specify the following settings for PSS/ADEPT: Input file directory path. The path where input data files are located. Select Disable to follow Standard Windows behavior. That is, use the path where the last file was accessed. Report file directory path. The path where the report files (*.rpt) are located. The default is \Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Rpt. Image file directory path. The path where the image files (*.bmp, *.jpg, etc.) are located. PSS/ADEPT Construction Dictionary path and filename. The Construction Dictionary (PTI.CON) is an ASCII file that provides data on system components such as impedance values, ratings, and reliability data for network branches such as lines, transformers, switches, and series capacitors. For switch branches, impedance values are zero, however, rating and reliability values may be specified. When the Construction Dictionary path is changed from the Program Settings dialog, a message box appears indicating that PSS/ADEPT is about to automatically update
1-27
branch item (Line, Switch, Transformer and Series Capacitor) properties that are dependent on the active Construction Dictionary. After pressing the OK button, changes to the Program Settings dialog will be committed and all branch items in the currently open document (if there is one) will be updated, along with the default Line, Switch, Transformer and Series Capacitor, which are document-independent. If a particular branch item's Construction Type is not found in the newly-selected Construction Dictionary, it will be considered user-defined; its Construction Dictionary-dependent properties will remain unchanged and will be modifiable from the item Properties dialog. If the construction dictionary path is blank, the Construction Type of every branch item, including the default items, will be considered user-defined. PSS/ADEPT uses the same Construction dictionary as PSS/U. The construction dictionary is read when the PSS/U raw data file is opened in PSS/ADEPT. If a directory path is not specified PSS/ADEPT defaults to the input file directory path. Refer to Appendix C for construction dictionary file format. Transformer symbol type (ISO or US) you want to use in your network diagrams. Coordinate scale factor for reading/writing raw data files (the scale factor by which you want to scale x,y coordinates when generating the diagram from a PSS/U raw data file). Force node names to uppercase. Select this option to force all nodes from PSS/U to uppercase. Allow duplicate node names. Used when merging files together. Selecting this option will allow duplicate nodes in both the original file and the file being merged with. Display of hidden (invisible) items in the diagram. Number of undo levels. Result position and label settings. Tooltip Preferences. Load display preferences rectangular (P + jQ) or polar (S, pf, leading/lagging) you want for your Static Load Property sheet. Restoration of last saved workspace on program start-up.
1-28
The Program Settings dialog shown in Figure 1-24 illustrates the drive location of the Construction Dictionary file.
Figure 1-24. Program Settings: Selecting a Dictionary Additionally, there are program settings for results display options and for report units. Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1, and Chapter 5, Section 5.1 for more information. To set program properties for PSS/ADEPT: 1. Choose File>Program Settings from the Main Menu. The Program Settings dialog displays. 2. Enter/select the options you want to run the PSS/ADEPT application: Working Directories: Enter/select the path to your working Input File, Image File, and Report File directories. Click the Browse button to display the Select Directory box where you can browse the local PC and/or network directory structure. The default settings are c:\Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Example (input files) and c:\Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Rpt (report files). PSS/U Raw Data: Specify the path and filenames of the PSS/ADEPT Construction Dictionary. The default Construction Dictionary path/filename is C:\Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Example\pti.con.
1-29
Coordinate scale factor for reading/writing raw data files: Enter the number by which you want to scale x,y coordinates when generating a diagram from a PSS/U raw data file. Force node names to uppercase: Will cause all node names in the raw data file to be converted to uppercase. Allow duplicate node names: Used by a file merge, selecting this option will allow duplicate nodes to be present in both the original input file and the file being merged with. Transformer Symbol Type: Select the Transformer Symbol Type: ISO or US. Undo Levels: Select the maximum number of undo operations that will be stored by the program. Show hidden items: If you want to display hidden (invisible) items in the diagram, click the Show Hidden Items check box. By default, hidden (invisible) items are not displayed in the diagram. Position branch results labels close to ends: When checked, results will be displayed at the absolute ends of the branch independent of branch length. When unchecked, results will be placed based on a fraction of the branch length. Separate node name and result labels: When checked, you can set unique font attributes for the node names and results text. When unchecked, node names and results will be displayed with the same font attributes. This option is more efficient in terms of performance especially with large network diagrams. Load Property sheet display: Click Rectangular to display load data as P(kW) and Q(kvar); or click Polar to display load data as S(kVA), pf leading/lagging. Restore last workspace at start-up: If you want to open automatically the last saved workspace on program start-up, click the Restore Last Workspace at Start-up box. Tool Tips: When checked a tooltip style popup window will be displayed when the mouse cursor is positioned over an item on the diagram. You can set the information displayed by selecting Settings... The Tooltip Settings dialog displays (Figure 1-25).
1-30
Figure 1-25. Tooltip Settings Dialog Background Color: Select the background color for the tooltip window. Text Color: Select the color of the text displayed in the tooltip window. Frame Color: Select the color of the rectangular frame drawn around the tooltip window. Item name: When checked, display the item name in the tooltip window. Nominal Voltage (base kV): When checked, display nominal voltage in the tooltip window. Applicable to nodes only. Phasing: When checked, display phasing in the tooltip window. Applicable to nodes, branches, and shunts. Phasing for a shunt item is determined by the node phasing the shunt item is connected to. Machines are assumed to be three phase (ABC) devices. Construction Type: When checked, display the construction type in the tooltip window. Applicable to branch items only. Line Length: When checked, display the line length in the tooltip window. Applicable to line/cable branches only. Sustained failure rate: When checked, display the sustained failure rate in the tooltip window. Applicable to reliability analysis and branch items only. If you are not licensed for reliability analysis, this option will be unavailable. Mean time to repair: When checked, display the mean time to repair in the tooltip window. Applicable to reliability analysis and branch items only. If you are not licensed for reliability analysis, this option will not be available.
1-31
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5 Setting Diagram View Properties
Customer Interruptions: When checked, display customer interruptions in the tooltip window. Applicable to reliability analysis and static load items only. If you are not licensed for reliability analysis, this option will not be available. Customer interruptions are available following a DRA analysis. 3. Click the OK button to save and use your program settings. These settings are automatically activated upon save and they will be used the next time you start PSS/ADEPT.
1.6 Setting Diagram View Properties

You can define the way you want the PSS/ADEPT Diagram View to look by setting Diagram View properties (refer to Figure 1-26). The properties are saved in PSS/ADEPT binary files (*.adp) but not in PSS/U raw data files (*.dat). To set Diagram View properties: 1. Choose Diagram>Properties from the Main Menu or right-click on the Diagram View and choose Diagram Properties from the pop-up menu. The Diagram View Property sheet displays.
Figure 1-26. Diagram Property Sheet
1-32
2. Click the General tab and set the layout characteristics for the Diagram View: These options may be modified at any time while the Diagram View is available by selecting the Apply button without closing the dialog. Grid (spacing and snap distance): Enter the spacing between grid lines (inches) when the grid is displayed. Enter how far away from the grid line you want before an item is snapped to it. Colors (Symbol, Text, Background, Grid, Invalid, Flow arrow): Click each Browse button and select the colors for the diagrams symbol, text (foreground), background, grid, invalid results and flow arrows. Item Labels: Click the box that precedes any label name/marker (a check mark appears) that you want to display on the diagram. Fonts: Click the Font... button and select the font you want for the item labels. Click the Apply to labels... button to select what labels to apply the selected font. You can apply a selected font to item name labels, item property labels, result labels, and annotation labels. 3. Click the Color Coding tab and select one of the color settings: You can assign colors to flag nodes that fall outside specified voltage thresholds, flag overloaded branches, unbalanced nodes and branches, branches under a power factor limit, and/or flag devices that belong to a certain group. Voltage thresholds, rating limits, power factor limits, and unbalance options are set in the Analysis Options under the General tab; refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1 for more information. To color code items by group: Select Items by Group. A different color value is assigned to each group. Colors for a specific group are specified in the Networks>Group dialog. If an item belongs to one or more groups, there is no way to ascertain which groups color is displayed. To color code items by category: Select Loads and machines by category. A different color value is assigned to each category. Colors for a specific category are specified in the Network>Load Categories dialog. If an item belongs to one or more category, there is no way to tell which groups color is displayed. To color code items by nominal voltage level: Select Items by Nominal Voltage Level. Items are color coded using defined voltage levels. To define voltage level colors, expand the Network>Voltage Levels from the Tree View and double-click on the voltage level to change its color. Voltage levels are stored in the system registry not in a .adp file. You can automatically add missing voltage levels by right-clicking on the Voltage Levels folder and selecting Populate Voltage Levels . Voltage levels can be added by right-clicking on the Voltage Levels folder and selecting Add Voltage Level. Voltage levels can be deleted by selecting the voltage level and pressing the delete [Del] key. The nominal voltage of a branch or shunt item is determined by the nominal voltage (base kV) of the node(s) to which it is connected. To color code items by result voltage level: Select Items by result voltage level. Items are color coded based on resultant voltage levels. This option requires a previous load flow solution. You can specify the color to use to highlight all network items that
1-33
are above the maximum voltage threshold (High), below the minimum voltage threshold (Low), and nodes that are in-between the maximum and minimum threshold values (Mid). Voltage thresholds are defined by selecting Analysis>Options... from the main menu. To color code unbalanced nodes and branches: Select Unbalance nodes and branches and select a color. Unbalance options are defined in Analysis>Options. Voltage unbalance can be calculated as the percent difference between maximum and minimum phase voltage, maximum and average phase voltage, or the ratio of negativesequence to positive-sequence voltage. Current unbalance can be calculated as the percent difference between maximum and average phase current, percent difference between phase and average phase current, the ratio of zero-sequence to positivesequence current, or the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence current. To color code overloaded branches: Select Overloaded Branches and select a color. Branch rating limits are specified in Analysis>Options. To color code branches under a power factor limit: Select Branches under power factor limit and select a color. Power factor limit is defined in Analysis>Options. 4. Click the Apply button to save the options you selected.
1.6.1 Setting Default Diagram Properties

Default diagram properties are saved and restored each time you exit and re-start PSS/ADEPT. These diagram properties are applied to all new diagrams and when importing a PSS/U raw data file. The PSS/ADEPT file (.adp) format contains individual diagram properties and default diagram properties will have no effect unless you explicitly apply them. To set or modify the default diagram properties, select Diagram>Default Diagram Properties...
1.6.2 Resetting Diagram Properties

Default diagram properties may be applied to an existing diagram by selecting Diagram>Properties... and clicking the Reset button. This will update all of the diagram properties to their respective default values defined in Default Diagram Properties. To update the diagram with the new values, select the Apply button.
1-34
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5 Setting Default Item Properties
1.7 Setting Default Item Properties

PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify default characteristics for each type of network item. Default characteristics are used when a new device is added to the diagram. The PSS/ADEPT application defaults are listed in Appendix F. To specify properties for each type of network item: 1. In the Tree View, double-click on Default Items to expand the item. Double-click on the item that you wish to modify (Figure 1-27).
Figure 1-27. Default Items Options
1-35
2. The Default Properties sheet of the selected device displays (as shown in Figure 1-28).
Figure 1-28. Default Node Property Sheet Most of the Default Property sheets consist of one page. However, the Default Transformer, Induction Machine, and Synchronous Machine Property sheets have multiple pages indicated by tabs. For example, the Default Transformer Property sheet (Figure 1-29) shows the General tab active.
1-36
Figure 1-29. Default Transformer Property Sheet 3. Enter/select the properties you want and click the OK button to accept them. Whenever you add an item to a new or existing network diagram, the item will reflect the default characteristics that you defined in the Default Property sheet for the new device. You may override the default properties of an individual item by directly editing the item properties. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.1 for more information.
1-37
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5 Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT
1.8 Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT

In PSS/ADEPT, you can open any of the following file types: PSS/ADEPT (*.adp) PSS/ADEPTs native binary file format that includes all the diagram options such as grid on/off, colors, results format, etc. This format does not contain analysis results. PSS/U (*.dat) PSS/U raw data file format. PSSU/Slider (*. slu) files previously created with the Slider/U application. PSS/Engines Hub File (*.dmp) files previously created with PSS/Engines.
You can save your diagrams in PSS/ADEPT (*.adp) and PSS/U (*.dat) file formats only. (Refer to Appendix A for limitations: partial diagram, no poly lines, etc.)
1.8.1 Opening Native PSS/ADEPT Files

To open an existing PSS/ADEPT file: 1. Choose File>Open from the Main Menu or click the Open button on the File Toolbar. The Open window displays, as shown in Figure 1-30.
Figure 1-30. Selecting a PSS/ADEPT File 2. Click the filename you want to open. (Look in another directory or select another file type, if necessary.) 3. Click the Open button to open the diagram. Transformer data in PSS/ADEPT native files prior to Version 5.0 of PSS/ADEPT will be converted to leakage and grounding impedance. Please see Section A.1.3.2 for more details.
1-38
1.8.2 Opening PSS/U Raw Data Files

You can import a network model in a PSS/U raw data file (i.e., x,y coordinates are not equal to zero) into PSS/ADEPT. PSS/ADEPT will create a network diagram using the node position, size information, and connection data from the raw data file. (A one-line diagram is generated using the same initial placement technique as activity DRAW in PSS/U.) Diagram data may be manipulated in exactly the same way as a native PSS/ADEPT network. Because PSS/ADEPT has graphical capabilities and solution techniques that differ from PSS/U, there are some disparities between the functionality of the two applications. These differences are explained in Appendix A. To open an existing PSS/U raw data file: 1. Choose File>Open from the Main Menu or click the Open button on the File Toolbar. The Open window displays. 2. Click once in the Files of type prompt, and click PSS/U Raw Data Files (*.dat) to display a list of PSS/U raw data files. 3. Click the filename you want to open (look in another directory, if necessary). 4. Click the Open button to open the diagram. For an example of a PSS/U raw data file, see the file Example.dat located in the \Example directory under the PSS/ADEPT installation. (The default path is \Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Example.) Transformer data in PSS/U raw data files prior to Version 5.0 of PSS/ADEPT will be converted to leakage and grounding impedance. Please see Section A.1.3.2 for more details.
1.8.3 Opening PSS/Engines Hub Files

You can import a network into PSS/ADEPT that was previously generated as a Hub (dump) file with PSS/Engines. The PSS/Engines dump file may be created any one of two ways: By using PSS/Engines built-in application program interface (API) function PSSDumpWrite, or by selecting to create a network dump file in PSS/ADEPT. A dump file can be selected by choosing Analysis Options and placing a check mark in the Create PSS/Engines hub file box. There are some disparities between the PSS/Engines dump file and its use in PSS/ADEPT, which are described in Appendix A. To open a PSS/Engines Hub File: 1. Choose File>Open from the Main Menu or click the Open button on the File toolbar. The Open window displays. 2. Click once in the Files of type prompt, and click PSS/Engine Hub File (*.dmp). 3. Click the filename you want to open (look in another directory if necessary). 4. Click the Open button to open the diagram. Transformer data in PSS/Engines Hub files prior to Version 5.0 of PSS/ADEPT will be converted to leakage and grounding impedance. Please see Section A.1.3.2 for more details.
1-39
1.8.4 Saving Files

PSS/ADEPT saves files in a native binary format (*.adp) by default. You have the option to save files back to the PSS/U raw data format (*.dat); refer to Appendix A for limitations. To save a PSS/ADEPT file, choose File>Save from the Main Menu or click the Save button on the File Toolbar to save the file in *.adp format. If the original file is a PSS/U raw data file (*.dat), the system automatically saves the file in the same *.dat format. To save a PSS/U raw data file (*.dat) in PSS/ADEPT format (*.adp): 1. Choose File>Save As from the Main Menu. 2. At the File name prompt, type a new filename. The default file extension is .adp. 3. At the File type prompt, select PSS/ADEPT files (*.adp). 4. Click the OK button to save the file.
1.8.5 Merging Files

A file merge will join two raw data files into one combined file. Before you select to merge a file, you must have a file currently open, this is referred to as the original file. The file being merged in is the file that you wish to combine with the original file to create one combined network. When merging two files together, you have the option of specifying whether to allow duplicate nodes. If you choose to allow duplicate nodes, the program will consider any duplicate node found in the file being merged in that is the end of a tie switch branch. If you choose to not allow duplicate nodes (default), the merge will not connect the two feeders if a duplicate node is found in the file being merged in. To set this option, choose File>Program Settings and place a check mark next to the Allow duplicate node names box. An example of two feeders being merged is shown below (Figure 1-31). The feeders have tie switches connected between common nodes (duplicates). The configuration after a merge is completed is also shown. The status of the tie switch (open or closed) depends on several conditions that are described below.
1-40
Figure 1-31. Merging Feeders To perform the file merge on the above feeders: 1. Open the Feeder 1 file. This is the original file. 2. Choose File>Program Settings and select whether or not to allow duplicate nodes. 3. Choose File>Merge and select the file to merge into the original case. This is the file being merged in.
1-41
1.8.5.1 Duplicate Node Names Not Allowed

If you have chosen the option to not allow duplicate node names, and there were one or more tie switches between duplicate nodes, a list containing common tie switches will be displayed to allow you to choose the tie switch that joins the two systems (Figure 1-32).
Figure 1-32. Common Tie Switch List The status of the tie switch you select will be closed. The status of the remaining common tie switch branches will be left in their original state, either open or closed, therefore, it is possible that the feeders may be connected at more than one point. If no duplicate nodes with tie switches were found between the two files, you will be notified to establish the connection manually. This message will appear in the Progress View and indicates that you need to add a new branch into the file to establish the connection between the two feeders. This new branch may be a line, switch, transformer, series capacitor/reactor, or a tie switch.
1-42
1.8.5.2 Duplicate Node Names Allowed

The usual method when merging files is to not allow duplicate node names between the original file and the file being merged in. If duplicate node names are allowed to exist, tie switches connected to the duplicate nodes are handled in the same way as when duplicate node names are not allowed. If there are no connecting tie switches, you will have an opportunity to add a connecting branch when the merge is complete. In this case, you can tie the two feeders together by having a common node between the original file and the file being merged in. Figure 1-33 shows an example of this. If a common node exists, the shunt items connected to the node will be taken from the file being merged into the original file.
Figure 1-33. Duplicate Node Names Allowed
1-43
1-44
Chapter 2
Creating a Network Model
2.1 Overview: Creating a Network Model
After you have defined your working environment and the properties of the electrical network you want to create (Chapter 1), you will be ready to create a graphical network model using PSS/ADEPT. In this chapter, you will learn how to: Create a new diagram. Set properties for your network model such as voltage levels, item ordering, and economic data. Add nodes, shunts, and branches. Define a group and assign items to it. Define a load category and assign loads to it. Save the network model. Print the network diagram. Adjust the display of the views in the PSS/ADEPT application window and your diagram.
PSS/ADEPT enables you to place symbols that represent the network items in a diagram. The symbols are organized into three categories:
Network Item Types Nodes Shunt devices (items connected to a node at only one end) Branches (items connected between two nodes)
Individual Items Vertical, horizontal, and point Loads, sources, induction machines, synchronous machines, capacitors, and faults Lines/cables, transformers, switches, series capacitors, and series reactors
2.2 Creating a New Diagram

By default, a blank or new diagram is displayed when you start the PSS/ADEPT application. If you have an existing diagram open on the screen and wish to create a new one, click the New button on the Menu Toolbar or choose File>New from the Main Menu. A blank diagram displays. This is where you will create your network model.
2-1
Creating a Network Model Setting Network Model Properties
2.3 Setting Network Model Properties

You can define properties for your network model, including system base kVA, input voltage flag (line-line or line-neutral), node base voltage (kV), descriptive data, and default reliability data. To set network property data: 1. Choose Network>Properties from the Main Menu or at the top of the Tree View, rightclick on the Network folder to display the pop-up menu, and choose Properties. The Network Property sheet displays (Figure 2-1). Notice that the sheet has two tabs: System and Reliability. You must have open a new or an existing data file to do this.
Figure 2-1. Network Property Sheet: System Tab 2. Under the System tab, enter/select the properties for your network model: Circuit ID: Enter a one- to eight-character name to identify the circuit. Circuit ID is currently used only by activity MERG in PSS/U. This field is provided for PSS/U raw data compatibility. See Appendix C for a description of PSS/U data formats. Peak current (A): Specify a substation peak current in amps. If you choose a peak current solution in PSS/U, the actual loads defined in the data file will be scaled to reach the substation peak current specified in this data field. The substation peak current may be set equal to zero. This field is provided for PSS/U raw data compatibility. See Appendix C for a description of PSS/U data formats. Input voltage type: Specify the voltage type for all input voltage quantities in the network as line-line (LL) or line-neutral (LN). 2-2 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
Creating a Network Model Setting Network Model Properties
Root node: Designate any node in the network as the root node. It is used to determine the ordering of report records and during the Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) analysis. the root node is used in conjunction with the specified item ordering method (Chapter 2, Section 2.10). System three-phase base kVA: Specify the system base kVA; it will be used by PSS/ADEPT as a base to calculate the source impedance and for per unit and physical value conversions. System standard base voltage (kV): Specify the base voltage in kV; it will be used to set the default node base voltage. When importing a raw data file, if no base voltage is entered in the node data field for node kV, the value specified here will be used as the node base voltage. System Frequency (Hz): Specify the system base frequency in Hz; it is not currently used in any calculations, however it can be used as a reference for specifying impedances. Comments: Enter any text you need to identify the case. The first line will be used as the report description. 3. Click the Reliability tab (Figure 2-2) to display additional prompts.
Figure 2-2. Network Property Sheet: Reliability Tab Used for PSS/U raw data file compatibility only. Although Figure 2-2 requests information in hours and years, any unit of time and length can be used as long as it is consistent. Units of time or length cannot be
2-3
Creating a Network Model Adding a Node
mixed; the base on which these properties are entered must be fixed. If the base is miles, then the base is miles for all reliability properties for which length is a factor. 4. Enter/select the reliability properties for your network model: Substation name: Enter a name for the substation to which the data apply. It appears only in the raw data file. This field may be blank. Overhead failure rate (failures/unit length/yr): Enter a value to define how often the overhead line fails in a given time period (usually one year). The overhead failure rate is valid for all construction types that do not begin with the characters, UG, and is given in failures/unit length/unit time. Overhead repair time (hr): Enter the amount of time it takes to repair an overhead line once it has failed. The time specified here is usually in hours but may be specified as any unit of time as long as it is applied consistently to all data. This repair time is valid for all construction types that do not begin with the characters, UG. Underground failure rate (failures/unit length/yr): Specify how often the underground cable fails in a given time period usually one year. This parameter is only used when the first two characters of the construction type defined in the dictionary are UG. Underground repair time (hr): Enter the amount of time it takes to repair an underground cable once it has failed. As with the underground failure rate, this value will only apply to construction types defined where the first two characters are UG. Switch time (hr): Enter the amount of time it takes to open a switch. This parameter applies only to those construction types that represent a switch branch in the raw data file. 5. Click the OK button to save your specifications.
2.4 Adding a Node

A node is a basic component of any network you will create using PSS/ADEPT. The node is a terminal of any branch, or a terminal that is common to two or more network items (such as branches, shunts, machines, etc.). A node is usually placed at a point where the construction type changes, a transformer is added, a load or shunt capacitor is present, or where phasing changes. PSS/ADEPT provides three kinds of nodes: vertical, horizontal, and point. The Diagram Toolbar will allow you to easily create a node on the network diagram (see Figure 2-3).
Select
Horizontal Node
Vertical Node
Point Node
Figure 2-3. Diagram Toolbar: Node Symbols
2-4
Creating a Network Model Adding a Shunt Device
To add a node: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click one of the three node symbols. 2. Move the pointer to the desired location in the diagram and click. The node symbol displays on the diagram, centered on the pointer position (Figure 2-4). The system automatically names consecutively the nodes you place on a diagram: Node1, Node2, Node3, etc.
NODE1
Figure 2-4. Creating a Vertical Node on the Diagram 3. Do one of the following: To add another node of the same type: Repeat Step 2. The node symbol displays on the diagram. To add a different type of node: Repeat Steps 1 and 2. The node symbol displays on the diagram. 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 as many times as necessary to place all of the desired nodes on the diagram.
2.5 Adding a Shunt Device

A shunt device is always connected to a single node; the node must exist prior to adding the shunt device. PSS/ADEPT provides six types of shunt devices: load, source, induction machine, synchronous machine, capacitor, and fault. The Diagram Toolbar allows you to easily add the devices (see Figure 2-5).
Select
Load
Induction Machine
Harmonic Harmonic Injection Filter Capacitor
MWH Load
Source
Synchronous Machine
Standard Fault
Figure 2-5. Diagram Toolbar: Shunt Device Symbols
2-5
Creating a Network Model Adding a Branch
To connect a shunt device: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click one of the shunt device symbols. 2. Position the pointer over the node to which the shunt device will be connected (Figure 2-6a). 3. Click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the shunt device symbol to the desired position (Figures 2-6b and 2-6c). PSS/ADEPT automatically names shunt devices as Load1, Load2, Source1, Capac1, etc.
Node1
Node1
Node1
a.
b. Figure 2-6. Creating Shunt Devices
c.
2.6 Adding a Branch

A branch connects two nodes, both of which must exist before you can add the branch item. A branch cannot have the same start and end node. PSS/ADEPT provides four types of branches: line/cable, switch, transformer, and series capacitor/reactor. The Diagram Toolbar allows you to easily add branches (Figure 2-7).
Select
Line
Switch
Transformer
Series Capacitor Reactor
Figure 2-7. Diagram Toolbar: Branch Symbols To add a branch: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click one of the branch symbols. 2. Position the pointer over the desired start node to which the branch item will be connected (Figure 2-8a).
2-6
Creating a Network Model Adding a Branch
3. Click and hold down the mouse button (the branch symbol, highlighted, displays) while dragging the branch symbol to the desired location (Figure 2-8b), and do one of the following: To connect to the end node: Position the pointer over the end node and release the left mouse button. To create a multipoint line (a jog in the branch): Move the pointer to the turning point and release the mouse button. Move the pointer to the next turning point and click; repeat as many times as necessary, and drag the pointer to the end node to complete the branch (see Figure 2-8c).
Node1
Node1
Node1
Node2
Node2
Node2
a.
b.
c.
Figure 2-8. Creating a Multipoint Branch During this process, "rubber-banding" will take place, showing the potential course of the connection segments. If the branch will not snap to the node, make sure the Grid Snap button is inactive (grayed out). This will make it easier to connect the item to the node. If the distance between the two nodes is too short, the branch symbol will not appear. To see the symbol, move the nodes farther apart.
2-7
Creating a Network Model Defining a Group
2.7 Defining a Group

You can define a group to hold a collection of items within the network for which you have identified some commonality. Any network item can belong to any group, without restriction. An item can belong in 0 to n groups. Network item groups are unique to each network and are stored along with the rest of your network data in the *.adp file. For example, you might have branches in two different states, New York and Vermont. To set up a group and assign network items to it: 1. Choose Network>Groups from the Main Menu. The Groups dialog displays (Figure 29).
New (Insert)
Figure 2-9. Groups Dialog 2. Click the New (Insert) button and, in the entry space that appears, type a group name. For example, you could type New York. 3. Do one of the following: To mark individual network items that you want to assign to your group: In the Members column, click the box that precedes the item. A check mark displays in the box. Repeat this step for each item you want to add to your network group. To mark multiple nonconsecutive items that you want to add to your group: In the Members column, press the Ctrl key and click the box that precedes each network item. To mark multiple consecutive items that you want to add to your group: In the Members column, click the first item in a range, press the Shift key, click the last item in the range, and press the Spacebar. You can "unmark" items in the Members column by clicking once on the box that precedes the item.
2-8
4. Enter a Description for the group you are creating. By default, this field is blank. 5. Select a color to use for this group. Color is used for color-coding the diagram by network group. 6. Click the Close button to save your group. To view the group(s) to which an item belongs and/or to change an items membership in a group: 1. Double-click on the item to display its property sheet. 2. Click the Groups button. The Group Membership dialog displays the list of the network groups you have defined (Figure 2-10). (If you havent defined any groups, it will be empty.) Notice that each group to which the item belongs will have a check mark next to its name.
Figure 2-10. Group Membership Dialog 3. Check or uncheck the boxes that precede the group names to change the items membership. A check mark in the box indicates the item is a member of the group; no check mark indicates the item is not a member of the group. 4. Click the OK button to accept the changes and return to the item property sheet. 5. Click the OK button to return to the diagram. To add multiple items to a single existing group: 1. Select one or more items on the network diagram. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3. 2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
2-9
3. Click the Add Item(s) to>Group option. The Add Item(s) to Group dialog displays (Figure 2-11).
Figure 2-11. Add Item(s) to Group Dialog 4. From the drop-down list, choose the group to which you want to add the selected items. 5. Click the OK button. If you choose items that already belong to the specified group, the items will be unaffected. To delete a group: 1. Choose Network>Groups from the Main Menu. The Groups dialog displays. 2. In the Groups list, click the group you want to delete. Only the group will be deleted. Items that belonged to that group will remain in the network. 3. Click the Delete button to delete the group from the list.
2-10
Creating a Network Model Defining a Load Category
2.8 Defining a Load Category

You can define a load category to hold a collection of load items (Static Loads, Induction Machines and Synchronous Machines for which you have identified some commonality) within the network. Any load item can belong to any category, without restriction. A load item can belong to 0 to n load categories. Load categories are unique to each network and are stored along with the rest of your network data in the *.adp file. A load item may also belong to one or more groups. To set up a load category and assign load items to it: 1. Choose Network>Load Categories from the Main Menu. The Load Categories dialog displays (Figure 2-12).
New (Insert)
Figure 2-12. Load Categories Dialog 2. Click the New (Insert) button and, in the entry space that appears, enter a name for the load category you want to define. 3. Do one of the following: To mark individual items that you want to add to your load category: In the Members column, click the box that precedes the item. A check mark displays in the box. Repeat this step for each item you want to add to your load category. To mark multiple nonconsecutive items that you want to add to your load category: In the Members column, press the Ctrl key and click the box that precedes each network item. To mark multiple consecutive items that you want to add to your load category: In the Members column, click the first item in a range, press the Shift key, click the last item in the range, and press the Spacebar.
2-11
You can "unmark" items in the Members column by clicking once on the box that precedes the item. 4. Enter a Description for the load category you are creating. By default, this field is blank. 5. Click the Close button to save your work. To view the load category(ies) to which an item belongs and/or to change an items membership in a load category: 1. Double-click on the load item to display its property sheet. 2. Click the Categories button. The Load Category Membership dialog displays the list of the categories you have defined (Figure 2-13). (If you havent defined any categories, it will be empty.) Notice that each category to which the load item belongs will have a check mark next to its name.
Figure 2-13. Load Category Membership Dialog 3. Check or uncheck the boxes that precede the category names to change the items membership. A check mark in the box indicates the item is a member of the load category; no check mark indicates the item is not a member of the category. 4. Click the OK button to accept the changes and return to the item property sheet. 5. Click the OK button to return to the diagram. To add multiple items to a single existing category: 1. Select one or more items on the network diagram. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3. 2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
2-12
3. Click the Add Item(s) to>Load Category option. The Add Load(s) to Category dialog displays (Figure 2-14).
Figure 2-14. Add Load(s) to Category Dialog 4. From the drop-down list, choose the load category to which you want to add the selected items. 5. Click the OK button. If you choose items that already belong to the specified load category, the items will be unaffected by this action. To delete a load category: 1. Choose Network>Load Categories from the Main Menu. The Load Categories dialog displays. 2. In the Categories list, click the load category you want to delete. Only the category will be deleted, load categories, which were part of the deleted category will remain in the network. 3. Click the Delete button to delete the load category from the list.
2-13
Creating a Network Model Defining Network Economics
2.9 Defining Network Economics

You may specify economics criteria that will be used during the Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO) and Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) analysis activities. Unique to each network, they are stored along with the rest of your network data in the *.adp file. To add economics criteria to your network model: 1. Choose Network>Economics from the Main Menu. The Economics dialog displays (Figure 2-15).
Figure 2-15. Economics Dialog 2. Enter the economics data for your model: Price of electrical energy (per kWh): The price your utility charges per kWh for the use of electricity. Price of electrical reactive energy (per kvar-h): The price your utility charges per kvar-h for the use of electrical reactive energy. Price of electrical demand (per kW): The price your utility charges per kW for electrical demand. Price of electrical reactive demand (per kvar): The price your utility charges per kvar for electrical reactive demand.
2-14
Creating a Network Model Defining Item Ordering Method
Discount rate (pu/yr): The annual rate used to take into account the potential earning power of money and inflation while moving dollar amounts either forward or backward through time, to a single point in time for comparison. Inflation rate (pu/yr): The expected yearly change in the value of the dollar. Evaluation period (yr): The number of years, which will be studied in the economic analysis. Installation cost for fixed capacitor banks (per kvar): The amount per kvar it costs your utility to install a fixed capacitor bank. Installation cost for switched capacitor banks (per kvar): The amount per kvar it costs your utility to install a switched capacitor bank. Maintenance rate for fixed capacitor banks (per kvar-yr): The rate per kvar-yr it costs your utility to maintain a fixed capacitor bank. Maintenance rate for switched capacitor banks (per kvar-yr): The rate per kvar-yr it costs your utility to maintain a switched capacitor bank. 3. Click the OK button to save your specifications for the model.
2.10 Defining Item Ordering Method

In PSS/ADEPT, tree iteration is a way to go from one node in a network to another node, walking along the branches that connect them. If there are loops in the network, there may be more than one way to get from one node to another. In reports, you may want to control the order in which the node/branch results are listed. The ordering method allows you to handle these situations by specifying the method to start at a designated "root" node and iterate in order through all the equipment in the network. The "root" node is specified on the Network Property sheet. If you do not specify a "root" node directly, PSS/ADEPT will set the "root" node for you according to the following rules: 1. If you open a PSS/U raw data file (*.dat), the root node will automatically be set to the first in-service source node found in the file. If there are no sources or no in-service sources, the root node will be set to the first node found in the file. 2. If you are creating a new diagram, the root node will be set to the first in-service source you place on the diagram.
If you are generating a new network and you do not place any source nodes on the diagram you must specify the "root" node directly in the Network Property sheet. During the iteration, if a node has been traversed already (a loop formed), the branch that has the already encountered node at its downstream end is called a "loop branch". For example, in the network drawing in Figure 2-16, if the "root" node is "Source" and the item ordering method is set to alphabetical, the iteration order of the nodes, starting at the source, would be as shown in Table 2-1.
2-15
BBBB 1.00 358.42 3 0.87 3 31 .79
1 23 W 0 .99 3 58 .28
Line 2 Line1 Switch1 306.74 355.82 27.9 2 174.87 L ine3 L ine5 28.0 2 6.56
T ran1
XXXX 1.00 359.86 Y YY Y 1 .00 3 58 .93
2 8.95 3 43 .61 Line4 AAA A 1.00 359.86
5.74 89.67
0.00 76.1 0 Source 1.00 360.00
T ran2
CCCC 0.00 86.56
Figure 2-16. Sample Network to Illustrate Item Ordering Methods
Table 2-1. Iteration Order of Nodes

Position in Tree 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Node Source AAAA XXXX YYYY BBBB 123W CCCC Source AAAA XXXX Source BBBB Source Upstream Node
2-16
Table 2-2 gives iteration order of the branches. Table 2-2. Iteration Order of Branches
Position in Tree 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Branch Line4 Line5 Line3* Tran1 Line1 Line2 Tran2 Upstream Source AAAA XXXX XXXX Source BBBB Source Downstream AAAA XXXX Source YYYY BBBB 123W CCCC
The * is used to indicate a loop has been formed when the node "Source" is visited for the second time. Line3 is then considered a "loop branch". The "*" is used here for explanatory purposes only and will not be indicated on any output reports. During the iteration process, any out-of-services branches are treated as if they have been removed from the network. To define the network item ordering method: 1. Choose Network>Ordering Method from the Main Menu. The Ordering Method dialog displays (Figure 2-17).
Figure 2-17. Ordering Method Dialog 2. Click Alphabetical by name to order network items in alphabetical order. Refer to the above example for the expected results, or click Numerical by node coordinate to order network items numerically by node coordinates. The Priority, Horizontal Priority, and the Vertical Priority will become enabled.
2-17
Creating a Network Model Completing the Network Diagram
When ordering numerically by node coordinate you must specify the following: 1. Choose the x coordinate (Horizontal) preference. This priority is used to determine left to right or right to left ordering. If there is a tie, then Vertical priority will determine if the top-most or bottom-most is selected next. 2. Choose the y coordinate (Vertical) preference. This priority is used to determine top to bottom or bottom to top ordering. If there is a tie, then Horizontal Priority will determine if the left-most or right-most is selected next.
2.11 Completing the Network Diagram

Construct the rest of your network diagram using the building blocks you have learned. The system shown in Figure 2-18 illustrates a sample network. Double-click any newly created item at any time in any order to display the items property sheet where you can specify item data directly.
Figure 2-18. Completed Sample Network Diagram
2-18
Creating a Network Model Saving the Network Model
2.12 Saving the Network Model

You may save the diagram at any point. To save a network diagram: 1. Click the Save button on the File Toolbar, or choose File>Save or File>Save As from the Main Menu. The Save As dialog displays (see Figure 2-19).
Figure 2-19. Save As Dialog 2. Enter the directory path and filename you want for the diagram. 3. Choose the file type: PSS/U Raw Data File (*.dat), or PSS/ADEPT File (*.adp). The default is PSS/ADEPT. 4. Click the OK button to save the diagram.
2-19
Creating a Network Model Printing the Diagram
2.13 Printing the Diagram

PSS/ADEPT provides a standard MS Windows printing environment that allows you to print network diagrams and reports.
2.13.1 Specifying Print Options

You can specify how you want PSS/ADEPT to print your diagram including headers, footers, and page numbers. To specify these print options select File>Print Options. The Print Options dialog displays (Figure 2-20).
Figure 2-20. Print Options Dialog Select the options you want to modify. Active View: Print the currently selected (active) view just like it appears in the window (WYSIWYG). Entire diagram (multi-page): Print the entire diagram spanning over several pages. Entire diagram (single page): Print the entire diagram on a single sheet of paper. Current Display (single page): Print the current display as is on a single printed page. Network title: Check the box to print the title of the network as part of the page header. The title is specified in the Network Properties dialog. File path: Check the box to print the full path of the currently open file in the page header. This is the path where your file is currently located. Results type (analysis): Check the box to print the analysis that was last executed. The results on the diagram correspond to an analysis such as load flow, short circuit and motor starting.
2-20
Voltage units: Check the box to print the voltage units on the diagram (per-unit, kV, etc.). Current/power units: Check the box to display current or power units on the printed page (kW, kvar, Amps). Active phase: Check the box to print the phase pertaining to the printed output results. For example, if you have chosen to display results at Phase B, the page footer will indicate phase B results. Product Version: Check the box to print the produce version number on the printed page. Date and Time: Check the box to print the date and time at the bottom of the printed page. Page numbers: Check the box to print page numbers on each page. White background: Check the box to print on a white background. High-quality printing: Check the box for optimal print resolution (could significantly increase printing time).
2.13.2 Specifying Print Settings

You can specify the print settings such as paper size, paper tray, and orientation for your network diagrams. To specify and/or modify your print settings, choose File>Print Setup from the Main Menu. The Print Setup dialog displays (Figure 2-21).
Figure 2-21. Print Setup Dialog Using the Print Setup dialog, you may also select another printer on the network.
2-21
2.13.3 Previewing the Diagram Before Printing

You can view the printed image of your network diagram before sending it to the printer. The diagram appears on the screen exactly as it will on the printed page. To preview your network diagram before printing it: 1. Choose File>Print Preview from the Main Menu. The Print Preview window displays (Figure 2-22).
Figure 2-22. Print Preview Window 2. Do one of the following: To send an image directly to the printer from the Print Preview window: Click the Print button that appears in the upper left corner of the Print Preview window. To move back and forth among the pages in your network diagram: Click the Next Page and/or Prev Page buttons. (If there are no pages available, the button will be grayed out.) To display a two-page preview of your network diagram: Click the Two-Page button. To zoom in (magnify) or zoom out (broaden the perspective) of your network diagram: Click the Zoom In and/or Zoom Out buttons. To return to the Diagram View without printing: Click the Close button.
2-22
Creating a Network Model Adjusting the PSS/ADEPT Display
2.13.4 Printing a Network Diagram

A network diagrams printed appearance depends on a number of factors such as: View of the diagram (actual area displayed in the Diagram View). Zoom level of the diagram. Results (if any) currently displayed on the diagram.
PSS/ADEPT features What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG) printing of your network diagram, taking into account both the scrolled position and the scale of your diagram. Slight differences may occur because the relative size of the paper is not the same as the size of the Diagram View window, and because the resolution of the printing device is usually three or four times that of the screen. If the Multipage option is set in the Diagram Properties dialog, then the application will print the entire diagram, using as many pages as necessary. To eliminate "blank" pages, you may need to resize the diagram so that there is a minimal amount of white space around your network. If the Multipage option is turned off, the current view will be printed on a single page (WYSIWYG) irregardless of the diagram size. Each diagram printout will show the title of the network model, and the date and time in the upper left and lower right of the paper, respectively. Also, the units of the displayed results will be shown on the lower left of the printed page.
2.14 Adjusting the PSS/ADEPT Display

PSS/ADEPT provides many options for customizing the diagram display to accommodate your work preferences. You can hide and dock views, float a view in the application window, zoom in and out, and scale/offset all coordinates in a diagram. By default, the Tree and Progress Views are docked to the main application window. The Diagram View always displays in the main application window and may not be hidden or docked elsewhere; it may, however, be minimized or maximized.
2.14.1 Hiding Views

To hide the Equipment List View, Progress View, the Status Bar, and/or a toolbar in the diagram: 1. Choose View from the Main Menu. The drop-down View Menu displays. 2. Click any or all of the view options: Network Tree, Progress Window, and/or Status Bar, in the drop-down menu. If a view option, (for example, Network Tree) is checked, the view displays; if a view option is not checked, the view does not display.
2-23
2.14.2 Docking Views

The Tree and/or Progress Views can be attached or "docked" to any side of the application window. By default, the Tree View is docked to the left side of the application window, and the Progress View is docked to the bottom of the application window. To dock a view to any side of the application window: 1. Right-click anywhere in the view you want to dock. A pop-up menu displays. 2. Click Allow docking to remove the check mark and display the view contents in a small window. Notice the border at the top of the small window (the color of the window border depends on your current desktop settings). 3. Right-click in the small window to display the pop-up window. 4. Click Allow docking. 5. Click on the border of the small window and drag it to the side of the application window until you see its frame change. 6. Release the mouse button to dock the view. For example, Figure 2-23 shows the Progress View docked at the bottom of the application window, which is the default setting.
Progress View
Figure 2-23. Progress View "Docked" in PSS/ADEPT Application Window
2-24
2.14.3 Floating the Progress View

The Progress View can be "undocked" from the bottom edge of the application. To "float" the Progress View in the PSS/ADEPT application window: 1. Right-click in the Progress View to display the pop-up menu. 2. Click Float in Main Window. The Progress View maximizes to overlay the Diagram View (Figure 2-24).
Progress View
Figure 2-24. Progress View "Floated" in PSS/ADEPT Application Window To reinstate the "docked" Progress View: 1. Right-click in the maximized Progress View to display the pop-up menu. 2. Click Float in Main Window to remove the check mark. The Progress View returns to its previous "docked" position.
2-25
2.14.4 Zooming the Diagram

To zoom the diagram or any portion of the diagram, choose one of the following: 1. Choose View>Zoom from the Main Menu. The drop-down View Menu displays (Figure 2-25).
Figure 2-25. Zooming the Diagram 2. Use the Zoom Toolbar (Figure 2-26).
Pan
Zoom Previous
Zoom 100%
Zoom Extent
Zoom Area
Zoom Area Zoom Out Diagram Properties
Figure 2-26. Zoom Toolbar 2-26 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
3. Click on any drop-down menu option or toolbar button to adjust your Diagram View: 50%, 100%, 150%, 200%: Choose any one of these preset zoom levels at which to display your network diagram (these options are only available from the drop-down menu). Zoom In: Choose this option to magnify your diagram. Zoom Out: Choose this option to get a broader view of your diagram. Zoom Area: Choose this option to zoom into a particular area of your diagram. Click the Zoom Area button. On the diagram, click and drag from upper left to lower right to draw a rectangular frame around the area you want to magnify. Release the mouse button to zoom into the area within the rectangle. Zoom Extent: Choose this option to change the view of your diagram to one which contains all of your network without white space. Zoom Previous: Choose this option to restore the zoom level to what it was previously.
2.14.5 Scaling/Offsetting Diagram Coordinates

You can scale all node coordinates by some factor. This will result in nodes being spaced farther apart (for values > 1.0) or closer together (for values < 1.0). Additionally, you can offset all x- and/or y-coordinates by some number of inches on the diagram. This number can be positive or negative. Since the origin (0, 0) is located at the bottom left corner, a positive value for x will shift all nodes to the right and a positive value for y will shift all nodes upward. To scale or offset the x- and y-coordinates for all items on the diagram: 1. Choose Diagram>Adjust Coordinates... from the Main Menu. The Adjust Coordinates dialog displays (Figure 2-27).
Figure 2-27. Adjust Coordinates Dialog 2. Enter any scaling factor and/or x- and y-coordinate offsets you want: Scale by: Specify the number by which both x- and y-coordinates will be multiplied. Offset x-coordinates by: Specify the number (positive or negative) that will be added to all x-coordinates. Offset y-coordinates by: Specify the number (positive or negative) that will be added to all y-coordinates. 3. Click the OK button to make the specified adjustments. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 2-27
2.14.6 Panning the Diagram

Scroll bars on the diagram display have been replaced by a panning tool. To navigate the diagram either horizontally or vertically: 1. Click the Pan button on the Zoom Toolbar.
2. When the mouse is placed over the Diagram View, it will change to a Pan button. Left click anywhere on the diagram and drag the entire display to a different position in the window.
2.14.7 Navigating Using the Mouse Wheel

If you mouse has a navigation wheel, you can use it to navigate through the diagram. Scroll the mouse wheel to pan the diagram view up or down. Hold the Shift key down while scrolling to pan the view left or right. Hold the Ctrl key down while scrolling to zoom in or out. The diagram window must have the focus to receive mouse wheel events. If nothing happens when you scroll the mouse wheel, left-click once in the diagram window to give it the focus.
2.14.8 Centering Items in the Diagram View

To center an individual item or a group of items in the diagram: 1. Select the item(s) you want to center. 2. Right-click on the diagram and choose Center from the pop-up menu.
2.14.9 Saving Diagram Views

You can save diagram views and restore them at any time. Views that you have previously saved will be stored within a PSS/Adept native file (*.adp). To save a diagram view, select Saved Views from the View menu. The Saved Views dialog displays (Figure 2-28).
Figure 2-28. Saved Views Dialog
2-28
To create a new saved view: 1. Click the New (Insert) button to create a new saved view.
2. Enter the name you want to call the saved view in the text box. 3. Click the Save button. To restore a view: 1. Select the view you want to restore from the list provided. 2. Click the Restore button. Click the Close button to return to the diagram.
2.14.10 Working with Layers

The diagram view is capable of showing many layered images. The simplest way to visualize a layer is to imagine that the diagram is comprised of an infinite number of clear mylar sheets stacked on top of one another. Each single sheet of mylar constitutes one diagram layer. Diagram layers can be visible, hidden, or visible or hidden dependent on the current zoom level setting. Each diagram contains a minimum of two layers: Layer 0 (the background layer where imported images are assigned) and Layer 1 (the default layer where all non-image diagram components (network items) are assigned). You can create any number of additional layers to the diagram. When images are imported into PSS/Adept, they can be assigned to a diagram layer giving you flexibility for showing and hiding specific images on the diagram. If you want to use this feature, first add the layers for each image file you want to import. Refer to the "Importing and Exporting Image Files" section to import the image and assign a specific layer to it. Once the image is imported and assigned to a layer, you have full control of the properties for each image such as when you want the image to be shown on the diagram. You can set the image to be visible, hidden, or only shown at a certain specified zoom level. In this version, layer assignment is restricted to imported images only.
2-29
To modify one or more diagram layers: 1. Select Layers from the Diagram menu. The Layers dialog displays (Figure 2-29).
Figure 2-29. Layers Dialog 2. Select the layer that you want to modify from the list on the left side of the dialog. The properties of the layer will be disabled until a layer is selected. 3. Modify the layer properties. Description: Enter a description for the diagram layer to help identify its characteristics. Visible: Select this button to make the selected layer visible. Hidden: Select this button to make the selected layer hidden. Zoom Dependent: Select this button to make the selected layer visible or hidden based on a specified zoom level. If you select a layer that is zoom dependent, specify the maximum and minimum zoom levels to use to toggle the visibility in the boxes provided. Default layer: Check this box to make the selected layer the default layer. The default layer will automatically be set to Layer 1. 4. Click the Apply button to update the diagram.
2-30
To add a new diagram layer: 1. Click the Add button. A new layer will be added to the list. You cannot modify the name of a layer. 2. Modify/select the properties for the new layer. 3. Click the Apply button to update the diagram. To remove a diagram layer: 1. Select the layer you want to remove in the list provided. 2. Click the Remove button. The layer will be removed from the list. 3. Click the Apply button to update the diagram layers.
2.14.11 Importing and Exporting Image Files

You can import files of the following types into the diagram: .bmp, .jpg, .gif, and .png. Once an image is imported, it becomes a diagram item that can be selected, moved, double-clicked to show its properties. Image files may also be assigned to a specific diagram layer. To import an image file: 1. Select Import Image from the Diagram menu. The file selector will display allowing you to select the file type and name of the file you want to import. 2. Select OK. The image file will be imported and placed on the diagram. To modify the properties of an image: 1. Double-click on the image or right-click on the image and select Properties to display its property sheet (Figure 2-30).
Figure 2-30. Image Property Sheet
2-31
2. Select/modify the image properties: File: The image filename cannot be modified but shows you the path to the file that you have imported. This file is saved along with a .adp file so that the image can be restored when the file is re-opened. You can specify an image file directory under Program Settings. Copy the image files that you want to use into this directory to avoid being prompted for the image file name(s) whenever you open a .adp file containing imported image(s). Layer: Select a previously defined layer that you want this image to belong to. Imported images are assigned to the Background layer by default. Scale Factor: Enter a scale factor if you want the image to be scaled. By default, the image scale factor is set to 1.0, which means the image is rendered at its actual size at 100% diagram zoom level. Images are scaled up and down when the view is zoomed in or out. To make the image larger (the image file will not be modified), choose a higher scale factor (> 1.0) and to make the image smaller, choose a lower scale factor (< 1.0). Selectable: Check this box to allow the image to be selectable as an item on the diagram. If this box is not checked, you will not be able to select and modify any of the image properties. Moveable: Check this box to allow the ability to move the image around on the diagram. If the moveable check box is not checked, the image will be stationary on the diagram. 3. Click OK to return to the diagram.
2.14.12 Using Knee Points

Knee points are dividers that can divide branch and shunt items into multiple line segments. The number of line segments in a diagram item (e.g., branch) equals the number of knee points + 1. Figure 2-31 below illustrates how to add a knee point to an existing branch and load.
NODE2
NODE1
Figure 2-31. Knee Points 2-32 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
There are 2 knee points and 3 line segments in the branch from NODE1 to NODE2. There is 1 knee point and 2 line segments in the load. Originally, the line segments were drawn as one line segment between NODE1 and NODE2 and one line segment indicating the load. To create the figure shown, knee points were added to the original branch and load to allow the branch and load line segments to be arranged as shown. Once a knee point is added, you can select it and drag the network item to a desired location. Knee points are also created automatically when you draw a multipoint branch (see Section 2.6, Adding a Branch). To add a knee point to an existing branch or shunt item: 1. Select the knee point drawing tool from the Diagram Toolbar and click on the branch or shunt item where you want the knee point to be placed. A small maroon square will become visible (see Figure 2-32) indicating that the knee point is selected.
NODE2
NODE1
Figure 2-32. Knee Point Selected 2. Click and drag the knee point to a different location to reposition the item. Once the item has been repositioned you can click anywhere in the diagram and the knee point will disappear from the view until you reselect it.
2-33
To delete a knee point from an existing branch or shunt item: 1. Select the knee point and press the Delete key, or select Edit>Delete. Be careful to select only the knee point and not its associated link (see Figure 2-33).
NODE2
NODE1
a. Correct
NODE2
NODE1
b. Incorrect Figure 2-33. Knee Point Selection for Delete
2.14.13 Locking the Diagram

Locking the diagram prevents all network and diagram editing operations including item creation, relocation, and deletion. You can still select items, navigate the network, and perform analysis operations. To lock the diagram for editing: 1. Select Diagram>Lock Diagram, or right-click in the Diagram View and select Lock Diagram. To un-lock the diagram and enable all edit operations: 1. Select Diagram>Unlock Diagram, or right-click in the Diagram View and select Unlock Diagram.
2.14.14 Working with Item Labels

PSS/ADEPT uses several types of labels to annotate the diagram. Item labels are used to provide text information on the diagram for a specific network item (transformer, machine, etc.). Result labels are used to display analysis results on the diagram (e.g., power, voltage, etc.). Each label has its own set of properties including text, color, font, and other behavior settings.
2-34
To view/edit the properties of a label or group of labels: 1. Double-click on the label or select the label, right-click and select Properties to display the Label Property sheet (Figure 2-34).
Figure 2-34. Label Property Sheet 2. Modify the properties of the label: Owner: If the label is associated with a specific network item, the name of the item will be displayed. Items associated with a specific network item will have properties that appear disabled such as text color and background color. Font: To change the font of a label or group of labels, click the Font button and select the desired font, size, and style. Text color: Select the Browse label text. button and choose the color that you want for the
Background color: Select the Browse button and choose the color you want to use for the background of the label text. Choose whether you want the color to be opaque or transparent. Check the box if you want the color to be opaque. AutoPosition: If you want to change the position, alignment, or rotation of the label uncheck the AutoPosition box. The position properties will then be editable. X, Y: Enter the position of the label in diagram coordinates. Alignment: Choose to position the label in the center, left justified, or right justified in the label box. Rotation: Select the label rotation. For example, 90 indicates the label to be drawn in a vertical position, 0 indicates horizontal position. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 2-35
2.14.14.1 Setting Multiple Label Fonts

The font characteristics of multiple labels can also be changed from the Diagram Properties dialog. To change multiple label characteristics at the same time: 1. Select Diagram>Properties from the Diagram menu. The Diagram Properties dialog displays. 2. On the General tab click on the Font button to display the Font dialog. Select the desired font name, size, and style followed by the OK button. 3. Select Apply to Labels, the Apply Font dialog displays (Figure 2-35).
Figure 2-35. Apply Font Dialog 4. Select the label categories that you want to be updated with the newly selected font. Item name labels: When checked applies the new font to diagram item names (e.g., node names, branch names) Item property labels: When checked applies the new font to diagram property labels (e.g., construction type and length, phasing). Result labels: When checked applies the new font to diagram results (e.g., node voltage, power, current). Annotation labels: When checked applies the new font to diagram text annotation. The Apply to Labels button updates labels only and does not assign the selected font to the entire diagram. The Apply button assigns the font to the diagram only and does not reset the fonts of existing labels. The diagram font acts only as a default for newly created labels.
2-36
2.14.14.2 Controlling Result Label Visibility

Each diagram item (e.g., node, branch) has an associated results visibility flag that allows you to specify whether or not to show the results for a particular diagram item. To hide results: 1. Select a specific item or group of items. 2. Double-click on the item or select the item, right-click and select Properties 3. Un-check the box labeled Results. This will cause results for the selected items to be hidden on the diagram. To show results: 1. Select a specific item or group of items. 2. Double-click on the item or select the item, right-click and select Properties 3. Check the box labeled Results. This will cause results for the selected items to be shown on the diagram. To toggle the results label visibility as previously specified in the property sheet: 1. Select an item or group of items on the diagram. 2. Right-click and select Toggle>Results visibility. Results previously hidden will become visible and results previously shown will become invisible. The results visibility flag on each item is specifically designed to override the diagram wide result visibility toggle when all the results are visible on the diagram. If you cannot see the results for a particular item when the Show Results button on the Zoom Toolbar is toggled "on", make sure the Results check box in the items properties is checked.
2.14.14.3 Configuring Point Node Labels

If you have defined point nodes in your network, the position of the label can be set to one of eight different options that specify the quadrant to position the label combined with either vertical or horizontal text rotation. To set the point node label configuration: 1. Double-click on a point node to display its property sheet. 2. Select the desired configuration from the Label Configuration list (see Figure 2-36).
2-37
-2
-1
2 3
1 4
- possible positions - default position
-3
-4
Figure 2-36. Label Configurations
2.14.14.4 Applying Separate Labels to Node Names and Results

At each node, PSS/ADEPT can display the node name and results within the same label, or in two different (separate) labels. The first option is more efficient in terms of performance especially with large networks while the second option is more flexible by allowing you to set unique font attributes for node name text and result text. Separation of node names and results will create distinct diagram item labels for each. To separate node name and result labels: 1. Select File>Program Settings to display the Program Settings dialog. 2. Check the Separate node name and results labels box.
2.14.14.5 Positioning Branch Result Labels

Results on a branch can be positioned in two locations: at the absolute end of the branch independent of the branch length, or positioned at a location that is a fraction of the branch length. To specify how to position branch result labels: 1. Select File>Program Settings to display the Program Settings dialog. 2. Check the Position branch results labels close to ends box to position branch results at the ends without considering the actual branch length. Un-check the box to position results based on a fraction of the actual specified length of the branch. For diagrams with closely-spaced nodes (e.g., short branches), the first option is recommended.
2-38
Creating a Network Model Autopositioning Diagram Symbols
2.15 Autopositioning Diagram Symbols

Each branch symbol, shunt symbol and network item label has an Autoposition flag that can be turned on or off. With Autoposition "on", the symbol or label automatically updates its position and/or rotation based on the current position and/or rotation of the diagram item(s) upon which it is dependent. For example, if a node symbol is selected and dragged to a different location on the diagram, its connected branch and shunt symbols will re-position themselves accordingly. A diagram item with Autoposition "on" can be dragged to a different location but will immediately "snap" back to its original position when the mouse button is released. With Autoposition "off", a diagram item can be positioned and rotated independently. By default the Autoposition flag of all diagram items is set to "on". To set the Autoposition flag: 1. Select a diagram item or group of items. 2. Right-click on the diagram and select Toggle>Autoposition. Node symbols are independent by definition and are unaffected by the autoposition flag setting. A point node that has Autoposition set to "on" will affect the orientation of the shunt items connected to it. To rotate shunt items manually, set the Autoposition to "off".
2.16 Rotating Diagram Items

Most diagram items including labels can be rotated interactively. There are 3 different ways to change the rotation of a diagram item: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Rotate to change its rotation. button, select an item and drag the mouse button to add or subtract
2. Select an item, click the Rotate +90 or Rotate 90 90 from the current rotation value of the selected item.
3. Change the rotation value on the node or label property sheet. The Autoposition flag for the selected items should be turned "off" prior to changing the rotation. Leaving Autoposition "on" will cause the item to immediately snap back to its original rotation position. Shunt symbol orientation is dependent on the rotation of the node symbol to which it is connected.
2.17 Using Ports and Links

A diagram symbol, when selected has a small, circular, isolated area called a port which allows links to other symbols. A link is a line segment or group of line segments drawn from one port to another. Busbar style node symbols have a number of evenly spaced ports along either edge, lengthwise. See Figure 2-37.
2-39
Creating a Network Model Using Ports and Links
NODE2
NODE1
Port
Link
NODE2
NODE1
Figure 2-37. Ports and Links Symbol ports are intentionally hidden by the program most of the time. A port will become visible when a link (line segment) is selected. A port can have no more than one link which means you cannot link more than one branch or shunt symbol to the exact same location on a given busbar symbol. This does not apply to the point node symbol, which contains multiple ports in the center of the symbol. The number of ports depends on the length of the busbar symbol, which can be re-sized interactively, hence, creating more ports. When creating a new branch or shunt item, the cursor will automatically snap to an available port when the mouse pointer is placed over one. When dragging a new branch from one node to another, the mouse pointer must be positioned over an available port on the second node symbol for the branch creation to take effect. To move one end of a branch or shunt item to a different port: 1. Enter Select mode by choosing the Select button on the Diagram Toolbar.
2. Single-click on the line segment you want to move. The port will now be visible (Figure 2-38).
NODE2
NODE1
Figure 2-38. Port After Selection of Line Segment
2-40
Creating a Network Model Using Ports and Links
3. While holding the left mouse button down, position the cursor over the port and drag the end of the link away from the port while also holding down the Ctrl key. A dashed line will appear from the branch or shunt symbol to the mouse pointer indicating that the link is being moved. 4. Position the link onto a different port on the busbar and release the mouse button and Ctrl key. To connect a branch or shunt item to a different node: Follow Steps 1 to 3 as described above and position the link onto a different node symbol. When moving symbols, a zoom level of no less than 100% is recommended.
2-41
2-42
Chapter 3
Editing a Network Model
3.1 Overview: Editing a Network Model
PSS/ADEPT provides a flexible editing environment to help you build and test network models. Basic editing of all network items on the diagram or in the Equipment List View can be done using standard Microsoft Windows selection, copy, cut, and paste functions. Detailed editing of the engineering settings associated with a network item can be done in PSS/ADEPTs item property sheets. In this chapter, you will learn to: Open an existing network diagram. Select single or multiple items on the diagram or from the Equipment List View. Perform basic (Microsoft Windows) editing functions, such as copy, move, cut and paste, undo last action, etc., for each type of network item. Perform advanced editing functions via detailed network item property sheets, including editing the property sheets for multiple like items. Use enhanced features to better manage the workspace, scale loads and machines, rephase the network, and create load snapshots.
3.1.1 Basic Editing Features

Basic editing functionality is provided by the Microsoft Windows environment in which PSS/ADEPT operates. Once you have selected the network item(s), the Microsoft Windows copy, cut, paste, and undo last edit function (via the Microsoft Windows clipboard) are available to you. The following table summarizes access methods to this functionality.
Action on selected item(s) Copy Cut Paste Delete Undo last edit/deletion
In the Main Menu, choose: Edit>Copy Edit>Cut Edit>Paste Edit>Delete Edit>Undo
Press: Ctrl+C Ctrl+X Ctrl+V Delete key Ctrl+Z
Click button:
3-1
Editing a Network Model Overview: Editing a Network Model
3.1.2 Editing Item Properties

The property sheet is a PSS/ADEPT dialog in which you can specify engineering characteristics for a network item. PSS/ADEPT provides unique property sheets for nodes, all types of branches and shunt devices, the network, and the diagram. Each sheet allows you to apply item-specific features to the selected item(s). You can retrieve a property sheet for the selected item(s) from either the Diagram View or the Equipment List View. To display a property sheet from the Diagram View, double-click on the desired item to select it and display its property sheet or left-click once to select the item/device, and right-click to display the pop-up menu. Choose Properties to display the property sheet. To display a property sheet in the Equipment List View, expand any tree section by clicking on the "+", and double-click on the item/device name to select it and display its property sheet or left-click once to select the item/device, right-click to display the pop-up menu, and choose Properties to display the property sheet. As network items are added, removed, or modified, the changes are immediately reflected in both the Diagram and the Tree Views. In addition to editing the property sheet for a single selected network item, PSS/ADEPT allows you to select several items of the same type and edit them in a group. To modify the properties of more than one item at a time: 1. Select a group of items of the same type (e.g., a group of loads or a group of transformers). 2. Right-click and click Properties. The appropriate property sheet displays. When editing multiple items, PSS/ADEPT determines whether or not the values of the quantities displayed in the property sheet are the same for each selected item. Quantities that have the same value for all selected items will be displayed in the property sheet while those that have different values will not. For example, suppose you select a group of loads that are all balanced and delta connected and have the same value for real power but different values for reactive power. The property sheet will display that they are balanced, delta connected loads with the appropriate real power level but the reactive power field will be blank. 3. When you click the OK button to accept your modifications, only those items in the property sheet that have been changed will be saved back to the items. If you enter a value in a blank field or modify a value, all selected items will be assigned that value.
3.1.3 Using the Grid Editor

The grid editor in PSS/ADEPT provides the ability to modify network items using a spreadsheet style interface including cut, copy, and paste capabilities with tight synchronization to the diagram. Network data items modified using the grid editor will be updated on the diagram. Network data items (i.e., nodes, lines, transformers) are each represented by "worksheet" style tabs on the spreadsheet. Removing and adding network data items is not currently supported on the grid editor. If you want to add or remove network items, use the functions available in either the Diagram View or the Tree View.
3-2
In this chapter you will learn to: Open the grid editor from within PSS/ADEPT. Modify network data using the grid editor. Sort rows in the grid editor. View network item properties from within the grid editor. Export the Grid View to Excel or Text file formats. Change the format and display settings of cells in the Grid View. Define printing and zooming options.
3.1.3.1 Opening the Grid Editor

Choose Edit>Grid from the Main Menu. The Grid Editor View will display (Figure 3-1).
Figure 3-1. Grid Editor View
3-3
3.1.3.2 Modifying Network Items

Each set of network items is displayed as a separated tab on the worksheet. You can navigate through the network items by clicking the tab of interest to view the grid for specific network data items. To view the grid for transformers, click the Transformers tab. The Transformer Grid Editor View is displayed (Figure 3-2)
Figure 3-2. Transformer Grid Editor View
3-4
To modify data in the Grid View, click the cell that you want to modify and enter the new value. Cells can be of the following forms: text box, number, check box, or drop down lists. A drop down list will appear when you have clicked the cell as shown in Figure 3-3. To view the list, click the down arrow displayed within the cell itself and select the new value.
Figure 3-3. Drop Down List Cells that have a gray background cannot be modified and are disabled for editing. When editing branch items, if the construction type has been selected from the construction dictionary, impedance values will be disabled for editing. If the construction type is "user defined", impedance values will be available for modification. To enter a "user defined" construction type, type a character string that you want to use directly in the construction type cell.
3-5
To sort a column of data in the Grid View, double-click in the column heading area of the column you want to sort. Columns will be sorted in ascending order (Figure 3-4).
Figure 3-4. Sorting Data in a Column
3-6
To view the property sheet of a network item, double-click the row header, the first unlabeled column of the Grid View (Figure 3-5). The Network Item Property sheet will display. Data modified on a Network Item Property sheet will be automatically updated in the Grid View when the OK button is selected.
Figure 3-5. Accessing a Network Item Property Sheet
3.1.3.3 Using Copy and Paste in the Grid View

The grid editor can support copy and paste operations from one or several cells to another. The grid editor will not support adding items using a paste operation. Paste operations on the grid will overwrite existing information only. Additionally, it is possible to copy and paste data from the grid into another application such as Microsoft Excel or Word. To copy one or several cells from the grid to the clipboard: 1. Select the cell or cells that you want to copy. 2. Choose Edit>Copy from the Grid menu.
3-7
To paste one or several cells into the grid from the clipboard: 1. Select the cell or cells that you want to copy data into. 2. Choose Edit>Paste from the Grid menu. 3. Data will be pasted into the selected area.
3.1.3.4 Finding Data in a Cell

The Find utility can be used to locate specified text within a cell in the grid. To locate a string: 1. Select Edit>Find to display the Find dialog (Figure 3-6).
Figure 3-6. Find Dialog 2. In the Find what: box, type in the text that you want to locate. 3. Select the direction that you want to search. "Up" will search the contents of the grid from the selected cell up to the first row. "Down" will search the contents of the grid from the selected cell down to the last row. 4. If you want to find the text by matching upper and lower case, check the Match case box.
3.1.3.5 Exporting the Grid View

PSS/ADEPT can export the Grid View to a Microsoft Excel file (.xls) or Text file (.txt). This exported file can later be used in another application for further manipulation if desired. To export the grid view: 1. Select File>Export from the Grid menu. The File Selector displays. 2. Select the format you want to write the grid into and specify a file pathname and select OK. 3. Import the exported file into the application of your choice.
3-8
3.1.3.6 Changing Format and Display Settings of Grid Cells

You can change the format (font, alignment, color, etc.) of one or more cells or change the look of the grid view on your display screen. To change the format of a cell or cells: 1. Select Edit>Format from the Grid menu. The Cell Format dialog displays (Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7. Cell Format Dialog This dialog will not appear if there are no cells selected in the grid. 2. Choose the settings that you want to modify from the appropriate tab. Font tab: Use this tab to change the font size, style and color of an individual column. Color tab: Use this tab to select the foreground, background colors of an individual cell or column and visual display of cells. Border tab: Use this tab to modify cell borders. Align tab: Use this tab to set the cell alignment properties.
3-9
To change display settings: 1. Choose Edit>Properties from the Edit menu. The Display Settings dialog will display (Figure 3-8).
Figure 3-8. Display Settings Dialog 2. Select and modify the display settings. The Display Settings dialog has a preview window that allows you to see the changes visually before committing them to the Grid View. 3D-Buttons: Specifies whether to display column and row headers as buttons with three-dimensional raised and lowered effects. Vertical Lines: Specifies whether the vertical grid lines are displayed in the Grid View. Horizontal Lines: Specifies whether the horizontal grid lines are displayed in the Grid View. Mark Current Row: Specifies whether the current cells row is marked visually in the row header. This option has no effect if the 3D-Buttons option is not checked. Mark Current Column: Specifies whether the current cells column is marked visually in the column header. This option has no effect if the 3D-Buttons option is not checked. Grid Lines Color: Select the color for the grid lines. Fixed Lines Color: Select the color for the line that separates frozen columns or rows and non-frozen columns or rows. Tracking Line Color: Specifies the color of the outline when a column or row is being re-sized.
3-10
Dragging Line Color: Specifies the color of the line where a dragged column or row will be dropped. You cannot drag rows or columns in PSS/ADEPT. Background Color: Specifies the color of the background. The background is the "gray area" outside of the grid itself. Current Cell User Properties: Specify the type of border to apply to the selected cell. 3. Select OK to return to the Grid view.
3.1.3.7 Printing the Grid View

A printed copy of the Grid view can be obtained from any standard Windows printer. You can modify the page setup and header and footer information before you print the Grid view. To modify printer settings: 1. Select File>Print Setup to display the Printer Setup dialog. 2. Modify the desired printer settings and select OK to return to the Grid view. To modify page setup options: 1. Select File>Page Setup from the Grid menu. The Page Setup dialog displays (Figure 3-9). The Page Setup dialog includes a preview window that will immediately show the effects of changing various options.
Figure 3-9. Page Setup Dialog 2. Select and modify the page setup options. Left margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you want for the left side margin. Right margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you want for the right side margin.
3-11
Top margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you want for the top side margin. Bottom margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you want for the bottom side margin. Row headers: Check the box to print the row headers on the printed page. Column headers: Check the box to print the column headers on the printed page. Print frame: Check the box to print a border frame around the outer edges of the grid on the printed page. Vertical lines: Check the box to print vertical lines between each row of the grid. Horizontal lines: Check the box to print horizontal lines between each row of the grid. Only black and white: Check the box to print the grid using only the colors of black and white. First rows, then Columns: Select this option to assign row, column printing order. First columns, then Rows: Select this option to assign column, row printing order. Center on Page, Vertical: Select this option to center the grid on the printed page vertically. Center on Page, Horizontal: Select this option to center the grid on the printed page horizontally. Save settings to Profile: Check the box to save your settings to the Windows system registry. Selecting this option allows the program to remember your previous settings each time you open PSS/ADEPT. 3. Select OK to return to the Grid View.
3-12
To modify Header/Footer options: 1. Select File>Header/Footer from the Grid menu. The Header/Footer dialog displays (Figure 3-10).
Figure 3-10. Header/Footer Options Dialog 2. Select and modify the header/footer options: Header and Footer: Click the Header or Footer tab to display the header/footer options. Enter the appropriate code in the left, centered, or right justified column. The following codes are available: $F = the name of the document file (i.e., example.adp). $A = the application name. $R = the name of the worksheet tab (i.e., Nodes, Transformers, Capacitors). $D = the current date. $P = the current page number. $N = the total number of pages. Font: Click the Font button to change the font style and size for the header and/or footer. Distance to Frame (Header/Footer): Enter the number of inches away from the outer edge of the grid to place the header/footer on the printed page. First Page Number: Enter the number to define the first page of the printed output. Enter "auto" to assign page numbers automatically starting at the number 1. Save settings to Profile: Check the box to save your settings to the Windows system registry. Selecting this option allows the program to remember your previous settings each time you open PSS/ADEPT. 3. Select OK to return to the Grid View. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 3-13
To preview the printed output, select File>Print Preview to view the printed output in a Print Preview window (Figure 3-11).
Figure 3-11. Print Preview Window To print the grid to the printer, select File>Print to send the Grid View to the printer.
3.1.3.8 Zooming Capabilities

The grid can support several zoom levels: zoom plus, zoom minus and zoom to 100 percent. To zoom into the grid, click the Zoom In button until the desired zoom level is reached. To zoom out, click the Zoom Out button until the desired zoom level is reached. To zoom to 100 percent, click the Zoom 100% button.
3-14
Editing a Network Model Opening an Existing Network Diagram
3.2 Opening an Existing Network Diagram

To open an existing network diagram for editing: 1. Choose File>Open from the Main Menu. The Open dialog displays (Figure 3-12).
Figure 3-12. Open Dialog 2. Enter/select the directory and filename of the network diagram you want. 3. Click the Open button to display the diagram.
3.3 Selecting Items

PSS/ADEPT allows you to select network items directly on the diagram or in the Equipment List View for further action such as moving, deleting, or changing properties. When you select a network item, all associated results items (if any) are selected too. You may select any number of network items (and their results items). You can select: A single item (any node, branch, or shunt device). Multiple adjacent items. Multiple nonadjacent items. All items on the diagram. All items in a defined group. All items in an island. All items in a defined load category. All nodes in a given node base voltage range. All items within a specified tree.
3-15
Editing a Network Model Selecting Items
3.3.1 Selecting a Single Item

To select a single item for further action: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Select 2. Do one of the following: On the network diagram: Click once over the item you want to select; or position the mouse near the item you want, click, hold, and drag mouse to draw a rectangular bounding box around the item. In the Equipment List View: Click once on the item you want to select. The item that you select on the diagram or in the Equipment List View appears both in the diagram framed by solid block "handles", and in the Equipment List View as highlighted (Figure 3-13). button.
Figure 3-13. Single Item Selected If you select another item in this manner, the system deselects the currently selected item. This is the default action.
3-16
3.3.2 Selecting Multiple Adjacent Items

To select multiple adjacent items for further action: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Select 2. Do one of the following: On the network diagram: Position the mouse near (not over) the items you want. Click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the mouse to draw a rectangular bounding box around the items. All items within the boundaries of the box will be selected. In the Equipment List View: Click once on the first item in a range that you want to select, hold down the Shift key, and click once on the last item in the range. The items that you selected on the diagram or in the Equipment List View appear both in the diagram framed by solid block "handles", and in the Equipment List View as highlighted (Figure 3-14). button.
Figure 3-14. Multiple Adjacent Item Selection
3-17
3.3.3 Selecting Multiple Nonadjacent Items

To select multiple nonadjacent items for further action: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Select button.
2. On the network diagram, click once over the first item you want to select. 3. Hold down the Ctrl key and click once on each nonadjacent item you want to select. Do not click on the item label; if you do, all selected items will be deselected. The items that you selected on the diagram or in the Equipment List View appear both in the diagram framed by solid block "handles", and in the Equipment List View as highlighted (Figure 3-15).
Figure 3-15. Multiple Nonadjacent Item Selection
3-18
3.3.4 Selecting All Items

To select all items on the network diagram for further action, choose one of the following: Choose Edit>Select>All from the Main Menu. Use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+A. In the Equipment List View, click on the first item, hold down the Shift key and press the End key. All items at all levels of the network will be selected.
3.3.5 Deselecting All Items

To deselect all items that have been selected, choose one of the following: Click once on any blank area on the diagram. If you click on a selected item, nothing will happen. Choose Edit>Deselect All from the Main Menu. In the Equipment List View, click the word Network at the top of the tree.
3.3.6 Selecting a Group

To select items associated with a named group or groups: 1. Choose Edit>Select>Groups from the Main Menu. The Select Groups dialog displays (Figure 3-16).
Figure 3-16. Select Groups Dialog 2. Click the box that precedes the group name to select it. A check mark appears in the box.
3-19
3. Select one of the following operators: AND: Click the AND button to select only those items common to all of the groups you selected in Step 2. OR: Click the OR button to select all items in all of the groups you selected in Step 2. 4. Click the OK button. Your group selections will display on the diagram and in the Equipment List View. To deselect items within a specified group(s), click once in the Deselect check box to place a check mark there.
3.3.7 Selecting an Island

An island is a set of network items in which there is no branch connection between a node in one set of network items with the other. Examples of islands include: An isolated set of network items which are not connected to the main portion of the network, or two separate networks with no connection between them (two islands). An island includes all nodes, branches, and shunt devices. In PSS/ADEPT you may have a network containing one or many islands. Selecting an island is useful to filter the contents of an output report or to do scaling activities. To select an island: 1. Select a node, branch, or shunt on either the Diagram or Equipment List View. 2. Choose Edit>Select>Island. 3. All network items within the island containing the selected network item will be selected on the Diagram and Equipment List Views. If no item is selected, the message "Island not selected" will appear. If you select more than one item which spans two islands, the first item you chose will determine which of the islands is selected. For example: If you choose a node in one island (Island #1) and then choose a branch in another (Island #2), the items in Island #1 will be selected.
3-20
3.3.8 Selecting by Load Category

To select items associated with a load category: 1. Choose Edit>Select>Load Categories from the Main Menu. The Select Load Categories dialog displays (Figure 3-17).
Figure 3-17. Select Load Categories Dialog 2. Click the box that precedes the load category name to select it. A check mark appears in the box. 3. Select one of the following operators: AND: Click the AND button to select only those items common to all of the load categories you selected in Step 2. OR: Click the OR button to select all items in all of the load categories you selected in Step 2. 4. Click the OK button. Your load category selections will display on the diagram and in the Equipment List View. To deselect items within the selected load categories, click once in the Deselect check box to place a check mark there.
3-21
3.3.9 Selecting Nodes in a Given Base Voltage Range

To select nodes within a minimum and maximum node base voltage: 1. Choose Edit>Select>Nodes by Voltage from the Main Menu. The Select Nodes dialog displays (Figure 3-18).
Figure 3-18. Select Nodes Dialog 2. Assign the minimum and maximum base voltage range by selecting from the available list of voltage levels, or by typing in a voltage level in the fields provided. There is an indication of line-line or line-neutral representation of base voltages directly on the right edge of the voltage range fields. This representation is the input voltage flag defined on the Network Property sheet. To deselect nodes within the specified range, click once in the Deselect check box to place a check mark there.
3-22
3.3.10 Selecting a Tree

PSS/ADEPT allows you to select a portion of your network (tree) by specifying a starting branch and an ending node. This option may more commonly be used to filter the contents of an output report or to do scaling and rephasing activities. The order in which the devices are selected is dependent on the network ordering method you specified in the Ordering Method dialog (see Chapter 2, Section 2.10). To select a tree portion: 1. Choose Edit>Select>Tree. The Select Tree dialog displays (Figure 3-19).
Figure 3-19. Select Tree Dialog 2. Select a starting branch by choosing a branch from the available list or type in the branch name directly in the field provided. The FROM Node and TO Node fields will automatically update based on the starting branch selection. The FROM Node and TO Node fields are not editable. If you have previously selected a branch on the diagram, the starting branch field on the dialog will be initialized to the selected branch. If you have previously selected both a branch and a node on the diagram, the starting branch and the ending node fields on the dialog will be initialized to the selected items. 3. Select an ending node by choosing a node from the available list or type in the node name directly in the field provided. 4. To include all lateral branches in the selection, click once in the Include Laterals check box to place a check mark there. 5. Click the OK button. 6. To deselect the network tree, click once in the Deselect check box to place a check mark there. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 3-23
3.3.11 Selection Filters

You can use selection filter to select only the items that you specify. The selection filters are applied when you choose any selection tool to select items in the Diagram and Tree Views. To set a selection filter: 1. Choose Edit>Selection Filters... the Selection Filters dialog displays (Figure 3-20).
Figure 3-20. Selection Filters Dialog 2. Initially all of the items will be unchecked. Unchecked items will be included in the selection when a selection tool is used. To toggle all items from unchecked to checked or vice versa, click the Toggle All button. As an example, suppose you wanted to perform a select by Tree and you want to select only Static Load items. Specify the following: a. Toggle on all the item types by selecting Toggle All. All items will be checked. b. Uncheck the Static Loads box. c. Choose OK. Select Edit>Select>Tree. Only Static Load items will be selected.
3-24
Editing a Network Model Annotating the Diagram
3.4 Annotating the Diagram

As shown in Figure 3-21, you can add descriptive text or labels to your diagram.
Figure 3-21. Diagram Showing Annotations To add text on the diagram: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Annotation button.
2. Move the pointer to the desired location in the diagram and click the left mouse button. The text "Annotation" displays on the diagram. (You may repeat this step as many times as needed). 3. Click the Select button to turn off the Annotation feature.
4. Double-click the text Annotation to select it and display the Annotation Property sheet (Figure 3-22).
3-25
Editing a Network Model Annotating the Diagram
Figure 3-22. Text Annotation Property Sheet 5. Click in the Text box and type the text you want to add to the diagram. You may delete the word "Annotation". 6. If you want to apply a special font to your text (or change the size or style of the font), click the Font button and select a font from the list. Click the OK button to return to the Annotation box. 7. Select the text color and/or background color. 8. Specify/modify the X,Y location where the annotation is to be displayed on the diagram. 9. Specify the text alignment and rotation. 10. Click the OK button to return to the diagram.
3-26
Editing a Network Model Editing Nodes
3.5 Editing Nodes

Once youve selected a node horizontal, vertical, or point there are various editing features available to you. For example, you may want to move, copy, resize, or delete the node(s), or change the individual properties of the node.
3.5.1 Moving Nodes

You may want to move a node to a different position on the diagram. The easiest way to do this is to drag the node across the diagram to a new position. You can also adjust the nodes x- and y-coordinates on the property sheet. To move a node: 1. Select the node you want to move. Notice the solid block "handles" that frame the selected node. 2. Position the pointer over the selected node. 3. Click and hold down the mouse button while moving the pointer to the desired position on the diagram. The node, its results box, and any relative node connections move with the node. You may move multiple nodes in the same manner. When multiple nodes are selected, they may be moved as a group; their relative positions with respect to one another is maintained.
3.5.2 Copying Nodes

You can copy a node (along with all of its properties, except node name) to the Microsoft Windows clipboard and paste it on the diagram or into the Equipment List View. To copy a node: 1. Select the node you want to copy. Notice the solid block "handles" that frame the selected node. 2. To copy the selected node to the MS Windows clipboard: choose either Edit>Copy from the Main Menu; click the Copy button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+C; or right-click, then select Copy. 3. Do one of the following: To paste the copy onto the diagram: Choose either Edit>Paste from the Main Menu; click the Paste button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+V; or right-click, then select Paste. To paste the copy into the Equipment List View: Click anywhere in the Equipment List View, and choose either Edit>Paste from the Main Menu; click the Paste button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+V; or right-click, then select Paste. The node along with most of its properties (base voltage, position and orientation, etc.) will appear on the diagram just above and to the right of the selected node, and in the Equipment List View at the end of the Nodes list. To see the node properties, double-click on the newly added node to view its property sheet. Since all node label names must be unique, PSS/ADEPT appends a tilde (~) to
3-27
the node name. If you make yet another copy of the same node, PSS/ADEPT appends two tildes (~~) to the node name, and so on. Figure 3-23 shows a node named BUS1 that was copied and pasted onto the diagram. The Node Property sheet shows the same information as for BUS1, with the new node name, BUS1~.
Figure 3-23. Copying and Pasting a Node
3-28
3.5.3 Resizing Nodes

In a diagram, only node items can be resized. To resize a node: 1. Select the node. Notice the solid block "handles" that frame the selected node. 2. Click and hold down the mouse button on one of the solid block handles. Notice that the pointer changes to a <--> to indicate the directions in which the handle may be dragged. 3. Drag the node to its new size (the node will change size as you drag) and release the mouse button when the node has reached the size you want.
3.5.4 Deleting Nodes

You can delete a node from the Diagram View only after all branches and shunt device items attached to it have been removed. To delete a node: 1. Select the node. Notice the solid block "handles" that frame the selected node. 2. Choose Edit>Delete from the Main Menu, or press the Delete key.
3.5.5 Toggling Node Symbols

Node symbols may be drawn as a point, horizontal busbar, or vertical busbar. You can toggle the node symbol without having to view the Node Property sheet. To toggle node symbols: 1. Select the node(s) that you want to change on the diagram. 2. Right-click and select Toggle>Node Symbol(s).
3-29
3.5.6 Changing Node Properties

PSS/ADEPT provides you with the flexibility to adjust the properties of an individual node. For instance, you may want to add a more descriptive node name, apply a different base voltage to the node, enter comments about the node, assign the node to a group, adjust the nodes position or orientation, or hide the node on the diagram. You can also adjust the properties of a group of like nodes, or override the group properties for selected nodes. To change the properties for a node or group of nodes: 1. Double-click on the node to select it and display the Node Property sheet, or, to select a group of nodes, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Node Property sheet (Figure 3-24).
Figure 3-24. Node Property Sheet 2. Press the Tab key to move to the next field or click in the field of interest, and add or change information in the fields on the Node Property sheet as needed: If you have selected a group of nodes, the fields in the Node Property sheet will be blank if the nodes in the selected group have different values (e.g., Name, Base voltage, Description). To assign the same values to each node in the designated group, select or enter a value in the field. You cannot assign the same Name to all nodes in the group, and you cannot alter Position and Orientation information. Name: Each network item in the PSS/ADEPT network must have a unique name identifier. You may enter an alphanumeric character name of up to 12 characters. The node name may not contain embedded blanks.
3-30
Base Voltage (kV): Base voltage is the node base voltage in either line-to-line or lineto-neutral. If the node base voltage is not specified (for example, if you import a raw data file that does not contain voltage information), the base voltage of the node defaults to the system standard base voltage that was specified on the Network Property sheet (System tab). Description: You may enter up to 40 characters to describe the node. A typical entry in this field would signal where a node has a generator or a machine, and/or the type of generator or machine located at a given node. Position: Use the x and y boxes to set the x- and y-coordinates of the node in the diagram. These coordinates are arbitrary and define the location of the network nodes relative to the diagram origin (0,0), which is located at the bottom left corner of the diagram. Type: Click one of the options to set the type of the selected node on the diagram. A network node can be presented as a point or as a busbar. Rotation: If the node type is a busbar, enter the desired rotation. Horizontal busbars have a rotation equal to zero degrees. Vertical busbars have a rotation of 90. Any rotation may be entered including fractions (e.g., 75.5). Label configuration: If a point type node is specified, you can select where the node label (e.g., name) is placed. Select from the list box provided to place the node label in the desired position. 3. To display the node on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To display node results on the diagram, click in the Results check box to place a check mark. 5. To add the node to an existing group(s), click the Groups button and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the node properties.
3-31
Editing a Network Model Editing Branches
3.6 Editing Branches

Once youve selected a branch type a line, switch, transformer, or series capacitor you may want to move or copy the branch, or change some of its properties. PSS/ADEPT provides several editing features to help you modify branch properties.
3.6.1 Moving Branches

You can move the whole branch, one branch connection point or "handle", or both branch connection points to a new node. Figure 3-25 shows several examples of moving a branch.
NODE1
NODE1 Original Position
NODE1
Original Position Final Position Original Position Final Position
Final Position
NODE2
NODE2
NODE2
Moving a complete line
Moving a single handle
Moving to a different node
Figure 3-25. Moving a Branch To move the whole branch: 1. Select the branch. Notice the "hollow" block handles on either end of the branch. 2. Position the pointer over the branch, not on a branch handle. 3. Click and drag the branch to its new position. The branch segment ends connected to the nodes will not move. To move a branch connection point to a new node: 1. Select the branch. Notice the "hollow" block handles on either end of the branch. 2. Position the pointer over the handle you want to move. Notice that the pointer changes to <--> to indicate the directions in which the handle may be dragged. 3. Click and drag the handle (the mouse pointer will change to a cross hair, +) all the way to the new node. The branch will not appear to move until the pointer passes over another node to which it is not already connected. When this happens, the branch will snap to its new connection point. To move the second branch handle to a new connection point, repeat Steps 2 and 3. You will not be able to connect both ends of the branch to the same node.
3-32
To reposition the branch connection point on the same node: 1. Select the branch. Notice the white block handles on either end of the branch. 2. Position the pointer over the handle you want to move. Notice that the pointer changes to a <--> to indicate the directions in which the handle may be dragged. 3. Click and drag the handle (the mouse pointer will appear as a cross hair, +) along the node to the desired connection point.
3.6.2 Copying Branches

You can copy a branch (along with all of its properties, except the branch name) to the Microsoft Windows clipboard and paste it on the diagram or into the Equipment List View. To copy a branch: 1. Select the branch you want to copy. Notice the white block handles on either end of the branch. 2. To copy the selected branch to the MS Windows clipboard: Choose either Edit>Copy from the Main Menu; click the Copy button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+C; or right-click, then select Copy. 3. Do one of the following: To paste the copy onto the diagram: Choose either Edit>Paste from the Main Menu; click the Paste button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+V; or right-click, then select Paste. To paste the copy into the Equipment List View: Click anywhere in the Equipment List View, and choose either Edit>Paste from the Main Menu; click the Paste button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+V; or right-click, then select Paste. The branch along with most of its properties will appear on the diagram just above and to the right of the selected branch, and in the Equipment List View at the end of the Branches list. To see the branch properties, double-click on the newly added branch to view its property sheet. Since all branch label names must be unique, PSS/ADEPT appends a tilde (~) to the branch name. If you make yet another copy of the same node, PSS/ADEPT appends two tildes (~~) to the branch name, and so on.
3.6.3 Deleting Branches

You can delete a branch from the Diagram View. To delete a branch: 1. Select the branch. Notice the white block handles on either end of the branch. 2. Choose Edit>Delete from the Main Menu, or press the Delete key.
3-33
3.6.4 Changing Line Properties

One type of branch in PSS/ADEPT is a line or cable that connects between two existing nodes. To change the properties for a line: 1. Double-click on the line to select it and display the Line Property sheet, or, to select a line or group of lines, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Line Property sheet (Figure 3-26).
Figure 3-26. Line Property Sheet: Main Tab 2. Click the Main tab and select/enter the properties for a line or cable: Name: Each item in the PSS/ADEPT network must have a unique name identifier. The line name has no relation to the FROM and TO nodes identified in the upper right of the Line Property sheet. The actual FROM and TO nodes provide network connectivity information and may not be modified. Phasing: The phasing value indicates which phase conductors are present in the network model. In PSS/ADEPT, the available phasing values are specified using any combination of the three characters A, B, and C (e.g., ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, and C). You must select one of the phasing values from the list; you cannot enter your own values. If XYZ phasing was specified in a PSS/U raw data file, PSS/ADEPT will convert X to A, Y to B, and Z to C. When the diagram property to display phase markers is selected, phasing is indicated on the one-line diagram where phase A is red, phase B is yellow, and phase C is blue. 3-34 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
Line Length: The line length is the actual length of the branch. It is important that the line length is consistent with the impedance units. For example, if the line length is given in miles, then the impedance per unit length for the line must be specified in ohms per mile. This is important because line length is used to calculate the total line impedance. Construction Type: Construction type is a 1- to 10-character alphanumeric identifier that refers to a construction type defined in the Construction Dictionary. You may select one of the construction types available in the Construction Dictionary, or you may enter your own (user-defined) unique construction type. If you select a construction type from the list box, the impedance values defined with that type in the Construction Dictionary will be displayed in the Impedance area of the Line Property sheet; the values will not be editable. If you enter your own construction type, you must enter the impedance values associated with the line in the Impedance section of the Line Property sheet. PSS/ADEPT will save user-defined construction types and their associated impedances to the PSS/U raw data file (*.dat) and/or the native PSS/ADEPT native binary file (*.adp). User-defined line types are not saved to the construction dictionary. Impedance: Both positive- and zero-sequence resistance and reactance must be specified in ohm per unit length. The positive-sequence and zero-sequence charging admittance must be entered in micro-Siemens per unit length. Unit length is user defined, and must coincide with the unit length used to specify the line/cable length. You will not be able to edit these fields if you selected a construction type from the Construction Dictionary. If you created your own construction type, you must enter the impedance and admittance values; if you dont enter any values, PSS/ADEPT will default to the displayed values. Ratings: The line rating limits (amps) are used to determine whether a line is overloaded. You may specify up to four rating limits either obtained directly from the Construction Dictionary or when a user-defined construction type is indicated, your own rating limits. 3. To display the line on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected line is in service, click the In service check box, which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the line/cable is out of service and is disconnected at both ends. 5. To display results for this line on the diagram, click once in the Results check box to place a check mark there. 6. To add the selected line to an existing group(s), click the Groups button and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 7. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the line properties.
3-35
To change the harmonic properties for a line (visible if you are licensed for the harmonics module): 1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a line (Figure 3-27).
Figure 3-27. Line Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab Name: The name of the line. This property is for information only and is not editable. Click the Main tab to modify this item. FROM node: The name of the FROM node to which this line is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. TO node: The name of the TO node to which this line is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. Type: Select the type of line representation from the drop-down list. IEEE Line Represents an IEEE line. The modeling of an IEEE Line is described in Chapter 8, Section 8.9.5. IEEE Cable Represents an IEEE cable. The modeling of an IEEE Line is described in Chapter 8, Section 8.9.5. Custom Represents a user-defined line model for harmonics. Selection of this item will allow you to define the impedance exponents.
3-36
For custom types, enter the requested values for the following: Positive sequence resistance Positive sequence reactance Positive sequence susceptance Zero sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance Zero sequence susceptance
To change the reliability properties for a line (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA module): 1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a line (Figure 3-28). 2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2 for further instructions.
Figure 3-28. Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab
3-37
3.6.5 Changing Switch Properties

In PSS/ADEPT, a switch is a zero-impedance branch that connects between two existing nodes. The load flow assumes there is no difference between a switch and a tie switch. Tie switches are provided for compatibility with PSS/Us activity MERG. To change the properties for a switch: 1. Double-click on the switch to select it and display the Switch Property sheet, or, to select a switch or a group of switches, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Switch Property sheet (Figure 3-29).
Figure 3-29. Switch Property Sheet: Main Tab 2. Add or change information in the prompts on the Switch Property sheet as needed: Name: Each item in the PSS/ADEPT network must have a unique name identifier. The switch name has no relation to the FROM and TO nodes identified in the upper right of the Switch Property sheet. The specified FROM and TO nodes provide network connectivity information and may not be modified. If you modify a switch name, the names of the nodes between which it is connected will not change. Phasing: The phasing value indicates which phase conductors are present in the network model. In PSS/ADEPT, the available phasing values are specified using any combination of the three characters A, B, and C (e.g., ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, and C). You must select one of the phasing values from the list; you cannot create your own values.
3-38
If XYZ phasing was specified in a PSS/U raw data file, PSS/ADEPT will convert X to A, Y to B, and Z to C. When the diagram property to display phase markers is selected, phasing is indicated on the one-line diagram where phase A is red, phase B is yellow, and phase C is blue. Switch ID: Switch ID provides further identification for the specified switch. This identifier may be from one to three characters in length. This field is provided for PSS/U compatibility only. Construction type: Construction type is a 1- to 10-character alphanumeric identifier that refers to a construction type defined in the Construction Dictionary. You may select one of the construction types available in the Construction Dictionary, or you may enter your own (user-defined) unique construction type. Though switches have zero impedance, rating values are retrieved from the Construction Dictionary and used to calculate whether a switch is overloaded. Ratings: The switch rating limit (amps) is used to determine overloads. You may specify up to four switch rating limits from the Construction Dictionary or your own userdefined limits in the case where a user-defined construction type was specified. Tie switch: Click the Tie switch box (a check mark displays) to specify a tie switch. For PSS/ADEPT calculations, there is no difference between a switch and a tie switch. Tie switches are provided for PSS/U compatibility only. Connection circuit: If the Tie switch box is checked, you may enter a one- to eightcharacter connection circuit identifier. The connection circuit identifier is used to specify the circuit to which the tie switch is connected and is provided for compatibility with PSS/U. Status: The switch status may be either open or closed. If the switch is open, it is assumed that the switch branch is disconnected at both ends. TOPO status: TOPO (Tie Open Point Optimization) status is only used with the optional TOPO module to specify whether the switches are allowed to operate during a TOPO analysis. In TOPO, if the switches are unlocked they are free to open and close while the TOPO algorithm is executing. If the status is set to locked, the switches will remain in their current position, either open or closed. 3. To display the switch on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. Place a check mark in the box labeled Results to display results for this switch on the diagram. 5. To add the selected switch to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the switch properties.
3-39
To change the reliability properties for a switch (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA module): 1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a switch (Figure 3-30). 2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2 for further instructions.
Figure 3-30. Switch Property Sheet: DRA Tab
3-40
3.6.6 Changing Transformer Properties

The transformer is another type of branch that connects between two existing nodes. PSS/ADEPT allows you to adjust the transformers physical and electrical characteristics. To change the properties for a transformer: 1. Double-click the transformer to select it and display the Transformer Property sheet, or, to select a transformer or a group of transformers, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Transformer Property sheet (Figure 3-31). Notice that there are five tabs for this property sheet: Main, Tap Control, Regulation, Harmonics and DRA.
Figure 3-31. Transformer Property Sheet: Main Tab 2. In the Main tab, enter/select the properties for your transformer: Name: Each item in the PSS/ADEPT network must have a unique name identifier. The transformer name has no relation to the FROM and TO nodes identified in the upper right of the Transformer Property sheet. The FROM and TO nodes may not be modified on the property sheet. Phasing: Phasing is specified on the FROM side of the transformer (e.g., for a wyedelta transformer, the wye side is the FROM side). When specifying phasing, the
3-41
designation A, B, and C mean the first winding, second winding, and third winding. Thus, if a wye-delta (+30) transformer with A phasing is specified, the winding on the wye side of the transformer from phase A to ground exists, and the winding on the delta side from C to A is installed. Conversely, if a wye-delta (-30) transformer with A phasing is specified, the winding on the wye side of the transformer is still phase A to ground, but the winding on the delta side from A to B is installed. Refer to Appendix A, Section A.1.2 for more information about phasing. Type: Select the transformer connection type: Wye-Wye Wye-Delta (30) Delta-Wye (30) Delta Auto Regulator Delta-Delta Wye Auto Regulator Center Tapped Delta-Delta Center Tapped Delta-Wye (30) Wye-Wye with Phase Shift Wye Auto Z Wye (30) Z Wye (150) Wye-Wye +180
In addition, three-winding transformers, three-legged core transformers, and grounding transformers may be modeled by referring to Appendix A, Sections A.2.3 through A.2.7. Tapped node: Specify which of the two connecting nodes has the load tap-changing capability. In PSS/ADEPT most transformers have the taps on the TO side, so changing the tapped node may also cause the transformer type to flip, e.g., a wye-delta transformer will become a delta-wye. Nameplate rating (kVA/phase): The transformer size is specified in kVA per phase. For single-phase transformers, the value is usually the nameplate rating; for threephase transformers, the entered value will usually be one-third of the transformers nameplate rating. See Appendix A, Section A.2.1 for rules and hints when specifying transformer size. Construction type: Construction type is a 1- to 10-character alphanumeric identifier that refers to a construction type defined in the Construction Dictionary. You may select one of the construction types available in the Construction Dictionary, or you may enter your own (user-defined) unique construction type. Phase shift (deg): Specify in degrees the angle of phase shift. This field will be enabled only when a wye-wye with phase shift transformer type is selected. Voltage: By default, the transformer voltages will be set to the FROM and TO node base voltages. In some cases, the transformer voltages will not match the node
3-42
voltages, e.g., a 13.8 kV transformer being used on a 13.2 kV system. To set the transformer voltage independently: a. Place a check mark in the box labeled User defined. The FROM and TO voltage fields will become enabled. b. Change the FROM side and/or TO side voltage of the transformer. Impedance: All transformers require a leakage impedance; some units also require a second impedance to be specified. A few of the transformers also require a second impedance; the field for entering this second impedance will be enabled when it is needed. Some transformers can have grounding impedances on the FROM, TO or on both sides. Again, the required fields will be enabled when needed. The impedance values needed for each type of transformer, is shown below.
Type Required Values
Wye-Wye, Wye-Wye with phase shift, Leakage Impedance Wye-Wye +180 FROM Side Grounding Impedance TO Side Grounding Impedance Wye-Delta (30) Delta-Wye (30) Delta-Delta, Delta Auto Regulator Wye Auto, Wye Auto Regulator Center Tapped Delta-Delta Center Tapped Delta-Wye (30) Leakage Impedance FROM Side Grounding Impedance Leakage Impedance TO Side Grounding Impedance Leakage Impedance Leakage Impedance Grounding Impedance
Full-winding Leakage Impedance Half-winding Leakage Impedance

Full-winding Leakage Impedance Half-winding Leakage Impedance TO Side Grounding Impedance Leakage Impedance Zero Sequence Impedance FROM Side Grounding Impedance
Z-Wye (30, 180)
Leakage impedance, Full-winding leakage impedance, Half-winding leakage impedance, Zero-sequence impedance: Enter the value in per-unit (pu) based on the Nameplate rating that was specified. Grounding impedance: Enter resistance (R) and reactance (X) in Ohms. Setting R = X = 0 results in the winding solidly grounded. Ratings: The four values are pu of the specified transformer nameplate rating. They are used to check transformer overload after a loadflow. The four values can be manually entered or come from a construction dictionary. 3. To display the transformer on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box (on the Main tab) to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected transformer is in service, click the In service check box, which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the transformer is out of service and is disconnected at both ends.
3-43
5. Place a check mark in the box labeled Results to display results for this transformer on the diagram. 6. Click the Tap Control tab (Figure 3-32) and enter/select the Tap Control properties for your transformer.
Figure 3-32. Transformer Property Sheet: Tap Control Tab Tap Adjustment: Select the load tap changing operation. Your choices include: Taps in the phases are adjusted independently of each other. For Z-Wye transformers independent tap adjustment cannot be selected Taps in all phases are ganged together and have the same setting. The first set of taps control the operation; the others follow. For example, with a phase ABC Wye-Wye transformer, the phase A taps adjust to control the phase A voltage of the regulated node. Taps locked in present position in which the transformer taps will remain "locked" in their current tap position for all subsequent loadflows.
Tap Settings: Specify the present position of the three taps, the Max and Min possible tap settings, and the tap change increment (step). Manually, you can set the taps to any value within the possible range; they do not have to be set at one of the increments. However, if the taps are adjusted during any subsequent loadflow they will moved so
3-44
they correspond to one of the increments. After setting the taps manually, if you do not want them moved during a subsequent loadflow, the "Taps locked in present position" option should be selected. For auto wye transformers, the load changing tap side can be designated as either the TO or FROM side. The taps on the other side can then be used as no load taps. Time delay: There are situations where, two or more transformers, two or more capacitor banks, or a combination of transformers and capacitor banks may be regulated by voltage at some location in a network. In such situations, the transformer tap (capacitor bank) controllers may fight one another trying to control voltage. The time delay is used to prevent these controllers from interacting by defining the order in which they attempt control. Controllers with a short time delay will operate before controllers with a long time delay. A short time delay (i.e., zero) is generally assigned to transformer tap controller closest to the source; increasingly longer time delays are assigned to downstream controllers. In this way, upstream transformers are first used to correct voltage problems. Only if unsuccessful will controllers downstream of the first be used. Time delay is a floating-point number (e.g., 1.5). No specific units are assumed. 7. Click the Regulation tab (Figure 3-33) and enter/select additional Tap Control properties for your transformer:
Figure 3-33. Transformer Property Sheet: Regulation Tab
3-45
Regulated node: Specify the node at which the voltage is to be monitored/regulated to determine if tap changing is necessary. If the specified regulated node is not the transformer TO or FROM node, specify whether the regulated node is on the tapped or untapped side of the transformer so that the tap controller will know which way to move the taps during voltage regulation. If the specified regulated node is not the transformer FROM or TO node, then the compensating impedance, discussed further below, is ignored. When the specified regulated node is not the FROM or TO node, the voltage at the specified node is regulated directly. It is easy for a computer program to look at the voltage of a distance node and do the direct regulation. However, this can be done in the field only if there is some form of communication to send the information back to the tap controllers. Controlled Voltage: Specify the range in which the transformer will attempt to control the voltage at the regulated node. If the regulated node is on the side of the transformer that has a wye winding, the phase-to-ground voltage will be monitored to determine if tap changing is necessary. If a regulated node is on the side with a delta winding, the phase-to-phase voltage will be monitored. Normally, you set the range of the controlled voltage to a value greater than the minimum tap step. Compensating Impedance: The compensating impedance is designed to be used with the auto regulator transformers, either wye or delta; it is enable only for these two transformer types. The value of resistance and reactance entered should be the dial setting of the actual regulator; for this reason the units are volts (V). The PT ratio and CT rating entered should also be that of the actual regulator. Compensating Impedance Calculation: This is a separate activity that calculates auto regulator dial settings for you; it is enabled only for the wye auto or delta auto regulator transformers. The regulator CT and PT values should be filled in before doing the calculation. The downstream node (load center node) is selected and the position of the load center node in relation to the transformer (on the TO side or FROM side) is designated. Clicking the Calculate Impedance button results in the R and X values being filled in. Rotating impedances by 30 for the delta auto regulators is done automatically; the values returned by this activity are meant to be the actual dial settings. At the present time, the single-phase and three-phase delta auto regulators in PSS/ADEPT are connected lagging; leading regulators will be added in a later version. Thus the compensating impedance and its calculation can be used only for lagging connected regulators at the present time. If an open delta auto regulator is specified (delta auto regulator with AB, BC, or CA phasing), then in PSS/ADEPT the first phase is connected lagging and the second phase is leading. For example, with a delta auto regulator with AB phasing specified, the first (A) phase is connected lagging (from A to B) and the second (B) phase is leading (from C to B). In Figure 3-34, you can see pictures of the configuration. If you have an open delta regulator and perform the impedance calculation, you will see that the calculated compensating impedances are different for the two phases; the difference is because the 30 impedance rotation is opposite for leading and lagging regulators.
3-46
Figure 3-34. Delta Autoregulator with AB Phasing At the present time, PSS/ADEPT calculates the compensating impedance only for the wye and delta autoregulators. This compensating impedance is then used, in a loadflow, to calculate a synthetic transformer output voltage. This synthetic voltage, an estimate of the voltage at the remote load center, is used in the transformer tap changing. Although the automatic calculation is available only for the two transformers mentioned above, it can also be used for any transformer with a wye or Z winding on the load center side. If you are using a wye or Z transformer (not a regulator) and want PSS/ADEPT to perform the compensating impedance calculation for you, momentarily insert a wye autoregulator transformer on the downstream side of the transformer and have PSS/ADEPT make the calculation. Copy this value into the Transformer Property sheet, delete the autoregulator and restore the original connection. 8. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the transformer properties.
3-47
To change the harmonic properties for a transformer (visible if you are licensed for the harmonics module): 1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a transformer (Figure 3-35).
Figure 3-35. Transformer Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab Name: The name of the line. This property is for information only and is not editable. Click the Main tab to modify this item. FROM node: The name of the FROM node to which this transformer is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. To node: The name of the TO node to which this transformer is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. Type: Select the type of line representation from the drop-down list. IEEE Model Represents an IEEE line. The modeling of an IEEE Line is described in Chapter 8, Section 8.9.6. Custom Represents a user-defined line model for harmonics. Selection of this item will allow you to define the impedance exponents.
3-48
For custom types, enter the requested values for the following: Positive sequence resistance Positive sequence reactance Grounding sequence resistance Grounding sequence reactance
To change the reliability properties for a transformer (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA module): 1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a transformer (Figure 3-36). 2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2 for further instructions.
Figure 3-36. Transformer Property Sheet: DRA Tab
3-49
3.6.7 Changing Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties

In PSS/ADEPT, a series capacitor/reactor is specified as a connection between two existing nodes. For series capacitor branches, both the positive- and zero-sequence reactance should be negative and equal to each other. The resistance will normally equal zero. For series reactor branches, both the positive- and zero-sequence reactance should be positive. If the reactor is three-phase with a coupling between the phases, the zero-sequence reactance value may be different than the positive-sequence value. For the reactor, winding resistance can be modeled using equal values of positive- and zero-sequence resistance. To change the properties for a series capacitor/reactor: 1. Double-click the series capacitor to select it and display the Series Capacitor Property sheet, or, to select a series capacitor/reactor, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Series Capacitor Property sheet (Figure 3-37).
Figure 3-37. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: Main Tab 2. Enter/select the properties for your series capacitor/reactor: Name: Each item in the PSS/ADEPT network must have a unique name identifier. The series capacitor/reactor name has no relation to the FROM and TO nodes identified in the upper right of the Series Capacitor Property sheet. The specified FROM and TO nodes provide network connectivity information and may not be modified. If you modify
3-50
a series capacitor/reactor name, the names of the nodes between which it is connected will not change. Phasing: The phasing value indicates which phase conductors are present in the network model. In PSS/ADEPT, the available phasing values are specified using any combination of the three characters A, B, and C (e.g., ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, and C). You must select one of the phasing values from the list; you cannot create your own values. If XYZ phasing was specified in a PSS/U raw data file, PSS/ADEPT will convert X to A, Y to B, and Z to C. When the diagram property to display phase markers is selected, phasing is indicated on the one-line diagram where phase A is red, phase B is yellow, and phase C is blue. Nameplate rating (kVA/phase): The nameplate rating is the per-phase kVA rating of the series capacitor or reactor. It is used only (along with the FROM node base voltage) to convert the pu impedances into ohm. Construction type: Construction type is a 1- to 10-character alphanumeric identifier that refers to a construction type defined in the Construction Dictionary. You may select one of the construction types available in the Construction Dictionary, or you may enter your own (user-defined) unique construction type. Impedance: Positive-sequence and zero-sequence resistance and reactance for series capacitors and reactors is specified in pu on the kVA base of the series capacitor/ reactor. You will not be able to edit these fields if you selected a construction type from the Construction Dictionary. If you created your own construction type, you will be able to enter impedance values. Ratings: The series capacitor/reactor rating limits (pu on series capacitor/reactor kVA base) are used to determine whether the series device is overloaded. You may specify up to four series capacitor/reactor rating limits from the Construction Dictionary or your own user-defined limits in the case where a user-defined construction type has been specified. 3. To display the series capacitor/reactor on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected series capacitor/reactor is in service, click the In service check box, which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the series capacitor/reactor is out of service and is disconnected at both ends. 5. Check the box labeled Results to display results for this series capacitor/reactor on the diagram. 6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the series capacitor/reactor properties.
3-51
To change the harmonic properties for a series capacitor/reactor: 1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a series capacitor/reactor (Figure 3-38).
Figure 3-38. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab Name: The name of the series capacitor/reactor. This property is for information only and is not editable. Click the Main tab to modify this item. FROM node: The name of the FROM node to which this series capacitor/reactor is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. TO node: The name of the TO node to which this series capacitor/reactor is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. Impedance Exponents: Enter the impedance exponents for the following: Positive sequence resistance Positive sequence reactance Zero sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance
3-52
To change the reliability properties for a series capacitor/reactor (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA module): 1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a series capacitor/reactor (Figure 3-39). 2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2 for further instructions.
Figure 3-39. Series Capacitor/Reactor Property Sheet: DRA Tab
3-53
Editing a Network Model Editing Shunt Devices
3.7 Editing Shunt Devices

Once youve selected a shunt device type a static load, source, induction machine, synchronous machine, capacitor, or fault you may want to move or copy the device, or change some of its properties. PSS/ADEPT provides editing features to help you modify shunt device properties.
3.7.1 Moving Shunt Devices

You can move the head of the shunt device, and the shunt devices node handle to another position on the same node or to a new node. Figure 3-40 shows several ways to move a shunt device.
NODE2
NODE1
NODE1
NODE1
Figure 3-40. Moving a Shunt Device To move the head of the shunt device: 1. Right-click in the Diagram View, select Toggle>AutoPosition to set AutoPosition flag to "Off". 2. Click over the shunt device you want to move. Notice the solid block "handles" that frame the selected shunt device. 3. Drag the selected shunt device to the desired position on the diagram. The shunt device, and its results box move. To move a node handle of the shunt device: 1. Right-click in the Diagram View, select Toggle>AutoPosition to set AutoPosition flag to "Off". 2. Click over the handle you want to move. 3. Click on the line segment between the symbol and the node to display the port symbol. 4. Select the port symbol, hold the Ctrl key down and drag the selected node handle to the desired position on the same node.
3-54
To move a node handle of the shunt device to a new node: 1. Right-click in the Diagram View, select Toggle>AutoPosition to set AutoPosition flag to "Off". 2. Click on the shunt item you want to move, the port symbol will be displayed on the node. 3. Hold the Ctrl key down and drag the port to a new node.
3.7.2 Copying Shunt Devices

You can copy a shunt device (along with all of its properties) to the Microsoft Windows clipboard and paste it into another application (e.g., Microsoft Word). To copy a shunt device: 1. Select the shunt device you want to copy. Notice the block handles around the shunt device. 2. To copy the selected shunt device to the MS Windows clipboard: Choose either Edit>Copy from the Main Menu; click the Copy button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+C; or right-click, then select Copy. 3. Click on the node to which you want to copy the shunt device. 4. Do one of the following: To paste the copy onto the diagram: Choose either Edit>Paste from the Main Menu; click the Paste button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+V; or right-click, then select Paste. To paste the copy into the Equipment List View: Click anywhere in the Equipment List View, and choose either Edit>Paste from the Main Menu; click the Paste button on the File Toolbar; use the shortcut keystroke Ctrl+V; or right-click, then select Paste. The shunt device and most of its properties will appear on the diagram just above and to the right of the selected shunt device, and in the Equipment List View at the end of the Shunts list. To see the shunt device properties, double-click on the newly added shunt to view its property sheet. Since all shunt label names must be unique, PSS/ADEPT appends a tilde (~) to the shunt name. If you make yet another copy of the same shunt, PSS/ADEPT appends two tildes (~~) to the shunt name, and so on.
3.7.3 Deleting Shunt Devices

You can delete a shunt from the Diagram View. To delete a shunt: 1. Select the shunt. Notice the solid block handles around the shunt. 2. Choose Edit>Delete from the Main Menu, or press the Delete key.
3-55
3.7.4 Changing Static Load Properties

In PSS/ADEPT, load data are entered in nominal load values of kW and kvar for each phase if rectangular display or S(kVA) and pf leading/lagging if polar display. If the load is balanced, only the total load over all phases is required. There is no limitation on the number of loads at a node or the number of loads in each category. Grounded loads are connected A-neutral, B-neutral, C-neutral. Ungrounded loads are connected A-B, B-C, C-A and are entered in fields provided for Phase A, B, and C, respectively. PSS/ADEPT does not support MWh, kWh, or demand loads; see Appendix A for limitations. To change the properties for a static load: 1. Double-click on the static load to select it and display the Static Load Property sheet or, to select a static load, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Static Load Property sheet (Figure 3-41).
Figure 3-41. Static Load Property Sheet: Main Tab 2. Enter/select the properties for the static load: Name: Specify a unique name for the load in the PSS/ADEPT diagram. The load name has no relation to the node to which the load is connected. The node to which the load is connected displays on the property sheet; you may not modify the node. Type: Specify one of the three available load types: constant power, constant impedance, or constant current. The actual load consumed depends upon bus voltage and
3-56
available generation and the type of load specified at a node. Refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.4.3 for information on static load modeling in a load flow solution. Load balance: Specify the load as either balanced or unbalanced. Balanced loads require you to enter total values over all phases. Load connection: Specify the load connection as either grounded or ungrounded. Do not apply grounded-wye loads to a node where no neutral wire exists (i.e., ungrounded delta system). In this situation, specify a delta-connected load. Load Values: If the load is balanced, enter total kW, kvar (rectangular), or total apparent power S and a leading/lagging pf (polar). PSS/ADEPT will automatically divide the total load specified by the number of phases present. If the load is unbalanced, enter the kW, kvar (rectangular), or S and pf leading/lagging (polar) for phases A, B, and C. Grounding impedance: Enter the grounding resistance and reactance of the load (ohms). 3. To display the static load on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected static load is in service, click the In service check box, which is the default setting. 5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this static load on the diagram. 6. To add the selected load to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 7. To add the selected load to an existing load category(ies), click the Categories button, and click the box that precedes the load category you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 8. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the static load properties.
3-57
To change the harmonic properties for a static load: 1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a static load (Figure 3-42).
Figure 3-42. Static Load Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab Name: The name of the static load. This property is for information only and is not editable. Click the Main tab to modify this item. Node: The name of the node to which this load is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. Impedance Exponents: Enter the requested values for the following groups: Static Series Fraction, Resistance and Reactance. Static Parallel Fraction, Resistance and Reactance. Rotating Fraction, Capacity, Resistance, Reactance, Locked R and Locked X. Grounding Resistance and Reactance.
For additional details on the modeling of a static load in harmonics analysis, please refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.9.1.
3-58
To change the reliability properties for a static load (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA module): 1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a static load (Figure 3-43). 2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.3 for further instructions.
Figure 3-43. Static Load Property Sheet: DRA Tab
3-59
3.7.5 Changing MWh Load Properties

Consumer load data may be specified in PSS/ADEPT by entering MWh loads. General consumer loads are converted to kW when an analysis solution is performed and when you choose to scale MWh loads in the network. The REA demand equation from the REA Bulletin 45-2 is used to determine the kW value. This kW value is referred to as the resultant kW. The REA Bulletin 45-2 Demand Tables contain an empirical formula for determining demand from the number of consumers and the kWh/consumer/month. It is used in the program as follows: kW = A * B * SCAL where: A C B E SCAL = = = = =
2 C * 1.0 0.4* C + 0.4* C + 40 The number of consumers.
0.005925 * E0.885 kWh/consumer/month A factor to scale down the load in each line section so that the sum of the line section loads is equal to the REA Bulletin 45-2 formula applied to the total number of consumers in the feeder and the total kWh/consumer/month for the feeder.
The B Factor is the factor used to determine the diversity of load/consumer. The default factor of 0.885 is in the REA demand equation shown in the REA Bulletin 45-2 and may be changed in Analysis Options>General. Consumer loads are entered into the program by specifying the number of consumers and megawatt-hours. The load data is the total amount for the line section or node. The megawatt-hours are the total kilowatt-hours/1000 used by the consumers for a period of one month. Consumer loads are converted to kW on a per phase basis regardless of whether the loads are assigned to a node as balanced or unbalanced. If the loads are entered as balanced loads, then the program divides the loads evenly among the available phases and converts them to kW with the REA demand equation. Resultant kW values must be set to zero in order for a re-calculation to occur. To do this, use the multiple edit functionality to set selected MWh load data at one time. Because the conversion of general consumer loads to kW is based on the total number of consumers and energy consumed as well as the loads of the individual line sections, the boundaries are defined by groups. If a group served by a substation is modeled in the network, then each should be assigned its own group name. Each substation loading that is modeled may be scaled to the actual metered value based on the total consumer loads of its own service area (group). When MWh load is present in the system, the consumer load is converted to kW via a non-linear formula. The formula is linearized, by multiplying the kW by a scale factor. This scale factor is calculated using the following formula: Scale factor = kW factor kW individual kW factor = a b The node group where the MWh load is connected will be used to define these sections.All nodes in the same group are linearized as one section with each group being linearized separately. In some cases you may want to ignore the group boundaries and linearize the system as a whole. To linearize the whole system, select Analysis>Options and choose to linearize by Tree. 3-60 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
To change the properties for a MWh load: 1. Double-click on the MWh load to select it and display the MWh Load Property sheet, or, select a MWh load, right-click, and choose Properties to display the MWh Load Property sheet (Figure 3-44).
Figure 3-44. Mwh Load Property Sheet 2. Enter/select the properties for the MWh load. Name: Specify a unique name for the load in the PSS/ADEPT diagram. The load name has no relation to the node to which the load is connected. The node where this load is connected is displayed on the property sheet; you may not modify its value. Load balance: Specify the load as either balanced or unbalanced. Balanced loads require you to specify total values over all phases. Load connection: Specify the load connection as either grounded (Wye) or ungrounded (Delta). Result display: MWh loads may be converted to have a portion of constant power and constant impedance load. In this case, you may specify whether to view the constant power or constant impedance portion when viewing results on the diagram. Seasonal: There are two types of MWh loads, seasonal (default) and non-seasonal. To specify a seasonal load, place a check mark in the box next to Seasonal.
3-61
Concentrated at the node: This option allows you to choose between dividing the loads equally between the FROM and the TO nodes of a line or placing all of the load at the TO node of the line branch. The default is concentrated at the node or lump all of the consumer load at the TO end. To specify a non-concentrated load, remove the check mark from the box next to Concentrated at the node. Percent constant impedance: You can select the percentage of the load to be treated as constant impedance load rather than constant kVA load. When MWh loads are converted, this percentage will be used to determine the amount of constant impedance load. The remaining portion will be converted and stored as constant power load. The default value is 0% constant impedance. Load values: If the load is balanced, enter the total MWH/month, the number of consumers, the average power factor for the load, and the resultant kW over all phases. If the load is unbalanced, enter each of these values for each of the three phases. If you specify a resultant kW value of zero, the program will calculate the equivalent peak load demand. 3. To display the MWh load on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected MWh load is in service, click the In service check box, which is the default setting. 5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this MWh load on the diagram. 6. To add the selected MWh load to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 7. To add the selected load to an existing load category(ies), click the Categories button and click the box that precedes the category name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 8. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the static load properties.
3-62
3.7.6 Changing Source Properties

Each network, or disjoint portion of a network (island), must have a source. A source is a device that is placed at a node to provide a voltage reference for the network. The impedance for the source is specified in pu on the system kVA base (defined on the Network Property sheet, System tab). In PSS/ADEPT, a three-phase source is treated as a voltage behind an impedance. Positive- and zero-sequence impedance must be defined for each source. Sources are always wye connected and always contain all three phases. In a power flow solution, the source holds positive-sequence node voltage constant. For short circuit and motor starting calculations, the source is treated as a constant voltage behind an impedance. In some cases, only the fault MVA of the source is known. In this case, the fault MVA must be converted into the Thevenin equivalent source impedance. To convert the fault MVA data to per unit sequence impedances, use the following method: 1. Determine positive-sequence impedance from the three-phase fault MVA (MVA-3):
kVA BASE X 1 = ----------------------------------------MVA -3 1000

if an angle (1) is available for the fault MVA we have:
kVA BASE 1 Z 1 = ----------------------------------------MVA -3 1000

therefore,
R 1 = Z 1 cos ( 1 ) X 1 = Z 1 sin ( 1 )
2. Determine the zero-sequence impedance from the single-phase fault MVA (MVA-1):
3 kVA BASE - 2X1 X = ----------------------------------------MVA -1 1000

where X 1 was calculated above. Again, if the angle () of the fault MVA is known, we can determine the complex impedance as follows:
3 kVA BASE - 2 Z 1 1 Z = ----------------------------------------------MVA -1 1000

where 1 and Z 1 are known from (1) above.
3-63
To change the properties for a source: 1. Double-click the source to select it and display the Source Property sheet, or, to select a source or group, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Source Property sheet (Figure 3-45).
Figure 3-45. Source Property Sheet: Main Tab 2. Enter/select the properties for the source: Name: Specify a unique name for the source node on the PSS/ADEPT diagram. The source name is not the node name; the node name is referenced on the property sheet; you may not modify the node. Type: Specify the source type: swing. A swing source attempts to maintain terminal voltage magnitude and angle by adjusting the source's internal voltage. Nominal Voltage (kV): Nominal voltage of the source. Default is the voltage of the connected node. kVA rating: Enter the kVA rating of the source. The default kVA rating will be set to the rating defined in the Default Source Property sheet. Normally, this will be equal to the system base kVA specified in Network Properties. Angle (degrees): Sets the angle of the source with reference to zero degrees. If there is only a single source on the network, set this value to 0.0. If there is more than one
3-64
source, the angle will be used if part of the system had an angle shift due to wye-delta or delta-wye transformer connections. Scheduled voltage (pu of nominal): The scheduled voltage of the source node in per unit of nominal voltage. This is the scheduled voltage of the source that can be either greater than or less than the per unit nominal voltage of the source. Positive sequence resistance and reactance (pu on system kVA base): Specify the positive-sequence source Thevenin resistance and reactance in pu on the system kVA base. Zero sequence resistance and reactance (pu on system kVA base): Specify the zero-sequence source Thevenin resistance and reactance in pu on the system kVA base. Grounding resistance and reactance (ohms): Enter the resistance and reactance of the grounding impedance of the source in absolute physical units. 3. To display the source on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this source on the diagram. 5. To add the selected source to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the source properties.
3-65
To change the harmonic properties for a source: 1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a source (Figure 3-46).
Figure 3-46. Source Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab Name: The name of the source. This property is for information only and is not editable. Click on the Main tab to modify this item. Node: The name of the node to which this source is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. Impedance Exponents: Enter the requested values for the following: Positive sequence resistance Positive sequence reactance Zero sequence resistance Zero sequence reactance Grounding sequence resistance Grounding sequence reactance
For additional information on harmonics modeling for sources, please refer to Chapter 8.
3-66
3.7.7 Changing Induction Machine Properties

Induction machines are modeled by NEMA standard class designs and associated locked rotor codes. The NEMA class designs currently supported are: A, B, C, D, E and locked rotor codes A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, S, T, U, and V. Refer to Appendix E for more information and impedance values for NEMA class designs. If you want to model a machine that does not fit the properties of a NEMA design, you can enter the impedances of the machine directly on the Impedance tab. In PSS/ADEPT, the induction machine defaults to NEMA design type B; the information specified in the PSS/U Machine Dictionary is not used. Induction machine impedances such as armature resistance, transient impedance, subtransient impedance, and locked rotor impedance are automatically determined based on the NEMA design type; they are displayed on the Induction Machine Property sheet. You can specify induction machine units in either hp (NEMA) or kW (IEC). Loading data can be specified as real electrical power (kW) at the machine input terminal or mechanical power (hp) at the machine shaft. Selecting real electrical power will display "Terminal real power (+) consumed, (-) delivered", selecting mechanical power will display "Shaft power (+) motor, (-) generator". Units of electrical power are always kW, however, if mechanical power is selected, the shaft power can be specified in either hp or kW. The mechanical rating is specified as either kW or hp depending upon which mechanical power units are selected. New machines will be defaulted to hp (NEMA) units and loading as shaft power (hp). You can change the defaults by modifying the default induction machine properties. The Impedance tab allows you to view machine impedances, power factor (pf), efficiency, and slip at full load. For NEMA type machines, power factor, efficiency, and slip at full load, are constants determined from the impedances specified for the NEMA designs. For non-NEMA type machines, the power factor, efficiency, and slip are calculated based on the user-entered values for impedance. To see the updated power factor, efficiency, and slip, move to another field on the screen. Power factor, efficiency, and slip are read-only (not editable). Power factor and efficiency are used to calculate the kVA base of the machine needed for the induction machine power flow calculations. Altering the machine type and/or its associated impedance values will cause the machine curves to change. Machine transient and sub-transient impedances may be modified for use in short circuit calculations. Induction machine data modified in PSS/ADEPT are not automatically saved to the PSS/U Machine Dictionary file. Save the network model as a PSS/ADEPT (*.adp) file to preserve the induction machine characteristics.
3-67
To change the properties for an induction machine: 1. Double-click the induction machine to select it and display the Induction Machine Property sheet, or, to select an induction machine, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Induction Machine Property sheet. Notice that there are four tabs for the property sheet: Main, Impedances, Start-Up and Harmonics.
Figure 3-47. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Main Tab The Main tab is used to enter induction machine characteristics and to establish the location of the induction machine within the network. 2. Under the Main tab, enter/select the properties for the induction machine: Name: Specify a unique name for the induction machine on the PSS/ADEPT diagram. This is not the name of the node to which the machine is attached. The node name appears on the property sheet to indicate the location of the machine in the network. If you modify the machine name, the name of the node to which it is attached will not be affected. Mechanical Power Units: Specify the mechanical power units of the machine. hp (NEMA) kW (IEC)
Real electrical power at machine input terminal (must be kW): Select this option if you want to specify real electrical power at the machine input terminal.
3-68
Mechanical power at machine shaft (hp or kW): Select this option if you want to specify mechanical power at the machine shaft. Terminal real power (+) consumed, (-) delivered: If you have selected the real electrical power option, enter the terminal real power. Positive values indicate power will be consumed, negative values indicate power will be delivered. Shaft power (+) motor, (-) generator: If you have selected the shaft power option, enter the shaft power. Positive values will indicate a motor; negative values will indicate a generator. Mechanical rating: Enter the electrical rating of the machine in kW or hp. This value is used to convert per-unit impedances into ohms; kW or hp is indicated by the mechanical power units you have previously specified. Rated (nominal) terminal voltage (kV): Nominal voltage of the machine is either lineto-line or line-to-neutral machine voltage in kV, depending on the input voltage flag you selected in the Network Property sheets System tab. If no voltage is specified, the voltage of the node where this machine is connected will be used as the nominal machine voltage. This value is used along with the nominal machine size to convert pu impedances into ohm. Grounding impedance: Enter the grounding resistance and reactance of the induction machine (ohms). 3. To display the induction machine on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box (under the Main tab) to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected induction machine is in service, click the In service check box (under the Main tab), which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the induction machine is out of service. 5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this induction machine on the diagram. 6. To add the selected induction machine to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 7. To add the selected induction machine to an existing load category(ies), click the Categories button (under the Main tab), and click the box that precedes the load category you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment.
3-69
8. Click the Impedances tab (Figure 3-48) and enter/select the impedances for the induction machine.
Figure 3-48. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Impedances Tab Power factor: The power factor of the machine. This read-only field displays the calculated power factor of the machine based on NEMA design, or user-entered impedances. Efficiency: The efficiency of the machine. This read-only field displays the calculated efficiency of the machine based on NEMA design, or user-entered impedances. Slip at full load: The slip of the machine at full load. This read-only field displays calculated slip based on NEMA design, or user-entered impedances. Locked rotor code: Check the locked rotor code box to specify a locked rotor code letter. This option is only available if a NEMA design has been previously selected. Armature R (pu): The armature leakage resistance of the machine in pu on the machine base. Armature X (pu): The armature leakage reactance of the machine in pu on the machine base. Inner cage R (pu): The resistance of the inner cage winding in pu on the machine base. Inner cage X (pu): The reactance of the inner cage winding in pu on the machine base.
3-70
Outer cage R (pu): The resistance of the outer cage winding in pu on the machine base. Outer cage X (pu): The reactance of the outer cage winding in pu on the machine base. Locked rotor R and X (pu): The locked rotor resistance and reactance is used to determine the starting current of the machine in the motor starting calculation. This value is automatically calculated for each standard NEMA design type A, B, C, D, or E. NEMA design type B is the default for all induction machines imported from a PSS/U raw data file. Magnetizing X (pu): The magnetizing (air gap) reactance of the machine. Reactance is given in pu on the machine base. NEMA design type: PSS/ADEPT supports five standard NEMA class design induction machines: type A, B, C, D, and E. The standard characteristics of these machines are used to calculate the induction machine equivalent circuit parameters (see Appendix E). Selection of a specific design type will cause the impedance values to be recalculated. Subtransient X (pu): The subtransient reactance of the machine in pu on the machine base. Transient X (pu): The transient reactance of the machine in pu on the machine base. The induction machine torque, current and power factor versus speed plot is displayed. You can select to display torque, current, or speed by placing a check mark next to the text provided.
3-71
9. Click the Start-Up tab (Figure 3-49) and enter/select the starting transformer information that will be used in a motor starting analysis.
Figure 3-49. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Start-Up Tab The use of a starting transformer is optional. Use autotransformer: In PSS/ADEPT, you can connect the starting motor with a series-connected autotransformer starter (starting compensator) to reduce the motor in-rush current. Click the Use autotransformer check box to place a check mark there. If you do not select the series start-up autotransformer, the motor representation starts with full voltage applied to the terminals. Starting transformer resistance and reactance (pu): The autotransformer impedance is specified on the base of the machine and defaults to a resistance 0.01 and a reactance of 0.05. Starting transformer tap (pu): Specify the tap position of the autotransformer. The tap is assumed to be on the machine side and defaults to a nominal ratio (1.0). 10. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the induction machine properties.
3-72
To change the harmonic properties for an induction machine: 1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of an induction machine (Figure 3-50).
Figure 3-50. Induction Machine Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab Name: The name of the induction machine. This property is for information only and is not editable. Click on the Main tab to modify this item. Node: The name of the node to which this machine is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. Impedance Exponents: Enter the requested values for the following: Positive sequence resistance Positive sequence reactance Grounding sequence resistance Grounding sequence reactance
For additional information on harmonics modeling for induction machines, please refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.9.2.
3-73
3.7.8 Changing Synchronous Machine Properties

Synchronous machines are modeled by specifying the machine characteristics in the PSS/U Machine Dictionary. When you import a PSS/U raw data file into PSS/ADEPT, the synchronous machine parameters specified in the Machine Dictionary file armature resistance, transient reactance, subtransient reactance, zero-sequence impedance, locked rotor impedance, and starting transformer impedance are used. If there are no machines in the dictionary representing the given machine type, PSS/ADEPT will assign default values to the machine impedances. Refer to Appendix F to obtain the actual default values. To change the properties for a synchronous machine: 1. Double-click the synchronous machine to select it and display the Synchronous Machine Property sheet, or, to select a synchronous machine, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Synchronous Machine Property sheet (Figure 3-51). Notice that there are four tabs for the property sheet: Main, Impedances, StartUp and Harmonics. The Main tab is used to enter synchronous machine characteristics and to establish the machine location within the network.
Figure 3-51. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Main Tab 3-74 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
2. Under the Main tab, enter/select the properties for the synchronous machine: Name: Specify a unique name for the synchronous machine on the PSS/ADEPT diagram. This is not the name of the node to which the machine is connected. The node name appears on the property sheet to indicate the location of the machine in the network. If you modify the machine name, the name of the node to which it is attached will not be affected. Machine type: Select the type of machine from the following: Constant power, PV Machine, or Swing Source. A constant power machine A PV Machine A swing source
Regulated node: Node where voltage of the machine is regulated. Connection: Specify whether the machine is wye or delta connected. Nominal machine size (kVA): The nominal machine size is the electrical rating of the machine. This value is only used to convert pu impedances into ohms. Nominal machine voltage (kV): Nominal voltage of the machine is either line-to-line or line-to-neutral voltage in kV, depending on the input voltage flag you selected on the Network Property sheet System tab. If no voltage is specified, the base voltage of the node where this machine is connected will be used as the nominal machine voltage. This value is used along with the nominal machine size to convert pu impedances into ohms. Scheduled real power consumed (kW): Enter the scheduled real power consumed in kW. This value is enabled only when a constant power or PV machine has been selected. Scheduled reactive power consumed (kvar): Enter the scheduled reactive power consumed in kvar. Scheduled voltage (pu of node base voltage): The scheduled voltage is the terminal voltage to be held by the machine voltage regulator. This value is entered in pu of the base voltage of the node where the machine is located. Scheduled voltage angle: Scheduled voltage angle in degrees. Max. reactive power output and Min. reactive power output (pu of machine rating): These fields specify the minimum and maximum reactive power output of the machine in pu of the nominal machine rating. 3. To display the synchronous machine on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box (under the Main tab) to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected synchronous machine is in service, click the In service check box (under the Main tab), which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the synchronous machine is out of service. 5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this synchronous machine on the diagram.
3-75
6. To add the selected synchronous machine to an existing group(s), click the Groups button (under the Main tab), and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 7. To add the selected synchronous machine to an existing category(ies), click the Categories button (under the Main tab), and click the box that precedes the load category you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 8. Click the Impedances tab (Figure 3-52) to view the impedance properties for the synchronous machine.
Figure 3-52. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Impedances Tab Impedance model: Select the impedance model from the available list of the following model types: Custom: A custom machine is a user-defined custom machine type. Enter the impedances of the machine in the fields provided on the property sheet. Defaults are provided which represent a small steam turbine.
3-76
Steam turbine large: The associated impedances for a large (several hundred MW round rotor machine) steam turbine will be automatically placed in the fields on the property sheet. Steam turbine small: The associated impedances for a small (less than 100 MW round rotor machine) steam turbine will be automatically placed in the fields on the property sheet. Hydro w/ damper: The associated impedances for a hydro with damper windings (salient pole machine with damper windings) will be automatically placed in the fields on the property sheet. Hydro w/o damper: The associated impedances for a hydro machine (salient pole) without damper windings will be automatically placed in the fields on the property sheet. Combustion turbine: The associated impedances for a combustion turbine will be automatically placed in the fields on the property sheet. A combustion turbine is represented as a small round rotor machine.
Based on your selection, values will be appropriately disabled on the property sheet. Synchronous machine default values were obtained from various examples found in textbooks and other technical literature for typical machines. Rotor type: Select the rotor type from the available list: Round rotor solid steel rotor Salient pole gaps between poles Based on your selection, values will be appropriately disabled on the property sheet. Has damper windings: Indicate whether the machine has damper windings by clicking within the box. A check mark indicates the machine has damper windings. This option is only available for custom, and hydro impedance models with a salient pole rotor type. Reactances Subtransient reactance (pu): The subtransient reactance of the machine is used to determine the fault current contribution of the machine during a fault analysis. This value is specified for both the direct and quadrature axes. Synchronous reactance (pu): The direct and quadrature synchronous reactance of the machine Transient reactance (pu): The transient reactance of the machine is used to determine the fault current contribution of the machine during a fault analysis. This value is specified for both the direct and quadrature axes.
Time constants Open circuit subtransient (sec): The time constant for the direct-axis (Daxis) and quadrature-axis (Q-axis). The default is 0.35 seconds. Open circuit transient (sec): The time constant for the direct-axis and quadrature-axis. The default value is 7.0 seconds.
3-77
Impedances Armature resistance (pu): Armature resistance is the machine's resistance at synchronous speed. Negative sequence resistance (pu): The negative sequence resistance of the machine. Resistance is given in per unit on the machine kVA base. Locked rotor resistance and reactance (pu): The locked rotor resistance and reactance of the machine is used to determine the starting current of the machine in motor starting analysis. Zero sequence resistance and reactance (pu): The zero-sequence impedance of the machine specified in pu. Grounding impedance: The grounding impedance of the machine in absolute physical units (ohms).
Saturation Coefficients Saturation coefficients: The saturation coefficients of the machine at 1.0 pu and 1.2 pu no-load terminal voltage.
Mechanical Inertia constant (sec): The inertia constant of the machine in seconds.
9. Click the Start-Up tab (Figure 3-53) and enter/select the start-up properties for the synchronous machine.
3-78
Figure 3-53. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Start-Up Tab Use the Start-Up Property sheet to specify the autotransformer data that are used during the motor start analysis. Use autotransformer: You can connect the starting motor with a series-connected autotransformer starter (starting compensator) to reduce the motor in-rush current. Click the Use autotransformer check box to place a check mark there. If you do not select the series start-up autotransformer, the motor representation starts with full voltage applied to the terminals. Starting transformer resistance and Starting transformer reactance (pu): The autotransformer impedance is specified on the base of the machine and defaults to 0.0. Starting transformer tap (pu): Specify the tap position of the auto transformer. The tap is assumed to be on the machine side and defaults to a nominal ratio (1.0). 10. Click the OK button to accept your changes to all of the synchronous machine properties.
3-79
To change the harmonic properties for a synchronous machine: 1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a synchronous machine (Figure 3-54).
Figure 3-54. Synchronous Machine Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab Name: The name of the induction machine. This property is for information only and is not editable. Click on the Main tab to modify this item. Node: The name of the node to which this machine is connected. This property is for information only and is not editable. Impedance Exponents: Enter the requested values for the following: Positive sequence resistance Positive sequence reactance Grounding sequence resistance Grounding sequence reactance
3-80
For additional information on harmonics modeling for synchronous machines, please refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.9.3.
3.7.9 Changing Capacitor Properties

In PSS/ADEPT, there is no limitation on the number of capacitors that may be placed at a node. The total capacitance at each node is the sum of the fixed and switched kvar used. Fixed capacitor banks require a minimum amount of data. Switched capacitor banks require additional information. If the capacitor type is fixed, the switched capacitor fields will not be editable fields. To change the properties of your capacitor: 1. Double-click the capacitor to select it and display the Capacitor Property sheet, or, to select a capacitor, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Capacitor Property sheet (Figure 3-55).
Figure 3-55. Capacitor Property Sheet: Main Tab
3-81
2. To change the properties of the capacitor: Name: Specify a unique name for the capacitor on the PSS/ADEPT diagram. The node name appears on the property sheet to indicate the location of the capacitor in the network. If you modify the capacitor name, the name of the node to which it is attached will not be affected. Nominal voltage of capacitor bank (kV): Specify the nominal voltage of the capacitor bank. This voltage may be either line-to-line or line-to-neutral; depending upon which input voltage flag has been specified. If the nominal voltage is not specified, it defaults to the base voltage of the node where the capacitor is placed. Reactive power capacity: Capacitor kvar at node base voltage and fraction switched in are entered based on whether the capacitor is balanced or unbalanced. For a fixed capacitor, the kvar is assumed to be 100% switched in. The field for fraction switched in is enabled for switched capacitors only. If the capacitor is balanced, only the total kvar over all phases is entered. If the capacitor is unbalanced, kvar at each phase may be entered along with the fraction of kvar that is currently in use. A value of 1.0 indicates 100 percent of the kvar is currently in use. Type: Specify the capacitor as fixed or switched. Connection: Specify the capacitor connection as delta (ungrounded) or wye (grounded). Balance: Specify whether the capacitor is balanced (equal kvar between all phases) or unbalanced. Switched Capacitor Properties: If the capacitor type is switched, specify the following additional capacitor properties (if the capacitor is fixed, this section will be grayed out): Regulated Node: If this node is specified and it is not the same node on which the capacitor is located, then PSS/ADEPT will monitor the voltage at this regulated node. Minimum and Maximum Regulated Voltage (pu): Specify the minimum and maximum voltage allowed at the regulated node. Switching Increment: This value is equivalent to the portion of the capacitor kvar that will be placed at the node when the largest pu voltage change at any node is less than 0.01 during the load flow solution. The switching increment is used only when the solution option to switch capacitors (see Chapter 4, Section 4.4.1) has been selected. The switching increment is specified as a decimal value between 0.0 and 1.0, where 1.0 is equal to 100%. Switching Priority: If there is more than one switched capacitor regulating the same node, you can specify a priority to indicate the order in which the capacitor is switched on. This option is provided for raw data compatibility and is not currently used in PSS/ADEPT. Fraction Switched In: Indicates the fraction of the kvar used, where 1.0 (100%) uses all kvar and 0.0 (0%) uses no kvar. This fraction does not indicate in-service status. PSS/ADEPT can adjust this fraction in the load flow solution when the capacitor switching option is turned on (see Chapter 4, Section 4.4.1). Ungrounded: Check this box if the capacitor bank is not fully grounded. Grounding impedance: Enter the grounding resistance and reactance in ohms.
3-82
Time delay: There are situations where voltage at some location in a network may be influenced by two or more transformers (capacitor banks). In such situations, the transformer tap (capacitor bank) controllers may fight one another trying to control voltage. The time delay is used to prevent these controllers from interacting by defining the order in which they attempt control. Controllers with a short time delay will operate before controllers with a long time delay. A short time delay (i.e., zero) is generally assigned to transformer tap controller closest to the source; increasingly longer time delays are assigned to downstream controllers. In this way, upstream transformers are first used to correct voltage problems. Only if unsuccessful will controllers downstream of the first be used. Time delay is a floating-point number (e.g., 1.5). No specific units are assumed. 3. To display the capacitor on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected capacitor is in service, click the In service check box, which is the default setting. Note that a capacitor bank may be in service even though the fraction switched in is equal to zero. 5. To display analysis results on the diagram for this capacitor, place a check mark in the box labeled Results. 6. To add the selected capacitor to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. 7. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the capacitor properties.
3.7.10 Changing Standard Fault Properties

A fault is a shunt device that is placed on an existing node in the network. When you perform a fault calculation, nodes that have connected fault devices will be faulted during the solution. A fault is specified by the node to which it is attached, and by the type of fault that will be placed at the node. Any number of standard faults may be placed at a node. Valid fault types are: three-phase-to-ground phase-to-ground phase-to-ground through an impedance phase-to-phase phase-to-phase-to-ground ungrounded three-phase
For all fault types that are not three-phase-to-ground or ungrounded three-phase, you must specify the phase at which the fault occurs. If you select the phase-to-ground through impedance fault type, the impedance values display. The fault impedance may be entered and adjusted from the Analysis Options Property sheet under the Short Circuit tab (Chapter 4, Figure 4-15).
3-83
To change the fault properties: 1. Double-click the fault to select it and display the Fault Property sheet, or, to select a fault or a group of faults, right-click, and choose Properties to display the Fault Property sheet (Figure 3-56).
Figure 3-56. Fault Property Sheet 2. Enter/select the properties for the fault: Name: Each item in the PSS/ADEPT network must have a unique name identifier. The fault name has no relation to the node to which it is attached. The node name may not be modified. Type: Specify the type of fault you want to apply at the node. Valid fault types are: three-phase-to-ground, phase-to-ground, phase-to-ground through impedance, phase-to-phase, phase-to-phase-to-ground, and ungrounded three-phase. Phasing: If the fault type is not three-phase, select the phase at which the fault occurs. If you select the three-phase fault type, the phasing will be set to ABC and you will not be able to edit the phasing field. 3. To display the fault on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To display analysis results on the diagram for this fault, place a check mark in the box labeled Results. 5. To indicate that the selected fault is in service, click the In service check box, which is the default setting. If a fault calculation is performed, an in-service fault will be considered and the results will be available on the diagram and in the shunt current report. If the fault is out of service, it will be invisible to the short circuit analysis. This option allows you to remove fault devices from the system without permanently deleting them from the network. 6. To add the selected fault to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment 7. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the fault properties.
3-84
Editing a Network Model Workspace Management
3.8 Workspace Management

PSS/ADEPTs Workspace Management feature allows you to capture a customized environment for future use. You can save the current toolbar and window positions, and restore this workspace either automatically the next time you start the PSS/ADEPT application, or at any point while working in PSS/ADEPT. Additionally, network diagram data and options may be saved with the workspace. There is no limit to the number of workspaces you can create. You may modify the application views and toolbars. For example, you may choose to hide the Equipment List View and display only the Diagram Toolbar. For more information on modifying the application views, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.1. To open the most recently saved workspace automatically when you start PSS/ADEPT: 1. Choose File>Program Settings from the Main Menu. 2. Click the Restore last workspace at start-up box. A check mark displays in the box. 3. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. The next time you start PSS/ADEPT, the most recently saved workspace will display. To retrieve an existing workspace: 1. Choose File>Workspace>Open from the Main Menu. The Open Workspace dialog (Figure 3-57) displays a list of previously saved workspaces.
Delete Move Up Move Down
Figure 3-57. Open Workspace Dialog 2. Click to highlight the name of the workspace you want to display. 3. Click the Open button to display the workspace. Additionally, the Open Workspace dialog allows you to add new workspaces, remove existing workspaces, save current workspaces, and order existing workspaces (up or down) on the list.
3-85
Editing a Network Model Workspace Management
To create a new workspace: 1. Open a blank PSS/ADEPT diagram or open a PSS/ADEPT diagram from which you want to create a new workspace. 2. Make changes to your toolbar display and/or location if necessary. 3. Make changes to the diagram properties if necessary. 4. To save the new workspace, choose File>Workspace>Save from the Main Menu. The Save Workspace dialog displays. 5. Click the New (Insert) the new workspace. button and, in the entry space that appears, type a name for
6. Press the Enter key. The system prompts "Save new workspace?" 7. Click the Yes button to save the workspace. To delete an existing workspace: 1. Choose File>Workspace>Open from the Main Menu. The Open Workspace dialog displays. 2. Click (and highlight) the name of the workspace you want to delete. 3. Click the Delete To save the current workspace: 1. Choose File>Workspace>Save from the Main Menu. The Save Workspace dialog displays. 2. Click the New (Insert) the workspace. button, and in the entry space that appears, type a name for button to delete the workspace. The workspace is deleted.
3. Click the OK button to save the workspace. To change the order of workspaces on the list: 1. Choose File>Workspace>Open from the Main Menu. The Open Workspace dialog displays. 2. Click (and highlight) the name of the workspace you want to reposition. 3. Click the Up Arrow the Down Arrow button to move the workspace up one position in the list or click button to move the workspace down one position in the list.
3-86
Editing a Network Model Load and Machine Scaling
3.9 Load and Machine Scaling

PSS/ADEPT has three scaling features for loads and machines. Load scaling allows you to change the real and imaginary power consumed by loads on the network. Machine scaling allows you to modify the power drawn or supplied by synchronous and induction machines connected to the network. Optionally, you may modify machine capacity. MWh load scaling allows you to change the number of consumers, MWh/month, average power factor and resultant kW.
In each case, the scaling is applied to items currently selected. You may select a single load or machine, or you may select a group of items that includes loads or machines. Scaling will then be applied only to items of the appropriate type. In both cases, scaling can result in a value of zero. This means that further scaling will have no effect since all scaling is done with multiplication. If you want to change a quantity that has a value of zero you will have to assign it a nonzero value in the appropriate item property sheet.
3.9.1 Load Scaling

To scale loads: 1. Select a single load or group of items containing loads on the diagram. 2. Choose Network>Scale Loads from the Main Menu. The Scale Loads dialog displays.
Figure 3-58. Scale Loads Dialog: Magnitude Scaling
3-87
3. Enter/select the scaling you want to be done: Scaling Mode: Select either Magnitude Scaling (Figure 3-58) or Reactive Power Scaling (Figure 3-59). Magnitude Scaling: If you select the Magnitude Scaling mode, select one of the four available options: Multiply P&Q by: Allows you to apply a fixed scale factor to both P and Q. Scale P&Q so total P is: Allows you to specify a desired total value for P from which a scale factor will be calculated and applied to both P and Q. Scale P&Q so total Q is: Allows you to specify a desired value for Q from which a scale factor will be calculated and applied to both P and Q. Scale P&Q so total S is: Allows you to specify a desired value for S from which a scale factor will be calculated and applied to both P and Q.
Figure 3-59. Scale Loads Dialog: Reactive Power Scaling Reactive/Power Factor Scaling: If you select the Reactive Power scaling mode, select one of the three available options: Multiply Q by: Applies the specified scale factor to Q only for all selected loads. Adjust Q, leave P constant so pf is: Allows you to specify a desired value for power factor. A scale factor for Q will be calculated, holding P constant, to achieve the desired pf. Adjust P&Q, leave S constant so pf is: Allows you to specify a desired value for power factor, and will scale P and Q independently to keep S constant.
4. Click the Apply button to scale the loads.
3-88
The Totals section displays the totals for the loads in the current selection. It contains the total number of loads and the total power for the selected loads expressed as real and imaginary power (P and Q) as well as apparent power and power factor (S and pf).
3.9.2 Machine Scaling

To scale machines: 1. Select a synchronous or induction machine, or select a group of items containing machines. 2. Choose Network>Scale Machines from the Main Menu. The Scale Machines dialog displays (Figure 3-60).
Figure 3-60. Scale Machines Dialog The Totals section displays the totals for the machines in the current selection. The number of induction machines, the number of synchronous machines, and the total number of machines is displayed. For each of these, the number drawing power, the number supplying power, and the total number is shown. Also displayed are the total real power and the total machine rating for the selected machines.
3-89
3. Enter/select the scaling you want to be done: Scaling Options: Specify various scaling options for the current selection: Scale all machines (Induction and Synchronous); or Induction machines only; or Synchronous machines only. Scale machines supplying real power; or machines drawing real power; or both (drawing and supplying real power). Scale machine power only; or machine power and machine size.
Scale type: Specify the scale factor. You may choose to specify the scale factor directly or to have the program calculate a scale factor to achieve a desired power level. 4. Click the Apply button to scale the loads.
3.9.3 MWh Load Scaling

MWh load scaling is used to scale selected MWh/month and number of consumers to implement a year-to-year growth and to scale the resultant kW to match meters on the system. Since this scaling activity operates on a selection, use the selection tools provided to select the MWh loads to scale. If you wish to scale all of the MWh loads, you can use the selection tool in combination with the selection filter to select all of the MWh load shunt items. To scale the MWh loads: 1. Select a single MWh load or a group of MWh loads on the Diagram or Tree View. 2. Choose Network>Scale MWh Loads from the Main Menu. The Scale MWh Loads dialog displays (Figure 3-61). The total number of MWh loads selected is displayed along with the total number of MWh/month, number of consumers and average power factor is displayed. The resultant kW may be equal to zero. To calculate the resultant kW, click the Calculate button to update the values of resultant kW.
Figure 3-61. Scale MWh Loads Dialog 3-90 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
3. Enter/select the scaling you want to be done: Apply to: Choose whether you want the scaling function to apply to seasonal MWh loads only, non-seasonal MWh loads only, or both. Multiply MWh/month by: Allows you to apply a fixed scale factor to the MWH/month. Multiply number of consumers by: Allows you to apply a fixed scale factor to the number of consumers. Multiply resultant kW by: Allows you to apply a fixed scale factor to the resultant kW. Scale MWh/month so total is: Allows you to specify a desired value for MWh/month. Scale number of consumers so total is: Allows you to specify a desired value for the number of consumers. Scale resultant kW so total is: Allows you to specify a desired value for the resultant kW. Scale average PF so total is: Allows you the specify a desired value for the average PF.
3.9.4 Automatic Load Scaling

Automatic load scaling is used to scale a set of loads upward or downward until a target power (or current) is obtained at a specified "upstream" branch in the network. The set of scalable loads may consist of static loads, induction machines and synchronous machines. The location of the measured power (or current) is specified at the FROM or TO end of a Line, Transformer, Switch or Series Capacitor. During the automatic load scaling, all selected loads are scaled together. That is, the same resulting scale factor will be applied to all loads until the measured power (or current) matches the target power (or current). Multiplying a load by a scaling factor adjusts its scheduled power. The actual power consumed by a load after its scheduled power is adjusted is determined from a subsequent load flow calculation. The scheduled powers are adjusted as follows: Static loads: Pschednew = Qschednew = Pschedorig x Qschedorig x K K
Adjustments are made to the active and reactive power values of all phases in the load. Induction machines: Pschednew = Sizenew = Pschedorig x Sizeorig x K K
Machine base size is only modified if the option to adjust machine base and power together is selected.
3-91
Synchronous machines: Pschednew = Sizenew Qminnew Qmaxnew = = = Pschedorig x Sizeorig Qminorig Qmaxorig x x x K K K K
Machine base size and the minimum and maximum reactive Var limits are only modified if the option to adjust machine base and power together is selected. where: Psched Qsched Size Qmin Qmax K To scale loads: 1. Select a single static load, synchronous machine or induction machine, or a group of loads and machines on the Diagram or Tree View. Optionally, the branch whose power (or current) is to be targeted may also be included in the selection. Since the scaling operates on a selection, use the selection tools provided to select the loads to be scaled. If you wish to scale a particular set of loads, use the selection tool in combination with the selection filter. 2. Choose Network>Automatic Load Scaling from the Main Menu. The Automatic Load Scaling dialog will be displayed (Figure 3-62). The static loads and machines selected will be displayed along with their corresponding power totals. = = = = = = Scheduled real power. Scheduled reactive power. Machine base size. Minimum reactive var limit. Maximum reactive var limit. Scaling factor, as determined by the Automatic Load Scaling analysis.
3-92
Figure 3-62. Automatic Load Scaling Dialog 3. In the Main tab, select the automatic load scaling properties: Metered/Measured Branch: Select the Line, Switch, Transformer or Series Capacitor to be measured. If a branch had previously been selected via the Diagram or Tree View, it will automatically be displayed in the field. The actual FROM and TO nodes provide network connectivity information and cannot be modified. If any selected loads or machines are upstream of the specified measured branch then a warning message will appear in the lower portion of the window (Figure 363). Although the program will attempt to scale selected loads upstream of a measured branch, this is not typical practice and an alternate branch should be selected.
Figure 3-63. Warning Message
3-93
Measurement Node: Allows for the selection of either the FROM or TO end of the selected line to measured. The selection of the measured Line, Switch, Transformer or Series Capacitor, along with the specification of the FROM or TO end will cause the corresponding Average current, Maximum current and Total KVA values to be displayed in the Original and Target boxes within the window. The Original values provide information for the measured branch and cannot be modified. Measurements: Choose one of the measurement types and enter a corresponding Target Value for the measured Line, Transformer, Switch or Series Capacitor. Average Current, Amps: Allows you to specify a desired target value for the average phase current at the metered end of the selected branch. Maximum Current, Amps: Allows you to specify a desired target value for the maximum phase current at the metered end of the selected branch. Total KVA: Allows you to specify a desired target value for the total KVA at the metered end of the selected branch.
A new Target Value may be directly entered into the field provided, or the value shown can be increased or decreased in blocks of 10 by clicking on the corresponding "up" or "down" arrows to the right of the Target Value fields. Load Group/Loads: All selected static loads, induction machines and synchronous machines are recorded in the list box. Adjust machine base and power together: This option is only activated when an induction machine or synchronous machine is highlighted ("clicked on") within the list box. When activated, a check mark in this box will cause the machine base and power of the corresponding machine to be scaled together. Otherwise, only the machines power is scaled. The Totals section provides information on the selected loads and machines and may not be modified. The following information is provided: The total number of static loads selected, total power expressed as real and imaginary power (P and Q), apparent power (S), and power factor (pf). The total number of induction and synchronous machines selected, total real power and total size.
3-94
4. On the Options tab, various solution parameters may be defined and selected (Figure 3-64).
Figure 3-64. Options Dialog Solution Tolerance: Sets the accuracy required for the automatic load scaling algorithm to be considered solved. This value is completely independent of the solution tolerance value used for the standard load flow solution. Max Iterations: Sets the maximum number of allowable iterations to be performed during the automatic load scaling optimization. This value is completely independent of the iteration limit value set for the standard load flow solution. Max Negative Scale Factor attempts: Sets the maximum number of times the scale factor can attempt to fall below zero before the automatic load scaling algorithm will terminate. Min Scale Factor Value: Sets the minimum acceptable value of the scale factor. If the scale factor is calculated to be below this value, then automatic load scaling will terminate with an error message.
3-95
Max Scale Factor Value: Sets the maximum acceptable value of the scale factor. If the scale factor is calculated to be below this value, then automatic load scaling will terminate with an error message. Adjust Switched Capacitors: If you select this option, all switched capacitor banks will be allowed to adjust during the scaling operation. The value is adjusted based on the switching increment, the regulated voltage range, and the regulated node specified on the Capacitor Property sheet. If this option is not selected, the status of switched capacitor banks will not be changed during the load scaling analysis. Adjust Transformer Taps: If you select this option, all transformers will be adjustable during the scaling operation. If this option is not selected, all transformer tap adjustment is blocked, regardless of the status of individual transformers. In this situation, the transformer taps will be locked to the current settings specified in the Transformer Property sheet. 5. Click the OK button to perform the automatic load scaling. If the load scaling is successful, the results are displayed in a new Load Scaling Results dialog (Figure 3-65).
Figure 3-65. Load Scaling Results Dialog The following information is presented in the Load Scaling Results window: Loads: The list of static loads, induction machines and synchronous machines selected for inclusion in the automatic load scaling. Scale Factor: The resulting scale factor value applied to each of the selected static loads, induction machines and synchronous machines. This is the value by which the selected loads must be scaled so that the measured power (or current) of the selected branch meets the target value specified. Original P (KW): The actual real power in KW, listed by phase (A,B,C) for each static load, synchronous machine and induction machine.
3-96
Scheduled P (KW): The scheduled real power in KW with the new scale factor applied. Values are listed by phase (A,B,C) for static loads and as a single total power value for synchronous and induction machines. Original Q (Kvar): The actual reactive power in kVar, listed by phase (A,B,C) for each static load, synchronous machine and induction machine. Scheduled Q (Kvar): The scheduled reactive power in kVar with the new scale factor applied. Values are listed by phase (A,B,C) for static loads and as a single total reactive power value for synchronous machines. An "N/A" (Not Applicable) is indicated for induction machines. 6. Click the OK button to accept the results, or the Cancel button to reject the results and return to the main Automatic Load Scaling window. When OK is selected, the following dialog will appear (Figure 3-66).
Figure 3-66. Continue Dialog 7. Click the Yes button to update the network with the new values. The following network properties will be updated: Static Loads: The real and reactive power, by phase. Induction Machine: The total real power consumed or delivered, and the nominal machine size. Synchronous Machine: The total real power consumed or delivered, nominal machine size, maximum reactive power output (pu of machine rating), and minimum reactive power output (pu of machine rating). 8. Perform a Load Flow Calculation to update the values of the network items on the diagram.
3-97
Editing a Network Model Rephasing the Network
3.10 Rephasing the Network

Rephasing changes the phase of a portion of the network. For example, suppose you constructed a network diagram that contains a single-phase section consisting of nodes, lines, loads, etc. This section is fed by a single-phase feeder ("Line1"), connected to phase A of a three-phase line, as shown in Figure 3-67a. A load flow analysis shows that phase A is overloaded and you want to move the entire section from phase A to phase B which is under used. If you select Line1, activate its property sheet and change the phasing of Line1 from A to B you would effectively disconnect the remainder of the section from the network because all of the remaining items would still be set to phase A, as shown in Figure 3-67b.
B A Line1
Single-Phase Section
B A
Single-Phase Section Line1
a.
b. Figure 3-67. Example of Incorrect Rephasing
Even though the network itself can contain loops, rephasing is not allowed on any branch that is part of a network loop. Rephasing, however, starts at the branch you designate and moves down the tree, making the appropriate phase change to each device encountered.
3-98
3.10.1 Device Rephasing Details

The changes that are made for all but wye-delta and delta-wye transformers are shown in Table 3-1. Table 3-1. Device Rephasing Starting from ABC for All Devices but Wye-Delta and Delta-Wye Transformers
Wire 1 2 3 Description of what was done Changes to Phase Connections Lines, wye-wye transformers, switches, series capacitors/reactors Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip B & C Flip A & B Flip A & C Wye-connected shunts (includes faults) Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip B & C Flip A & B Flip A & C Delta-connected shunts delta-delta transformers delta-connected auto regulators delta faults Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip A & C Flip B & C Flip A & B
A B C A B C
B C A C A B
C A B B C A
Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip B & C Flip A & B Flip A & C
The changes for shunt devices apply only to those that are unbalanced, no changes are needed for three-phase balanced shunts. Since capacitors are presently available as balanced only, no change needs to be made to them. Figure 3-68 shows an example of how to handle an unbalanced load for the "rotate forward" situation, which means that A goes to B, B goes to C, and C goes to A.
Before kW Phase A Phase B Phase C

300.00 200.00 150.00
After kvar
100.00 50.00 150.00
kW
150.00 300.00 200.00
kvar
150.00 100.00 50.00
Figure 3-68. Unbalanced Load Changes for "Rotate Forward" Situation
3-99
Table 3-2 shows what happens to a delta-wye transformer branch during rephasing. Table 3-3 shows the rephasing operations for a wye-delta transformer connection. Table 3-2. Changes to Delta-Wye Transformers
Wire 1 A B C A B C 2 B C A C A B 3 C A B B C A Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip B & C Flip A & B Flip A & C Change Changes to Delta-Wye Transformer Connections Delta-wye +30 Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip A&C, change to delta-wye -30 Flip B&C, change to delta-wye -30 Flip A&B, change to delta-wye -30 Delta-wye -30 Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip A&C, change to delta-wye +30 Flip B&C, change to delta-wye +30 Flip A&B, change to delta-wye +30
Table 3-3. Changes to Wye-Delta Transformers

Wire 1 A B C A B C 2 B C A C A B 3 C A B B C A Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip B & C Flip A & B Flip A & C Change Changes to Wye-Delta Transformer Connections Wye-delta -30 Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip B & C, change to wye-delta +30 Flip A & B, change to wye-delta +30 Flip A & C, change to wye-delta +30 Wye-delta +30 Nothing Rotate forward Rotate back Flip B & C, change to wye-delta -30 Flip A & B, change to wye-delta -30 Flip A & C, change to wye-delta -30
3-100
To rephase a portion of the network: 1. Select a branch which feeds the portion to be rephased. 2. Choose Network>Rephase from the Main Menu. The Rephasing dialog (Figure 3-69) displays.
Figure 3-69. Rephasing Dialog You may modify connections on the upstream (left in the dialog) side of the phase diagram but not those on the downstream (right in the dialog) side. The cursor appears as a pair of linemans pliers over the rephasing control. 3. To modify a connection, "grab on" to a line and drag it to the terminal to which you want to connect. 4. Once you have completed your modifications, click the OK button. PSS/ADEPT will traverse the network downstream of the selected branch and apply the modification to the phasing of each item it encounters according to its type. PSS/ADEPT uses the root node to determine which direction is upstream and which is downstream from the selected branch. If you try to perform rephasing without selecting a root node you will be notified with an error message. To set the root node refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.3. While the linemans pliers control will allow you to attach two or more lines to the same upstream connection point, if you click the OK button while in this condition you will get an error message. The PSS/ADEPT analysis software does not presently support this type of rephasing.
3-101
Editing a Network Model Creating Load Snapshots
3.11 Creating Load Snapshots

Load snapshots are used to store load sizes, which can then be used when representing the network at a particular time, weather condition, etc. By changing the "active" snapshot, you can easily compare load flows for different conditions without editing the base load values for your network. Load snapshots do not presently allow you to change the size of individual loads; instead, the snapshots are implemented by applying scale factors to the load categories. In each snapshot, individual scale factors can be set for each load category. Figure 3-70 shows that for the snapshot "Peak" all loads in "Category3" will be multiplied by 1.5 when "Peak" is the active snapshot. Loads that have not been assigned to categories will exist in all snapshots with a scale factor of 1.0. Loads that belong to more than one category will be multiplied by the product of the scale factors of the various categories. There is always one load snapshot, which contains all categories with a scale factor of 1.0. This snapshot is called "Base" and cannot be deleted or renamed. By default, the "Base" snapshot is active. To create/edit load snapshots: 1. Choose Network>Load Snapshots from the Main Menu or click the Load Snapshots on the Analysis toolbar. The Load Snapshots dialog displays.
Figure 3-70. Load Snapshots Dialog
3-102
Editing a Network Model Creating Load Snapshots
2. Do one of the following: To create a load snapshot: Click the New (Insert) the pop-up box for the snapshot. button, and enter a name in
To edit a load snapshot: Click on the snapshot you want to edit, and make your changes. The controls to the right of the Snapshot list box are updated based on the currently selected (not active) snapshot. When no snapshot is selected, these controls are disabled. If the currently selected snapshot is "Base", only the relative duration and description fields are available. 3. Enter/select the information for the load snapshot: Relative Duration (pu): Enter the relative duration of the snapshot. The default duration value is 1.0, which is used by TOPO and CAPO. Scaling: For each snapshot, you can choose to scale static loads, machines (both induction and synchronous), or both. If you choose to scale machines, you can scale real power only, or real power and machine size. Load Category: Select the load category to scale. If no load categories exist, load snapshots will be meaningless. Scale Factor: Specify the scale factor for the selected snapshot and category. Each snapshot has a unique scale factor for each load category that has been defined. The default scale factor is 1.0. For example, suppose you have two load categories, labeled "Industrial" and "Residential" and you are in the process of creating a snapshot called "Night." You may want to scale loads belonging to "Industrial" by 0.2 and loads belonging to "Residential" by 0.6. To do this, select the "Night" snapshot, then select "Industrial" from the Load Category list and enter "0.2" in the scale factor field. Then select "Residential" and enter "0.6" in the scale factor field. Description: Enter a text description for the currently selected snapshot. This field is left blank by default. Active Snapshot: At the bottom left of the property sheet, designate any snapshot from the drop-down list to make it the active snapshot. Only one snapshot can be active at a time. This is the snapshot that will be used for load flow, etc. 4. Click the Close button to finish defining your snapshot. If there is an active snapshot other than the "Base" in which the static loads option is set (a check mark appears in the Static Loads option), the Static Load Property sheet will display scaled load values; you will not be able to edit these values. If there is an active snapshot in which the Machines option is set, the Induction Machine and Synchronous Machine Property sheet will display scaled values for real power and (optionally) machine size; you will not be able to edit these values. This is to ensure that the original load values are preserved.
3-103
3-104
Chapter 4
Analyzing Network Models
4.1 Overview: Analyzing Network Models
PSS/ADEPT performs load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analyses on a distribution network that consists of any number of nodes and devices. PSS/ADEPT has no node or equipment limitation; the only limitation is on the hardware of the host PC. PSS/ADEPT uses an iterative Y-Bus relaxation method to achieve solutions. The PSS/ADEPT algorithm is more robust than the solution technique used by the PSS/U application; it can handle systems from highly meshed networks to weak radial systems with large electrical generation far from the loads. Systems that were difficult to solve using PSS/U should be easier to solve in PSS/ADEPT. The load flow solution in PSS/ADEPT may require more iterations to reach a stable solution, but the total solution time will be about the same as the time required to solve a load flow network in PSS/U Revision 8.3. Additionally, the Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) will find the minimum loss configuration for a three-phase radial system, and the Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO) places fixed and switched three-phase capacitor banks of specified size to minimize system losses. In this chapter, you will learn about: Automatic system validation of input data. User-initiated validation of the network model. Available display options for your analysis results on the diagram. Performing load flow analysis. Performing short circuit analysis. Performing motor starting analysis. Performing CAPO analysis. Performing TOPO analysis.
4-1
Analyzing Network Models Built-In Data Validation Options
4.1.1 PSS/ADEPT Analysis Conventions

PSS/ADEPT bases its analyses on the following conventions: Determining Phases at a Node: When placing shunt capacitors and balanced loads at a node, PSS/ADEPT distributes the specific load evenly over the phases existing at the node. The existing phases are determined by the branch phasing coming into it. For example, if there are two branches coming into a node, one with phasing AB and the other with phasing BC, the phasing of the node will be ABC. Designating Line-to-Line versus Line-to-Neutral Phasing: The following table describes the PSS/ADEPT convention used to describe line-to-neutral and line-to-line phasing on transformers, loads and shunt capacitors:
Phase Designation A B C Line-to-Line (Delta-Connected) A-to-B B-to-C C-to-A Line-to-Neutral (Wye-Connected) A-to-neutral B-to-neutral C-to-neutral
4.2 Built-In Data Validation Options

To assist you in the time-consuming and at times complex task of preparing a valid power system model, PSS/ADEPT has built-in data validation algorithms that will alert you to and, in some cases, correct invalid data inputs. There are two types of data validation: Automatic data validation of input data. User-initiated network validation.
4.2.1 Automatic Validation of Input Data

Power system networks created in PSS/U can be read by PSS/ADEPT. The PSS/U network models must be in the raw data file format (*.dat) and must have valid Construction Dictionary files. Data validation criteria is outlined in Appendix C. PSS/ADEPT automatically performs data validation checking whenever you open a PSS/U raw data file, and enter/edit values in any field on a network item property sheet. PSS/ADEPTs data validation procedure checks for invalid data entry (either as a result of opening a PSS/U raw data file, or as you enter/edit data in fields on the item property sheet) in the network model. Results of the data validation when opening a PSS/U raw data file will be displayed in the Progress View. If you attempt to enter an incorrect value into a field on an item property sheet, a message box is displayed containing the error message. When the OK button is clicked, the program will highlight the erroneous field in the item property sheet. For example, when you open a PSS/U raw data file, PSS/ADEPT automatically scans it for the error types listed in Appendix C, Section C.1. If there is a problem, PSS/ADEPT identifies the source of the problem, and displays a warning or error message in the Progress window, as in Figure 4-1. A warning message advises you of an error condition that was corrected by PSS/ADEPT; an error message advises you of an error condition that may require your attention prior to running the network analysis. In this case, a network diagram is not drawn since there were errors detected in the data file. If only warning messages were printed, the network diagram would be drawn normally.
4-2
Figure 4-1. Raw Data File Validation The resulting PSS/ADEPT validated network model may be different from the original network. We recommend that you save the validated network models in PSS/ADEPT native binary file format (*.adp).
4-3
4.2.2 User-Initiated Network Validation

PSS/ADEPT allows you to check the network for any unusual circumstances (i.e., the impedance of a line is equal to zero) at any time. You can initiate the validation check yourself, or specify that PSS/ADEPT run the check prior to performing any analyses. Appendix C, Section C.2 contains the list of validation criteria that are used during this process. To check the network for any unusual circumstances, choose one of the following: Choose Network>Validate from the Main Menu. The validation check runs immediately and the results display in the Progress View (Figure 4-2). Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. Click the Load Flow tab, and click the Validate network before solving option (a check mark appears in the box). When you run an analysis, PSS/ADEPT automatically runs the validation operation, reports the results of the validation check to you, and carries out the analysis regardless of the validation outcome (no changes are made to your data).
If a device is reported in the Progress View, you can double-click on the name of the device to locate and select it on the Diagram and Equipment List Views. The item property sheet can then be accessed by double-clicking on the selected item.
Figure 4-2. Network Validation
4-4
Analyzing Network Models Viewing Results on the Diagram
4.3 Viewing Results on the Diagram

PSS/ADEPT allows you to customize the display of your network analysis results on the diagram. You can: Set the analysis information displays, such as detailed convergence monitors, voltage thresholds, and graphical convergence monitor settings. Color code overloads, voltage violations, etc. Set display options for load flow, short circuit, motor starting, CAPO, and TOPO analyses results.
4.3.1 Setting General Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify what options are use when an analysis is selected. To set up these analysis options: 1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu or click the Analysis Options button from the Analysis Toolbar. The Analysis Options Property sheet displays (Figure 4-3).
Figure 4-3. Analysis Options Property Sheet: General Tab
4-5
2. Click the General tab and select/enter the analysis options you want: Create PSS/Engines hub file: PSS/ADEPT can create a file, ...\example\network.dmp, that tracks user actions and problems. Siemens PTI support personnel may request that you generate and provide this file for problem analysis purposes. This option is also used to export data to PSS/Engines. Branch rating index: Specify the rating index (1-4) to use for determining branch overloads. At present, up to four ratings may be entered in the Construction Dictionary or specified on individual item property sheets. % loading: Specify the percent of loading used to calculate branch overloads. The default is to report overloads for branches that are above 100% of their rating value. Voltage thresholds: Select the low- and high-voltage thresholds for flagging nodes, which are over/undervoltage, pu of node base voltage. Power factor limit: Select the upper limit for flagging branches, which have a power factor (pf) below this specified limit. Voltage unbalance: Select the method to calculate voltage unbalance. Enter the voltage unbalance upper limit used to color code the diagram and to select the contents of the voltage unbalance report. Current unbalance: Select the method to calculate current unbalance. Enter the current unbalance upper limit used to color code the diagram and to select the contents of the current unbalance report. MWh load linearization: Select the method to use when linearizing MWh loads. Enter the MWh load B-factor. The default method is by group. The default B-factor is 0.885. 3. Click the OK button to save the settings. These settings are saved with the diagram when you request to save a native binary file (*.adp). You may also set the display of specific analysis results on the diagram Load Flow, Short Circuit, Motor Starting, CAPO, and TOPO. Refer to Section 4.3.3 in this chapter for more information.
4-6
4.3.2 Color Coding the Analysis Results

Color-coding analysis results on your diagram enables you to quickly spot on your color monitor any troublesome areas in your network model. You can assign colors to flag nodes that fall outside a specified voltage thresholds, flag overloaded branches, and/or flag devices which belong to a certain group. To color code analysis results on your diagram: 1. Choose View>Diagram Properties from the Main Menu. The Diagram Property sheet displays (Figure 4-4).
Figure 4-4. Diagram Property Sheet: Color Tab 2. Click the Color tab and select one of the color settings for your analysis results diagrams: To color code nodes based on their calculated voltage: Select Items by result voltage level. You may specify the color used to show High, Mid, and Low voltage nodes. The defaults are blue, black, and red, respectively. To color code nodes based on their nominal voltage level: Select Items by Nominal Voltage Level. To color code overloaded branches: Select Overloaded branches and select a color. The default color is red. To color code a network group: Select Items by Group. This option does not apply to analysis results.
4-7
To color code items by category: Select Loads and Machines by Category. This option does not apply to analysis results. To color code unbalanced nodes and branches: Select Unbalanced nodes, branches and select a color. The default color is blue. To color code branches under a power factor limit: Select Branches under power factor limit. The default color is green.
4.3.3 Reporting Results on the Network Diagram

Result display options allow you to format and specify what results are displayed on your network diagram. Result display options are located on the Results tab of the Equipment List View. Select or check the results you want to see on the diagram. In turn, the diagram will be updated immediately. Some results cannot be displayed after a particular analysis; in this case the result option will be disabled or not selectable. Result options are saved as a program setting, meaning the application will remember the previous set of result options each time the program starts until they are subsequently modified.
4.3.3.1 Flow Arrows

After a successful load flow, fault, or motor starting calculation, PSS/ADEPT can display flow arrows on branch items indicating the direction of power flow. The arrow direction is based on respective signs of power (summing all phases) at the FROM and TO ends of the branch. Flow arrows are available only after a successful solution and can be toggled on or off by selecting Diagram>Properties and placing (toggle on) or removing (toggle off) the check mark in the box titled Show Flow Arrows. Both P (kW) and Q (kvar) flow arrows can be displayed. Colors of each arrow can be adjusted by selecting Diagram>Properties... and selecting the color for the "P" and "Q" values. Flow arrows are only displayed on the diagram when the branch and shunt display are set to "power". The flow arrows are displayed in the direction of positive P (kW) and Q (kvar) flow. For flows on a branch, the convention is to display the flow into the branch from each end. Shunt device (except sources) flows are displayed into the device. Source flows are displayed out of the device. The positive/negative signs are assigned based on this convention. Flow arrows can be animated, by placing a check mark in the box labeled Animate on the Diagram Properties General tab. Flow arrow color can be specified by selecting Diagram>Properties, selecting the General tab and choosing Flow Arrow color.
4-8
4.3.3.2 Load Flow and Short Circuit Result Options

After a load flow solution or standard fault calculation, a default set of results will be displayed on the diagram. To change the settings for the results, select the Results tab in the Equipment List View and specify the result options you desire. Figure 4-5 illustrates the diagram result display options after a load flow analysis.
Figure 4-5. Diagram Result Display Options The following options are available for node, branch and shunt results. Select any or none of the options according to your desired preferences. Node Results: Voltage magnitude: Check the box next to voltage magnitude to display voltage at each node on the diagram. If you do not select voltage magnitude, the voltage type, nominal base voltage, and voltage angle will be disabled. Voltage representation: Select the voltage unit representation in line-line or line-neutral, and voltage in volts (V), per unit (pu), kilovolts (kV), or voltage on a specified nominal delivery voltage base (ndV). If you select the ndV option, enter the nominal delivery voltage base in the field provided. Voltage angle: Check the box to display voltage angle at each node on the diagram.
4-9
Branch Results: Current magnitude: Check the box next to current magnitude to display the current at each branch on the diagram. Current magnitude may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to current. Current angle: Check the box next to current angle to display the current angle at each branch on the diagram. Current angle may be selected only if the branch and shunt display options is set to current. Results on: Select how you want branch results displayed on the diagram. Your choices are: both ends, upstream side, downstream side. Real power: Check the box to the left of real power to display the real power at each branch on the diagram. Real power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to power. Reactive power: Check the box to the left of reactive power to display the reactive power at each branch on the diagram. Reactive power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to power. Apparent power: Check the box to the left of Apparent power, S(kVA) to display the apparent power at each branch on the diagram. Apparent power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to S, pf. Power factor: Check the box to the left of Power factor, pf to display power factor at each branch on the diagram. Power factor may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to S, pf.
Shunt Results: Current magnitude: Check the box next to current magnitude to display the current at each shunt on the diagram. Current magnitude may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to current. Current angle: Check the box next to current angle to display the current angle at each shunt on the diagram. Current angle may be selected only if the branch and shunt display options is set to current. Real power: Check the box to the left of real power to display the real power at each shunt on the diagram. Real power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to power. Reactive power: Check the box to the left of reactive power to display the reactive power at each shunt on the diagram. Reactive power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to power. Apparent power: Check the box to the left of Apparent power, S(kVA) to display the apparent power at each branch on the diagram. Apparent power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to S, pf. Power factor: Check the box to the left of Power factor, pf to display power factor at each branch on the diagram. Power factor may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to S, pf.
4-10
Branches and Shunts Result Options: Display: Select current, power, apparent power and power factor (S, pf) display from the available list. Unit prefix: Select none to display current in amps, real power in watts and reactive power in var. Select k (kilo) to display current in kiloamp (kA) real power in kilowatts (kW), and reactive power in kilovar (kvar). For power, an additional unit prefix M is provided for megawatt (MW) and megavar (Mvar).
The following branch and shunt display options are available when you select to display power: Total: Select this to show the total power over all phases. By phase: Select this to show the power on a phase by phase basis. Branch losses: Check the box to the left of branch losses to show total branch losses instead of power.
All (options for all node, branch, and shunt items): Precision: Select the number of decimal places to display from the available list. Angles: Select to display angles from 180 to +180, or 0 to 360. Show results for: Select to show results for Phase A only, Phase B only, Phase C only, the maximum value over phases A, B and C, or the minimum value over phases A, B, or C. This option may also be selected on the Zoom Toolbar. Show units: Check the box to the left of show units to show the result units on the diagram. The result units are automatically displayed in the status bar and will be printed on the hard copy output of the one-line diagram even if this option is not selected.
Fault All Result Options After a fault all analysis, you may choose the following: Nodes Results: Maximum fault current: Select to display the maximum fault current over all phases, then select the type of fault current to display from the available list. Fault types are specified from Analysis Options Property sheet, Short Circuit tab (see Figure 4-15). If maximum fault current is not checked, no fault current results will display on the diagram. Phase at which it occurred: If you wish to display the phase with the maximum fault current, check the box to the left of this text.
Motor Starting Result Options All load flow and short circuit options described above are also available after a motor starting analysis. Additionally, you may display the prestart voltage, starting voltage, or voltage difference at each node in the network. Voltage difference is the magnitude difference between the prestart and starting node voltages.
4-11
Report Options The report update feature allows the user to specify that certain report database files be updated whenever an analysis function (loadflow, fault all, etc.) is run. This is useful when loading custom reports created with Crystal Reports Designer or modified from one of the standard reports. This step is transparent to the user when loading the standard reports. To enable report updating open the Analysis Options dialog and click the Reports tab. Five different classes of reports may be enabled by checking the appropriate check boxes: branch device reports, shunt device reports, node reports, harmonics reports and the fault all report. Below each checkbox for the first four classes is a group of radio buttons corresponding to the various standard reports associated with that class of report. For each enabled report class PSS/ADEPT will update the database files associated with the standard report that is selected for that class.
Figure 4-6. Analysis Options: Reports Tab
4-12
TOPO Result Options The purpose of a tie open point analysis is to determine the optimum system switch configuration that produces the minimal system loss. This is a special analysis activity that updates the diagram to indicate those switches that have changed from their original status. Result options may be adjusted after a TOPO analysis, but results are not displayed on the network diagram. To display the results for the new configuration (Figure 4-7), simply select to run a load flow analysis.
Figure 4-7. TOPO Diagram Displaying New Configuration Results
4-13
CAPO Result Options The purpose of a CAPO analysis is to determine the optimal placement of capacitor banks in the network. This is a special analysis activity that updates the diagram to indicate the placement of new capacitor banks in the network. These newly added capacitor banks are drawn on the diagram after the CAPO analysis is complete. Fixed banks are indicated by "FX" and switched banks are indicated by "SW". Result options may be adjusted after a CAPO analysis, but the results are not displayed on the network diagram. Simply select to run a load flow to view results for the optimized network (Figure 4-8).
Figure 4-8. CAPO Diagram Displaying Optimized Network Results
4-14
Analyzing Network Models Calculating Load Flow
4.4 Calculating Load Flow

A load flow solution is a steady-state representation of node voltages, current and power flows. PSS/ADEPT can perform a load flow analysis on your network and display the results on the diagram.
4.4.1 Setting Load Flow Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you some control over the solution algorithm; you can specify the number of iterations, solution precision, operation of transformers and capacitors, and the display of convergence details. To set load flow analysis options: 1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. The Analysis Options Property sheet displays (Figure 4-9). 2. Click the Load Flow tab.
Figure 4-9. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Load Flow Tab
4-15
3. Enter/select the load flow options you want for your calculation: Show detailed convergence information: Click the box to display detailed progress messages in the Progress View during the analysis operation (Figure 4-10). For example, you may show a detailed convergence monitor, which flags equipment adjustments.
Figure 4-10. Detailed Convergence Monitor Progress Messages The output indicates the largest node voltage change in pu (from the previous iteration), for iteration "N" occurring at node "name" and for the "(Phase A, B, or C)" voltage. When the largest change is less than the tolerance (default = 0.00001 pu), the solution is complete. This convergence monitor is useful in diagnosing problems. Examples include: Persistent appearance of a given node may indicate an excessive load, excessive incoming line impedance, or other similar problem with that node. It can also indicate an error in the input data not detected by the validation algorithms. Persistent appearance of the largest voltage change in a particular phase may indicate a high level of imbalance between the three phases of the network. Large changes or erratic changes of transformer taps may indicate voltage regulation problems in the network.
Stop Calculation After N Iterations: Enter the number of iterations (N) to perform before pausing the solution. When the solution is in a "paused" state, the Solution Paused dialog displays (Figure 411).
Figure 4-11. Solution Paused Dialog
4-16
Do one of the following: To continue the solution: Click the Continue solution button to continue the solution iterating N more times before reaching another "paused" state. For example, if N = 5, after iteration 5 the "Solution paused..." dialog will display. If you click the Continue solution button, iterations 6 through 10 will occur before another "paused" solution state. If the solution converges before the iteration limit is reached, the Progress View will display the "Load flow solution converged after X iterations" message. Where X is the actual number of iterations that were performed. To continue the solution algorithm one iteration at a time: Click the Single iteration button. To adjust your load flow analysis options: Click the Analysis options... button. The Analysis Options Property sheet displays, giving you the opportunity to change the analysis options and reenter the solution at the paused point. You will be permitted to change the maximum iteration limit, the voltage precision, the power precision, and to toggle the display of detailed convergence information. To abort the solution: Click the Abort solution button to exit from the solution algorithm and return to normal PSS/ADEPT operation. The solution may not be in a solved state. Convergence Precision: Specify the degree of accuracy required for the load flow to be considered solved. The default value of solution precision is 0.00001 pu of node voltage change. Adjustment of the voltage precision from its normal value of 0.00001 pu will not affect the convergence of iterative solutions. In some feeders, it is possible to have a combination of high impedance branches and branches with very small but nonzero impedance that are so sensitive to small voltage changes that the numerical precision limitation of the computer prevents convergence to the specified convergence precision. These cases are readily identifiable by a voltage change history that is swaying randomly around an essentially constant value. When the precision limit is encountered, there is no benefit in persisting with a tight solution tolerance; it is more reasonable to raise the tolerance to a value that is just above the voltage change dithering band. Power Precision: Specify the power flow mismatch tolerance. This is the largest discrepancy allowed between power flowing into and out of the nodes. Validate network before solving: Specify if you want to carry out network data validation (as described in Chapter 4, Section 4.2.2) before the solution analysis is performed. The results of the network validation will be displayed in the Progress View. Transformer Taps Locked: If you select this option, all transformer tap adjustment is blocked, regardless of the status of individual transformers. In this situation the transformer taps will be locked to the current settings specified in the Transformer Property sheet. Capacitors Locked: If you select this option, the status of switched capacitor banks will not be changed during the load flow solution (see Chapter 3, Section 3.7.9). If capacitors are unlocked (no check mark), the load flow solution will adjust the fraction switched in value for switched capacitor banks in the network. The value is adjusted
4-17
based on the switching increment, the regulated voltage range, and the regulated node specified on the Capacitor Property sheet. During the load flow, if the voltage at the regulated node is not within the specified voltage range, the switched capacitor fraction switched in, will be incremented by the switching increment until the voltage at the regulated node falls within the voltage range. Graphical convergence monitor: Click the box that precedes the Graphical Convergence Monitor option to view a graphical convergence monitor that shows you graphically how the solution converges during a load flow analysis. An example of a graphical convergence monitor is shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12. Graphical Convergence Monitor When you select the graphical convergence monitor, you may then choose to modify any of the following: Monitored node: Select the node where you want the voltage to be monitored. Quantity: Currently, only the node voltage is available. By selecting a monitored node you have automatically selected to monitor its voltage. Phase: Select the phase A, B, or C of the node you wish to monitor. Polar Plot Radius: Select the initial per unit (pu) scale of the graphical convergence monitor. As shown in Figure 4-12, the radius is equal to 5. 4. Click the OK button to accept your options and return to the diagram.
4-18
4.4.2 Performing a Load Flow Analysis

To activate the PSS/ADEPT load flow analysis (Figure 4-13), do one of the following: Choose Analysis>Load Flow from the Main Menu. Click the Load Flow Calculation button on the Analysis Toolbar.
The results of the load flow analysis will be displayed on the diagram according to the results display options you specified (see Section 4.3.3).
Figure 4-13. Sample Load Flow Analysis Diagram
4-19
4.4.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Load Flow Solutions

Modeling considerations that form the basis for PSS/ADEPT load flow solutions are listed below. Diagrams indicating network modeling for all devices are located in Appendix D. Network Representation For PSS/ADEPT, components are subdivided into several categories: Connection points (nodes, also called buses) define where other components are connected in a network. Connection points may or may not correspond to a physical device. Shunt devices represent physical components that exist at one connection point. Branch devices represent physical components that exist between two (or more) connection points.
Electric power systems are usually three-phase systems, and in PSS/ADEPT each three-phase network component contains information for all three phases and can be manipulated as a single entity. A node, for example, provides three connection points, one each for phases A, B, and C. Similarly, a branch provides up to three phases (for A, B, and/or C) between two nodes. The actual number of conductors or phases present is an attribute of a branch. The three-phase branch is therefore flexible enough to represent one, two, or three phases. Shunt devices, except for shunt capacitors, are defined similarly to branches, having 3, 2, or 1 phase. Sources A network to be solved in PSS/ADEPT must have at least one three-phase balanced source. In PSS/ADEPT, it is possible to have any number of sources in service at one time. A source is specified by its terminal voltage and positive- and zero-sequence impedance. When only the short circuit fault MVA of the source is known, it must be converted to positive- and zero-sequence impedances. Instructions to convert fault MVA to sequence impedances are located in Chapter 3, Section 3.7.6. Lines and Cables A line section connects between two nodes and contains at least one phase wire. A line can have single-, two-, or three-phase wires. Transposed lines are specified by their positive- and zero-sequence impedances, and by their positive- and zero-sequence charging susceptance. Single- and two-phase lines are also specified by positive- and zero-sequence impedances/admittance. A single-phase line has only one series impedance and charging admittance. When entering a single-phase line, set positive- and zerosequence impedances/admittances equal to each other. The conductors in a two-phase line have a self-impedance Zs and a mutual-impedance Zm. When entering data for the two-phase line put in the positive- and zero-sequence impedances in just as you would for a three-phase line (i.e., Z1 = Zs Zm and Z0 = Zs + 2 Zm). The two-phase line also has two charging admittances, Bs for each conductor to ground and Bm between the two conductors. Again, do the derivation as for a three-phase line, B1 = Bs + 2 Bm, B0 = Bs. A simple way to enter the impedances/admittances is to just use the values for the line with all three phases present; there will be very little error in how many phases are specified. Presently, cable data is entered the same as for overhead lines, by specifying positive- and zerosequence parameters. For a cable with a grounded shield, the positive- and zero-sequence charging admittances are usually equal to each other.
4-20
Transformers PSS/ADEPT models a wide variety of transformer connections, including wye-wye, wye-delta, delta-delta, voltage regulators, etc. For a listing of PSS/ADEPT transformers; refer to Appendix A, Section A.1. Each transformer has positive- and zero-sequence impedance, the values of which may be listed explicitly or in the Construction Dictionary. The zero-sequence impedance is used to represent grounding impedances in wye-connected windings. If the transformer has no grounding impedances, the zero-sequence impedance is normally set equal to the positive sequence value. For a delta-delta transformer, or a wye-delta transformer with the wye winding solidly grounded, set the zero-sequence impedance equal to the positive sequence value; PSS/ADEPT will take care of blocking zero-sequence current, shunting zero-sequence current to ground, etc. Transformer connections that cannot be directly represented by one of the types shown in Appendix A, Table A-1 can often be modeled by using combinations of the implicit models. For example, a three-winding transformer can be modeled using three two-winding units. See Appendix A for transformer models that are not directly represented by one of the PSS/ADEPT transformer types. Because PSS/ADEPT handles transformer types and connections differently from PSS/U, there can be some changes when transformers are transferred back and forth between the programs using raw data file (*.dat). For a complete description of transformer adjustments applied when reading and writing PSS/U raw data files, see Appendix A, Sections A.1.3 and A.1.4. We advise saving your data in the *.adp format for transformers and other new PSS/ADEPT data (snapshots, etc.). Machine Modeling Three-phase synchronous and asynchronous (induction) machines are modeled in PSS/ADEPT. Both types can be designated either as a generator or motor by choosing the appropriate sign for the total real power drawn, a negative value indicates a generator. Additional information on machines in PSS/ADEPT is contained in Appendix A, Section A.3. Synchronous Machines In the power flow, the PSS/ADEPT synchronous machine model will attempt to hold its terminal voltage constant at a user-specified value. The reactive power output or absorption will be adjusted to control the terminal voltage. If the reactive requirements of the model exceed the defined reactive capability limit, control of the terminal voltage will be lost, and the synchronous machine will essentially turn into a constant power load. The voltage setpoint and reactive limits of the machine are specified in the Machine Property sheet (refer to Chapter 3, Sections 3.7.7 and 3.7.8). If a synchronous machine is operated above its rated current or above its rated terminal voltage, the rated temperature rise of the copper or iron would be exceeded respectively. These limits can be graphically represented as illustrated in Figure 4-14 in terms of reactive power versus real power. The circular arc from B to C, with its radius equal to the rated kVA of the machine and center at the origin, represents the rated armature current limit at rated voltage. Point B represents the rated power factor of the machine. The arc from A to B represents rated field current limit of the machine. When a synchronous machine is operated in the underexcited region, there is a high magnitude of flux in the core ends of the machine. The arc from C to D represents the limit for heating due to this flux. Reactive capability curves as shown in Figure 4-14 can be used to determine the reactive limits of a machine. The typical maximum and minimum reactive limits would correspond to points B and C, respectively. Note, however, the reactive limits can change for different levels of real power.
4-21
When a synchronous machine is started, it is represented by its locked rotor impedance. If the synchronous machine is running, and another machine is being started, the running synchronous machine will be represented by a source behind transient reactance. The value of the source voltage/angle is determined by running a load flow of the network at the conditions existing just before the motor starting breaker is closed. In a short circuit simulation, a synchronous machine is a source behind either the transient or subtransient impedance, according to which you select. The value of the source is determined the same way as was done for motor starting (i.e., running a prefault load flow).
Rated Field Current Rated Armature Current
Reactive Power (Q) Rated pf 0
Real Power (P)
Limit for End Iron Core Heating
Figure 4-14. Reactive Capability Curve for a Synchronous Machine
4-22
Induction Machines During a load flow simulation, induction machines normally draw the specified real power. The reactive power consumption and slip are determined from the machine model. There are five induction machines available in PSS/ADEPT, corresponding to NEMA A, B, C, D, and E designs. However, if the induction goes beyond its maximum torque capability, it will stall. When that happens the induction machine will be represented by, its locked rotor impedance. When an induction machine is started it will be represented by, its locked rotor impedance. If the induction machine is running, and another machine is being started, the running induction machine will be represented by a source behind transient reactance, the same as for the synchronous. In a short circuit simulation, induction machines are a source behind either the transient or subtransient impedance, just as with the synchronous machine. For further information, see Appendix A, Section A.3. Static Load Modeling In PSS/ADEPT, static loads are modeled as constant power, constant current, or constant impedance. In addition, PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the load as grounded or ungrounded. For grounded load types, the load is represented as connected between phase and neutral, whereas, ungrounded load entered in phase A is actually connected between phases A-B, ungrounded load entered in phase B is connected between phases B-C, and ungrounded load entered in phase C is connected between phases C-A. Constant Power Load Common practice in load flow work assumes that distribution tap changing transformers, voltage regulators, and capacitors hold system voltages to nominal values. This is also valid for industrial loads that are predominately characterized by electrical motors consuming constant power. Hence, it is appropriate for loads to be modeled as constant real and reactive power demand: S n = P n + jQ n = cons tan t With this type of load representation, the power demand does not vary with voltage. The load current, however, varies inversely proportional to the voltage level (V), as:
Sn * - I L = ----- V
where the asterisk indicates the complex conjugate. To allow convergence at very low system voltages (i.e., 0.5 pu), as node voltage decreases constant power loads are gradually converted to constant impedance. In some cases, treating loads as constant power may not be acceptable. In these studies the voltage dependence of load can be modeled by, constant current and/or constant impedance loads.
4-23
Constant Current Load Load may be specified as having a constant current characteristic that is established from the nominal load value (Sn) entered in PSS/ADEPT:
S n * - I L = ----- V n
where Vn is the node base voltage. With the constant current load representation, the actual power demand varies with node voltage (V), as:
VS n * S Actual = VI L = ---------Vn
Constant current loads are also gradually converted to constant impedance as the node voltage decreases. Constant Impedance Load When representing load using the constant impedance model, the value of constant impedance is determined from the nominal value of power demand that was entered into PSS/ADEPT as follows: 2 Vn Z L = ---------- = cons tan t S n where Vn is nominal one-per-unit voltage. The actual power demand varies with the squared of the corresponding node voltage (V) as: 2 V Sn V - = -------------S Actual = -----ZL 2 Vn 2
4-24
Analyzing Network Models Calculating Short Circuits
4.5 Calculating Short Circuits

A short circuit calculation determines the effect of a fault on the network (e.g., one or more phases coming in contact with each other, the ground, a tree, etc). In PSS/ADEPT, there are two types of short circuit calculations: Fault calculation, and Fault All. For Fault calculations, you place the desired faults at single or multiple nodes in the network. You select the fault from the Diagram Toolbar and attach it to the node as a shunt device. Each fault has a property sheet where you can specify the fault details (e.g., three-phase, phase-to-ground, etc). When PSS/ADEPT runs the fault simulation, all node voltages, branch currents, and fault currents are calculated based on the options specified under the Short Circuit tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. In the Fault All (includes all nodes in the network) calculation, a series of faults (as specified in the Analysis Options Property sheet) is sequentially and individually applied. Only the current magnitudes in each of the faults, is returned. For example, suppose there are only two nodes in the network (Node1 and Node2), and that the fault types are three-phase and phase-ground. A threephase fault is placed at Node1 and the fault current is calculated. Next, a phase-ground fault is placed at Node1 and the fault current is calculated, then the three-phase and phase-to-ground faults are placed in the same manner on Node2. Four fault current results will be returned. Short circuit calculations are done using the network state just prior to the fault occurrence. With the fault(s) removed, a load flow is done to let transformer taps set, capacitors switch, and to get the prefault voltage at each node. Static loads are then converted to constant impedance, based on their specified power and the voltage at the node where they are connected. Machines are represented as internal voltage sources behind an impedance; the magnitude and angle of the internal source being determined from the proceeding load flow solution. The actual short circuit calculation is then done. No transformer tap or capacitor switching is done during the actual short circuit simulation. After a Fault All calculation, Thevenin impedance and X/R ratios are available. To view these values select Report>Fault All Current. The Fault All Current report displays the values of Z00 and Z11 at each node. When the network is completely balanced, the off diagonal terms of the modal impedance matrix are zero, and the values of Z00 and Z11 are meaningful. Usually the negative-sequence Thevenin impedance is the same as Z11, although they can be different when there is rotating equipment (e.g., machines) on the network. As the network becomes unbalanced, the off diagonal terms of the Thevenin modal impedance matrix Z012 become more important and the display of only Z00 and Z11 become less meaningful. When the only cause of system imbalance is unbalanced loads on the network, the off diagonal terms are probably small and can be ignored. In the case where there are single or twophase branches, the situation becomes more serious. Sequence voltages, currents, and impedances are based on the concept of three phases. When you have two or single-phase branches, the idea of sequence impedances falls apart. The fault all report has been modified to account for three, two, and single-phase branch connections. For nodes where one or two phases are energized, phase impedances are displayed instead of sequence impedances. The node phases, now displayed on the fault all report, are determined by the phases of the branches that are connected to it. If a node has only one phase energized, the phase impedance will be displayed in the R1 and X1 columns. The R0 and X0 columns will be displayed as a blank field (not applicable). If a node has two phases energized, the value displayed in the R1 and X1 columns is the Thevenin impedance for a phase-to-phase fault and the value displayed in the R0 and X0 columns is the impedance for a phase-to-phase-to-ground fault.
4-25
4.5.1 Setting Short Circuit Analysis Options

For short circuit calculations, PSS/ADEPT allows you to define the fault types for a Fault All calculation, whether to use machine transient or subtransient impedance, and the impedance to be used for phase-to-ground faults. To set short circuit analysis options: 1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. The Analysis Options Property sheet displays (Figure 4-15).
Figure 4-15. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Short Circuit Tab 2. Click the Short Circuit tab. 3. Enter/select the short circuit options you want for your calculation: Machine Impedance: PSS/ADEPT allows you to use the machine transient or subtransient impedance in the short circuit analysis. The decision to select a machines transient or subtransient parameter is based on the fault duration period. The subtransient impedance will be smaller than transient impedance, and determines the current immediately following a fault (approximately two cycles). The transient impedance determines fault current after the subtransient period. The length of time the transient impedance holds depends on machine time constants, and, for a synchronous machine, the type of exciter.
4-26
Impedance for phase-to-ground faults: You can enter a fault grounding impedance. The default grounding impedance is zero representing a solidly grounded (bolted) fault. This grounding impedance is only applicable to the "Phase-to-ground through impedance" fault type. Fault All Types: Specify the type(s) of Fault All calculation(s) you want to perform on the network. A Fault All will perform calculations for all fault types applied sequentially and individually at each node in the power system network. This option is not used for standard fault calculations. 4. Click the OK button to accept the short circuit analysis options.
4-27
4.5.2 Performing a Short Circuit Analysis

To activate the PSS/ADEPT short circuit analysis, do one of the following: Choose Analysis>Fault or Analysis>Fault All from the Main Menu. Click the Fault Calculation ysis Toolbar. button or Fault All Calculation button on the Anal-
The results of the short circuit analysis will be displayed on the diagram (Figure 4-16) according to the result display options you selected.
Figure 4-16. Sample Short Circuit Analysis Diagram A Fault All calculation can only be performed if, there are no standard faults specified in the network or the standard faults are out of service. Use the Toggle Fault status or Clear Faults button on the Analysis Toolbar to adjust faults, which are present in the network.
4-28
4.5.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Short Circuit Solutions

Modeling considerations that form the basis for PSS/ADEPT short circuit solutions are listed below. Sources In short circuit analysis, sources are treated as a constant voltage behind the specified sequence impedance. The source impedance is specified on the system kVA base and node base voltage (see Chapter 3, Section 3.7.6). The source voltage is determined from the prefault load flow. Lines and Cables A line section connects between two nodes and contains at least one phase wire. A line can have single-, two-, or three-phase wires. Transposed lines are specified by their positive- and zero-sequence impedances, and by their positive- and zero-sequence charging susceptance. Single- and two-phase lines are also specified by positive- and zero-sequence impedances/admittance. A single-phase line has only one series impedance and charging admittance. When entering a single-phase line, set positive- and zerosequence impedances/admittances equal to each other. The conductors in a two-phase line have a self-impedance Zs and a mutual-impedance Zm. When entering data for the two-phase line put in the positive- and zero-sequence impedances in just as you would for a three-phase line (i.e., Z1 = Zs Zm and Z0 = Zs + 2 Zm). The two-phase line also has two charging admittances, Bs for each conductor to ground and Bm between the two conductors. Again do the derivation as for a three-phase line, B1 = Bs + 2 Bm, B0 = Bs. A simple way to enter the impedances/admittances is to just use the values for the line with all three phases present; there will be very little error in how many phases are specified. At the present time, cable data is entered the same as for overhead lines, by specifying positiveand zero-sequence parameters. For a cable with a grounded shield, the positive- and zerosequence charging admittances are usually equal to each other. Transformers PSS/ADEPT models a wide variety of transformer connections, including wye-wye, wye-delta, delta-delta, voltage regulators, etc. For a listing of PSS/ADEPT transformers; refer to Appendix A, Section A.1. Each transformer has positive- and zero-sequence impedance, the values of which may be listed explicitly or in the construction dictionary. The zero-sequence impedance is used to represent grounding impedances in wye-connected windings. If the transformer has no grounding impedances, the zero-sequence impedance is normally set equal to the positive sequence value. For a delta-delta transformer, or a wye-delta transformer with the wye winding solidly grounded, set the zero-sequence impedance equal to the positive sequence value; PSS/ADEPT will take care of blocking zero-sequence current, shunting zero-sequence current to ground, etc. Transformer connections that cannot be directly represented by one of the types shown in Appendix A, Table A-1 can often be modeled by using combinations of the implicit models. For example, a three winding transformer can be modeled using three two winding units. See Appendix A for transformer models that are not directly represented by one of the PSS/ADEPT transformer types. Because PSS/ADEPT handles transformer types and connections differently from PSS/U, there can be some changes when transformers are transferred back and forth between the programs using raw data file (*.dat). For complete description of transformer adjustments applied when reading and writing PSS/U raw data files, see Appendix A, Sections A.1.3 and A.1.4. We advise saving your data in the *.adp format for transformers and other new PSS/ADEPT data (snapshots, etc.).
4-29
Machine Modeling In the short circuit calculations, synchronous machines are treated as constant voltage behind an impedance. You may specify transient or subtransient machine impedance for the fault calculation: choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu, click the Short Circuit tab, and click the option you want. Running induction machines are represented the same as synchronous machines in the short circuit solutions; that is, they are treated as constant voltage behind an impedance. The impedance used is either subtransient or transient, as specified by the user. The internal voltages for both synchronous and induction machines are determined form the prefault load flow, just as for sources. Static Load Modeling In PSS/ADEPT, static loads are modeled as constant power, constant current, or constant impedance. In addition, PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the load as grounded or ungrounded. For grounded load types, the load is represented as connected between phase and neutral, whereas, ungrounded load entered in phase A is actually connected between phases A-B, ungrounded load entered in phase B is connected between phases B-C, and ungrounded load entered in phase C is connected between phases C-A. PSS/ADEPT considers the load connection in the short circuit calculation. For example, if a transformer is delta-grounded wye through a resistance, Rg, and the load is grounded wye connected, then for a single line-to-ground fault, the transformer neutral resistance, Rg, will be in parallel with the load impedance in the zero sequence. This will produce more accurate results then the methodology used in PSS/U.
4.5.4 Thevenin Equivalent Impedance

Thevenin equivalent impedance is the complex impedance seen from one point (node) in the network. The network, all loads and all sources are replaced by an equivalent voltage behind an equivalent impedance as shown below (Figure 4-17).
Figure 4-17. Thevenin Equivalent The Thevenin equivalent is used in place of the full network for short circuit calculations. The functions described on the next few pages permit an application to acquire Thevenin impedance or the equivalent voltage behind Thevenin impedance.
4-30
In a three-phase unbalanced network, Thevenin impedance is a complex matrix rather than a single complex number. Similarly, the equivalent voltage is a complex vector rather than a single complex number. These are shown below in phase (ABC) space.
Z aa Z ab Z ac Z abc = Z ba Z bb Z bc Z ca Z cb Z cc
Va V abc = V b Vc
In symmetrical component (012) space, the Thevenin impedance is also a complex matrix and the equivalent voltage is a complex vector.
Z 00 Z 01 Z 02 Z 012 = Z 10 Z 11 Z 12 Z 20 Z 21 Z 22
V0 V 012 = V 1 V2
The cross terms (Z01, Z02, Z10, Z12, Z20, and Z21) are often insignificant and are usually ignored. The ratio of reactance to resistance, called the X over R ratio, is an important quantity and the following can be obtained directly from the functions that calculate Thevenin equivalent impedance: Zero sequence X over R ratio: Positive sequence X over R ratio: Negative sequence X over R ratio: Im ( Z 00 ) Re ( Z 00 ) Im ( Z 11 ) Re ( Z 11 ) Im ( Z 22 ) Re ( Z 22 )
Short Circuit Current Once the Thevenin equivalent impedance is determined, it is possible to estimate the short circuit current. The fault is represented by its impedance and the rest of the network is represented by a voltage behind the Thevenin equivalent, as shown below (Figure 4-18).
Figure 4-18. Use of Thevenin Equivalent to Get Short Circuit Current
4-31
Determining short circuit current in this manner has the advantage of being fast. It is particularly fast to calculate fault current for several different types of fault at one location. There is a small amount of overhead in moving the fault to another location; the process is still relatively fast however. Note that it is not possible to calculate current in the lines, transformers, switches, and other branches of the network. It is only possible to get fault terminal current. The only current available from these functions is the fault terminal current (Ia, Ib, Ic). For faults of type line-to-ground and faults of type line-to-line-to-ground, there is no ambiguity between current in the fault and the fault terminal current. For faults of type line-to-line there may be ambiguity between terminal current (Ia, Ib, Ic) and current in the fault (Iab, Ibc, Ica) as shown below (Figure 419). Terminal current (Ia, Ib, Ic) is available. Current in the fault (Iab, Ibc, Ica) is not available.
Figure 4-19. Line-to-Line Fault Currents
4-32
Analyzing Network Models Calculating Motor Starting
4.6 Calculating Motor Starting

In PSS/ADEPT, a motor starting analysis is a calculation of voltages and currents in the network when a motor (or motors) is being started. The motor starting activity allows you to choose the motor(s) to be started and to compare the network conditions before and after the motor(s) is started.
4.6.1 Setting Motor Starting Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to select the machine or machines to be started during the motor starting analysis. For the selected machines, PSS/ADEPT will calculate the voltages and currents in the network for a simultaneous start of all machines. To set motor starting analysis options: 1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. The Analysis Options Property sheet displays (Figure 4-20).
Figure 4-20. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Motor Starting Tab 2. Click the Motor Starting tab. The Machines to Start column shows all the machines in the network that can be selected for a motor start analysis, in alphanumeric order by machine name and with the name of the node where the machine is located. To select a machine to start from the diagram, click on the machine to select it, right-click and select Add Item(s) to, then select Motor Starting. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 4-33
3. Select the machine(s) you want to start: Machines to Start: Click the box that precedes the machine name. A check mark displays in the box. Repeat this step for each machine you want in the analysis. To remove a machine from the list, click the box that precedes the machine name (the check mark disappears). 4. Click the OK button to accept the motor starting options.
4.6.2 Performing a Motor Starting Analysis

To activate the PSS/ADEPT motor starting analysis, do one of the following: Choose Analysis>Motor Starting from the Main Menu. Click the Motor Starting Calculation button on the Analysis Toolbar.
Motor starting will appear disabled until a machine has been selected for starting. The results of the motor start analysis will be displayed on the diagram (Figure 4-21) according to the result display options you selected.
Figure 4-21. Sample Motor Starting Analysis Diagram
4-34
The motor starting analysis performs a simultaneous motor start of all designated motors. PSS/ADEPT automatically performs a prestart solution with the starting motors off-line (a load flow), then runs a starting solution. A comparison between the prestart and starting conditions can be obtained either on the diagram or by selecting a Voltage Drop report. The event sequence for motor a starting study is as follows: 1. Specify the motors to start in the Motor Starting tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. 2. Select Analysis>Motor Starting from the Main Menu. 3. The designated motors to be started are disconnected from the network. A load flow is performed to establish prestart conditions. 4. Simultaneous motor starting is carried out by switching all starting motors online. A load flow is again performed to established starting conditions. All transformer taps are locked during the starting calculation. 5. Compare the prestart and starting Report>Node Voltage>Drop from the Main Menu. conditions by choosing
6. Examine the network prestart and starting current and voltages on the Diagram View. Voltage difference between prestart and starting conditions for nodes in the network can be obtained by clicking the Results Tab in the Equipment List View and choosing Voltage change from the Condition drop-down menu. You can see this only after a motor start analysis, and you may have to scroll down the Results tab, which is located on the Equipment List View.
4.6.3 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Motor Starting Solutions

Modeling considerations that form the basis for PSS/ADEPT motor starting solutions are listed below. Sources Sources are represented the same as for short circuit analysis. Running Machines Running machines are modeled the same as in short circuit analysis, except transient impedance is always used. Machines Being Started In motor starting, the synchronous motor being started is modeled as its locked rotor impedance, usually the synchronous machine subtransient impedance. To account for extra starting impedance, you can change the locked rotor impedance value. An induction machine being started is also represented by its locked rotor impedance. The value of the locked rotor impedance can be changed on the Induction Machine Property sheet. Autotransformer Starting In PSS/ADEPT, you can choose to start the motor with a series autotransformer starter (starting compensator) to reduce the motor in-rush current; under the Start-up tab of the Synchronous Machine Property sheet, click the Use autotransformer box (a check mark appears).
4-35
The starting transformer impedance may be entered directly into the fields provided. The transformer impedance you specify is for a transformer tap of 0.65 pu. The actual tap setting to be used for the motor starting is specified on the field provided (Figure 4-22).
Figure 4-22. Machine Property Sheet Showing Series Starting Autotransformer Option
4-36
Analyzing Network Models Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO)
4.7 Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO)

PSS/ADEPTs CAPO is an optional solution package you may purchase in addition to the PSS/ADEPT base license. If you are not licensed to run this option, the Analysis>CAPO and Report>Capacitor Placement Optimization menu options, and the CAPO Toolbar button will be unavailable to you. Additionally, the Analysis>Options CAPO tab will not be present. CAPO places capacitors on the network as long as they are economic (i.e., as long as the value of the monetary savings from the placement is greater than the cost of the capacitor itself). CAPO selects the node for the nth capacitor that results in the largest monetary savings. Load snapshots are implemented in PSS/ADEPT to provide modeling of the load variations, which occur with time, temperature, or other factors. When switched capacitors are placed by CAPO, the capacitor switching increment for each snapshot is also calculated.
4.7.1 Setting CAPO Network Economics

Network economics are used during optimal capacitor placement. To set economics, choose Network>Economics from the Main Menu. The Economics dialog displays. Refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.9, in this manual and the information given below to help you complete the prompts. The cost of electrical energy, cP, is in monetary units per kWh. Based on the units, it should be clear that this is "real" energy. In the United States, the monetary unit would normally be dollars but neither PSS/ADEPT, or CAPO assumes any monetary unit; you can use any local currency, as long as consistency is maintained across the various variables. The cost of reactive energy, cQ, is similar to the cost of real energy, again in the your monetary unit. This cost (as can others) be set to zero if reactive energy has no perceived value. The cost of electric demand, dP, is the cost of generation or capacity that would have to be purchased to replace the systems losses. It is not presently used by CAPO. The cost of reactive demand, dQ, is similar to the real electric demand above. This cost is not presently used by CAPO. The discount rate, r, is used to bring future savings and costs back to the present time. If funds were borrowed from a bank to purchase and install the capacitors, the discount rate should be the same, or very close, to the bank loan rate. No tax consequences or other factors are considered by CAPO when applying the discount rate. The actual equations used by CAPO will be shown after the other variables on the form are explained. The inflation rate, i, is the yearly increase in the cost of energy and capacitor maintenance. Notice that this rate is expressed as a fraction (pu), not a percentage (%). Typical values for this variable might be 0.02 to 0.08 per year. The evaluation period, N, is the amount of time the capacitors have to produce savings which cancel their installation and maintenance cost (i.e., the payback period). Your utility might have a policy that investments of this type pay for themselves within five years. In this case, the evaluation period should be 5. The installation cost for fixed capacitors, cF, is specified in monetary units per kvar of capacitor size; you will need to estimate this cost reasonably close for your utility or customer. It may include the actual price of the capacitor cans, transportation costs, labor, etc.
4-37
The installation cost of switched capacitors, cQ, is like that for fixed capacitors, except that switched capacitors will probably cost more, so they have a separate field. The maintenance rate for fixed capacitors, mF, is the yearly cost of keeping them in service. The rate is expressed per kvar-yr. Maintenance costs increase at the inflation rate. The maintenance rate for switched capacitors, mS, is similar to that for fixed banks. A separate field is provided for the switched units because maintenance costs are expected to be higher for them.
4.7.2 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates CAPO Financials

The CAPO financial calculations are explained below for a fixed capacitor for a single load snapshot. Assume CAPO is considering placing the nth capacitor, of size sF. All the eligible nodes in the network are searched to find where the capacitor can be placed to produce the greatest monetary savings; suppose the real power saving is xP (kW) and the reactive savings is xQ (kvar). The energy savings and maintenance occur over a period of time so they are leveled, by calculating an equivalent period Ne. Using the variables defined above, Ne is: N
Ne =
n=1
1+i n ---------1+r
The present value of the energy savings is then: Savings F = 8760 Ne ( xP c P + xQ cQ ) The present value of the cost of the capacitor is: Cost F = sF ( cF + Ne m F ) If the savings is greater than the cost, CAPO considers placing the (n+1)th capacitor; if the savings are less than the cost, CAPO discards the nth capacitor and stops.
4-38
4.7.3 Setting CAPO Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to define capacitor placement solution options. To set CAPO analysis options: 1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. The Analysis Options Property sheet displays (Figure 4-23). 2. Click the CAPO tab. If you are not licensed to run the CAPO option, this tab will not be visible to you.
Figure 4-23. Analysis Options Property Sheet: CAPO Tab 3. Enter/select the CAPO options you want for your analysis: Connection type: Choose the capacitor type you want to place: Wye or Delta. The connection type applies to both fixed and switched capacitors for all nodes in the system. Load snapshots to consider: Any number of load snapshots may be considered in the optimization process: check the box(es) that precede the snapshot name. These load profiles exist for a given time fraction and are used during the optimization to determine the feasibility of placing a capacitor bank on the system. Since the CAPO analysis
4-39
is being done on a yearly basis, the duration is the fraction of the year during which the snapshot applies. Normally, you probably have the sum of the duration of all the snapshots you are using in CAPO sum to 1.0; however, there is no requirement that this be so. For example, if your utility is only open 10 months of the year, CAPO can still be used. For more information on defining load snapshots, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.11. Number of banks available: Specify the number of fixed and switched capacitor banks you have available for placement (e.g., the number in the warehouse). Initially, the number of fixed and switched capacitors available for placement will be equal to zero. If there are no banks available and you run the CAPO analysis, the Progress View will display the "No Capacitors are available for placement" message. Three-phase bank size: Specify the total three-phase capacitor bank size in kvar for both fixed and switched banks to place on the network. For example, if one 100-kvar fixed capacitor bank is indicated for placement, the analysis will place as many 100kvar fixed banks as it finds necessary to reach the optimal condition. The same is true for switched capacitor banks. Eligible nodes: Indicate which nodes are eligible for both fixed and switched capacitors by checking the box that precedes the node name. Initially, all nodes in the system will be available for placement of both fixed and switched capacitor banks. (A check mark appears in all boxes.) To mark or unmark multiple consecutive nodes: Click the first item in a range, press and hold down the Shift key, click the last node in the range. To mark or unmark multiple nonconsecutive nodes: Press and hold down the Ctrl key, and click the box that precedes each node.
4.7.4 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Capacitor Placement

The following paragraphs provide a complete description of CAPO, considering fixed and switched capacitors and multiple snapshots. First, for each snapshot a load flow is done to let transformer taps and existing switched capacitors adjust. These transformer tap and capacitor increment settings are then saved with each snapshot. There will be no further adjustments of these transformer/capacitor settings as CAPO progresses. CAPO first considers fixed capacitors, which, by definition, are on during all load snapshots. All the eligible nodes in the network are then examined to see at which one the capacitor placement offers the greatest monetary savings. Since there are multiple snapshots, this reduction is calculated as the weighted sum from each snapshot, where the weighting factor is the snapshot duration. The following conditions can then stop the capacitor from actually being placed on the selected node: The present worth of the savings does not offset the present worth of the costs. With multiple snapshots the savings are evaluated as in the simple example considered above, except now a weighted sum over all the profiles is calculated. There are no more fixed capacitors available to be placed (actually, this can be checked before all the nodes are searched, but is listed here for completeness). An upper voltage limit is violated in one of the profiles (the network upper voltage limit is set from the Analysis Options Property sheet under the General tab).
Fixed capacitors continue to be placed until one of the above three conditions are encountered; at that point the fixed capacitor placement ends and the switched placement begins. This procedure
4-40
is a bit more complicated, and before we begin this is probably a good point to make a comment. If only one load snapshot is used, you might expect that after the fixed capacitors are placed there will be no placement of switched capacitors. There are at least four conditions where this is not true: You had only a few fixed capacitors available, and there was still considerable opportunity for savings when these fixed units were depleted. The eligible nodes for switched capacitors are different than those eligible for fixed capacitor placement. You make the cost of switched capacitors less than that of fixed capacitors, and after the fixed capacitors are placed it will still be cost effective to place switched capacitors. You make the size of the switched capacitor bank smaller than that of the fixed bank.
The eligible nodes (for switched capacitors) in the network are reviewed to find the node, which produces the greatest savings summed over all the snapshots. There are a couple of subtleties in this evaluation. First, if placing the switched capacitor causes a voltage violation in any snapshot, the capacitor is turned off during that period. Second, if the capacitor causes a cost penalty for a snapshot, it is also turned off for that snapshot. The calculation of the present worth of the savings is then calculated considering only the snapshots during which the capacitor is turned on. This process continues until a point is reached where: The savings do not offset the cost of the switched capacitor. CAPO runs out of switched capacitors to place.
For reference, the complete set of CAPO equations are listed below. The cost of a capacitor, which consists of installation cost and maintenance cost, is shown first for a fixed capacitor. The form is the same for a switched capacitor. Cost F = sF ( cF + Ne m F ) With multiple snapshots, three more variables must be defined. Let there be K total snapshots used by CAPO, each of which has a duration dk. For any switched capacitor, let switchk be the switch state, where switchk = 1 if the capacitor is on during the snapshot and = 0 if it is off. The savings for a fixed capacitor (which is always switched on) is the sum of the savings over all snapshots. K K Savings F = 8760 Ne cP xP k + cQ xQ k k=1 k=1 The savings for a switched capacitor also involves the switching schedule. K K Savings S = 8760 N e cP switch k xP k + cQ switch k xQ k k=1 k=1
4-41
For completeness, we include again the equation for Ne: N
Ne =
n=1
1+i n ---------1+r
In summary, CAPO places fixed capacitors on the network until one of the stop conditions are encountered. Then switched capacitors are placed until one of the switched capacitor stop conditions occurs. The total cost of the optimization is then the installation and maintenance cost of all the capacitors placed; the total savings is the sum of the savings from each capacitor. CAPO may place multiple fixed and/or multiple switched capacitors at a node. PSS/ADEPT will combine these capacitors into a single fixed capacitor and/or a single switched capacitor. The single switched capacitor will have a switching increment assigned to it, and the switching schedule will show the steps in service for the single capacitor.
4-42
4.7.5 Performing an Optimal Capacitor Placement Analysis

To run the optimal capacitor placement analysis, do one of the following: Choose Analysis>CAPO from the Main Menu. Click on the CAPO button on the Analysis Toolbar.
If you are not licensed to run the CAPO option, this button will not be available. During the optimization, messages are written to the Progress View indicating the size and type of the placed capacitor bank(s) and its node location along with the system losses. When the optimization is complete, the final system configuration including the newly added capacitors is redrawn with the bank size and either the "FX" or "SW" indicating that a fixed or switched capacitor bank has been added. A sample diagram and Progress View after placement is shown in Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24. Diagram and Progress Views After Optimal Capacitor Placement
4.7.6 Reporting CAPO Analysis Results

To obtain a tabular report containing input parameters and analysis results, choose Report>Capacitor Placement Optimization from the Main Menu.
4-43
Analyzing Network Models Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO)
4.8 Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO)

The TOPO feature is an optional solution analysis package that you may purchase in addition to the PSS/ADEPT base package. If you are not licensed to run this option, the Analysis>TOPO and Report>Tie Open Point Optimization menu options, and the TOPO button on the Analysis Toolbar will not be available to you. Additionally, the Analysis>Options TOPO tab will not be present. TOPO optimizes the portion of a radial network connected to the root node. That is, of all possible radial configurations, TOPO finds the one with the lowest real power loss. At the present time, TOPO works only with radial systems. The root node is commonly the first source node, but you may specify a different root node by selecting Network>Properties from the Main Menu. The TOPO algorithm uses a heuristic method based on an optimum power flow. A characteristic of the heuristic algorithm is that it is not possible to find the second best answer, the third best answer, etc. It is also not possible to prove that the TOPO solution is, indeed, the best solution. Such proof would require searching through all the possible radial combinations, which could be a very large number. The TOPO-controllable switches are designated on the Switch Property sheets. Any of the controllable switches that are initially open must cause a network loop to be formed when they are closed. If they do not form a loop, they are either in an island, or would connect to an island if closed. The switches that do not form a loop are discarded by TOPO before the analysis begins, and only the loop forming initially open switches are used. Likewise, closed controllable switches must be in the part of the network in the root node tree; closed switches in islands will be discarded. For a single load snapshot, and no branch overload checking, the operation of TOPO is easily explained. Starting with the initial radial system, TOPO closes one of the open controllable switches to form a loop. An optimum power flow procedure is then done on the loop to determine what is the best switch to open to change the network back to radial. This process continues until the switch that is opened is always the one that was closed, at which time TOPO is finished. The resulting network is the radial network with minimum real power loss. TOPO can work with multiple load snapshots; in which case a single network configuration is found which has the lowest real power loss over all snapshots. That is, the switch setting may not be optimum for any one particular load snapshot, but it will be for the combination of them. When doing the analysis with multiple snapshots, TOPO uses the real power loss from each snapshot weighted by its relative time duration. TOPO can consider branch overloads. If this option is chosen, and the initial network has no overloads, the optimized network will also have no overloads. If the initial system does have overloads, the procedure is slightly more complex. As TOPO is going through the optimization procedure, each time the network is restored to radial (by breaking a loop formed when a controllable switch was closed) all load snapshots are checked to see if they are any overloaded branches. If, at any time during the optimization procedure, a configuration is found with no overloads, then the final optimized network will have no overloads. TOPO needs a "Flat" network to operate on. Therefore, all transformer taps should be set to unity. You can set the transformer taps to unity by selecting Network>Flat Transformers from the Main Menu. If you have open controllable switches connected between parts of the network at two different voltage levels (for instance a switch connected between a 4-kV portion of the network and a 13.2-portion), TOPO may produce strange results. TOPO provides as output the initial and final system losses, and also the monetary value of the loss savings. These loss savings are on a one year basis, and include both energy (real and reactive) an d de m an d (re al an d re ac tive) ca lcula ted usin g the valu es yo u sp ecified un de r Network>Economics from the Main Menu. 4-44 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
4.8.1 Setting TOPO Network Economics

Network economics are used during the analysis to calculate energy and demand costs: price of electrical energy, price of electrical reactive energy, price of electrical demand, and price of electrical reactive demand. To set economics, choose Network>Economics from the Main Menu. The Economics dialog displays. Refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.9, in this manual for information on completing the prompts.
4.8.2 Setting TOPO Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the solution options you want to use in your TOPO analysis. To set your TOPO analysis options: 1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. The Analysis Options Property sheet displays (Figure 4-25).
Figure 4-25. Analysis Options Property Sheet: TOPO Tab 2. Click the TOPO tab. If you are not licensed to run the TOPO option, this button will not be available.
4-45
3. Enter/select the TOPO option you want for your analysis: Consider branch overload limits: Click the check box to consider overloaded branches in the optimization process. A rating index displays the rating limit to use for all branches. This rating index (1-4) is specified under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet, and is the branch rating defined in the Item Property sheet. If overloading occurs during the analysis, the algorithm will back up to a condition where there is no overloading. If overloaded branches are present in the initial system, the final optimized network may also contain overloads. Load snapshots to consider: Any number of load snapshots in addition to the current (base) load data specification may be considered in the optimization process: check the box(es) that precedes the snapshot name. These load snapshots exist for a given time fraction and are used to find the single radial configuration with minimum losses for the set of load snapshots and weighting factors specified here. For more information on defining load snapshots, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.11.
4.8.3 Performing a Tie Open Point Optimization Analysis

To run the tie open point optimization, do one of the following: Choose Analysis>TOPO from the Main Menu. Click on the TOPO button on the Analysis Toolbar.
If you are not licensed to run the TOPO option, this button will not be available. During the optimization, messages are written to the Progress View indicating which switches have changed status and the system losses before and after the optimization. When the optimization is complete, the final radial system configuration is displayed on the diagram (Figure 4-26) with switches that have changed status during the analysis indicated with the text "Open" or "Closed".
4-46
4.8.4 Reporting TOPO Analysis Results

To obtain a tabular report containing input parameters and the final switch configuration, choose Report>Tie Open Point Optimization from the Main Menu.
Figure 4-26. Diagram and Progress Views After TOPO Analysis
4-47
Analyzing Network Models How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Voltage and Current Unbalances
4.9 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Voltage and Current Unbalances

In PSS/ADEPT you can select to color code and/or view voltage and current unbalances at branches and nodes that violate a specified percentage limit. You can select to color code the diagram by choosing the Unbalance nodes, branches option in the Diagram Properties, Color Coding tab. You can also specify the unbalance thresholds along with how you want the program to determine the voltage and current unbalances by selecting the option of your choice in the Analysis Options, General tab. Resulting unbalances are expressed as a percentage and are displayed if they are in violation of the user-specified upper limit, also expressed in percent. You may also select to view unbalances in a tabular report that lists the network items that violate the upper limit.
4.9.1 Voltage Unbalance

Voltage unbalances that violate the specified upper limit can be color-coded on the one-line diagram. In addition, a tabular report is provided that will list all of the nodes that violate the upper limit. The tabular report contains the node name, the phasing coming into the node, the maximum voltage over all phases present, the minimum voltage over all phases present, the average voltage, and the percent unbalance. This report may be selected by choosing Report>Node Voltage>Unbalance. Percent Difference Between the Maximum and Minimum Phase Voltage The equation used to calculate the percent difference between the maximum and minimum phase voltage is given below: Three Energized Phases V max V min ln V
( ln )
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln ) = min Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln )
( ln )
Va + Vb + Vc = -----------------------------------------3 avg
V min ) ln V *100.0 ( % difference ) ln = ( V max ( ln ) ( ln ) avg V max V min ll V = max Vab ( ll ) , Vbc ( ll ) , Vca ( ll ) = min Vab ( ll ) , Vbc ( ll ) , Vca ( ll )
( ll )
( ll )
Va Vb + Vb Vc + Vc Va = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------3 avg
*100.0 ( % difference ) ll = ( V max V min ) ll V ( ll ) ( ll ) avg
4-48
Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B&C, C&A by substitution) V max V min ln V
( ln )
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) = min Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln )
( ln )
Va + Vb = ------------------------2 avg
V min ) ln V ( % difference ) ln = ( V max *100.0 ( ln ) ( ln ) avg ( % difference ) ll = 0 One Energized Phase ( % difference ) ln = 0 ( % difference ) ll = 0 Percent Difference Between the Maximum and Average Phase Voltage (NEMA No. MG 1, ANSI/IEEE C84.1) [default] The equation used to calculate the percent difference between the maximum and average phase voltage is given below: Three Energized Phases ln V Va + Vb + Vc = -----------------------------------------3 avg
( ln )
V max
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln )
ln V ) ln V ( % difference ) ln = ( V max *100.0 ( ln ) avg avg ll V Va Vb + Vb Vc + Vc Va = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------3 avg

( ll )
V max
= max Vab ( ll ) , Vbc ( ll ) , Vca ( ll )
) ll V ( % difference ) ll = ( V max ll V *100.0 ( ll ) avg avg
4-49
Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B&C, C&A by substitution) ln V Va + Vb = ------------------------2 avg
( ln )
V max
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln )
ln V ) ln V ( % difference ) ln = ( V max *100.0 ( ln ) avg avg ( % difference ) ll = 0 One Energized Phase ( % difference ) ln = 0 ( % difference ) ll = 0 Ratio of Negative-Sequence to Positive-Sequence Voltage The equation used to calculate the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence voltage is given below: Three Energized Phases a = cos ( 120 ) + j sin ( 120 )
2
V a + aV b + a Vc V 1 = ------------------------------------------3 V a + a Vb + aV c V 2 = ------------------------------------------3 V 2 - Ratio ( % ) = 100 ----- V 1 Two Energized Phases Ratio ( % ) = 0 One Energized Phase Ratio ( % ) = 0
2
4-50
Percent Difference Between Phase and Average Voltage The equation used to determine the percent difference between phase and average voltage is given below: Three Energized Phases Va + Vb + Vc V avg = -----------------------------------------3 *100.00 a = ( V a V avg ) V avg *100.00 b = ( V b V avg ) V avg c = ( V c V avg ) V avg *100.00 ( %difference ) = max ( a, b, c ) Two Energized Phases V avg = max V a , V b Va + Vb V avg = ------------------------2 ( % difference ) = ( V max V avg ) V avg *100.0 One Energized Phase ( % difference ) = 0
4.9.2 Current Unbalance

Current unbalances that violate the specified upper limit in percent can be color-coded on the oneline diagram. In addition, a tabular report is provided that will list all of the branches that violate the upper limit. The tabular report contains the branch name, the first node (upstream), the second node (downstream), branch type, branch phasing, phase A current, phase B current, phase C current, maximum current over all phases, average current, and the percent unbalance. This report may be selected by choosing Report>Branch Current>Unbalance. Percent Difference Between Maximum and Average Phase Current The equation used to determine the percent difference between the maximum and average phase current is given below: Three Energized Phases I max = max Ia , Ib , Ic Ia + Ib + Ic I avg = ----------------------------------3 ( % difference ) = ( I max I avg ) I avg *100.0 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 4-51
Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B&C, C&A by substitution) I max = max Ia , Ib Ia + Ib I avg = --------------------2 ( % difference ) = ( I max I avg ) I avg *100.0 One Energized Phase ( % difference ) = 0 Percent Difference Between Phase and Average Phase Current The equation used to determine the percent difference between phase and average phase current is given below: Three Energized Phases Ia + Ib + Ic I avg = ----------------------------------3 a = (I I a avg ) I avg *100.0 b = (I I b avg ) I avg *100.0 c = (I I c avg ) I avg *100.0 ( %difference ) = max ( a, b, c ) Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B & C, C & A by substitution) Ia + Ib I avg = --------------------2 ( % difference ) = max ( I I , a avg ) I avg *100.0 ( I b I avg ) I avg *100.0 One Energized Phase ( % difference ) = 0
4-52
Ratio of Zero-Sequence to Positive-Sequence Current The equation used to determine ratio of zero-sequence to positive-sequence current is given below: Three Energized Phases a = cos ( 120 ) + j sin ( 120 )
2
I a + aI b + a I c I 1 = -----------------------------------3 Ia + Ib + Ic I 0 = -------------------------3 I 0 Ratio ( % ) = 100 ---- I 1 Two Energized Phases Ratio ( % ) = 0 One Energized Phase Ratio ( % ) = 0 Ratio of Negative-Sequence to Positive-Sequence Current The equation used to determine ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence current is given below: Three Energized Phases a = cos ( 120 ) + j sin ( 120 )
2
I a + aI b + a I c I 1 = -----------------------------------3 I a + a I b + aI c I 2 = -----------------------------------3 I 2 Ratio ( % ) = 100 ---- I 1 Two Energized Phases Ratio ( % ) = 0 One Energized Phase Ratio ( % ) = 0
2
4-53
Analyzing Network Models How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Power Factor Limits
4.10 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Power Factor Limits

You can select to color code branches on the diagram that are below a user-specified limit. In addition, you may select to view power factor as a branch result on the diagram. To color code the diagram, choose the Branches under power factor limit option in the Diagram Properties, Color Coding tab. You can specify the lower limit for power factor on the Analysis Options, General tab. The equation to calculate power factor is: P pf = -----------------------2 2 P +Q If the square root of (P2 + Q2) is equal to zero, pf = 0.0.
4-54
Chapter 5
Results Reporting
5.1 Overview: Reporting Results
Solution results from any analysis may be displayed on the Diagram View, or in a tabular report. Results on the diagram are fully customizable by setting diagram properties in combination with clicking the Results tab located on the Equipment List View (see Chapter 1, Figure 1-5, and Chapter 4, Section 4.3.3). In addition to viewing results on the diagram, results may also be printed in tabular form by requesting a report. Several predefined tabular reports are available including voltage, power, and current reports as well as device status reports, input data reports, and network summaries. Customized reports can be designed if you purchase a copy of Crystal Reports 7.0 or later. Using Crystal Reports with the reports database allows you to have limitless customizability in report design. The report database tables supplied with PSS/ADEPT are outlined in Appendix G. In this chapter you will learn about: Tabular reports distributed with PSS/ADEPT. Specifying the report units to be displayed on the tabular report. Specifying report options for tabular reports. Selecting items to include in a report. Selecting a tabular report to view. Exporting tabular reports to other applications.
5.2 Selectable Tabular Reports

PSS/ADEPT is distributed with several predefined reports. Some reports may appear disabled, usually because you have not performed an analysis on the network. Phasing in all output reports is indicated by the following convention: if the phase wire is present, the field in the output report will contain a value otherwise, the field will be blank. You can select the units for power, current, angle, and voltage from the Report Units dialog (see Section 5.4). The predefined reports available are described in the following subsections.
5-1
Results Reporting Selectable Tabular Reports
5.2.1 Branch Current Reports

Branch current reports, available after load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analyses, contain currents in lines, transformers, switches, and series capacitors/reactors. There are three types of branch current reports: By phase. By sequence. Overloads. Unbalance.
The branch current by phase report contains the branch current at each phase of the branch. The branch current by sequence report contains the branch current in the positive, negative, and zero sequence. The branch overload report contains a list of branches that exceed a specified rating limit. The rating limit is defined under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. The branch unbalance report contains a list of branches that exceed a specified limit. The unbalance limit is defined under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet.
5.2.2 Branch Power Report

The branch power report, available after load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analyses, contains the branch power at each phase.
5.2.3 Branch Power Losses Report

The branch power loss report, available after load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analysis, contains the branch losses at each phase.
5.2.4 Input List of Network Data Report

The input list of network data contains a list of the network input data (i.e., the data defined on the Item Property sheet). You can select this report at any time.
5.2.5 Node Voltage Reports

Node voltage reports, available after load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analyses contain node voltages at nodes in the network. There are five types of node voltage reports: By phase. By sequence. Over threshold. Under threshold. Drop unbalance profile.
The node voltage by phase report contains node voltages at each phase. The node voltage by sequence report contains node voltages in the positive, negative, and zero sequence. The node voltage over threshold report displays nodes that are over the upper voltage threshold. The node voltage under threshold report displays nodes that are under the lower voltage threshold. You can specify the voltage thresholds under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. The
5-2
voltage drop report contains the prestart voltage, the starting voltage, and the voltage difference between nodes in each phase. The voltage drop report is only available following a motor starting analysis. The unbalance report contains a list of nodes that exceed a specified limit. The unbalance limit is defined under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. The voltage profile is a plot of voltage versus distance. You select a node in the network and a direct trace back to the root node is performed. The root node is specified in Network Properties. Each node voltage is plotted as a point on the graph. For reference, the upper and lower voltage thresholds are also plotted (Figure 5-1).
Figure 5-1. Voltage Profile
5.2.6 Shunt Current Reports

Shunt current reports, available after a load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analysis, contain shunt current at each phase of a shunt item (machine, load, fault). There are two types of shunt current reports: By phase. By sequence.
The shunt current by phase report contains shunt currents at each phase of the shunt item. The shunt current by sequence report contains shunt currents in the positive, negative, and zero sequence.
5-3
5.2.7 Shunt Power Report

The shunt power report is available after a load flow, short circuit, or motor starting analysis and contains the shunt power at each phase of the shunt item (machine, load, fault).
5.2.8 Status Reports

Status reports contain results and status information for certain items in the network. Transformer, synchronous machine, induction machine, and switched capacitor status reports are available only after you have performed a load flow, short circuit, or motor starting analysis. Out-of-service reports are available at all times. There are seven types of status reports: Transformer. Synchronous machine. Induction machine. Switched capacitors. Converted MWh loads. Out-of-service shunt devices. Out-of-service branch devices.
The transformer status report contains transformer status and results including tap settings. The synchronous machine status report contains synchronous machine status and results including actual power drawn or supplied by the machine. The induction machine status report contains induction machine status and results including total power and slip. The switched capacitor status report contains switched capacitor status including the fraction switched in and the voltage at the regulated node. Out-of-service shunt and branch device reports contain those devices, which are currently out of service. The converted MWh load report will display the real (kW) and reactive (kvar) values obtained from the original MWh load data. If the original MWh load data is not concentrated, the calculated loads are split between the FROM and TO nodes internally, and are not included in this report.
5.2.9 Network Summary Report

The network summary report contains summary information such as: the number of each type of network item (nodes, lines, machines, etc.) in the network, the number of loops, total system load, total power drawn and supplied by machines, and total losses. This report is available only after you have performed a load flow, short circuit, or motor starting analysis on the network.
5.2.10 Power Flow Summary

The power flow summary provides a report of the network conditions following an analysis. This report contains the branch name, the first node (upstream), the second node (downstream), the branch phasing, the branch construction type, maximum current over all phases present, minimum voltage over all phases present, total branch power, and distance. The voltage is given at the downstream end of the branch.
5-4
Results Reporting Setting the Report File Location
5.2.11 Power Flow Details

The power flow details report provides a report of the network conditions after an analysis has been performed. This report is more extensive than the power flow summary and contains the branch name, first node (upstream), second node (downstream), branch phasing, construction type, the current in each phase, the voltage in each phase, the minimum voltage, total branch power, total branch losses, and total distance. All voltages are given at the downstream end of the branch.
5.2.12 Fault All Current Report

The Fault All current report is available only after you have performed a fault all calculation. It contains fault current at each node in the network for each fault type you specified in the Short Circuit tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet.
5.2.13 Capacitor Placement Optimization (CAPO) Report

The CAPO report contains economics, losses, and capacitor placement information after an CAPO analysis. For each load snapshot, the switched capacitor-switching schedule is also displayed.
5.2.14 Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) Report

The TOPO report contains economics, losses, and a list of switches along with their in-service status after a TOPO analysis.
5.2.15 Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA) Report

The DRA report contains reliability indices after a DRA analysis.
5.3 Setting the Report File Location

Report files distributed with PSS/ADEPT are located in the \rpt directory of the PSS/ADEPT installation. The default will be \Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT5\rpt. This path is a program setting that can be modified by selecting File>Program Settings from the Main Menu. If this path is not specified, or there are no files with the extension .rpt located in the report directory, an error message will be generated. These report files are read only and should not be directly modified with Crystal Reports. If you wish to customize these reports, make a writable copy of the report and rename it. PSS/ADEPT will allow you to open any report file by selecting Report>Open and specifying the name of the report file.
5-5
Results Reporting Setting Report Units
5.4 Setting Report Units

Report units define the representation of voltage, current, power, and angle on the tabular output reports. Report units are program settings that will be remembered on application start-up until subsequent modifications occur. Selected units are displayed at the top of each page of every report. To set the report units: 1. Select Report>Units from the Main Menu. The Report Units dialog displays (Figure 5-2).
Figure 5-2. Report Units Dialog 2. Select/specify the report units: Identifier Tag: Enter a text identifier to appear at the top of the first page of the report. This identifier tag will be automatically set to the company name you specified during the PSS/ADEPT installation.
Voltage Units: Voltage: Select how you want the voltage to be displayed on the output reports; kV, pu, or voltage on a nominal delivery voltage base. Decimal precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the decimal for voltage. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places. Representation: Select the voltage output display as either line-to-line (LL) or lineto-neutral (LN). Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
5-6
Results Reporting Setting Report Units
Power and Losses Units: Power and Losses Units: Select how you want the power and losses to be displayed on the output reports. Decimal Precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the decimal for power and losses. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places. Representation: Select either rectangular (P, Q) or polar (S, kVA, pf, lead/lag) representation of power.
Angle: Angle Units: Select how to display angles in the output reports; 0 to 360, 180 to 180, 0 to 2 , to raid. Decimal Precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the decimal for angle. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places.
Current: Current Units: Select how you want to display current in the output reports (amps, kA). Decimal Precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the decimal for current. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places.
Thevenin Impedance: Units: Select how you want to display Thevenin impedance values following a Fault All Analysis (Ohms or pu).
5-7
Results Reporting Setting Report Options
5.5 Setting Report Options

Report options specify the sorting key to sort the contents of the report and set the report description. These options are specified for each report individually; you will be prompted for this information each time you select a report. If you do not want to be prompted for these options every time you select a report, turn the option off by removing the check mark from the Show Options Dialog located under the Report Menu. To set report options: 1. Select any report from Report on the Main Menu (hereafter in this chapter referred to as the Report Menu). The Report Options dialog displays (Figure 5-3).
Figure 5-3. Report Options Dialog 2. Select/specify the report options: Description: Specify the report description you want to appear on the top of the first page of every report. The description will be automatically set to the first title line you specified in Network>Properties. Sort by: You may select how the devices in the report are to be sorted. Some of the sort by options will be disabled indicating that this particular item is not available on the requested report. The following options can be selected: Device Name: Sort the devices in alphabetical order by device name. Node base voltage: Sort the nodes in ascending order of base voltage. Phasing: Sort the devices in alphabetical order by phasing. Device type: Sort the devices in alphabetical order by device type. Node Name: Sort the report in alphabetical order by node name. Tree: Sort the report based on the specified item ordering method.
5-8
Results Reporting Reporting on a Selection
5.6 Reporting on a Selection

If you want the report to contain only those items that are currently selected in the Diagram View and Equipment List View, select Report>Report on Selected Items. A check mark next to this report option indicates that you have selected to report only on the selected items. If this option is checked and you have not selected any devices, the program will produce an error message indicating that there are no selected devices in the network.
5.7 Previewing the Report

When you select a report, the report will be displayed in a print preview window. From this window, the report may be viewed, printed to a printer, or exported to another application. Below is an example of a Report Preview window (Figure 5-4).
Previous Page First Page Next Page Last Page Print
Zoom Level Export
Figure 5-4. Report Preview Window From this preview window you can select to do the following operations: View the previous, next, first, or last pages of the report. Zoom to a certain level. Select another report. Export the file to another supported file format. Print the report. 5-9
Results Reporting Exporting a Report to Another Format
5.8 Exporting a Report to Another Format

A report may be exported to a file supported by another application such as Microsoft Excel. To export a report: 1. Select File>Export from the Report Menu, or click the Export button. The Export dialog displays (Figure 5-5).
Figure 5-5. Export Dialog 2. Select the format and destination for the report: Format: Select from the available list the file format you wish to export the report to. In this example, Separated Values (.CSV) has been chosen. Destination: Select the destination of the report. Your choices are: Disk file: creates a file in the format you specified in Step 1 on the hard disk. Application: exports the report and automatically loads it into the application specified in Step 1. Lotus Notes database: If you have Lotus Notes, you may export the report to a Lotus Notes database file.
In some cases, exporting a report will not display certain fields correctly. For example, exporting to Excel 8.0 (xls) may not display date information correctly. This is due strictly to limitations of Crystal Reports. Try selecting another format, such as Excel 8.0 (xls) (Extended) to see if the problem can be rectified.
5-10
Results Reporting Creating and Designing Reports Using Crystal Reports
5.9 Creating and Designing Reports Using Crystal Reports

PSS/ADEPT can open report files generated with the Crystal Reports Designer, Version 7.0 or later. These report files can be generated off line by purchasing Crystal Reports and interacting with the PSS/ADEPT results database. The results database is documented in Appendix G. You may use the Crystal Reports Designer to generate customized reports or you may use the designer to edit and save modifications to the report files distributed with PSS/ADEPT. If you choose to edit report files distributed with PSS/ADEPT, make a copy of the report file and apply changes to the copy of the original report file. If you do not do this, you may destroy the original report. To open a customized report: 1. Select Report>Open from the Main Menu. An Open File dialog displays (Figure 5-6).
Figure 5-6. Open File Dialog 2. Select the report file to open. 3. Click OK. The report displays in a print preview window.
5-11
5-12
Chapter 6
Line Properties Calculator
6.1 Overview: Line Properties Calculator
The Line Properties Calculator (LineProp) calculates line constants used in many power system analysis problems. The constants include: Zero- and positive-sequence impedances for each circuit in the corridor. Zero- and positive-sequence admittances for each circuit in the corridor. Self and mutual impedances for each circuit in the corridor. Self and mutual admittances for each circuit in the corridor. Average mutual impedances and admittances for each pair of circuits in the corridor. Impedance matrix for the corridor. Admittance matrix for the corridor.
The calculations performed by LineProp rely on tables of conductor characteristics. These tables are described in Appendix H. LineProp supports the following unit configurations: 60 Hz, English 60 Hz, SI (metric) 50 Hz, English 50 Hz, SI (metric)
English units use input in feet and output in feet. SI units use input in meters and output in meters. In this manual you will learn how to: Start the LineProp Calculator. Set-up data for a corridor. Perform an analysis. View results from an analysis. Save the results.
6-1
Line Properties Calculator Overview: Line Properties Calculator
6.1.1 Nomenclature
Throughout this manual the following nomenclature is used: Corridor A set of parallel electrical Circuits, each with the (nearly) same geographic beginning and end point. A Corridor generally has a width, which may be from 30 to 500 ft, and a length, which may be up to hundreds of miles. Position A set of 1 to N parallel Conductors of the same type arranged in a regular pattern around a center point, and electrically tied together at intervals much less than a wavelength, so each Conductor in the Position has the same voltage. Every position has either a single-phase assignment or is grounded. A Position with only one Conductor is often called a Conductor instead of a Position. A set of Positions, make up a Circuit. (Also referred to as a Bundle.) Circuit A set of parallel Positions used to transmit electrical power. A Circuit is said to have a certain number of phases; the vast majority of Circuits in actual use have three phases, which are given the tag names of ABC, RYB, etc. The phase of a Position is a tag designated by the electrical utility, and can be changed at any time. A Position can only have one phase but multiple Positions in a circuit can have the same phase. A set of Circuits, make up a Corridor. (Also referred to as a Line.) Ungrounded Position A Position not electrically connected to earth within the Corridor. Grounded Position A Position electrically connected to earth at regular intervals along the Corridor. Shield wire Another name for Grounded Position. A Position grounded often enough so it can be assumed to be continuously grounded and have zero voltage on it. Also called a ground wire or neutral wire. Shield wire Positions usually have only one Conductor, hence the name, shield wire. (Also referred to as neutral wire.) Conductor A physical wire used to carry current. A set of Conductors make up a Position. Conductor Type A designation, that usually indicates the physical construction of a conductor. Common types for transmission and distribution lines are: ACSR, AAC, AAAC, ACAR, ALUMOWELD, CU, EHS, HS. Conductor Name A tag applied to a particular conductor. Some conductors used by United States utilities have bird names (e.g., Drake, Robin, etc.). Wire Another name for Conductor especially used when referring to Grounded Positions. Phase A tag applied to each bundle of a line used for the transmission of ac electrical power. A line in a three-phase power system in the United States (and some other countries) usually has the bundles labeled A, B, and C. Conductor resistance The ac resistance per unit length of the Conductor at a designated temperature. Conductor reactance The ac reactance per unit length of the Conductor at a designated frequency and spacing (usually a 1 foot spacing, but 1 meter is also possible). Conductor diameter The physical diameter of the Conductor.
6-2
Line Properties Calculator Using the Line Properties Calculator
Circuit impedance A measure of the gradient of voltage versus current along the Circuit. Usually expressed in ohms () or /unit length. Impedance consists of a real part called resistance (R) and an imaginary part call reactance (X). Circuit admittance A measure of the gradient of current versus voltage along a Circuit. Usually expressed in Siemens (S) or S per unit length. An older name for Siemens was mho. Admittance consists of a real part called conductance (G) and an imaginary part called susceptance (B). Sag For a Position or Conductor, the difference between the height at the structure and the height at the lowest point, which would be at mid-span for a Conductor over level ground. Earth resistivity A specification of the bulk resistance properties of the earth, designated by the symbol , and always in units of m. Occasionally the inverse of resistivity, called conductivity and designated by , may be encountered.
The nomenclature used to describe a Corridor hierarchy is: Corridor Circuit Position Conductor
6.2 Using the Line Properties Calculator

An illustrated example (see Figure 6-1), with a fairly standard 345 kV circuit (in the U.S.) and a parallel distribution circuit, will be used to illustrate data entry and calculations using the Line Properties Calculator. The view is across the width of the corridor. The conductors/positions are shown at their connection points to the structure. Units are English (miles) for this example. The 345 kV circuit is the 1st circuit, and the distribution circuit the 2nd circuit. The angle to the first conductor in the position for the 345 kV circuit is specified as 180. The first circuit was entered with an X (horizontal) position of 0 ft and the second with a position of 75 ft.
27 ft sag = 9 ft 12 ft 10 ft
2 ft sag = 15 ft bundle separation = 18 in 4 ft 50 ft 30 ft conductor & shield wire sag = 6 ft 2 ft
0 ft
75 ft
Figure 6-1. Example Corridor for Illustration of Line Property Calculations Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 6-3
To initiate the Line Properties Calculator choose Tools>Line Constants from the PSS/ADEPT Main Menu. The Corridor View is displayed. Referring to Figure 6-2 notice: the Title Bar, at the top of the view, is now PSS/ADEPT - [LineProp1], the menu at the top of the view is now changed, the Corridor View is now where the Diagram View was, and the LineProp Calculator has its own toolbar shown at the top of the Corridor View.
Figure 6-2. Initial Corridor View
6-4
6.2.1 Corridor View

To add a circuit to the corridor: 1. Click the Add New Circuit button on the LineProp Toolbar. The Add New Circuit dialog is displayed (Figure 6-3).
Figure 6-3. Add New Circuit Dialog 2. Enter the Circuit Name; the default name is Circuit_x, where x is the default horizontal position. 3. Enter the Horizontal Position of the new circuit. The first circuit assumes a horizontal reference point of (0) which is the base of the circuit tower. For subsequent circuits, you can specify the horizontal position (reference point of the base of the circuit tower). The horizontal position for circuits added after the first will default to 20 ft (m) from the center line of the last positioned circuit.
6-5
4. Click OK to accept the input. The Corridor View is now changed as illustrated in Figure 6-4. Notice that there are two circles at position 0, one on top of the other. The top circle represents a Position.
Figure 6-4. Initial Circuit View 5. Click on or near the top circle, in this case at position (0,0), and a dashed box will appear around the circuit. This selects the circuit.
6-6
6. Double-click anywhere inside the dashed box and the Current Circuit Properties sheet is displayed. Figures 6-5 and 6-6 illustrate completed Current Circuit Properties sheets.
Figure 6-5. Circuit_1 Properties Sheet
6-7
Figure 6-6. Circuit_2 Properties Sheet 7. In the Current Circuit Properties sheet: You can change the Circuit Name and Circuit Location. When you change the Number of Positions, the appropriate number of Position Details lines appear. The maximum number of positions is 10; the default number is 1. Choose the name of each position from the list of acceptable names; ground wires are noted by a name with the first two characters of "Gr". The same position name may be assigned to one or more positions within a circuit. All conductors in all positions with the same phase in a circuit are equivalenced to a single entry in the Z impedance matrix and the Y admittance matrix for the circuit. Specify the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) location and midspan sag for each of the positions. X location is specified relative to the circuit origin. Y location is specified as the height at the structure connection relative to the earth. When you specify that the number of conductors per position (bundle) is greater than one (max=8), the separation between adjacent position conductors (measured center to center) and the position of the first conductor relative to a zero horizontal position must be specified. Another term used to describe this separation is "bundle spacing".
6-8
Specify the position angle. The XY position of a bundle is its center point. A configuration occasionally seen on U.S. 345 kV lines is a vertical bundle of two conductors with 18 inch separation. This is specified as two conductors (in the bundle), separation of 18 inches (also bundle diameter in this case) and 90 to the first conductor. A drawing of the bundle is shown in Figure 6-7.
Conductor
90 degrees 18 inches x/y position of center point
Figure 6-7. Conductor Bundle Diagram To choose a conductor type, click the Browse button located to the right of the Conductor Type field. The Select Conductor Type dialog appears (Figure 6-8a).
6-9
a. Partial View Before Fit All Columns
b. After Fit All Columns
Figure 6-8. Select Conductor Type Dialog 8. The Select Conductor Type dialog allows you to view the properties of various conductors and to select the conductor for the previously selected position. This dialog has the following features: You can sort the conductor data based on a combination of several sort criteria. When the Clear Sort Fields button is clicked, the sort criteria are cleared. To select a sort criteria highlight and click on the criterion, it is moved to the Sort Fields criteria. The criteria are cumulative. In the example shown above, conductors are to be sorted by type and then by name.
6-10
To perform the sort, click the Do Sort button. For the example shown above the conductors in the database are sorted by type and then by name. Conductor properties will be shown in English or International System (SI) units depending on the option chosen. Scroll through the conductor database. To select a conductor, click on the conductor name (the selected conductor is shown in the box in the lower right side of the dialog) and select OK, or double-click on the conductor name to select it and return to the Current Circuit Properties sheet. The Fit All Columns button above the conductor table allows the user to view all data for the conductors in one dialog, see Figure 6-8b.
9. When you click the OK button in the Current Circuit Properties sheet: Checks are made on the circuit properties and appropriate messages displayed to indicate improper locations (e.g., conductor separations that are not feasible, phase positions that are not feasible, etc.). Corrections must be made to the data before the program can proceed. Once all infeasible data are corrected, program control is returned to the LineProp Corridor View and the circuit is displayed as illustrated in Figure 6-9. Each position in the circuit is shown and labeled.
Figure 6-9. Corridor View
6-11
6.2.2 Status Bar

The Status Bar at the bottom of the Corridor View serves two purposes. First, when the cursor is positioned over a LineProp Toolbar button, the meaning or use of the button is stated. Second, when the cursor is not over a LineProp Toolbar button the Status Bar shows: The name of the Corridor File currently being viewed. The name is blank if the current data have not been saved to a file. The name of the circuit that is currently highlighted (the circuit surrounded by a dashed box). The number of positions associated with the circuit. The location of the centerline of the circuit.
6.2.3 Menu Bar

The LineProp Menu Bar (Figure 6-10), is located at the top of the LineProp View.
Figure 6-10. LineProp Menu Bar
6.2.3.1 File Menu

The File Menu provides options for opening an existing Corridor file, saving an existing Corridor file, saving the current corridor data to a new file, printing the corridor view, and exiting the line properties calculator.
6.2.3.2 Edit Menu

The Edit Menu provides options to insert a circuit at a specified location, go to and highlight a specified circuit, delete one or all circuits, copy a circuit, and paste a circuit.
6.2.3.3 View Menu

The View Menu allows you to zoom in or out of the corridor view, zoom to the full extent of the corridor, and to refresh the corridor view.
6.2.3.4 Analysis Menu

The Analysis Menu allows you to calculate and report the circuit impedances. The results of this calculation are described in Section 6.3.3.3.
6.2.3.5 Options Menu

The Options Menu allows you to specify default settings for User Options, Circuit Options, and Corridor Options. These are discussed in more detail in Section 6.2.6.
6.2.3.6 Window Menu

The Window Menu options allow you to control the placement of views in the application. New instances of corridor views may be created and multiple views may be cascaded or tiled. Views that have been previously minimized may be arranged by choosing Arrange Icons.
6-12
6.2.3.7 Help Menu

The Help Menu options provide information about the program.
6.2.4 Toolbar
The LineProp Toolbar (Figure 6-11) provides quick access to LineProp functions. The toolbar allows you to quickly create, open, or save a corridor file; print the corridor file; add, copy, or delete circuits; change the viewing area; change defaults; validate the circuit dimensions; and calculate impedances. The About LineProp button provides information on the LineProp version that is being used.
Create New Corridor File Save Corridor File Add New Circuit Delete Circuit Zoom In Refresh Window
About LineProp
Zoom Window
Validate Circuits
Print Corridor Open Corridor
Delete All Circuits Zoom Extent Calculate Impedances Paste Circuit Copy Circuit Zoom Out Change Defaults
Figure 6-11. LineProp Toolbar
6.2.5 Zoom and Refresh Capabilities

The Zoom and Refresh capabilities allow you to view specific areas of the Corridor View in more or less detail. The Zoom In and Zoom Out features operate much like a cameras zoom lens. You see more (Zoom Out) or less (Zoom In) of the view centered on the starting point of the zoom operations. The toolbar Zoom Window button and the Main Menu View>Zoom Rect option operate in the same manner. To activate this feature: select View>Zoom Rect from the Main Menu or select the Zoom Window button from the toolbar, position the mouse pointer in the drawing area near the area of interest, hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse diagonally (you should see a rectangle around the objects of interest), release the mouse button, and the area of interest is the focus of the corridor view.
The Refresh Window and Zoom Extent options cause the Corridor View to return to a view of the full corridor.
6-13
6.2.6 Setting Options

The LineProp module has several default settings that you may alter. To view and edit the LineProp defaults, select Options>Setup from the Main Menu or click the Change Defaults button. The LineProp defaults are arranged into three groups: User Options, Circuit Options, and Corridor Options.
6.2.6.1 Users Options

When you elect to view and/or change the LineProp defaults, the LineProp Options dialog is displayed (Figure 6-12). The first tab is for User options.
Figure 6-12. LineProp Options Dialog: User Tab Corridor Display: Here the you can choose to have or not to have Position Names displayed in the Corridor View, to have the earth shown in the diagram, to have the scale indicator shown, and to have the grid shown. If you want to have the grid shown, the grid spacing must be specified. Colors: This allows you to specify the colors for the background, the circuit centerline, and the conductor and ground wires. Clicking on the button to the right of the display box allows you to pick a color from the color palette. 6-14 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
Units: This allows you to specify that all measurement units used in LineProp are to be English or International System (SI). English units specify resistance and reactance in ohms/mile, diameter in inches, conductor locations in feet, spacing in inches and output in ohms/mile and s/mile. SI units specify resistance and reactance in ohms/km, delimiter in mm, conductor locations in m, spacing in cm and output in ohms/km and s/km. Changing units while a circuit corridor is opened will not automatically convert specified conductor positions. This must be done manually if you are not using a "Default" conductor and ground wire. Default Ground Conductor: This allows you to select the default ground conductor from the conductor file and to modify the conductor reactance, resistance, and diameter. The operation to select a new default ground conductor is the same as that used to select a specific conductor for a position (see Section 6.2.1, Step 8). Default Conductor: This allows you to select the default phase conductor and to modify the conductor reactance, resistance, and diameter. The operation to select a new default conductor is the same as that used to select a specific conductor for a position (see Section 6.2.1, Step 8). General: This allows you to select the system frequency, the number of decimal places for display, and the default conductor and corridor file names.
6-15
6.2.6.2 Circuit Options

The second tab is for Circuit options (Figure 6-13). This option sheet is similar to the sheet used to specify the Current Circuit Properties. In fact, the format designated here will be used whenever a new circuit is placed in the Corridor View. Before you can accept and exit the Circuit tab, position locations must not conflict with each other.
Figure 6-13. LineProp Options Dialog: Circuit Tab
6-16
6.2.6.3 Corridor Options

The third tab is for Corridor options (Figure 6-14). Here you can set the default for the earth resistivity, the options to use line length and hyperbolic correction factors, and a description of the corridor.
Figure 6-14. LineProp Options Dialog: Corridor Tab
6-17
For short transmission lines (less than about 50 miles), exact and approximate equivalent-circuit parameters are very nearly equal and could be modeled satisfactorily by the equivalent circuit shown in Figure 6-15. A long transmission line (greater than 50 miles) cannot be represented by an equivalent circuit (shown in Figure 6-16) because of the behavior of Zex and Yex of a long line do not correspond to constant values of Rs, Ls, and Cs.
LR LL
LC s ---------2
LC s ---------2
L mi
Figure 6-15. Equivalent Circuit for Short Transmission Line The exact parameters, Zex and Yex , of the equivalent circuit shown below may be written as:
Z
ex
Y ex ---------2
Y ex ---------2
Figure 6-16. Pi-Form Transmission Line Equivalent Circuit
Z ex = R ex + j L ex Y ex = j C ex
6-18
The parameters Rex, Lex, and Cex are not constants; they vary significantly as frequency is varied with the variation becoming stronger as line length is increased. Figure 6-17 considers a 400 mile length; it shows the exact pi-equivalent parameters for frequencies of 60 and 65 Hz.
R = 10.59 L = 0.5276 H C = 8.542 F
C = 8.542 F
Pi-Equivalent at 60 Hz
R = 10.08 L = 0.5168 H C = 8.634 F
C = 8.634 F
Pi-Equivalent at 65 Hz
Figure 6-17. "Exact" Pi-Equivalent Circuits for 400-Mile Length of Example Transmission Line at 60 and 65 Hz (Skin Effect Neglected)
6-19
Figure 6-18 shows the percentage difference between the 60 and 65 Hz values of Rex, Lex, and Cex of the line as its length is increased through the practical range. Apparently, the use of constant effective resistance, inductance, and capacitance values in the pi-equivalent circuit is reasonable for line sections up to about 100 miles long, but longer lines are not properly represented by an equivalent with constant resistance, inductance and capacitance.
Length (mi) 10 50 100 200 300 400 500
Difference,% R 0 0.07 0.25 1.02 2.42 4.67 8.23 L 0 0 0.14 0.52 1.14 2.09 2.55 C 0 0.02 0.06 0.25 0.58 1.07 1.75
10 8 6 ,% 4 2 0 100 200 300 400 Length, miles 500 L C R
Figure 6-18. Difference Between 60 and 65 Hz Values of Rex, Lex, and Cex as a Function of Line Length For long transmission lines, it is recommended that you use the line length option by checking the Use Length box. Enter the line length in the box provided and select whether or not you want a hyperbolic correction to be applied. If the hyperbolic box is checked a correction factor will be applied to the impedance as described in Figure 6-18.
6-20
Line Properties Calculator Corridor Files
6.3 Corridor Files

6.3.1 Opening/Saving/Printing Corridor Files
6.3.1.1 Opening a Corridor File
To open an existing corridor file: 1. Select File>Open from the Main Menu or click the Open Toolbar. The Open dialog is displayed (Figure 6-19). button on the LineProp
2. Enter/select the directory and filename of the desired corridor file. 3. Click the Open button to display the diagram.
Figure 6-19. Open Dialog
6-21
6.3.1.2 Saving a Corridor File

To save a corridor view: 1. Click the Save button on the LineProp Toolbar, or choose File>Save or File>Save As from the Main Menu. The Save As dialog displays (Figure 6-20). 2. Enter the directory path and filename you want for the file. 3. Click the OK button to save the data.
Figure 6-20. Save As Dialog
6-22
6.3.1.3 Printing a Corridor File

The corridor diagram may be printed, and, if desired, previewed on the computer terminal screen. To print or preview the diagram: 1. Click the Print button on the LineProp Toolbar and choose Print Corridor or Print Preview Corridor or choose File>Print or File>Print Preview from the Main Menu. 2. If Print Preview is selected the corridor diagram will be displayed on the computer screen (Figure 6-21). You can: a. Zoom In to see a particular area of the diagram, b. Close the Print Preview and return to the Corridor View, c. Print the corridor diagram.
Figure 6-21. Print Preview
6-23
3. When you click the Print button, the Print dialog is displayed (Figure 6-22). 4. In the Print dialog you can specify where the printed output is to go, the number of pages to print, and the number of copies to print. 5. Click OK to print the corridor diagram.
Figure 6-22. Print Dialog
6-24
6.3.2 Modifying Corridor Files

There are several ways that existing corridor files may be modified. You need to first select the circuit and then operate on the circuit.
6.3.2.1 Selecting a Circuit

To select a circuit, move the mouse pointer near the circuit and click once. A dashed rectangle should appear around the circuit. If the rectangle does not appear, move the mouse closer to the circuit tower and click once again. The Corridor View will appear, as illustrated in Figure 6-23. Note the dashed box surrounding the circuit.
Figure 6-23. Selected Circuit View
6-25
6.3.2.2 Adjusting Circuit Properties

To adjust the current circuit properties, double-click inside the dashed box surrounding the circuit. The Current Circuit Properties sheet, illustrated in Figure 6-24, will appear. You may change any of the values shown on this properties sheet. Click Cancel to reject any changes and to return to the Corridor View. Click OK to accept all changes and to return to the Corridor View.
Figure 6-24. Current Circuit Properties Sheet
6.3.2.3 Copying a Circuit

To copy a circuit: 1. Select the circuit to be copied. 2. Click the Copy the Main Menu. button on the LineProp Toolbar or select Edit>Copy Circuit from
3. Paste the circuit at a new location as instructed in the next section of this manual.
6-26
6.3.2.4 Pasting a Circuit

To paste a circuit: 1. Click the Paste Menu. button on the LineProp Toolbar or select Edit>Paste from the Main
2. The dialog illustrated in Figure 6-25 will appear. 3. Enter the name and horizontal position of the new circuit. Default values are given which may be accepted or rejected by you. 4. Click OK to paste the new circuit into the corridor. Note that the circuit just pasted into the Corridor View is now selected.
Figure 6-25. Copy Circuit Dialog
6.3.2.5 Deleting a Circuit

To delete a circuit: Select the circuit to be deleted. 1. Click the Delete the Main Menu. button on the LineProp Toolbar or select Edit>Delete Circuit from
2. You are asked to verify that the circuit is to be deleted, as illustrated in Figure 6-26. "New Circuit" is the name of the designated circuit to delete.
Figure 6-26. Verify Circuit to Delete Message Box
6-27
6.3.2.6 Deleting All Circuits

All circuits in the Corridor View may be deleted at one time: 1. Click the Delete All button on the LineProp Toolbar or select Edit>Delete All Circuits from the Main Menu. 2. You are asked to verify that all circuits are to be deleted, as illustrated in Figure 6-27.
Figure 6-27. Verify to Delete All Circuits Message Box
6.3.3 Analyzing Corridor Files

Once the corridor configuration has been set it is time to analyze the corridor by: validating the corridor data, performing an analysis, and reporting the results.
6.3.3.1 Automatic Validation

Validation of the circuit parameters is automatically done when you click OK in the Current Circuit Properties sheet. Any physical property errors detected by the LineProp logic are displayed below the properties sheet, as illustrated in Figure 6-28. Note that the y-coordinate of position A of the first circuit is the same as the ground wire, which is reported. The following validation checks are made: Two or more conductor bundles are not touching at the structure. Two or more bundles are not touching at their effective height. The bundle effective height is the height at the structure minus 2/3 of the sag. Two or more conductors within a bundle are not touching each other. Conductor bundle does not touch the ground. Corridor length is greater than or equal to 0.0. Earth resistivity is greater than or equal to 0.001. Conductor Y position (vertical) is greater than or equal to 0. Conductor sag is greater than or equal to 0.0. Conductor diameter is greater than 0.001. Conductor resistance is greater than or equal to 0. Conductor reactance is greater than or equal to 0.
6-28
Conductor separation is greater than or equal to 0. Conductor separation is allowed to be zero when only one conductor per bundle is specified.
Figure 6-28. Validation of Circuit Properties
6.3.3.2 User-Initiated Validation

You can initiate the validation process by clicking the Validation button on the LineProp Toolbar.
6.3.3.3 Performing an Analysis

To calculate the impedances of the corridor either click the Calculation button on the LineProp Toolbar or select Analysis>Impedance from the Main Menu. When the calculations are complete, the Results Window is displayed.
6-29
The results shown in this section are for a two circuit corridor. The circuit data are shown in Figures 6-29a and 6-29b.
a. First Circuit Data
Figure 6-29. Corridor Circuit Data
6-30
b. Second Circuit Data
Figure 6-29 (Cont). Corridor Circuit Data
6-31
6.3.3.4 Calculation Results

The results of the calculations are: Zero- and Positive-Sequence Impedances for Each Circuit (Z0-Z1 (Per Circuit) Tab). In Figure 6-30, each circuit in the corridor is listed along with the calculated positive- and zero-sequence resistance and reactance in ohm per circuit length. If English units are being used, then the reported units are ohm per mile. Note that transposition is assumed. The Save Results button allows you to save the results in a spreadsheet format (see Section 6.3.3.5). A click the Cancel button returns you to the LineProp View.
Figure 6-30. Sample Zero- and Positive-Sequence Impedances Report
6-32
Zero- and Positive-Sequence Admittances for Each Circuit (Y0-Y1 (Per Circuit) Tab). The positive- and zero-sequence admittances are in micro-Siemens per unit length. For the case illustrated in Figure 6-31, the admittances are in micro-Siemens per mile.
Figure 6-31. Sample Zero- and Positive-Sequence Admittance Report
6-33
Self and Mutual Impedances for Each Circuit (Self-Mutual Z (Per Circuit) Tab). The self and mutual impedances are ohm per unit length. In the case shown in Figure 6-32, the impedances are ohm per mile.
Figure 6-32. Sample Self and Mutual Impedances Report
6-34
Self and Mutual Admittances for Each Circuit (Self-Mutual Y (Per Circuit) Tab). The self and mutual admittances are in micro-Siemens per unit length. In Figure 6-33, these are micro-Siemens per mile.
Figure 6-33. Sample Self and Mutual Admittances Report
6-35
Average Mutual Impedance and Admittance for Each Circuit (Zm-Ym Avg (Per Circuit) Tab). The report shown in Figure 6-34, requires two or more circuits on the corridor. This report shows the calculated average mutual impedance and admittance between two circuits. The average mutual impedance (ZmAvg-R and ZmAvg-X) is reported in ohm per circuit length (miles for the sample case); the average mutual admittance (YmAvg-G and YmAvg-B) is reported in micro-Siemens per circuit length (miles for the sample case).
Figure 6-34. Sample Average Mutual Impedance and Admittance Report
6-36
Impedance for the Corridor (Z (Corridor) Tab). This report shows the impedance matrix for the corridor. The numbers listed across the top of the report correspond to the circuit phases. Thus, 1 corresponds to Circuit_0.A, 2 corresponds to Circuit_0.B, etc. The off-diagonal terms are for the coupling of the phases. All values are expressed in ohm per circuit length. In the sample case (Figure 6-35), this is ohm per mile.
Figure 6-35. Sample Corridor Impedance Report
6-37
Admittance for the Corridor (Y (Corridor) Tab). This report shows the admittance matrix. The numbers listed across the top of the report correspond to the circuit phase. Thus, 1 corresponds to Circuit_0, Phase A, 2 corresponds to Circuit_0, Phase B, etc. All values are given in micro-Siemens per corridor length. In the sample case (Figure 636), all values are given in micro-Siemens per mile.
Figure 6-36. Sample Corridor Admittance Report
6-38
6.3.3.5 Saving Output to a File

The results of the analysis may be saved to an Excel spreadsheet. To perform the save: 1. Click the Save Results button at the bottom of the Analysis dialog. 2. The Save Results dialog is displayed (Figure 6-37). 3. Select the directory and filename where the data are to be stored. 4. Click the Save button to save the data are return to the previous dialog.
Figure 6-37. Save Results Dialog
6-39
6.3.3.6 Saving Impedances to the Construction Dictionary

PSS/ADEPT uses a Construction Dictionary. This dictionary stores data for switches, lines, transformers, and series capacitors. (See Appendix B, Section B.2 of the PSS/ADEPT Users Manual for a description of this file.) To add to an existing construction dictionary or to create a new construction dictionary: 1. Select the Construction Dictionary option under the Analysis menu item. When the Construction Dictionary option is selected, a dialog similar to that shown in Figure 6-38 is shown on the computer screen. The Construction Dictionary filename defaults to the directory and filename specified in the PSS/ADEPT program settings. This menu item will be disabled if you have chosen the option to use line length when calculating the impedance matrix. 2. Click the Browse button to the right of the name to select the directory where the construction file is to be put and the filename. To use a new file, the PSS/ADEPT program settings will have to be changed to the new specification. The drop-down box on the top right of the dialog allows you to view the name of all currently stored equipment. The records to be added to the dictionary are shown on the dialog. Note that you may change the Line Names, the first column in the table. To do this: 1. Click once on the Line Name to be changed, pause a second and click once again. A solid line will surround the line name. 2. You may now enter a new name. Note that the new name may not exceed 10 characters and may not duplicate a name already stored in the dictionary. 3. Click OK. When the OK button is clicked the line name, positive and zero sequence impedances and the positive and zero charging admittances are saved in the designated file and program control is returned to the LineProp View.
Figure 6-38. Update Construction Dictionary Dialog
6-40
Chapter 7
Protection and Coordination
7.1 Overview: Protection and Coordination
The protection and coordination module uses protective devices in conjunction with analysis activities to perform a coordination study on a given network. The protective devices guard the network from threat of damage caused by overcurrents and transient overvoltages that can result in equipment loss and system failure. These protective devices are specified by adding protection equipment packs to the network. The protection and coordination module displays the characteristic curves of selected overcurrent relays and fuses along with operating times of these protective devices for use in a coordination study. A library of protective devices is provided in an Microsoft Access database and can be modified at any time by using the tools provided by Microsoft Access. It is recommended that you close all applications using Protection and Coordination. This ensures that your changes to the database are seen in the application. You may view the operating times of the selected devices based on a user-entered current, or you may use the current obtained from any analysis. The protection and coordination module is an option in PSS/ADEPT. You will be unable to access the protection and coordination module if you have not purchased the license. If you wish to purchase a license for the protection and coordination module, please contact Siemens PTI for further assistance. In this chapter, you will learn about: Adding protection equipment to the network. Editing protection equipment properties. Performing a coordination study. Adding devices to the protective device database.
7.2 Adding Protection Equipment Packs

Protection equipment packs are containers that hold any number of protective devices. A protection equipment pack can contain fuses and relays. You may consider protection equipment packs that hold any combination of one or more protective devices. A protective device may be a fuse or relay. They are placed on a branch in the network and can contain any number of different types of protective devices.
7-1
Protection and Coordination Adding Protection Equipment Packs
A protection equipment pack is connected to the upstream or downstream end, of an existing branch in the network. The application will not let you place more than two protection equipment packs at a single branch. To place a protection equipment pack on a branch: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Protection Equipment button.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the branch where the protection equipment pack will be connected. Click on the branch and the protection equipment pack will appear on top of the selected branch (Figure 7-1). You must click no more than 25% of the line length away from the node where the protection equipment pack will be placed. You cannot place more than two protection equipment packs on a branch
Figure 7-1. Branch with Two Protection Equipment Packs
7-2
Protection and Coordination Editing Protection Equipment Packs
To move a protection equipment pack: 1. Click on the protection equipment pack to select it. 2. While holding the left mouse button down, drag the protection equipment pack along the branch to position it to the new location. 3. Release the mouse button. The protection equipment pack will snap to the new location on the branch. You will not be able to drag the protection equipment pack more than 25% away from the node connection point.
7.3 Editing Protection Equipment Packs

The characteristics of protection equipment packs are modified using its property sheet. You can retrieve a property sheet for the selected protection equipment pack from either the Equipment List View or the Diagram View. To display an Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet from the Diagram View: 1. Double-click the desired item, which will automatically display the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet; or, 2. Left-click the pack once to select it then right-click on that same pack to display the popup menu; choose Properties from the pop-up menu to display the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet. To display an Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet from the Equipment List View: 1. Expand the tree section titled "Protection Equipment" by clicking on the "+". 2. Double-click the protection equipment pack, which will automatically display the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet; or, 3. Left-click the pack once to select it then right-click on that same pack to display the popup menu; choose Properties from the pop-up menu to display the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet. As an alternative, you may also use the applications selection tools to select protection equipment packs.
7-3
To change the properties of a protection equipment pack: 1. Double-click on the protection equipment pack to display its property sheet or right-click and choose Properties. Notice that there are two tabs for this property sheet: Select and Plot Options (Figure 7-2).
Figure 7-2. Protection Equipment Pack Property Sheet 2. Under the Select tab, enter/select the properties for your protection equipment pack. Press the Tab key to move to the next field or click in the field of interest, then add or change information in the fields on the property sheet as needed. Name: Each network item in the network must have a unique name identifier. You may enter an alphanumeric character name up to 12 characters. The name may not contain embedded blanks. Branch: Specifies the branch where this protection equipment pack is connected. This item is provided for information only and is not editable. Location: The node location of the branch where this protection equipment pack is connected. This item is provided for information only and is not editable. Description: You may enter a description to describe the protection equipment pack.
7-4
Plot color: You may change the plot color of the selected device by clicking the Browse button. When a row is selected, the plot color for the device in that row is shown. Groups...: To add the selected protection equipment pack to an existing group(s), click Groups... button and click the box that proceeds the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. The group button is visible only if there are groups defined in the network model. Add Default: You can choose to make the default protection equipment pack the existing one by selecting the Add Default button. This will update your protection equipment pack to contain those devices you have previously defined in the default Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet. For more information on default items see Chapter 1, Section 1.7. This button is visible only if a default protection equipment pack is defined. Plot...: You may view the characteristic curves of all the selected devices in the protection equipment pack by selecting the Plot button. This plot will not produce any operating times. To display operating times you must run a coordination study (see Section 7.4). To adjust the display, you can alter the plot options by clicking on the Options tab (see Step 6). For information on the operations you can perform while in this view, refer to Section 7.4.2. When viewing the device curves in a protection equipment pack does not contain operating times (Figure 7-3).
Print Setup Print Refresh
Figure 7-3. Curve Plot View Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 7-5
Selected Devices: The contents of the protection equipment pack will be displayed in the selected device list. Devices are added to this list by selecting a protective device from the list of available devices. You may select to populate this list with the default protection equipment pack by clicking the Add Default button. To add a device to the selected list: Select the device from the available list in the available devices section. Click on the first column and, while holding down the left mouse button, drag the selection over the selected device list and release the mouse button, or, select the first column and click the Add button. If you doubleclick on column one of any row in the available list, you will get more information for the device. Use this if you want to narrow down your choices. To edit a device in the selected list: Double-click on the manufacturer field of the device you want to modify, or, select the device in the list by clicking on the manufacturer field then clicking the Edit button. The property sheet for the selected device will display. To delete a device from the selected list: Select the device to delete by clicking on the manufacturer field of the device you want to delete then click the Delete button, or, select the device to delete, and, while holding down the left mouse button, drag the device outside of the selected device list area.
Available Devices: The available device list contains the contents of the coordination database. The list of available devices is populated when you select to edit a protection equipment pack. For fuses, relays, and reclosers: You can sort the database fields based on a combination of several sort criteria. When the Clear button is clicked, the Sort Fields criteria will be cleared. Use the Select Sort Fields list to select the sorting criteria. When the Do Sort button is clicked, the fields in the database will be sorted by your selected criteria and displayed in the available device list. The default, sort criteria, is to sort the database by manufacturer, followed by model, followed by rating. If you change the sort fields and click OK on the Select Protection Equipment dialog, your sort order is saved. The contents of the device database can be modified by using Microsoft Access. You cannot add or remove devices from the database by using the protection equipment pack property sheet. For more information, refer to Section 7.5.
For transformers, conductors, and machines, select the oppropriate tab and enter the required parameters. 3. To display the protection equipment pack on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To add a protection equipment pack to an existing group(s), click the Groups button and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment. If no groups have been specified, the Groups button will not be visible. 5. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the protection equipment pack.
7-6
6. Click the Plot Options tab and enter/select the plotting options for viewing the device curves (Figure 7-4).
Figure 7-4. Protection Equipment Pack Plot Options Tab X-Axis (Current): Select the options for the x-axis, the display of current on a log-log plot. Your choices are: Show major grid lines: When checked, shows the major axis grid lines in log-log format. Show minor grid lines: When checked, shows the minor axis grid lines in log-log format. Maximum current (A): Specifies the maximum value of the x-axis (current). You may select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to 10000000. The default value is 100000. Minimum Current (A): Specifies the minimum value of the x-axis (current). You may select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to 10000000. The default value is 1.0.
7-7
Y-Axis (Time): Show major grid lines: When checked, shows the major axis grid lines in log-log format. Show minor grid lines: When checked, shows the minor axis grid lines in log-log format. Maximum time (sec): Specifies the maximum value of the y-axis (time). You may select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to 10000000. The default value is 1000. Minimum time (sec): Specifies the minimum value of the y-axis (time). You may select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to 10000000. The default value is 1.0.
Display: Show curve hatching: When checked, curves will be shaded (hatched) between the minimum and the maximum. For example, for a fuse the application will hatch between the minimum melt and total clearing curves. Show text annotation for plots: When checked, text annotation for each device curve will be displayed directly on the plot. Text annotation uses text color: When checked, the text annotation color will be set to the color specified as the "Text color" in the Colors option. Use only solid lines for plots: When checked, no patterned lines will be drawn (i.e., dot-dash, dashed, etc.). All curves will be represented as solid lines. Plot annotation text size: Specifies the font size for text annotation on the coordination plot. Axis text size: Specifies the font size of the axis labels on the coordination plot.
Misc.: Auto-scale axes: When checked, parameters specified for maximum current and time, and minimum current and time are ignored and the axes will be automatically scaled. Axis label format: Select how you want the axes labeled, Decimal or Scientific. Light table mode: When checked, you may enter a specific fault current to use to determine the operating time of the protective devices. When this option is selected, the program will not use any previously calculated current values. Reference voltage (kV): Reference voltage is used to convert protective devices to a common voltage base. Conversion to a reference voltage will apply when protective devices are present in the system at different voltage levels (i.e., there may be a fuse at the high side of a transformer connection and a relay at the low side).
Line Widths: Axis: Specifies line thickness for the X and Y axis. Curve: Specifies line thickness for the device curves. Grid: Specifies line thickness for the grid. Current: Specifies line thickness for the current intersection point on each device curve.
7-8
Colors: Background: Specify the background color for the plot window (default = white). Text: Specify the color of the text values in the plot window (default = black). Axis: Specify the color of the x- and y-axis in the plot window (default = blue).
7.3.1 Editing Selected Devices

Protective devices (fuses, relays, etc.) may be modified by altering the properties of the device through its property sheet. Protective Device Property sheets have information in common, such as the Plot Options and More Info tabs. 1. To change the Plot Options, click the Plot Options tab (Figure 7-5).
Figure 7-5. Plot Options Tab Plot Color: Select the plot color for this device by clicking the Browse button.
Current Multiple: The current multiple will offset the values of current by a specified factor. The default is 1.0. Time Multiple: The time multiple will offset the values of time by a specified factor. The default is 1.0. Time Adder: The time adder will add the specified value to the time specified in the manufacturer curve. The default is 0.0.
7-9
2. To view more information for a device, click the More Info tab (Figure 7-6).
Figure 7-6. More Info Tab Database List: This list view contains all of the values that are specified in the database for the selected device including manufacturer, rating, model, speed characteristic, etc. Values that are blank have not been entered into the device database. This view is provided for reference purposes only and is not editable.
7-10
7.3.1.1 Editing Fuses

A fuse is a type of protective device that can be added to a protection equipment pack. Fuses are specified in the database of protective devices. Once you choose a fuse from the database, you can alter some of its properties that get saved along with the network file properties by selecting to view its property sheet. These properties are for your reference to the network not the values started in the device database. To change the properties of a fuse: 1. Double-click on the manufacturer field to select it and view the Fuse Property sheet, or, select the manufacturer field in the selected device list and click the Edit button to display the Fuse Property sheet. There are three tabs for this property sheet: General, Plot Options, and More Info (Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7. Fuse Property Sheet 2. In the General tab, enter/select the properties you wish to modify for the selected fuse: Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. Enter the name of this device in the space provided. Branch: Name of the branch where this fuse is located. Damage Multiplier: Enter the damage multiplier for the selected fuse. This multiplier will be used to adjust the time values of the minimum melt curve. For example, entering a value of 0.75 indicates that the fuse may be damaged on the minimum melt curve 75% of the time. The plot will take this value into consideration. Description: Enter a description for this fuse device. Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot. Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the fuse. Show I2T Curve: Check the box to show the I-squared-T curve for the fuse. The Isquared-T curve is determined by squaring the current of the minimum melt curve. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 7-11
3. Click the Plot Options tab and enter/select the plot options for this fuse. 4. Click the More Info tab to view additional data values associated with the selected fuse.
7.3.1.2 Editing Relays

A relay is another type of protective device that can be added to a protection equipment pack. Relays are specified in the database of protective devices. Once you choose a relay from the database, you can alter some of its properties that get saved along with the network file properties by selecting to view its property sheet. These properties are for your reference to the network not the values started in the device database. To change the properties of a relay: 1. Double-click on the manufacturer field to select it and view the Overcurrent Relay Property sheet, or, select the manufacturer field in the selected device list and click the Edit button to display the Overcurrent Relay Property sheet. There are three tabs for this property sheet: General, Plot Options, and More Info (Figure 7-8).
Figure 7-8. Overcurrent Relay Property Sheet 2. In the General tab, enter/select the properties you wish to modify for the selected fuse:
7-12
Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. Enter the name of this device in the space provided. Branch: Name of the branch where this relay is located. Phasing: The phasing value indicates what phase is used to calculate device operating times. The available choices are: A, B, C, Positive Sequence (Pos-Seq), Negative Sequence (Neg-Seq), Zero Sequence (Zero-Seq), Maximum over all Phases (MaxPhase), Maximum over all Sequences (Max-Seq), Neutral-to-Ground (Neutral). Description: Enter a description for this relay device. Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot. Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the relay. Primary CT Setting: Specify the current transformer (CT) primary (line side) current in amps. Secondary CT Setting: Specify the current transformer (CT) secondary (relay side) current in amps. Time Dial setting: The time dial setting of this relay. You may enter the time dial setting by directly specifying the value in the box provided, or by sliding the dial from left to right until the proper time dial setting is displayed. You will not be allowed to specify a time dial setting outside the range indicated by the manufacturer. The Interpolate check box, when checked, indicates that the curve displayed on the coordination plot is derived by interpolation between two time dial settings in the database. This option allows for time dial settings to be specified that are between time-dials located in the database. For example, if time dial settings in the database are 1 and 2, the interpolate option will allow a time dial of 1.5. PSS/ADEPT will interpolate between the curves for a time dial setting of 1 and a time dial setting of 2. Pick Up (Tap) setting: The pick up (tap) setting of this relay. You may enter the pick up setting by directly specifying the value in the box provided, or by sliding the dial from left to right until the proper pick up setting is displayed. You will not be allowed to specify a pick up setting outside the range specified by the manufacturer. Pick up setting is equivalent to tap setting. Instantaneous setting: The instantaneous setting of the relay. You may enter the instantaneous setting by directly specifying the value in the box provided, or by sliding the dial from left to right until the proper instantaneous setting is displayed. You will not be allowed to specify an instantaneous setting outside the range specified by the manufacturer. Instantaneous operation time: Used to specify the time delay for the instantaneous operating time of the relay. If the database contains several different instantaneous ranges, select the desired range from the list box provided. Multiple of PU: When checked, instantaneous setting is specified as a multiple of pickup (Tap). Disable: When checked, disables the instantaneous functions of the relay. 3. Click the Plot Options tab and enter/select the plot options for this fuse.
4. Click the More Info tab to view additional data values associated with the selected fuse.
7-13
7.3.1.3 Editing Transformer Damage Curves

A transformer damage curve can be used to check against the maximum overcurrent level at which the transformer protective devices may be set. The maximum protection levels are dependent upon the transformer impedance and secondary voltage. Transformer primary protective devices are required to clear a bolted secondary short circuit within time specified limits. These time limits define the transformer withstand capability curves and are based on the impedance of the transformer. Normally, transformer damage curves will be specified in a protection pack placed at a transformer branch but this is not a requirement. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch the impedance and kVA rating of the transformer will be used to pre-set the values on the transformer damage curve property sheet. If the damage curve is not specified at a transformer branch, initial values of transformer impedance and kVA rating will be set to pre-determined default values as described further in this section. Transformer damage curve properties are editable, however, changing the transformer damage curve properties will not change the original transformer properties in the network. The transformer category is determined based on the nameplate kVA specified on the transformer damage curve property sheet and Table 7-1. If the transformer damage curve is specified on a transformer branch, the nameplate kVA will default to the nameplate kVA specified on the transformer property sheet. System impedance is also used for Category III and IV transformers. The system impedance will default to the source impedance specified on the source property sheet. Zero values for system impedance are allowed. Table 7-1. Transformer Categories Minimum Nameplate kVA
Category I II III IV Single-phase 5-500 502-1667 1668-10000 Above 10000 Three-phase 15-500 501-5000 5001-30000 Above 30000
For Category I transformers, the transformer damage curve is represented by a two-point curve represented by calculation points 1 and 4. For Category II, III, and IV transformers, the transformer damage curve is represented by a four-point curve represented by calculation points 1, 2, 3, and 4. For Category III and IV transformers, the source impedance is also used in calculating damage curve points. The curve points are determined from the information contained in Table 7-2.
7-14
Table 7-2. Transformer Damage Curve Points

Calculation Point 1 Transformer Category I II III, IV 2 3 4 II III, IV II III, IV I, II, III, IV Time (sec) T = 1250 (Zt)2 T=2 T=2 T = 4.08 T = 8.00 T = 2551 (Zt)2 T = 5000 (Zt + Zs)2 T = 50 Current (Amps) I = AF * Rated Current / Zt I = AF * Rated Current / Zt I = AF * Rated Current / (Zt + Zs) I = AF * 0.7 Rated Current / Zt I = AF * 0.5 Rated Current / (Zt + Zs) I = AF * 0.7 Rated Current / Zt I = AF * 0.5 Rated Current / (Zt + Zs) I = AF * 5 * Rated Current
where: Zt = Transformer impedance in per-unit on transformer kVA base. Zs = Source (system) impedance in per-unit on transformer kVA base. AF = ANSI Factor (default = 1.0). See Table 7-3. Table 7-3. ANSI Factors
Transformer Connection Delta-Delta Delta-Wye-Grounded Delta-Wye Wye-Wye Wye-Delta Fault Type Three-Phase 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Phase-Phase 0.87 1.15 1.15 1.0 1.0 Line-to-Ground N/A 0.58 N/A N/A N/A ANSI Factor 0.87 0.58 1.0 1.0 1.0
To add a transformer damage curve to a protection pack: 1. Select the Transformers tab from the Available Devices list (Figure 7-9). Note that the transformer damage curve does not have a database connection. The transformer damage curve properties will automatically default to the transformer properties specified in the transformer property sheet if the protection pack has been placed at a transformer branch.
7-15
Figure 7-9. Transformer Damage Curve Tab 2. Enter/select the properties you wish to modify: Name: Enter the name of the transformer damage curve. The name is used as text annotation for the damage curve. 3 Phase Rating (kVA): The nameplate rating of the transformer in kVA. For transformer damage curves located at a transformer branch, this is the nameplate kVA specified on the transformer property sheet. For damage curves located elsewhere the nameplate kVA will default to a value of 1000. Inrush Multiplier: When checked, the transformer inrush point will be displayed on the coordination plot and the multiplier may be entered in the text box provided. The transformer inrush current is approximately 8 to 12 times the transformer full-load current for a maximum period of 0.1 seconds. If the point is plotted on the time-current curve, it should fall below the transformer primary protection device curve. ANSI Factor: When checked, the specified ANSI factor will be used to apply a shift to the transformer damage curve. *In order to meet the ANSI withstand requirements, it is sometimes necessary to shift the ANSI curve. Tables 7-3 shows the ratio of per-unit
* Conrad R. St. Pierre and Tracey E. Wolny, "Standardization of Benchmarks for Protection Device Time-Current Curves," IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, Vol. IA-22, No. 4, pp. 623-632, July/August 1986.
7-16
primary-side current to per-unit transformer-winding current for delta-delta. delta-wye, and wye-wye connected transformers. For example, a line-to-ground fault on a grounded system supplied by a delta-wye transformer produces a maximum primary current seen by a protective device to be 58% of the maximum line current in the faulted secondary winding. One per-unit current flows in a secondary winding for both the line-to-ground and three-phase faults. Therefore, the ANSI curve must be shifted by 58% of the three-phase current level in order to ensure that the transformer primary device is capable of detecting lower primarywinding currents. See Tables 7-2 and 7-3 for more information. Phasing: The phasing of the transformer connection. If the damage curve is located at a transformer branch, this value will be the phasing specified on the transformer branch. For damage curves located elsewhere the phasing will default to "ABC". Transformer R1 (pu on transformer kVA base): The positive-sequence resistance of the transformer. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch, this value will default to the transformer R1 specified on the transformer property sheet, otherwise, the value of R1 will be set to 0.01. Transformer X1 (pu on transformer kVA base): The positive-sequence reactance of the transformer. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch, this value will default to the transformer X1 specified on the transformer property sheet, otherwise, the value of X1 will be set to 0.057. Transformer R0 (pu on transformer kVA base): The zero-sequence resistance of the transformer. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch, this value will default to the transformer R0 specified on the transformer property sheet, otherwise, the value of R0 will be set to 0.01. Transformer X0 (pu on transformer kVA base): The zero-sequence reactance of the transformer. If the damage curve is specified at a transformer branch, this value will default to the transformer X0 specified on the transformer property sheet, otherwise, the value of X0 will be set to 0.057. System R1 (pu on system kVA base): The positive-sequence resistance of the source used for transformers falling into Category III and IV only. If a source is specified in the network, this value will default to the source R1 specified on the source property sheet, otherwise, the value of R1 will be set to 0.0. System X1 (pu on system kVA base): The positive-sequence reactance of the source used for transformers falling into Category III and IV only. If a source is specified in the network, this value will default to the source X1 specified on the source property sheet, otherwise, the value of X1 will be set to 0.0. System R0 (pu on system kVA base): The zero-sequence resistance of the source used for transformers falling into Category III and IV only. If a source is specified in the network, this value will default to the source R0 specified on the source property sheet, otherwise, the value of R0 will be set to 0.0. System X0 (pu on system kVA base): The zero-sequence reactance of the source used for transformers falling into Category III and IV only. If a source is specified in the network, this value will default to the source X0 specified on the source property sheet, otherwise, the value of X0 will be set to 0.0. Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot.
7-17
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the transformer. 3. To add the transformer damage curve to the protection equipment pack, click the Add button. The transformer damage curve will be displayed in the selected device list. To edit an existing transformer damage curve, double-click on the device ID associated with the transformer in the selected devices list, or select the device ID and click the Edit button. Modify the properties you desire and click the OK button when finished.
7.3.1.4 Editing Cable/Conductor Damage Curves

Mechanical and thermal stress on cables and conductors can be seen by the flow of short circuit current through the electric system. To avoid severe permanent damage to cable insulation during the interval of the short circuit current flow, the conductor damage characteristics should be considered when coordinating short circuit protective devices. The conductor damage curve, represented by a constant I2t limit, should fall above the clearing time curve of its respective protective device. The conductor damage curve is dependent upon the conductor material and the maximum temperature that the insulation can be permitted to reach during a transient short circuit condition without incurring severe damage. Recommended short circuit temperature limits vary according to insulation type and are used in PSS/ADEPT as described in the Table 7-4. The recommended initial temperature of the conductor is 80 C. Table 7-4. Recommended Conductor Temperatures
Conductor Material ACAR Copper Aluminum ACSR (single-strand) ACSR (multiple-strand) Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Insulation Type None None None None None BUTYL CAMBRIC CP EPR ETFE FXLPE HDPE HMWPE LDPE OBR PAPER PPP PVC SBR SR XLPE Maximum Temperature (C) 340 340 340 340 645 200 200 250 250 250 250 180 150 150 200 200 200 150 200 250 250
7-18
Equations for calculating the conductor damage curve points in PSS/ADEPT are: For Copper: I = A ( [ ( 0.0125 LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 234 ) ( T 1 + 234 ) ) ) t ] ) For Aluminum: I = A ( [ ( 0.0125 LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 228 ) ( T 1 + 228 ) ) ) t ] ) For ACAR: I = 0.093 A ( [ ( 0.0125 LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 228 ) ( T 1 + 228 ) ) ) t ] ) For ACSR (single and multiple): I = A ( [ ( 0.0125 LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 228 ) ( T 1 + 228 ) ) ) t ] ) where: I A = = t = Current in Amperes Conductor area in circular mils Circular mils = kcmil * 1000.0 Circular mils = mm2 * 1973.5 Time (fixed at the following intervals {t = 1000, 100, 10, 1, 0.5, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01}) Initial conductor temperature (C) Recommended Maximum Temperature (C)
T1 = T2 =
The actual values used for initial conductor temperature and maximum conductor temperature may be re-specified by entering the value directly on the conductor damage curve property sheet.
7-19
To add a conductor damage curve to a protection pack: 1. Select the Conductors tab from the Available Devices list (Figure 7-10). Note that the conductor damage curve does not have a database connection.
Figure 7-10. Conductor Damage Curve Tab 2. Enter/select the properties you wish to modify: Name: Enter the name of the conductor damage curve. The name is used as text annotation for the damage curve. Type: Select the conductor type. Conductor type may be either overhead conductor or underground cable. Units: The units to use for specification of conductor area. English units for conductor area are kcmil. Metric units for conductor area are mm2. Conductor Area: Select the conductor area from the list box provided. If the conductor area is not provided in the list, you can specify a user-defined conductor area by checking the user-defined box and entering the conductor area in the box provided. Conductor Material: Select the conductor material from, either, Aluminum, Copper, ACAR, ACSR (single-strand), or ACSR (multiple-strand). The difference between
7-20
ACSR (single-strand) and ACSR (multiple-strand) is the recommended maximum temperature used to calculate the damage curve. ACSR single stranded conductors are those conductors that have only an aluminum stranding (i.e., 1 AWG (Robin), 1/0 AWG (Raven), 2/0 AWG (Quail)). The recommended maximum temperature for single strand ACSR conductors is 340 C. ACSR multiple stranded conductors are those conductors that have both aluminum and steel stranding (i.e., Drake (26/7)). The recommended maximum temperature for multiple stranded ACSR conductors is 640 C. Insulation Type: Select the insulation type from the available list. If the conductor has no insulation, select (Bare). Max temperature (deg. C): Enter the desired maximum temperature of the conductor to consider. This value will default to the recommended maximum temperature determined from your selection of conductor material and insulation type. Initial temperature (deg. C): Enter the desired initial temperature of the conductor to consider. This value will default to the recommended initial temperature. Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot. Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the fuse. 3. Click the Add button to add the conductor damage curve to the protection equipment pack. To edit an existing conductor damage curve, double-click on the device ID associated with the conductor in the selected devices list, or, select the device ID and click the Edit button. Modify the properties you desire and click the OK button when finished.
7.3.1.5 Editing Reclosers

Reclosers sense fault currents and interrupt or re-close automatically in an attempt to re-energize a line. Recloser operations normally utilize two time-current curves. The first curve is an "instantaneous" or "A" curve that us used to save lateral fuses under temporary short circuit conditions. The second "time delay" curve is used to delay tripping and allow the fuse to blow under a permanent short circuit condition. PSS/ADEPT allows representation of any number of recloser curves; there is no limit. Each recloser curve is specified as a distinct recloser device in the protection equipment pack. As an example, if you want to coordinate with the instantaneous "A" curve and the time-delay "E" curve you will select two reclosers of the same type then specify the "A" curve for one and the "E" curve for the other. In this case, two recloser devices will be specified in the selected list of devices in the protection equipment pack even though there is only one physical recloser in the field (see Figure 7-11).
7-21
Figure 7-11. Protection Equipment Pack Showing Two Recloser Curves Recloser curves plotted on the coordination plot are adjusted based on the trip-coil rating for hydraulic control or the minimum trip rating for electronic control specified in the recloser property sheet. In all cases the minimum trip rating is used to determine the starting current point of the recloser time-current curve. For hydraulic controls, the minimum trip rating is equal to two times the trip-coil rating. Reclosers are selected from the recloser database tables in the same way as fuses and over-current relays and then modified to ensure the correct representation of the time-current curves. The recloser trip-coil rating, minimum trip rating, and curve will default to acceptable values.
7-22
To change the properties of a recloser curve: 1. Double-click on the device ID field to select it and view the Recloser Properties sheet, or, select the device ID field and click the Edit button to display the property sheet. There are three tabs: General, Plot Options, and More Info (Figure 7-12).
Figure 7-12. Recloser Properties Sheet Name: Enter the name of the recloser. The name is used as text annotation for the damage curve. Branch: Name of the branch where this recloser is located. Description: If desired, enter a description for this recloser curve. Nom Voltage (kV): Nominal voltage of the recloser from the manufacturers catalog. This field is used for display only. Interrupting Rating (Amps): The interrupting ratings for this recloser. Interrupting ratings are obtained from the manufacturer catalog. This field is used for display only and will display up to three interrupting ratings for each recloser. Curve Annotation: Specify how you want the recloser curve to be annotated on the coordination plot. Based on your selection, the coordination plot will use a text string to indicate your selection in the text annotation box for the time-current curve. The curve annotation is: Total Clearing = "Tot Clr" Minimum Response = "Min Resp" Phase Trip = "Phs Trip" Ground Trip = "Grd Trip" 7-23
Trip Coil (cont. Amps): Select the trip-coil rating in continuous Amps of the recloser with hydraulic control. This field will be not be available if the recloser has electronic control. Min trip (A): Select the minimum trip rating in Amps of the recloser with electronic control. This field will not be available if the recloser has hydraulic control, however, it will be automatically set to two times the trip-coil rating. Time-current curve: Select the time-current curve to plot from the available list of recloser curves. Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot. Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the recloser.
7.3.1.6 Editing Machine Protection Curves

Machine protection is used to minimize the damage to machines from short circuits inside or near the machine and abnormal operating or system conditions (overloads, over voltage). Induction machines receive various degrees of protection, depending primarily on the size of the machine (cost) and the importance of the machine's function. Most machines have, at a minimum, short circuit and overload protection. Inverse-time phase overcurrent relays with an instantaneous element are often used to protect the machine. These overcurrent relays are set to allow the relay to ride through machine starts but trip on short circuit conditions. For ground fault protection usually consists of overcurrent relays with CT's in the residual connection. Some machines have protections against negative-sequence overcurrent and overvoltage, undervoltage protection, loss of synchronism, loss of excitation, field ground faults, and/or excessive stator temperatures. Overcurrent relays used to protect the machine can be defined directly in PSS/ADEPT's protection and coordination module. These over current relays and associated motor starting time-current characteristic curves can be used to establish proper machine protection during short circuit events. To add a machine starting curve to a protection pack: 1. Select the Machines tab from the Available Devices list (Figure 7-13). Note that the machine curve does not have a database connection. The machine curve properties will automatically default to the machine properties specified in the machine property sheet if the protection pack has been placed at a node where a machine is located.
7-24
Figure 7-13. Machine Starting Curve Property Sheet 2. Enter/select the properties you wish to modify: Name: Enter the name of the machine-starting curve. The name is used as text annotation for the starting curve. Mechanical power units: Select whether the machine power is specified as hp or kW. This will designate the machine as NEMA or IEC. Mechanical rating: Enter the rating of the machine in the appropriate units. Rated (nominal) terminal voltage (kV): Enter the rated voltage of the machine. The voltage will default to the node base voltage of the node where the machine is located. Power factor: Enter the power factor for the machine. Efficiency: Enter the machine efficiency in per unit where 1.0 indicates 100%. Full load (amps): The value of full load amps will be calculated using the rating, nominal terminal voltage, power factor and efficiency. To specify the full load amps, check the box labeled user-defined. The field will be enabled allowing the entry of a value for full load amps.
7-25
Locked rotor (amps): The value of locked rotor amps will be calculated as six times the full load (amps). To specify the value of locked rotor amps, check the box labeled user-defined. The field will be enabled allowing the entry of a value of full load amps. Acceleration time (sec): Enter the value to use for the motor acceleration time. The motor acceleration time is the amount of time required for a motor to achieve rated revolutions per minute after the rated voltage has been applied to the motor terminals. Machine starting characteristics: Select the machine-starting characteristic desired: full voltage or autotransformer. The machine-starting curve will be adjusted based on the option specified. If the machine is to be started through an autotransformer to reduce inrush, specify the tap setting of the autotransformer. The motor-starting curve will then be determined by adjusting the curve based on the tap setting of the transformer where 1.0 is 100%. Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot. Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the recloser.
7-26
Protection and Coordination Performing a Coordination Study
7.4 Performing a Coordination Study

The primary purpose of a coordination study is to determine the satisfactory ratings and settings for the protective devices in the network. The protective devices should be chosen so that pickup currents and operating times are short but sufficient to override system transient overloads such as inrush currents experienced when energizing transformers or starting motors. In addition, the protective devices should be coordinated so that the protective device closest to the fault opens before the other devices. You can use the coordination analysis feature to determine the operating times of all the protection equipment in a selected portion of the network. In addition, you may enter your own current for determination of device operating times, or you may run a short circuit analysis to determine the fault current at a location within the selected coordination area. You can use the difference table provided in the coordination curve plot to help establish protective device coordination. The coordination curve plot provides a record of the time-current operating relationship of the protection of your system. The coordination curve plot is made on log-log paper with current as the abscissa and time as the ordinate. You can print the coordination curve plot for future reference. The manufacturers of protective devices publish time-current operating characteristic curves and other performance data for all devices used in this application. The curves are stored in the protective device database and are selected when you add or modify the data in a protection equipment pack. The plotting offsets are applied to these plots (see Section 7.3.1).
7.4.1 Preparing for a Coordination Study

In order to perform a coordination study, the following information is required: The system one-line diagram containing protection equipment packs. You can add protection equipment packs to the network in the Diagram View by selecting the Protection Equipment button (see Section 7.2). An analysis solution to indicate the values of current that are expected to flow through each protective device. Values of current may be from a power flow, short circuit, or motor starting analysis. Current may be specified directly by selecting the Light table mode option located on the P&C Options tab of the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet. A selected area on the one-line diagram indicating the area to study during the coordination analysis. You can select an area on the one-line diagram by using the selection tools provided with the application.
After you have selected an area to study, choose Analysis>Coordination. The Protection and Coordination View will display.
7.4.2 The Coordination View

The Coordination View is displayed when you select to perform a coordination study by selecting Analysis>Coordination from the Main Menu (Figure 7-14). The Coordination View is used to display manufacturers curves and operating times for the selected protective devices in the network. The selected protective devices that are plotted in this view are determined from your selection of protection equipment packs. This selection is determined when you select the coordination area on the one-line diagram. You may toggle between the Protection and Coordination View and the Diagram View at any time by using the Window menu to select the view to bring to the top of your viewing area.
7-27
Located on the lower left side of the plot area are the X and Y coordinates of your mouse pointer. You may use this mouse pointer to locate a current/time point in the plot by moving your mouse over the curve area. Modification of the axis title, can be accomplished by double-clicking on the text and altering the desired property values.
List View
Text Annotation
Figure 7-14. Coordination View
7-28
7.4.2.1 The Coordination Menu Bar

The Coordination View has its own menu bar (Figure 7-15).
Figure 7-15. Coordination View Menu File Menu The File Menu provides options for saving the coordination view to a Metafile, closing the coordination view, and printing the coordination view to a printer. View Menu The View Menu provides options that allow you to display or hide the toolbar and status bar. It also provides an option to refresh the coordination view. Options Menu The Options Menu allows you to change the plotting options. Refer to Editing Protection Equipment Packs Step 6 for more information on changing the plot options. The Coordination View may be broken into two distinct sections: the coordination curve plot and the list view. Each of these sections is addressed below. The Help menu allows you to access on-line help.
7.4.2.2 Coordination Curve Plot Annotation

The coordination curve plot will plot the protective device curves in the selected coordination area. As part of the coordination curve plot, text annotation boxes will be placed on the plot to provide more information on each device curve such as the manufacturer and model number. Moving text annotations: The text annotation can be moved to another location by double-clicking over the text annotation and altering the x and y values in the text properties, or by clicking and holding the left mouse button down and dragging the text to a new location. Modifying text annotations: The text annotation can be modified by, double-clicking on the text and modifying any of the available properties. Refreshing the plot will not remember the changes made to the text annotations. So we recommend you do these changes just before printing the plots.
7.4.2.3 Changing Protective Device Settings

To change the settings of a protective device from the coordination view: 1. Double-click on the curve you want to modify. 2. Choose Modify to display the Device Property sheet. 3. Click the OK button. The curve will be redrawn based on the settings you specified.
7-29
To select a different device from the database: 1. Double-click on the device you want to change. 2. Choose Replace. 3. The property sheet for the protection equipment pack will display. From this sheet you may specify another protective device. 4. Click the OK button. The new device will be drawn in the Coordination View.
7.4.2.4 The Coordination List View

The list view is located at the right edge of the Coordination View. The list view contains additional information regarding each device that is plotted in the coordination curve view including operating times. The list view provides the following information: Plot: The number assigned to the curve in the Coordination View Device ID: Device identifier from protection equipment database. Branch: The branch where the protective device is located. End: The node end where the protective device is located. Current: The current that the protective device sees. Max time, min time: The time at which the device will operate. For fuses, there is a maximum time and a minimum time indicating the intersection point of the minimum melt curve (min time) and the intersection point of the total clearing curve (max time). A value of "Noop" indicates that this device will not operate based on the given current. Difference: The time elapsed between protective devices. This list view may be printed along with the curve plots.
7-30
7.4.2.5 Printing the Coordination View

The coordination view and its accompanying list view can be printed to any Windows printer. To print the coordination view: 1. Select File>Print. The Print Parameters dialog displays (Figure 7-16).
Figure 7-16. Print Parameters Dialog 2. Select the printing style you want. Print graphs to max size: Prints the graph maximized to the size of the paper. Proportionate: Prints the graph proportionately to the size of the paper. Exact size: Prints the graph as they are displayed in the application. 3. Select OK. Once the coordination view is sent to the printer, you will be asked if you wish to print the list view also (Figure 7-17).
Figure 7-17. Prompt to Print the List View Select Yes to print the contents of the list view. Select No to return to the coordination view.
7-31
Protection and Coordination The Protective Device Database
7.5 The Protective Device Database

The protective device database is a Microsoft Access database that contains manufacturers information for various protection devices such as fuses and relays. This database is installed on your machine when you install PSS/ADEPT. You may modify this database using the tools available in Access to include new protection devices or you may delete records from the database at your discretion. The protective device database consists of a set of three tables each for fuses and relays. These tables are specifically described in the following sections.
7.5.1 Fuse Tables

7.5.1.1 Fuse
The Fuse table contains a device identifier, the manufacturer name and the nominal rating of the device. The device identifier is a unique number and also a primary key for referencing the other tables. All of the entries in the fuse table must be unique and there can be no duplicate device identifiers. The format of the Fuse table is given below (Table 7-5). Table 7-5. Fuse Table
Field Name DevId MANUFACTURER NOMINAL_RATING CONTINOUS_LOADABILITY DAILY_LOADABILITY_05 DAILY_LOADABILITY_1 DAILY_LOADABILITY_2 DAILY_LOADABILITY_4 DAILY_LOADABILITY_8 EMERG_05 EMERG_1 EMERG_2 EMERG_4 EMERG_8 X X X Required Type Text (Primary Key) Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Description Device identifier. Must be unique. Manufacturer name. Nominal device rating.
7-32
7.5.1.2 Fuse Catalog

The Fuse Catalog table contains model information about the fuses defined in the Fuse table. In this table, the device identifier you enter must match the DevId that has previously been entered in the Fuse table. In this table, you may define more than one model for the same device identifier. For example, you may have the same device curve for more than one fuse model (S&C SM-5 4.16 to 14.4kV and S&C SM-5 23&34.5 kV). In this case there will be two entries in the table with the same DevId and model but different nominal voltage ranges. The format for the Fuse Catalog table is given below (Table 7-6). Table 7-6. Fuse Catalog Table
Field Name DevId MODEL SPEED_CHARACTERISTIC NOMINAL MAX CURVE_CODE SYM_AMPERES ASYM_AMPERES FUSE_UNIT_CATALOG_NUM MOUNTING_CATALOG_NUM DevIndex X X Required Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Text Number (Auto) Type Description Device identifier. Must match the DevId specified in the Fuse table. Model number Speed characteristic (Extremely inverse, very inverse, etc.). Nominal voltage range. Maximum voltage range. Curve number or code from manufacturers sheet. Symmetrical fault current (amps). Asymmetrical fault current (amps). Fuse unit catalog number. Fuse unit mounting catalog number. Automatic number used to make all entries unique.
7-33
7.5.1.3 Fuse Curve

The Fuse Curve table contains the time and current points for a fuse. Each point on the curve is represented as one record. For fuses that have both a minimum melt and a total clearing curve, the minimum melt curve is defined by specifying an MM in the CurveType field. The total clearing curve is defined by specifying an MC in the CurveType field. The format for the Fuse Curve table is given below (Table 7-7). Table 7-7. Fuse Curve Table
Field Name DevId CurveType X X Required Text Text Type Description Device identifier. Must match the DevId specified in the Fuse table. Curve Type: MM = minimum melt curve MC = total clearing curve Time point (Y, ordinate). Current point (X, abscissa).
Time Current
X X
Number Number
7-34
7.5.2 Relay Tables

7.5.2.1 Relay
The Relay table contains a device identifier, the manufacturer, model, type and other information for a relay. The device identifier is a unique number and also a primary key for referencing the other relay tables. All of the entries in the relay table must be unique and there can be no duplicate device identifiers. The format of the Relay table is given below (Table 7-8). Table 7-8. Relay Table
Field Name DevId DEVICE_NUM RELAY_CATEGORY_NAME X Required Type Text (Primary Key) Text Text Description Device identifier. Must be unique. IEEE - Device Number, also known as ANSI No. (e.g., 50/51). Group according to OverCurrent, Phase_Distance, Ground_distance, Directional_Ground, Differential, Timer, Instantaneous. Manufacturer name (e.g., GE,WE,ASEA). Type as specified by the manufacturer (e.g., IAC, JBC). Manufacturer given model name (e.g., IAC51, JBC53, etc.). Time Characteristic (e.g. Inverse, Extremely Inverse, Very Inverse, etc.). Enter 0 if taps are displayed in per unit (pu), enter 1 if taps are displayed in amps. Enter a 1 to look up max and min timedial and step using time-dial step enter a 0 to read the RelayCurve table for Devid and Time-Dial. Minimum time dial setting. Maximum time dial setting. Time dial step, enter a blank if relay has no time dial step. Manufacturer curve number. If the same relay is used for multiple purposes, use this field to uniquely identify the relay. Rated current of the relay in amps. Manufacturer given pickup factor, enter blank to default to 1.0.
MANUFACTURER TYPE MODEL TIME_CHARAC_1 TAP_UNITS
Text Text Text Text
Number
TIMEDIAL_FORMAT
Number
MIN_TIMEDIAL_SETTING MAX_TIMEDIAL_SETTING TIMEDIAL_STEP CURVE_NUMBER ELEMENT_DESIGNATION
Number Number Number Text Text
RATED_CURRENT PICKUP_FACTOR
Number Number
7-35
7.5.2.2 Relay Catalog

The Relay Catalog table contains additional information about the relays defined in the Relay table. In this table, the device identifier you enter must match the DevId that has previously been entered in the Relay table. In this table, you may define more than one entry for the same device identifier. For example, you may have the same relay curve for more than one tap range (Basler BE-151tap range R1, R2, R3 each with a different minimum and maximum tap setting range). In this case there will be three entries in the table with the same DevId but different tap range identifiers and different minimum and maximum tap settings. The format of the Relay Catalog table is given below (Table 7-9). Table 7-9. Relay Catalog Table
Field Name DevId Required X Type Text (Primary Key) Number (Auto) Description Device identifier. Must match the DevId specified in the Relay table. Automatic number used to make all entries unique. This number is incremented each time a new record is added to the table. Text, indicating the number of tap ranges on the relay (e.g., An IAC53 relay has 4 different tap ranges. The tap range id will be IAC53_1, IA53_2, IAC53_3, IAC53_4). Comma separated list of tap settings that are available. (e.g., 0.5,0.7, etc.). Note: Enter a blank in the TAP_STEP field multiple tap settings are defined in this field and the step between settings is not uniform. Minimum Tap Setting. Maximum Tap Setting. For relays with uniform steps, enter the tap step (e.g., 0.1) Enter a blank and fill in the field AVAILABLE_TAP_ SETTINGS to enter non-uniform tap settings. Comma separated list of both maximum and minimum instantaneous settings (e.g., 10-40, 20-80, 60-120). In this case, 10-40 translates to a minimum instantaneous setting of 10 and a maximum instantaneous setting of 40.
DevIndex
TAP_RANGE_ID
Text
AVAILABLE_TAP_SETTINGS
Text
MIN_TAP_SETTING MAX_TAP_SETTING TAP_STEP
Text Text Text
INST_RANGE
Text
7-36
Table 7-9. Relay Catalog Table (Cont.)

Field Name INST_STEP Required Type Number Description Instantaneous setting step (e.g., 0.1). Enter a blank if no step setting is available. Should be one of the following: IOC, TOC, DIR, DIST, TIME, AUX. The supervising element of a relay used for multiple purposes. This field should match the ELEMENT_DESIGNATION field located in the Relay table. Manufacturer's given style number (e.g., 12IAC51A801).
SUPERVISING_ELEMENT_CODE
Text
SUPERVISING_ELEMENT_DESIGNATION
Text
STYLE
Text
7.5.2.3 Relay Curve

The Relay Curve table contains the time and current points for each time-dial of the relay. Each point on the curve is represented as one record. For relays that have multiple time-dials, the time dial is specified with the curve points. The format of the Relay Curve table is given below (Table 7-10). Table 7-10. Relay Curve
Field Name DevId Time-Dial Time Current X X X X Required Type Description
Text Device identifier. Must match the (Primary Key) DevId specified in the Relay table. Number Number Number The time-dial setting of the relay corresponding to the curve point. Time point (Y, ordinate). Current point (X, abscissa).
7-37
7.5.3 Recloser Table

7.5.3.1 RecloserMfrSpecs
The RecloserMfrSpecs table contains manufacturer catalog information for recloser devices. The device ID (DEVID) is used as a unique key to reference other recloser tables in the database. Information that is entered into this table is normally obtained from the catalog of reclosers provided by the manufacturer. The format of the RecloserMfrSpecs table is given below (Table 7-11). Table 7-11. RecloserMfrSpecs
Field Name DEVID MANID X X Required Text Text Type Description Device identifier. Must be unique. Manufacturer ID, must match a manufacturer defined in the Recloser_Manufacturers table. Recloser type (e.g., 4E, R, PWE). Nominal voltage range (e.g., 4.8, 4.814.4). Control type: Hydraulic or Electronic. Default = Hydraulic. Interrupting medium: Oil or Vacuum. Basic impulse level. Maximum current rating (Amps). Catalog number. Electronic control catalog number.
REC_TYPE NOM_VOLT CON_TYPE INTERUP_MED BIL MAX_CUR_RATING CATALOG_NUM ELEC_CONTROL_NUM
Text Text Text Text Number Number Text Text
7-38
7.5.3.2 RecloserRatings
The RecloserRatings table contains coil sizes and minimum trip ratings along with interrupting ratings for each recloser type that is specified in the RecloserMfrSpecs table. The RecloserRatings table also defines a pointer to the recloser time-current curve along with a current offset if necessary. The current offset (X_OFFSET) is used to shift the recloser curve to the correct minimum trip value. This allows you to specify one "base" curve in the database that indicates the manufacturers minimum trip coil/minimum trip rating and adjust for other trip coil/minimum trip ratings by specifying an offset multiplier (X_OFFSET) to the "base" curve. The "base" curve would be represented by the field CURVE_PTR which indicates which recloser curve to extract from the database. If no shift is required, specify an X_OFFSET of 1.0. For reclosers that cannot be represented by a "base" curve specify a unique curve pointer (CURVE_PTR) and an X_OFFSET of 1.0. The format of the RecloserRatings table is given below (Table 7-12): Table 7-12. RecloserRatings Table
Field Name DEVID TRIP_COIL_RATING X X Required Text Text Type Description Device identifier. Must match a DEVID specified in RecloserMfrSpecs table. The trip-coil rating of the recloser. Used for hydraulic reclosers, enter N/A for electronic reclosers. The minimum trip rating, normally 2 times the trip coil rating for hydraulic reclosers. Operating voltages of the recloser. Specify one operating voltage for each interrupting rating. A recloser with operating voltages of 4.8, 8.32, and 14.4 would have three distinct records in this table. Interrupting rating for specified operating voltage index. Text identifier of the recloser curve specified in the RecloserTCCCurve table. Multiplier used to shift recloser curve to the correct minimum trip rating. For no curve shift, enter a value of 1.0.
MIN_TRIP_RATING
Text
OPER_VOLTAGE_INDEX
Text
INTERRUPT_RATING CURVE_PTR X
Text Text
X_OFFSET
Number
7-39
7.5.3.3 RecloserTCCCurve
The RecloserTCCCurve table contains the recloser time-current curves. Time-current curves are entered into the database with current specified in Amps and time specified in seconds. Each curve is defined by a curve pointer (specified in the RecloserRatings table) and a curve type (A, E, 101, 102, etc.). The curve type is indicated on the time-current curve by the manufacturer of the recloser. The format of the RecloserTCCCurve table is given below (Table 7-13). Table 7-13. RecloserTCCCurve Table
Field Name CURVE_PTR X Required Text Type Description Curve identifier. Must match the curve pointer specified in RecloserRatings table. The curve identifier that the manufacturer provides on time-current plot. Examples of a curve identifier are A, B, D, 102, 101. Current point (Amps). Time point (seconds).
CURVE_SET_TYPE
Text
X Y
X X
Number Number
7-40
7.5.4 Using the Protective Device Database Interface

The protective device database interface provides the ability to add, delete, and modify protective device database tables interactively through an easy to use interface. The interface will automatically display when the database is opened as shown in Figure 7-18.
Figure 7-18. Main Switchboard If you want to open the database without the automatic interface, hold the Shift key down while opening the protective device database and Microsoft Access will bypass the interface and open normally.
7-41
7.5.4.1 Adding Fuses

To add a fuse to the database: 1. Click the Add Fuse button. The Add Fuse form will display (Figure 7-19).
Figure 7-19. Add Fuse Form 2. Enter the properties of the fuse (required fields are indicated by a *). 3. Enter the properties of the fuse catalog and select Add Record to add the catalog information to the fuse catalog table. 4. Enter the minimum melt and maximum clearing curves for the fuse. The minimum melt curve values are specified as (time,current) point values with a curve type of "MM". The maximum clearing curve values are specified as (time,current) point values with a curve type of "MC". 5. Select Close to exit the form and add the fuse record into the database. 6. If a new fuse manufacturer is added, update the fuse manufacturer table as described in Section 7.5.4.5.
7-42
7.5.4.2 Adding Relays

To add a relay to the database: 1. Click the Add Relay button. The Add Relay form will display (Figure 7-20).
Figure 7-20. Add Relay Form 2. Enter the properties of the relay (required relays are indicated by a *). 3. Enter the properties of the relay catalog and select Add Record to add the catalog information to the relay catalog table. 4. Enter time dial, time, and current values that define the curve for the relay. 5. Select Close to exit the form and add the relay record into the database. 6. If a new relay manufacturer is added, update the relay manufacturer table as described Section 7.5.4.5.
7-43
7.5.4.3 Adding Reclosers To add a recloser to the database:

1. If you need to add a new recloser manufacturer, select Database Maintenance from the main switchboard and choose Add Recloser Manufacturer. The Add Recloser Manufacturer form will display (Figure 7-21). Select the New Record button, enter a manufacturer identifier and the manufacturer name, then select Close to add the manufacturer to the database.
Figure 7-21. Add Recloser Manufacturer Form 2. Click the Add Recloser button to display the Add Recloser form (Figure 7-22).
Figure 7-22. Add Recloser Form 3. Enter the properties of the relay. 4. Enter the properties of the relay ratings including ratings. If the recloser is hydraulic, enter the trip coil rating and the minimum trip rating (normally 2 times the trip coil rating). If the recloser is electronic, enter N/A in the Trip Coil Rating field. Select the Add Record button to add the rating information to the relay ratings table. Assign a curve pointer and X offset (multiplier) used to look up the correct time-current curve.
7-44
5. Under the RecloserCurve area, type the curve pointer defined in Step 3 and the associated current and time points that identify the time-current curve for this recloser. The curve identifier (Curve ID) is normally the number or letter of the TCC curve supplied by the manufacturer. 6. Select Close to exit the form and add the recloser record into the database.
7.5.4.4 Viewing and Modifying Fuses

To view or modify a fuse in the database: 1. Select View/Modify Fuse. The View/Modify Fuse form is displayed (Figure 7-23).
Figure 7-23. View/Modify Fuse Form 2. Select the manufacturer and fuse type from the drop down list provided and the fields in the form will be filled in automatically. 3. If you want to change any fuse properties or curve points, select the field(s) you want to change and enter the new value. 4. Select Close to save your changes and exit the form.
7-45
7.5.4.5 Viewing and Modifying Relays

To view or modify a relay in the database: 1. Select View/Modify Relay. The View/Modify Relay form is displayed (Figure 7-24).
Figure 7-24. View/Modify Relay Form 2. Select the manufacturer and relay type from the drop down list provided and the fields in the form will be filled in automatically. 3. If you want to change any relay properties or curve points, select the field(s) you want to change and enter the new value. 4. Select Close to save your changes and exit the form.
7-46
7.5.4.6 Viewing and Modifying Reclosers

To view or modify a recloser in the database: 1. Select View/Modify Recloser from the Main Switchboard. The View/Modify Recloser form is displayed (Figure 7-25).
Figure 7-25. View/Modify Recloser Form 2. Select the manufacturer and recloser type from the drop down list provided and the fields in the form will be automatically filled in. To add a manufacturer to the database, refer to Step 1 of the section titled Adding Reclosers. 3. If you want to change any properties or curve points, select the field(s) you want to modify and enter the new value. 4. Select Close to save your changes and exit.
7-47
7.5.4.7 Updating Device Manufacturers

If you have added new fuse or relay manufacturers during any add or modify operation, you must update the manufacturer tables in order for the manufacturers to be correctly added into the database. To update fuse manufacturers: 1. Click the Database Maintenance button. 2. Click the Update Fuse Manufacturers button and select Yes to the message "The existing table "Fuse Manufacturers" will be deleted before you run the query. Do you want to continue anyway?" 3. The fuse manufacturer table will now be updated. To update relay manufacturers: 1. Click the Database Maintenance button. 2. Click the Update Relay Manufacturers button and select Yes to the message "The existing table "Relay Manufacturers" will be deleted before you run the query. Do you want to continue anyway?" 3. The relay manufacturer table will now be updated.
7-48
7.5.4.8 Removing Devices

Any number of fuse or relay devices may be permanently removed from the database in a single operation. To delete a fuse: 1. Click the Database Maintenance button. 2. Click the Delete Fuse Records button. The Delete Fuse Records form is displayed (Figure 7-26).
Figure 7-26. Delete Fuse Records Form 3. Select the manufacturer and fuse type that you want to remove from the database. Properties of the fuse will be updated automatically. 4. Click the Delete Record button to remove the record from the database. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired fuses are removed. 6. Select Close to exit the form.
7-49
To delete a fuse: 1. Click the Database Maintenance button. 2. Click the Delete Relay Records button. The Delete Relay Records form is displayed (Figure 7-27).
Figure 7-27. Delete Relay Records Form 3. Select the manufacturer and relay type that you want to remove from the database. Properties of the relay will be updated automatically. 4. Click the Delete Record button to remove the record from the database. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired relays are removed. 6. Select Close to exit the form.
7-50
To delete a recloser: 1. Click the Database Maintenance button on the Main Switchboard. 2. Click the Delete Recloser Records button. The Delete Recloser Records form is displayed (Figure 7-28)
Figure 7-28. Delete Recloser Records Form 3. Select the manufacturer and recloser type that you want to remove from the database. The properties for this recloser will automatically appear in the fields on the form. 4. Click the Delete Record button to remove the recloser record from the database. You will be asked at this time whether to remove the associated recloser ratings records from the database (Figure 7-29). Select Yes to remove the recloser ratings records or No to remove only the recloser manufacturer information.
Figure 7-29. Verify Removal of Recloser Ratings Records 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the desired recloser records are removed. 6. Select Close to exit the form.
7-51
To delete a recloser curve: 1. Click the Database Maintenance button on the Main Switchboard. 2. Click the Delete Recloser Curve button. The Delete Recloser Curve form is displayed (Figure 7-30)
Figure 7-30. Delete Recloser Curve Form 3. Select the curve pointer and curve ID that you want to remove from the database. 4. Click the Delete Curve button to remove the recloser curve from the database. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all desired curves have been removed. 6. Select Close to exit the form.
7.5.5 Printing the Contents of the Database

The contents of the protective device database may be printed by, using the Reports available in Microsoft Access. To obtain a report: 1. Click the Reports tab. 2. Double-click on the report name, or select the report and click the Preview button. The report will display. You can print this report by selecting File>Print.
7-52
7.5.6 Importing Customized Database Tables

If you have customized the protective device database to meet your needs and wish to stay current with future releases of our products, import your customized database tables into the current version of our distributed database. You can import your customized database tables into the latest version of Siemens PTIs protective device database using functions provided by Microsoft Access. Importing tables will use an import followed by an append query to add records into existing tables. Instructions for importing tables and writing append queries are provided by Microsoft Access on-line help and are also detailed below for your convenience. Import data from another database: 1. Hold the Shift key down while opening the PTIProt.mde database. 2. Select File>Get External Data>Import. 3. Select the database file that you want to import. 4. Select Import. 5. In the Import Objects dialog, select the table(s) that you want to import. 6. Select OK. A new table will be created in the database for each of the tables you have selected. Create an append query to append the imported table records to an existing database table. 1. Create a query by selecting New on the Query tab. Select Design View. 2. In the Show Table dialog, choose the new table that was created during the import process. 3. Include all the fields in the table by dragging the * to the query design grid. 4. Select Query>Append Query and select the table that you want the new table to be appended to. 5. Select OK. 6. Select Save and provide a name for the query. 7. Select Query>Run to run the query and update the table. Some database tables will not allow duplicates. If you are prompted that Microsoft Access cannot append all the records in the append query, select Yes. This indicates only unique records will be added to the new table.
7-53
7-54
Chapter 8
Harmonic Analysis
8.1 Overview: Harmonic Analysis
A harmonic analysis can be used model power system distortion. The deviation between the perfect sinusoid is expressed in terms of harmonic components. PSS/ADEPT can perform harmonic analysis on your network and display graphical results. After the network is solved at the fundamental frequency (e.g., 50 Hz, 60 Hz), all of the network components are converted into impedances. These impedances are varied according to the harmonic number and the network is solved for each specific harmonic (e.g., 1st, 3rd, 5th). For each device type within the network there are various ways of modeling the effect of the harmonic number on the device impedance. A current injection technique is used to inject current of a certain magnitude and angle into the network. Harmonic filters may also be defined directly in the network by specifying a shunt device of this type at any node in the network. Harmonic analysis can be used to calculate the total harmonic distortion, telephone influence factor, and Thevenin impedance. In addition, a harmonic scan is also possible over a range of harmonic numbers. The harmonics module is an option in PSS/ADEPT. You will be unable to access the harmonics module if you have not purchased the license. If you wish to purchase a license for this module, please contact Siemens PTI for further assistance. In this chapter, you will learn about: Adding harmonic injections to the network. Adding harmonic filters to the network. Editing harmonic injections and filters. Specifying harmonic analysis options. Performing a harmonic analysis. Viewing results of a harmonic analysis.
8-1
Harmonic Analysis Adding Harmonic Injections
8.2 Adding Harmonic Injections

A harmonic injection is a current injection that can be used to eliminate harmonics and is described by a set of "triplets" that define magnitude and angle of harmonic injection as a function of harmonic number. The magnitude of each triplet is defined in per-unit terms so the base current of the injection is also required. Harmonic injections specified in the network are only considered by the harmonic analysis module and are irrelevant to any other analysis. Harmonic injections can be associated with another network item, such as a static load, or can exist separately attached to a node in the network. When a harmonic injection is associated with a specific network item (static load, machine, etc.) that item is replaced by the specified harmonic injection during a harmonic analysis. A transformer branch is an exception since replacing the transformer branch by a harmonic injection would cause an islanded network to be implicitly created. With respect to harmonic injections, the following rules are applied: You cannot define a harmonic injection at a line branch. You can specify a harmonic injection only at the FROM side of a transformer branch. Nodes that are connected by a zero impedance line branch will be handled as one node, not two.
8-2
8.2.1 Adding Harmonic Injections to Shunt Items

You can specify a harmonic injection at a static load, induction machine, synchronous machine, or a shunt capacitor/reactor bank. When a harmonic analysis is performed, the injection will be placed at the same node as the shunt item and the associated shunt item will be temporarily removed from the network. For example, if a harmonic injection is associated with a static load, the static load item will be removed from the network and replaced by the specified injection during harmonic analysis. In the initial load flow, the base shunt current is determined from the phase current of the associated shunt device. The angle of the injection is determined from the angle of the positive-sequence node voltage. To add a harmonic injection to a shunt item: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Harmonic Injection button.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the connection line of the shunt item, click just over half the distance toward the shunt item symbol. The harmonic injection symbol (Figure 8-1) will appear on top of the connection line between the node and the shunt item symbol.
Figure 8-1. Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Shunt Item
8-3
8.2.2 Adding Harmonic Injections to Transformers

You can specify a harmonic injection at the FROM side of a transformer branch. During harmonic analysis, this transformer remains in the network to prevent an island from forming. In the initial load flow, the base branch current is determined from the phase currents at the FROM node of the transformer. The angle of the injection is determined from the angle of the positivesequence FROM node voltage of the transformer branch. To add a harmonic injection to a transformer: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Harmonic Injection button.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the sending end of the branch and click within a quarter of the total length of the transformer from the node. A harmonic injection symbol will appear on the selected transformer branch (Figure 8-2).
Figure 8-2. Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Transformer
8-4
8.2.3 Adding Harmonic Injections to Nodes

You can specify a harmonic injection that is directly attached to a node in the network much like a static load or induction machine. In this case, the base current must be specified in the Harmonic Injection Property sheet. The angle of the injection is found from the angle of the positive-sequence node voltage. Only one harmonic injection is allowed at a node in the network. Nodes that are connected by a zero impedance line branch will count as one node. To add a harmonic injection to a node: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Harmonic Injection button.
2. Position the pointer over the node to which the harmonic injection will be connected. 3. Click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the harmonic injection symbol (Figure 8-3) to the desired position.
Figure 8-3. Harmonic Injection Symbol on a Node
8-5
Harmonic Analysis Editing Harmonic Injections
8.3 Editing Harmonic Injections

The characteristics of harmonic injections are modified using its property sheet. You can display the property sheet for the selected harmonic injection from either the Equipment List View or the Diagram View. To display the Harmonic Injection Property sheet from the Diagram View: 1. Double-click on the desired harmonic injection; or, 2. Left-click on the harmonic injection to select it, then right-click to display a pop-up menu; choose Properties. The Harmonic Injection Property sheet will display. To display the harmonic injection from the Equipment List View: 1. Expand the tree section titled "Harmonic Injections" by clicking on the "+". 2. Double-click on the harmonic injection which will automatically display the Harmonic Injection Property sheet; or, 3. Left-click on the harmonic injection to select it then right-click to display the pop-up menu; choose Properties from the pop-up menu to display the Harmonic Injection Property sheet. As an alternative, you may also use the applications selection tools to select harmonic injections. To change the properties of a harmonic injection: 1. Double-click on the harmonic injection or select the harmonic injection, right-click and choose Properties. The Harmonic Injection Property sheet will display (Figure 8-4).
Figure 8-4. Harmonic Injection Property Sheet
8-6
Harmonic Analysis Adding Harmonic Filters
2. Enter/select the properties for the harmonic injection. Press the Tab key to move to the next field or click in the field of interest, then add or change information as needed. Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. You may enter an alphanumeric character name up to 12 characters. The name cannot contain embedded blanks. Harmonic Injection List: Adding an item to the list specifies a new harmonic injection. To add an item to the list, click the New button and specify the requested data. To remove an item from the list, click the Delete button. To edit an existing item in the list, double-click on the desired item in the list. For each harmonic injection enter the following parameters: Harmonic number: Specify the harmonic number where this current injection will be used (e.g., 1, 5, 7, 9, etc.). Normally the harmonic number is specified as an integer value, however, real numbers are allowed. Current magnitude: Specify the current magnitude in per-unit of base current. Current angle: Specify the current angle in fundamental degrees. If you specify a harmonic injection at a node, the base current for the injection must be specified in amps. If you specify a harmonic injection at a transformer or shunt item, the branch or shunt current is used as the base value and the base current field will not appear on the property sheet. 3. To display the harmonic injection on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected harmonic injection is in service, click the In service check box. This is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the harmonic injection is out of service. 5. Click the OK button to accept your changes.
8.4 Adding Harmonic Filters

Harmonic filters are specified as a shunt item and are used to reduce the amplitude of one or more fixed frequency currents or voltages. To add a harmonic filter: 1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click the Harmonic Filter button.
2. Position the pointer over the node to which the harmonic filter will be connected. 3. Click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the harmonic filter symbol to the desired position.
8-7
Harmonic Analysis Editing Harmonic Filters
8.5 Editing Harmonic Filters

The characteristics of harmonic filters are modified using its property sheet. You can display the property sheet for the selected harmonic filter from either the Equipment List View or the Diagram View. To display the Harmonic Filter Property sheet from the Diagram View: 1. Double-click on the desired harmonic filter; or, 2. Left-click on the harmonic filter to select it, then right-click to display a pop-up menu; choose Properties. The Harmonic Filter Property sheet will display. To display the harmonic filter from the Equipment List View: 1. Expand the tree section titled "Harmonic Filters" by clicking on the "+". 2. Double-click on the harmonic filter which will automatically display the Harmonic Filter Property sheet; or, 3. Left-click on the harmonic filter to select it then right-click to display the pop-up menu; choose Properties from the pop-up menu to display the Harmonic Filter Property sheet. As an alternative, you may also use the applications selection tools to select harmonic filters. To change the properties of a harmonic filter: 1. Double-click on the harmonic filter or select the harmonic filter, right-click and choose Properties. The Harmonic Filter Property sheet will display (Figure 8-5).
Figure 8-5. Harmonic Filter Property Sheet
8-8
Harmonic Analysis Editing Harmonic Filters
2. On the Main tab, enter/select the properties for the harmonic filter. Press the Tab key to move to the next field or click in the field of interest, then add or change information as needed. Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. You may enter an alphanumeric character name up to 12 characters. The name cannot contain embedded blanks. Type: You may choose several filter types from the available list containing high pass, high pass 1st order, high pass 2nd order, high pass C type, and single tuned. Once you have selected a filter, an illustration of the filters configuration displayed. Rating: Specify the filter rating in kVA. Resistance (pu on filter base): Specify the filter resistance in per unit on the filter base rating. Reactance (pu on filter base): Specify the filter reactance in per unit on the filter base rating. Inductance (pu on filter base): Specify the filter inductance in per unit on the filter base rating. For resistance, reactance, and inductance you can refer to the diagram for the filter type to identify which values correspond to the filter component. Connection: Specify whether this filter is wye (grounded) or delta (ungrounded) connected. If the filter is delta connected, it is automatically ungrounded and the impedance controls are disabled. You may specify a grounded or ungrounded wye-connected harmonic filter. Ungrounded filters will not affect harmonics of the 3rd, 6th, 9th, 12th, etc. order. 3. To display the harmonic filter on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check mark there. 4. To indicate that the selected harmonic filter is in service, click the In service check box. This is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the harmonic filter is out of service. 5. Click the OK button to accept your changes.
8-9
Harmonic Analysis Setting Harmonic Analysis Options
8.6 Setting Harmonic Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you some control over the harmonics algorithm; you can specify the harmonic number range over which telephone influence factor (TIF) and total harmonic distortion (THD) are to be calculated. To set harmonic analysis options: 1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. The Analysis Options Property sheet displays (Figure 8-6). 2. Click the Harmonics tab.
Figure 8-6. Analysis Options Property Sheet: Harmonics Tab 3. Enter/select the harmonics options you want for your calculation: Harmonic: Specify the harmonic number to display results on the diagram. The diagram can only display results for one harmonic at a time. Range (TIF, THD): Specify the minimum and maximum harmonic numbers to use to calculate telephone influence factor (TIF) and total harmonic distortion (THD).
8-10
Harmonic Analysis Performing a Harmonic Analysis
8.7 Performing a Harmonic Analysis

To perform a harmonic analysis (Figure 8-7), do one of the following: Choose Analysis>Harmonics from the Main Menu. Click the Harmonics Calculation button on the Analysis Toolbar.
The results for the harmonic number you specified in analysis options are displayed on the diagram.
Figure 8-7. Sample Harmonics Analysis Diagram
8-11
Harmonic Analysis Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis
8.8 Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis

Once a harmonic analysis has been performed, a number of waveform plots become available in the Harmonics Toolbar. All the harmonic waveform plots use the same basic display area (Figure 88). Enter/select the desired properties for your harmonic waveform plot.
Figure 8-8. Harmonic Plot Dialog Additionally, the Harmonics Toolbar (Figure 8-9) can be used to select waveform plots, or to select to view either total harmonic distortion or telephone interference factor on the diagram. The list box is used to select the harmonic number you wish to view.
THD
Waveform
Impedance vs. Frequency
Spectrum
Nodal Impedance
Harmonic Number
Figure 8-9. Harmonics Toolbar Scales and Ranges: Specify the region to be plotted. Click Reset Scale to reset scales and ranges to their default values. Options: Options will vary depending on the type of plot you have selected. Usually, options will control the number of waveforms displayed in the plot area.
8-12
Node name: Select the name of the node you are interested in. As soon as this name is selected from the list, a plot will be generated. Some waveforms take longer to draw than others. A Progress View is provided so that you may monitor the progress of the plot. When a plot is being generated, the Pause and Abort buttons will become available to allow you to interrupt or cancel the generation of the waveform. Once the waveform is generated and the plot is complete, or immediately after the Pause or Abort buttons are selected, you can select another node or modify the scales and ranges. To display a waveform plot, select the desired plot from the toolbar. The following plots are available: Harmonic Voltage Harmonic Spectrum Impedance versus Frequency Nodal Impedance
8.8.1 Harmonic Voltage

The harmonic voltage waveform shows the selected node voltage with respect to time (Figure 810). The Show Fundamental and Show Difference options can be used to show the node voltage and fundamental plus harmonics at the selected node (Figure 8-11).
Figure 8-10. Harmonic Voltage Waveform
8-13
Figure 8-11. Harmonic Voltage Waveform (extra detail)
8-14
8.8.2 Harmonics Spectrum

The harmonics spectrum shows the relative size of integer harmonics at a selected node (Figure 8-12).
Figure 8-12. Harmonics Spectrum
8-15
8.8.3 Impedance versus Frequency

The impedance versus frequency plot shows the harmonic impedance as seen from one node over a range of frequencies (Figure 8-13). For a large network, this waveform can take a significant amount of time to calculate.
Figure 8-13. Impedance versus Frequency
8-16
8.8.4 Nodal Impedance

The nodal impedance plot (Figure 8-14) shows the harmonic impedance as seen from on node over a range of harmonics. Reactance is plotted against resistance at each harmonic. Whereas other harmonic waveforms are produced in a left-to-right order, the nodal impedance plot is created all at once with more detail being filled in as time goes by. As the plot is progressively updated with more accurate information, older approximations begin to fade. Once complete, equally spaced points are highlighted on the plot together with a corresponding harmonic number and frequency specified in parentheses. For a large network, this waveform can take a significant amount of time to calculate.
Figure 8-14. Nodal Impedance Plot
8-17
Harmonic Analysis Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT
8.9 Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT

For static loads, induction machines, synchronous machines, shunt capacitors, lines and cables, and transformers, harmonic models are used to determine the impedance values at a given harmonic number. The equation used to calculate the impedance values are shown for each relevant network item.
8.9.1 Static Loads

A static load is modeled in two parts, one with resistance and reactance in series, and one with resistance and reactance in parallel. For the static series portion of the load the resistance and reactance at fundamental frequency are: 2 V R = real ----------- * F S s where: V = voltage R = resistance X = reactance Fs = fundamental frequency (series portion) S* = complex conjugate load power P jQ (per phase) The variation of impedance with harmonic number is then given by: Z( H) = H where: Z(H) = impedance at harmonic number For the static parallel portion of the load the resistance and reactance at fundamental frequency are: V R = ---------FpP where: R = resistance X = reactance V = voltage Fp = fundamental frequency (parallel portion) P = kW Q = kvar
2 Cs 1
2 V X = imag ----------- * F S s
R + jH
Cs 2
V X = ----------Fp Q
8-18
The variation of impedance with harmonic number is given by: jR ( H ) X ( H ) Z ( H ) = --------------------------------------( R ( H ) + jX ( H ) ) where: R(H) = H X( H) = H where: Cp1 = load skin effect exponent (parallel portion of load) Cp2 = load reactance exponent (parallel portion of load)
Cp 1
R X
Cp 2
8.9.2 Induction Machines

An induction machine is represented by a two-cage model whose impedances at a given slip are adjusted for frequency. Induction machine resistances vary with harmonic as: R (H) = H where: R0(H) = zero-sequence resistance at harmonic number H Induction machine reactances vary with harmonic as: X (H) = H where: X0(H) = zero-sequence reactance at harmonic number H C4 = machine reactance exponent Equivalent impedance at a given slip is calculated using resistances and reactances that have been adjusted for frequency as just stated. At harmonic frequencies, slip is calculated as: ( 1.0 s 1 ) s ( H ) = 1.0 -----------------------H where: s(H) = slip at harmonic number s1 = slip at fundamental frequency
* C4 * C3
8-19
When the induction machine is grounded the grounding impedance is calculated as: Zg ( H ) = H where: Zg(H) = grounding impedance at harmonic number H Rg = grounding resistance Xg = grounding reactance C1 = grounding skin effect exponent C2 = grounding reactance exponent Grounding resistance and reactance are in series.
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
8.9.3 Synchronous Machines

A synchronous machine is represented by its subtransient and zero-sequence reactance and its armature and negative-sequence resistance. Synchronous machine resistances vary with harmonic as: Ra ( H ) = H where: Ra(H) = armature resistance at harmonic number R2(H) = negative-sequence resistance at harmonic number Synchronous machine reactances vary with harmonic as: X d( H) = H where: Xd(H) = subtransient reactance at harmonic number X0 = zero-sequence reactance C4 = machine reactance exponent
C4 C3
Ra
R2 ( H ) = H
C3
R2
X d
X0 ( H ) = H
C4
X0
8-20
Synchronous machine impedances in zero, positive, and negative sequence are: Z 0 ( H ) = R a ( H ) + jX 0 ( H ) + 3 ( R g ( H ) + jX g ( H ) ) Z 1 ( H ) = R a ( H ) + jX d ( H ) Z 2 ( H ) = R 2 ( H ) + jX d ( H ) where: Z0 = zero-sequence impedance Z1 = positive-sequence impedance Z2 = negative-sequence impedance When the synchronous machine is grounded the grounding impedance is calculated as: Zg ( H ) = H where: Zg(H) = the grounding impedance at the harmonic number C1 = grounding skin effect exponent C2 = grounding reactance exponent Grounding resistance and reactance are in series.
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
8.9.4 Shunt Capacitors

A shunt capacitor is defined by the reactive power (kvar) it supplies at nominal voltage. A shunt reactor consumes reactive power. Shunt capacitor/reactor impedance varies with harmonic as: jH where: kV = base kV of capacitor KVAra = reactive power or capacitor When the shunt capacitor/reactor is grounded the grounding impedance is calculated as: Zg ( H ) = H where: Zg(H) = grounding impedance at harmonic number C1 = grounding skin effect exponent C2 = grounding reactance exponent Grounding resistance and reactance are in series.
C1 C3
( 1000 kV KVAr a )
Rg + j H
C2
X g
8-21
Note that impedance type shunts are modeled in harmonic analysis as loads, while zig-zag type shunts are modeled as transformers.
8.9.5 Lines and Cables

There are three harmonic models of a line. These are: IEEE line IEEE cable Custom
Long line corrections are applied to all three models. IEEE Line (Model 1)
2 0.646 H - r 1 ( H ) = L r 1 1 + ------------------------------------------2 192.0 + 0.518 H
r0 ( H ) = r1 ( H ) + ( L H ( r0 r1 ) ) x0 ( H ) = L H x0 b0 ( H ) = L H b0
x1 ( H ) = L H x1 b1 ( H ) = L H b1 IEEE Cable (Model 2) r 1 ( H ) = L r 1 ( 0.187 + 0.532 H x1 ( H ) = L H x1 b1 ( H ) = L H b1 Custom Line/Cable (Model 3) r1 ( H ) = H

C1 C3 C5 0.5
r0 ( H ) = r1 ( H ) + L H ( r0 r1 ) x0 ( H ) = L H x0 b0 ( H ) = L H b0
r1 x1 b1
r0 ( H ) = H
C2 C4 C6
r0 x0 b0
x1 ( H ) = H
x0 ( H ) = H
b1 ( H ) = H where:
b0 ( H ) = H
r1 = positive-sequence resistance x1 = positive-sequence reactance b1 = positive-sequence branch admittance r0 = zero-sequence resistance x0 = zero-sequence reactance b0 = zero-sequence branch admittance C1 = positive-sequence skin effect exponent
8-22
C2 = zero-sequence skin effect exponent C3 = positive-sequence reactance exponent C4 = zero-sequence reactance exponent C5 = positive-sequence charging exponent C6 = zero-sequence charging exponent Long Line Corrections The long line corrections must then be applied to [r1(H), x1(H), b1(H)] and [r0(H), x0(H), b0(H)] to obtain the lines lumped-parameters [R1(H), X1(H), G1(H), B1(H)] and [R0(H), X0(H), G0(H), B0(H)] as follows: 1 ( H ) = Zc1 ( H ) = ( r 1 ( H ) + jx 1 ( H ) ) ( 0.0 + j 10 r 1 ( H ) + jx 1 ( H ) -------------------------------------------6 0.0 + j 10 b 1 ( H ) ( r 0 ( H ) + jx 0 ( H ) ) ( 0.0 + j 10 r 0 ( H ) + jx 0 ( H ) -------------------------------------------6 0.0 + j 10 b 0 ( H )
6 6
b1 ( H ) )
0 ( H ) = Zc0 ( H ) =
b0 ( H ) )
The lumped-parameter equivalents are calculated as: R 1 ( H ) = real ( Z c 1 ( H ) sin h ( 1 ( H ) L ) ) X 1 ( H ) = imag ( Z c 1 ( H ) sin h ( 1 ( H ) L ) )
6 1 ( H ) L 10 G 1 ( H ) = real ------------------ tan h ----------------------- Zc1 ( H ) 2 6 1 ( H ) L 10 B 1 ( H ) = imag ------------------ tan h ----------------------- 2 Zc1( H )
R 0 ( H ) = real ( Z c 0 ( H ) sin h ( 0 ( H ) L ) ) X 0 ( H ) = imag ( Z c 0 ( H ) sin h ( 0 ( H ) L ) )

6 0 ( H ) L 10 G 0 ( H ) = real ------------------ tan h ----------------------- 2 Zc0 ( H ) 6 0 ( H ) L 10 B 0 ( H ) = imag ------------------ tan h ----------------------- Zc0( H ) 2
8-23
where: R1 = positive-sequence resistance X1 = positive-sequence reactance B1 = positive-sequence branch admittance R0 = zero-sequence resistance X0 = zero-sequence reactance B0 = zero-sequence branch admittance G0 = lumped parameter zero-sequence shunt conductance G1 = lumped parameter positive-sequence shunt conductance
8.9.6 Transformers
There are two harmonic models of a transformer: IEEE model Custom model
IEEE Transformer Leakage impedance is given by: Z1 ( H ) = H

1.15
R1 + j ( H X1 )
Custom Transformer Leakage impedance is given by: Z1 ( H ) = H

C3
R1 + j H
C4
X 1
Grounding impedance, if it exists, is treated the same for all models of the transformer: Zg ( H ) = H
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
Grounding resistance and reactance are in series. where: R1 = resistance X1 = reactance H = harmonic number C3 = transformer skin effect exponent C4 = transformer reactance exponent C1 = grounding skin effect exponent C2 = grounding reactance exponent
8-24
Chapter 9
Distribution Reliability Analysis
9.1 Overview: Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA)
The ability to determine service reliability is a growing concern, especially given that many customer service interruptions are caused by problems with the distribution portion of the overall system. Reliability techniques can be used to measure past performance and predict future reliability performance for a distribution system. Distribution reliability indices are used to quantify the performance of the system, and evaluate the effectiveness of enhancements and upgrades in order to improve the reliability of distribution circuits. The reliability of distribution systems is evaluated by using industry standard reliability indices. PSS/ADEPTs Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA) option determines standard reliability indices and interruption profiles of the distribution system based on system topology, location of protection equipment and reliability data for each network branch item. The DRA analysis tool enables various design options to be explored so that a system with the best or most appropriate level of reliability can be chosen for the least possible cost before the system is built.
9.1.1 Nomenclature
Outage An outage signifies a network item that is not available to perform its intended function due to some event. Depending on the network configuration, an outage may or may not cause service to a customer to be interrupted. Failure A failure indicates the state of a network item when it is not available to perform its function due to an event or circumstance. A failure normally results in an outage of the network item, however an outage does not necessarily indicate a failure. Failure Rate The number of failures per unit length per time of a network item. The failure rate is normally expressed in terms of the number of failures per mile per year. PSS/ADEPT does not restrict unit classification as long as the failure rate is consistent across each network item. The unit of failures per km per year is perfectly acceptable. Failure Duration The time period from the initiation of a failure until the network item is repaired or replaced so that it is able to perform its intended function. The failure duration is normally expressed in hours or a fraction thereof (e.g., 1.5 = 1 hour, 30 minutes). Switch Time The time period from the time a switching operation is required due to a forced system outage until the actual switching operation occurs. The switch time is normally expressed in hours or a fraction thereof (e.g., 0.5 = 30 minutes).
9-1
Distribution Reliability Analysis Overview: Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA)
Interruption The loss of service to one or more customers caused by one or more outages to the distribution system. Interruption Duration The time period from the initial customer interruption until service to the customer has been restored. The time period is normally expressed in hours. Momentary Interruption A service interruption that is limited to the time period required to restore customer service by automatic or controlled switching operations or by manual switching at locations where a system operator is immediately available. These switching operations must be completed in a specified time (e.g., 5 minutes). The switch time indicating an automatic switching operation is specified as 0.1 hours or 6 minutes to the DRA analysis module. Sustained Interruption A service interruption that lasts for more than 0.1 hours.
9-2
Distribution Reliability Analysis Using the Distribution Reliability Analysis Module
9.2 Using the Distribution Reliability Analysis Module

Distribution Reliability Analysis can be used as a tool to assist in: Determining the reliability of existing systems. Identifying poor areas of system reliability. Quantifying the impact on reliability of proposed system upgrades and expansions.
The Distribution Reliability Analysis Module (DRA) module is an option in PSS/ADEPT. You will not be able to access this module if you have not purchased a DRA license. If you wish to purchase a license, please contact Siemens PTI for further assistance. Calculations of reliability indices depend on reliability information such as failure rates and repair times specified at each branch in the network. These reliability parameters are specified as properties of a branch device and can be entered either through the construction dictionary or a network item property sheet. These specified reliability parameters are used to determine the reliability indices for the entire system and each protection zone. A protection zone is an area of the network that contains a piece of protection equipment (e.g., fuse). Network items downstream from one protection device and upstream of another protective device compose a protection zone. The network below (Figure 9-1) illustrates a system with 3 protection zones.
Figure 9-1. Illustration of Protection Zones
9-3
Distribution Reliability Analysis Using the Distribution Reliability Analysis Module
When a DRA analysis is performed, you will be able to obtain the following reliability indices for the entire network and for each individual protection zone: System Average Interruption Frequency Index (SAIFI) The average frequency (number) of sustained interruptions per customer over a predefined area. The definition is: SAIFI = Total number of customer interruptions Total number of customers served
System Average Interruption Duration Index (SAIDI) The average time the customers are interrupted. Also referred to as the customer minutes of interruptions or customer hours. The definition is: SAIDI = Customer interruptions duration Total number of customers served
Customer Average Interruption Frequency Index (CAIFI) The average frequency (number) of sustained interruptions for those customers experiencing sustained interruptions. The customer is counted once regardless of the number of times they are interrupted. The definition is: CAIFI = Total number of customer interruptions Total number of customers interrupted
Customer Average Interruption Duration Index (CAIDI) The average time required to restore service to the average customer per sustained interruption. The definition is: CAIDI = Customer interruptions duration Total number of customers interrupted
Additionally, customer information such as the number of customers served (Cs) and the total number of customers interrupted (Ci) are also determined and can be displayed on the diagram or in a text report. In this chapter you will learn how to: Specify reliability parameters at network items. Perform DRA analysis on the network. View results on the diagram. Obtain a text report containing results from a DRA analysis. Color code the diagram based on user-specified target reliability indices.
9-4
Distribution Reliability Analysis Using DRA Protection Equipment and Switches
9.3 Using DRA Protection Equipment and Switches

The DRA analysis requires reliability parameters to be specified for each branch in the network. If you have branch items that use a construction type specified in the construction dictionary, the reliability parameters can be entered directly in the construction dictionary file and retrieved automatically. If you need to specify a construction type not found in the construction dictionary, you must set the reliability parameters for each branch directly on the network item property sheet. Reliability parameters that are not loaded from the construction dictionary are stored in the native data file (.adp), and in the network dump (Hub) file (.dmp), but not in a raw data file (.dat). If you want to use the raw data file format and you want to preserve the reliability information, you must define reliability parameters for each specified construction type in the construction dictionary. If you do not, ADEPT will fill the reliability parameter fields with 999. Within the construction dictionary file and the associated DRA tab on the Network Item Property sheet, methods are available to model: Automatic reclosing devices (breakers, reclosers, sectionalizers). Switches (automatic and manual). Fuses. Tie switches.
9.3.1 Specifying Automatic Reclosing Devices

Automatic reclosing devices automatically reclose during or after a fault condition and should be modeled as switch branches in the network. In the case of breakers, relays and reclosers, the device will repeatedly interrupt fault current until the fault is cleared or the device itself locks out. The switch types of "Breaker" and "Recloser" should be specified to represent these reclosing devices. A switch type of "Breaker" or "Recloser" can represent a device used to protect the substation. The first branch specified in the network downstream of the source must be of a switch type "Breaker" or "Recloser"; otherwise, an error message will display. Sectionalizers do not have the ability to interrupt fault current, however you can model them as switch branches with a switch type of "Sectionalizer" and a switch time set equal to 0.1 or less, which identifies them as automatic switching devices.
9.3.2 Specifying Breakers

DRA analysis requires that you explicitly model protection at the substation. Because of this, a switch of type breaker or recloser must be defined as the first branch downstream of the source. If you violate this rule, you will get an error message: Invalid DRA Protection - Source is not properly protected by protective devices, or the first switching device is not a recloser or breaker. If you have a relay instead of a breaker protecting the substation, you must still classify this as a breaker for the DRA analysis to work properly.
9-5
Distribution Reliability Analysis Using DRA Protection Equipment and Switches
9.3.3 Specifying Switches

Switches are devices that can be manually or automatically operated after a fault condition. When a switch is specified, additional parameters are entered that supply the associated switch time, that is, the amount of time it takes for the switch to operate following a fault and the probability that the operation is successful. Manual switches should be modeled by specifying a switch type of "Manual" on the Switch Property sheet DRA tab. Switches can be declared automatic by setting the switch time equal to or less than the value of 0.1 and specifying an "Auto" switch type on the DRA tab. Branches of type switch (Switch type = "Manual", "Auto") are considered to be normally closed switches.
9.3.4 Specifying Fuses

Expulsion cutouts and current limiting fuses are used to provide one shot system protection that blow when the fault current downstream is sensed. Fuses are represented to the DRA analysis by specifying a switch type of "Fuse" in the DRA tab of the Switch Property sheet.
9.3.5 Specifying FuseSwitches

Previous versions of DRA allowed the user to have a construction type of FuseSwitch. If you wish to continue to use this branch type, you should specify the construction type and the reliability parameters in your construction dictionary. The present DRA in PSS/ADEPT will recognize this type of construction and place a switch with a protection symbol on the diagram if you are licensed for DRA. If you choose FuseSwitch, the DRA tab will show a switch type of "Fuse". If your *.dat file has a FuseSwitch and it is not in the construction dictionary, the values for the DRA tab will be set to 999.
9.3.6 Specifying Tie Switches

Tie switches are modeled in DRA as switches that have normal behavior. Tie switches should be entered into the switch branch as a tie switch by checking the appropriate box on the Switch Property sheet and specifying a switch type of "Tie" in the DRA tab. Branches specified as tie switches (Switch type = "Tie switch") are considered to be normally open and should be located at dead ends in the network.
9-6
Distribution Reliability Analysis Specifying Reliability Parameters and Device Types
9.4 Specifying Reliability Parameters and Device Types

Reliability parameters can be supplied to the DRA analysis module by entering reliability information directly on the Network Item Property sheet, or by retrieving the information from the construction dictionary. The following table (Table 9-1) illustrates data items that are used by the DRA analysis: Sustained failure rate per year (). Mean time to repair (MTTR). Mean time to switch (MTTS). Probability of successful switching (PSS) (for use in future releases. Momentary failure rate per year (M) (for use in future releases). Table 9-1. Data Item Requirements for DRA
Network Item Line Switch Tie Switch Fuse Breaker Recloser Sectionalizer Series Capacitor/Reactor Transformer R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R MTTR X R R R R R R X X MTTS X R R R R R R X X PSS P P P P P P P P P M
R = Required, X = Not applicable, P = Not required
For each network branch item, DRA will consider the effects of installing protection equipment, such as breakers, reclosers, sectionalizers, fuses and switches. Table 9-2 provides some sample reliability data not to be used as actual data but to show relative numbers. Table 9-2. Sample Reliability Data
Component Line Switch Tie Switch Fuse Transformer Breaker Recloser 0.5 .03 .03 .01 .001 .03 .03 3 10 10 1 3 12 12 MTTR 0 2 2 0 0 1 1 MTTS 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 PSS 0.05 0 0 0 0 0 0 M
9-7
9.4.1 Entering Reliability Parameters: Default

You can enter default reliability parameters for each branch device using the Default Item Property sheets. Whenever you add a network item to the diagram, these defaults are used to set the properties for the newly created item. To enter default reliability parameters: 1. In the Tree View, double-click the Default Items label or click on the corresponding "+" box to expand the item tree. The Tree View will similarly expand from whats shown in Figure 9-2 to what is shown in Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-2. Default Items Tree View
9-8
Figure 9-3. Default Items Expanded Tree View
9-9
2. Double-click on the item that you wish to modify (Line in this example). A default properties sheet will appear for the type of network item selected. Figure 9-4 displays the Default Line Properties sheet for the selected Line item.
Figure 9-4. Default Line Properties Sheet
9-10
3. On the Main tab, either select a construction type from the construction dictionary by selecting an item from the drop down list, or by manually entering a name in the field provided. If the specified construction type name corresponds to an entry in the construction dictionary then the Impedance and Ratings fields are grayed out and not editable. Otherwise, if a name is manually entered that does not correspond to an entry in the construction dictionary and then the fields will be made editable as shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5. Default Line Properties Sheet - Modifying the Construction Type
9-11
4. Select the DRA tab. If the selected construction type corresponded to an entry in the construction dictionary, then the fields will be grayed out as shown in Figure 9-6. These values must be modified within the construction dictionary.
Figure 9-6. Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, from the Construction Dictionary
9-12
Similarly, if the specified construction type does not correspond to an entry in the construction dictionary, then the fields will be editable as shown in Figure 9-7. These values can be modified directly.
Figure 9-7. Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, New Values for the Reliability Parameters 5. Select OK to return to the Tree View. When a new line is added, the default reliability parameters, specified in the previous step will be associated with the newly added line. Default reliability parameters may be specified for any branch type including switches, transformers, and series capacitors/reactors.
9-13
9.4.2 Entering Reliability Parameters: Property Sheet

1. Double-click on the network item in the Diagram View or Tree View to view its property sheet. The Line Property sheet is shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8. Line Property Sheet: Main Tab 2. Select and modify the construction type.
9-14
3. Select the DRA tab. If the previously specified construction type does not correspond to an entry in the construction dictionary then the reliability parameter fields will be set to 999. New reliability parameter values can be entered directly into the fields, as shown in Figure 9-9.
Figure 9-9. Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab, New Values for Reliability Parameters The values entered are only for the device that was selected and can only be stored in the native ADEPT file (*.adp) or in the network dump (Hub) file (*.dmp). If you wish to use the specified construction type and corresponding reliability parameters again, it is recommended that you create a specific entry in the construction dictionary. If the previously specified construction type corresponds to an entry in the construction dictionary, then the reliability parameters will be obtained directly from the construction dictionary and the fields will be grayed out and not editable. Refer to Section 9.4.3 for further information on modifying these values.
9-15
The following fields may or may not be present depending on the device property sheet selected. Switch type: This is only used and shown on the Switch Property sheet. Select from the available list one of the following available devices: Tie: Tie switches are modeled as open switches having normal switch behavior. Tie switches in the network are specified by checking the box labeled Tie Switch on the General tab. To model a tie switch in DRA, select Open status and check the Tie Switch box. On the DRA tab, select Tie. Automatic tie switches can be modeled by setting the switch time to a value less than or equal to 0.1. Manual: Specify this type for disconnects, bypass switches, airbrakes, load break switches or any other switches that must be operated by a line crew. Auto: Specify this type for motorized or automatic switches that do not require a line crew to operate. Additionally, specify a switch time less than or equal to 0.l to classify automatic operation. Fuse: Specify this type for expulsion cutouts (fuses) and current limiting fuses used to provide one shot system protection. Recloser: Specify this type for devices that automatically reclose during or after a fault condition. Reclosers will repeatedly interrupt fault current until the fault is cleared or the device locks out. Sectionalizer: Specify this type for devices that do not have the ability to interrupt fault current such as sectionalizers. Breaker: A breaker is an automatic relosing device that is normally used in DRA to protect the substation. In DRA, the substation breaker plays an important role in calculating reliability indices. Because of this, a switch of type breaker must be defined as the first branch downstream of the source. When a switch type of breaker, fuse, recloser, or sectionalizer is specified in a file, a protection symbol will be placed on the branch indicating the location of a piece of protection equipment. If you have a license to the optional protection and coordination module, you can view the Protection Equipment Property sheet by double clicking on the protection equipment symbol. If you do not have a license to the protection and coordination module, the symbol is used to indicate a piece of protection equipment to the DRA analysis and is not editable. Sustained failure rate: Enter the sustained failure rate of the item per unit length per unit time. Momentary failure rate: Enter the momentary failure rate of the item per unit length per unit time. Mean time to repair: Enter the mean time to repair the failed network item (hours). Mean time to switch: Enter the mean time to switch (hours). This is the time it takes for the switch to operate. If this time is less than or equal to 0.1 DRA will consider this an automatic or motorized switch. This field is applicable to the Switch Property sheet only. Probability of successful switch: Enter the probability that the switch will be operated successfully. This value is specified between 0 and 1 with 1 indicating 100% probability and 0 indicating 0% probability. This field is applicable to the Switch Property sheet only. 4. Select OK to return to the diagram.
9-16
9.4.3 Entering Reliability Parameters: Construction Dictionary

Reliability parameters can be specified for any branch type in conjunction with the construction dictionary file using a reliability record. The reliability parameters are indicated in the construction dictionary by a line starting with a "*R". Appendix B, Section B.2.1 contains a description of the reliability parameters that need to be specified and their associated formats. DRA can also recognize several reserved word construction types when a file is initially imported into PSS/ADEPT. By using these reserved words you can identify particular switch types to the DRA analysis. Specifying a construction type that is a reserved word in a supported PSS/ADEPT file format causes the switch type on the DRA tab to be updated when the file is imported. Reserved words map to a DRA switch type as shown in Table 9-3. Table 9-3. Construction Type Mapping
Construction Type BREAKER FUSE RECLOSER FUSESWITCH Maps To DRA Switch Type Breaker Fuse Recloser Fuse
A reliability record in the construction dictionary that is specified with a switch time less than or equal to 0.1 will be automatically set to a switch type of Auto.
9-17
To specify reliability parameters from the construction dictionary: 1. Select the construction type from drop down list shown on the Main tab (Figure 9-10).
Figure 9-10. Selecting a Construction Type
9-18
2. Click the DRA tab to view the associated reliability parameters. In this case the values will appear disabled (grayed-out) indicating that the parameters were obtained directly from the construction dictionary (Figure 9-11).
Figure 9-11. DRA Tab Indicating Parameters Obtained from Dictionary 3. Select OK to return to the diagram.
9.4.4 Entering Reliability Parameters: Static Loads

In previous revisions of PSS/ADEPT, the number of customers served at a load was determined by the value specified for kW per customer located on the DRA tab in Analysis>Options. Internally, the number of customers served by the loads was determined by dividing the kW of each load by the kW per customer. For example, a 300 kW load representing one customer with a kW per customer value equal to 3, would yield 100 as the total number of customers served. In this case, the desired outcome of one customer served, would not be achieved. The program can determine the number of customers served by an individual load by using either a global kW per customer value as specified in Analysis>Options, a kW per customer value for an individual or any group of selected loads. Additionally, the actual number of customers for an individual or any group of selected loads can be directly entered if the value is known. By default, the Use Global kW/customer option will be automatically selected unless the default static load properties have been previously modified.
9-19
It is not likely that all loads will have the same customer density on the distribution circuit. For a selected static load, an over-ride of the global kW per customer value is provided to offer flexibility in establishing the number of customers served at a static load. For the unbalanced loads, the total number of customer served at the load is equal to the sum of the phases. To change the kW per customer value used to determine the number of customers served: 1. Select a load or group of loads in either the Diagram or Network View. 2. Double-click on the static load in the Diagram View or Network View to view its property sheet. 3. Select either Balanced or Unbalanced on the Main tab and enter the appropriate kW and kvar values. 4. Click the DRA tab and select kW per customer. 5. Enter the kW per customer value for each phase (unbalanced) or the total three phase value (balanced). 6. Select OK. If the number of customers served by a load is already known, this can be represented by choosing to directly enter the number of customers served for a selected static load. To directly enter the number of customers served for an individual or selected group of loads: 1. Select a load or group of loads in either the Diagram or Network View. 2. Double-click on the static load in the Diagram View or Network View to view its property sheet. 3. Select either Balanced or Unbalanced on the Main tab and enter the appropriate kW and kvar values. 4. Click the DRA tab and select Number of Customers Served. 5. Enter the number of customers served for each phase (unbalanced) or the total three phase value (balanced). 6. Select OK. For unbalanced loads, the total number of customer served at the load is equal to the sum of the values specified at each phase.
9-20
Distribution Reliability Analysis Network and Analysis Limitations
Figure 9-12. Static Load Property Sheet: DRA Tab The current DRA module does not recognize or use MWH loads to calculate reliability indices.
9.5 Network and Analysis Limitations

The following network limitations are imposed by the DRA analysis: Any network loops in the system must be opened. The supplementary dictionary previously used with PSS/U is not supported. The command line mode of operation is not supported. Economic analysis is not yet supported.
9-21
Distribution Reliability Analysis Setting DRA Analysis Options
9.6 Setting DRA Analysis Options

PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the kW hours per customer and reliability target indices used for comparison following an analysis. To set these options: 1. Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu and click the DRA tab. The DRA Analysis Options Property sheet will be displayed (Figure 9-13).
Figure 9-13. DRA Analysis Options Property Sheet 2. Enter the DRA options you want for the analysis: kW per customer: Enter the number of kW per customer to use at each load point. DRA will calculate the number of customers by dividing this value into the kW load specified at a static load in the network. The default kW per customer value is 3. Solution target value (SAIDI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against the calculated index for SAIDI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target value you specify.
9-22
Distribution Reliability Analysis Setting DRA Analysis Options
Solution target value (SAIFI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against the calculated index for SAIFI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target value you specify. Solution target value (CAIDI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against the calculated index for CAIDI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target value you specify. Solution target value (CAIFI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against the calculated index for CAIFI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target value you specify. Display messages in progress window: Check the box to display error and general messages to the progress window. 3. Select OK to return to the diagram.
9-23
Distribution Reliability Analysis Setting DRA Analysis Result Display Options
9.7 Setting DRA Analysis Result Display Options

DRA result options allow you to format and specify what results are displayed on your network diagram. The result display options for DRA are located on the DRA tab in the Tree View. When selected, the results are updated on the diagram immediately. DRA result options are saved as a program setting, meaning the application will remember the previous settings each time the program starts until they are subsequently modified. After a DRA analysis, the system results for all indices and their target values will be displayed on the diagram. Select the Show Results button to view all the selected DRA analysis results on the diagram. To change the settings for results: 1. In the Tree View, select the DRA tab. DRA result options are displayed (Figure 9-14).
Figure 9-14. DRA Result Options
9-24
Distribution Reliability Analysis Setting DRA Analysis Result Display Options
2. Select/modify the values according to your desired preferences: Loads: Customers served (Cs): Check this box to display the number of customers served at each static load. Customers interrupted (Ci): Check this box to display the number of customers interrupted at each static load.
Color Coding: Use DRA colors: Check this box to specify DRA color-coding following an analysis. Choosing this option will automatically set your diagram color-coding mode to "Branches by DRA target comparison". SAIFI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated SAIFI index and the target value specified for SAIFI in the DRA analysis options. SAIDI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated SAIDI index and the target value specified for SAIDI in the DRA analysis options. CAIFI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated CAIFI index and the target value specified for CAIFI in the DRA analysis options. CAIDI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated CAIDI index and the target value specified for CAIDI in the DRA analysis options. <50%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 50% of the target value specified in the analysis options. <75%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 75% of the target value specified in the analysis options. <100%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 100% of the target value specified in the analysis options. <125%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 125% of the target value specified in the analysis options. >125%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that are equal to or above 125% of the target value specified in the analysis options.
Enable Display: SAIFI: Check this box to show the calculated value for SAIFI for each protection zone on the diagram. SAIDI: Check this box to show the calculated value for SAIDI for each protection zone on the diagram. CAIDI: Check this box to show the calculated value for CAIDI for each protection zone on the diagram. CAIFI: Check this box to show the calculated value for CAIFI for each protection zone on the diagram.
9-25
Distribution Reliability Analysis Performing a DRA Analysis
9.8 Performing a DRA Analysis

To perform a DRA analysis on the network, do one of the following: choose Analysis>DRA from the Main menu, or, click the DRA calculation button on the Analysis Toolbar.
The results of the DRA analysis will be displayed on the diagram according to the results display options you specified. A text report is available that contains reliability indices, number of customers served and number of customers interrupted. To obtain a DRA report, select Report>Distribution Reliability Analysis from the Main Menu.
9.9 Calculating Reliability Indices: Application Examples

Reliability profiles of each protection zone using sustained interruption frequency and outage duration are determined during reliability analysis. These values are the basis for all non-storm related reliability indices. Utility annual outage reports summarize the reliability of the system during the last year. This is typically done by calculating reliability index values, such as SAIDI and SAIFI, for various parts of the system. It is important to note that these indices do not usually include interruptions that have occurred during major outage events such as storms.
9.9.1 Using DRA for Basic Historical Analysis

A basic historical analysis assumes that all faults occurring on a system are mutually exclusive events. Any fault occurring on the circuit will only operate the closest upstream device. Proper coordination of the devices can be verified with the Protection and Coordination module provided as an option in PSS/ADEPT. A basic historical analysis will compute the following expected values for each section on a system: 1. Number of annual sustained interruptions per customer served (SAIFI) 2. Total annual interruption duration per customer served by the circuit (SAIDI) 3. Number of annual sustained interruptions per customer served (CAIFI) 4. Average interruption duration per customer interrupted (CAIDI) PSS/ADEPT requires the following data to perform the computations: 1. Outage (failure) rate for each section of the circuit (events/per unit length). 2. Outage (failure) duration for each section of the circuit (total time to restore in hours) 3. The average kW per customer served by the circuit DRA assumes that a fault condition includes the following sequence of events: 1. A fault occurs on the system. 2. A protective device (breaker, recloser, fuse, etc.) will operate. Ideally this will be the nearest upstream device to the fault. This will interrupt all customers downstream of the device. The user should be aware that due to a malfunction or miscoordination, a protection device further upstream may operate. 3. A crew is dispatched to locate the fault and make repairs. Once the repairs are complete, service is restored.
9-26
Distribution Reliability Analysis Calculating Reliability Indices: Application Examples
9.9.2 Example of Basic Analysis

To illustrate a calculation for reliability, consider the simple distribution system shown in Figure 915. The diagram consists of a recloser (B1), three fuses (F1, F2, F3) and three customer groups (C1, C2, C3, and C4). Assume that the recloser (B1) has instantaneous settings specified. To keep this simple, assume that no outages have occurred on any branch or device. The reliability parameters for all equipment shown equals zero. All of the indices will have a value of 0.0. Assume that the global kw per customer is used for analysis and the value is equal to 3.
Figure 9-15. Example of a Simple Distribution System Assume that a fault occurs somewhere on the line section Line9 (length = 2 units) which is supplying the load C2 (Figure 9-16).
Figure 9-16. Fault at Line9
9-27
The following events will occur: 1. Since B1 has instantaneous settings, it will instantaneously trip to allow the fault to clear itself. Customer groups C1, C2, C3, and C4 will experience a momentary interruption. 2. The fault does not clear and F2 operates, causing a sustained interruption to customers in group C2. The customers call the utility. 3. A crew is dispatched, locates the problem, makes the necessary repairs, and restores power to C2. The total elapsed time is 1 hour and 45 minutes. If this is the only fault to occur in this line section, the outage rate is 0.5, and the duration is 1.75 hours. This would imply that the system shown would have the following indices: SAIFI SAIDI CAIFI CAIDI = = = = 0.17 0.29 1.00 1.75
Assume that a month later, a fault occurs on the same circuit somewhere on line section Line3 (length = 4.0 units), indicated in Figure 9-17.
Figure 9-17. Fault at Line3 The following events will occur: 1. Since B1 has instantaneous settings, it will instantaneously trip to allow the fault to clear itself. Customer groups C1, C2, C3, and C4 will experience a momentary interruption. 2. The fault does not clear after two more operations and B1 opens, causing a sustained interruption to customer groups C1, C2, C3, and C4. The customers call the Utility. 3. A crew is dispatched, locates the problem, makes the necessary repairs, and restores power to the circuit. Total elapsed time is 3 hours and 30 minutes.
9-28
If this is the only fault to occur in this line section, the outage rate is 0.25, and the duration is 3.5 hours. This event does not impact the outage rate or duration for the previous case. It does however impact the reliability indices, which will now include both events. SAIFI SAIDI CAIFI CAIDI = = = = 1.17 3.79 1.17 3.25
The analysis becomes more complicated the larger the circuit and the more protection devices (zones) it contains. DRA is designed to perform the calculations on the larger, more complicated systems. This example illustrates the basic concepts used by DRA when analyzing the reliability of a distribution system in non-storm conditions. In summary, the basic analysis performed by DRA has the following properties: Assumes that all faults are mutually exclusive events. Determines the effect of downstream fault isolation. Includes the effect of upstream protection device operation.
9.9.3 Example of Predictive Analysis

The reliability of a system is impacted by changes due to serving new loads or circuit upgrades. The DRA option will allow the user to calculate the impact on the reliability indices of proposed construction (Figure 9-18). Assume that the mainline of the circuit will be extended to serve a new customer, C5. The new line is to serve new customers with a demand of 200 kW, is 1.8 units long and has an assumed outage rate of 0.3 and duration of 2 hours. What is the impact on the reliability indices?
Figure 9-18. Expansion of the Circuit Mainline Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International 9-29
A permanent fault in this new section will result in the loss of power to all customers served. Based upon the assumed reliability parameters, this addition will have the following results: SAIFI SAIDI CAIFI CAIDI = = = = 1.68 4.83 1.68 2.87
Figure 9-19. DRA Results Shown with Text Labels and Color-Coding
9-30
Add a protection device downstream of node 5, between node 5 and node 9, and determine the impact on the indices.
Figure 9-20. Expansion of the Circuit Mainline with Protection Added
9-31
A permanent fault in this new section will result in the loss of power to only the new customers served. Based upon the assumed reliability parameters, this addition will have the following results: SAIFI SAIDI CAIFI CAIDI = = = = 1.22 3.90 1.22 3.50
Figure 9-21. DRA Results with New Protection Device Added
9-32
In Figure 9-21, the global kw per customer command was used. For the circuit shown in Figure 920, we have changed the analysis parameters to reflect the following customer served values of; C1 = 100; C2 = 150; C3 = 120; C4 = 50; and C5 = 40. This will change the calculated values of the reliability indices. The results are shown in the figure below.
Figure 9-22. DRA Results with Specified Customers Served
9-33
9-34
Appendix A
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT
A.1 Transformer Modeling
A.1.1 Transformer Changes From PSS/U to PSS/ADEPT
Transformer modeling in PSS/ADEPT is on a more physical basis than that in PSS/U. In PSS/ADEPT, the actual transformer windings are modeled making it easier to change the transformer by simply specifying the windings present. In addition, PSS/ADEPT has no restrictions on loops or parallel branches; therefore, in a three-phase branch it is possible to have one phase be a regulating transformer, one phase a switch, and the other phase a line (although the user may not want to connect the network this way). The increased power and flexibility in PSS/ADEPT causes some restrictions when sending data back and forth between PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U. Here, Siemens PTI has attempted to provide guidelines on modeling transformers in PSS/ADEPT and trading the transformers back and forth between the two versions of the program.
A.1.2 Transformers in PSS/ADEPT

The transformers in PSS/ADEPT are: Wye-wye. Wye-delta (30). Delta-wye (30). Delta-delta. Wye-connected autoregulator. Delta-connected autoregulator. Center-tapped delta. Center-tapped wye (30). Wye-wye with phase shift. Wye-connected autotransformer. Z Wye (30). Z Wye (150).
A-1
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT Transformer Modeling
Table A-1. PSS/ADEPT Transformer Types

Transformer YY Phase ABC Drawing
AB
Y +30
ABC
AB
A-2
Table A-1. PSS/ADEPT Transformer Types (Cont.)

Transformer Y +30 Phase ABC Drawing
AB
ABC
AB
A-3

Transformer Y conn Auto Reg Phase ABC Drawing
AB
A-4

Transformer conn Auto Phase ABC Drawing
AB (CA open)
A-5
A.1.3 Reading Transformers From PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT
A.1.3.1 Conversion of Transformer Types
Due to modeling restrictions that exist in PSS/U, there are some special transformer types; the open delta auto regulator (Type 4, 5, or 6), the line-to-line auto regulator (Type 7, 8, or 9) and the line-toneutral auto regulator (Type 13, 14, or 15). The modeling restrictions have been removed in PSS/ADEPT; the above nine transformers can be modeled in PSS/ADEPT using the wye-wye, wyedelta, delta-wye, delta-delta, delta-connected regulator, or wye-connected regulator (with sometimes a switch in parallel). Therefore, when a Type 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 13, 14, or 15 transformer is encountered in a raw data file, it is converted to one of the PSS/ADEPT types. The conversions for all transformers read into PSS/ADEPT from a raw data file are shown in Table A-2. Table A-2. Conversion of Transformers from PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT
PSS/U Type 1 PSS/U Name Wye-wye Phase Any PSS/ADEPT Name Wye-wye Phase Comments
Same This transformer matches up directly between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT for any phasing. ABC AB Exact match. Approximate match; PSS/ADEPT removes the phase C (C to A) winding on both sides of the transformer, while PSS/U does not remove any of the transformer windings. See comment for AB phasing above. See comment for AB phasing above. Approximate match; PSS/ADEPT removes the phase B (B to C) and C (C to A) windings on both sides of the transformer, while PSS/U does not remove any of the transformer windings. See comment for A phasing above. See comment for A phasing above. Exact match. Approximate match; PSS/ADEPT removes the phase C (C to A) winding on both sides of the transformer, while PSS/U does not remove any of the transformer windings. See comment for AB phasing above. See comment for AB phasing above Approximate match; PSS/ADEPT removes the phase B (B to C) and C (C to A) windings on both sides of the transformer, while PSS/U does not remove any of the transformer windings. See comment for A phasing above. See comment for A phasing above.
2 2
Wye-delta (30) Wye-delta (30)
ABC AB
Wye-delta (30) Wye-delta (30)
2 2 2
Wye-delta (30) Wye-delta (30) Wye-delta (30)
BC CA A
Wye-delta (30) Wye-delta (30) Wye-delta (30)
BC CA A
2 2 3 3
Wye-delta (30) Wye-delta (30) Delta-wye (30) Delta-wye (30)
B C ABC AB
Wye-delta (30) Wye-delta (30) Delta-wye (30) Delta-wye (30)
B C ABC AB
3 3 3
Delta-wye (30) Delta-wye (30) Delta-wye (30)
BC CA A
Delta-wye (30) Delta-wye (30) Delta-wye (30)
BC CA A
3 3
Delta-wye (30) Delta-wye (30)
B C
Delta-wye (30) Delta-wye (30)
B C
A-6
Table A-2. Conversion of Transformers from PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT (Cont.)
PSS/U Type 4 PSS/U Name Open delta regulator AB open Phase Any PSS/ADEPT Name Delta-connected auto regulator Phase Comments
BC or In PSS/U, the open delta auto regulator is AB inherently a three-phase device. Its approxiopen mate corresponding model in PSS/ADEPT is the delta-connected auto regulator with phases BC specified (A to B open). When reading a Type 4 transformer, phasing specified in the PSS/U raw data file is ignored and phasing is selected to make the same phase go straight through in both PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT. CA See comment for AB phasing above or BC open. See comment for AB phasing above or CA open. Phase ABV or AB not supported in PSS/ADEPT. These phasings are modeled with parallel switches. See comment for A phasing above.
Open delta regulator BC open Open delta regulator CA open Phase AB line-to-line auto regulator Phase BC line-to-line auto regulator Phase CA line-to-line auto regulator Delta-connected auto regulator
Any
Delta-connected auto regulator Delta-connected auto regulator Delta-connected auto regulator Delta-connected auto regulator Delta-connected auto regulator Delta-connected auto regulator
Any
AB
Any
Any
Any
See comment for A phasing above.
10
Any
ABC
In PSS/U, Type 10 transformers are intended to be three-phase devices. Answers obtained when a device is not specified as three-phase are not what the user would expect. With this conversion, Siemens PTI will enforce the three-phase requirement.
11
Delta-delta
Any
Delta-delta
Same In PSS/U, Type 11 transformers are intended to be three-phase devices. Answers obtained when a device is not specified as three-phase will be different than the results obtained from PSS/ADEPT. A This is a direct-conversion transformer. Select the same phasing in PSS/ADEPT as in the raw data file. Similar comments as for Types 7, 8, and 9. Similar comments as for Types 7, 8, and 9. Similar comments as for Types 7, 8, and 9.
12
Wye-connected auto regulator AN auto BN auto CN auto
Any
Wye-connected auto regulator Wye-connected auto regulator Wye-connected auto regulator Wye-connected auto regulator
13 14 15
Any Any Any
A B C
A-7
A.1.3.2 Calculation of Transformer Grounding Impedance

At PSS/ADEPT-5.0, transformer properties will include grounding impedance and leakage impedance with zero-sequence impedance being converted to the appropriate grounding impedance based on the specification of postive and zero-sequence impedance in the raw data file or previous PSS/ADEPT file. The value specified for the positive-sequence impedance is used as the leakage impedance of the transformer. The grounding impedance is in ohms determined as follows: Z0 is zero-sequence impedance, pu. Z1 is positive-sequence impedance, pu. 1000 V Z base = -----------------------Rating
2
V is phase-to-ground voltage in kV. Rating is per phase in kVA. Z0 Z1 Z g = ------------------- Z base 3 Wye connected transformers: Zg is split between the FROM and TO sides of the transformer. Wye-delta connected transformers: Zg is determined for the FROM side of the transformer. Delta-wye connected transformers and wye auto regulators: Zg is determined for the TO side of the transformer. Delta-delta connected transformers and delta auto regulators: No grounding impedances are allowed and any difference in Z0 and Z1 is ignored.
A.1.4 Transformer Conversions Not Supported

Some transformers are not supported in the conversion between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT. As an example, consider the PSS/U Type 13 transformer, which is a three-phase branch with a wye-connected single-phase regulator in phase A and phases B and C going straight through. This transformer is easily modeled in either program version, selecting the Type 13 in PSS/U or by selecting a wye-connected regulator with A phasing in PSS/ADEPT and then placing a two-phase switch in parallel. However, the conversion is not supported. When the Type 13 transformer is read into PSS/ADEPT from a raw data file, it will be modeled only by the single-phase regulator, the parallel switch will not be placed. When the transformer is written back to a new raw data file, it will be given a PSS/U Type 12 with A phasing. Therefore, it is possible to read a raw data file into PSS/ADEPT and then immediately write back a raw data file that will have different transformer types than those in the original file. However, this will happen only for transformer configurations that are rarely used. Table A-3 shows the PSS/U transformers for which changes will occur on the read/write round trip. Figure A-1 illustrates the PSS/U transformer conversion during the PSS/ADEPT read/write operation.
A-8
Table A-3. PSS/U Transformer/Phasing That Will Be Changed After PSS/ADEPT Read Operation on Raw Data File
Original PSS/U Number 4, 5, 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 PSS/U Type Open delta auto regulator Phase AB line-to-line auto regulator Phase BC line-to-line auto regulator Phase CA line-to-line auto regulator Delta-connected auto regulator Delta-delta AN auto regulator BN auto regulator CN auto regulator Phasing Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any Any PSS/U Number 4, 5, 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 12 12 After Read Operation PSS/U Type Open delta auto regulator Phase AB line-to-line auto regulator Phase BC line-to-line auto regulator Phase CA line-to-line auto regulator Delta-connected auto regulator Delta-delta AN auto regulator Wye-connected auto regulator Wye-connected auto regulator Phasing ABC AB BC CA ABC ABC A B C
Original PSS/U PSS/U Original
PSS/ADEPT PSS/ADEPT
ADEPT Raw Data After Read/Write Operation Read Operation
ADEPT Raw Data After
Type 13
a a
Type 12
a
B b c
bN
98061
Figure A-1. Transformer Conversion During the Read Operation
A-9
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT Transformer Modeling Rules and Hints
A.2 Transformer Modeling Rules and Hints

A.2.1 Specifying Transformer Size
In both PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT, the transformer size (in kVA) is specified on a single-phase basis. The single-phase basis is used because PSS/ADEPT allows modeling of single-phase branches. In many cases, single-phase transformers are used. As an example, for a three-phase substation transformer with a total (three-phase) rating of 30 MVA, enter 10,000 for the rating in PSS/ADEPT. As another example, for a single-phase regulating transformer with a 500-kVA rating, enter 500 for the rating. This rating value (along with the winding voltage) is used only to calculate the base impedance for the transformer; use the manufacturer-supplied impedances. The rating value specified is not used to determine if the transformer is overloaded; that information is entered separately.
A.2.2 Transformer Impedance

For a two winding transformer, the manufacturer usually supplies the leakage reactance and winding resistances, which can be combined to get the leakage impedance. In general, both the positive- and zero-sequence transformer impedances should be set equal to this value. The exception is where there is a grounding impedance in a wye-connected winding; in this case, the zerosequence impedance should be increased by adding three times the grounding impedance (after the grounding impedance is converted to pu on the transformer base). If a wye-configured winding is ungrounded, simply set the zero-sequence impedance to a high value (e.g., 100 pu). Example: A 2-MVA (three-phase rating) transformer at an industrial site is 13.8-kV delta-connected on the utility side, and 4-kV wye-connected on the plant side (line-to-line voltages specified), with the plant voltage lagging 30. The transformer winding resistance is 0.005 pu and the leakage reactance is 0.045 pu. The transformer taps are on the delta side. There is a 4-ohm grounding resistor in the neutral of the wye winding. How is this transformer specified, and what positive- and zero-sequence impedances should be entered for this transformer? On the 4-kV side, the base impedance is:
4 - = 8 Z base = ----2
The grounding resistor is then 4/8 = 0.5 pu. Specify the transformer as: wye-delta (+30); 666.7 kVA; Z1 = 0.005 + j.045 pu; Z0 = 1.505 + j.045 pu. For wye-delta or delta-wye transformers, there is no need for any impedance adjustment because of the winding configuration. Assuming no grounding impedances in the wye windings, set the positive- and zero-sequence impedances equal. The transformer model itself will provide the correct behavior, blocking zero-sequence flow on the delta side of the transformer and shunting zerosequence currents to ground on the wye side.
A.2.3 Three-Winding Transformers

Presently, there are no three-winding transformer models in PSS/ADEPT. They can be easily modeled by decomposing the three-winding transformer into three two-winding transformers and a dummy node. For the three-winding transformer, the manufacturer should supply the leakage reactances X12, X13 and X23 between each pair of windings, along with the resistance in each winding. These resistance and reactance values can be combined to get the leakage impedance for each
A-10
pair of windings, commonly called Z12, Z13 and Z23. The impedance for each of the three transformers is then found as:
Z 12 + Z 13 Z 23 Z 1 = ----------------------------------------2 Z 12 + Z 23 Z 13 Z 2 = ----------------------------------------2 Z 13 + Z 23 Z 12 Z 3 = ----------------------------------------2

Figure A-2 represents the composition of a three-winding transformer into three two-winding transformers.
Node 1 Node 1
Node 2
Node 2
3 Node 3
Dummy Node
Node 3
98062
Figure A-2. Modeling of Three-Winding Transformer Assuming there are no grounding impedances, the positive- and zero-sequence impedance of each transformer is set equal to Z1, Z2, Z3, respectively. Often one of the three reactances will come out negative, which is no problem. Simply specify that transformer with the positive- and zero-sequence reactance equal to this negative value. Place the dummy node in the center and connect each of the three transformers to it. It does not matter what base voltage is selected for the dummy node; it is suggested that the base voltage of one of the three actual transformer nodes be used.
A.2.4 Three-Legged Core Transformers

For a wye-wye transformer wound on a three-legged core, zero-sequence flux will flow through the transformer case and/or out into the air around the transformer. A user may think the transformer zero-sequence impedance should be changed to account for the flux path diversion, however, that is not the way to model this type of transformer. The flux flowing through the case/air is a shunt effect, not a series impedance effect. The way to model the shunt effect is to place a delta tertiary in the transformer (i.e., use the three-winding transformer model with the added winding connected in delta). In fact, wye-wye three-legged core transformers are sometimes said to have "phantom" tertiaries.
A-11
To complete the three-winding model, Z12, Z13, and Z23 are needed. Z12 is just the leakage impedance of the transformer. Sometimes a manufacturer will also supply Z13 and Z23. Another possibility is that the manufacturer will supply the zero-sequence excitation current for the two windings, and the impedances over to the delta winding can be calculated from this current. If no information is available on the impedances, and the grounding effect must be modeled, set Z13 and Z23 in the 0.50 to 0.75 pu range. For each of the three transformers, set the zero-sequence impedance equal to the positive-sequence value (unless an adjustment of the zero-sequence impedance is needed because of grounding impedances).
A.2.5 Regulating Transformers

It can be tricky to specify the impedance for a regulating transformer, because at a tap setting of 1.0 there is a straight-through connection and the transformer has no impedance. To add to the complexity, the regulating transformer impedance at maximum boost is not the same as at maximum buck. Therefore, when the regulating transformer impedance is specified, an additional piece of information must be supplied: the condition at which the impedance was measured. In present versions of PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT, the average of the impedance at maximum boost and maximum buck is required. Suppose we call the impedance at maximum boost, Zmboost, and impedance at maximum buck, Zmbuck. The user must specify as input:
Z mboost + Z mbuck Z leak = -------------------------------------------------2

However, this impedance may not be the one viewed by the user; the manufacturer might specify the impedance at maximum boost, at maximum buck, at a particular tap setting, or even the average of all taps. The tabulation below shows how to convert the manufacturer-supplied value into the value required by PSS/ADEPT. The symbol, D, is the range of the transformer from nominal (for a 13.8-kV regulating transformer that had an adjustment range from 0.90 to 1.10 pu, D = 0.1). The symbol "a" represents the transformer tap setting (for the above transformer the tap ranges from 0.90, maximum buck, to 1.10, maximum boost).
Manufacturer-Supplied Value
PSS/ADEPT Value
Zleak, average of Zmboost and Zmbuck Zmboost , impedance at maximum boost
Zleak
1+ Z mboost -------------------2 (1 ) 1+ Z mbuck -------------------2 (1 ) a Za 1 + 2 -------------------- ----------------------2 2 ( a 1 ) ( 1 2 ) 1+ 3 Z avg ----------------------2 2 (1 )

2 2 2 2
Zmbuck, impedance at maximum buck
Za, impedance at tap position, a
Zavg, average impedance over all taps
A-12
The model in PSS/ADEPT causes the impedance to vary with tap position as it does in the real transformer. Set the zero-sequence impedance equal to the positive-sequence impedance unless there is a grounding impedance inserted (in a delta-configured regulator, the zero-sequence would always be equal to the positive-sequence value. In PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U, the rating for a regulating transformer is the total apparent power through the transformer. In a transformer specification sheet, the rating of the transformer is sometimes given as that of the series winding alone.
A.2.6 Grounding Transformers

Grounding transformers are often placed on power systems either to prevent voltage shifts when a phase-to-ground fault occurs, or to provide a zero-sequence current path. A grounding transformer is a shunt device, since it connects from a single node to ground. The most common grounding transformer is the zig-zag, although the Scott T connection can also be used. In PSS/ADEPT, grounding transformers are not currently implemented. However, it is easy to model the grounding effect. Near the node at which the user wishes to place a grounding transformer, a dummy node must be made. Connect a wye-delta transformer between the two nodes with the delta side of the transformer connected to the dummy node. Set the transformer rating of the wye-delta equal to that of the zig-zag (or whatever transformer is being modeled), and set the positive- and zero-sequence impedances of the wye-delta the same and equal to the impedance of the zig-zag. The wye-delta transformer will now act exactly as the zig-zag does.
A.2.7 Autotransformers
Presently, there are no autotransformer models in PSS/ADEPT. Autotransformers are invariably wye connected, and they can be modeled using the wye-wye transformer. External to the transformer, all voltages and currents will be the same as if an actual autotransformer model had been used. The autotransformer neutral current will not be modeled, but neutral currents are not available to the user of any of the transformer models. For the case when the autotransformer has a grounding impedance in it, it can be placed in either winding of the wye-wye transformer. Consider T to be the ratio of the high-side nominal voltage to the low-side nominal voltage, and Zg the grounding impedance (ohm) inserted at the neutral of the autotransformer. In the wye-wye transformer, the user can either insert (T-1)2 Zg in the neutral of the high-side winding, or (T-1)2 Zg/T2 in the neutral of the low-voltage winding. Example: A 69-kV to 34.5-kV autotransformer is to be modeled. There is a 4-ohm grounding resistance in the neutral of the autotransformer. How should it be modeled as a wye-wye transformer? For this autotransformer, T = 69/34.5 = 2.0. Use a wye-wye transformer with a primary winding voltage of 69 kV and a secondary winding voltage of 34.5 kV. The grounding impedance can be placed in either winding. On the high side, make the grounding resistance equal to 4 ohm; or, if the user wishes to place the grounding resistor in the low-side winding, make it 1 ohm. After inserting the grounding resistance in the desired winding, proceed to calculate the positive- and zero-sequence impedances as would normally be done for the transformer (i.e., set the positive-sequence impedance equal to the transformer leakage impedance specified by the manufacturer and add three times the grounding resistance, after converting to pu, to get the zero-sequence impedance).
A-13
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT Machine Modeling
A.3 Machine Modeling

There are three aspects of machines that need to be discussed, namely their modeling and behavior during load flow, short circuit, and motor starting conditions. There are two basic machines modeled in PSS/ADEPT: three-phase synchronous and three-phase induction. Either machine can be a motor or a generator. Setting the real power positive for a machine results in a motor; set the real power negative to make it a generator. The synchronous and induction types are modeled quite differently, and are discussed separately below.
A.3.1 Synchronous Machines

In PSS/ADEPT, the machine size and terminal voltage is specified and are used to convert the pu impedance and var capability values into physical numbers. The real power is specified (positive for a motor, negative for a generator); this value is power at the terminals, not at the output shaft. The scheduled voltage is used to determine the reactive power output from the machine. The maximum and minimum reactive power limits are also specified on the property sheet by the user. To keep compatibility with PSS/U, the reference direction is out of the machine, with the maximum value generally being positive and the minimum value negative. On the property sheet, the var limit values are in pu and, as mentioned above, converted to physical values using the machine size.
A.3.1.1 Synchronous Machine Load Flow Behavior

During a load flow simulation, the synchronous machine is modeled as a three-phase internal source behind an impedance matrix, as shown in the drawing below. The internal source is balanced three-phase, positive sequence only. The internal source angle and magnitude are adjusted so the machine draws the specified real power and supplies the reactive power necessary to support the terminal voltage (within the machine reactive power capability).
Z Matrix
Terminals
Internal Source
98060
Although there is some interplay between the two at larger angles, the user can generally think of the internal source angle controlling the real power and the magnitude controlling the reactive power. In the real machine, these two values correspond to the internal machine angle and the field excitation. The impedance matrix uses the machine armature resistance, machine subtransient reactance, and machine zero-sequence impedance. Because the subtransient reactance is used, for heavy real power flow, the machine will not slip poles as soon as an actual machine will, which is essentially a source behind synchronous reactance. However, if the specified real power is large enough, the machine will slip poles even with the subtransient reactance in the matrix. In that case, the load flow will fail to converge. In other words, if the machine is grossly overloaded or if voltage at the machines terminals is seriously depressed, the load flow will not converge. Either case is abnormal and the machines should be taken out of service.
A-14
Even though the internal voltage of the machine is balanced positive sequence, the terminal voltage will not necessarily be so, if the rest of the network is unbalanced. The unbalanced terminal voltage calculated by PSS/ADEPT should match well with the actual voltage in the field, if the rest of the network is modeled accurately. The present synchronous machine model automatically adjusts the field excitation (internal source magnitude) during the load flow. There is no model for a synchronous motor with the field under manual control. As with a real machine, the PSS/ADEPT synchronous machine will run if only two phases are connected, or, if the machine zero-sequence impedance is small enough, will run even if only one phase is connected. The machine is modeled wye connected; if the user wishes to model a deltaconnected machine, the zero-sequence impedance must be very high (20 to 50 pu is suggested). Large synchronous machines with wye-connected armature windings are often grounded through a transformer, with the output of the transformer connected to a relay. The effect of the relay burden is a large grounding impedance, which the user models by specifying a high zero-sequence impedance of the machine. Therefore, it may be rare to find a synchronous machine with a small zerosequence impedance. In future versions of PSS/ADEPT, the machine grounding impedance will be specified separately; currently, the user must bundle it into the machine zero-sequence impedance. In the future, the user will also have a choice between wye- and delta-connected armature windings.
A.3.1.2 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Load Flow Calculations

The load flow results for the synchronous machine should be the same in both programs.
A.3.1.3 Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Behavior

For short circuit calculations, the synchronous machine is again modeled as an internal source behind the impedance matrix. But, unlike the load flow, during the short circuit simulation neither the angle or magnitude of the internal source is changed. The angle and magnitude are set to the value from the preceding load flow and left there. The user can designate whether subtransient or transient values are used in the impedance matrix. Use of the subtransient reactance gives the fault current immediately after the fault occurs and the transient impedance calculates the current a few cycles after the fault occurs (or maybe more than a few cycles after the fault occurrence if the machine has a high-speed exciter). The calculated short circuit current is the symmetrical value, no dc offset is included. The user can think of the short circuit machine model as being either the voltage e behind the armature resistance in series with the subtransient reactance or the voltage e behind the armature resistance in series with the transient reactance. As mentioned above, the source value e or e is calculated from the preceding load flow. The actual model is slightly more complicated than this because the impedance matrix also includes the zero and negative-sequence impedances. As during the load flow, the q-axis parameters are set equal to the d-axis values.
A.3.1.4 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Calculation Between PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U
Because the short circuit calculation technique in PSS/ADEPT is slightly different than that in PSS/U, there can be differences in results between the two programs when faults occur near synchronous machines. An example here will illustrate the difference. These calculations were done on the network in the raw data file "compare.dat," and the Machine Dictionary "compare.mot," which are included with the program and are in the example directory. In this network there is a synchronous machine at node "A1" and calculations will be made for a three-phase fault at this node. The subtransient machine reactance is .2 pu and that value must be manually set in PSS/ADEPT since there is now no link with the machine dictionary. The results are shown in Table A-4.
A-15
Table A-4. Synchronous Machine Short Circuit Calculation Results

Method PSS/U, MTSC PSS/U, LPSC PSS/ADEPT PSS/ADEPT Condition Xd and flat (only conditions available) Xd and flat Xd and var limits at 0.5, -0.5 Xd and var limits at 0.05, -0.05 Machine Current (A) 333 333 370 330
There are two short circuit routines in PSS/U: MTSC and LPSC. Both give the same results and operate on a flat network with all internal voltages (sources and machines) set to unity. LPSC has an option to partially consider nonflat conditions, but cannot be used on compare.dat because the network is not balanced. The machine fault current calculated by PSS/ADEPT is considerably higher (370 A). It is higher because PSS/ADEPT calculates the fault current for the actual system condition. In this network, the synchronous machine at node A1 is supplying considerable reactive power to try to hold its terminal voltage to schedule (1.0 pu). The result is a rather high internal voltage for the machine and a resulting large fault current. If the var limits for the machine are changed to a narrow range (as shown in the last line of Table A-4), then the machine will not supply as much reactive power, the internal voltage will be closer to unity, and the fault current results will be closer to those calculated by MTSC and LPSC. This illustrates the differences that may occur in synchronous machine fault currents between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT. The most important thing for the user to remember is that PSS/ADEPT calculates fault currents for the network conditions that exist after a load flow simulation is done.
A.3.1.5 Synchronous Machine Starting in PSS/ADEPT

There are two aspects to discuss when considering machine starting and synchronous machines: one is modeling the machine(s) being started, and the second is modeling other synchronous machines that are already running at the time the motor starting simulation takes place. Consider the running machines first; during the motor start simulation, a distinction is made between motors and generators. Running synchronous motors are simply modeled the same way they are during a load flow, and supply no current to help start the machine being started. This is equivalent to assuming that the running synchronous motors do not have high-speed control of the field excitation. However, for running synchronous generators it is assumed that high-speed control of field excitation is available, and the running synchronous generators are modeled as a source behind transient reactance, just as they would have been during the short circuit simulation if the transient option were selected. Immediately after a motor is started, the running machines could be modeled as sources behind the subtransient reactance, but this effect passes quickly and the greatest dip happens when the transient impedance is used. If the running synchronous generators do not have fast exciters, and the user does not wish them to help the machine(s) being started, take these running machines out of service before doing the starting calculation, or convert them to static loads. The synchronous machine being started is represented simply by the locked rotor impedance. For a synchronous machine started at full voltage the locked rotor impedance is essentially the series combination of the armature resistance and the subtransient reactance, which means the synchronous machine is being started as an induction machine. The full voltage starting may be used for small synchronous machines; for larger machines, different starting arrangements are often used (including series impedance or start wye run delta) and these methods can be modeled by changing the locked rotor impedance in the dictionary to an appropriate value.
A-16
A common way to start large machines is with an autotransformer; on the property sheet of each synchronous machine, the autotransformer starting method is offered. The user puts in the value of the starting tap and the transformer leakage impedance. The size of the starting transformer is assumed to be the same as the machine size. Since transformer sizes in PSS/ADEPT are specified per phase, and machines sizes are specified three phase. If desired, the user can think of the transformer size per phase as being 1/3 of the machine size. Some discussion of the starting transformer impedance is in order. The value specified is assumed by PSS/ADEPT to be the impedance at a tap setting of 0.65. The impedance of the transformer is a function of tap position, and actually goes to zero at a tap of unity, since the connection to the machine is straight through. If we call T the tap position and Z0.65 the transformer leakage impedance when T = 0.65, then the impedance ZT at any tap position is given by:
4.449 Z 0.65 ( 1 T ) Z T = ---------------------------------------------------2 (T 1) + 1

Then, if the user has the impedance at any other tap, the value to enter is calculated as:
ZT [ 2 T ( T 1 ) + 1 ] Z 0.65 = -----------------------------------------------2 4.449 ( 1 T )

The table below shows various values calculated from the equation.
Impedance Tap 0.9 0.8 0.75 0.65 0.5
Value to Enter 18.4 Z0.90 3.82 Z0.80 2.25 Z0.75 Z0.65 0.45 Z0.5
A-17
A.3.1.6 Comparison of Synchronous Machine Starting Between PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U

If the synchronous machine is started without using a starting transformer, and the "poststart" option is selected in PSS/U (use transient reactance for running machines), then the voltage dip should be the same in both programs. However, if a starting transformer is used, results may be different between the two programs, because the starting transformer model in PSS/U does not include the change of impedance as a function of tap position; instead the value entered in the Machine Dictionary is used at all taps. Therefore, the PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT calculated voltage dip will agree only if the tap is set at 0.65. In PSS/U, if it is desired to start a machine without using the starting transformer; the transformer impedance listed in the dictionary should be set equal to zero. Again, the network in compare.dat and compare.mot will be used for illustration (in PSS/ADEPT the locked rotor impedance and transformer starting impedance were manually set to the values in the motor dictionary compare.mot). The table below shows the voltage magnitude at node A1 as the synchronous machine is being started.
Method PSS/ADEPT PSS/ADEPT PSS/ADEPT PSS/U PSS/U PSS/U PSS/ADEPT PSS/U
Condition No starting transformer Starting transformer, tap = 1.0 Starting transformer, tap = 0.65 Type 91, tap = 1 Type 91, tap = 0.65 Type 92, tap = 1 Starting transformer, tap = 0.80 Type 91, tap = 0.80
Node A1 Voltage (pu) 0.86 0.86 0.93 0.88 0.93 0.86 0.90 0.91
The synchronous machine at node A1 is a type 91, and in the motor dictionary for this machine the impedance of the starting transformer is listed as 0.0 + j0.05. The results for PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U agree when the starting transformer tap is set at 0.65, but they do not agree when the tap is set at 1.0 (PSS/ADEPT calculates 0.86 pu and PSS/U 0.88 pu). As mentioned above, the difference is that PSS/U does not model the change of transformer impedance with tap change. If the machine type is changed to 92 in PSS/U, then the results agree for a tap of 1.0. The reason is that the Machine Dictionary listing for the type 92 machine has the starting transformer impedance set at 0.0 + j0.0. A starting simulation is also shown with the transformer taps set at 0.8; the results between the two programs differ slightly, again because the simpler model in PSS/U is not modeling the change of transformer impedance.
A.3.2 PSS/ADEPT Induction Machine Model and Changes from PSS/U

A.3.2.1 PSS/ADEPT Induction Machine Model
The steady state (power flow) induction machine model in PSS/U was very basic, consisting of a load with constant real power and a power factor (pf) that varied with the machine terminal voltage. The pf versus terminal voltage curve was contained in the machine dictionary. The PSS/ADEPT model is more sophisticated; the pf, efficiency and machine slip all vary with changes in terminal voltage and/or machine loading conditions. Even though the PSS/ADEPT model is more sophisticated, it is easier to use than the older PSS/U machine. When should you use the PSS/ADEPT machine model? If you are interested in modeling the machine dependence on terminal voltage, are
A-18
doing short circuit simulations or are doing motor starting simulations, then the explicit machine model should be used. However, if you are doing only loadflow calculations, and a machine (or group of machines) merely represent a real and reactive load, and you are not interested in the variance of the motor load with system voltage, then you should probably use one of the simpler loads, like a constant power load. The PSS/ADEPT induction machine steady state positive-sequence model is shown in Figure A-3. This circuit, found in engineering textbooks, models a double cage machine, ra + jXa is the armature impedance, Xm is the magnetizing reactance, and rn/s and jXn are the rotor cage values, where n = 1 is the first cage and n = 2 refers to the second. On the Induction Machine Property sheet, the inner cage is the first cage and the outer cage is the second. The machine slip is s, where s = 0 at synchronous speed and s = 1 at standstill. The electrical input to the machine is: * S = Vt Ia And the shaft mechanical output power (neglecting friction and windage losses) is:
2 r1 2 r 2 - + I 2 ( s ) ---- (1 s) P m ( s ) = I 1 ( s ) --- s s
The same model, with s = 2, is used to model the machine negative sequence behavior. At present, all PSS/ADEPT induction machines are delta connected so zero-sequence parameters are not needed. Since Y connected induction machines are almost always ungrounded, the present PSS/ADEPT model can represent both Y and delta connections.
Figure A-3. Induction Machine Model
A.3.2.2 The Basic Method to Specify an Induction Machine

With the new PSS/ADEPT model, all that the user needs do to model an induction machine is: 1. Specify the machine mechanical size, rated terminal voltage, and design letter. The machine size can be either hp or kW, according to the flag on the Machine Property sheet. Although not required, it is expected that hp units will be used for machines built according to NEMA standard MG-1 and kW units for machines built under IEC standard 34. For the machine size either units, hp or kW refer to the machine mechanical size; thus a 200 hp machine with the hp units selected is exactly the same as a 149 kW
A-19
machine with the kW units selected. The design letters will be discussed in the next section. 2. Specify the machine loading, either the electrical real power input (units of kW) or the shaft power output in hp or kW, again according to the setting of the flag on the property sheet. Note again that a shaft power of output of 200 hp with the flag set to hp is the same as a shaft power output of 149 kW with the flag set to kW units.
A.3.2.3 The Available Induction Machine Designs A.3.2.3.1 NEMA Designs

Induction machines designed and constructed under the NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association, http://www.nema.org/) MG-1 standard (an condensed version of the standard, MG 12000, is available free in pdf format from the NEMA website) have a set of designs, designated by a letter. On some machines the design letter is shown on the machine nameplate. Within each design classification there are other codes and classes, such as locked rotor codes and insulation classes. There are a variety of manufacturers that produce NEMA design machines. In PSS/ADEPT, NEMA A, B, C, D and E design machines are modeled. Internally, PSS/ADEPT uses the equivalent circuit impedances ra, Xa, etc, and Siemens PTI has developed a set of impedances for each of the NEMA designs. These impedances are shown in Table A-5. The values in the table are per-unit, based on the machine apparent power input (kVA) at full load and full terminal voltage. The locked rotor (s = 1.0) impedances are derived from the equivalent circuit impedances, as are the subtransient and transient reactances ( X and X ). Table A-5.
Impedance ra Xa Xm r1 (inner) X1 (inner) r2 (outer) X2 (outer) rlocked rotor Xlocked rotor NEMA Design A 0.03 pu 0.08 2.8 0.015 0.11 0.07 0.06 0.0565 0.126 0.118 0.186
*Single cage design.
B 0.03 0.09 2.8 0.025 0.11 0.15 0.04 0.0753 0.149 0.119 0.196 0.05 0.08 3.0 0.04 0.18 0.10 0.01 0.117 0.120 0.0894 0.250
C 0.05 0.05 2.8 0.115 0.05 9999* 9999* 0.161 0.104 0.0991 0.0991
D 0.03 0.10 2.8 0.01 0.15 0.06 0.15 0.0461 0.175 0.173 0.242
X X
As mentioned, some induction machines will have the design letter on the nameplate, but in most cases the user who is modeling the machine probably does not have this information. Some additional information about each design is given in Table A.11 to assist the user in determining the design to use. In the table, the efficiency and power factor are for a fully loaded machine, with rated
A-20
terminal voltage. Pullout (breakdown) and starting torque are expressed as a multiple of the full load torque, and starting current is expressed as a multiple of full load current. The locked rotor code, shown on the bottom line of the table, is the code for each design if you accept the defaults. This code can be changed, as discussed further below. Table A-6.
Parameter Slip at full load Efficiency at full load Power factor at full load Starting current Starting torque Pullout torque Slip at pullout Power in (kVA)/power out (hp) Power in (kVA)/power out (kw) Locked rotor code NEMA Design A 1.21% 0.954 0.889 7.25 1.62 2.98 8.35 0.88 1.18 H B 2.11% 0.946 0.883 5.99 1.91 2.76 13.1 0.88 1.19 F C 2.89% 0.917 0.897 5.98 2.81 2.55 21.6 0.91 1.22 F D 11.4% 0.837 0.914 5.22 3.50 3.50 100 0.97 1.31 F E 0.845% 0.957 0.866 5.53 0.59 2.33 4.25 0.90 1.21 E
No friction or windage losses are included in the above values, and the magnetizing impedance consists of only Xm, there is no resistive part. However, these omissions should result in only small error. As additional information, some of the normal uses of each NEMA design are: NEMA A Older general purpose machine with a high starting current. Has been largely replaced by the B design. NEMA B General purpose motor. NEMA C Used for constant power loads requiring higher starting torque, such as pumps, compressors and conveyers. NEMA D High starting torque motor used with punches, shears, elevators and hoists. NEMA E Low starting torque and high efficiency at full load. Used for fans and similar loads.
A.3.2.3.2 IEC Designs

Machines designed and constructed according to IEC specifications (http://www.iec.ch/) also have standard designs, although they are not specifically listed in PSS/ADEPT. Two popular IEC motors are design N and design H, which are very similar to NEMA designs B and C, and NEMA B can be substituted for IEC N; likewise NEMA C for IEC H. Most IEC machines are 50 Hz.
A.3.2.4 Induction Machine Loadflow Comparison of PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U

As mentioned above, the PSS/U loadflow model of the induction machine consisted of a load with constant real power and a power factor that varied with voltage. The pf versus voltage curve was contained in the machine dictionary.
A-21
In PSS/ADEPT, if the electrical real power at the machine terminals is specified, the machine will draw this real power and the power factor will vary as determined by the equivalent circuit. If the mechanical output power is specified, the real electrical input power will vary with voltage because the machine efficiency changes with voltage. The power factor will again be determined from the equivalent circuit. In an unbalanced network, the total power drawn by the machine will be as specified, but it will not be distributed equally among the three phases. The machine negative-sequence impedance comes into play in the unbalanced case. There is one case where the induction machine will not draw the specified power, and that is when it stalls. When the machine stalls, the equivalent circuit is replaced by the locked rotor impedance in the loadflow simulation. A machine can stall if it is overloaded and/or the terminal voltage is low.
A.3.2.5 Locked Rotor Codes and Motor Starting Comparison

NEMA compliant induction machines should have a locked rotor code (or sometimes starting current) on the nameplate; the code letter specifies, in a round about way, the machine starting current/impedance. The code letter is connected to a value (actually a range of values) that specify the starting apparent power divided by the machine size. The resulting units of the number range is kVA/hp. The NEMA codes and allowed ranges are shown in the first two columns of Table A.11. The third column shows the value used in PSS/ADEPT; the center of the range was selected for all codes except the first and last (code A and V machines). On the Machine Property sheet, a locked rotor code can be selected. If the code designation is made, the locked rotor impedances are set to a value to reflect the code, and also "grayed out" so they cannot be changed by the user. Table A-7.
Code A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V Input KVA/Output hp Range 0 3.15 3.15 3.55 3.55 4.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.6 5.6 6.3 6.30 7.1 7.10 8.0 8.0 9.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 11.2 11.2 12.5 12.5 14.0 14.0 16.0 16.0 18.0 18.0 20.0 20.0 - 22.4 22.4 up PSS/ADEPT 2.0 3.35 3.78 4.25 4.75 5.30 5.95 6.7 7.55 8.5 9.5 10.6 11.85 13.25 15.0 17.0 19.0 21.2 24
A-22
The NEMA codes dictate the absolute value of the starting machine impedance, while PSS/ADEPT allows both a resistance and reactance to be used. The NEMA codes are implemented in PSS/ADEPT using an Xlr/Rlr ratio of 1.5. In PSS/ADEPT, the machine locked rotor impedance, whether derived from the code, from the equivalent circuit, or directly specified by the user, represents the machine for starting simulations. A loadflow is done to establish prestart conditions. An autotransformer is available for reduced voltage starting. The use of the autotransformer starting is the same as for starting a synchronous machine; please refer to Section A.3.1.5, Synchronous Machine Starting in PSS/ADEPT. Running machines do not assist in the motor start; it is assumed that the transient fluxes in running machines have decayed before the induction machine being started has reached normal speed. The omission of the running machines results in the maximum voltage dip, which is what most users are interested in finding. An ungrounded machine will still contribute to a phase-to-ground fault if the system (specifically the part of the system where the fault and machine are) is itself grounded. In PSS/U, the locked rotor impedance also represented the machine when it was being started. A prestart loadflow was done to set system conditions. A starting transformer was available, but the transformer was simpler and less capable than the new one in PSS/ADEPT (in PSS/U the starting transformer impedance did not change with tap setting). A starting simulation could be done with running motors assisting the start, or not assisting the start. The simulation without assistance from the surrounding motors was most important, since it calculated the greatest voltage dip. For this reason, the simulation with assistance from running motors was dropped in PSS/ADEPT.
A.3.2.6 PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U Induction Machine Modeling or Short Circuit Calculations
In PSS/ADEPT, for short circuit calculations, the induction machine is modeled as a source behind the subtransient or transient impedance, according to the selection on the Analysis>Options>Short Circuit tab. The magnitude and angle of the source behind the impedance is set from a loadflow done just before the short circuit calculation. In PSS/U, for short circuit calculations the induction machine was also represented as a source behind the transient or subtransient impedance. At this point, although it is perhaps not directly related to the induction machine modeling in PSS/ADEPT, some comments will be offered about short circuit currents from induction machines. The use of X d and X d was first used for calculating short circuit currents and rotor swings in synchronous machines. The "d" subscript refers to the direct axis; for a salient pole (hydro-power) synchronous generator the quadrature "q" axis values might also be used. A squirrel cage induction machine has a symmetrical rotor and the d and q axis values are the same, so only the direct axis need be considered. For a three-phase short circuit at the terminals of a synchronous machine, the change in stator current is equal to the prefault terminal voltage behind an impedance which changes with time. This time changing impedance is sometimes called the "operational" impedance (or at least it is in its frequency domain form). Rather than try to model the time dependence in detail, often this impedance is represented at two points, the subtransient period immediately after the fault occurred and the transient period a few cycles later. During the subtransient period the machine is represented as a source ( e ) behind a subtransient impedance, of which the reactive part X d is the most important. The prefault current must be accounted for, since as mentioned above, it is actually the change in machine current that is found. The prefault conditions are included by setting the source behind Xd equal to the terminal voltage minus the machine prefault current times the subtransient impedance. A similar procedure is followed for the transient impedance.
A-23
The source voltage behind the transient impedance will probably be different than the voltage behind the subtransient impedance. In the synchronous machine, the transient and subtransient reactances are calculated from the stator, field and damper winding leakage reactances and the magnetizing reactances. In the induction machine, the first cage can be considered the field winding and the second cage the damper winding. The expressions for X d and X d , using the notation of our induction machine equivalent circuit are Xm X1 X d = X a + --------------------X +X
m
1 X d = X a + ----------------------------------1 1 1 ------- + ------ + -----Xm X1 X2 This procedure, by its very nature, assumes that the subtransient and transient periods can be separated. For synchronous machines there are time constants that indicate how long each period lasts. For example, when calculating the fault current immediately after the fault, the current begins at e X d and decays exponentially with a time constant d . Therefore, the subtransient period ends at approximately d , and is followed by the transient period, which decays with time constant d . The values for the two time constants can be obtained several ways; there are standard formulas, derived formulas, values from short circuit tests and values from frequency response tests. Paul Krause* gives a good description of the various methods. This procedure depends on d being considerably larger than d . Given below are some values for large synchronous machines, also taken from Krause. The reactances are in pu and the time constants are number of 60 Hz cycles. Table A-8.
Type 325 MVA hydro 835 MVA steam .288 .317
Xd
.202 .240
Xd
111.7 54.3
d
2.28 2.86
As can be seen from Table A-8, there is a considerable difference in the magnitude of the transient and subtransient time constants, so the idea of using the subtransient reactance for the first few cycles followed by the transient reactance makes sense.
* Krause, Paul C., Analysis of Electric Machinery, McGraw Hill, 1986.
A-24
Next, in Table A-9, are the reactances and time constants for the NEMA A, B, C, D and E induction machines in PSS/ADEPT. Table A-9.
Type NEMA A NEMA B NEMA C NEMA D NEMA D .186 .196 .250 .099 .242
Xd
.118 .119 .089 .099 .173
Xd
1.97 1.25 0.99 0.14 3.86
d
0.27 0.13 0.14 --0.46
The transient time constants are several times larger than the subtransient values, which indicates that the idea of separate transient and subtransient periods is valid. However, look at the absolute value of the constants. The subtransient period is over in less than a cycle and the transient period is complete in just a couple of cycles, except for the NEMA D machine when it lasts about four cycles. The conclusion is that, for most induction machines, the fault current is gone in a very few cycles. Generally the smaller the machine the faster the current decays. However, even a 2500 hp induction motor fault current will probably be gone in four to five cycles. The user should be aware of these short time constants when induction machine fault currents are used. A suggested procedure for short circuit current for induction machines is to use the subtransient impedance for all simulation. Assume the short circuit current exist only for a cycle or two for a medium sized machine (few hundred hp) and perhaps up to four cycles for a larger machine.
A.3.2.7 Advanced Machine Specification

As already discussed, you can specify an induction machine simply by choosing its mechanical size, terminal voltage, design and loading. Several levels of additional sophistication are available (but not required). When the simple choice is made, the locked rotor impedance is calculated from the equivalent circuit. Also already discussed, you can change the locked rotor impedance by selecting a locked rotor code. If you happen to know the actual locked rotor impedance of the machine, and it does not agree with the basic derived value or any of the locked rotor codes, you can directly specify the impedance. A possible, if improbable, situation is that you know the machine locked rotor code but also want to specify an Xlr/Rlr ratio different than the default 1.5 value. Being devious, you select the appropriate code and note the resistance and reactance values that PSS/ADEPT will be using. Using your handheld calculator you modify these values and then, after deselecting the locked rotor code option, enter the modified values. The subtransient and transient reactance values used for short circuit calculations are derived from the equivalent circuit impedances. If you have a different impedance you wish to use, it can be substituted for the derived value. For these impedances, the base is the machine electrical apparent power input at full load/voltage. If changing these values, you might want to review the preceding section on short circuit calculations. The NEMA machines do not allow user access directly to the equivalent circuit impedances. However, deselecting the NEMA designator uncovers the impedances and they can be modified. It is not expected that many users will need or desire to make such detailed changes; possible instances might be slight changes to the efficiency or power factor of a machine. The efficiency can be easily adjusted by changing ra and the power factor by changing Xm. Each time an adjustment is made to any of the equivalent circuit impedances the efficiency and power factor values displayed on the
A-25
property sheet are updated. If desired, extensive changes can be made to the equivalent circuit impedances; if this is done the user should be careful to design a realizable machine. If you do change the impedances, PSS/ADEPT will check the values. Zero values of Xm, are not allowed, and zero values of a reactance or resistance in either the inner or outer cage are not allowed. The reason for this limitation is that such machines are not physically possible. If you wish to model a single cage machine, then for R2 and X2 (the outer winding) put in values of 9999. These large impedances will remove the cage from the machine. In the discussion on induction machines it has been mentioned several times that the user simply specifies the machine mechanical size while the equivalent circuit impedances are on the electrical apparent power input base of the machine. PSS/ADEPT handles the conversions between the two automatically, but some users would probably like to know the conversion details. For a NEMA specified machine the equation is: .746 Size hp S B = -----------------------------------Eff PF where SB is the electrical input apparent power base in kVA and Sizehp is the mechanical size in hp. For and IEC machine, one less conversion is needed and the equation is: Size kW S B = --------------------Eff PF where now the machine mechanical size is in kW.
A.3.2.8 Relationship between the New PSS/ADEPT Model and the PSS/U Raw Data File
With the new PSS/ADEPT induction machine, the connection with the PSS/U Motor Dictionary (*.mot) has been broken, and the dictionary is not consulted when an induction machine is placed in the network. In addition, if a network is saved in the old PSS/U raw data format (*.dat), nothing is written to the PSS/U Motor Dictionary. With the dictionary connection broken, there are a variety of things to explain about reading of an older PSS/U raw data file into PSS/ADEPT. First, when the raw data file is read, all induction machines are assigned a NEMA B design which, as you recall, is the general purpose machine. The machine therefore gets the efficiency, power factor, locked rotor impedance, subtransient impedance and transient impedance of the B design. Subsequently, the user can modify the machine as desired, either changing the design letter or adjusting the locked rotor, subtransient and transient impedances to those in the Motor Dictionary that accompanied the old raw data file. For each network this would be a one time adjustment, as it is assumed the network would subsequently be saved in the native PSS/ADEPT format. Second, hp units are used for mechanical size for all units read from the raw data file. The units can later be changed to kW, if desired. In PSS/ADEPT, there is no longer any reference to the machine numbering system that was used in PSS/U. However, the numbers must still be considered when the old raw data file is read. If a machine in the raw data file has a machine type 51, 52, 69, 70 or 151, 152, 169, 170, then the values in the raw data file specify the real electrical power in kW drawn by the machine and the electrical apparent power base in kVA of the machine. These two values were named "LOAD" and "RATING" in PSS/U. To obtain an equivalent machine in PSS/ADEPT, the electrical input option is selected and the power drawn by the machine is set to the "LOAD" value in the data file. The mechanical size of the PSS/ADEPT machine is set to RATING/.3457.
A-26
If a machine in the raw data file has a machine type 71, 72, 89, 90 or 171, 172, 189, 190 the situation is somewhat more straightforward since the values in the raw data file specify the mechanical power delivered by the machine and the mechanical size of the machine. So, the mechanical power option is selected, the PSS/ADEPT machine power output is set to "LOAD" and the PSS/ADEPT machine size is set to "RATING". It is expected that users will infrequently write an PSS/ADEPT case back to the old raw data format, because doing so causes the loss of so much information, both for machines and other network elements. In case it is done, the induction machines will be written to the raw data file using the inverse of the logic described in the above two paragraphs and with the following logic used for assigning the old machine number. A machine with NEMA design B is given a 51 or 71 number, , and the design E is assigned 55 or 75. A user custom designed machine is given a 56 or 76 number. Whether the fifty or seventy series is used depends of course on how the machine loading is specified in PSS/ADEPT. Also supplied with PSS/ADEPT is a motor dictionary named nema1998.mot; it is a motor dictionary that shows the new PSS/ADEPT machines as they would have been modeled in PSS/U. The motor dictionary is displayed at the end of this section.
A.3.2.9 Examples of Induction Machine Specification

Example: 1 An industrial plant on your system has a couple of large motors, one 600 hp and the other 700 hp. You would like to model them in your system, but they are old machines and nobody remembers anything about them. You do know they are operating on a 2.3 kV bus. Suggested procedure Set the machine units flag to hp for each machine and enter its mechanical size (600 and 700) and the rated voltage, 2.3 kV (assuming the system flag is set for line-to-line voltage). For loading, set the flag to specify mechanical power output and enter 600 and 700, which fully loads the machines. Specify NEMA B, the general purpose machine. As an alternative you could set the machine units flag to kW, and enter the machine sizes as 448 and 522, and also set the shaft load to 448 and 522. This would be the same specification as the above. But, why make extra work for yourself, youre busy enough already. If you get a chance to talk to anybody in the industrial plant, ask them to look at the motor nameplate to see if a locked rotor code is specified. Also ask what type of load each machine is driving. Example: 2 You have a motors that in another simulation program were modeled as a load of 600 + j360 kVA. You want to model them explicitly as motors in PSS/ADEPT to later do short circuit calculations. You are comparing loadflow results from the two programs, and you also want PSS/ADEPT to model the machines as a 600 + j360 load. Suggested procedure These requirements conflict to a certain extent. The reactive power drawn by an induction machine varies with system conditions, and adept is trying to simulate actual conditions. So, requiring a constant reactive power load of 360 kvar defeats the purpose of the model. It is possible to make the reactive load close or equal to 360 kvar at a particular terminal voltage. The power factor of the 600 + j360 load is 0.857. The closest NEMA machine is the E design, with a 0.866 PF at full load, so use the E model. The efficiency of this machine is 0.957, so its mechanical size is 600 x .957 = 574 kW (770 hp). In the property sheet, select the NEMA E design, set the units to hp (NEMA), and also select the electrical power input choice. Set the size of the machine to 770 hp and specify the 600 kW input power (or select kW (IEC) units and set machine size to 574 kW). In the loadflow, if the machine terminal voltage solution is 1.0 pu, the machine will draw 600 + j346 kVA. This is pretty close to the original load; if you want a closer match on the reactive power, the
A-27
easiest way is probably to increase the machine size. Setting the machine size to around 850 hp will increase the reactive draw to 360 kvar. Another method to increase reactive power consumption would be to lower the Xm value for the machine. Example: 3 You are modeling a 575 kV 200 hp machine as a NEMA B model. The starting current for the machine is about 1200 A. What locked rotor code should be selected for this machine? Suggested procedure Calculate the kVA/hp number, which is: 3 1200 .575 ------------------------------------------- 6.0 200 Select the G locked rotor code for this machine. Example: 4 You have an IEC model machine, the size is 100 kW, rated voltage is 500 V. The starting current is about 750 A. What locked rotor code should by select? Suggested procedure This is a 134 hp machine, so the NEMA kVA/hp value is: 3 750 .500 --------------------------------------- 4.8 134 Select the E locked rotor code, which in PSS/ADEPT uses a value of 4.75 for the E code, so the starting current will be a little less than 750 A for a 1.0 pu terminal voltage. You can specify the machine size either way, 100 kW with the kW (IEC) option or 134 hp with the hp (NEMA) option. Example: 5 Consider a 500 hp NEMA B induction motor on a 2.3 kV bus. If it were initially unloaded and the prefault terminal voltage were 1.0 pu, what fault current would be expected for a three phase fault at the machine terminals if the default subtransient impedance were used. Suggested procedure it is easy to explain how PSS/ADEPT calculates the fault current for a machine, but it requires a considerable amount of complex arithmetic to get a numeric answer. For the NEMA B design, the efficiency is .946 and the power factor .883 so the electrical base is 446.65 kVA. Assuming the machine is Y connected, the base impedance is then 2.30 x 2.30/.44665 = 11.84 . The armature resistance is .03 pu and the default subtransient reactance is .1190 pu, so the subtransient impedance in ohms is 1.45375.8. The unloaded machine still draws current for the magnetizing reactance, a quick loadflow shows the current to be 38.78-89.4. For the fault calculation, the voltage e must be set up behind the subtransient impedance. With the prefault voltage equal to 1.0 pu or 1328 V, the value for e is: e = 1328 1.453 75.8 38.78 89.4 = 1273 .60V Finally, the fault current for the three-phase fault at the terminals is: 1273 .60 = 876 75.2 A I f = -----------------------------1.453 75.8 A quick simulation shows that this is close to the value PSS/ADEPT obtains. The PSS/ADEPT display shows the current reference into the device, while the above answer has a reference of current out of the machine, so the PSS/ADEPT displayed angle will differ from our answer by 180.
A-28
Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International A-29
Table A-10. PSS/U Dictionary

Zero Sequence R0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X0 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 Subtransient Transient Locked Rotor Xlr 0.126 0.149 0.120 0.104 0.175 0.126 0.149 0.120 0.104 0.175 Starting Transformer rxfr 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Xxfr 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 pf0.7 0.886 0.867 0.878 0.943 0.791 0.886 0.867 0.878 0.943 0.791 pf at 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 1.1 pu Voltage pf0.8 0.904 0.893 0.903 0.943 0.857 0.904 0.893 0.903 0.943 0.857 pf0.9 0.906 0.897 0.908 0.936 0.874 0.906 0.897 0.908 0.936 0.874 pf1.0 0.897 0.891 0.903 0.922 0.873 0.897 0.891 0.903 0.922 0.873 pf1.1 0.882 0.877 0.891 0.904 0.863 0.882 0.877 0.891 0.904 0.863 Eff 100 100 100 100 100
Type 51 52 53 54 55 71 72 73 74 75
Size 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2681 2681 2681 2681 2681
r
0.03 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.03
X
0.1183 0.119 0.0894 0.0991 0.173 0.1183 0.119 0.0894 0.0991 0.173
r
0.03 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.03
rlr 0.1858 0.0565 0.196 0.250 0.0991 0.242 0.196 0.250 0.0991 0.242 0.0753 0.117 0.161 0.0461 0.0753 0.117 0.161 0.0461
0.1858 0.0565
100 100 100 100 100
The listed power factor versus voltage curve only holds when the machine is fully loaded; even if an induction machine is drawing no real power it will absorb a significant amount of reactive power because of the magnetizing impedance Xm, which might vary from 2 to 4 pu. Unfortunately, the PSS/U induction machine model is not this sophisticated, and the power factor in the dictionary is applied regardless of the specified real power. Therefore, if the specified power is equal to the machine size, you can expect the PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U results to match very closely for these NEMA machines. However, if the specified power is less (or more) than the size, there will be some discrepancy in the loadflow results. The PSS/U model also has no ability to stall the machine, so for heavy loading or low terminal voltages the results may not match for the induction machine.
A.3.2.9.1 Induction Machine Short Circuit Behavior

For short circuit calculations, the induction machine is represented as a source ( e or e ) behind the armature resistance in series with the impedance matrix. The impedance matrix has either subtransient or transient values in it, depending on the user selection. This is the same model as is used for the synchronous machine. Comparison of Induction Machine Short Circuit Behavior in PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U As long as the PSS/U Motor Dictionary contains armature resistance, subtransient reactance and transient reactance values which agree with the NEMA machines, the short circuit currents from PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT should match fairly well. There will be one difference, which was noted in the synchronous machine; PSS/ADEPT calculates the machine internal voltage from the proceeding loadflow, while PSS/U does not (except LPSC can make this calculation for the balanced network).
A.3.2.9.2 Induction Machine Starting Behavior

The induction machine being started is represented by its locked rotor impedance, just as the synchronous machine is. For the induction machine, the locked rotor impedance is entered on the Machine Property sheet, it is not obtained from a dictionary (remember that is PSS/ADEPT there is no connection between the induction machine and the PSS/U dictionary. A starting transformer can also be used to start the induction machine, just as for the synchronous machine During the starting simulation, other running induction machines are modeled just as they are in a loadflow simulation. Comparison of Induction Machine Starting Behavior in PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U The induction machine motor starting simulation results should agree well between PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U, if the "post-start" condition is selected in PSS/U.
A-30
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT Data and Parameter File Differences
A.4 Data and Parameter File Differences

PSS/ADEPT can read PSS/U raw data files (*.dat); Construction Dictionary files (*.con); PSS/ADEPT binary files (*.adp) or Slider/U binary files (*.slu); but will not read PSS/U binary CASE files (*.cas). If the PSS/U raw data file contains graphical data and is opened in PSS/ADEPT, the network diagram is automatically drawn. When a raw data file is saved from PSS/ADEPT, drawing parameters: x-coordinate, y-coordinate, busbar length, node orientation, and text orientation are written directly to the raw data file for use in activity DRAW. PSS/ADEPT files are binary formatted files that can only be modified using PSS/ADEPT; they cannot be viewed with a standard text editor. While the PSS/ADEPT data file contains raw data information, it saves additional graphical information that PSS/U does not. The format of the PSS/ADEPT data file is not compatible with PSS/U, and therefore activities CASE and READ cannot be used to read a PSS/ADEPT data file. The following file types and files are used by PSS/U but are not used by PSS/ADEPT:
File Types *.rel *.eco *.brk *.dev *.lvb *.idv *.drw *.sgf *.wrk
Files parmpu.dat parmpr.dat parmps.dat pscript.dat resource.prm windows.prm
A.5 Editing Data Dictionaries

The Construction Dictionary is not editable in PSS/ADEPT. If the user wishes to edit these files, use either the PSS/U spreadsheet editor or a text editor. In PSS/U, dictionaries are set via activity OPTN when starting PSS/U or via an entry in the file, PARMPU.DAT, which runs at program start-up. PARMPU.DAT is not used in PSS/ADEPT. Instead, the dictionary is specified in File>Program Settings and are remembered by the program. The next time PSS/ADEPT is started, the dictionary that was used the last time the program was run will be the dictionary used for the current network. If another dictionary for the current PSS/ADEPT session are required, the user must change them using the Program Settings dialog.
A-31
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT Diagram Differences
A.6 Diagram Differences

A.6.1 Transformer Symbol Types
ISO transformer type symbols are the default in PSS/ADEPT, but PSS/U uses US transformer symbol types (see Figure A-4). Initially, PSS/ADEPT draws all transformers with this symbol type. The US transformer symbol type may be specified by selecting US transformer type symbols in the File>Program Settings dialog. The transformer symbol designation will be remembered and stored on application exit. Hence, when the application is restarted, the transformer symbol type will be set to the last saved configuration (e.g., ISO or US).
Figure A-4. ISO and US Transformer Types
A.6.2 Node Labels

In PSS/ADEPT, the name of the node will be displayed at the lower right corner of the node symbol. These node names can be moved on the diagram, either manually or with the Declutter Text option. The new positions will be saved in a PSS/ADEPT file, but not a raw data file. PSS/U activity DRAW allows users to select the node name orientation for each node. When a load flow solution is performed, PSS/ADEPT displays the voltage and angle below the node name. While the default voltage is kV, node voltage may be displayed in pu or on a nominal delivery voltage base by changing the Node voltages option on the Results tab. PSS/U will display only the node name and nothing else; to see the resulting voltage and angle, users must use a PSS/U load flow report. Load flow results may be removed from the diagram by clicking the Toggle Results button on the View Toolbar.
A.6.3 Load and Branch Labels

PSS/U activity DRAW displays the construction type and length of each branch; PSS/ADEPT does not provide this option. PSS/ADEPT displays load flow results for each branch at either end of the From or To Nodes. Results may be displayed at both ends of the branch by checking the box labeled Show Results at both ends under the Results tab. PSS/ADEPT displays the loss results in the middle of the branch.
A.6.4 Load Flow Results

In PSS/ADEPT, all results consider the charging current on the line. The currents are given in magnitude and angle. The convention for showing the flow of power in both PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U is to show power flowing out of the node and into the branch. Thus, if power is flowing from a source to the right of a node, the power results shown to the left of the node will be negative to indicate direction of flow (Figure A-5). A negative power flow means that the power is flowing out of the branch.
A-32
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT Acceleration Factors
Power Flow
Power Flow
Figure A-5. Power Flow
A.6.5 Shunt Device Labels

Shunt devices include loads, machines, and shunt capacitors. Results for these devices include power and current. Results are shown next to the device. PSS/U activity DRAW does not show results for shunt devices.
A.7 Acceleration Factors

In PSS/U, some systems require the user to manually modify acceleration factors in order to solve the load flow. PSS/ADEPT employs a more robust solution algorithm, which does not require acceleration factors.
A.8 Unique Name Identifiers

PSS/U refers to branches, shunt capacitors, machines, and loads by their node name(s). While the node name is unique, there is no unique name that identifies branches, loads, and shunt capacitors. In PSS/ADEPT, every item in the network has its own unique name.
A.9 Network Limits

A.9.1 Network Size/Number of Loops
PSS/U limits the network size and number of loops in the network. PSS/ADEPT has no fixed limit on network size, number of loops, or the number of individual components.
A.9.2 Loads
PSS/U limits the number of loads at a node to four (each load category) and the number of in-service sources in a network to one. In PSS/ADEPT, there is no limit on the number of loads at a node or the number of in-service sources in a network.
A-33
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT MWh Loads
A.10 MWh Loads

PSS/ADEPT has no provisions to modify or add MWh load data to the network. When it reads in a PSS/U raw data file, it saves the MWh load records and writes them back to the raw data file exactly as they were read in. Normally, a node cannot be deleted as long as an item is connected to it. However, in the case of MWh load, it is possible to read in a file containing these loads and delete the node(s) to which they are connected because PSS/ADEPT does not account for them. If the user saves the network model as a raw data file, PSS/ADEPT will write the MWh loads back into it. If that file is subsequently read into PSS/U, an error will occur because the MWh loads are not connected to any nodes (i.e., the node was deleted in PSS/ADEPT).
A.11 Sources
A.11.1 Source Angle
You have the ability to enter the value of the source angle on the Source Device Property sheet. This value is not used by PSS/U and hence will not be written out to a PSS/U raw data file.
A.11.2 Multiple In-Service Sources

In PSS/ADEPT you may have more that one in-service source. When you read a raw data file saved from PSS/ADEPT into PSS/U, only the first in-service source in the file will have an in-service status. The other in-service sources in the file will be set to out-of-service devices.
A.12 Load Categories and Device Groups

When a PSS/U raw data file is imported into PSS/ADEPT, the node area number will be converted to a group in PSS/ADEPT. In addition, the load categories in the PSS/U raw data file will be converted to a load category in PSS/ADEPT. The group name will equal the text "Group" followed by the area number (1-99) you specified in the raw data file. The load category name will equal the text "Load Category" followed by the category number you specified in the raw data file (normally 1 to 4). In PSS/ADEPT you are allowed to have un-limited load categories and device groups. You may also have devices belonging to one or more groups and/or load categories. PSS/U does not support the device and load category grouping present in PSS/ADEPT. If you choose to use the new grouping and load category definitions within PSS/ADEPT, this information will not be saved in a raw data file and your data will be lost. If you wish to continue to use PSS/U do not modify or add any device groups or load categories to your network.
A.13 Network Economics

The economics data used by PSS/ADEPT is not compatible with that used by PSS/U. Network economics are saved only in a PSS/ADEPT native file. In PSS/U, the network economics are stored in a file with a .eco extension. You will need to create a new .eco file to use with PSS/U if you need to use the economics in both PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT.
A.14 Load Snapshots

Load snapshots are named "pictures" of loads in your system. PSS/U has no mechanism to define load snapshots, therefore, if you define load snapshots in your network they will not be saved to a PSS/U raw data file.
A-34
Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT Static Loads
A.15 Static Loads

In a PSS/U raw data file you may have assigned in the Parameter record a nonzero scale factor and a power factor to a particular load category. When a raw data file is read into PSS/ADEPT, the scale factors and power factors will be used to determine the actual P (kW) and Q (kvar), or in the case of polar representation, the actual S (kVA), pf, leading/lagging. In the Load Property sheet, you will see the actual load as used by the solution algorithms in PSS/ADEPT. The value you have entered for Q in the load data section of the PSS/U raw data file is ignored and Q is calculated based on the given scale and power factors. For a description of the Parameter record in the PSS/U raw data file refer to Appendix B. You can see the effect in PSS/ADEPT by viewing the Static Load Property sheet or selecting the network input data list report.
A-35
A-36
Appendix B
PSS/U Input File Formats
B.1 PSS/U Raw Data File Format
PSS/ADEPT can import and export a PSS/U raw data file, the primary source of input to the PSS/U application. The raw data file is a text file with the suffix .DAT and is read into PSS/ADEPT in free format with data items separated by a comma or one or more spaces. Each network item is grouped together and terminated by END/ section-name where section-name indicates the group section (e.g., NODES, BRANCH, LOADS, etc.). Explanation of data items, data restrictions, and general comments or rules about some categories are included below.
B.1.1 Sample Three-Phase Feeder Raw Data File

EXAMPLE CASE TO ILLUSTRATE THE USE OF PSS/U FOR A 10 NODE SYSTEM PTI APRIL 1996 END/ TITLE EXPLCA , 0.00 LN 1.000 1000.0 10.000 0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00 , , , , , END/ PARAMS SO 40.000 0.30 4.90 1.00 V 4 1 F1 10.000 1.70 5.00 0.75 V 4 1 F2 10.000 3.10 5.00 0.50 V 4 1 F3 10.000 4.80 5.00 0.50 V 4 1 F4 10.000 6.50 5.00 0.50 V 3 1 F5 5.0000 8.20 5.00 0.75 V 4 1 F6 5.0000 9.70 5.00 0.50 V 4 1 MOTOR NODE A1 5.0000 3.90 3.60 0.75 H 4 1 GENERATOR NODE A2 5.0000 3.90 1.80 0.50 H 4 1 B1 10.000 7.30 3.20 0.50 H 4 1 END/ NODES SO 1 0.00000 0.00100 0.00000 0.00100 40.000 END/ SOURCE F1 F2 L 1 ABC ,30 , 1.0000 F2 F3 L 1 ABC ,30 , 2.2000 F3 F4 L 1 ABC ,30 , 1.8000 F5 F6 L 1 ABC ,30 , 0.5000 A1 A2 L 1 AB ,10 , 1.5000 SO F1 T 3 ABC ,TNSF , 1000.00 0.00000 0.10000 0.00000 F4 F5 T 1 ABC ,TNSF , 1000.00 0.00000 0.10000 0.00000 F2 A1 T 3 ABC ,TNSF , 1000.00 0.00000 0.10000 0.00000 F4 B1 S 1 ABC ,SWCH , , , 0 END/ BRANCH SO F1 3 1.00000 1.10 0.90 0.00625 1.050 1.040 0.000 F4 F5 2 1.08750 1.10 0.90 0.00625 1.050 1.040 0.000 F2 A1 2 1.00000 1.10 0.90 0.00625 1.050 1.040 0.000 END/ TRANSF F1 1 1 150.00 75.00 120.00 60.00 100.00 F2 1 1 200.00 100.00 200.00 100.00 200.00 F3 1 1 120.00 60.00 150.00 75.00 100.00 F4 1 1 100.00 50.00 100.00 50.00 100.00 F5 1 11 80.00 40.00 70.00 35.00 60.00 F6 2 51 100.00 200.00 5.0000 A1 2 91 -1000.00 1000.00 5.0000 1.030 0.500 A2 2 11 90.00 45.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 B1 2 1 30.00 10.00 50.00 20.00 40.00 END/ LOADS END/ CONSUM END/ CAPS
0.10000 0.10000 0.10000 0.000 0.000 0.000 50.00 100.00 50.00 50.00 30.00 -0.500 0.00 10.00
B-1
PSS/U Input File Formats PSS/U Raw Data File Format
B.1.2 Title Section

This description must contain the following eight lines; all seven lines must exist, even if they are blank, before the END/TITLE demarcation occurs.
Title 1 Title 2 Comment 1 Comment 2 Comment 3 Comment 4 Comment 5 END/TITLE
60-character title line 60-character comment lines
B.1.3 System Parameters Section

Entries CKTID, PKCUR, and VFL are not mandatory entries.OHF, OHR, UGF, UGR, SWTIME, SUBNAME, and PTIME provided for raw data file compatibility only and are currently ignored in PSS/ADEPT.
CKTID, PKCUR, VFL, PTIME, REVNUM SKVA, SKV, DEFSC, DEFPF, DEFSC, DEFPF, DEFSC, DEFPF, DEFSC, DEFPF OHF, OHR, UGF, UGR, SWTIME, SUBNAME END/ PARAMS
Table B-1. System Parameters

Data Item CKTID PKCUR VFL PTIME REVNUM SKVA SKV DEFSC DEFPF OHF* OHR* UGF* UGR* SWTIME* SUBNAME* 1 to 8 character circuit identification Peak current setting (ignored) LN if input voltages are line-to-neutral or LL if input voltages are line-to-line Average fraction of time that load level specified within this data set is used for TOPO (ignored) Revision number is written into the file if the data is saved using the spreadsheet editor (it is not necessary to add this number if you are creating a file from scratch) System three-phase base kVA System standard base voltage, kV; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in VFL Default scale factor for given category Default load power factor for given category Overhead failure rate given in failures/unit length/yr The amount of time in hours it takes to repair overhead lines Underground failure rate given in failures/unit length/yr The amount of time in hours it takes to repair underground cables Time required to switch given in hours Substation Name Description
*These items are used with the reliability option only.
B-2
B.1.4 Node Declaration Section

NAME, KV, X, Y, BUSBAR, V/H, N, IAR, DESC END/ NODES
Table B-2. Node Data

Data Item NAME KV X Y BUSBAR V/H N IAR DESC Description Node name of up to 12 alphanumeric characters Node base voltage, kV; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data Node X screen coordinate 0 < X < 90.0, in inches Node Y screen coordinate .75 < Y < 72.0, in inches Length of busbar symbol in one-line diagram, in inches; a value of zero will not draw a busbar symbol Orientation of busbar symbol in one-line diagram; V is vertical, H is horizontal (ignored if BUSBAR=0) Node name orientation; see Figure B-1 (N = 0 will not print node name) Area number (1-100) 40-character node description
-2
-1
2 3
1 4
- possible positions - default position
-3
-4
Figure B-1. Node Name Orientation Key
B.1.5 Source Data Section

NAME, STATUS, R1, X1, R0, X0, KVS END/ SOURCE
Table B-3. Source Data

Data Item NAME STATUS source status 0 - out-of-service 1 - in-service Description Name of node at which source is connected
B-3
Table B-3. Source Data (Cont.)

R1 X1 R0 X0 KVS Positive-sequence Thevenin resistance, pu on system kVA base Positive-sequence Thevenin reactance, pu on system kVA base Zero-sequence Thevenin resistance, pu on system kVA base Zero-sequence Thevenin reactance, pu on system kVA base Source open circuit voltage, kV; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data.
B.1.6 Branch Data Section

Branch data will have different formats depending upon the type of branch being entered. If the value of the construction type field corresponds to an entry in the Construction Dictionary the impedances will be directly obtained from the dictionary. For calculation purposes, negative-sequence impedances equal positive-sequence impedances. X, Y, Z designations for phasing are used for uncertain phasing designation and are equivalent to A, B, C respectively.
B.1.6.1 Line or Cable Data

The length specified on a line or cable must be in the same units that were used to calculate the impedances of that line or cable. I, J,
END/ BRANCH
L, STAT, PHAS, CONST, DIST, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
Table B-4. Line or Cable Data

Data Item I J L STAT FROM node name TO node name Designates branch section is a line or cable Line status 0 - open - disconnected at both ends 1 - in-service 1 to 3 character string containing A, B, C or X, Y, Z as needed to indicate which phase conductors are present (e.g., ABC, XYZ, AC, B) 1 to 10 character alphanumeric construction type identifier; if the Construction Dictionary is to be used, this name must correspond to a name in the dictionary Length Positive-sequence series resistance, ohm/unit length Positive-sequence series reactance, ohm/unit length Zero-sequence series resistance, ohm/unit length Zero-sequence series reactance, ohm/unit length Positive-sequence charging admittance, micromhos/unit length Zero-sequence charging admittance, micromhos/unit length Description
PHAS CONST DIST R1 X1 R0 X0 BC1 BC0
B-4
B.1.6.2 Switch Data

I, J, S, STAT, PHAS, CONST, ID, blnk , OPERST END/ BRANCH
Table B-5. Switch Data

Data Item I J S STAT FROM node name TO node name Designates branch section is a switch Switch status 0 - open - disconnected at both ends 1 - in-service (closed) 1 to 3 character string containing A, B, C or X, Y, Z as needed to indicate which phase conductors are present (e.g., ABC, XYZ, AC, B) 1 to 10 character alphanumeric construction type identifier; if the Construction Dictionary is to be used, this name must correspond to a name in the dictionary 1 to 3 character switch identification mandatory blank space if OPERST is to be specified Operational status of switch used for TOPO 0 - unlocked (default) 1 - locked Description
PHAS CONST ID 'blnk' OPERST
B.1.6.3 Tie Switch Data

I, J, TS, STAT, PHAS, CONST, ID, CKTID, OPERST END/ BRANCH
Table B-6. Tie Switch Data

Data Item I J TS STAT FROM node name TO node name Designates branch section is a tie switch Switch status 0 - open - disconnected at both ends 1 - in-service (closed) 1 to 3 character string containing A, B, C or X, Y, Z as needed to indicate which phase conductors are present (e.g., ABC, XYZ, AC, B) 1 to 10 character alphanumeric construction type identifier; if the Construction Dictionary is to be used, this name must correspond to a name in the dictionary 1 to 3 character switch identification 1 to 8 character identifier for the other circuit to which this tie switch is connected Operational status of switch used for TOPO 0 - unlocked (default) 1 - locked Description
PHAS CONST ID CKTID OPERST
B-5
B.1.6.4 Series Capacitor or Series Reactor Data

For series capacitor branches, both positive- and zero-sequence reactance must be negative. The resistance should equal zero. For series reactor branches, both positive- and zero-sequence reactance must be positive. The resistance should equal zero.
END/ BRANCH
I, J, SX, STAT, PHAS, CONST, KVAT, R1, X1, R0, X0
Table B-7. Series Capacitor or Series Reactor Data

Data Item I J SX STAT FROM node name TO node name Designates branch section is a series capacitor or reactor Series capacitor/reactor status 0 - open - disconnected at both ends 1 - in-service 1 to 3 character string containing A, B, C or X, Y, Z as needed to indicate which phase conductors are present (e.g., ABC, XYZ, AC, B) 1 to 10 character alphanumeric construction type identifier; if the Construction Dictionary is to be used, this name must correspond to a name in the dictionary Series capacitor or reactor rating in kVA per phase Positive-sequence resistance, per unit Positive-sequence reactance, per unit Zero-sequence resistance, per unit Zero-sequence reactance, per unit Description
PHAS CONST KVAT R1 X1 R0 X0
B.1.6.5 Transformer Data

In PSS/ADEPT these are limitations where transformers are concerned. See Appendix A for further details.
B.1.6.5.1 Rules:
Transformer impedances must be specified in per unit on transformer kVA base, not on system kVA base. For a three-phase transformer, the impedance entered in this record will normally be the nameplate value, which is normally given in per unit (or percent) with respect to the three-phase rating, and the value of KVAT will normally be one third of the nameplate kVA rating. For a single phase transformer, KVAT, R1, X1, R0, X0 will normally be the nameplate values. A nonregulating transformer has a tstp0 (use the default) and a branch status (Section B.1.6) of 3 (taps locked). Compensating impedance takes precedence over remote node regulation.
B-6
Per unit tap ratio is defined as: Secondary actual open circuit voltage --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Primary actual supply voltage The width of the voltage control band should be wider, in per unit, than the per unit tap step. For example, the band for a transformer with 5/8 percent (0.00625 pu) steps should be 0.01 pu or wider. For wye-delta or delta-wye transformers, the 30 phase shift is determined by the sign of the type number.
END/ BRANCH
I, J, T, STAT, PHAS, CONST, KVAT, R1, X1, R0, X0
Table B-8. Transformer Data

Data Item I J T STAT FROM node name TO node name (node to be voltage-controlled) Designates branch section is a transformer Transformer status 0 - transformer disconnected at primary and secondary 1 - transformer in service, taps adjusted independently in each phase 2 - transformer in service, taps in all phases in equal position, controlled by first phase present (in ABC or XYZ order) 3 - transformer in service, taps locked in present position 1 to 3 character string indicating which phases (A, B, C, or X, Y, Z) are present in the transformer bank; if the transformer is a wye-delta transformer (types + 2 and +3) define phasing on wye side of the bank (refer to Section B.1.7 for the direction of the wye-delta connection with respect to the branch From and To node names) 1 to 10 character alphanumeric transformer type identifier; such as TNSF, REG, wye-wye, delta-wye, or wye-delta; if the Construction Dictionary is to be used, this name must correspond to a name in the dictionary Transformer rating in kVA per phase Positive-sequence resistance, per unit Positive-sequence reactance, per unit Zero-sequence resistance, per unit Zero-sequence reactance, per unit Description
PHAS
CONST
KVAT R1 X1 R0 X0
B.1.7 Transformer Tap Changing Data Section

I, J, TYPE, TAP, TMAX, TMIN, TSTP, VMAX, VMIN, RC, XC, REM
END/ TRANSF
Table B-9. Transformer Tap Changing Data Section

Data Item I J TYPE FROM node name TO node name (tapped side of transformer) Transformer connection type number: I, J above defines the direction of the transformer connection Description Default
B-7
Table B-9. Transformer Tap Changing Data Section (Cont.)

Data Item TAP TMAX TMIN TSTP VMAX VMIN RC XC REM Maximum tap ratio, pu Minimum tap ratio, pu Tap ratio step, pu Upper limit of target band for compensated voltage, pu Lower limit of target band for compensated voltage, pu Compensating resistance, ohm (applies to all phases) Compensating reactance, ohm (applies to all phases) Regulated node name (node at which voltage regulation is to occur). If this entry is left blank, the TO node of the branch data is regulated. REM may be a node other than I and J (in this case, the sign of REM defines the location of the controlled node relative to the transformer). If REM is entered with a positive sign, the ratio will be adjusted as if node REM is on the tapped side of the transformer. If REM is entered with a negative sign, the ratio will be adjusted as if the node REM is on the untapped (impedance) side of the transformer Description Tap ratio, per unit (applies to all phases) Default 1.0 1.1 .9 0.00625 1.05 1.04 0.0 0.0
B.1.8 Transformer Type Codes

Table B-10. PSS/U Transformer Types
Code 1 2 -2 3 -3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Wye-wye Wye-delta -30 Wye-delta +30 Delta-wye +30 Delta-wye -30 Open delta auto regulator AB (XY) open Open delta auto regulator BC (YZ) open Open delta auto regulator CA (ZX) open L-L auto regulator AB (XY) L-L auto regulator BC (YZ) L-L auto regulator CA (ZX) Delta-connected auto regulator Delta-delta Wye-connected auto regulator Auto regulator AN (XN) Auto regulator BN (YN) Auto regulator CN (ZN) Connection Type
B-8
From
To Type 2 (-2) Wye-Delta -30 (+30)
Type 1 Wye-Wye
Type 3 (-3) Delta-Wye +30 (-30)
Type 4 Open Delta Auto Regulator AB (XY) Open Type 5 Open Delta Auto Regulator BC (YZ) Open Type 6 Open Delta Auto Regulator CA (ZX) Open
Type 7 AB (XY) L-L Auto Regulator Type 8 BC (YZ) L-L Auto Regulator Type 9 CA (ZX) L-L Auto Regulator
Type 10 Delta-Connected Auto Regulator
Type 11 Delta-Delta
Type 12 Wye-Connected Auto Regulator
Type 13 AN (XN) Auto Regulator Type 14 BN (YN) Auto Regulator Type 15 CN (ZN) Auto Regulator
Figure B-2. PSSUT Transformer Bank Connections
B-9
B.1.9 Load Data Section

In PSS/ADEPT there are limitations where static load data is concerned. See Appendix A, for further information. The nominal load values Pa, Pb, Pc, Qa, Qb, Qc may be either: (a) (b) used directly in power flow solutions in or used as the basis for determining system loads from: Pa = DEFSC * Pa Qa = tan (arc cos (DEFPF)) * Pa where DEFSC < DEFPF
Option (a) is used when DEFSC = 0. This case would be used when the actual P and Q loads are known and entered in the load data records. Option (b) is intended to be used in distribution feeder work where it is more convenient to specify load in terms of connected load transformer capacity than in terms of actual load P and Q. The loads applied to the feeder are determined by the above equations, the values of Pa, Pb, Pc are connected load transformer capacity (kVA), and the values of Qa, Qb, Qc are not used. The load adjustment given above is applied to all loads by category where DEFSC 0, but not to machines. The values specified for constant power, constant impedance, and constant current load are the real and reactive powers consumed by the load, when the applied voltage is 1.0 per unit. Load data records may be entered in any order, with multiple records being entered for nodes at which more than one type of load is connected. Balanced loads are divided equally among the phases entering the node. Grounded loads are connected a-n, b-n, c-n. Ungrounded loads are connected a-b, b-c, c-a and placed in PA, PB, PC respectively.
B.1.9.1 Load Categories

Each load may be assigned to one of four categories. This permits loads to be grouped in a way that is meaningful to the user; the categories could be associated with residential, industrial, and commercial customers or with suburban, farming, irrigation, and water heating load.
B.1.9.2 Load Type Definitions

Table B-11. Load Categories
Constant Power Loads Type 1 11 21 31 Type 2 12 22 32 Unbalanced Unbalanced Balanced Balanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Balanced Balanced P + jQ P + jQ P + jQ P + jQ G + jB G + jB G + jB G + jB Grounded Ungrounded Grounded Ungrounded Grounded Ungrounded Grounded Ungrounded
Constant Impedance Loads
B-10
Table B-11. Load Categories (Cont.)

Constant Current Loads Type 3 13 23 33 MWh Loads Type 5 15 25 35 Type 6 16 26 36 Unbalanced Unbalanced Balanced Balanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Balanced Balanced MWh/month MWh/month MWh/month MWh/month MWh/month MWh/month MWh/month MWh/month Grounded Ungrounded Grounded Ungrounded Grounded Ungrounded Grounded Ungrounded Unbalanced Unbalanced Balanced Balanced P + jQ P + jQ P + jQ P + jQ Grounded Ungrounded Grounded Ungrounded
Seasonal MWh Loads
Asynchronous Machines Types 51 - 70, 151-170, load in kW, rating in kVA Types 71 - 90, 171-190, load in hp, rating in hp Synchronous Machines Types 91 - 99, 191-199, load in kW, rating in kVA
B.1.9.3 kW, kvar Load B.1.9.3.1 kW, kvar Load - Unbalanced (types 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13)
END/ LOADS
NAME, KCAT, KTYP, PA, QA, PB, QB, PC, QC Table B-12. kW, kvar Load - Unbalanced (types 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13)
Data Item NAME KCAT KTYP PA QA PB QB PC QC Node name Load category code (1, 2, 3, or 4); see Section B.1.9.1, Load Categories Load type code; see Section B.1.9.2, Load Type Definitions Phase A nominal real power load, kW Phase A nominal reactive power load, kvar Same as above for Phase B Same as above for Phase C Description
B.1.9.3.2 kW, kvar Load - Balanced (types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33)
END/ LOADS
NAME, KCAT, KTYP, PA, QA
B-11
Table B-13. kW, kvar Load - Balanced (types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33)
Data Item NAME KCAT KTYP PA QA Node name Load category code (1, 2, 3, or 4); see Section B.1.9.1, Load Categories Load type code; see Section B.1.9.2, Load Type Definitions Total nominal real power load Total nominal reactive power load Description
B.1.9.4 Machine Loads

In PSS/ADEPT there are limitations regarding machines. For further information, see Appendix A.
B.1.9.4.1 Rules
A negative load value designates the machine is a generator. A machine may be placed out-of-service by setting its machine type to the negative of its type number. Machine data records may be entered in any order, with multiple records being entered for nodes at which more than one type of machine is connected.
B.1.9.4.2 Asynchronous Machine Load (types 51-90, 151-190)

NAME, KCAT, KTYP, LOAD, RATING, KVNOM END/ LOADS
Table B-14. Asynchronous Machine Load (types 51-90, 151-190)

Data Item NAME KCAT KTYP LOAD RATING KVNOM Node name Load category code (1, 2, 3, or 4); see Section B.1.9.1, Load Categories Load type code; see Section B.1.9.2, Load Type Definitions Total real electrical power consumed by the machine in kW (types 51-70, 151-170, or total mechanical power delivered by the machine in hp (types 71-90, 171-190) Nominal electrical rating of the machine in kVA or nominal mechanical rating in hp depending on type (defaults to SKVAM from Machine Dictionary) Nominal voltage of machine; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data, start-up parameter file or activity OPTN (defaults to node base voltage) Description
B.1.9.4.3 Synchronous Machine Load (types 91-99, 191-199)

NAME, KCAT, KTYP, LOAD, RATING, KVNOM, VSCHED, QMAX, QMIN
END/ LOADS
B-12
Table B-15. Synchronous Machine Load (types 91-99, 191-199)

Data Item NAME KCAT KTYP LOAD RATING KVNOM VSCHED QMAX QMIN Node name Load category code (1, 2, 3, or 4); see Section B.1.9.1, Load Categories Load type code; see Section B.1.9.2, Load Type Definitions Total real electrical power consumed by the machine in kW Nominal electrical rating of the machine in kVA (defaults to SKVAM from Machine Dictionary) Nominal voltage of machine; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data (defaults to node base voltage) Scheduled terminal voltage to be held by machine voltage regulator, in per unit of base voltage of node (defaults to Vs from Machine Dictionary) Maximum reactive power output of the machine in per unit of RATING (defaults to QMAX from Machine Dictionary) Minimum reactive power output of the machine in per unit of RATING (defaults to QMIN from Machine Dictionary) Description
B.1.10 MWh Load Data Section

B.1.10.1 MWh Load Data - Unbalanced (types 5, 6, 15, 16)
END/ CONSUMER
NAME,KTYP,LZ,LC,EA,CA,PFA,KWA,EB,CB,PFB,KWB,EC,CC,PFC,KWC Table B-16. MWh Load Data - Unbalanced (types 5, 6, 15, 16)
Data Item NAME KTYP LZ LC EA CA PFA kWA EB CB PFB kWB EC CC PFC KWC Same as above for Phase C Node name Load type code; see Section B.1.9.2, Load Type Definitions Percent of load to be constant impedance (0. < LZ < 100.) 0 for nonconcentrated load at the node 1 for concentrated load at the node Phase A nominal MWh/month load Phase A number of consumers Phase A power factor of load Phase A resultant kW after load converted (setting this value to zero will enable the program to calculate the equivalent peak load demand) Same as above for Phase B Description
B-13
B.1.10.2 MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36)
END/ CONSUMER
NAME,KTYP, LZ, LC, EA, CA, PFA, KWA Table B-17. MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36)
Data Item NAME KTYP LZ LC EA CA PFA kWA CB PFB kWB CC PFC KWC Same as above for Phase C Node name Load type code; see Section B.1.9.2, Load Type Definitions Percent of load to be constant impedance (0. < LZ < 100.) 0 for nonconcentrated load at the node 1 for concentrated load at the node Total MWh/month load Total number of consumers Average power factor for load Phase A resultant kW after load converted (setting this value to zero will enable the program to calculate the equivalent peak load demand) Same as above for Phase B Description
B.1.11 Capacitor Data Section

The total capacitor kvar is divided equally between the phases present at the node. On single-phase nodes the capacitor must be specified with a positive value of CVAR to indicate a phase-to-ground connection. On three or two-phase nodes the capacitor bank is connected as grounded-wye if CVAR is positive and as delta if CVAR is negative. A negative value of CVAR does not indicate a shunt reactor or inductive load. Up to two capacitors can be placed at each node; one fixed and the other switched. The total capacitance at each node is the sum of the fixed and switched kvar used.
B.1.11.1 Fixed Capacitors

Data definitions are the same as the first five elements of data records for switched capacitors (Section B.1.11.2).
NAME, TYPE, CVAR, STATUS, KVNOM END/ CAPS
B.1.11.2 Switched Capacitors

NAME, TYPE, CVAR, STATUS, KVNOM, LOWR, HIGHR, REGN, STEP, PRIOR END/ CAPS
B-14
PSS/U Input File Formats Construction Data Dictionary File Format
Table B-18. Fixed Capacitors or Switched Capacitors Data

Data Item NAME TYPE CVAR STATUS Node name Capacitor type code (F)ixed or (S)witched Total nominal capacitor reactive power capacity connected at the node; (units are kvar at KVNOM base voltage) Status of capacitor bank 0.0 out-of-service *fraction of kvar used for switched banks only 1.0 in-service Nominal voltage of capacitor bank; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data Lower boundary of regulated range Upper boundary of regulated range Regulated node Switching increment Switching priority 1.0 F Description Default
KVNOM LOWR HIGHR REGN STEP PRIOR
Node base voltage 0.95 pu 1.05 pu Local node 1.0 0
B.2 Construction Data Dictionary File Format

B.2.1 General Information
The Construction Data Dictionary File contains the line characteristics that will be referred to in reading data into the working case. Each line type is identified by a name of one to ten alphanumeric characters; and is specified by one or more records as required. A branch that is a line or cable has impedances in ohm/unit length and charging in micromhos/unit length. If the branch is a transformer, series capacitor, or series reactor, impedances should be in pu on kVA base and charging must equal zero. When the branch is a switch, all impedances and charging must equal zero. The Construction Data Dictionary gets read when a PSS/U file is opened. Users must have a copy of the default construction dictionary (PTI.CON). Each entry in the construction data dictionary file must contain the basic data record (Section B.2.4) and may contain any required number of the following records: two-phase data records, if different from three-phase values (Section B.2.5), one-phase data records, if different from three- or two-phase values (Section B.2.6), rating data record (Section B.2.7), reliability data record* (Section B.2.8). Comment lines may be used anywhere in the Construction Dictionary. Comment lines begin with an exclamation point (!) as illustrated below: ! string where string can be any information.
B.2.2 Data Assumptions

If no values are entered for two-phase and one-phase, the three-phase value will be assumed.
* This data record is used only with the optional reliability module, it is ignored in PSS/ADEPT.
B-15
If BC1 either or BC0 is absent, their default value is zero. For lines or cables, impedances are in ohm/unit length and charging is in micromhos/unit length. For transformers, series capacitors, or series reactors, impedances are in pu on kVA base and charging must equal zero. A1, A2, A3, and A4 are specified in amps per phase if the branch is a line, cable, or switch. For a transformer, series capacitor, or series reactor A1, A2, A3, and A4 are given by: Desired Rating where Base kVA Desired Rating is an actual thermal kVA rating such as winter, summer, or fans-running rating, and 'Base kVA' is the nameplate kVA rating of the device. Note that for an open-delta transformer, the kVA rating is 57.7% of what it would be if all three windings were present.
TAB characters are not allowed - use spaces only. The last line in the file must be: END/.
B.2.3 Typical Construction Dictionary Data Record

Using all the options, a construction data dictionary entry will look as follows:
NAME *2 *1 * *R END/ R1, X1, R0, R1, X1, R0, R1, X1, R0, A1, A2, A3, , RP, SWT, X0, BC1, X0, BC1, X0, BC1, A4 PSS, M, BC0 BC0 BC0 S
! ! ! ! !
Basic Data Record Two-phase Data Record One-phase Data Record Rating Data Record Reliability Data Record
The first line must always contain valid entries. For example, if a wire named 'LINE1' is a single phase construction only, the construction file entry will read: LINE10, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0 Only the first line of a construction dictionary data record is required; all other lines (*2, *1, *, *R) are optional.
B.2.4 Basic Data Record

NAME, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
Table B-19. Basic Data Record

Data Item NAME R1 X1 R0 X0 BC1 BC0 Positive-sequence resistance Positive-sequence reactance Zero-sequence resistance Zero-sequence reactance Positive-sequence charging admittance Zero-sequence charging admittance Description Construction type name, 1 to 10 characters/numbers; may not be an asterisk (*)
B-16
B.2.5 Two-Phase Data Records (if different from three-phase values)

*2, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0 Table B-20. Two-Phase Data Record
Data Item *2 R1,X1 R0,X0 BC1,BC0 Mandatory continuation record Same as above Description
B.2.6 One-Phase Data Records (if different from three- or two-phase values)
*1, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
Table B-21. One-Phase Data Records

Data Item *1 R1,X1 R0,X0 BC1,BC0 Mandatory continuation record Same as above Same as above Description
B.2.7 Rating Data Record

* A1, A2, A3, A4 Table B-22. Rating Data Record
Data Item * A1 A2 A3 A4 Mandatory continuation record symbol Rating one Rating two Rating three Rating four Description
B.2.8 Reliability Data Record

This record is used only with the optional reliability module, DRA.
*R , RP, SWT, PSS, M, S
B-17
Table B-23. Reliability Data Record

Data Item *R RP SWT PSS M S Description Mandatory continuation record symbol, R signifies reliability data Failure Rate of construction type in failures/unit length/unit time Repair Time of construction type in unit time Switch time for switches only; given in unit time Probability of Successful Switching; a value between 0 and 1 Temporary Failure Rate of construction type in failures/unit length/unit time Storm Failure Rate of construction type in storm failures/unit length/unit time
Two-phase (*2) and one-phase (*1) data records must precede rating (*) and reliability (*R) data records.
B-18
Appendix C
Validation Criteria
C.1 Data Validation Criteria
Validation Criteria System System base 0 Default system voltage 0 Nodes Nominal voltage 0 or blank Name not unique Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name Set to system default Reject case Reject case, will generate invalid format since commas, spaces, / are delimeters. Set to abs value of Set to H Considered delimeters, will cause invalid format of data file Reject case Reject case Reject case Considered delimeters, will cause invalid format of data file Reject case Reject case Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Set to 100 Set to 7.2 Require user fix Require user fix Action When Reading Data File Action in Property Sheet
Node length < 0 Node orientation not equal to V or H Lines Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name Given construction type not referenced in dictionary and impedances not given FROM and/or TO nodes do not exist Branch not of type L,S,T,SX,TS Switches Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name FROM and/or TO nodes do not exist Branch not of type L, S, T, SX, TS
Require user fix N/A N/A N/A Require user fix N/A N/A Require user fix N/A
C-1
Validation Criteria Data Validation Criteria
Validation Criteria Loads Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name Connected node does not exist Sources Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name Connected node does not exist Series Capacitors/Reactors Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name FROM and/or TO nodes do not exist Given construction type not referenced in dictionary and impedances not given Rating (kVA/phase) 0 Branch not of type L, S, T, SX, TS Shunt Capacitors Nominal voltage (kV) 0. Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name Connected node does not exist Regulated node not specified Vmax 0 Vmin 0 Vmax < Vmin Transformers Single-phase size 0 Regulated voltage limit Vmax 0 Regulated voltage limit Vmin 0 Voltage limits Vmax < Vmin Tap limit Tmax 0 Tap limit Tmin 0 Tap limits Tmax < Tmin Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name Adjustment data record for transformer branch missing Missing ranch data record for transformer adjustment data FROM and/or TO nodes do not exist
Action When Reading Data File Considered delimeters, will cause invalid format of data file Reject case Considered delimeters, will cause invalid format of data file Reject case Considered delimeters, will cause invalid format of data file Reject case Reject case Set to system base Reject case Set to system default Considered delimeters, will cause invalid format of data file Reject case Set to connected node Set to 1.05 Set to 0.95 Interchange Set to 1/3 system base Set to 1.05 Set to 0.95 Interchange Set to 1.10 Set to 0.90 Interchange Considered delimeters, will cause invalid format of data file Create adj record with defaults, no message Reject case Reject case
Action in Property Sheet N/A Require user fix N/A Require user fix N/A Require user fix Will not happen Require user fix N/A Require user fix N/A Require user fix Set to connected node Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix N/A N/A N/A Require user fix
C-2
Validation Criteria Data Validation Criteria
Validation Criteria Given construction type not referenced in dictionary and impedances not given Tap step 0 Tap setting > Tmax Tap setting < Tmin Tap step > (Tmax-Tmin) Branch not of type L,S,T,SX,TS Synchronous Machines Rating (kVA) 0 Nominal voltage (kV) 0. Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name Connected node does not exist Given machine type not referenced in dictionary Qmax < Qmin ra < 0 Xd' < 0 Xd" < 0 Locked rotor resistance < 0 Locked rotor reactance < 0 Xd' < Xd" Induction Machines Rating (kVA) 0 Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name Connected node does not exist Given machine type not referenced in dictionary Nominal voltage (kv) 0. ra < 0 Xd' < 0 Xd" < 0 Locked rotor resistance < 0 Locked rotor reactance < 0 Xd' < Xd"
Action When Reading Data File Reject case Set to 0.00625 Set to Tmax Set to Tmin Set to Tmax-Tmin Reject case Set to system base Set to system default Considered delimeters, will cause invalid format of data file Reject case Reject case Interchange Set to 0 Set to 0 Set to 0 Set to 0 Set to 0 Interchange Set to system base Considered delimeters, will cause invalid format of data file Reject case Reject case Set to system default Set to 0 Set to 0 Set to 0 Set to 0 Set to 0 Interchange
Action in Property Sheet Will not happen Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix N/A Require user fix Require user fix N/A Require user fix N/A Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix N/A Require user fix N/A Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix Require user fix
C-3
Validation Criteria User-Specified Network Validation Criteria
C.2 User-Specified Network Validation Criteria

Sources More than one source in service Positive-sequence source impedance = 0 Zero-sequence source impedance = 0 Two or more swing sources are specified on the same bus Capacitors Capacitor size = 0 Lines Nominal voltage of FROM node not equal to nominal voltage of TO node Positive-sequence impedance = 0 (X1 and R1 =0) Zero-sequence impedance = 0 (X0 and R0 =0) Line length = 0 (L=0) Series Capacitors/Reactors Positive-sequence impedance = 0 (X1 and R1 =0) Zero-sequence impedance = 0 (X0 and R0 =0) Transformers Nominal voltage of FROM node not equal to nominal voltage of TO node Positive-sequence impedance = 0 (X1 and R1 =0) Zero-sequence impedance = 0 (X0 and R0 =0) Synchronous Machines Nominal voltage of machine not equal to nominal voltage of node Positive sequence impedance = 0 (Xd = 0) Zero-sequence impedance = 0 (X0 and R0 =0) Subtransient impedance = 0 (X"d = 0) Transient impedance = 0 (Xd = 0) Induction machines Nominal voltage of machine not equal to nominal voltage of node Zero-sequence impedance = 0 (X0 and R0 =0) Subtransient impedance = 0 (Xd = 0)
C-4
Appendix D
Modeling
D.1 Nodes
Nodes are the connection points of a network (see Figure D-1). The connectivity of branch devices (lines, cables, transformers, switches, etc.) are defined by a starting point (the FROM node) and an ending point (the TO node). Similarly, shunt devices (loads, sources, machines, etc.) are situated at nodes. There are two types of nodes within the Base Engine: single-phase nodes and three-phase nodes. Internally, each three-phase node expands into three single-phase nodes, one each for phases A, B, and C.
Single-Phase Node Single Connection Point
A B C
98003
Three-Phase Node Connection Points for Phases A, B, and C
Figure D-1. Nodes
D.1.1 Three-Phase Node

Each three-phase node also has a nominal voltage and optional name, both of which are specified when the node is added to the network. Whenever a three-phase node is created, three singlephase nodes are automatically generated, one each for phases A, B, and C. The three single-phase nodes are given the same nominal voltage as the three-phase node but are left unnamed.
D-1
Modeling Sources
D.2 Sources
A source is generally used to supply (or remove) power to a network or to provide a reference voltage. In some cases it serves as an idealized equivalent for a connecting network. There are both three-phase and single-phase sources in the Base Engine. A particularly important type is the threephase swing source, which sets a voltage magnitude and angle reference for the system, and also supplies/absorbs whatever power is needed to make power consumption and generation match in the network. A swing source is so important that every network in the Base Engine must have a swing source or a synchronous generator operating in the swing mode. In a distribution system, a source is often used to represent the transmission system; doing this removes the need to model the transmission itself. As an example, a source might be connected to a distribution substation, with all the distribution feeders connected to the substation modeled in detail. The source would represent the outside world, i.e., all the connections to the transmission system.
D.2.1 Three-Phase Source

A three-phase source consists of three single-phase voltage sources connected in a Y. Each phase has an ideal voltage source in series with an impedance. The source has the same voltage magnitude in all three phases; the voltage angle in the B/C phases is displaced 120/240 from the A phase. The three series impedances are equal to each other. There can also be mutual impedance between the phases. A three-phase source is often represented by its zero/positive/negativesequence equivalent, shown in (Figure D-2). There are two three-phase source types: Swing A swing source holds the positive-sequence voltage magnitude and angle at the terminals to a designated value, e.g., 1.0 pu at an angle of 0. The control is accomplished by changing the magnitude and angle of E, shown in the figure Figure D-2. If the network is unbalanced, the phase voltages at the source terminals may not have equal magnitude, nor may they be exactly displaced 120 in phase. It is the positive-sequence voltage that is regulated, not each phase individually. As mentioned before, every network, or disjoint portion of a network (island), must contain a swing source or synchronous machine operating in swing mode. Voltage-Behind-ImpedanceA voltage-behind-impedance source has a constant internal voltage magnitude (kV) and angle (degrees). Another way to think of this source is that it is the same as a swing source except manipulation of E is not possible; E remains at a predesignated magnitude and angle. Key to Symbols: E R1 + jX1 R0 + jX0 Rg + jXg Complex voltage behind positive-sequence impedance. Complex positive-sequence impedance of the source. Complex zero-sequence impedance of the source. Complex grounding impedance of the source: the impedance, if any, that is placed between the source neutral and ground.
D-2
Modeling Sources
E R1 X1 Positive Sequence
R1
X1
Negative Sequence
Ro + 3 R g
Xo + 3 X g
Zero Sequence
98004
Figure D-2. Sequence Representation of a Three-Phase Source A drawing of the three-phase source is shown in Figure D-3. The source can have a grounding impedance Zg = Rg + jXg. The impedances shown in this drawing are the self impedance Zs and the mutual impedance Zm. We have two ways of looking at the source, the zero/positive/negativesequence model and the ABC phase model. The two models are equivalent and the impedances are related. The positive-sequence impedance Z1 = Zs Zm and the zero-sequence impedance Z0 = Zs + 2Zm. The negative-sequence impedance is equal to the positive-sequence, Z2 = Z1. With the addition of a grounding impedance, the total zero-sequence impedance of the source is Z0 = Zs + 2Zm + 3Zg. Usually engineers use the terms positive and zero-sequence impedance rather than self (Zs) and mutual Zm) impedance. Going along with that preference it is the positive and zerosequence impedances which the user specifies for the source. Internally, the Base Engine does the conversion calculations and builds the three-phase source with self and mutual values.
D-3
Modeling Sources
Figure D-3. Three-Phase Representation of Source
D-4
Modeling Loads
D.3 Loads
Loads are the consumers of power in an electric network. The Base Engine contains both single-phase loads and three-phase loads. Either falls into one of three categories: Constant-Power Load Power consumed by a constant-power load remains constant over the normal range of operating voltage. If terminal voltage dips too far however, the power consumed by the load is decreased. Constant-Current Load The power consumed by a constant-current load varies linearly with terminal voltage over the normal range of operating voltage. When voltage increases, power consumed by the load increases; when voltage decreases, power consumed by the load decreases. Constant-Impedance Load The constant-impedance load is simply an impedance and the power it absorbs varies as the square of the magnitude of the voltage at the load terminals. It can also be used in some unexpected ways. By specifying the reactive power appropriately it can be a shunt reactor or shunt capacitor. Using a grounding impedance with a constant impedance load acting as a shunt reactor allows modeling of the special four-legged reactors used on high voltage systems. If a single-phase delta connected constant impedance is specified with an outrageously large value of power it becomes a shorting bar for connecting different phases together. The inventive user can probably think of other non-conventional uses.
Both the single-phase load and the three-phase load are shown in Figure D-4. Either may be connected line-to-line or line-to-ground. There is no restriction on the number of loads that can be placed on a node. Key to Symbols on Figure D-4: P + jQ Pa + jQa Pb + jQb Pc + jQc Rg + jXg The complex power (kW, kvar) of a single-phase load at nominal voltage. The complex powers (kW, kvar) of a three-phase load at nominal voltage for phases A, B, and C, respectively. The complex grounding impedance of the load: the impedance, if any, that is placed between the load neutral and ground (for wye-connected three-phase loads).
D-5
Modeling Loads
P + jQ
P + jQ
Single-Phase Load (Line-to-Ground)
Single-Phase Load (Line-to-Line or Line-to-Neutral)
C Pc + jQc
Pc + jQc Pb + jQb Pa + jQa
Pa + jQa
Pb + jQb Rg + jXg B B Three-Phase Load (Delta) Three-Phase Load (Wye)

98006
Figure D-4. Single-Phase and Three-Phase Loads
D.3.1 Single-Phase Load

As shown in the Figure D-4, each single-phase load exists in the network in one of two ways: (1) the load is attached to two single-phase nodes (line-to-line or line-to-neutral), or (2) the load is attached between one single-phase node and ground (line-to-ground).
D.3.2 Three-Phase Load

Power, both real and reactive, consumed by a three-phase load at nominal terminal voltage is specified separately for phases A, B, and C. As shown in Figure D-4, the three-phase load may be wyeconnected (line-to-ground or line-to-neutral) or delta-connected (line-to-line). Wye-connected loads may have a grounding impedance.
D-6
Modeling Shunt Capacitors
D.4 Shunt Capacitors

Shunt capacitors are used to increase the voltage at certain locations in an electric network by supplying reactive power (see Figure D-5). Shunt capacitors are often installed in discrete blocks that may be switched into or out of service as needed. A separate device, a shunt capacitor controller, is used to automatically switch blocks of capacitors into or out of service to maintain selected voltages within a control range.
kvarc
kvarc
kvara
kvarb
kvara kvarb
Rg + jXg
B Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor (Delta)
B Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor (Wye)

98007
Figure D-5. Shunt Capacitors
D.4.1 Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor

The reactive power produced by the capacitor at nominal terminal voltage is specified separately for phases A, B, and C. If the specified power is negative (reactive power is consumed) the device is a shunt reactor. As shown above, the three-phase shunt capacitor may be wye-connected (line-to-neutral) or delta-connected (line-to-line). Wye-connected shunt capacitors may have a grounding impedance.
D-7
Modeling Shunt Capacitor Controllers
D.5 Shunt Capacitor Controllers

A shunt capacitor controller is used to switch banks of shunt capacitors into and out of service to maintain a particular voltage within a control range. During a load flow solution, each controller monitors a voltage at one location in the network and switches banks of capacitors into or out of service to control that voltage.
D.5.1 Controller for a Three-Phase Shunt Capacitor

The controller determines how much of a three-phase shunt capacitor is in service. The controller must know which capacitor is being controlled and which voltage is being monitored. Various options are set using the controller type: The phase or phases whose voltage(s) are regulated. Whether average, maximum, or minimum voltage is controlled. Whether line-to-ground or line-to-line voltage is controlled. Whether blocks of capacitors on different phases are switched independently or are switched together (ganged). Time delay, used if more than one device is controlling the voltage at a single node. For example, if a transformer controller and a shunt capacitor controller are both regulating the voltage at a particular node, and if the capacitor controller has a time delay of 0.0 and the transformer controller time delay is 1.0 (any number larger than 0.0) the capacitor controller will have command until the shunt capacitor reaches the limit setting. If at that time the node voltage is still not within the specified range the transformer controller will take over. This example assumes that the two controllers were both trying to hold the node voltage in the same range.
D-8
Modeling Synchronous Machines
D.6 Synchronous Machines

Synchronous machines are wonderfully complicated, although some people might not use that adverb. They have a lot of use in power systems. The large generators at nuclear and fossil fuel generating plants are synchronous machines. They are also used at smaller generating plants, i.e., being driven by steam turbines or diesel motors. In these applications the synchronous generator is driven at high rotational speeds, usually either 3600 or 1800 rpm. In size, the generators electrical capability extends from near 1,400,000 kVA (1400 MVA) down to 20 MVA or smaller. The machine rotors are a steel cylinder with the field windings placed in slots on the rotor, called a round rotor design. Synchronous machines are also used as generators in hydro plants. In this case they are driven at slower speeds (80 to 500 rpm), and have a different type of rotor design described as salient pole. In the past hydro generators ranged in size from less than 1 MVA up to around 150 MVA. Now, however, there are units rated 700 MVA each in service. Synchronous machines are also used as motors, usually in industrial situations. Motors do not come in sizes as large as the big generators; they are available from less than 1 MVA up to around 100 MVA. They are available in a wide range of speeds. Synchronous motors have salient pole rotors. Applications using the Base Engine might model synchronous machines running in any (or all) of the above three categories. Detailed modeling of synchronous machines is complicated for a couple of reasons. First, in addition to the regular windings on the stator and rotor synchronous many machines have additional windings called damper windings. These dampers may be explicitly wound on the rotor or they may be implicit, for example circulating currents in an iron round rotor cause the same behavior as damper windings. The presence of the damper windings, explicit or implicit, results in a large number of impedances and time constants (reactance/resistance ratios) needed to describe synchronous machines. The second reason for the complexity is that synchronous generators normally have a control system to adjust field excitation in response to network changes, and the excitation system must also be modeled. The Base Engine can model synchronous machines in considerable detail. For some applications this is appropriate. For example, there is an extension of the Base Engine which calculates the time dependence of the fault current from synchronous machines; the detailed modeling is needed to do that. For other applications, such as loadflow and simple short circuit calculations, the detailed model is not necessary. There are functions in the engine that assist in simplifying synchronous machine use. We will start by considering the machine loadflow model.
D-9
D.6.1 Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

The three-phase loadflow model of the synchronous machine is shown in Figure D-6. The synchronous machine can be connected either wye or delta. Looking at the wye connection, it can be seen that the machine looks much like a source; in fact a source is essentially just a simplified model of a machine. The self and mutual impedances required are calculated by the Base Engine from the data supplied for the machine. The alternate sequence representation of the machine for a loadflow is in Figure D-7. Again, the sequence impedances are calculated from the supplied data. Because the machine is rotating, the positive and negative-sequence impedances are not equal, as assumed in the source model. If the machine is delta connected, the zero-sequence impedance is infinite. During a loadflow simulation, the internal voltage E is adjusted to model what is happening inside the machine. Just how the adjustment is made depends on what type was designated, swing, PV or PQ as explained below. Swing The internal voltage E will be adjusted so the machine terminal voltage stays at the magnitude and angle dictated. The adjustment will be made only up to the machine capabilities (the limits of reactive power that the machine can absorb/supply). The internal voltage E will be adjusted so the machine terminal voltage magnitude stays at the dictated value and the machine absorbs the real power specified. Again, machine capabilities limit the control. E will be adjusted so the machine draws the dictated real and reactive power.
PV
PQ
If a network were modeled that had a large number of generators in it, normally only one would be set as the swing machine; the others would then run as type PV. Motors usually do not have the capability to control their terminal voltage, and would be set as type PQ. Key to Symbols: E R1 + jX1 R2 + jX2 R0 + jX0 Rg + jXg Complex voltage behind positive-sequence impedance. Complex positive-sequence impedance of the machine. Complex negative-sequence impedance of the machine. Complex zero-sequence impedance of the machine. Complex grounding impedance of the machine: the impedance, if any, that is placed between the machine neutral and ground.
D-10
Figure D-6. Phase Representation of Synchronous Machine
D-11
E R1 X1 Positive Sequence
R2
X2
Negative Sequence
Ro + 3 R g
Xo + 3 X g
Zero Sequence
98008
Figure D-7. Sequence Representation of a Synchronous Machine
D-12
D.6.2 Short Circuit Model of Synchronous Machine

The short circuit model of a synchronous machine is simple the voltage E (determined from a previous loadflow simulation) behind the machine subtransient or transient impedance (the user specifies which is to be used). There are subtransient and transient impedances for both the d and q axes (Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq). There are five synchronous machines included in PSS/ADEPT that the user can select. The five machines are shown in the table below.
Machine Number 1 2 3 4 5
Description of Machine Large round rotor, 500 to 1000 MVA, fossil or nuclear. Small round rotor, 200 - 300 MVA, fossil. Hydro with damper windings (also used for motors). Hydro without damper windings. Combustion turbine, 50 MVA.
D-13
The machine parameters for each of the machines are shown in the table below.
Parameter Xd Xd Xd Xq Xq Xq ra r2 X0 tdo Machine 1 .20 pu .30 pu 2.0 pu .21 pu .30 pu 1.7 pu .002 pu .02 pu .05 pu .035 s 7.0 s .035 s 1.5 s .1 pu .4 pu 4.0 s .002 pu .20 pu Round Yes Machine 2 .20 .30 1.5 .20 .50 1.4 .003 .02 .09 .03 6.0 .08 .6 .1 .4 4.0 .003 .2 Round Yes Machine 3 .20 .30 1.0 .30 .60 .60 .003 .03 .15 .035 6.0 .046 .2 .6 3.0 .003 .2 Salient Yes Machine 4 .30 .40 1.0 .60 .60 .60 .003 .03 .15 .046 6.0 .1 .6 3.0 .003 .3 Salient No Machine 5 .10 .16 1.65 .10 .30 1.6 .03 .35 .05 .05 7.0 .11 1.5 .1 .3 6.0 .03 .1 Round Yes Description d-axis subtransient reactance (pu) d-axis transient reactance (pu) d-axis synchronous reactance (pu) q-axis subtransient reactance (pu) q-axis transient reactance (pu) q-axis synchronous reactance (pu) Armature resistance (pu) Negative-sequence resistance (pu) Zero-sequence reactance (pu) d-axis open circuit subtransient time constant (s) d-axis open circuit transient time constant (s) d-axis open circuit subtransient time constant (s) d-axis open circuit transient time constant (s) Saturation at 1.0 pu voltage (pu) Saturation at 1.2 pu voltage (pu) Machine plus turbine inertia constant (s) Locked rotor resistance (pu) Locked rotor reactance (pu) Indicator of round or salient pole rotor Indicator for damper windings present
D-14 Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International
tdo tqo
tqo
Sat1.0 Sat1.2 H rlr Xlr Rotor type Damper?
D.6.3 Simplified Synchronous Machine Modeling

For a loadflow, if the synchronous machine is operating within normal limits the impedances do not matter. The machine will consume (power specified positive) or generate (power specified negative) the specified power. It will also attempt to regulate the voltage magnitude at its terminal node or other node, if one is specified. Regulation is accomplished by varying the reactive power consumed by the machine, so it is important to get the maximum and minimum reactive power consumption capabilities correct, or reasonably close to correct. The ability of a generator to absorb/supply reactive power is described by a set of generator capability curves; the curves are a sometimes complex function of field current limits, armature current limits, stability criteria, intake air temperature, etc. etc. In some cases the exciter may have control limits programmed into it. If the machine real power is about 80% of the rating, then a reasonable set of maximum/minimum values is (.25, -.50) or perhaps (.30, -.60). The values indicate that the machine can supply more reactive power than it can absorb. If the machine real power is already at 100% of rating, then it can probably neither supply nor absorb additional reactive power. If there is no real power load on the machine, then obviously the machine can supply more reactive power than when it was loaded. For short circuit calculations the d- and q-axis subtransient and transient impedances are used, so it is important to specify these as accurately as possible. Impedance ratios for the four can be seen in the 5 synchronous machines supplied in the Base Engine. For a round rotor machine a general assumption is Xd = Xq. Motors are generally salient pole machines with a damper winding included to assist in motor starting, so Machine 3, hydro with damper windings is a good starting place for a motor model. For synchronous motor starting, the d-axis subtransient reactance Xd is used to calculate starting current, so it should be specified as accurately as possible if motor starting simulations are to be performed.
D-15
Modeling Induction Machines
D.7 Induction Machines

Three-phase induction machines are modeled using a full two-circuit (double cage) representation of the machines rotor (see Figure D-8). Either real electrical power (kW) consumed by the machine or shaft power (hp) produced by the machine must be specified. Electrical power consumed by an induction motor is a positive number; electrical power consumed by an induction generator is a negative number. Key to Symbols: s jX0 Ra + jXa R1 + jX1 R2 + jX2 jXm Slip (pu). Zero-sequence reactance, (pu on machine kVA base). Armature impedance, (pu on machine kVA base). Impedance of the first rotor circuit, (pu on machine kVA base). Impedance of the second rotor circuit, (pu on machine kVA base). Magnetizing reactance, (pu on machine kVA base).
Ra + jXa R2 + j X2 s R1 + j X1 s jXm Positive Sequence
Ra + jXa R2 + j X2 2-s R1 + j X1 s jXm Negative Sequence
Ra + jX0 3(Rg + jXg) Zero Sequence
98010
Figure D-8. Sequence Representation of Induction Machine
D-16
Modeling Induction Machines
D.7.1 Three-Phase Induction Machine

Terminals of induction machines may be connected line-to-neutral (wye) or line-to-line (delta). Wyeconnected induction machines may have a grounding impedance. Parameters needed to characterize an induction motor are tabulated below. These data are not readily available from machine documentation or from the machine manufacturers. Instead they must be inferred from torque-slip, current-slip, and/or power-factor-slip curves, which are readily available. Parameters representative of induction motors in the four National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) classes (A, B, C, and D) are also shown below. Machine parameters are defined in Figure D-8.
NEMA A Ra Xa X0 Xm R1 X1 R2 X2 0.020 0.065 0.030 3.400 0.080 0.057 0.013 0.100
NEMA B 0.020 0.065 0.030 3.400 0.090 0.025 0.025 0.031
NEMA C 0.020 0.065 0.030 3.400 0.095 0.050 0.017 0.031
NEMA D 0.020 0.065 0.030 3.000 0.055 0.045 0.0 0.0
D-17
Modeling Lines
D.8 Lines
Lines (and cables) carry power over long distances (see Figure D-9). Both single-phase lines and three-phase lines may be added to the network. A single-phase line is placed between two singlephase nodes, one each at the FROM and TO ends of the line. Similarly, a three-phase line is placed between two three-phase nodes, one each at the FROM and TO ends of the line. The phases (A, B, and/or C) actually present in a three-phase line are specified when the line is added to the network. Therefore, it is possible to construct three-phase lines that have conductors on one, two, or all three phases.
FROM Single-Phase Node
Single-Phase Line
TO Single-Phase Node
FROM Three-Phase Node Three-Phase Line with Three Phases
TO Three-Phase Node
FROM Three-Phase Node Three-Phase Line with Two Phases (Phase BC Shown) FROM Three-Phase Node Three-Phase Line with One Phase (Phase C Shown)
TO Three-Phase Node
TO Three-Phase Node
98011
Figure D-9. Single-Phase and Three-Phase Lines
D.8.1 Single-Phase Line

As shown in Figure D-9, each single-phase line exists in the network between two single-phase nodes.
D.8.2 Three-Phase Line

As shown in Figure D-9, each three-phase line is connected between two three-phase nodes, one each at the FROM and TO ends of the line. The phases (A, B, and/or C) that actually have a conductor are specified. A three-phase line therefore may have conductors for one, two, or all three phases.
D-18
Modeling Switches
D.9 Switches
When closed, switches are a short circuit between two nodes of a network; when open, a switch has no impact on currents and voltages (see Figure D-10). Three-phase switches may be defined in the network. A three-phase switch joins two three-phase nodes.
FROM Three-Phase Node
TO Three-Phase Node
TO Three-Phase Node
Phase ABC
Phase AB
TO Three-Phase Node
TO Three-Phase Node
Phase BC
Phase CA
TO Three-Phase Node
TO Three-Phase Node
Phase A
Phase B 98012
TO Three-Phase Node
Phase C
Figure D-10. Three-Phase Switches
D.9.1 Three-Phase Switch

As shown in Figure D-10, a three-phase switch is connected between two three-phase nodes, one each at the FROM and TO ends of the switch. The phases in the switch (A, B, and/or C) must be specified for each switch. A three-phase switch therefore may have one, two, or all three phases present.
D-19
Modeling Transformers
D.10 Transformers
Transformers consist of two or more magnetically coupled windings; the ratio of the number of turns in the windings is the turns ratio(s) of the transformer. Transformers are used to raise or lower voltage levels in a network, provide zero-sequence grounding, isolate sections of a network, and regulate voltages. In PSS/Engines, two-winding transformers have two terminals, named FROM and TO. Transformers have taps that change the winding ratio. Network voltages can be controlled within a range by adjusting the transformer taps. Most transformers can be grounded through an impedance on the FROM, TO, or both sides.
D.10.1 Transformer Node Connection

A transformer is connected to two three-phase nodes, one on the FROM side and the other on the TO side of the transformer. Although the FROM and TO nodes have connections for three phases, the phases actually present in a transformer can be specified, enabling three phase, two phase and single phase banks to be modeled. The phasing that is specified applies to the FROM side of the transformer; this will be explained in more detail below. In PSS/Engines the transformer configuration can be seen in its name. For example, a delta-wye transformer has the windings on the FROM side delta () connected and those on the TO side wye (Y) connected. This convention has nothing to do with which winding is the "primary" or "secondary" or which is the "high voltage" or "low voltage" winding. The user can consider either side the primary winding, and either side of the transformer could be connected to the node with the highest base voltage.
D.10.2 Transformer Taps

In the physical transformer the taps are in one or more of the windings. Taps can be either load changing (they operate while the transformer is on) or non load changing (the transformer must be removed from the network before the taps can be changed). The transformer taps in PSS/Engines are in the TO side winding. The single exception is the wye-connected auto transformer, which has taps on both windings. The taps are load changing, although they can also be locked at a particular setting to model non load changing. A second method can be used to model non load changing taps in the FROM side winding; the method is to specify a transformer FROM side voltage slightly different from the actual value.
D.10.3 Transformer Phasing

In PSS/Engines the specified phasing applies to the FROM winding. If the FROM side is wye connected, the connection is straightforward. If the phasing is "A" there is a winding connected from phase A of the FROM node to ground (possible through a grounding impedance). There are no other FROM side windings. Similar logic applies when B, C, AB, BC or ABC phasing is specified. The logic is slightly more complicated when the FROM side winding is delta connected. A lagging sequence nomenclature is used, i.e., A to B, B to C, and C to A. So, if the FROM side is delta connected and the specified phasing is "A" the winding is connected between the A and B phases of the FROM node. If the specified phasing is "AB" there are two windings on the FROM side, one connected A to B and the other connected B to C. What windings exist on the TO side of the transformer? First, there are the same number of windings on the TO side as on the FROM side. If the phasing specification was "A" there is one winding on the FROM side and one winding on the TO side; the two windings are of course magnetically
D-20
coupled. If both sides of the transformer are wye, or both sides are delta, as would be expected the same winding exists on both sides. When one side of the transformer is delta connected and the other wye connected the connection depends on whether the TO side voltage leads or lags the FROM side voltage. As an example, consider the delta-wye transformer and the delta-wye -30 transformer. Both are transformers connected delta on the FROM side and wye on the TO side. Suppose a delta-wye transformer is created and "A" phasing is specified. This means that on the FROM side the winding is connected from A to B. On the TO side the winding is connected from A to ground. If a delta-wye -30 transformer with "A" phasing is created, again the winding on the FROM side is connected from A to B. However, to provide the required phase shift the TO side winding is connected B to ground. The magnetic coupling polarity is also flipped, but this is done automatically and need not concern the user.
D.10.4 Transformer Grounding

Transformer windings that connect to ground can have an external impedance inserted between the transformer terminal and the actual ground connection. This impedance is called the grounding impedance. Wye connected windings have grounding impedance capability, and in PSS/Engines you can specify a grounding impedance for a wye winding. If no impedance is specified a value of 0 Ohms is used; with zero grounding impedance the term "solidly grounded" is often used. Delta connected windings have no opportunity to meet the ground, so a grounding impedance is not possible. There are some special grounding cases, such as the auto transformers, the center tapped transformers, and the zig-zag transformers. These special situations will be discussed later.
D-21
D.10.5 Summary of Transformers Types

There are many transformers supported by PSS/Engines. The table below summarizes transformer types and indicates the availability of threephase, two-phase, and single-phase versions of the transformer. Each transformer type is described more fully in the sections that follow.
Transformer Type Wye-Connected Autotransformer
Description The TO side is the series winding and normally the high voltage connection. The FROM side connects to the common winding and normally is the low voltage side. Grounding impedance for the autotransformer is specified on the FROM side. There is no grounding impedance on the TO side. Connected lagging (A - B, B - C, C - A. The TO side is the series winding, the FROM side connects to the common winding. Usually connected with series winding on the source side and voltage on the FROM side regulated. Taps are on the TO side (the series winding). The two-phase regulator is configured with a common neutral. There is no grounding impedance is for this transformer. The TO side is the series winding, the FROM side connects to the common winding. Usually connected with series winding on the source side and voltage on the FROM side regulated. Taps are on the TO side (the series winding). The FROM side grounding impedance is used for the regulator ground. The FROM side of the transformer is connected line-to-line with the winding center point grounded through any grounding impedance specified on the FROM side. The TO side is connected line-to-line (delta). Tap changer is on the TO side. Only comes as a single-phase unit; three-phase unit can be constructed by placing two single-phase or one two-phase delta/delta units in parallel, resulting in a three-phase delta bank with one-winding center tapped on the FROM side. There is no grounding impedance on the TO side. Two impedance values are used to specify the transformer, the full winding leakage impedance and the half-winding leakage impedance.
Single Phase Yes
Two Phase Yes
Three Phase Yes
Delta-Connected Autoregulator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wye-Connected Autoregulator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Center-Tapped Delta +30
Yes
No
No
Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International D-23
Transformer Type Center-Tapped Wye
Description The FROM side of the transformer is connected line-to-line with the winding center point grounded through any grounding impedance specified on the FROM side. The TO side is connected line-to-ground (wye) through any grounding impedance specified on the TO side. There is a +30 phase change across the FROM side to the TO side. Tap changer is on the TO side. Only available as a single-phase unit; three-phase unit can be constructed by placing two single-phase or one two-phase delta-wye units in parallel resulting in a three-phase delta bank with one-winding center tapped on the FROM side. Two impedance values are used to specify the transformer, the full winding leakage impedance and the half-winding leakage impedance. The FROM side of the transformer is connected line-to-line with the winding center point grounded through any grounding impedance specified on the FROM side. The TO side is connected line-to-ground (inverted wye) through any grounding impedance specified on the TO side. There is a -30 phase change across the FROM side to the TO side. Tap changer is on the TO side. Only available as a single-phase unit; three-phase unit can be constructed by placing two single-phase or one two-phase delta-wye units in parallel, resulting in a three-phase delta bank with one-winding center tapped on the FROM side. Two impedance values are used to specify the transformer, the full winding leakage impedance and the half-winding leakage impedance. FROM side is an inverted-delta; TO side is a wye. Also represents a transformer with FROM side delta and TO side inverted-wye. There is a -30 phase shift from the FROM side to the TO side of the transformer. FROM side of the transformer is a delta; the TO side is an inverted-delta. There is a 180 phase shift from the FROM side to the TO side of the transformer. There are no grounding impedances. FROM side is a delta; TO side is a delta. No phase shift across the transformer. There are no grounding impedances. FROM side is a delta; TO side is a wye. There is a +30 phase shift from the FROM side to the TO side of the transformer. There is grounding impedance on the FROM side.
Single Phase Yes
Two Phase No
Three Phase No
Center-Tapped Delta -30
Yes
No
No
Delta-Wye -30
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Delta +180
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Delta Delta-Wye +30
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Wye-Wye
Transformer Type Wye-Wye +180 Wye-Delta +30
Description FROM side of the transformer is a wye; the TO side is an inverted-wye. There is a 180 phase shift from the FROM side to the TO side of the transformer. FROM side is a wye; TO side is an inverted-delta. Also represents FROM side inverted-wye and TO side delta. There is a +30 phase shift from the FROM side to the TO side of the transformer. There is no grounding impedance on the TO side. FROM side is a wye; TO side is a delta. There is a phase shift of -30 across FROM to TO side of the transformer. There is grounding impedance on the TO side. FROM side is a wye; TO side is a wye. FROM side is a zig-zag; TO side is a wye. Only comes as a three-phase unit. A grounding impedance can be specified for the FROM side; there is no grounding impedance on the TO side. Taps are on the TO side. The auxiliary resistance and reactance are used to specify the transformer zero-sequence impedance looking into the FROM side. The phase-to-ground voltage on the TO side lags that on the FROM side by 30. FROM side is a zig-zag; TO side is a wye. Only comes as a three-phase unit. A grounding impedance can be specified for the FROM side; there is no grounding impedance on the TO side. Taps are on the TO side. The auxiliary resistance and reactance are used to specify the transformer zero-sequence impedance looking into the FROM side. The phase-to-ground voltage on the TO side lags that on the FROM side by 330 (leads by 30). FROM side is a zig-zag; TO side is a wye. Only comes as a three-phase unit. A grounding impedance can be specified for the FROM side; there is no grounding impedance on the TO side. Taps are on the TO side. The auxiliary resistance and reactance are used to specify the transformer zero-sequence impedance looking into the FROM side. The phase-to-ground voltage on the TO side lags that on the FROM side by 150.
Single Phase Yes Yes
Two Phase Yes Yes
Three Phase Yes Yes
Wye-Delta -30
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes No
Yes No
Yes Yes
Z-Wye -30
Z-Wye +30
No
No
Yes
Z-Wye -150
No
No
Yes
Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International D-25
Transformer Type Z-Wye +150
Description FROM side is a zig-zag; TO side is a wye. Only comes as a three-phase unit. A grounding impedance can be specified for the FROM side; there is no grounding impedance on the TO side. Taps are on the TO side. The auxiliary resistance and reactance are used to specify the transformer zero-sequence
Single Phase No
Two Phase No
Three Phase Yes
impedance looking into the FROM side. The phase-to-ground voltage on the TO side lags that on the FROM side by 210 (leads by 150).
Modeling Transformer Details
D.11 Transformer Details

D.11.1 Wye-Wye Transformers
Both FROM and TO sides are wye-connected and any phasing (A, B, and/or C) may be specified. Grounding impedances can be specified for either or both sides. A grounding impedance of 0.0 solidly grounds the neutral on the side the zero impedance is specified. A wye-wye transformer with phasing ABC is shown in Figure D-11. This transformer is shown in considerable detail because it is the first to be considered. The winding dots show the polarity of the magnetic linkage; here they are shown for the B phase winding, the others are left out to keep the diagram simpler. Zl is the leakage impedance, shown here on the FROM side of the transformer, although it could be drawn on either side. Notice that the transformer is connected to a three-phase node on the FROM and TO side. If instead of specifying the transformer phasing as ABC, it was AB, then the C windings on FROM and TO would disappear. However, the FROM and TO nodes would still have three phases, there would simply be no connection from the transformer to the C phase terminal of either node. Remember that except for the AUTO_Y, taps are on the TO side of the transformer, as shown in the figure. The phases on the FROM side are labeled ABC and on the TO side abc in our diagram, but there is no special significance to this. There is no phase shift across the wye-wye transformer. The wye-wye +180 is the same as the wye-wye except the polarity dots on the TO side of the transformer would flip to the other side of the winding (actually either side could be flipped). Because voltages and currents on one side of the transformer are flipped, there is a 180 phase shift across the wye-wye +180. There is another notational method that is sometimes used to specify transformers. The FROM side uses a capital letter to specify the winding type and the TO side uses a small letter. This is followed by a number which indicates the number of 30 segments by which the TO side lags the FROM side.
Figure D-11. Wye-Wye Transformer with ABC Phasing
D-26
D.11.2 Delta-Delta Transformers

These transformers are delta-connected on both the FROM and TO sides. Any phasing combination may be specified. A delta-delta transformer with phasing ABC is shown in Figure D-12. This diagram is less detailed than the one above for the wye-wye transformer; the FROM and TO nodes are not shown. The taps and the leakage impedance are also omitted. No grounding impedances are shown, as they are not possible with a delta-winding. There is no phase shift across this transformer. With the delta-delta, the "A" phase connects between phases A and B of the node, the "B" phase between B and C, etc. The delta-delta +180 has the winding polarity flipped on one of the windings and there is a 180 phase shift across the transformer. In the alternate notation these are Dd0 and Dd6 transformers.
Figure D-12. Delta-Delta Transformer with ABC Phasing For illustration, Figure D-13 shows a delta-delta with "A" phasing specified. The FROM side winding goes from A to B on the FROM node, and the TO side winding does the same.
Figure D-13. Delta-Delta Transformer with A Phasing
D.11.3 Wye-Delta Transformers

For a wye-delta, the FROM side of this transformer is wye-connected, and TO side is delta. Any phasing may be specified. A wye-delta with phasing ABC is shown in Figure D-14. There can be a grounding impedance on the FROM side in the neutral of the wye-winding, but none is possible in the delta-winding. There is a -30 phase shift across the transformer, e.g., the phase A phase-toground voltage on the TO side lags the phase A phase-to-ground voltage on the FROM side by 30 when the transformer is unloaded (there is no current through it). When there is current flowing through the transformer there is a voltage drop across the leakage impedance and the phase shift will not be exactly 30. This transformer is Yd1 in the alternate notation.
D-27
It can be tricky to trace through the winding configuration to see the phase shift across the transformer. Sometimes drawing a phasor diagram helps. Or, in words, consider the voltage across winding "A" on the FROM side. Since the winding is wye-connected the winding voltage is the phase-to-ground voltage. Neglecting the turns ratio, the voltage across the "A" winding on the TO side is the same as the winding voltage on the FROM side. However, the TO side winding is connected phase-to-phase, which leads the phase-to-ground voltage by 30. Therefore the phase-toground voltage on the TO side is 30 behind that on the FROM side. The preceding explanation illustrates why a picture is worth a thousand words!
Figure D-14. Wye-Delta Transformer with ABC Phasing Figure D-15 shows a wye-delta with phasing specified as "A" instead of "ABC". The winding on the FROM side is now wye-connected, and the "A" winding is the one from the A phase terminal-toground at the FROM node. It is coupled winding on the TO side goes between phases A and B on the TO node.
Figure D-15. Wye-Delta Transformer with A Phasing
D-28
Physically, the wye-delta +30 is the same as the wye-delta; the difference is just some changes in the labeling of the terminals. Shown below (Figure D-16) is a wye-delta +30 with phasing ABC; the transformer is the same as the TRAN_YD above, except the labels of the B and C phases have been flipped on the FROM and TO sides. Notice that if the wye-delta +30 was specified with B phasing instead of ABC, the winding on the FROM side would go from phase B to ground, the same as with the wye-delta. However, the TO side winding would connect between phase A and B instead of B and C as for the wye-delta.
Figure D-16. Wye-Delta +30 Transformer with ABC Phasing
D.11.4 Delta-Wye Transformers

The delta-wye is exactly the same transformer as the wye-delta, except the FROM and TO terminals have been flipped. The reason for offering both relates to the taps, which are on the TO side. Choose the wye-delta if the taps are in the delta winding, the delta-wye if the taps are in the Y winding. The delta-wye with ABC phasing is shown in Figure D-17.
Figure D-17. Delta-Wye Transformer with ABC Phasing The delta-wye -30 is exactly the same as the wye-delta +30 with the labeling flipped. Choose between the wye-delta +30 and delta-wye -30 according to which winding has the tap on the physical transformer you are modeling.
D-29
D.11.5 Wye Autotransformer

The wye autotransformer has the windings of each phase stacked on top of each other. A drawing of an wye autotransformer with ABC phasing is shown in Figure D-18. Usually, when an autotransformer is constructed, the windings are stacked with additive polarity, as shown in the figure. In that case, the FROM side is the low voltage side and the TO side is high voltage. However, it is possible to construct an auto with subtractive polarity, and it can be modeled in the PSS/Engines if the FROM is the high voltage side and the TO is low voltage. The wye autotransformer model has load changing taps on both sides of the transformer, i.e., separate taps in the series and common windings. One set can be used for load changing taps and the other for non-load changing taps. Any neutral impedance for the wye autotransformer is specified on the FROM side; there is no grounding on the TO side. The phasing of the auto is straightforward. If an wye autotransformer were specified with A phasing, the other two sets of windings would simply disappear. There is no phase shift across the transformer.
Figure D-18. Wye Autotransformer with ABC Phasing
D-30
D.11.6 Autoregulators
The autoregulators, wye autoregulator and delta autoregulator are simply autotransformers with the turns in the series winding a fraction of those in the common winding, for example 10%. The transformers are configured the same as the wye autotransformer, the FROM side connects to the common winding and the TO side to the series winding. The taps are in the series winding, and the tap mechanism can also flip the series winding back and forth between additive and subtractive polarity (compared to the common winding). Usually the nodes on the FROM and TO side of the regulator have the same nominal voltage. When the taps are set at 1.0 the transformer is a short circuit (zero turns in the series winding). These transformers usually have a current transformer (CT) and potential transformer (PT) in the case with the transformer and tap changer, and operate with the voltage on the FROM side being controlled. However, in PSS/Engines they can operate to control the voltage on either side. The leakage impedance of the autoregulator is a function of the tap position; as already mentioned with a tap setting of 1.0 the transformer is a short circuit. The maximum transformer impedance occurs when all the turns of the series winding are in service, and actually is slightly different when the series winding is in additive polarity compared to subtractive polarity. This leads to the situation of what impedance should be specified when the transformer is added to the network, i.e., maximum, average, or what? This subject is discussed further later. The wye autoregulator is essentially the same as the wye autotransformer and the user can refer to Figure D-18 for the wye autotransformer. Any number of phases can be specified, there is no phase shift across the transformer and any grounding impedance is specified on the FROM side. The delta autoregulator is a little more complicated than the wye autoregulator. A diagram of an delta autoregulator with ABC phasing is shown in Figure D-19.
Figure D-19. Delta Autoregulator with ABC Phasing
D-31
Notice the tap mechanism in the series winding and also that the series winding can be flipped. The transformer impedance varies with the tap; the user enters a characteristic impedance Zc; as already mentioned there will be more discussion of this later. Either side can be the regulated side, although commonly it is the FROM side. The regulator is connected lagging, the first phase of the regulator (the only one that would be there if the regulator was specified with phase A) has the common winding connected between the A and B terminals of the FROM side, and the other two windings are connected with the same logic. At the present time, PSS/Engines does not have a regulator with a leading connection. The delta autoregulator is obviously line-to-line connected, and PSS/Engines will automatically look at the line-to-line voltage of the node at which the voltage is being regulated. Delta-connected autoregulators are often connected with only two phases, called an open delta configuration. However, the connection is not what would be obtained from the above drawn delta autoregulator with phasing ABC if one of the phases were simply dropped. Instead the two phases are connected with the common windings at the same neutral point. If the user specifies AB, BC or CA phasing for the delta autoregulator, the transformer will be configured with the common neutral. This is shown in Figure D-20. The drawing has been simplified; Zc is not shown. Notice that the second winding has been flipped from what it was in the ABC phased regulator; this allows the B phase to go directly through. The first regulator, operating between A and B is still lagging, but the second regulator is operating leading. Similar transformers will be obtained if BC (C phase goes straight through) or CA (A phase goes straight through) phasing is specified.
Figure D-20. Delta Autoregulator with AB Phasing
D-32
D.11.7 Specifying the Impedance of the Autoregulator Transformers

The leakage impedance that should be specified for an autoregulator is called here the characteristic impedance. The impedance is derived considering how the leakage impedance is specified on the transformer nameplate. It will probably be specified in one of four ways: At maximum boost (maximum tap position with polarity the same). At maximum buck (minimum tap position with polarity the same). The average of the leakage impedance at maximum boost and the impedance at maximum buck. The average of leakage impedances for all tap positions.
The procedure below is used to calculate the "characteristic" impedance ( R and X ) for an autoregulator.
Calculate a tap range parameter () for the transformer.
Max MinTap = --------------------------------------2

For example, a transformer with 10% regulation:
MaxTap = 1.1 MinTap = 0.9 1.1 0.9 - = 0.1 = --------------------2

If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is given at maximum boost (maximum tap position). Calculate the scale factor, . 2
(1 + ) = ------------------2
The characteristic resistance, R, and reactance, X, needed for arguments 13 and 14 are:
R = R np X = X np
If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is given at maximum buck (minimum tap position) Calculate the scale factor, . 2
(1 ) = ------------------2
R = R np X = X np
D-33
If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is the average for maximum boost and maximum buck.
Calculate the scale factor, .
1 = ----2
R = R np X = X np
If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is the average for all tap positions or If the condition under which the nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) was obtained is unknown. Calculate the scale factor, .
0.5 = ------------------------------------------------------ 1 + -----------------------+ + 1n 1 2 1

R = R np X = X np
If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is unknown Calculate the scale factor, . 2
(1 ) = ------------------2
R = 0.005 X = 0.040
D.11.8 Center-Tapped Split-Phase Transformers

The center-tapped transformers are used to obtain split single-phase voltages, e.g., the 120/240 V used for residential wiring in the United States. The FROM side of the transformer has the center tapped winding, and is connected line-to-line, with the center point of the winding grounded. In the 120/240 residential example the line-to-line voltage would be 240 V, while the phase-to-ground voltage for either terminal on the FROM side would be 120 V. Notice that the voltage relationship (240/120 = 2) is different than the ratio of line-to-line to phase-to-ground voltages for the threephase system (3). There will be more discussion of this difference later. The center tapped transformers come only as single-phase units, A, B, or C. The TO side of the transformer, which has the taps as usual, can be connected either delta or wye. The center-tapped transformers are actually a three-winding transformers; they can be connected to the network using only two nodes because the two windings on the FROM side are in series. A two-winding transformer requires the specification of a single leakage impedance. A three-winding transformer requires three leakage impedances to be specified. Two of the three impedances are assumed equal to each other, so only two have to be supplied by the engine user. The first is the full winding leakage impedance, with the full winding used on the FROM side, and the other is the half-winding value. As you might expect this is obtained with only half the winding used on the FROM side. Generally, the half-winding value is about 1.5 times the full winding impedance.
D-34
Consider first the center-tapped delta, with the TO side connected delta (line-to-line) as shown in Figure D-21.
Figure D-21. Center-Tapped Delta with A Phasing A grounding impedance can be used on the FROM side of the center-tapped delta; none is possible on the TO side. Usually, you would not put two center-tapped delta transformers with different phase specification (e.g., one A and one B) in parallel because the center taps would create a network short and some high fault currents. You can construct a three-phase bank by paralleling a centertapped delta with two single-phase delta-delta units or one two-phase unit. The combination models a delta-delta with ABC phasing, except one of the banks on the FROM side is center-tapped. A drawing of this transformer is shown in Figure D-22.
Figure D-22. "A Phase" Center-Tapped Delta and "BC Phase" Delta-Delta in Parallel to make a Three-Phase Bank The FROM side of the center-tapped delta is connected to a three-phase node. As mentioned before, in a three-phase system the ratio of line-to-line voltage to line-to-ground is 3. This transformer does not conform to that rule, and the nominal voltage on the FROM side must be specified as the line-to-line voltage divided by 3. Therefore, in the 240/120 V example we have been discussing, the FROM side nominal voltage should be 138.6 V. The center-tapped wye and center-tapped delta -30 transformers are similar to the center-tapped delta. The difference is that on the TO side the winding is connected line-to-ground instead of lineto-line. A drawing of the center-tapped wye with A phasing is shown in Figure D-23. A grounding impedance on the TO side can be specified for the center-tapped wye. Grounding impedances can be used on both the FROM and TO sides.
D-35
Figure D-23. Center-Tapped Wye with A Phasing The center-tapped delta -30 with A phasing is shown in Figure D-24; notice the only change is the inversion of the TO winding.
Figure D-24. Center-Tapped Delta -30 with A Phasing A three-phase bank with one winding center tapped can be constructed using either the centertapped wye or center-tapped delta -30 transformer as long as ZgTO = 0. For the center-tapped wye, parallel it with two single-phase delta-wye units (or one two-phase unit). For the center-tapped delta -30, use delta-wye -30 units in parallel.
D.11.9 Z-Wye (ZY) Transformers (Zig-zag)

The ZY transformers are three-phase only. Single and two-phase versions are not available. The FROM side of the transformer is Z (zig-zag) connected and the TO side is Y (wye) connected. As usual, the taps are on the TO (wye) side. The ZY transformers are actually three-winding transformers. However, because of the winding interconnections they can be placed between two nodes; the third node is not needed. Two impedances are necessary for the ZY transformer. The first is the normal leakage impedance the transformer positive-sequence impedance. The second is the zero-sequence impedance looking into the FROM (zig-zag) side of the transformer. This zero-sequence impedance is smaller than the positive-sequence impedance.
D-36
The interesting feature of the ZY transformers is that the zero-sequence impedance looking into the TO (wye) side of the transformer is infinite. This is completely different than the usual behavior of a Y connected set of windings. In fact, the zig-zag winding on the FROM side makes the wye winding behave as if it were a delta winding. A grounding impedance can be entered on the FROM side of the transformer. Since the zerosequence impedance looking into the TO side is already infinite, addition of a grounding impedance would have no effect, and so is not allowed. Figure D-25 shows a diagram of the Z-wye -30 transformer; the phase-to-ground voltage on the TO (wye) side lags that on the FROM (zig-zag) side by 30. Perhaps the easiest way to see this is to examine the A phase voltage on the FROM side. Ignoring turns ratios for the moment, notice it is the sum of the A phase voltage on the TO side plus the negative of the B phase voltage on the TO side. Drawing the phasor diagram shows that the A phase voltage on the FROM side leads the A phase voltage on the TO side by 30.
Figure D-25. Z-Wye -30 Transformer with Voltage on the TO Side 30 Behind FROM Side
D-37
D.11.10 All Transformers Single-Phase, Two-Phase and Three-Phase

Transformer Phase ABC Drawing
AB
Wye-Wye
D-38
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Wye-Wye +180
D-39
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Delta-Delta
D-40
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Delta-Delta +180
D-41
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Wye-Delta
D-42
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Wye-Delta +30
D-43
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Delta-Wye
D-44
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Delta-Wye -30
D-45
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Wye Autotransformer
D-46
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Wye Autoregulator
D-47
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
AB
Delta Autoregulator
Center-Tapped Delta
D-48
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
Center-Tapped Delta and Two-Phase Delta-Delta
Center-Tapped Wye
Center-Tapped Delta -30
ABC
Z-Wye -30
D-49
Transformer
Phase ABC
Drawing
Z-Wye +30
ABC
Z-Wye -150
ABC
Z-Wye +150
D-50
Modeling Transformer Tap Controllers
D.12 Transformer Tap Controllers

A transformer tap controller is used to adjust transformer tap positions to maintain a particular voltage within a control range. During a load flow solution, each controller monitors voltage at one location in the network and moves a transformers taps to control that voltage.
D-51
Modeling Series Capacitor/Reactor
D.13 Series Capacitor/Reactor

Series capacitors are sometimes used to increase the amount of power that can be sent over a line; a series reactor is sometimes used to limit fault current (Figure D-26). Either can be modeled by specifying a positive-sequence and zero-sequence resistance and reactance for the device. Reactance for a series capacitor is a negative number. Reactance for a series reactor is a positive number.
TO Three-Phase Node
TO Three-Phase Node
Phase ABC
Phase AB
TO Three-Phase Node
TO Three-Phase Node
Phase BC
Phase CA
TO Three-Phase Node
TO Three-Phase Node
Phase A
Phase B 98023
TO Three-Phase Node
Phase C
Figure D-26. Three-Phase Series Capacitors/Inductors
D-52
Modeling Faults
D.13.1 Three-Phase Series Capacitor/Reactor

A three-phase series capacitor is placed between two three-phase nodes, one each at the FROM and TO ends of the capacitor. The phases (A, B, and/or C) actually present in a three-phase series capacitor is specified when the series capacitor is added to the network. Therefore, it is possible to construct three-phase series capacitors that have capacitors on one, two, or all three phases.
D.14 Faults
Three-phase faults are applied at three-phase nodes of a network. There are three types of three-phase faults: (1) line-to-line faults, (2) line-to-ground faults, and (3) line-to-line-to-ground faults.
D.14.1 Line-to-Line Fault

The specified fault impedance Zf is connected line-to-line as shown in Figure D-27. Impedance between adjacent phases is Zf. Either one, two, or all three phases may be involved in the fault.
Zf Zf Zf
Zf Zf
Zf Zf
Zf
Zf
B Phase ABC C A C
B Phase AB A C
B Phase BC A
B Phase CA
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf = Fault Impedance
B Phase A
B Phase B
B Phase C
98024
Figure D-27. Line-to-Line Faults
D-53
Modeling Faults
D.14.2 Line-to-Ground Fault

The specified fault impedance Z f is connected line-to-ground as in Figure D-28. Impedance between any phase and ground is Zf. Either one, two, or all three phases may be involved in the fault.
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
B Phase ABC C A C
B Phase AB A C
B Phase BC A
B Phase CA
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf = Fault Impedance
B Phase A
B Phase B
B Phase C
98025
Figure D-28. Line-to-Ground Faults
D-54
Modeling Faults
D.14.3 Line-to-Line-to-Ground Fault

The specified fault impedance Zf is connected line-to-neutral as shown in Figure D-29. A grounding impedance Zg is connected from the neutral point of the fault to ground. Impedance between adjacent phases is 2 Zf. Impedance between a phase and ground is Zf + Zg. Either one, two, or all three phases may be involved in the fault.
Zf Zg Zf
Zf Zg Zf
Zf
Zf Zg Zf
Zf Zg
Zf
B Phase ABC
B Phase AB
B Phase BC
B Phase CA
Zf Zg Zg Zf
Zf Zg Zf = fault impedance Zg = grounding impedance B Phase C
B Phase A
B Phase B
98026
Figure D-29. Line-to-Line-to-Ground Faults
D-55
D-56
Appendix E
NEMA Machine Classes
Three-phase induction machines are modeled using a full two-circuit representation of the machines rotor (see Figure E-1). This model describes the steady-state equivalent characteristics of an induction machine. Electrical power consumed by an induction motor is represented by a positive r1,s and r2/s resistive number. Electrical power consumed by an induction generator is represented by a negative r2/s number.
ra
Xa
r1/s Xm X1
r2/s
X2
98061-1
Figure E-1. Induction Machine Equivalent Circuit The key standard that specifies dimensions, ratings, and characteristics of motors manufactured in the United States is covered by the National electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard MG 1-1993, Motors and Generators. Standard NEMA-frame squirrel-cage induction motors are given a NEMA class design letter. The equivalent parameters that are needed to characterize an induction motor for various NEMA class designs (A, B, C, D, and E) are shown in Table E-1. If the equivalent parameters are not available, they must be inferred from torque slip, current slip, and/or power factor slip curves, which are available from the manufacturers. The standard NEMA class design induction machine parameters are available to the user in PSS/ADEPT. The program default machine type is NEMA class Type B.
E-1
NEMA Machine Classes
Table E-1. Impedance Values for NEMA Machines

NEMA Design ra Xa Xm r1 X1 r2 X2 R1r X1r A 0.03 0.08 2.8 0.015 0.11 0.07 0.06 0.0565 0.126 B 0.03 0.09 2.8 0.025 0.11 0.15 0.04 0.0753 0.149 C 0.05 0.08 3.0 0.04 0.18 0.10 0.01 0.117 0.120 D 0.05 0.05 2.8 0.115 0.05 0.0* 0.0* 0.161 0.104 E 0.03 0.10 2.8 0.01 0.15 0.06 0.15 0.0461 0.175
*NEMA Type D machine has a single cage. The value 0.0 disables the second cage.
E-2
Appendix F
Device Properties Summary
F.1 Network
Table F-1. Network Properties: System
Device Property Circuit ID Definition Circuit ID Type Character Restrictions 8-character maximum, no embedded blanks, not currently used Not currently used Line-to-line Line-to-neutral Must be an existing node in the network Default Blank
Peak current (A) Input voltage type Root node
Substation peak current Input voltage units
Real number Character
0.0 Line-to-neutral First active (inservice) source found in the network 1000 7.2 (LN) 60 Blank
Starting node for tracing the Character network tree
System three-phase base kVA System standard base voltage (kV) System frequency (Hz) Comments
System base kVA used to Real calculate source impedance number Default node voltage if none Real specified in node properties number Frequency of the network Title lines and comments Real number Character
None None None None
F-1
Device Properties Summary Network
Table F-2. Network Properties: Reliability

Device Property Substation name Definition Identifier for the substation where reliability is to be considered Type Character Restrictions 8-character maximum, no embedded blanks None Default Blank
Overhead failure rate (failures/unit length/yr) Overhead repair time (hr) Underground failure rate (failures/unit length/yr) Underground repair time (hr) Switch time (hr)
How often the overhead line Real fails per year number Amount of time it takes to repair the failed overhead line How often the underground cable fails per year Real number Real number
0.0
None
0.0
Applies to construction types starting with UG
0.0
Amount of time it takes to repair the failed underground cable Amount of time it takes to open a switch
Real number Real number
Applies to construction types starting with UG Applies to construction types which indicate a switch (zero impedance line section)
0.0
0.0
F-2
Device Properties Summary Nodes
F.2 Nodes
Table F-3. Node Properties
Device Property Name Base voltage Definition Unique name identifier Type Character Restrictions Default
12-character maximum, no Automatically embedded blanks assigned None 7.2
Nominal base voltage (kV) Real of the node. Line-line or number line-neutral based on the input voltages defined in network properties. Description x-coordinate of node on the diagram y-coordinate of node on the diagram Bus bar type on the diagram Busbar rotation in degrees Real number Identifies where node label is placed relative to the node point Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram List box Real number Real number
Description X position Y position Type Rotation Label configuration Visibility flag
None None None Busbar, point Does not apply to point type nodes Does not apply to busbar type nodes None
Blank x-coordinate of drawn node y-coordinate of drawn node User selected from Item Toolbar 0 1 (first quadrant, horizontal text) Visible
Check box
Results visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-3
Device Properties Summary Lines/Cables
F.3 Lines/Cables
Table F-4. Lines/Cables Properties
Device Property Name Phasing Line length Construction type Definition Unique name identifier Phasing of line section Type Character Character Restrictions Default
12-character maximum, Automatically no embedded blanks assigned ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, ABC C None 1.0
Length of line section in user- Real defined units number Reference to construction type in the construction dictionary file Character
10-character maximum, Blank no embedded blanks None 0.05
Positivesequence resistance Positivesequence reactance Zero-sequence resistance Zero-sequence reactance Positivesequence charging admittance Zero-sequence charging admittance Ratings (A)
Positive-sequence resistance Real specified in ohm/unit length number Positive-sequence reactance specified in ohm/unit length Zero-sequence resistance specified in ohm/unit length Zero-sequence reactance specified in ohm/unit length Positive-sequence charging admittance specified in S/unit length Zero-sequence charging admittance specified in S/unit length Ampere ratings used to calculate overloaded lines Real number Real number Real number Real number
None
0.65
None None None
0.1 1.55 6.5
None
4.0
Up to a maximum of 4 Assigned from ratings can be specified construction dictionary or default properties None None In Service Visible
In-service flag Visibility flag
Flag indicating whether line section is in or out of service Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram
Check box Check box
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-4
Device Properties Summary Transformers
F.4 Transformers
Table F-5. Transformer Properties: General
Device Property Name Phasing Type Definition Unique name identifier Phasing of transformer Transformer type Type Character Character Character Restrictions 12-character maximum, no embedded blanks ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, C Default Automatically assigned ABC
Wye-wye Wye-wye Wye-delta -30 Wye-delta +30 Delta-wye -30 Delta-wye +30 Delta-connected auto regulator Delta-delta Wye-connected auto regulator Center-tapped delta Center-tapped wye Wye-wye with phase shift Wye-auto None None 1000.0 0.0
Nameplate Rating
kVA rating of the transformer per phase
Phase shift (deg) Phase shift (wye-wye with phase shift transformers only)
Construction type Reference to construction Character type in the construction dictionary file Tapped node Leakage resistance (fullwinding resistance) Leakage reactance (fullwinding reactance) Half-winding resistance Half-winding reactance Node where the tapped side Character of the transformer is located Leakage resistance (fullwinding resistance) specified in per unit Leakage reactance (fullwinding reactance) specified in per unit Half-winding resistance specified in pu Half-winding reactance specified pu Real number
10-character maximum, no embedded blanks 12-character maximum, no embedded blanks Must be >= 0.0
Blank
Specified TO node 0.008
Real number
Must be >= 0.0
0.08
Must be >=0.0. Must be >= 0.0. For center-tapped delta and center-tapped wyetransformers, halfwinding reactance must be > full-winding reactance
0.008 0.08
F-5
Table F-5. Transformer Properties: General (Cont.)

Device Property Definition Type None Restrictions 0.0 Default
FROM grounding Grounding resistance at the Real resistance FROM side of the number (grounding resis- transformer. tance for deltaconnected auto regulators) FROM grounding Grounding reactance at the reactance FROM side of the (grounding reac- transformer. tance for deltaconnected auto regulators) TO grounding resistance TO grounding reactance Ratings (A) Real number
None
0.0
Grounding resistance at the Real TO side of the transformer. number Grounding reactance at the TO side of the transformer. Real number
None None Up to a maximum of 4 ratings can be specified
0.0 0.0 Assigned from construction dictionary or default properties In Service Visible
Per-unit ratings used to cal- Real culate overloaded number transformers Flag indicating whether line Check section is in or out of service box Flag indicating whether item Check box is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram Check box
In-service flag Visibility flag
None None
None
Visible (checked)
F-6
Table F-6. Transformer Properties: Tap Control

Device Property Tap adjustment Definition Voltage adjustment setting Type Radio buttons Restrictions Default
Taps adjusted indepen- Taps locked in dently in each phase. present position Taps in all phases in equal position. Taps locked in present position. Transformer disconnected at both primary and secondary (out of service). Must be between minimum and maximum tap settings Must be between minimum and maximum tap settings Must be between minimum and maximum tap settings None 1.0
Tap setting in Phase A Tap setting in Phase B Tap setting in Phase C Maximum tap setting Minimum tap setting Tap step
Phase A tap setting in pu
Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number
Phase B tap setting in pu
1.0
Phase C tap setting in pu
1.0
Maximum allowed tap adjustment setting in pu Minimum allowed tap adjustment setting in pu Tap step increment specified in pu
1.1
Must be less than max- 0.9 imum pu tap setting Cannot exceed maximum minus minimum tap setting Valued for wye-auto transformers only Must be > 0 0.00625
Load tap side Time delay
Side where load tap is located Radio button Identifies the order in which the transformer controllers operate Real number
TO side 0
F-7
Table F-7. Transformer Properties: Regulation

Device Property Max voltage Min voltage Regulated node Definition Type Restrictions Must be greater than minimum voltage in pu Default 1.05
Maximum controlled voltage in Real pu number Minimum controlled voltage in Real pu number Node at which the voltage reg- Character ulation is to occur Side of the transformer where Radio the regulated node is located button
Must be less than max- 0.9 imum voltage in pu 12 character maximum, no embedded blanks Specified TO node
Tapped/Untapped side
Specified only when Tapped side regulated node is other than the transformer terminal nodes (FROM or TO) None None None None Must be an existing node None 0.0 0.0 1 1 None TO side
Compensating resistance Compensating reactance PT Ratio CT Radio Load center node Transformer side
Compensating resistance specified in ohm Compensating reactance specified in ohm Transformer PT Ratio Transformer CT Radio Node where load center is located
Real number Real number Real number Real Number Character
Side of the transformer where Radio compensating Z is to be button calculated
F-8
Device Properties Summary Static Loads
F.5 Static Loads

Table F-8. Load Properties: Rectangular Representation
Device Property Name Type Definition Unique name identifier Load type Type Character Character Restrictions Default
12-character maximum, Automatically no embedded blanks assigned Constant power. Constant current. Constant impedance. Balanced Unbalanced Grounded-wye Delta None Constant power
Balanced/ Unbalanced Groundedwye/delta
Specified load is a balanced load or unbalanced load
Radio button
Unbalanced Grounded wye kW = 200 kvar = 100 kW = 300 kvar = 150
Load connected as grounded Radio (wye) or ungrounded (delta) button
Phase A kW, kvar Actual load at phase A speci- Real fied in real and reactive number power or total load for balTotal anced cases Phase B kW, kvar Actual load at phase B speci- Real fied in real and reactive number power Phase C kW, kvar Actual load at phase C speci- Real fied in real and reactive number power Grounding resistance Grounding reactance In-service flag Visibility flag Grounding resistance (ohms) Real number Grounding reactance (ohms) Real number Flag indicating whether load is in or out of service Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram Check box Check box
None
kW = 200 kvar = 100 kW = 200 kvar = 100 0.0 0.0 In service Visible
None
None None None None
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
If a load is specified as balanced, only the total kW and kvar is specified. The application will divide the load equally amongst the phases present. If a scale and power factor has been specified in the Network Properties: Load Factors tab, the application will calculate the kvar based on the kW entered and the specified scale and power factors.
F-9
Device Properties Summary Static Loads
Table F-9. Load Properties: Polar Representation

Device Property Name Type Definition Unique name identifier Load type Type Character Character Restrictions Default
12-character maximum, Automatically no embedded blanks assigned Constant power Constant current Constant impedance Balanced Unbalanced Grounded-wye Delta None None None Constant power
Balanced/ Unbalanced Groundedwye/delta Phase A S (kVA) Total Phase A pf Total Phase A pf lead/lag Phase B S (kVA) Phase B pf Phase B pf lead/lag Phase C S (kVA) Phase C pf Phase C pf lead/lag In-service flag Visibility flag
Specified load is a balanced load or unbalanced load
Radio button
Unbalanced Grounded-wye 111.803 335.410 .894 Lagging
Load connected as grounded Radio (wye) or ungrounded (delta) button Actual load at phase A speci- Real fied in kVA or total load number Power factor for Phase A or total pf Flag indicating whether power factor is leading or lagging Real number Check box
Actual load at phase B speci- Real fied in kVA number Power factor or Phase B Flag indicating whether power factor is leading or lagging Real number Check box
None None None
111.803 .894 Lagging
Actual load at phase C speci- Real fied in kVA number Power factor or Phase C Flag indicating whether power factor is leading or lagging Flag indicating whether load is in or out of service Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram Real number Check box
None None None
111.803 .894 Lagging
Check box Check box
None None
In service Visible
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-10
Device Properties Summary MWh Loads
F.6 MWh Loads

Table F-10. MWh Load Properties
Device Property Name Category Balanced/ unbalanced Grounded-wye delta Result display Definition Unique name identifier Load category Specified load as balanced or unbalanced Load connected as grounded (wye) or ungrounded (delta) Specify result display as constant power or constant impedance portion If checked, MWh loads are seasonal If checked, MWh loads are concentrated at the node Specify percentage of load that is constant impedance MWh/month on Phase A MWh/month on Phase B MWh/month on Phase C Number on consumers on Phase A Number on consumers on Phase B Number on consumers on Phase C Power factor or Phase A Power factor or Phase B Power factor or Phase C Resultant kW - Phase A Resultant kW - Phase B Resultant kW - Phase C Type Character Integer number Radio button Radio button Radio button Check box Check box Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Restrictions 12-character maximum, no embedded blanks 1-4 Balanced Unbalanced Grounded-wye delta Default Automatically assigned 1 Unbalanced Grounded-wye
Constant power Constant impedance None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None
Constant power
Seasonal Concentrated at the node Percent constant impedance Phase A MWh/month Phase B MWh/month Phase C MWh/month Phase A number of consumers Phase B number of consumers Phase C number of consumers Phase A pf Phase B pf Phase C pf Resultant kW Phase A Resultant kW Phase B Resultant kW Phase C
Non-seasonal Concentrated at the node 0% 100 100 100 10 10 10 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
F-11
Device Properties Summary MWh Loads
Table F-10. MWh Load Properties (Cont.)

Device Property In-service flag Visibility flag Definition Type None None Restrictions Default In service Visible
Flag indicating whether load Check box is in or out of service Flag indicating whether item Check box is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-12
Device Properties Summary Source
F.7 Source
Table F-11. Source Properties
Device Property Name Scheduled voltage (pu of nominal) Definition Unique name identifier Type Character Restrictions 12-character maximum, no embedded blanks None Default Automatically assigned Node voltage specified at the source node location in pu System base kVA as specified in Network Properties 0.0
Open circuit voltage of the Real source node in pu of nom- number inal voltage Real number Real number
Base rating (kVA) The kVA rating of the source Source angle The source angle in degrees
None
Greater than or equal to 180 and less than or equal to 360 None
Positivesequence resistance Positivesequence reactance Zero-sequence resistance Zero-sequence reactance Grounding resistance Grounding reactance In-service flag
Positive-sequence source Real thevenin resistance in pu number on the system kVA base Positive-sequence source Real thevenin reactance in pu number on the system kVA base Zero-sequence source thevenin resistance in pu on the system kVA base Zero-sequence source thevenin reactance in pu on the system kVA base Grounding resistance in ohms of the source Grounding reactance in ohms of the source Flag indicating whether source is in or out of service Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram Real number Real number Real number Real number Check box
0.0
None
0.001
None
0.0
None
0.001
None None None
0.0 0.0 In service
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-13
Device Properties Summary Induction Machines
F.8 Induction Machines

Table F-12. Induction Machines: General
Device Property Name Definition Unique name identifier Type Character Real number Restrictions Default
12-character maximum, no Automatically embedded blanks assigned A negative load value indicates a generator 100
Real electrical Total real electrical power power at machine at machine terminal input terminal (kW) Mechanical power Mechanical power at at machine shaft machine shaft (kW or hp) (hp or kW) Mechanical rating Mechanical rating of the (shaft output) machine Rated (nominal) terminal voltage (kV) Nominal voltage of the machine specified in kV line-line or line-neutral depending on network property for input voltage flag Grounding resistance (ohms) Grounding reactance (ohms) Flag indicating whether induction machine is in or out of service Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram
Real number Real number Real number None None
100
200 Nominal voltage of the node where the machine is located 0.0 0.0 In service
Grounding resistance Grounding reactance In-service flag
Real number Real number Check box
None None None
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-14
Device Properties Summary Induction Machines
Table F-13. Induction Machines: Impedances

Device Property NEMA Definition Specifies NEMA machine A, B, C, D, E Type Check box List box Restrictions None AY None None Noneditable if NEMA type specified Noneditable if NEMA type specified Noneditable if NEMA type specified Noneditable if NEMA type specified Noneditable if NEMA type specified Noneditable if NEMA type specified Noneditable if NEMA type specified Noneditable calculated value Noneditable calculated value Default NEMA Type B A 0.0753 0.149 0.03 0.09 2.8 0.025 0.11 0.15 0.04 0.119029 0.195841
Locked rotor code NEMA locked rotor code letter Locked rotor resistance Locked rotor reactance Armature resistance Armature reactance Magnetizing reactance Inner cage resistance Inner cage reactance Outer cage resistance Outer cage reactance Sub transient reactance Transient reactance
Locked rotor resistance in pu Real number Locked rotor reactance in pu Machines resistance at synchronous speed in pu Machines reactance at synchronous speed in pu Machines magnetizing reactance in pu Inner cage resistance in pu Inner cage reactance in pu Outer cage resistance in pu Outer cage reactance in pu Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number
Sub transient reactance in pu Real number Transient reactance in pu Real number
Table F-14. Induction Machines: Start-Up

Device Property Use auto transformer flag Definition Type Restrictions None Default No auto transformer connected
Flag indicating whether to Check box connect the starting machine with a series auto transformer starter The resistance of the transformer at the maximum tap setting in pu The reactance of the transformer at the maximum tap setting in pu The starting transformer tap position to be used in the motor starting calculation specified in pu Real number Real number Real number
Starting transformer resistance Starting transformer reactance Starting transformer tap
None
0.01
None
0.05
Used only if the flag to use an auto transformer has been selected
1.0
F-15
Device Properties Summary Synchronous Machines
F.9 Synchronous Machines

Table F-15. Synchronous Machines: General
Device Property Name Definition Unique name identifier Type Character Restrictions 12-character maximum, no embedded blanks Default Automatically assigned
Machine type
Machine type
List box
Constant power PV PV machine machine, swing source N/A N/A A negative load value indicates a generator. None Wye Node when machine is located 500
Connection Regulated node Total real power consumed/ delivered Nominal machine size
Wye or delta machine Node which machine regulates
Radio button List box
Total real electrical power Real consumed by the machine number Size of the machine in kVA Real number
500 or value in the Machine Dictionary corresponding to given machine type Nominal voltage of the node where the machine is located
Nominal machine voltage
Nominal voltage of the machine specified in kV line-line or line-neutral depending on network property for input voltage flag Real power consumed/delivered in kW
Real number
None
Scheduled real power consumed Scheduled reactive power consumed Scheduled voltage
Real number
Valid for PV and constant power Valid for constant power machine types None
500.0 -0.5
Reactive power consumed Real in kvar number Scheduled terminal Real voltage to be held by the number machine voltage regulator in pu of the node base voltage Scheduled voltage angle in degrees Real number
1.0 or value in the Machine Dictionary corresponding to given machine type 0.0
Scheduled voltage angle Max reactive power
Valid for swing source machine types None
Maximum power output of Real the machine in pu of the number nominal rating of the machine Minimum power output of the machine in pu of the nominal rating of the machine Grounding resistance of the synchronous machine Real number
0.5 or value in the Machine Dictionary corresponding to given machine type -0.5 or value in the Machine Dictionary corresponding to given machine type 0.0
Min reactive power
None
Grounding resistance
Real number
None
F-16
Table F-15. Synchronous Machines: General (Cont.)

Device Property Grounding reactance In-service flag Definition Grounding reactance of the synchronous machine Type Real number Restrictions None None 0.0 In service Default
Check box Flag indicating whether synchronous machine is in or out of service Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram Check box
Visibility flag
None
Visible
check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-17
Table F-16. Synchronous Machines: Impedances

Device Property Definition Type List box Restrictions N/A Default Steam turbine - small
Impedance Model Steam Turbine - large Steam Turbine - small Hydro with damper Hydro without damper Combustion Turbine Custom Rotor type Machine has damper winding Subtransient reactance Transient reactance Synchronous reactance Open circuit subtransient Open circuit transient Armature resistance Negativesequence resistance Locked rotor resistance Locked rotor reactance Zero-sequence reactance Grounding resistance Grounding reactance Saturation coefficient Inertia constant Round rotor Salient Pole N\A
List box Cleck box
Valid for custom types Valid for custom types and salient pole rotor types Valid for custom types Valid for custom types Valid for custom types Valid for custom types Valid for custom types Valid for custom types Valid for custom types Noneditable Noneditable Noneditable Valid for custom types Valid for custom types Valid for custom types Valid for custom types
Round rotor Not checked
Subtransient reactance in pu Transient reactance in pu
0.2 D-axis 0.2 Q-axis 0.3 D-axis 0.5 Q-axis 1.5 D-axis 1.4 Q-axis 0.03 D-axis 0.08 Q-axis 6 D-axis 0.6 Q-axis .003 0.02
Synchronous reactance in Real pu number Open circuit subtransient time constant (sec) Real number
Open circuit transient time Real constant (sec) number Machine resistance at synchronous speed in pu Negative-sequence resistance in pu Real number Real number
Locked rotor resistance of Real the machine in pu number Locked rotor reactance of the machine in pu Zero-sequence reactance of the machine in pu Grounding resistance in ohms Grounding reactance in ohms Saturation coefficient at 1.0 pu and 1.2 pu Mechanical inertia constant (sec) Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number Real number
.003 0.2 0.09 0 0 0.1 at 1.0 pu 0.4 at 1.2 pu 4
F-18
Table F-17. Synchronous Machines: Start-Up

Device Property Use auto transformer flag Definition Type Restrictions None Default No auto transformer connected
Flag indicating whether to Check box connect the starting machine with a series auto transformer starter The resistance of the transformer at the maximum tap setting in pu The reactance of the transformer at the maximum tap setting in pu The starting transformer tap position to be used in the motor starting calculation specified in pu Real number
Starting transformer resistance
Non-editable
0.01 or value in the Machine Dictionary corresponding to given machine type 0.05 or value in the Machine Dictionary corresponding to given machine type 1.0 or value in the Machine Dictionary corresponding to given machine type
Starting transformer reactance
Real number
Non-editable
Starting transformer tap
Real number
Used only if the flag to use an auto transformer has been selected.
F-19
Device Properties Summary Shunt Capacitors
F.10 Shunt Capacitors

Table F-18. Shunt Capacitor Properties
Device Property Name Definition Unique name identifier Type Character Real number Restrictions 12-character maximum, no embedded blanks None Default Automatically assigned Nominal voltage of the node where the machine is located 100 300 total Fixed Wye Balanced
Nominal voltage of Nominal voltage of the capacitor bank machine specified in kV line-line or line-neutral depending on network property for input voltage flag Reactive power capacity Type Connection Balance Minimum regulated voltage
Capacitor reactive power Real capacity generated at nom- number inal voltage (kvar) Type of the capacitor bank Capacitor connection type Balanced or unbalanced capacitor bank Lower boundary of regulated voltage range in pu Radio button Radio button Radio button Real number
None
Fixed Switched Delta Wye Balanced Unbalanced
Specified for switched 0.95 capacitor banks only, must be less than maximum regulated voltage Specified for switched 1.05 capacitor banks only, must be greater than minimum regulated voltage May be any node in the system Used only when load flow analysis option to switch capacitors is selected Not currently used May be adjusted by load flow solution if the switch capacitors option is selected None The node where the capacitor is located 1.0
Maximum regulated voltage
Upper boundary of regulated voltage range in pu
Real number
Regulated node
The node where the voltage List box regulation occurs selection How much kvar should be placed at the node Order in which the capacitor is to be switched on Real number Integer number
Switching increment Switching priority Fraction switched in
0 1.0
Fraction of capacitor kvar in Real use number
Ungrounded
When checked, indicates the shunt capacitor is solidly grounded
Check box
Grounded (not checked) 0.0 0.0
Grounding resistance Grounding reactance
Grounding resistance of the Real capacitor number Grounding reactance of the Real capacitor number
None None
F-20
Device Properties Summary Shunt Capacitors
Table F-18. Shunt Capacitor Properties (Cont.)

Device Property Time delay Definition Type Restrictions Must be > 0 0 Default
Identifies the order in which Real the capacitor number controllers operate Flag indicating whether capacitor bank is in or out of service Check box
In-service flag
Capacitor bank may be in service even though the fraction switched in may be specified as zero. None
In service
Visibility flag
Flag indicating whether Check box item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram Check box
Visible
None
Visible (checked)
F-21
Device Properties Summary Switches
F.11 Switches
Table F-19. Switch Properties
Device Property Name Phasing Switch ID Definition Unique name identifier Phasing of switch Identifier for the switch Type Character Character Character Restrictions 12-character maximum, no embedded blanks ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, C 3-character maximum, no embedded blanks. Not currently used, provided for raw data file compatibility 10-character maximum, no embedded blanks. Not currently used, provided for raw data file compatibility. Up to a maximum of 4 ratings can be specified Default Automatically assigned ABC Blank
Construction type
Reference to construction type in the construction dictionary file
Character
Blank
Ratings (A)
Ampere ratings used to calculate overloaded switches Flag indicating whether this switch is a tie switch
Real number
Assigned from construction dictionary or default properties A normal switch (unchecked). 0.95
Tie switch flag
Check box
Not currently used, provided for raw data file compatibility. 8-character maximum, no embedded blanks. Not currently used, provided for raw data file compatibility. Used only when a tie switch is specified. Open Closed Not currently used, provided for raw data compatibility for the tie open point optimization module None
Connection circuit Circuit to which a tie switch is connected
Character
Status TOPO status
Indicates whether the switch is open or closed
Radio button
Closed Locked
Specifies whether Radio switches are allowed to button freely open or close during TOPO analysis Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram Check box
Visibility flag
Visible
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-22
Device Properties Summary Series Capacitors/Reactors
F.12 Series Capacitors/Reactors

Table F-20. Series Capacitors/Reactors Properties
Device Property Name Phasing Definition Unique name identifier Phasing of transformer Type Character Character Real number Character Restrictions 12-character maximum, no embedded blanks None 10-character maximum, no embedded blanks None Default Automatically assigned 333.33 Blank
ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, C ABC
Nameplate Rating kVA rating per phase Construction type Reference to construction type in the construction dictionary file Positive-sequence resistance specified in pu Positive-sequence reactance specified in pu
Positivesequence resistance Positivesequence reactance Zero-sequence resistance Zero-sequence reactance
0.0
Negative value indicates series capacitor. Positive value indicates series reactor. None Negative value indicates series capacitor. Positive value indicates series reactor. Up to a maximum of 4 ratings can be specified
-0.005
Zero-sequence resistance specified in pu Zero-sequence reactance specified in pu
0.0 -0.005
Ratings (A)
Per-unit ratings used to calculate overloaded series devices Flag indicating whether series capacitor/reactor is in or out of service Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram
Real number
Assigned from construction dictionary or default properties
In-service flag
Check box
Capacitor bank may be in In Service service even though the fraction switched in may be specified as zero. None Visible
Visibility flag
Check box
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-23
Device Properties Summary Standard Faults
F.13 Standard Faults

Table F-21. Fault Properties
Device Property Name Type Definition Unique name identifier Fault type Type Character List box selection None Three-phase-to-ground Phase-to-ground Phase-to-ground through an impedance Phase-to-phase Phase-to-phase-toground Ungrounded three-phase Applies to fault types that are not three-phase None None In Service Visible Restrictions Default Automatically assigned Three-phase-toground
Phasing In-service flag Visibility flag
Phase at which fault occurs Flag indicating whether fault is in or out of service Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram Flag indicating whether results for this item are visible on the diagram
List box selection Check box Check box
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-24
Device Properties Summary Protection Equipment
F.14 Protection Equipment

Table F-22. Protection Equipment Properties
Device Property Name Description Branch Location Selected device list Available device list Sort fields Add sort field Visibility flag Definition Unique name identifier Type Character None None Noneditable Noneditable Must be device from supplied database Blank Restrictions Default Automatically assigned Blank
Text describing protection Character equipment Branch location of protection equipment Node location of protection equipment List containing the protection equipment List box List containing available devices that are currently in the equipment database Fields used to sort the available device list Select list used to select sort field Flag indicating whether item is visible or invisible on the diagram List box List box Check box Character Character
None
Visible
F-25
Device Properties Summary Fuses
F.15 Fuses
Table F-23. Fuses: General
Device Property Name Branch Definition Name of the fuse Branch location of fuse Type Character Character Real Number Check box None Noneditable None 1.0 Restrictions Default
Damage multiplier Used as a multiplier on current to simulate a fuse damage curve Show I2T curve Flag indicating whether to show I2T (I-squared-T) curve for the fuse Identifier for fuse Indicator specifying whether to show device curve on plot Flag indicating whether to calculate and report operating time of the device
None
Un-checked (do not show I2T curve) Manufacturer, model rating Visible (checked)
Description Visible
Character Check box
None None
Disabled
Check box
None
Un-checked (enable operating time calculations)
Table F-24. Fuses: Plot Options

Device Property Plot color Current multiple Time multiple Time adder Definition Color of curve plot Type Color window Restrictions Color palette None None None Red 1.0 1.0 0.0 Default
Multiplier to use for current Real number Multiplier to use for time Adder to use for time Real number Real number
F-26
Device Properties Summary Over Current Relays
F.16 Over Current Relays

Table F-25. Over Current Relays: General
Device Property Name Branch Phasing Definition Name of the relay Branch location of relay Indicates what phase current is used to calculate operating time Identifier for relay Type Character Character List box None Noneditable Max-phase Restrictions Default
Description
Character
None
Manufacturer, model, time char, available tap settings
Time dial
Time dial setting
List or slider control List or slider control List or slider control Real number Real number Real number Check box None None Must be > 0 100 5.0 0.02 Not checked Instantaneous setting specified in Amps Not checked (enabled) None Visible (checked)
Pickup
Pickup (tap) setting
Instantaneous
Instantaneous setting
Primary Ct Secondary Ct Instantaneous operation time
Ct setting - primary Ct setting - secondary Operation time for instantaneous (sec)
Multiple of pu flag Used to select/enter instantaneous setting in multiple of pickup (Tap) Disable flag Visible Used to disable instantaneous portion of relay Indicator specifying whether to show device curve on plot Flag indicating whether to calculate and report operating time of the device
Check box Check box
Disabled
Check box
None
F-27
Device Properties Summary Over Current Relays
Table F-26. Over Current Relays: Plot Options

F-28
Device Properties Summary Transformer Damage
F.17 Transformer Damage

Table F-27. Transformer Damage Curves: General
Device Property Name Description 3 Phase Rating (kVA) Inrushmultiplier flag ANSI factor Definition Transformer damage curve name Identifier for transformer damage curve Nameplate rating Type Character Character Real number Real number Real number List box None None None Restrictions Blank kVA rating, category kVA rating of the transformer branch <or> 1000 8 Default
If checked, inrush current is displayed as point on TCC curve ANSI factor flag. If checked factor is used to determine damage curve Transformer phasing
None
None
Phasing
None
Phasing of the transformer branch or <ABC> Impedance of the transformer branch or R1 = 0.01, X1 = 0.057, R0 = 0.01, X0 = .057 Source impedance. If no source, values default to 0. Visible (checked)
Transformer impedance (R1, X1, R0, X0)
Transformer positive and Real zero sequence impedance number
None
System impedSystem (source) positive ance (R1, X1, R0, and zero sequence X0) impedance Visible Indicator specifying whether to show device curve on plot Flag indicating whether to calculate and report operating time of the device
Real number Check box
None
None
Disabled
Check box
None
F-29
Device Properties Summary Transformer Damage
Table F-28. Transformer Damage Curve: Plot Options

F-30
Device Properties Summary Conductor/Cable Damage
F.18 Conductor/Cable Damage

Table F-29. Conductor/Cable Damage Curve: General
Device Property Name Description Type Units Conductor area User defined Definition Conductor damage curve name Identifier for conductor damage curve Conductor type Units of conductor area Conductor size (area) Type Character Character Radio box Radio box List box None None Overhead conductor cable English, metric Restrictions Blank Blank Overhead conductor English I/O AWG unchecked, not user defined None User-defined conductor area ACSR (singlestrand) Bare None Defaults to temperature based on conductor material and insulation type Defaults to temperature based on conductor material and insulation type Visible (checked) Default
Checked if you want to Check box enter a conductor area not in the list Real number List box List box Real number
User defined area User specified conductor area Material Insulation type Conductor material Insulation type
Maximum temper- Maximum conductor ature (deg C) temperature
Minimum temperature (deg C)
Minimum conductor temperature
Real number
None
Visible
Indicator specifying whether to show device curve on plot Flag indicating whether to calculate and report operating time of the device
Check box
None
Disabled
Check box
None
F-31
Device Properties Summary Conductor/Cable Damage
Table F-30. Conductor/Cable Damage Curve: Plot Options

F-32
Device Properties Summary Reclosers
F.19 Reclosers
Table F-31. Reclosers: General
Device Property Name Description Nom voltage Curve annotation Trip coil rating Minimum trip rating Visible Definition Recloser name Type Character None None Not editable Not editable N/A N/A N/A N/A None Visible (checked) Total clearing Restrictions Blank Manufacturer, type, nominal voltage Default
Identifier for recloser curve Character Nominal voltage Curve annotation specification Trip coil rating Minimum trip rating Character Number Radio box List box List box List box Check box
Interrupting rating Interrupting rating
Line-current curve TCC curve identifier Indicator specifying whether to show device curve on plot Flag indicating whether to calculate and report operating time of the device
Disabled
Check box
None
Table F-32. Reclosers: Plot Options

F-33
Device Properties Summary Machines
F.20 Machines
Table F-33. Machines: General
Device Property Name Description Mechanical Power Units Mechanical Rating Rated (nominal) terminal voltage (kV) Definition Machine name Identifier for motor protection curve Type Character Character None None None None Restrictions Blank Blank hp Machine rating if present at PEPack location <or> 200 Machine kV if present at PEPack location <or> Node kV where machine is located Machine power factor if present at PEPack location <or> 1.000 Machine efficiency if present at PEPack location <or> 1.000 Calculated based on efficiency, rating, kV and power factor if not user defined. If user-defined is checked, enter the value of the full load amps Calculated as 6 times full load. If user-defined is checked, enter the value of locked rotor current. 10.0 Full voltage Default
Units of mechanical power Radio in hp (NEMA) or kW (IEC) button Rating of machine in either hp or kW Machine nominal rated voltage Number
Number
None
Power factor
Machine power factor
Number
None
Efficiency
Machine efficiency
Number
None
Full Load
Machine full load (amps)
Number
None
Locked rotor
Locked rotor current (amps)
Number
None
Acceleration time Machine Starting Characteristics Transformer position
Machine acceleration time Number (seconds) Full voltage or Auto trans- Radio former reduced starting button method Autotransformer tap position in pu Number
None None
Used for Auto transformer starting method only
1.0
F-34
Device Properties Summary Machines
Table F-33. Machines: General (Cont.)

Device Property Visible Definition Indicator specifying whether to show device curve on plot Flag indicating whether to calculate and report operating time of the device Type Check box None Restrictions Default Visible (checked)
Disabled
Check box
None
F-35
F-36
Appendix G
Database Field Formats
G.1 Branch Results
G.1.1 Filename: branch.dbf
Table G-1. Branch Results
Maximum Width 3 12 12 12 12 12 3 18 3 18 18 18 18 12 12 12 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 9 9 9 9 6 6 6 9 9 9
Name ISLAND NAME TYPE LIBRARY NODE1 NODE2 PHASE VBASE RATING IA IB IC IMAX TA TB TC I0 I1 I2
Type Number Character Character Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description Island number Device name Device type Library reference First connected node Second connected node Valid phases Base voltage Branch rating index Phase A current Phase B current Phase C current Maximum current Phase A angle Phase B angle Phase C angle Zero-sequence current Positive-sequence current Negative-sequence current
G-1
Database Field Formats Branch Results
Table G-1. Branch Results (Cont.)

Maximum Width 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 5 5 5 10 10 10 9 9 9 18 18 18 18 9 Maximum Number of Decimals 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 6 6 9 9 9 2 2
Name T0 T1 T2 PA PB PC PLOSS SA SB SC QA QB QC QLOSS PFA PFB PFC LLA LLB LLC TNODE RNODE XTYPE TAPA TAPB TAPC VREGA VREGB VREGC LENGTH PCOST
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Character Character Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description Zero-sequence angle Positive-sequence angle Negative-sequence angle Phase A real power Phase B real power Phase C real power Total power loss Phase A polar power Phase B polar power Phase C polar power Phase A reactive power Phase B reactive power Phase C reactive power Reactive power loss Phase A power factor Phase B power factor Phase C power factor Phase A lead lag flag Phase B lead lag flag Phase C lead lag flag Tapped node name Regulated node name Transformer type Phase A tap position Phase B tap position Phase C tap position Phase A regulated voltage Phase B regulated voltage Phase C regulated voltage Line length Real power cost
G-2
Database Field Formats Branch Results
Table G-1. Branch Results (Cont.)

Maximum Width 9 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 5 Maximum Number of Decimals 2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0
Name QCOST IUNBALPERC IAVG VA VB VC Vmin Dist Total P Total Q Total S Total PF Total L Nodeph
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Character
Description Reactive power cost Percent unbalance Average current Voltage at Phase A, 2nd node Voltage at Phase B, 2nd node Voltage at Phase C, 2nd node Minimum voltage Distance from 2nd node back to source Total real power Total reactive power Total apparent power Total power factor Total lead/lag flag Downstream node phasing
G-3
Database Field Formats Capacitor Placement Optimization Results
G.2 Capacitor Placement Optimization Results

G.2.1 Filename: capo.dbf
Table G-2. Capacitor Placement Optimization Results
Maximum Width 3 12 12 6 10 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Island number Device name Connected node name Connection type (wye or delta) Capacitor type (fixed or switched) Initial loss (kW) Initial loss (kvar) Final loss (kW) Final loss (kvar) Present value cost of placing fixed banks Present value cost of placing switched banks Present value energy: initial Present value of energy: final
Name ISLAND NAME NODE CON TYPE PLOSS0 QLOSS0 PLOSS1 QLOSS1 PVCOSTFX PVCOSTSW PV0 PV1
Type Number Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G.3 Capacitor Placement Optimization Summary

G.3.1 Filename: caposum.dbf
Table G-3. Capacitor Placement Optimization Summary
Maximum Width 12 18 8 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 2 0 Node name Total kvar place at node Capacitor type (fixed or switched)
Name NODE SIZE TYPE
Type Character Number Character
Description
G-4
Database Field Formats Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule
G.4 Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule

G.4.1 Filename: caposw.dbf
Table G-4. Capacitor Placement Optimization Switching Schedule
Maximum Width 20 20 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 9 9 9
Name PROFILE NODE SIZE STEP FRACTION
Type Character Character Number Number Number
Description Load snapshot name Node name Total kvar size placed at node Switched capacitor increment Fraction of switched capacitor that is in service
G.5 Capacitor Properties

G.5.1 Filename: cap.dbf
Table G-5. Capacitor Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 5 2 18 18 18 18 3 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 0 9 9 9 9 9 Device name Connected node Valid phases Type (fixed/switched) Capacitor reactive power capacity (kvar) Capacitor reactive power capacity (kvar) phase A Capacitor reactive power capacity (kvar) phase B Capacitor reactive power capacity (kvar) phase C Status (in/out) Nominal voltage of capacitor bank (kV) Minimum regulated voltage (pu) Maximum regulated voltage (pu) Switching step (pu) Switching priority
Name NAME NODE PHASE TYPE CVAR CVARA CVARB CVARC STATUS KVNOM LOW HIGH STEP PRIOR
Type Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Character Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G-5
Database Field Formats Device Groups
Table G-5. Capacitor Properties (Cont.)

Maximum Width 12 12 12 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0
Name CON RNODE TIMEDELAY
Type Character Character Number
Description Connection (delta/wye) Regulated node Time delay
G.6 Device Groups

G.6.1 Filename: group.dbf
Table G-6. Device Groups
Maximum Width 18 250 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 Group name Group description
Name NAME DESC
Type Character Character
Description
G.7 Device Limits

G.7.1 Filename: limits.dbf
Table G-7. Device Limits
Maximum Width 6 6 6 6 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0
Name OVER UNDER OUT BRANCH
Type Number Number Number Number
Description Number of nodes over limit Number of nodes under limit Number of out-of-service devices Number of branches over rating index
G-6
Database Field Formats Fault All Current Results
G.8 Fault All Current Results

G.8.1 Filename: fault.dbf
Table G-8. Fault All Current
Maximum Width 3 12 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Island number Faulted node Phasing of branches connected to the faulted node Faulted node base voltage (kV) Fault current three-phase-to-ground Fault current phase-to-ground Fault current phase-to-ground through Z Fault current phase-to-phase Fault current phase-to-phase-to-ground Fault current three-phase Fault resistance (ohm) Fault reactance (ohm) Zero-sequence resistance Zero-sequence reactance
Name ISLAND NODE PHS VBASE 3PH_G PH_G PH_GZ PH_PH PH_PH_G 3PH RP XP R0 X0
Type Number Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G-7
Database Field Formats Induction Machine Properties
G.9 Induction Machine Properties

G.9.1 Filename: indmach.dbf
Table G-9. Induction Machine Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 5 5 18 18 18 18 18 3 3 3 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Device name Connected node Valid phases Status (in/out) Load Rating Category Type Nominal KV NEMA identification Start (Y/N) Auto transformer (Y/N) Locked rotor resistance Locked rotor reactance Auto transformer resistance Auto transformer reactance Tap position where auto transformer impedance was measured Machine efficiency Armature resistance Armature reactance Magnetizing Reactance Inner cage resistance Inner cage reactance Outer cage resistance Outer cage reactance Subtransient reactance Transient reactance
Name NAME NODE PHASE STATUS LOAD RATING KCAT KTYP KVNOM NEMA START AUTOX RLR XLR RT XT TAP EFF RA XA MAGX INR INX OUTR OUTX SUBX TRX
Type Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G-8
Database Field Formats Line/Cable Properties
Table G-9. Induction Machine Properties (Cont.)

Maximum Width 5 5 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0
Name LUNITS RUNITS
Type Character Character
Description Real power units (kW, hp) Shaft output units (KW, hp)
G.10 Line/Cable Properties

G.10.1 Filename: line.dbf
Table G-10. Line/Cable Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 12 18 5 5 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Device name FROM node TO node Length Valid phases Status (in/out) Library reference Positive-sequence resistance (ohm/unit length) Positive-sequence reactance (ohm/unit length) Zero-sequence resistance (ohm/unit length) Zero-sequence reactance (ohm/unit length) Positive-sequence charging admittance (microSiemens/unit length) Zero-sequence charging admittance (microSiemens/unit length) Rating 1 (amps) Rating 2 (amps) Rating 3 (amps) Rating 4 (amps)
Name NAME FROM TO DIST PHASE STATUS LIB R1 X1 R0 X0 BC1 BC0 A1 A2 A3 A4
Type Character Character Character Number Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G-9
Database Field Formats Load Flow Summary
G.11 Load Flow Summary

G.11.1 Filename: lfsum.dbf
Table G-11. Load Flow Summary
Maximum Width 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9
Name SRCKW SRCKVAR SYNKWP SYNKWN SYNKVARP SYNKVARN INDKWP INDKWN INDKVARP INDKVARN CAPKVAR NCAPS NSRCS NLINES NSYNP NINDP NSYNN NINDN LOSSKW LOSSKVAR
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description Source real power Source reactive power Synchronous machine real power (+) Synchronous machine real power (-) Synchronous machine reactive power (+) Synchronous machine reactive power (-) Induction machine real power (+) Induction machine real power (-) Induction machine reactive power (+) Induction machine reactive power (-) Capacitor reactive power Number of capacitors Number of sources Number of lines Number of synchronous machines (+) Number of induction machines (+) Number of synchronous machines (-) Number of induction machines (-) Total real system losses Total reactive system losses
G-10
Database Field Formats Load Properties
G.12 Load Properties

G.12.1 Filename: load.dbf
Table G-12. Load Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 5 5 5 8 3 3 5 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 8 18 18 8 18 18 8 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 9 9 0 9 9 0 Device name Connected node Valid phases Status (in/out) Category Type Grounded (Y/N) Balanced (Y/N) Construction (delta/wye) Phase A real power (kW) Phase A reactive power (kvar) Phase B real power (kW) Phase B reactive power (kvar) Phase C real power (kW) Phase C reactive power (kvar) Phase A power (kVA) Phase A power factor Phase A power lead/lag Phase B power (kVA) Phase B power factor Phase B power lead/lag Phase C power (kVA) Phase C power factor Phase C power lead/lag
Name NAME NODE PHASE STATUS KCAT KTYP GRND BAL CON PA QA PB QB PC QC SA PFA LEADA SB PFB LEADB SC PFC LEADC
Type Character Character Character Character Number Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Character Number Number Character Number Number Character
Description
G.12.2 Filename: mwh.dbf
G-11
Database Field Formats Load Snapshots
G.13 Load Snapshots

G.13.1 Filename: snap.dbf
Table G-13. Load Snapshots
Maximum Width 18 18 18 18 10 10 10 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 9 9 0 0 0
Name NAME CAT FACTOR TIME ACTIVE TYPE SCALE
Type Character Character Number Number Character Character Character
Description Snapshot name Load category Scale factor Duration (pu) Active (Y/N) Type (machine/load) Scale (pwr/size)
G.14 Network Economics

G.14.1 Filename: econ.dbf
Table G-14. Network Economics
Maximum Width 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Maximum Number of Decimals 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Name PPRICE QPRICE PDPRICE QDPRICE DISCOUNT INFLATION PERIOD FINSTCOST SINSTCOST FMAINTCOST SMAINTCOST
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description Real power price (kWh) Reactive power price (kvar/hr) Real power demand price (per kW) Reactive power demand price (per kvar) Discount rate (pu/yr) Inflation rate (pu/yr) Evaluation period (yr) Fixed cap installation cost (per kvar) Switched cap installation cost (per kvar) Fixed cap maintenance cost (per kvar) Switched cap maintenance cost (per kvar)
G-12
Database Field Formats Node Properties
G.15 Node Properties

G.15.1 Filename: bus.dbf
Table G-15. Node Properties
Maximum Width 12 3 3 18 5 12 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 9 0 0 Device name Device phases Device status Base voltage (kV) Area number Node name graphical orientation numerical -4 to +4; refer to Appendix B,
Name NAME PHASE STATUS KV IAR N
Type Character Character Character Number Number Number
Description
Section B.1.4
DESC FIXED SWITCHED X Y ORIENT Character Character Character Number Number Character 250 3 3 18 18 8 0 0 0 9 9 0 Description CAPO fixed (Y/N) CAPO switched (Y/N) Graphical x-coordinate Graphical y-coordinate Device orientation (H,V,P) - horizontal, vertical, point
G.16 Node Results

G.16.1 Filename: node.dbf
Table G-16. Node Results
Maximum Width 3 12 3 3 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 Island Device name Valid phases Area Base voltage (kV) Voltage phase A Voltage phase B
Name ISLAND NAME PHASE AREA VBASE VA VB
Type Number Character Character Number Number Number Number
Description
G-13
Database Field Formats Node Results
Table G-16. Node Results (Cont.)

Maximum Width 18 12 12 12 18 18 18 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 9 6 6 6 9 9 9 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Name VC TA TB TC V0 V1 V2 T0 T1 T2 VPREA VPREB VPREC VPOSTA VPOSTB VPOSTC VDIFFA VDIFFB VDIFFC Vmin Vmax Vavg VUNBALPERC DISTANCE
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description Voltage phase C Angle phase A Angle phase B Angle phase C Zero-sequence voltage Positive-sequence voltage Negative-sequence voltage Zero-sequence angle Positive-sequence angle Negative-sequence angle Voltage phase A pre-start Voltage phase B pre-start Voltage phase C pre-start Voltage phase A starting Voltage phase B starting Voltage phase C starting Voltage phase A difference Voltage phase B difference Voltage phase C difference Minimum voltage Maximum voltage Average voltage Percent unbalance Distance form node back to source
G-14
Database Field Formats Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties
G.17 Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties

G.17.1 Filename: reactor.dbf
Table G-17. Series Capacitor/Reactor Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 12 5 5 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Device name FROM node TO node Valid phases Status (in/out) Library reference Positive-sequence resistance (pu on series device base kVA) Positive-sequence reactance (pu on series device base kVA) Zero-sequence resistance (pu on series device base kVA) Zero-sequence reactance (pu on series device base kVA) Charging admittance (0.0) Charging admittance (0.0) Rating 1 (pu) Rating 2 (pu) Rating 3 (pu) Rating 4 (pu) Nameplate rating (kVA/phase)
Name NAME FROM TO PHASE STATUS LIB R1 X1 R0 X0 BC1 BC0 A1 A2 A3 A4 KVAT
Type Character Character Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G-15
Database Field Formats Shunt Status
G.18 Shunt Status

G.18.1 Filename: shunt.dbf
Table G-18. Shunt Status
Maximum Width 3 12 12 4 5 12 3 3 18 5 3 12 9 9 18 18 18 4 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 6 6 9 9 9 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Island Device name Connected node Area Connection (delta/wye) Shunt type (source, induction machine, sync machine, standard fault, etc.) Category Valid phase Base voltage (kV) Status (in/out) Capacitor type (fixed/switched) Regulated node Capacitor pu used Capacitor step (pu) Size Maximum reactive power Minimum reactive power Machine type Schedule voltage Schedule power Terminal voltage Operating voltage Machine slip Fault type Fault resistance Fault reactance Phase A current Phase B current
Name ISLAND NAME NODE AREA CON TYPE CAT PHASE VBASE STATUS CAP RNODE USED STEP SIZE QMAX QMIN MACH VSCHED PSCHED VTERM VOP SLIP FAULT RFAULT XFAULT IA IB
Type Number Character Character Number Character Character Number Character Number Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G-16
Database Field Formats Shunt Status
Table G-18. Shunt Status (Cont.)

Maximum Width 18 12 12 12 18 18 18 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 9 9 9 9 5 5 5 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 5 Maximum Number of Decimals 9 6 6 6 9 9 9 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 6 6 6 6 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 0
Name IC TA TB TC I0 I1 I2 T0 T1 T2 PA PB PC SA SB SC PFA PFB PFC PF LLA LLB LLC QA QB QC VREGA VREGB VREGC TIMEDELAY RUNITS
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Character
Description Phase C current Phase A angle Phase B angle Phase C angle Zero-sequence current Positive-sequence current Negative-sequence current Zero-sequence angle Positive-sequence angle Negative-sequence angle Phase A power (kW) Phase B power (kW) Phase C power (kW) Phase A power (kVA) Phase B power (kVA) Phase C power (kVA) Phase A power factor Phase B power factor Phase C power factor Power factor Phase A lead/lag Phase B lead/lag Phase C lead/lag Phase A reactive power Phase B reactive power Phase C reactive power Phase A regulated voltage Phase B regulated voltage Phase C regulated voltage Shunt capacitor time delay Induction machine units (kW, hp)
G-17
Database Field Formats Source Properties
G.19 Source Properties

G.19.1 Filename: source.dbf
Table G-19. Source Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 5 5 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Device name Connected node Valid phases Status (in/out) Source type Source kVA rating Source reactive power (kW) Maximum reactive power (kvar) Minimum reactive power (kvar) Positive-sequence resistance (pu on system kVA base) Positive-sequence reactance (pu on system kVA base) Zero-sequence resistance (pu on system kVA base) Zero-sequence reactance (pu on system kVA base) Grounding resistance (ohms) Grounding reactance of the source (ohms Source angle Source voltage
Name NAME NODE PHASE STATUS TYPE kVA SRP QMAX QMIN R1 X1 R0 X0 RG XG ANGLE KVS
Type Character Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G-18
Database Field Formats Standard Fault Properties
G.20 Standard Fault Properties

G.20.1 Filename: stdfault.dbf
Table G-20. Standard Fault Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 5 5 10 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 Fault name Connected node Valid phases Status (in/out) Type
Name NAME NODE PHASE STATUS TYPE
Type Character Character Character Character Character
Description
G.21 Static Load Summary

G.21.1 Filename: lsum.dbf
Table G-21. Static Load Summary
Maximum Width 30 18 18 18 18 8 18 18 18 18 8 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 9 9 9 9 0 9 9 9 9 0 Category Nominal kW Nominal kvar Nominal kVA Nominal power factor Nominal lead or lag Actual kw Actual kvar Actual kVA Actual power factor Actual lead or lag
Name CAT NKW NKVAR NKVA NPF NLEAD AKW AKVAR AKVA APF ALEAD
Type Character Number Number Number Number Character Number Number Number Number Character
Description
G-19
Database Field Formats MWh Load Summary
G.22 MWh Load Summary

G.22.1 Filename: mwhsum.dbf
Table G-22. MWh Load Summary
Maximum Width 12 12 5 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Name NAME NODE STATUS KWACONSTP KWBCONSTP KWCCONSTP KVARACONP KVARBCONP KVARCCONP KWACONSTZ KWBCONSTZ KWCCONSTZ KVARACONZ KVARBCONZ KVARCCONZ
Type Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description MWh load name Connected node Status (in/out) kW - Phase A of type constant power kW - Phase B of type constant power kW - Phase C of type constant power kvar - Phase A of type constant power kvar - Phase B of type constant power kvar - Phase C of type constant power kW - Phase A of type constant impedance kW - Phase B of type constant impedance kW - Phase C of type constant impedance kvar - Phase A of type constant impedance kvar - Phase B of type constant impedance kvar - Phase C of type constant impedance
G-20
Database Field Formats Switch Properties
G.23 Switch Properties

G.23.1 Filename: switch.dbf
Table G-23. Switch Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 12 5 12 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 3 12 12 3 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 0 0 Device name FROM node TO node Valid phases Status (in/out) Library reference 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rating 1 (amps) Rating 2 (amps) Rating 3 (amps) Rating 4 (amps) Type (normal/tie) Device ID Circuit ID TOPO status (locked/unlocked)
Name NAME FROM TO PHASE STATUS LIB R1 X1 R0 X0 BC1 BC0 A1 A2 A3 A4 TYPE ID CKTID TOPO
Type Character Character Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Character Character Character Character
Description
G-21
Database Field Formats Synchronous Machine Properties
G.24 Synchronous Machine Properties

G.24.1 Filename: synmach.dbf
Table G-24. Synchronous Machine Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 12 5 5 12 18 18 18 18 3 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Device name Connected node Regulated node Valid phases Status (in/out) Delta or Wye Load (kW) Rating Category Type Auto transformer (Y/N) Nominal kV Scheduled voltage (kV) phase A Scheduled voltage (kV) phase B Scheduled voltage (kV) phase C Scheduled reactive power (kvar) Maximum reactive power (pu) Minimum reactive power (pu) Starting tap position (pu)
Name NAME NODE REGNODE PHASE STATUS CONNECT LOAD RATING KCAT KTYP AUTOX KVNOM VSCHEDA VSCHEDB VSCHEDC SCHEDQ QMAX QMIN TAP
Type Character Character Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G-22
Database Field Formats System Totals
G.25 System Totals

G.25.1 Filename: count.dbf
Table G-25. System Totals
Maximum Width 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Name ISLANDS NODES BRANCHES SHUNTS FAULTS LOOPS SOURCES TRANS LINES SWITCHES SERCAPS SMACHS IMACHS LOADS CAPS DIST
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description Number of islands Number of nodes Number of branches Number of shunts Number of faults Number of loops Number of sources Number of transformers Number of lines Number of switches Number of series capacitors/reactors Number of synchronous machines Number of induction machines Number of loads Number of capacitors Total line length
G-23
Database Field Formats Tie Open Point Optimization Results
G.26 Tie Open Point Optimization Results

G.26.1 Filename: topo.dbf
Table G-26. Tie Open Point Optimization Results
Maximum Width 3 12 12 12 6 3 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Island Device name Upstream node Downstream node Status (open/closed) Status of device changed by TOPO (Y/N) Device ID Initial real power loss Initial reactive power loss Final real power loss Final reactive power loss Initial cost of real power Initial cost of reactive power Initial cost of real power demand Initial cost of reactive power demand Final cost of real power Final cost of reactive power Final cost of real power demand Final cost of reactive power demand
Name ISLAND NAME UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM STATUS CHANGED ID PLOSS0 QLOSS0 PLOSS1 QLOSS1 EPCOST0 EQCOST0 DPCOST0 DQCOST0 EPCOST1 EQCOST1 DPCOST1 DQCOST1
Type Number Character Character Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description
G-24
Database Field Formats Titles and Comments
G.27 Titles and Comments

G.27.1 Filename: comment.dbf
Table G-27. Titles and Comments
Maximum Width 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Line 1 of title Line 2 of title Line 1 of comments Line 2 of comments Line 3 of comments Line 4 of comments Line 5 of comments
Name TITLE1 TITLE2 COMMENT1 COMMENT2 COMMENT3 COMMENT4 COMMENT5
Type Character Character Character Character Character Character Character
Description
G.28 Transformer Properties

G.28.1 Filename: trnsfrmr.dbf
Table G-28. Transformer Properties
Maximum Width 12 12 5 12 5 5 12 18 18 18 18 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 9 9 9 Device name FROM node FROM phases TO node TO phases Status (in/out) Library reference R1 positive-sequence resistance (pu on transformer kVA base) X1 positive-sequence reactance (pu on transformer kVA base) R0 zero-sequence resistance (pu on transformer kVA base) X0 zero-sequence reactance (pu on transformer kVA base)
Name NAME FROM FRPHASE TO TOPHASE STATUS LIB R1 X1 R0 X0
Type Character Character Character Character Character Character Character Number Number Number Number
Description
G-25
Database Field Formats Transformer Properties
Table G-28. Transformer Properties (Cont.)

Maximum Width 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 5 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 12 12 Maximum Number of Decimals 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 0 9 9 9 9 0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 0
Name BC1 BC0 A1 A2 A3 A4 TYPE REMLOC KVAT TAP1 TAP2 TAP3 TAPSIDE TMAX TMIN STEP VMAX VMIN RCA XCA RCB XCB RCC XCC PTA CTA PTB CTB PTC CTC TNODE RNODE
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Character Character Number Number Number Number Character Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Character Character
Description BC1 0.0 for transformers BC0 0.0 for transformers Rating 1 (pu) Rating 2 (pu) Rating 3 (pu) Rating 4 (pu) Transformer type Regulated node on tapped/untapped side Transformer kVA per phase Phase A tap position Phase B tap position Phase C tap position FROM or TO Maximum tap position Minimum tap position Tap step Maximum voltage Minimum voltage Compensating resistance (ohm) phase A Compensating reactance (ohm) phase A Compensating resistance (ohm) phase B Compensating reactance (ohm) phase B Compensating resistance (ohm) phase C Compensating reactance (ohm) phase C pt ratio phase A ct rating phase A pt ratio phase B ct rating phase B pt ratio phase C ct rating phase C Tapped node Regulated node
G-26
Database Field Formats Transformer Properties
Table G-28. Transformer Properties (Cont.)

Maximum Width 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 5 Maximum Number of Decimals 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 Time delay Phase shift (deg) FROM voltage (kV) TO voltage (kV) FROM grounding resistance FROM grounding reactance TO grounding resistance TO grounding reactance Yes or No
Name TIMEDELAY PHASESHIFT FRVOLT TOVOLT FRGR FRGX TOGR TOGX USERDEF
Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Character
Description
G-27
Database Field Formats Voltage Levels
G.29 Voltage Levels

G.29.1 Filename: volts.dbf
Table G-29. Voltage Levels
Maximum Width 10 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 Voltage in KV
Name KV
Type Character
Description
G.30 Distribution Reliability Analysis Results

G.30.1 Filename: dra.dbf
Table G-30. Distribution Reliability Analysis Results
Maximum Width 20 20 12 12 12 12 12 12 Maximum Number of Decimals 0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2
Name PD NAME CS CI SAIFI SAIDI CAIFI CAIDI
Type Character Character Number Number Number Number Number Number
Description Protective device name Associated branch Customer count Customer interruptions System Average Interruption Frequency Index System Average Interruption Duration Index Customer Average Interruption Frequency Index Customer Average Interruption Duration Index
G-28
Appendix H
Conductor Database
Column Heading NAME !-!-TYPE --R_DC -(ohm/mi) R_DC -(ohm/km) R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/km) R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/km) XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/km) XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/km)
Description Conductor Name.
Conductor Type.
dc resistance in ohm/mi at 25o C.
dc resistance in ohm/km at 25o C.
ac resistance at 60 Hz in ohm/mi at 25o C.
ac resistance at 60 Hz in ohm/km at 25o C.
ac resistance at 50 Hz in ohm/mi at 25o C.
ac resistance at 50 Hz in ohm/km at 25o C.
Inductive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 60 Hz in ohm/mi.
Inductive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 60 Hz in ohm/km.
Inductive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 50 Hz in ohm/mi.
Inductive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 50 Hz in ohm/km.
H-1
Conductor Database
Column Heading XC_60 60 Hz (mohm-mi) XC_60 60 Hz (mohm-km) XC_50 50 Hz (mohm-mi) XC_50 50 Hz (mohm-km) AREA Aluminum (kcmil) AREA Total (sq-in.) AREA Total (sq-mm) OD -(in.) OD -(mm) STRAND outer/core -#STD-OL outer -STR-DIA outer (in.) STR-DIA outer (mm) STR-DIA core (in.) STR-DIA core (mm) UTS -(lb)
Description Capacitive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 60 Hz in mohm-mi.
Capacitive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 60 Hz in mohm-km.
Capacitive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 50 Hz in mohm-mi.
Capacitive reactance at 1-ft spacing at 50 Hz in mohm-km.
Aluminum cross-sectional area in thousands of circular mils.
Total cross-sectional area of the conductor in in.2 (includes core area).
Total cross-sectional area of the conductor in mm2 (includes core area).
Conductor diameter (in.).
Conductor diameter (mm).
Stranding coefficient defined as the number of aluminum strands per number of core strands. Number of aluminum strands in outer layer.
Diameter of outer stands (in.).
Diameter of outer stands (mm).
Diameter of core stands (in.).
Diameter of core stands (mm).
Rated breaking strength of the conductor (lb).
H-2
Conductor Database
Column Heading UTS -(kg) WGT -(lb/1000 ft) WGT -(kg/km) Amps -(A)
Description Rated breaking strength of the conductor (kg).
Total conductor weight (lb/1000 ft).
Total conductor weight (kg/km).
Ampacity based on 40oC conductor temperature rise over a 40oC ambient temperature with a 2ft/sec crosswind, 0.5 emissivity and no sun.
H-3
H-4
!Conductor Data File for PSS/U !dcl, 5/16/99 DO NOT USE , separator for formatting any cells !NAME TYPE R_DC R_DC !'----!'--(ohm/mi) (ohm/km) AAAC5005#6 AAAC5005 4.129 2.5657 KAZOO AAAC5005 3.47 2.1562 AAAC5005#4 AAAC5005 2.595 1.6125 KAKI AAAC5005 2.18 1.3546 AAAC5005#2 AAAC5005 1.63 1.0129 KENCH AAAC5005 1.37 0.8513 AAAC5005_1/0 AAAC5005 1.026 0.6375 KIBE AAAC5005 0.862 0.5356 AAAC5005_2/0 AAAC5005 0.8133 0.5054 KAYAK AAAC5005 0.684 0.425 AAAC5005_3/0 AAAC5005 0.6454 0.401 KOPECK AAAC5005 0.5438 0.3379 AAAC5005_4/0 AAAC5005 0.5114 0.3178 KITTLE AAAC5005 0.431 0.2678 RATCH AAAC5005 0.3775 0.2346 RAMIE AAAC5005 0.3397 0.2111 RADAR AAAC5005 0.2993 0.186 RADIAN AAAC5005 0.2694 0.1674 REDE AAAC5005 0.2536 0.1576 RAGOUT AAAC5005 0.2284 0.1419 REX AAAC5005 0.2113 0.1313 REMEX AAAC5005 0.1902 0.1182 RUBLE AAAC5005 0.1812 0.1126 RUNE AAAC5005 0.1629 0.1012 SPAR AAAC5005 0.1434 0.0891 SOLAR AAAC5005 0.1148 0.0713 AN587 AAAC5005 0.0909 0.0565 IN604 AAAC5005 0.0885 0.055 IN649 AAAC5005 0.0824 0.0512 AN659 AAAC5005 0.081 0.0503 AN759 AAAC5005 0.0703 0.0437 AAAC6201#6 AAAC6201 4.1232 2.5621 AKRON AAAC6201 3.54 2.1997 AAAC6201#4 AAAC6201 2.5931 1.6113 ALTON AAAC6201 2.22 1.3795 AAAC6201#2 AAAC6201 1.6309 1.0134 AMES AAAC6201 1.4 0.8699 AAAC6201_1/0 AAAC6201 1.0262 0.6377 AZUSA AAAC6201 0.878 0.5456 AAAC6201_2/0 AAAC6201 0.8135 0.5055 ANAHEIM AAAC6201 0.6965 0.4328 AAAC6201_3/0 AAAC6201 0.6455 0.4011 AMHERST AAAC6201 0.5531 0.3437 AAAC6201_4/0 AAAC6201 0.5121 0.3182 T117AG AAAC6201 0.4688 0.2913 T117NG AAAC6201 0.4688 0.2913 ALLIANCE AAAC6201 0.4384 0.2724 AAAC6201_250 AAAC6201 0.4336 0.2694 T148AG AAAC6201 0.3668 0.2279 T148NG AAAC6201 0.3668 0.2279 AAAC6201_300 AAAC6201 0.3646 0.2266 BUTTE AAAC6201 0.3461 0.2151 AAAC6201_350 AAAC6201 0.3102 0.1928 T182AG AAAC6201 0.2997 0.1862 T182NG AAAC6201 0.2997 0.1862 CANTON AAAC6201 0.2743 0.1704 AAAC6201_400 AAAC6201 0.2717 0.1688 T228AG AAAC6201 0.2388 0.1484 T228NG AAAC6201 0.2388 0.1484 AAAC6201_450 AAAC6201 0.2418 0.1503 CAIRO AAAC6201 0.2326 0.1445 AAAC6201_500 AAAC6201 0.2179 0.1354 AAAC6201_550 AAAC6201 0.1983 0.1232 DARIEN AAAC6201 0.1935 0.1202 T288AG AAAC6201 0.1888 0.1173 T288NG AAAC6201 0.1888 0.1173 T298AG AAAC6201 0.1802 0.112 T298NG AAAC6201 0.1802 0.112 AAAC6201_600 AAAC6201 0.1821 0.1132 AAAC6201_650 AAAC6201 0.1683 0.1046 ELGIN AAAC6201 0.1659 0.1031 AAAC6201_700 AAAC6201 0.1566 0.0973 T366AG AAAC6201 0.1485 0.0923 T366NG AAAC6201 0.1485 0.0923 FLINT AAAC6201 0.1461 0.0908 AAAC6201_750 AAAC6201 0.1464 0.091 AAAC6201_800 AAAC6201 0.1375 0.0854 T445AG AAAC6201 0.121 0.0752 T445NG AAAC6201 0.121 0.0752 AAAC6201_900 AAAC6201 0.1228 0.0763 GREELEY AAAC6201 0.1167 0.0725 AAAC6201_1000 AAAC6201 0.111 0.069 FPL3 AAAC6201 0.0972 0.0604 T570AG AAAC6201 0.0956 0.0594 T570NG AAAC6201 0.0956 0.0594 T621AG AAAC6201 0.0869 0.054 T621NG AAAC6201 0.0869 0.054 REYN2 AAAC6201 0.0886 0.0551 ALCAN1 AAAC6201 0.088 0.0547
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 4.129 3.47 2.595 2.18 1.631 1.37 1.026 0.862 0.8137 0.684 0.6459 0.544 0.512 0.431 0.378 0.341 0.3 0.27 0.254 0.23 0.212 0.192 0.183 0.165 0.146 0.117 0.0927 0.0901 0.0837 0.0822 0.0713 4.1232 3.54 2.5931 2.22 1.6309 1.4 1.0262 0.878 0.8135 0.697 0.6455 0.554 0.5121 0.4694 0.4694 0.439 0.4336 1.6092 1.6092 0.3646 0.347 0.3102 1.6092 1.6092 0.276 0.2717 1.6092 1.6092 0.2418 0.234 0.2179 0.1983 0.195 1.6092 1.6092 0.1825 0.1825 0.1821 0.1683 0.168 0.1566 1.6092 1.6092 0.148 0.1464 0.1375 0.124 0.124 0.1228 0.119 0.111 0.0991 1.6092 1.6092 0.0916 0.0916 0.0886 0.088
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 2.5657 2.1562 1.6125 1.3546 1.0135 0.8513 0.6375 0.5356 0.5056 0.425 0.4014 0.338 0.3182 0.2678 0.2349 0.2119 0.1864 0.1678 0.1578 0.1429 0.1317 0.1193 0.1137 0.1025 0.0907 0.0727 0.0576 0.056 0.052 0.0511 0.0443 2.5621 2.1997 1.6113 1.3795 1.0134 0.8699 0.6377 0.5456 0.5055 0.4331 0.4011 0.3442 0.3182 0.2917 0.2917 0.2728 0.2694 0.9999 0.9999 0.2266 0.2156 0.1928 0.9999 0.9999 0.1715 0.1688 0.9999 0.9999 0.1503 0.1454 0.1354 0.1232 0.1212 0.9999 0.9999 0.1134 0.1134 0.1132 0.1046 0.1044 0.0973 0.9999 0.9999 0.092 0.091 0.0854 0.0771 0.0771 0.0763 0.0739 0.069 0.0616 0.9999 0.9999 0.0569 0.0569 0.0551 0.0547
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 4.129 3.47 2.595 2.18 1.6307 1.37 1.026 0.862 0.8136 0.684 0.6458 0.5439 0.5118 0.431 0.3779 0.3406 0.2998 0.2698 0.2539 0.2295 0.2118 0.1915 0.1825 0.1644 0.1452 0.1163 0.0922 0.0896 0.0833 0.0818 0.071 4.1232 3.54 2.5931 2.22 1.6309 1.4 1.0262 0.878 0.8135 0.6969 0.6455 0.5537 0.5121 0.4692 0.4692 0.4388 0.4336 1.2365 1.2365 0.3646 0.3467 0.3102 1.2163 1.2163 0.2755 0.2717 1.1981 1.1981 0.2418 0.2336 0.2179 0.1983 0.1946 1.1831 1.1831 0.1818 0.1818 0.1821 0.1683 0.1674 0.1566 1.171 1.171 0.1474 0.1464 0.1375 0.1231 0.1231 0.1228 0.1183 0.111 0.0985 1.1551 1.1551 0.0902 0.0902 0.0886 0.088
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/km) 2.5657 2.1562 1.6125 1.3546 1.0133 0.8513 0.6375 0.5356 0.5055 0.425 0.4013 0.338 0.318 0.2678 0.2348 0.2117 0.1863 0.1677 0.1578 0.1426 0.1316 0.119 0.1134 0.1021 0.0902 0.0723 0.0573 0.0557 0.0518 0.0508 0.0441 2.5621 2.1997 1.6113 1.3795 1.0134 0.8699 0.6377 0.5456 0.5055 0.433 0.4011 0.3441 0.3182 0.2916 0.2916 0.2727 0.2694 0.7683 0.7683 0.2266 0.2155 0.1928 0.7558 0.7558 0.1712 0.1688 0.7445 0.7445 0.1503 0.1451 0.1354 0.1232 0.1209 0.7351 0.7351 0.113 0.113 0.1132 0.1046 0.104 0.0973 0.7276 0.7276 0.0916 0.091 0.0854 0.0765 0.0765 0.0763 0.0735 0.069 0.0612 0.7178 0.7178 0.056 0.056 0.0551 0.0547
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.63 0.621 0.602 0.593 0.574 0.564 0.546 0.536 0.532 0.522 0.518 0.508 0.504 0.494 0.48 0.473 0.465 0.459 0.455 0.449 0.444 0.438 0.435 0.429 0.419 0.405 0.3781 0.3781 0.3781 0.3781 0.3781 0.63 0.621 0.602 0.593 0.574 0.564 0.546 0.536 0.532 0.522 0.518 0.508 0.504 0.494 0.494 0.494 0.4868 0 0 0.4575 0.473 0.4664 0 0 0.459 0.4583 0 0 0.4512 0.449 0.4448 0.437 0.438 0 0 0.3625 0.3625 0.4317 0.4269 0.429 0.4224 0 0 0.419 0.4181 0.4143 0.3417 0.3417 0.407 0.405 0.4007 0.393 0 0 0.325 0.325 0.38 0.378
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.3915 0.3859 0.3741 0.3685 0.3567 0.3505 0.3393 0.3331 0.3306 0.3244 0.3219 0.3157 0.3132 0.307 0.2983 0.2939 0.2889 0.2852 0.2827 0.279 0.2759 0.2722 0.2703 0.2666 0.2604 0.2517 0.2349 0.2349 0.2349 0.2349 0.2349 0.3915 0.3859 0.3741 0.3685 0.3567 0.3505 0.3393 0.3331 0.3306 0.3244 0.3219 0.3157 0.3132 0.307 0.307 0.307 0.3025 0 0 0.2843 0.2939 0.2898 0 0 0.2852 0.2848 0 0 0.2804 0.279 0.2764 0.2715 0.2722 0 0 0.2253 0.2253 0.2683 0.2653 0.2666 0.2625 0 0 0.2604 0.2598 0.2574 0.2123 0.2123 0.2529 0.2517 0.249 0.2442 0 0 0.202 0.202 0.2361 0.2349
XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.525 0.5175 0.5017 0.4942 0.4783 0.47 0.455 0.4467 0.4433 0.435 0.4317 0.4233 0.42 0.4117 0.4 0.3942 0.3875 0.3825 0.3792 0.3742 0.37 0.365 0.3625 0.3575 0.3492 0.3375 0.3151 0.3151 0.3151 0.3151 0.3151 0.525 0.5175 0.5017 0.4942 0.4783 0.47 0.455 0.4467 0.4433 0.435 0.4317 0.4233 0.42 0.4117 0.4117 0.4117 0.4057 0 0 0.3813 0.3942 0.3887 0 0 0.3825 0.3819 0 0 0.376 0.3742 0.3707 0.3642 0.365 0 0 0.3021 0.3021 0.3598 0.3558 0.3575 0.352 0 0 0.3492 0.3484 0.3453 0.2848 0.2848 0.3392 0.3375 0.3339 0.3275 0 0 0.2708 0.2708 0.3167 0.315
XL_50 XC_60 XC_60 XC_50 XC_50 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz (ohm/km) (mohm-mi) (mohm-km) (mohm-mi) (mohm-km) 0.3262 0.1444 0.2324 0.1733 0.2789 0.3216 0.1421 0.2287 0.1705 0.2744 0.3117 0.1375 0.2213 0.165 0.2655 0.3071 0.1352 0.2176 0.1622 0.2611 0.2972 0.1306 0.2102 0.1567 0.2522 0.2921 0.1283 0.2065 0.154 0.2478 0.2827 0.1237 0.1991 0.1484 0.2389 0.2776 0.1214 0.1954 0.1457 0.2344 0.2755 0.1203 0.1936 0.1444 0.2323 0.2703 0.118 0.1899 0.1416 0.2279 0.2682 0.1169 0.1881 0.1403 0.2258 0.2631 0.1146 0.1844 0.1375 0.2213 0.261 0.1134 0.1825 0.1361 0.219 0.2558 0.1112 0.179 0.1334 0.2147 0.2486 0.1089 0.1753 0.1307 0.2103 0.2449 0.1073 0.1727 0.1288 0.2072 0.2408 0.1054 0.1696 0.1265 0.2035 0.2377 0.1039 0.1672 0.1247 0.2006 0.2356 0.108 0.1738 0.1296 0.2086 0.2325 0.1014 0.1632 0.1217 0.1958 0.2299 0.1003 0.1614 0.1204 0.1937 0.2268 0.0987 0.1588 0.1184 0.1906 0.2253 0.098 0.1577 0.1176 0.1893 0.2221 0.0964 0.1551 0.1157 0.1862 0.217 0.0944 0.1519 0.1133 0.1823 0.2097 0.0911 0.1466 0.1093 0.1759 0.1958 0.0845 0.136 0.1014 0.1632 0.1958 0.0845 0.136 0.1014 0.1632 0.1958 0.0845 0.136 0.1014 0.1632 0.1958 0.0845 0.136 0.1014 0.1632 0.1958 0.0845 0.136 0.1014 0.1632 0.3262 0.1444 0.2324 0.1733 0.2789 0.3216 0.1421 0.2287 0.1705 0.2744 0.3117 0.1375 0.2213 0.165 0.2655 0.3071 0.1352 0.2176 0.1622 0.2611 0.2972 0.1306 0.2102 0.1567 0.2522 0.2921 0.1283 0.2065 0.154 0.2478 0.2827 0.1237 0.1991 0.1484 0.2389 0.2776 0.1214 0.1954 0.1457 0.2344 0.2755 0.1203 0.1936 0.1444 0.2323 0.2703 0.118 0.1899 0.1416 0.2279 0.2682 0.1169 0.1881 0.1403 0.2258 0.2631 0.1146 0.1844 0.1375 0.2213 0.261 0.1134 0.1825 0.1361 0.219 0.2558 0.1112 0.179 0.1334 0.2147 0.2558 0.1112 0.179 0.1334 0.2147 0.2558 0.1112 0.179 0.1334 0.2147 0.2521 0.1108 0.1783 0.133 0.214 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.2369 0.108 0.1738 0.1296 0.2086 0.2449 0.1073 0.1727 0.1288 0.2072 0.2415 0.1058 0.1703 0.127 0.2043 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.2377 0.1039 0.1672 0.1247 0.2006 0.2373 0.1038 0.167 0.1246 0.2005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.2336 0.102 0.1641 0.1224 0.197 0.2325 0.1014 0.1632 0.1217 0.1958 0.2303 0.1005 0.1617 0.1206 0.1941 0.2263 0.099 0.1593 0.1188 0.1912 0.2268 0.0987 0.1588 0.1184 0.1906 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1877 0.1164 0.1873 0.1397 0.2248 0.1877 0.1164 0.1873 0.1397 0.2248 0.2235 0.0977 0.1572 0.1172 0.1887 0.2211 0.0965 0.1553 0.1158 0.1864 0.2221 0.0964 0.1551 0.1157 0.1862 0.2187 0.0954 0.1535 0.1145 0.1842 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.217 0.0944 0.1519 0.1133 0.1823 0.2165 0.0944 0.1519 0.1133 0.1823 0.2145 0.0934 0.1503 0.1121 0.1804 0.1769 0.1104 0.1777 0.1325 0.2132 0.1769 0.1104 0.1777 0.1325 0.2132 0.2108 0.0917 0.1476 0.11 0.1771 0.2097 0.0911 0.1466 0.1093 0.1759 0.2075 0.0901 0.145 0.1081 0.174 0.2035 0.088 0.1416 0.1056 0.1699 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1683 0.1044 0.168 0.1253 0.2016 0.1683 0.1044 0.168 0.1253 0.2016 0.1968 0.09 0.1448 0.108 0.1738 0.1957 0.0846 0.1361 0.1015 0.1634
AREA aluminum (kcmil) 26 31 42 49 66 77 106 123 133 155 168 196 212 247 281 313 355 395 420 465 504 559 587 652 741 927 1158.5 1192 1259.1 1300.6 1497.9 26 31 42 49 66 77 106 123 133 155 168 196 212 230.9 230.9 247 250 292.3 292.3 300 313 350 358.4 358.4 395 400 449.6 449.6 450 465 500 550 559 569 569 584 584 600 650 652 700 722.7 722.7 741 750 800 875 875 900 927 1000 1113 1125.3 1125.3 1219 1219 1272 1450
AREA total (sq-in.) 0.0206 0.024 0.0327 0.0382 0.0521 0.0608 0.0829 0.0968 0.1046 0.1221 0.1318 0.1537 0.1663 0.1939 0.221 0.2456 0.2789 0.3099 0.3295 0.3655 0.3955 0.4394 0.4612 0.5124 0.5818 0.7282 0.9099 0.9362 0.9889 1.0215 1.1765 0.0206 0.024 0.0327 0.0382 0.0521 0.0608 0.0829 0.0968 0.1046 0.1221 0.1318 0.1537 0.1663 0.1814 0.1814 0.1939 0.1963 0.2296 0.2296 0.2358 0.2456 0.2748 0.2815 0.2815 0.3099 0.3142 0.3531 0.3531 0.3534 0.3655 0.3962 0.4318 0.4394 0.4469 0.4469 0.4613 0.4613 0.4709 0.5102 0.5124 0.5494 0.5676 0.5676 0.5818 0.5893 0.628 0.691 0.691 0.7072 0.7282 0.7854 0.8742 0.8838 0.8838 0.9626 0.9626 0.999 1.1388
AREA total (sq-mm) 13.2903 15.4838 21.0967 24.6451 33.6128 39.2257 53.4838 62.4515 67.4837 78.774 85.0321 99.1611 107.2901 125.0965 142.5804 158.4513 179.9351 199.9351 212.5802 235.806 255.1608 283.4833 297.5478 330.58 375.3541 469.8055 587.0311 603.9988 637.9987 659.0309 759.0307 13.2903 15.4838 21.0967 24.6451 33.6128 39.2257 53.4838 62.4515 67.4837 78.774 85.0321 99.1611 107.2901 117.032 117.032 125.0965 126.6449 148.1287 148.1287 152.1287 158.4513 177.29 181.6125 181.6125 199.9351 202.7093 227.806 227.806 227.9995 235.806 255.6124 278.5801 283.4833 288.322 288.322 297.6123 297.6123 303.8058 329.1606 330.58 354.4509 366.1928 366.1928 375.3541 380.1928 405.1605 445.8056 445.8056 456.2572 469.8055 506.7087 563.9989 570.1924 570.1924 621.031 621.031 644.5148 734.7082
OD -(in.) 0.184 0.198 0.232 0.25 0.292 0.316 0.368 0.398 0.414 0.447 0.464 0.502 0.522 0.563 0.608 0.642 0.683 0.721 0.743 0.782 0.814 0.858 0.879 0.926 0.99 1.108 1.2402 1.2579 1.3031 1.315 1.4094 0.184 0.198 0.232 0.25 0.292 0.316 0.368 0.398 0.414 0.447 0.464 0.502 0.522 0.5512 0.5512 0.563 0.574 0.6201 0.6201 0.629 0.642 0.679 0.689 0.689 0.721 0.726 0.7717 0.7717 0.77 0.782 0.811 0.853 0.858 0.8681 0.8681 0.8819 0.8819 0.891 0.928 0.926 0.963 0.9783 0.9783 0.99 0.997 1.029 1.0807 1.0807 1.092 1.108 1.151 1.2215 1.2224 1.2224 1.2756 1.2756 1.3 1.388
OD STRAND -- outer/core (mm) -4.6736 7 5.0292 7 5.8928 7 6.35 7 7.4168 7 8.0264 7 9.3472 7 10.1092 7 10.5156 7 11.3538 7 11.7856 7 12.7508 7 13.2588 7 14.3002 7 15.4432 19 16.3068 19 17.3482 19 18.3134 19 18.8722 19 19.8628 19 20.6756 19 21.7932 19 22.3266 19 23.5204 19 25.146 37 28.1432 37 31.5011 61 31.9507 61 33.0987 61 33.401 61 35.7988 61 4.6736 7 5.0292 7 5.8928 7 6.35 7 7.4168 7 8.0264 7 9.3472 7 10.1092 7 10.5156 7 11.3538 7 11.7856 7 12.7508 7 13.2588 7 14.0005 19 14.0005 19 14.3002 7 14.5796 19 15.7505 19 15.7505 19 15.9766 19 16.3068 19 17.2466 19 17.5006 37 17.5006 37 18.3134 19 18.4404 19 19.6012 37 19.6012 37 19.558 19 19.8628 19 20.5994 19 21.6662 37 21.7932 19 22.0497 37 22.0497 37 22.4003 37 22.4003 37 22.6314 37 23.5712 37 23.5204 19 24.4602 37 24.8488 37 24.8488 37 25.146 37 25.3238 37 26.1366 37 27.4498 61 27.4498 61 27.7368 37 28.1432 37 29.2354 37 31.0261 37 31.049 61 31.049 61 32.4002 61 32.4002 61 33.02 61 35.2552 61
#STD-OL outer -6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 12 12 18 18 12 12 12 18 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 24 24 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24
STR-DIA outer (in.) 0.0612 0.0661 0.0772 0.0834 0.0974 0.1052 0.1228 0.1327 0.1379 0.149 0.1548 0.1672 0.1739 0.1878 0.1218 0.1284 0.1368 0.1442 0.1486 0.1566 0.1628 0.1716 0.1758 0.1854 0.1416 0.1583 0.1378 0.1398 0.1437 0.1457 0.1575 0.0612 0.0661 0.0772 0.0834 0.0974 0.1052 0.1228 0.1327 0.1379 0.149 0.1548 0.1672 0.1739 0.11 0.11 0.1878 0.1147 0.124 0.124 0.1257 0.1283 0.1357 0.0984 0.0984 0.1441 0.1451 0.1102 0.1102 0.1539 0.1565 0.1622 0.1219 0.1716 0.124 0.124 0.126 0.126 0.1273 0.1325 0.1853 0.1375 0.1398 0.1398 0.1415 0.1424 0.147 0.1201 0.1201 0.156 0.1583 0.1644 0.1734 0.1358 0.1358 0.1417 0.1417 0.1444 0.1542
STR-DIA outer (mm) 1.5545 1.6789 1.9609 2.1184 2.474 2.6721 3.1191 3.3706 3.5027 3.7846 3.9319 4.2469 4.4171 4.7701 3.0937 3.2614 3.4747 3.6627 3.7744 3.9776 4.1351 4.3586 4.4653 4.7092 3.5966 4.0208 3.5001 3.5509 3.65 3.7008 4.0005 1.5545 1.6789 1.9609 2.1184 2.474 2.6721 3.1191 3.3706 3.5027 3.7846 3.9319 4.2469 4.4171 2.794 2.794 4.7701 2.9134 3.1496 3.1496 3.1928 3.2588 3.4468 2.4994 2.4994 3.6601 3.6855 2.7991 2.7991 3.9091 3.9751 4.1199 3.0963 4.3586 3.1496 3.1496 3.2004 3.2004 3.2334 3.3655 4.7066 3.4925 3.5509 3.5509 3.5941 3.617 3.7338 3.0505 3.0505 3.9624 4.0208 4.1758 4.4044 3.4493 3.4493 3.5992 3.5992 3.6678 3.9167
STR-DIA core (in.) 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999
STR-DIA core (mm) 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999
UTS -(lb) 800 922 1200 1430 1900 2220 2900 3440 3700 4280 4600 5020 5400 6330 7610 8450 9600 10500 11200 12200 12500 13900 14600 16200 19300 23900 30349 35969 38667 33497 37993 900 1110 1500 1760 2400 2800 3800 4460 4600 5390 5800 6790 7340 8471 8471 8560 8760 10723 10723 10500 11000 11800 13147 13147 13300 13400 16492 16492 15100 15600 16800 18900 18800 20874 20874 21550 21550 20600 22300 21900 23000 26505 26505 24400 24700 26300 32280 32280 29600 30500 32900 37000 41275 41275 44960 44960 40900 46600
UTS WGT --(kg) (lb/1000 ft) 362.9 25 418.2 28.7 544.3 39 648.6 45.7 861.8 62 1007 72.7 1315.4 99 1560.4 115.7 1678.3 125 1941.4 145.9 2086.5 158 2277.1 183.7 2449.4 199 2871.3 231.8 3451.9 264.2 3832.9 293.6 4354.5 333.3 4762.8 370.3 5080.3 393.9 5533.9 436.9 5670 472.7 6305 525.2 6622.5 551.2 7348.3 612.4 8754.4 695.4 10841 870.4 13766.2 1088.6 16315.4 1119.5 17539.2 1183.3 15194.1 1220.3 17233.5 1407.1 408.2 24.5 503.5 28.7 680.4 38.9 798.3 45.7 1088.6 61.9 1270.1 72.7 1723.7 98.4 2023 115.7 2086.5 124.1 2444.9 145.9 2630.9 156.4 3079.9 183.7 3329.4 197.4 3842.4 221.7 3842.4 216.4 3882.8 231.8 3973.5 233.1 4863.9 280.2 4863.9 273.5 4762.8 280 4989.6 293.6 5352.4 326 5963.4 348.8 5963.4 336 6032.8 370.3 6078.2 373 7480.7 437.5 7480.7 421.3 6849.3 419.6 7076.1 436.9 7620.4 466.1 8573 512.7 8527.6 525.2 9468.4 553.7 9468.4 533.5 9775 565.3 9775 550.6 9344.1 559.1 10115.2 605.7 9933.8 612.4 10432.7 652.3 12022.6 703.6 12022.6 678 11067.8 695.4 11203.8 699.6 11929.6 745.6 14642.1 851.7 14642.1 826.8 13426.5 839.7 13834.7 870.4 14923.3 932.5 16783.1 1123.6 18722.2 1106.1 18722.2 1057.7 20393.7 1187 20393.7 1152 18552.1 1194 21137.6 1352
WGT -(kg/km) 37.2 42.7 58 68 92.3 108.2 147.3 172.2 186 217.1 235.1 273.4 296.2 345 393.2 436.9 496 551.1 586.2 650.2 703.5 781.6 820.3 911.4 1034.9 1295.3 1620.1 1666.1 1761 1816.1 2094.1 36.4 42.7 57.9 68 92.2 108.2 146.5 172.2 184.7 217.1 232.8 273.4 293.8 329.9 322.1 345 346.9 417 407 416.7 436.9 485.2 519.1 500 551.1 555.1 651.1 627 624.5 650.2 693.7 763 781.6 824 794 841.3 819.4 832.1 901.4 911.4 970.8 1047.1 1009 1034.9 1041.2 1109.6 1267.5 1230.5 1249.7 1295.3 1387.8 1672.2 1646.1 1574.1 1766.5 1714.4 1776.9 2012.1
Amps -(A) 9999 100 9999 140 9999 185 9999 250 9999 295 9999 340 9999 395 430 460 495 530 550 590 620 660 680 730 790 910 1130 1130 1130 1130 1130 97 100 130 135 173 180 232 240 268 280 310 325 359 350 350 380 400 9999 9999 448 445 494 9999 9999 515 537 9999 9999 578 570 618 656 645 9999 9999 600 600 693 728 710 763 9999 9999 775 796 828 810 810 891 890 951 1000 9999 9999 1000 1000 1050 1130
PSS/ADEPT - Appendix H
Conductor Database (1 of 8)
!NAME !'-!'-T851AG T851NG T1144AG T1144NG T1600AG T1600NG PEACHBELL(#6) ROSE(#4) IRIS(#2) PANSY(#1) POPPY(1/0) ASTER(2/0) PHLOX(3/0) OXLIP(4/0) SNEEZEWORT VALERIAN DAISY LAUREL PEONY TULIP DAFFODIL CANNA GOLDENTUFT COSMOS SYRINGA HYACINTH ZINNIA T2DAISY DAHLIA MISTLETOE MEADOWSWEET ORCHID T2TULIP FLAG VERBENA NASTURTIUM VIOLET CATTAIL PETUNIA ARBUTUS LILAC T2CANNA ANEMONE CROCUS COCKSCOMB SNAPDRAGON GOLDENROD MAGNOLIA T2COSMOS CAMELLIA HAWKWEED BLUEBELL LARKSPUR MARIGOLD T2DAHLIA HAWTHORN T2DAYLILLY NARCISSUS T2ORCHID T2GLOXINIA COLUMBINE CARNATION T2VIOLET GLADIOLUS COREOPSIS T2ARBUTUS JESSAMINE T2COCKSCOMB COWSLIP T2BLUEBELL T2MARIGOLD LUPINE TRILLIUM BLUEBONNET MERLIN1 MERLIN2 PELICAN1 PELICAN2 DOVE1 DOVE2 GROSBEAK1 GROSBEAK2 GROSBEAK3 GROSBEAK4 DRAKE6 DRAKE5 TERN1 TERN2 TERN3 DRAKE4 ACAR900.1
TYPE --AAAC6201 AAAC6201 AAAC6201 AAAC6201 AAAC6201 AAAC6201 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 AAC/ASTMB231 ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR
R_DC -(ohm/mi) 0.063 0.063 0.0469 0.0469 0.0333 0.0333 3.551 2.232 1.402 1.1113 0.882 0.6994 0.5551 0.4398 0.3724 0.3724 0.349 0.349 0.3101 0.2766 0.2662 0.234 0.2069 0.1954 0.1954 0.1864 0.1864 0.1745 0.1674 0.1674 0.1553 0.1464 0.1384 0.133 0.133 0.1301 0.1301 0.1242 0.1242 0.117 0.117 0.1171 0.1064 0.1064 0.1034 0.1034 0.0975 0.0975 0.0976 0.0932 0.0931 0.09 0.09 0.0836 0.0836 0.0781 0.0781 0.0732 0.0732 0.0699 0.0688 0.065 0.065 0.0616 0.0585 0.0586 0.0532 0.0517 0.0466 0.045 0.0418 0.0376 0.0313 0.0271 0.2702 0.2765 0.1905 0.1949 0.1469 0.1503 0.1278 0.1293 0.1324 0.1356 0.1167 0.1165 0.1098 0.1147 0.1175 0.1163 0.1062
R_DC -(ohm/km) 0.0391 0.0391 0.0291 0.0291 0.0207 0.0207 2.2065 1.3869 0.8712 0.6905 0.5481 0.4346 0.3449 0.2733 0.2314 0.2314 0.2169 0.2169 0.1927 0.1719 0.1654 0.1454 0.1286 0.1214 0.1214 0.1158 0.1158 0.1084 0.104 0.104 0.0965 0.091 0.086 0.0826 0.0826 0.0808 0.0808 0.0772 0.0772 0.0727 0.0727 0.0728 0.0661 0.0661 0.0643 0.0643 0.0606 0.0606 0.0606 0.0579 0.0579 0.0559 0.0559 0.0519 0.0519 0.0485 0.0485 0.0455 0.0455 0.0434 0.0428 0.0404 0.0404 0.0383 0.0364 0.0364 0.0331 0.0321 0.0289 0.028 0.026 0.0234 0.0195 0.0168 0.1679 0.1718 0.1184 0.1211 0.0913 0.0934 0.0794 0.0803 0.0823 0.0843 0.0725 0.0724 0.0682 0.0713 0.073 0.0723 0.066
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.0693 0.0693 0.0556 0.0556 0.0439 0.0439 3.551 2.232 1.402 1.114 0.882 0.7 0.556 0.441 0.373 0.373 0.35 0.35 0.311 0.278 0.267 0.235 0.208 0.197 0.197 0.188 0.188 0.1763 0.169 0.169 0.157 0.149 0.1406 0.135 0.135 0.133 0.133 0.127 0.127 0.12 0.12 0.1197 0.109 0.109 0.106 0.106 0.101 0.101 0.1007 0.0964 0.0963 0.0933 0.0933 0.0872 0.0872 0.0819 0.0819 0.0772 0.0772 0.074 0.0731 0.0695 0.0695 0.0663 0.0634 0.0635 0.0585 0.0572 0.0525 0.0512 0.0484 0.0446 0.0392 0.0357 0.2711 0.278 0.1925 0.1964 0.1488 0.1525 0.1297 0.1318 0.1348 0.1378 0.1192 0.1192 0.1144 0.1175 0.1204 0.1188 0.109
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.0431 0.0431 0.0345 0.0345 0.0273 0.0273 2.2065 1.3869 0.8712 0.6922 0.5481 0.435 0.3455 0.274 0.2318 0.2318 0.2175 0.2175 0.1933 0.1727 0.1659 0.146 0.1292 0.1224 0.1224 0.1168 0.1168 0.1096 0.105 0.105 0.0976 0.0926 0.0874 0.0839 0.0839 0.0826 0.0826 0.0789 0.0789 0.0746 0.0746 0.0744 0.0677 0.0677 0.0659 0.0659 0.0628 0.0628 0.0626 0.0599 0.0598 0.058 0.058 0.0542 0.0542 0.0509 0.0509 0.048 0.048 0.046 0.0454 0.0432 0.0432 0.0412 0.0394 0.0395 0.0364 0.0355 0.0326 0.0318 0.0301 0.0277 0.0244 0.0222 0.1685 0.1727 0.1196 0.122 0.0925 0.0948 0.0806 0.0819 0.0838 0.0856 0.0741 0.0741 0.0711 0.073 0.0748 0.0738 0.0677
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.0674 0.0674 0.053 0.053 0.0407 0.0407 3.551 2.232 1.402 1.1132 0.882 0.6998 0.5557 0.4406 0.3728 0.3728 0.3497 0.3497 0.3107 0.2776 0.2668 0.2347 0.2077 0.1965 0.1965 0.1875 0.1875 0.1758 0.1685 0.1685 0.1565 0.1482 0.1399 0.1344 0.1344 0.1321 0.1321 0.1262 0.1262 0.1191 0.1191 0.1189 0.1082 0.1082 0.1052 0.1052 0.1 0.1 0.0998 0.0954 0.0953 0.0923 0.0923 0.0861 0.0861 0.0808 0.0808 0.076 0.076 0.0728 0.0718 0.0682 0.0682 0.0649 0.0619 0.062 0.0569 0.0556 0.0507 0.0493 0.0464 0.0425 0.0368 0.0331 0.2708 0.2776 0.1919 0.196 0.1482 0.1518 0.1291 0.1311 0.1341 0.1371 0.1185 0.1184 0.113 0.1167 0.1195 0.1181 0.1082
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/km) 0.0419 0.0419 0.0329 0.0329 0.0253 0.0253 2.2065 1.3869 0.8712 0.6917 0.5481 0.4349 0.3453 0.2738 0.2317 0.2317 0.2173 0.2173 0.1931 0.1725 0.1658 0.1458 0.129 0.1221 0.1221 0.1165 0.1165 0.1092 0.1047 0.1047 0.0972 0.0921 0.087 0.0835 0.0835 0.0821 0.0821 0.0784 0.0784 0.074 0.074 0.0739 0.0672 0.0672 0.0654 0.0654 0.0621 0.0621 0.062 0.0593 0.0592 0.0574 0.0574 0.0535 0.0535 0.0502 0.0502 0.0472 0.0472 0.0452 0.0446 0.0423 0.0423 0.0403 0.0385 0.0385 0.0354 0.0345 0.0315 0.0307 0.0288 0.0264 0.0229 0.0206 0.1683 0.1725 0.1192 0.1218 0.0921 0.0944 0.0802 0.0814 0.0833 0.0852 0.0736 0.0736 0.0702 0.0725 0.0743 0.0734 0.0672
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.3083 0.3083 0.2833 0.2833 0.275 0.275 0.63 0.602 0.574 0.56 0.546 0.532 0.518 0.504 0.493 0.487 0.489 0.483 0.476 0.469 0.466 0.459 0.451 0.448 0.446 0.443 0.445 0.4253 0.438 0.436 0.432 0.428 0.4098 0.421 0.422 0.42 0.421 0.417 0.418 0.415 0.414 0.3996 0.409 0.408 0.407 0.406 0.403 0.403 0.3889 0.4 0.401 0.399 0.398 0.393 0.3793 0.389 0.3751 0.385 0.37 0.3672 0.381 0.378 0.3628 0.375 0.372 0.3565 0.366 0.3489 0.357 0.3406 0.3355 0.344 0.332 0.323 0.465 0.465 0.444 0.444 0.429 0.429 0.419 0.419 0.419 0.419 0.413 0.411 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.408
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.1916 0.1916 0.176 0.176 0.1709 0.1709 0.3915 0.3741 0.3567 0.348 0.3393 0.3306 0.3219 0.3132 0.3063 0.3026 0.3039 0.3001 0.2958 0.2914 0.2896 0.2852 0.2802 0.2784 0.2771 0.2753 0.2765 0.2643 0.2722 0.2709 0.2684 0.266 0.2546 0.2616 0.2622 0.261 0.2616 0.2591 0.2597 0.2579 0.2573 0.2483 0.2541 0.2535 0.2529 0.2523 0.2504 0.2504 0.2417 0.2486 0.2492 0.2479 0.2473 0.2442 0.2357 0.2417 0.2331 0.2392 0.2299 0.2282 0.2367 0.2349 0.2254 0.233 0.2312 0.2215 0.2274 0.2168 0.2218 0.2116 0.2085 0.2138 0.2063 0.2007 0.2889 0.2889 0.2759 0.2759 0.2666 0.2666 0.2604 0.2604 0.2604 0.2604 0.2566 0.2554 0.2548 0.2548 0.2548 0.2548 0.2535
XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.2569 0.2569 0.2361 0.2361 0.2292 0.2292 0.525 0.5017 0.4783 0.4667 0.455 0.4433 0.4317 0.42 0.4108 0.4058 0.4075 0.4025 0.3967 0.3908 0.3883 0.3825 0.3758 0.3733 0.3717 0.3692 0.3708 0.3544 0.365 0.3633 0.36 0.3567 0.3415 0.3508 0.3517 0.35 0.3508 0.3475 0.3483 0.3458 0.345 0.333 0.3408 0.34 0.3392 0.3383 0.3358 0.3358 0.3241 0.3333 0.3342 0.3325 0.3317 0.3275 0.3161 0.3242 0.3126 0.3208 0.3083 0.306 0.3175 0.315 0.3023 0.3125 0.31 0.2971 0.305 0.2908 0.2975 0.2838 0.2796 0.2867 0.2767 0.2692 0.3875 0.3875 0.37 0.37 0.3575 0.3575 0.3492 0.3492 0.3492 0.3492 0.3442 0.3425 0.3417 0.3417 0.3417 0.3417 0.34
XL_50 XC_60 XC_60 XC_50 XC_50 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz (ohm/km) (mohm-mi) (mohm-km) (mohm-mi) (mohm-km) 0.1596 0.0984 0.1584 0.1181 0.19 0.1596 0.0984 0.1584 0.1181 0.19 0.1467 0.0912 0.1468 0.1094 0.1761 0.1467 0.0912 0.1468 0.1094 0.1761 0.1424 0.0864 0.139 0.1037 0.1669 0.1424 0.0864 0.139 0.1037 0.1669 0.3262 0.1444 0.2324 0.1733 0.2789 0.3117 0.1375 0.2213 0.165 0.2655 0.2972 0.1306 0.2102 0.1567 0.2522 0.29 0.1272 0.2047 0.1526 0.2456 0.2827 0.1237 0.1991 0.1484 0.2389 0.2755 0.1203 0.1936 0.1444 0.2323 0.2682 0.1169 0.1881 0.1403 0.2258 0.261 0.1134 0.1825 0.1361 0.219 0.2553 0.111 0.1786 0.1332 0.2144 0.2522 0.1106 0.178 0.1327 0.2136 0.2532 0.11 0.177 0.132 0.2124 0.2501 0.1097 0.1765 0.1316 0.2118 0.2465 0.1079 0.1736 0.1295 0.2084 0.2429 0.1062 0.1709 0.1274 0.2051 0.2413 0.1056 0.1699 0.1267 0.2039 0.2377 0.1037 0.1669 0.1244 0.2003 0.2335 0.1019 0.164 0.1223 0.1968 0.232 0.101 0.1625 0.1212 0.195 0.2309 0.101 0.1625 0.1212 0.195 0.2294 0.1003 0.1614 0.1204 0.1937 0.2304 0.1004 0.1616 0.1205 0.1939 0.2202 0.0998 0.1606 0.1198 0.1927 0.2268 0.0988 0.159 0.1186 0.1908 0.2258 0.0987 0.1588 0.1184 0.1906 0.2237 0.0976 0.1571 0.1171 0.1885 0.2216 0.0967 0.1556 0.116 0.1867 0.2122 0.096 0.1545 0.1152 0.1854 0.218 0.0952 0.1532 0.1142 0.1838 0.2185 0.0953 0.1534 0.1144 0.184 0.2175 0.0949 0.1527 0.1139 0.1833 0.218 0.0949 0.1527 0.1139 0.1833 0.2159 0.0942 0.1516 0.113 0.1819 0.2165 0.0943 0.1518 0.1132 0.1821 0.2149 0.0934 0.1503 0.1121 0.1804 0.2144 0.0933 0.1501 0.112 0.1802 0.2069 0.0936 0.1506 0.1123 0.1808 0.2118 0.092 0.1481 0.1104 0.1777 0.2113 0.0919 0.1479 0.1103 0.1775 0.2108 0.0915 0.1473 0.1098 0.1767 0.2102 0.0915 0.1473 0.1098 0.1767 0.2087 0.0906 0.1458 0.1087 0.175 0.2087 0.0907 0.146 0.1088 0.1752 0.2014 0.0909 0.1463 0.1091 0.1755 0.2071 0.09 0.1448 0.108 0.1738 0.2076 0.09 0.1448 0.108 0.1738 0.2066 0.0895 0.144 0.1074 0.1728 0.2061 0.0895 0.144 0.1074 0.1728 0.2035 0.0884 0.1423 0.1061 0.1707 0.1964 0.0886 0.1426 0.1063 0.1711 0.2014 0.0874 0.1407 0.1049 0.1688 0.1942 0.0876 0.141 0.1051 0.1692 0.1994 0.0864 0.139 0.1037 0.1669 0.1916 0.0865 0.1392 0.1038 0.167 0.1901 0.0859 0.1382 0.1031 0.1659 0.1973 0.0855 0.1376 0.1026 0.1651 0.1957 0.0846 0.1361 0.1015 0.1634 0.1879 0.0848 0.1365 0.1018 0.1638 0.1942 0.0838 0.1349 0.1006 0.1618 0.1926 0.0831 0.1337 0.0997 0.1605 0.1846 0.0832 0.1339 0.0998 0.1607 0.1895 0.0817 0.1315 0.098 0.1578 0.1807 0.0814 0.131 0.0977 0.1572 0.1849 0.0797 0.1283 0.0956 0.1539 0.1764 0.0793 0.1276 0.0952 0.1531 0.1737 0.0782 0.1258 0.0938 0.151 0.1781 0.0764 0.123 0.0917 0.1475 0.1719 0.0736 0.1184 0.0883 0.1421 0.1673 0.0714 0.1149 0.0857 0.1379 0.2408 0.1054 0.1696 0.1265 0.2035 0.2408 0.1054 0.1696 0.1265 0.2035 0.2299 0.1003 0.1614 0.1204 0.1937 0.2299 0.1003 0.1614 0.1204 0.1937 0.2221 0.0964 0.1551 0.1157 0.1862 0.2221 0.0964 0.1551 0.1157 0.1862 0.217 0.0945 0.1521 0.1134 0.1825 0.217 0.0945 0.1521 0.1134 0.1825 0.217 0.0945 0.1521 0.1134 0.1825 0.217 0.0945 0.1521 0.1134 0.1825 0.2139 0.0929 0.1495 0.1115 0.1794 0.2128 0.0926 0.149 0.1111 0.1788 0.2123 0.0923 0.1485 0.1108 0.1782 0.2123 0.0923 0.1485 0.1108 0.1782 0.2123 0.0923 0.1485 0.1108 0.1782 0.2123 0.0922 0.1484 0.1106 0.1781 0.2113 0.0911 0.1466 0.1093 0.1759
AREA aluminum (kcmil) 1670 1670 2244 2244 3132 3132 26.2 41.7 66.4 83.7 105.6 133.1 167.8 211.6 250 250 266.8 266.8 300 336.4 350 397.5 450 477 477 500 500 533.6 556.5 556.5 600 636 672.8 700 700 715.5 715.5 750 750 795 795 795 874.5 874.5 900 900 954 954 954 1000 1000 1033.5 1033.5 1113 1113 1192.5 1192.5 1272 1272 1333 1351.5 1431 1431 1511 1590 1590 1750 1800 2000 2067 2226 2500 3000 3500 355 355 504 504 653 653 740 740 740 740 819 840 854 854 854 863 900
AREA total (sq-in.) 1.3189 1.3189 1.773 1.773 2.474 2.474 0.0206 0.0328 0.0522 0.0657 0.0829 0.1045 0.1317 0.1663 0.1964 0.1963 0.2097 0.2095 0.2358 0.2644 0.2748 0.3124 0.3534 0.3744 0.3743 0.3924 0.3926 0.419 0.4369 0.4368 0.4709 0.4995 0.5284 0.5495 0.5494 0.5619 0.5622 0.5892 0.5892 0.6245 0.6248 0.6244 0.6874 0.6876 0.7072 0.7072 0.7498 0.7495 0.749 0.7849 0.7854 0.8124 0.8122 0.8744 0.874 0.9363 0.936 0.999 0.999 1.047 1.062 1.124 1.124 1.187 1.25 1.249 1.375 1.414 1.57 1.623 1.748 1.962 2.356 2.749 0.2789 0.2789 0.395 0.395 0.5129 0.5129 0.5812 0.5812 0.5812 0.5812 0.7282 0.7282 0.6705 0.6705 0.6705 0.7282 0.7072
AREA total (sq-mm) 850.9015 850.9015 1143.8687 1143.8687 1596.1258 1596.1258 13.2903 21.1612 33.6774 42.387 53.4838 67.4192 84.9676 107.2901 126.7094 126.6449 135.2901 135.161 152.1287 170.5803 177.29 201.548 227.9995 241.5479 241.4834 253.1608 253.2898 270.322 281.8704 281.8059 303.8058 322.2574 340.9025 354.5154 354.4509 362.5154 362.709 380.1283 380.1283 402.9024 403.096 402.8379 443.483 443.612 456.2572 456.2572 483.741 483.5474 483.2248 506.3861 506.7087 524.128 523.999 564.1279 563.8698 604.0633 603.8698 644.5148 644.5148 675.4825 685.1599 725.1598 725.1598 765.8049 806.45 805.8048 887.095 912.2562 1012.9012 1047.0947 1127.7397 1265.8039 1519.997 1773.5448 179.9351 179.9351 254.8382 254.8382 330.9026 330.9026 374.967 374.967 374.967 374.967 469.8055 469.8055 432.5798 432.5798 432.5798 469.8055 456.2572
OD -(in.) 1.494 1.494 1.7323 1.7323 2.0472 2.0472 0.184 0.232 0.292 0.328 0.368 0.414 0.464 0.522 0.567 0.573 0.586 0.593 0.629 0.666 0.679 0.723 0.769 0.793 0.795 0.813 0.811 0.959 0.855 0.858 0.891 0.918 1.09 0.964 0.962 0.975 0.974 0.998 0.997 1.026 1.028 1.185 1.077 1.078 1.092 1.094 1.126 1.124 1.298 1.152 1.151 1.17 1.172 1.216 1.401 1.258 1.45 1.3 1.503 1.538 1.34 1.379 1.594 1.417 1.454 1.68 1.525 1.788 1.63 1.915 1.991 1.823 1.998 2.158 0.683 0.683 0.814 0.814 0.927 0.927 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 1.042 1.055 1.063 1.063 1.063 1.069 1.092
OD STRAND -- outer/core (mm) -37.9476 91 37.9476 91 44.0004 91 44.0004 91 51.9989 127 51.9989 127 4.6736 7 5.8928 7 7.4168 7 8.3312 7 9.3472 7 10.5156 7 11.7856 7 13.2588 7 14.4018 7 14.5542 19 14.8844 7 15.0622 19 15.9766 19 16.9164 19 17.2466 19 18.3642 19 19.5326 19 20.1422 19 20.193 37 20.6502 37 20.5994 19 24.3586 7 21.717 19 21.7932 37 22.6314 37 23.3172 37 27.686 19 24.4856 61 24.4348 37 24.765 61 24.7396 37 25.3492 61 25.3238 37 26.0604 37 26.1112 61 30.099 19 27.3558 37 27.3812 61 27.7368 37 27.7876 61 28.6004 61 28.5496 37 32.9692 19 29.2608 61 29.2354 37 29.718 37 29.7688 61 30.8864 61 35.5854 19 31.9532 61 36.83 19 33.02 61 38.1762 37 39.0652 37 34.036 61 35.0266 61 40.4876 37 35.9918 61 36.9316 61 42.672 37 38.735 61 45.4152 37 41.402 91 48.641 37 50.5714 61 46.3042 91 50.7492 127 54.8132 127 17.3482 15/4 17.3482 7-Dec 20.6756 15/4 20.6756 7-Dec 23.5458 15/4 23.5458 7-Dec 25.146 33/4 25.146 30/7 25.146 24/13 25.146 18/19 26.4668 30/7 26.797 24/13 27.0002 30/7 27.0002 24/13 27.0002 18/19 27.1526 18/19 27.7368 30/7
#STD-OL outer -30 30 30 30 36 36 6 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 12 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 12 6 12 18 18 18 12 24 18 24 18 24 18 18 24 12 18 24 18 24 24 18 12 24 18 18 24 24 12 24 12 24 18 18 24 24 18 24 24 18 24 18 30 18 24 30 36 36 12 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
STR-DIA outer (in.) 0.1358 0.1358 0.1575 0.1575 0.1575 0.1575 0.0612 0.0772 0.0974 0.1093 0.1228 0.1379 0.1548 0.1739 0.189 0.1147 0.1953 0.1185 0.1257 0.1331 0.1357 0.1447 0.1539 0.1584 0.1135 0.1162 0.1622 0.1953 0.1711 0.1226 0.1273 0.1311 0.1331 0.1071 0.1375 0.1083 0.1391 0.1109 0.1424 0.1466 0.1142 0.1447 0.1538 0.1198 0.156 0.1215 0.1251 0.1606 0.1584 0.128 0.1644 0.1672 0.1302 0.1351 0.1711 0.1398 0.1771 0.1444 0.1311 0.1342 0.1489 0.1532 0.1391 0.1574 0.1615 0.1466 0.1694 0.156 0.1482 0.1671 0.1351 0.1657 0.1537 0.166 0.1367 0.1367 0.1628 0.1628 0.1854 0.1854 0.1414 0.1414 0.1414 0.1414 0.1488 0.1507 0.1519 0.1519 0.1519 0.1527 0.156
STR-DIA outer (mm) 3.4493 3.4493 4.0005 4.0005 4.0005 4.0005 1.5545 1.9609 2.474 2.7762 3.1191 3.5027 3.9319 4.4171 4.8006 2.9134 4.9606 3.0099 3.1928 3.3807 3.4468 3.6754 3.9091 4.0234 2.8829 2.9515 4.1199 4.9606 4.3459 3.114 3.2334 3.3299 3.3807 2.7203 3.4925 2.7508 3.5331 2.8169 3.617 3.7236 2.9007 3.6754 3.9065 3.0429 3.9624 3.0861 3.1775 4.0792 4.0234 3.2512 4.1758 4.2469 3.3071 3.4315 4.3459 3.5509 4.4983 3.6678 3.3299 3.4087 3.7821 3.8913 3.5331 3.998 4.1021 3.7236 4.3028 3.9624 3.7643 4.2443 3.4315 4.2088 3.904 4.2164 3.4722 3.4722 4.1351 4.1351 4.7092 4.7092 3.5916 3.5916 3.5916 3.5916 3.7795 3.8278 3.8583 3.8583 3.8583 3.8786 3.9624
STR-DIA core (in.) 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0
STR-DIA core (mm) 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 4
UTS -(lb) 61590 61590 81580 81580 113860 113860 563 881 1350 1640 1990 2510 3040 3830 4520 4660 4830 4970 5480 6150 6390 7110 7890 8360 8690 9110 8760 9700 9750 9940 10700 11400 12300 12900 12500 13100 12800 13500 13100 13900 14300 14200 15000 15800 15400 15900 16900 16400 16700 17700 17200 17700 18300 19700 19500 21100 20400 22000 22800 23800 23400 24300 25600 25600 27000 27800 29700 30800 34200 35400 39400 41800 50300 58700 8100 8900 11200 12400 14500 16100 14900 16400 18300 20100 18100 20500 18600 20800 23000 23300 18400
UTS WGT --(kg) (lb/1000 ft) 27937 1663 27937 1582 37004.4 2236 37004.4 2127 51646.6 3137 51646.6 2975 255.4 24.6 399.6 39.2 612.4 62.3 743.9 78.5 902.7 99.1 1138.5 124.9 1378.9 157.5 1737.3 198.7 2050.3 234.7 2113.8 234.6 2190.9 250.6 2254.4 250.4 2485.7 281.8 2789.6 316 2898.5 328.4 3225.1 373.4 3578.9 422.4 3792.1 447.5 3941.8 447.4 4132.3 469 3973.5 469.2 4399.9 501 4422.6 522.1 4508.8 522 4853.5 562.8 5171 596.9 5579.2 632 5851.4 656.8 5670 656.6 5942.1 671.6 5806 672 6123.6 704.2 5942.1 704.3 6305 746.4 6486.4 746.7 6441.1 746 6804 821 7166.8 821 6985.4 845.2 7212.2 845.3 7665.8 896.1 7439 895.8 7575.1 896 8028.7 938.2 7801.9 938.7 8028.7 970.9 8300.8 970.6 8935.9 1045 8845.1 1045 9570.9 1119 9253.4 1119 9979.1 1194 10342 1194 10795.6 1251 10614.2 1269 11022.4 1344 11612.1 1343 11612.1 1419 12247.1 1493 12610 1493 13471.8 1643 13970.8 1690 15513 1876 16057.3 1940 17871.7 2090 18960.4 2368 22815.9 2844 26626.1 3350 3674.1 333.3 4037 333 5080.3 472.1 5624.6 473 6577.2 613 7302.9 613 6758.6 695 7439 695 8300.8 695 9117.3 695 8210.1 769 9298.7 789 8436.9 801.4 9434.8 801.4 10432.7 801.4 10568.8 870.4 8346.2 844.9
WGT -(kg/km) 2474.9 2354.4 3327.7 3165.4 4668.5 4427.5 36.6 58.3 92.7 116.8 147.5 185.9 234.4 295.7 349.3 349.1 372.9 372.7 419.4 470.3 488.7 555.7 628.6 666 665.8 698 698.3 745.6 777 776.9 837.6 888.3 940.6 977.5 977.2 999.5 1000.1 1048 1048.2 1110.8 1111.3 1110.2 1221.8 1221.8 1257.8 1258 1333.6 1333.1 1333.4 1396.2 1397 1444.9 1444.5 1555.2 1555.2 1665.3 1665.3 1776.9 1776.9 1861.8 1888.6 2000.2 1998.7 2111.8 2221.9 2221.9 2445.1 2515.1 2791.9 2887.1 3110.4 3524.1 4232.5 4985.5 496 495.6 702.6 703.9 912.3 912.3 1034.3 1034.3 1034.3 1034.3 1144.4 1174.2 1192.7 1192.7 1192.7 1295.3 1257.4
Amps -(A) 1250 1250 1500 1500 1850 1850 95 130 175 200 235 270 315 365 405 405 420 425 455 495 506 550 545 615 615 635 635 774 680 680 715 745 902 790 790 800 800 825 825 855 855 984 900 900 925 925 960 960 1108 990 990 1015 1015 1040 1224 1085 1279 1130 1335 1375 1175 1220 1439 1265 1305 1536 1385 1658 1500 1801 1882 1700 1885 2035 505 505 630 630 700 700 770 770 760 750 855 865 890 880 870 880 900
!NAME !'-!'-DRAKE1 DRAKE2 DRAKE3 RAIL5 ACAR1000.1 ACAR1000.2 RAIL4 RAIL1 RAIL2 RAIL3 1081_1 CARDINAL1 CARDINAL2 CARDINAL3 ORTOLAN1 ORTOLAN2 ORTOLAN3 CHAMERA CURLEW1 CURLEW2 CURLEW3 CURLEW4 BLUEJAY1 BLUEJAY2 BLUEJAY3 ACAR1200.1 ACAR1200.2 BUNTING1 BUNTING2 BUNTING3 BITTERN1 BITTERN2 1500_1 ACAR1600.1 LAPWING1 LAPWING2 LAPWING3 CHUKAR1 CHUKAR2 CHUKAR3 ACAR2000.1 KIWI1 KIWI2 KIWI3 BLUEBIRD1 BLUEBIRD2 BLUEBIRD3 2300_1 2300_2 2300_3 TA116AG TA116NG TA153AG TA153NG TA147AG TA147NG COUGAR TIGER JUNCO PARTRIDGE PARTRIDGE/SD WAXWING PARTRIDGE/AW WAXWING/AW GADWALL OSTRICH OSTRICH/AW OSTRICH/SSAC PHOEBE PIPER PIPER/SSAC DINGO WOLF LINNET/AW MERLIN/AW ORIOLE/AW LINNET LINNET/SD LINNET/SSAC MERLIN ORIOLE ORIOLE/SSAC WIDGEON TA198AG TA198NG TA210AG TA210NG CARACAL LYNX TA248AG TA248NG
TYPE --ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACAR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR
R_DC -(ohm/mi) 0.1032 0.1056 0.1082 0.0973 0.0947 0.0974 0.0967 0.0934 0.0956 0.0979 0.0892 0.0885 0.0906 0.0928 0.0863 0.0883 0.0905 0.0829 0.0806 0.0816 0.0835 0.0856 0.0799 0.0818 0.0838 0.0788 0.0811 0.0747 0.0765 0.0784 0.0698 0.0715 0.0612 0.0608 0.0555 0.0563 0.0572 0.049 0.0497 0.0504 0.0487 0.0417 0.0423 0.0429 0.0405 0.041 0.0416 0.0385 0.039 0.0396 0.5039 0.5039 0.4908 0.4908 0.399 0.399 0.3558 0.3499 0.3412 0.3432 0.3431 0.3467 0.3323 0.3428 0.3067 0.3053 0.2957 0.297 0.3081 0.3034 0.295 0.2968 0.2921 0.2638 0.2717 0.2583 0.2725 0.272 0.2646 0.2747 0.2704 0.2629 0.2735 0.2775 0.2775 0.2775 0.2775 0.2556 0.252 0.2364 0.2364
R_DC -(ohm/km) 0.0641 0.0656 0.0672 0.0605 0.0588 0.0605 0.0601 0.058 0.0594 0.0608 0.0554 0.055 0.0563 0.0577 0.0536 0.0549 0.0562 0.0515 0.0501 0.0507 0.0519 0.0532 0.0496 0.0508 0.0521 0.049 0.0504 0.0464 0.0475 0.0487 0.0434 0.0444 0.038 0.0378 0.0345 0.035 0.0355 0.0304 0.0309 0.0313 0.0303 0.0259 0.0263 0.0267 0.0252 0.0255 0.0258 0.0239 0.0242 0.0246 0.3131 0.3131 0.305 0.305 0.2479 0.2479 0.2211 0.2174 0.212 0.2133 0.2132 0.2154 0.2065 0.213 0.1906 0.1897 0.1837 0.1846 0.1914 0.1885 0.1833 0.1844 0.1815 0.1639 0.1688 0.1605 0.1693 0.169 0.1644 0.1707 0.168 0.1634 0.1699 0.1724 0.1724 0.1724 0.1724 0.1588 0.1566 0.1469 0.1469
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.1058 0.1087 0.1107 0.101 0.0978 0.101 0.0998 0.0965 0.0986 0.1006 0.0922 0.092 0.094 0.0962 0.0897 0.0917 0.0937 0.0877 0.0845 0.0854 0.0872 0.0892 0.0834 0.0852 0.0871 0.0826 0.0847 0.0788 0.0805 0.0823 0.0739 0.0757 0.0652 0.0655 0.0608 0.0615 0.0623 0.0544 0.055 0.0557 0.0544 0.0468 0.0475 0.048 0.0454 0.046 0.0465 0.0457 0.0462 0.0467 0.504 0.504 0.4984 0.4984 0.4 0.4 0.3561 0.3507 0.342 0.344 0.344 0.347 0.3328 0.3435 0.3073 0.306 0.2962 0.2976 0.309 0.304 0.2956 0.2977 0.2927 0.2644 0.2726 0.2588 0.273 0.273 0.2655 0.276 0.271 0.2637 0.2749 0.278 0.278 0.278 0.278 0.2569 0.2527 0.237 0.237
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.0657 0.0675 0.0688 0.0628 0.0608 0.0628 0.062 0.06 0.0613 0.0625 0.0573 0.0572 0.0584 0.0598 0.0557 0.057 0.0582 0.0545 0.0525 0.0531 0.0542 0.0554 0.0518 0.0529 0.0541 0.0513 0.0526 0.049 0.05 0.0511 0.0459 0.047 0.0405 0.0407 0.0378 0.0382 0.0387 0.0338 0.0342 0.0346 0.0338 0.0291 0.0295 0.0298 0.0282 0.0286 0.0289 0.0284 0.0287 0.029 0.3132 0.3132 0.3097 0.3097 0.2486 0.2486 0.2213 0.2179 0.2125 0.2138 0.2138 0.2156 0.2068 0.2134 0.191 0.1901 0.1841 0.1849 0.192 0.1889 0.1837 0.185 0.1819 0.1643 0.1694 0.1608 0.1696 0.1696 0.165 0.1715 0.1684 0.1639 0.1708 0.1727 0.1727 0.1727 0.1727 0.1596 0.157 0.1473 0.1473
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.105 0.1078 0.11 0.0999 0.0969 0.0999 0.0989 0.0956 0.0977 0.0998 0.0913 0.091 0.093 0.0952 0.0887 0.0907 0.0927 0.0863 0.0833 0.0843 0.0861 0.0881 0.0824 0.0842 0.0861 0.0815 0.0836 0.0776 0.0793 0.0811 0.0727 0.0744 0.064 0.0641 0.0592 0.0599 0.0608 0.0528 0.0534 0.0541 0.0527 0.0453 0.0459 0.0465 0.0439 0.0445 0.045 0.0435 0.044 0.0446 0.504 0.504 0.4961 0.4961 0.3997 0.3997 0.356 0.3505 0.3418 0.3438 0.3437 0.3469 0.3327 0.3433 0.3071 0.3058 0.2961 0.2974 0.3087 0.3038 0.2954 0.2974 0.2925 0.2642 0.2723 0.2587 0.2729 0.2727 0.2652 0.2756 0.2708 0.2635 0.2745 0.2779 0.2779 0.2779 0.2779 0.2565 0.2525 0.2368 0.2368
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/km) 0.0653 0.067 0.0683 0.0621 0.0602 0.0621 0.0614 0.0594 0.0607 0.062 0.0567 0.0565 0.0578 0.0591 0.0551 0.0563 0.0576 0.0536 0.0518 0.0524 0.0535 0.0548 0.0512 0.0523 0.0535 0.0506 0.052 0.0482 0.0493 0.0504 0.0452 0.0463 0.0398 0.0398 0.0368 0.0372 0.0378 0.0328 0.0332 0.0336 0.0327 0.0281 0.0285 0.0289 0.0273 0.0277 0.028 0.0271 0.0274 0.0277 0.3132 0.3132 0.3083 0.3083 0.2484 0.2484 0.2212 0.2178 0.2124 0.2136 0.2136 0.2156 0.2067 0.2133 0.1908 0.19 0.184 0.1848 0.1918 0.1888 0.1836 0.1848 0.1818 0.1642 0.1692 0.1607 0.1695 0.1695 0.1648 0.1713 0.1683 0.1637 0.1706 0.1727 0.1727 0.1727 0.1727 0.1594 0.1569 0.1472 0.1472
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.405 0.405 0.405 0.402 0.393 0.393 0.4 0.399 0.399 0.399 0.3961 0.396 0.396 0.396 0.394 0.394 0.394 0.3911 0.391 0.391 0.391 0.391 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.386 0.386 0.386 0.386 0.386 0.381 0.381 0.381 0.372 0.368 0.368 0.368 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.355 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.348 0.348 0.348 0.344 0.344 0.344 0.56 0.56 0.6 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.4811 0.46 0.459 0.465 0.4628 0.477 0.465 0.477 0.461 0.458 0.458 0.458 0.469 0.452 0.452 0.467 0.449 0.451 0.463 0.445 0.451 0.4503 0.451 0.463 0.445 0.445 0.454 0 0.45 0.445 0.445 0.459 0.4399 0.435 0.435
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.2517 0.2517 0.2517 0.2498 0.2442 0.2442 0.2486 0.2479 0.2479 0.2479 0.2461 0.2461 0.2461 0.2461 0.2448 0.2448 0.2448 0.243 0.243 0.243 0.243 0.243 0.2423 0.2423 0.2423 0.2399 0.2399 0.2399 0.2399 0.2399 0.2367 0.2367 0.2367 0.2312 0.2287 0.2287 0.2287 0.2237 0.2237 0.2237 0.2206 0.2175 0.2175 0.2175 0.2162 0.2162 0.2162 0.2138 0.2138 0.2138 0.348 0.348 0.3728 0.3728 0.3107 0.3107 0.2989 0.2858 0.2852 0.2889 0.2876 0.2964 0.2889 0.2964 0.2865 0.2846 0.2846 0.2846 0.2914 0.2809 0.2809 0.2902 0.279 0.2802 0.2877 0.2765 0.2802 0.2798 0.2802 0.2877 0.2765 0.2765 0.2821 0 0.2796 0.2765 0.2765 0.2852 0.2733 0.2703 0.2703
XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.3375 0.3375 0.3375 0.335 0.3275 0.3275 0.3333 0.3325 0.3325 0.3325 0.3301 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.3283 0.3283 0.3283 0.3259 0.3258 0.3258 0.3258 0.3258 0.325 0.325 0.325 0.3217 0.3217 0.3217 0.3217 0.3217 0.3175 0.3175 0.3175 0.31 0.3067 0.3067 0.3067 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2958 0.2917 0.2917 0.2917 0.29 0.29 0.29 0.2867 0.2867 0.2867 0.4667 0.4667 0.5 0.5 0.4167 0.4167 0.4009 0.3833 0.3825 0.3875 0.3857 0.3975 0.3875 0.3975 0.3842 0.3817 0.3817 0.3817 0.3908 0.3767 0.3767 0.3892 0.3742 0.3758 0.3858 0.3708 0.3758 0.3753 0.3758 0.3858 0.3708 0.3708 0.3783 0 0.375 0.3708 0.3708 0.3825 0.3666 0.3625 0.3625
XL_50 XC_60 XC_60 XC_50 XC_50 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz (ohm/km) (mohm-mi) (mohm-km) (mohm-mi) (mohm-km) 0.2097 0.0911 0.1466 0.1093 0.1759 0.2097 0.0911 0.1466 0.1093 0.1759 0.2097 0.0911 0.1466 0.1093 0.1759 0.2082 0.0902 0.1452 0.1082 0.1742 0.2035 0.0897 0.1444 0.1076 0.1732 0.2035 0.0897 0.1444 0.1076 0.1732 0.2071 0.0898 0.1445 0.1078 0.1734 0.2066 0.0896 0.1442 0.1075 0.173 0.2066 0.0896 0.1442 0.1075 0.173 0.2066 0.0896 0.1442 0.1075 0.173 0.2051 0.0888 0.1429 0.1066 0.1715 0.2051 0.0888 0.1429 0.1066 0.1715 0.2051 0.0888 0.1429 0.1066 0.1715 0.2051 0.0888 0.1429 0.1066 0.1715 0.204 0.0885 0.1424 0.1062 0.1709 0.204 0.0885 0.1424 0.1062 0.1709 0.204 0.0885 0.1424 0.1062 0.1709 0.2025 0.0876 0.141 0.1051 0.1692 0.2025 0.0876 0.141 0.1051 0.1692 0.2025 0.0876 0.141 0.1051 0.1692 0.2025 0.0876 0.141 0.1051 0.1692 0.2025 0.0876 0.141 0.1051 0.1692 0.202 0.0873 0.1405 0.1048 0.1686 0.202 0.0873 0.1405 0.1048 0.1686 0.202 0.0873 0.1405 0.1048 0.1686 0.1999 0.0873 0.1405 0.1048 0.1686 0.1999 0.0873 0.1405 0.1048 0.1686 0.1999 0.0863 0.1389 0.1036 0.1667 0.1999 0.0863 0.1389 0.1036 0.1667 0.1999 0.0863 0.1389 0.1036 0.1667 0.1973 0.0854 0.1374 0.1025 0.1649 0.1973 0.0854 0.1374 0.1025 0.1649 0.1973 0.0854 0.1374 0.1025 0.1649 0.1926 0.083 0.1336 0.0996 0.1603 0.1906 0.0821 0.1321 0.0985 0.1585 0.1906 0.0821 0.1321 0.0985 0.1585 0.1906 0.0821 0.1321 0.0985 0.1585 0.1864 0.0802 0.1291 0.0962 0.1549 0.1864 0.0802 0.1291 0.0962 0.1549 0.1864 0.0802 0.1291 0.0962 0.1549 0.1838 0.0795 0.1279 0.0954 0.1535 0.1812 0.0778 0.1252 0.0934 0.1502 0.1812 0.0778 0.1252 0.0934 0.1502 0.1812 0.0778 0.1252 0.0934 0.1502 0.1802 0.0774 0.1246 0.0929 0.1495 0.1802 0.0774 0.1246 0.0929 0.1495 0.1802 0.0774 0.1246 0.0929 0.1495 0.1781 0.0764 0.123 0.0917 0.1475 0.1781 0.0764 0.123 0.0917 0.1475 0.1781 0.0764 0.123 0.0917 0.1475 0.29 0.112 0.1802 0.1344 0.2163 0.29 0.112 0.1802 0.1344 0.2163 0.3107 0.108 0.1738 0.1296 0.2086 0.3107 0.108 0.1738 0.1296 0.2086 0.2589 0.109 0.1754 0.1308 0.2105 0.2589 0.109 0.1754 0.1308 0.2105 0.2491 0.1099 0.1769 0.1319 0.2122 0.2382 0.1067 0.1717 0.128 0.2061 0.2377 0.1065 0.1714 0.1278 0.2057 0.2408 0.1073 0.1727 0.1288 0.2072 0.2396 0.1073 0.1727 0.1288 0.2072 0.247 0.1089 0.1753 0.1307 0.2103 0.2408 0.1073 0.1727 0.1288 0.2072 0.247 0.1089 0.1753 0.1307 0.2103 0.2387 0.106 0.1706 0.1272 0.2047 0.2372 0.1056 0.1699 0.1267 0.2039 0.2372 0.1056 0.1699 0.1267 0.2039 0.2372 0.1056 0.1699 0.1267 0.2039 0.2429 0.1071 0.1724 0.1285 0.2068 0.2341 0.1047 0.1685 0.1256 0.2022 0.2341 0.1047 0.1685 0.1256 0.2022 0.2418 0.1067 0.1717 0.128 0.2061 0.2325 0.1042 0.1677 0.125 0.2012 0.2335 0.1039 0.1672 0.1247 0.2006 0.2398 0.1054 0.1696 0.1265 0.2035 0.2304 0.103 0.1658 0.1236 0.1989 0.2335 0.1039 0.1672 0.1247 0.2006 0.2332 0.1042 0.1677 0.125 0.2012 0.2335 0.1039 0.1672 0.1247 0.2006 0.2398 0.1054 0.1696 0.1265 0.2035 0.2304 0.103 0.1658 0.1236 0.1989 0.2304 0.103 0.1658 0.1236 0.1989 0.2351 0.1043 0.1678 0.1252 0.2014 0 0 0 0 0 0.233 0.104 0.1674 0.1248 0.2008 0.2304 0.103 0.1658 0.1236 0.1989 0.2304 0.103 0.1658 0.1236 0.1989 0.2377 0.1049 0.1688 0.1259 0.2026 0.2278 0.1018 0.1638 0.1222 0.1966 0.2253 0.1006 0.1619 0.1207 0.1943 0.2253 0.1006 0.1619 0.1207 0.1943
AREA aluminum (kcmil) 927 927 927 983 1000 1000 1012 1024 1024 1024 1079.5 1081 1081 1081 1109 1109 1109 1160.4 1172 1172 1172 1172 1197 1197 1197 1200 1200 1280 1280 1280 1362 1362 1497.9 1600 1703 1703 1703 1933 1933 1933 2000 2267 2267 2267 2339 2339 2339 2492.5 2492.5 2492.5 186 186 190.5 190.5 235.4 235.4 262 262 266.8 266.8 266.8 266.8 267 267 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 311 311 336 336 336 336.4 336.4 336.4 336.4 336.4 336.4 336.4 336.6 336.6 336.6 336.6 367 367 396.5 396.5
AREA total (sq-in.) 0.7282 0.7282 0.7282 0.8046 0.7849 0.7849 0.8046 0.8046 0.8046 0.8046 0.8487 0.8487 0.8487 0.8487 0.871 0.871 0.871 0.9114 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.943 0.943 1.005 1.005 1.005 1.07 1.07 1.1765 1.2573 1.338 1.338 1.338 1.518 1.518 1.518 1.5713 1.781 1.781 1.781 1.837 1.837 1.837 1.9576 1.9576 1.9576 0.1802 0.1802 0.2369 0.2369 0.228 0.228 0.2151 0.2508 0.2589 0.2436 0.2436 0.221 0.2436 0.221 0.2666 0.2744 0.2744 0.2744 0.248 0.2899 0.2899 0.2596 0.3023 0.307 0.2789 0.3259 0.307 0.3072 0.3072 0.2789 0.3259 0.3259 0.2992 0.3075 0.3075 0.3259 0.3259 0.3013 0.3506 0.3841 0.3841
AREA total (sq-mm) 469.8055 469.8055 469.8055 519.0957 506.3861 506.3861 519.0957 519.0957 519.0957 519.0957 547.5473 547.5473 547.5473 547.5473 561.9344 561.9344 561.9344 587.9988 593.5472 593.5472 593.5472 593.5472 606.4504 606.4504 606.4504 608.3859 608.3859 648.3858 648.3858 648.3858 690.3212 690.3212 759.0307 811.1597 863.2241 863.2241 863.2241 979.3529 979.3529 979.3529 1013.7399 1149.03 1149.03 1149.03 1185.1589 1185.1589 1185.1589 1262.9652 1262.9652 1262.9652 116.2578 116.2578 152.8384 152.8384 147.0965 147.0965 138.7739 161.8061 167.0319 157.161 157.161 142.5804 157.161 142.5804 171.9997 177.0319 177.0319 177.0319 159.9997 187.0319 187.0319 167.4835 195.0319 198.0641 179.9351 210.2576 198.0641 198.1932 198.1932 179.9351 210.2576 210.2576 193.0319 198.3867 198.3867 210.2576 210.2576 194.3867 226.1931 247.806 247.806
OD -(in.) 1.108 1.108 1.108 1.141 1.152 1.152 1.158 1.165 1.165 1.165 1.1969 1.196 1.196 1.196 1.212 1.212 1.212 1.2402 1.246 1.246 1.246 1.246 1.259 1.259 1.259 1.263 1.263 1.302 1.302 1.302 1.345 1.345 1.4094 1.458 1.504 1.504 1.504 1.602 1.602 1.602 1.63 1.735 1.735 1.735 1.762 1.762 1.762 1.821 1.821 1.821 0.5512 0.5512 0.6299 0.6299 0.6201 0.6201 0.6004 0.6504 0.66 0.642 0.645 0.609 0.642 0.609 0.671 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.646 0.7 0.7 0.6594 0.7138 0.72 0.684 0.741 0.72 0.716 0.72 0.684 0.741 0.741 0.71 0.7205 0.7205 0.7421 0.7421 0.7106 0.7689 0.8051 0.8051
OD STRAND -- outer/core (mm) -28.1432 30/7 28.1432 24/13 28.1432 18/19 28.9814 30/7 29.2608 54/7 29.2608 42/19 29.4132 24/13 29.591 30/7 29.591 24/13 29.591 18/19 30.4013 24/13 30.3784 30/7 30.3784 24/13 30.3784 18/19 30.7848 30/7 30.7848 24/13 30.7848 18/19 31.5011 30/7 31.6484 33/4 31.6484 30/7 31.6484 24/13 31.6484 18/19 31.9786 30/7 31.9786 24/13 31.9786 18/19 32.0802 54/7 32.0802 42/19 33.0708 30/7 33.0708 24/13 33.0708 18/19 34.163 54/7 34.163 42/19 35.7988 54/7 37.0332 42/19 38.2016 54/7 38.2016 48/13 38.2016 42/19 40.6908 54/7 40.6908 48/13 40.6908 42/19 41.402 42/19 44.069 54/7 44.069 48/13 44.069 42/19 44.7548 54/7 44.7548 48/13 44.7548 42/19 46.2534 72/19 46.2534 63/28 46.2534 54/37 14.0005 30/7 14.0005 30/7 15.9995 7-Dec 15.9995 7-Dec 15.7505 30/7 15.7505 30/7 15.2502 18/1 16.5202 30/7 16.764 30/7 16.3068 26/7 16.383 126/7 15.4686 18/1 16.3068 26/7 15.4686 18/1 17.0434 24/7 17.272 26/7 17.272 26/7 17.272 26/7 16.4084 18/1 17.78 30/7 17.78 30/7 16.7488 18/1 18.1305 30/7 18.288 26/7 17.3736 18/1 18.8214 30/7 18.288 26/7 18.1864 126/7 18.288 26/7 17.3736 18/1 18.8214 30/7 18.8214 30/7 18.034 24/7 18.3007 26/7 18.3007 26/7 18.8493 30/7 18.8493 30/7 18.0492 18/1 19.5301 30/7 20.4495 30/7 20.4495 30/7
#STD-OL outer -18 18 18 18 24 24 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 24 24 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 30 30 30 18 18 12 12 18 18 12 18 18 16 12 12 16 12 15 16 16 16 12 18 18 12 18 16 12 18 16 16 16 12 18 18 15 16 16 18 18 12 18 18 18
STR-DIA outer (in.) 0.1583 0.1583 0.1583 0.163 0.128 0.128 0.1654 0.1664 0.1664 0.1664 0.1709 0.1709 0.1709 0.1709 0.1731 0.1731 0.1731 0.1772 0.178 0.178 0.178 0.178 0.1799 0.1799 0.1799 0.1403 0.1403 0.186 0.186 0.186 0.1491 0.1494 0.1567 0.162 0.1671 0.1671 0.1671 0.178 0.178 0.178 0.1811 0.1928 0.1928 0.1928 0.1958 0.1958 0.1958 0.1655 0.1655 0.1655 0.0787 0.0787 0.126 0.126 0.089 0.089 0.1201 0.0929 0.0943 0.1013 0.1256 0.1217 0.1013 0.1217 0.1118 0.1074 0.1074 0.1074 0.1291 0.1 0.1 0.1319 0.102 0.1137 0.1367 0.1059 0.1137 0.1194 0.1137 0.1367 0.1059 0.1059 0.1184 0.1138 0.114 0.106 0.106 0.1421 0.1098 0.115 0.115
STR-DIA outer (mm) 4.0208 4.0208 4.0208 4.1402 3.2512 3.2512 4.2012 4.2266 4.2266 4.2266 4.3409 4.3409 4.3409 4.3409 4.3967 4.3967 4.3967 4.5009 4.5212 4.5212 4.5212 4.5212 4.5695 4.5695 4.5695 3.5636 3.5636 4.7244 4.7244 4.7244 3.7871 3.7948 3.9802 4.1148 4.2443 4.2443 4.2443 4.5212 4.5212 4.5212 4.5999 4.8971 4.8971 4.8971 4.9733 4.9733 4.9733 4.2037 4.2037 4.2037 1.999 1.999 3.2004 3.2004 2.2606 2.2606 3.0505 2.3597 2.3952 2.573 3.1902 3.0912 2.573 3.0912 2.8397 2.728 2.728 2.728 3.2791 2.54 2.54 3.3503 2.5908 2.888 3.4722 2.6899 2.888 3.0328 2.888 3.4722 2.6899 2.6899 3.0074 2.8905 2.8956 2.6924 2.6924 3.6093 2.7889 2.921 2.921
STR-DIA core (in.) 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
STR-DIA core (mm) 9999 9999 9999 9999 3 3 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 4 4 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 4 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 5 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 4 3 3 3
UTS -(lb) 20300 22600 25000 21500 19700 22900 24700 22400 25000 27700 26303 23600 26400 29200 24200 27000 29900 26078 23100 25600 28600 31600 26200 29300 32300 23100 26700 28000 31300 34500 27500 32800 28326 29100 35200 37900 40500 39900 43000 46000 44000 44800 50000 53300 46100 51600 55000 55200 59100 63000 10566 10566 18389 18389 13387 13387 6751 13039 13700 11300 11350 6880 10800 6820 14200 12700 12100 9970 7700 15500 13200 8030 15566 13500 8540 17300 14100 14300 11200 8680 17300 14800 12500 14478 14478 17580 17580 9240 17938 20547 20548
UTS WGT --(kg) (lb/1000 ft) 9208 870.4 10251.3 870.4 11339.9 870.4 9752.3 923 8935.9 938 10387.4 938 11203.8 950 10160.6 961.7 11339.9 961.7 12564.6 961.7 11931 1014.7 10704.9 1015 11975 1015 13245 1015 10977 1041 12247.1 1041 13562.6 1041 11828.9 1091.3 10478.1 1100 11612.1 1100 12972.9 1100 14333.7 1100 11884.2 1124 13290.4 1124 14651.2 1124 10478.1 1127 12111 1127 12700.7 1201 14197.6 1201 15649.1 1201 12473.9 1278 14878 1278 12848.6 1407.8 13199.7 1502 15966.6 1599 17191.3 1599 18370.7 1599 18098.5 1814 19504.7 1814 20865.5 1814 19958.3 1877 20321.1 2127 22679.9 2127 24176.7 2127 20910.8 2194 23405.6 2194 24947.8 2194 25038.6 2179 26807.6 2179 28576.6 2179 4792.7 297 4792.7 291 8341.2 481.8 8341.2 475.8 6072.3 375.6 6072.3 368.2 3062.2 281.6 5914.5 405.2 6214.3 418 5125.6 367.3 5148.3 367 3120.7 289.5 4898.8 349.6 3093.5 283.5 6441.1 386 5760.7 413 5488.5 392.9 4522.4 413 3492.7 326 7030.8 470 5987.5 470 3642.4 340 7060.7 487.8 6123.6 440.3 3873.7 357.6 7847.2 495.1 6395.7 462.6 6486.4 462.4 5080.3 463 3937.2 365.2 7847.2 527.1 6713.2 527 5670 433 6567.2 472.4 6567.2 463 7974.2 536.9 7974.2 526.2 4191.2 394.4 8136.6 565.8 9320.1 632.3 9320.5 619.6
WGT -(kg/km) 1295.3 1295.3 1295.3 1373.6 1396 1396 1413.8 1431.2 1431.2 1431.2 1510.1 1510.5 1510.5 1510.5 1549.2 1549.2 1549.2 1624.1 1637 1637 1637 1637 1672.8 1672.8 1672.8 1677.2 1677.2 1787.4 1787.4 1787.4 1901.9 1901.9 2095.1 2235.3 2379.7 2379.7 2379.7 2699.6 2699.6 2699.6 2793.4 3165.4 3165.4 3165.4 3265.2 3265.2 3265.2 3242.8 3242.8 3242.8 442 433.1 717 708.1 559 548 419.1 603 622.1 546.6 546.2 430.8 520.3 421.9 574.5 614.6 584.7 614.6 485.2 699.5 699.5 506 726 655.3 532.2 736.8 688.5 688.2 689 543.5 784.4 784.3 644.4 703 689 799 783.1 587 842 941 922.1
Amps -(A) 930 925 915 950 1000 1000 980 995 985 980 1020 1030 1020 1010 1040 1035 1030 1065 1070 1065 1050 1055 1075 1070 1065 1200 1200 1130 1120 1110 1190 1180 1250 1300 1360 1350 1340 1465 1465 1450 1500 1610 1610 1610 1625 1625 1625 1695 1680 1680 320 320 370 370 400 400 430 435 440 440 460 430 440 430 490 490 490 500 490 490 495 495 500 510 500 515 510 525 530 500 515 975 510 9999 500 500 500 525 545 575 575
!NAME !'-!'-CHICKADEE/AW IBIS/AW LARK/AW BRANT BRANT/SSAC CHICKADEE IBIS IBIS/SD IBIS/SSAC LARK LARK/SSAC BRANT/AW JAGUAR PANTHER LION TA298AG TA298NG TA281AG TA281NG FLICKER FLICKER/AW FLICKER/SD FLICKER/SSAC FLICKER/TW HAWK HAWK/AW HAWK/SD HAWK/SSAC HEN HEN/AW HEN/SSAC PELICAN PELICAN/AW BEAR T2PARTRIDGE T2WAXWING DOVE/AW OSPREY/AW DOVE DOVE/SD DOVE/SSAC EAGLE EAGLE/SSAC OSPREY PARAKEET PARAKEET/SD PARAKEET/SSAC EAGLE/AW PARAKEET/AW TA329AG TA329NG PEACOCK PEACOCK/AW PEACOCK/SSAC SQUAB SQUAB/AW SQUAB/SSAC TEAL TEAL/AW TEAL/SSAC WOODDUCK DUCK EGRET EGRET/AW EGRET/SSAC GOOSE GROSBEAK GROSBEAK/AW GROSBEAK/SD GROSBEAK/SSAC KILLDEER/SD KINGBIRD KINGBIRD/AW PIPIT/SD ROOK ROOK/AW ROOK/SD ROOK/SSAC SCOTER SWIFT GOAT DOVE/OD GANNET/AW FLAMINGO FLAMINGO/SSAC FLAMINGO/TW GANNET GANNET/SSAC GULL FLAMINGO/AW T2LINNET
TYPE --ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR
R_DC -(ohm/mi) 0.2299 0.2232 0.2186 0.2315 0.2252 0.2325 0.2306 0.2305 0.2242 0.2288 0.2225 0.2254 0.2234 0.2189 0.1947 0.1954 0.1954 0.1938 0.1938 0.1927 0.1878 0.1928 0.1875 0.1927 0.1921 0.186 0.1921 0.187 0.1907 0.1822 0.1854 0.1937 0.1915 0.1745 0.1661 0.1722 0.1593 0.1643 0.1646 0.1645 0.16 0.1634 0.159 0.1662 0.1653 0.1652 0.1606 0.1562 0.161 0.1674 0.1674 0.152 0.1481 0.1476 0.1515 0.1473 0.1471 0.1505 0.1439 0.1466 0.1505 0.1519 0.1431 0.1369 0.139 0.1447 0.144 0.1394 0.1438 0.1401 0.1455 0.1453 0.1437 0.1458 0.1446 0.1409 0.1444 0.1406 0.1431 0.1459 0.1423 0.1363 0.1336 0.1379 0.1342 0.1379 0.1375 0.1336 0.138 0.1344 0.1317
R_DC -(ohm/km) 0.1429 0.1387 0.1358 0.1439 0.1399 0.1445 0.1433 0.1432 0.1393 0.1422 0.1383 0.1401 0.1388 0.136 0.121 0.1214 0.1214 0.1204 0.1204 0.1197 0.1167 0.1198 0.1165 0.1197 0.1194 0.1156 0.1194 0.1162 0.1185 0.1132 0.1152 0.1204 0.119 0.1084 0.1032 0.107 0.099 0.1021 0.1023 0.1022 0.0994 0.1015 0.0988 0.1033 0.1027 0.1027 0.0998 0.0971 0.1 0.104 0.104 0.0945 0.092 0.0917 0.0941 0.0915 0.0914 0.0935 0.0894 0.0911 0.0935 0.0944 0.0889 0.0851 0.0864 0.0899 0.0895 0.0866 0.0894 0.0871 0.0904 0.0903 0.0893 0.0906 0.0899 0.0876 0.0897 0.0874 0.0889 0.0907 0.0884 0.0847 0.083 0.0857 0.0834 0.0857 0.0854 0.083 0.0858 0.0835 0.0818
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.231 0.2239 0.2192 0.2327 0.2759 0.234 0.231 0.231 0.2249 0.229 0.2233 0.2262 0.2247 0.219 0.1951 0.196 0.196 0.1947 0.1947 0.194 0.1888 0.194 0.1885 0.194 0.193 0.1869 0.193 0.1877 0.191 0.1829 0.1863 0.195 0.1916 0.1753 0.1706 0.1737 0.1603 0.1658 0.166 0.166 0.1611 0.164 0.1599 0.168 0.166 0.166 0.1619 0.157 0.1621 0.1688 0.1688 0.153 0.1493 0.1491 0.153 0.1477 0.1484 0.151 0.1448 0.1473 0.1514 0.1533 0.144 0.1378 0.1403 0.146 0.145 0.1406 0.145 0.1412 0.1484 0.1469 0.1454 0.1489 0.146 0.1422 0.146 0.142 0.144 0.1477 0.1432 0.1389 0.1346 0.139 0.1356 0.139 0.139 0.1351 0.139 0.1357 0.1357
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.1435 0.1391 0.1362 0.1446 0.1714 0.1454 0.1435 0.1435 0.1398 0.1423 0.1388 0.1406 0.1396 0.1361 0.1212 0.1218 0.1218 0.121 0.121 0.1205 0.1173 0.1205 0.1171 0.1205 0.1199 0.1161 0.1199 0.1166 0.1187 0.1137 0.1158 0.1212 0.1191 0.1089 0.106 0.1079 0.0996 0.103 0.1032 0.1032 0.1001 0.1019 0.0994 0.1044 0.1032 0.1032 0.1006 0.0976 0.1007 0.1049 0.1049 0.0951 0.0928 0.0926 0.0951 0.0918 0.0922 0.0938 0.09 0.0915 0.0941 0.0953 0.0895 0.0856 0.0872 0.0907 0.0901 0.0874 0.0901 0.0877 0.0922 0.0913 0.0903 0.0925 0.0907 0.0884 0.0907 0.0882 0.0895 0.0918 0.089 0.0863 0.0836 0.0864 0.0843 0.0864 0.0864 0.0839 0.0864 0.0843 0.0843
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.2307 0.2237 0.219 0.2323 0.2607 0.2336 0.2309 0.2309 0.2247 0.2289 0.2231 0.226 0.2243 0.219 0.195 0.1958 0.1958 0.1944 0.1944 0.1936 0.1885 0.1936 0.1882 0.1936 0.1927 0.1866 0.1927 0.1875 0.1909 0.1827 0.186 0.1946 0.1916 0.175 0.1693 0.1733 0.16 0.1654 0.1656 0.1656 0.1608 0.1638 0.1596 0.1675 0.1658 0.1658 0.1615 0.1568 0.1618 0.1684 0.1684 0.1527 0.1489 0.1487 0.1526 0.1476 0.148 0.1509 0.1445 0.1471 0.1511 0.1529 0.1437 0.1375 0.1399 0.1456 0.1447 0.1402 0.1446 0.1409 0.1475 0.1464 0.1449 0.148 0.1456 0.1418 0.1455 0.1416 0.1437 0.1472 0.1429 0.1381 0.1343 0.1387 0.1352 0.1387 0.1386 0.1347 0.1387 0.1353 0.1345
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/km) 0.1433 0.139 0.1361 0.1444 0.162 0.1451 0.1435 0.1434 0.1396 0.1423 0.1386 0.1404 0.1394 0.1361 0.1212 0.1217 0.1217 0.1208 0.1208 0.1203 0.1171 0.1203 0.1169 0.1203 0.1198 0.116 0.1198 0.1165 0.1186 0.1135 0.1156 0.1209 0.119 0.1088 0.1052 0.1077 0.0994 0.1027 0.1029 0.1029 0.0999 0.1018 0.0992 0.1041 0.103 0.103 0.1004 0.0974 0.1005 0.1046 0.1046 0.0949 0.0925 0.0924 0.0948 0.0917 0.092 0.0937 0.0898 0.0914 0.0939 0.095 0.0893 0.0855 0.0869 0.0905 0.0899 0.0871 0.0899 0.0875 0.0917 0.091 0.09 0.0919 0.0905 0.0881 0.0904 0.088 0.0893 0.0914 0.0888 0.0858 0.0835 0.0862 0.084 0.0862 0.0861 0.0837 0.0862 0.0841 0.0836
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.452 0.441 0.435 0.444 0.444 0.452 0.441 0.4423 0.441 0.435 0.435 0.444 0.459 0.432 0.4229 0.424 0.424 0.43 0.43 0.432 0.432 0.4326 0.432 0.432 0.43 0.43 0.4293 0.43 0.424 0.424 0.424 0.441 0.441 0.4183 0.4099 0.419 0.42 0.432 0.42 0.4212 0.42 0.415 0.415 0.432 0.423 0.4246 0.423 0.415 0.423 0.42 0.42 0.418 0.418 0.418 0.415 0.415 0.415 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.417 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.414 0.412 0.412 0.4142 0.412 0.4245 0.424 0.424 0.4294 0.415 0.415 0.4177 0.415 0.406 0.425 0.4059 0.4209 0.409 0.412 0.412 0.412 0.409 0.409 0.411 0.412 0.3959
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.2809 0.274 0.2703 0.2759 0.2759 0.2809 0.274 0.2748 0.274 0.2703 0.2703 0.2759 0.2852 0.2684 0.2628 0.2635 0.2635 0.2672 0.2672 0.2684 0.2684 0.2688 0.2684 0.2684 0.2672 0.2672 0.2668 0.2672 0.2635 0.2635 0.2635 0.274 0.274 0.2599 0.2547 0.2604 0.261 0.2684 0.261 0.2617 0.261 0.2579 0.2579 0.2684 0.2628 0.2638 0.2628 0.2579 0.2628 0.261 0.261 0.2597 0.2597 0.2597 0.2579 0.2579 0.2579 0.2548 0.2548 0.2548 0.2548 0.2591 0.2523 0.2523 0.2523 0.2573 0.256 0.256 0.2574 0.256 0.2638 0.2635 0.2635 0.2668 0.2579 0.2579 0.2596 0.2579 0.2523 0.2641 0.2522 0.2615 0.2541 0.256 0.256 0.256 0.2541 0.2541 0.2554 0.256 0.246
XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.3767 0.3675 0.3625 0.37 0.37 0.3767 0.3675 0.3686 0.3675 0.3625 0.3625 0.37 0.3825 0.36 0.3524 0.3533 0.3533 0.3583 0.3583 0.36 0.36 0.3605 0.36 0.36 0.3583 0.3583 0.3578 0.3583 0.3533 0.3533 0.3533 0.3675 0.3675 0.3486 0.3416 0.3492 0.35 0.36 0.35 0.351 0.35 0.3458 0.3458 0.36 0.3525 0.3538 0.3525 0.3458 0.3525 0.35 0.35 0.3483 0.3483 0.3483 0.3458 0.3458 0.3458 0.3417 0.3417 0.3417 0.3417 0.3475 0.3383 0.3383 0.3383 0.345 0.3433 0.3433 0.3452 0.3433 0.3538 0.3533 0.3533 0.3578 0.3458 0.3458 0.3481 0.3458 0.3383 0.3542 0.3383 0.3508 0.3408 0.3433 0.3433 0.3433 0.3408 0.3408 0.3425 0.3433 0.3299
AREA aluminum (kcmil) 397 397 397 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 397.5 398 420 420 467 476.2 476.2 476.9 476.9 477 477 477 477 477 477 477 477 477 477 477 477 477 477 524 533.6 533.6 556 556 556.5 556.5 556.5 556.5 556.5 556.5 556.5 556.5 556.5 557 557 557.7 557.7 605 605 605 605 605 605 605 605 605 605 606 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 636 660.7 666 666.6 666.6 666.6 666.6 666.6 666.6 667 672.8
AREA total (sq-in.) 0.3295 0.3627 0.3849 0.3527 0.3525 0.3295 0.3627 0.3627 0.363 0.3849 0.385 0.3527 0.3446 0.4055 0.4555 0.4612 0.4612 0.4358 0.4358 0.4233 0.4233 0.4233 0.4232 0.4233 0.4354 0.4354 0.4356 0.4356 0.4621 0.4621 0.462 0.3955 0.3955 0.5055 0.487 0.442 0.5083 0.4612 0.5083 0.5083 0.5083 0.5391 0.5391 0.4612 0.4938 0.4938 0.4938 0.5391 0.4938 0.5092 0.5092 0.537 0.537 0.5368 0.5522 0.5522 0.5525 0.5834 0.5834 0.5835 0.5828 0.5379 0.6135 0.6135 0.6135 0.5642 0.5808 0.5808 0.5808 0.5809 0.5341 0.5275 0.5275 0.5252 0.5643 0.5643 0.5642 0.5643 0.6154 0.5133 0.62 0.6036 0.6086 0.5917 0.5914 0.5917 0.6086 0.6037 0.5921 0.5917 0.6144
AREA total (sq-mm) 212.5802 233.9995 248.3221 227.5479 227.4189 212.5802 233.9995 233.9995 234.1931 248.3221 248.3866 227.5479 222.3221 261.6124 293.8704 297.5478 297.5478 281.1607 281.1607 273.0962 273.0962 273.0962 273.0317 273.0962 280.9027 280.9027 281.0317 281.0317 298.1284 298.1284 298.0639 255.1608 255.1608 326.1284 314.1929 285.1607 327.9348 297.5478 327.9348 327.9348 327.9348 347.8058 347.8058 297.5478 318.58 318.58 318.58 347.8058 318.58 328.5155 328.5155 346.4509 346.4509 346.3219 356.2574 356.2574 356.4509 376.3863 376.3863 376.4509 375.9992 347.0316 395.8057 395.8057 395.8057 363.9993 374.7089 374.7089 374.7089 374.7734 344.58 340.3219 340.3219 338.838 364.0638 364.0638 363.9993 364.0638 397.0315 331.1606 399.9992 389.4186 392.6444 381.7412 381.5476 381.7412 392.6444 389.4831 381.9992 381.7412 396.3863
OD -(in.) 0.743 0.783 0.806 0.772 0.772 0.743 0.783 0.771 0.783 0.806 0.806 0.772 0.7598 0.8268 0.8764 0.8819 0.8819 0.8583 0.8583 0.846 0.846 0.843 0.846 0.7764 0.858 0.858 0.86 0.858 0.883 0.883 0.883 0.814 0.814 0.9232 1.051 0.997 0.927 0.879 0.927 0.919 0.927 0.953 0.953 0.879 0.914 0.901 0.914 0.953 0.914 0.9272 0.9272 0.953 0.953 0.953 0.966 0.966 0.966 0.994 0.994 0.994 0.994 0.953 1.019 1.019 1.019 0.977 0.99 0.99 0.975 0.99 0.917 0.94 0.94 0.894 0.977 0.977 0.955 0.977 1.019 0.93 1.0224 0.927 1.014 1 1 0.913 1.014 1.014 1 1 1.18
OD STRAND -- outer/core (mm) -18.8722 18/1 19.8882 26/7 20.4724 30/7 19.6088 24/7 19.6088 24/7 18.8722 18/1 19.8882 26/7 19.5834 126/7 19.8882 26/7 20.4724 30/7 20.4724 30/7 19.6088 24/7 19.2989 18/1 21.0007 30/7 22.2606 30/7 22.4003 30/7 22.4003 30/7 21.8008 26/7 21.8008 26/7 21.4884 24/7 21.4884 24/7 21.4122 124/7 21.4884 24/7 19.7206 224/7 21.7932 26/7 21.7932 26/7 21.844 126/7 21.7932 26/7 22.4282 30/7 22.4282 30/7 22.4282 30/7 20.6756 18/1 20.6756 18/1 23.4493 30/7 26.6954 52/14 25.3238 36/2 23.5458 26/7 22.3266 18/1 23.5458 26/7 23.3426 126/7 23.5458 26/7 24.2062 30/7 24.2062 30/7 22.3266 18/1 23.2156 24/7 22.8854 124/7 23.2156 24/7 24.2062 30/7 23.2156 24/7 23.5509 26/7 23.5509 26/7 24.2062 24/7 24.2062 24/7 24.2062 24/7 24.5364 26/7 24.5364 26/7 24.5364 26/7 25.2476 30/19 25.2476 30/19 25.2476 30/19 25.2476 30/7 24.2062 54/7 25.8826 30/19 25.8826 30/19 25.8826 30/19 24.8158 54/7 25.146 26/7 25.146 26/7 24.765 126/7 25.146 26/7 23.2918 145/7 23.876 18/1 23.876 18/1 22.7076 142/7 24.8158 24/7 24.8158 24/7 24.257 124/7 24.8158 24/7 25.8826 30/7 23.622 36/1 25.969 30/7 23.5458 326/7 25.7556 26/7 25.4 24/7 25.4 24/7 23.1902 224/7 25.7556 26/7 25.7556 26/7 25.4 54/7 25.4 24/7 29.972 52/14
#STD-OL outer -12 16 18 15 15 12 16 14 16 18 18 15 12 18 18 18 18 16 16 15 15 13 15 11 16 16 13 16 18 18 18 12 12 18 16 12 16 12 16 13 16 18 18 12 15 13 15 18 15 16 16 15 15 15 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 24 18 18 18 24 16 16 13 16 19 12 12 11 15 15 12 15 18 18 18 13 16 15 15 12 16 16 24 15 16
STR-DIA outer (in.) 0.1486 0.1236 0.1151 0.1287 0.1287 0.1486 0.1236 0.1138 0.1236 0.1151 0.1151 0.1287 0.152 0.1181 0.1252 0.126 0.126 0.135 0.135 0.141 0.141 0.1502 0.141 0.1628 0.1354 0.1354 0.1496 0.1354 0.1261 0.1261 0.1261 0.1628 0.1628 0.1319 0.1013 0.1217 0.1463 0.1758 0.1463 0.1613 0.1463 0.1362 0.1362 0.1758 0.1523 0.1622 0.1523 0.1362 0.1523 0.146 0.146 0.1588 0.1588 0.1588 0.1525 0.1525 0.1525 0.142 0.142 0.142 0.142 0.1059 0.1456 0.1456 0.1456 0.1085 0.1564 0.1564 0.1723 0.1564 0.1838 0.188 0.188 0.1932 0.1628 0.1628 0.1806 0.1628 0.1456 0.1329 0.1461 0.1733 0.1601 0.1667 0.1667 0.1825 0.1601 0.1601 0.1111 0.1667 0.1137
STR-DIA outer (mm) 3.7744 3.1394 2.9235 3.269 3.269 3.7744 3.1394 2.8905 3.1394 2.9235 2.9235 3.269 3.8608 2.9997 3.1801 3.2004 3.2004 3.429 3.429 3.5814 3.5814 3.8151 3.5814 4.1351 3.4392 3.4392 3.7998 3.4392 3.2029 3.2029 3.2029 4.1351 4.1351 3.3503 2.573 3.0912 3.716 4.4653 3.716 4.097 3.716 3.4595 3.4595 4.4653 3.8684 4.1199 3.8684 3.4595 3.8684 3.7084 3.7084 4.0335 4.0335 4.0335 3.8735 3.8735 3.8735 3.6068 3.6068 3.6068 3.6068 2.6899 3.6982 3.6982 3.6982 2.7559 3.9726 3.9726 4.3764 3.9726 4.6685 4.7752 4.7752 4.9073 4.1351 4.1351 4.5872 4.1351 3.6982 3.3757 3.7109 4.4018 4.0665 4.2342 4.2342 4.6355 4.0665 4.0665 2.8219 4.2342 2.888
STR-DIA core (in.) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
STR-DIA core (mm) 4 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 2 3 3 2 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 2 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 5 5 2 3 0 3 3 4 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
UTS -(lb) 9780 15800 19600 14600 11100 9940 16300 16400 13000 20300 17500 14060 10469 20739 22593 24099 24100 19952 19952 17200 16700 17200 13000 17200 19500 19000 19500 15600 23800 23400 21000 11800 11500 24999 22600 13800 21900 13200 22600 22600 18200 27800 24500 13700 19800 20000 15200 26800 19300 23133 23133 21600 21000 16500 24300 23600 19700 30000 28500 26600 29400 22500 31500 29900 28000 23600 25200 24800 25400 20800 17700 15700 15020 15600 22600 22000 22900 17400 30800 13800 30529 26500 26000 23700 18200 24000 26400 21700 24500 23100 28200
UTS WGT --(kg) (lb/1000 ft) 4436.2 422.6 7166.8 520.3 8890.5 584.9 6622.5 512.1 5034.9 512 4508.8 431.6 7393.6 546.6 7439 546.5 5896.8 547 9208 622.7 7937.9 623 6377.6 491 4748.7 450.9 9407.1 654.5 10248.1 735.8 10931.2 759.3 10931.7 744.5 9050.2 672.6 9050.2 659.2 7801.9 614.6 7575.1 589.4 7801.9 613.5 5896.8 615 7801.9 612.8 8845.1 656 8618.3 624.5 8845.1 655.8 7076.1 657 10795.6 747.4 10614.2 702 9525.5 747 5352.4 518 5216.4 507.2 11339.5 815.8 10251.3 734 6259.6 580 9933.8 729.1 5987.5 591.6 10251.3 766 10251.3 765 8255.5 766 12610 871.9 11113.1 872 6214.3 604.1 8981.2 716.9 9071.9 716 6894.7 717 12156.4 819 8754.4 687.5 10493.1 781.5 10493.1 766 9797.7 779.7 9525.5 747.7 7484.4 780 11022.4 832.3 10704.9 792.1 8935.9 833 13607.9 939.5 12927.5 883.2 12065.7 940 13335.8 940 10205.9 779 14288.3 988.2 13562.6 928.9 12700.7 988 10704.9 819 11430.6 875.2 11249.2 833 11521.4 874 9434.8 875 8028.7 715 7121.5 690.8 6813 676.5 7076.1 684 10251.3 819.2 9979.1 785.6 10387.4 818 7892.6 819 13970.8 993 6259.6 643.7 13847.9 1000.6 12020.3 980.2 11793.5 873 10750.2 858.9 8255.5 858 10886.3 856.3 11975 917.3 9843.1 917 11113.1 858 10478.1 823.7 12791.4 926
WGT -(kg/km) 628.9 774.3 870.5 762.1 762 642.3 813.5 813.3 814.1 926.7 927.2 730.7 671 974 1095 1130 1108 1001 981 914.7 877.2 913 915.3 912 976.3 929.4 976 977.8 1112.3 1044.7 1111.7 770.9 754.8 1214.1 1092.4 863.2 1085.1 880.4 1140 1138.5 1140 1297.6 1297.7 899 1066.9 1065.6 1067.1 1218.9 1023.2 1163 1140 1160.4 1112.7 1160.8 1238.6 1178.8 1239.7 1398.2 1314.4 1398.9 1398.9 1159.3 1470.7 1382.4 1470.4 1218.9 1302.5 1239.7 1300.7 1302.2 1064.1 1028.1 1006.8 1017.9 1219.1 1169.1 1217.4 1218.9 1477.8 958 1489.1 1458.8 1299.2 1278.2 1276.9 1274.4 1365.1 1364.7 1276.9 1225.8 1378.1
Amps -(A) 555 570 575 565 590 555 570 585 590 575 600 565 575 595 635 645 645 640 640 635 635 650 660 635 640 640 655 665 645 645 670 625 625 680 810 789 710 690 710 720 730 710 740 690 700 715 725 710 700 710 710 740 740 765 745 745 770 750 750 1435 750 740 775 775 805 770 775 775 780 795 765 750 750 760 765 765 775 790 775 745 775 790 795 790 815 790 795 820 790 790 923
!NAME !'-!'-T2MERLIN TA445AG TA445NG CROW/AW REDWING/AW BUTEO CROW GREBE REDWING REDWING/SSAC STARLING STARLING/SSAC STILT STILT/SSAC STARLING/AW ANTELOPE SHEEP BISON GROSBEAK/OD CONDOR CONDOR/AW CONDOR/SD CONDOR/SSAC COOT CUCKOO CUCKOO/TW DRAKE DRAKE/AW DRAKE/SD DRAKE/SSAC DRAKE/TW MACAW/SD MALLARD MALLARD/AW MALLARD/SSAC PUFFIN PUFFIN/SD SKIMMER T2CHICKADEE T2IBIS T2PTARMIGAN TERN TERN/AW TERN/SD TERN/SSAC TERN/TW TURBIT DEER ZEBRA CRANE CRANE/AW WILLET BALDPATE BALDPATE/SSAC CANARY CANARY/AW CANARY/SSAC NOWORD REDSTART RUDDY RUDDY/AW RUDDY/SSAC TURNSTONE TA515AG TA515NG ELK CAMEL CARDINAL CARDINAL/AW CARDINAL/SD CARDINAL/SSAC CARDINAL/TW CORNCRAKE MERGANSER MERGANSER/SSAC NOCODE PHOENIX/SD RAIL RAIL/AW RAIL/SD RAIL/SSAC RAIL/TW REDBIRD T2HAWK T2PELICAN T2TATLER TERN/OD TA617AG42 TA617NG42 CURLEW/AW ORTOLAN/AW
R_DC -(ohm/mi) 0.1365 0.131 0.131 0.1253 0.1217 0.1273 0.1286 0.1296 0.1273 0.1239 0.1279 0.1245 0.1285 0.125 0.1239 0.1244 0.1239 0.1218 0.1183 0.1158 0.1126 0.1158 0.1126 0.1167 0.1157 0.1157 0.1152 0.1115 0.1153 0.1121 0.1152 0.1181 0.1145 0.1095 0.1115 0.1162 0.1158 0.1145 0.1156 0.1114 0.1153 0.1166 0.115 0.1164 0.1132 0.1146 0.1166 0.1083 0.1085 0.1051 0.1024 0.106 0.1011 0.0984 0.1022 0.0996 0.0991 0.1025 0.1022 0.1031 0.1016 0.1002 0.103 0.1041 0.1041 0.0975 0.0977 0.0964 0.0939 0.0964 0.0937 0.0964 0.0972 0.0952 0.0928 0.0968 0.0988 0.0972 0.0958 0.097 0.0943 0.0959 0.0964 0.0929 0.0963 0.0961 0.0957 0.0919 0.0919 0.0867 0.0884
R_DC -(ohm/km) 0.0848 0.0814 0.0814 0.0779 0.0756 0.0791 0.0799 0.0805 0.0791 0.077 0.0795 0.0774 0.0798 0.0777 0.077 0.0773 0.077 0.0757 0.0735 0.072 0.07 0.072 0.07 0.0725 0.0719 0.0719 0.0716 0.0693 0.0716 0.0697 0.0716 0.0734 0.0711 0.068 0.0693 0.0722 0.072 0.0711 0.0718 0.0692 0.0716 0.0725 0.0715 0.0723 0.0703 0.0712 0.0725 0.0673 0.0674 0.0653 0.0636 0.0659 0.0628 0.0611 0.0635 0.0619 0.0616 0.0637 0.0635 0.0641 0.0631 0.0623 0.064 0.0647 0.0647 0.0606 0.0607 0.0599 0.0583 0.0599 0.0582 0.0599 0.0604 0.0592 0.0577 0.0602 0.0614 0.0604 0.0595 0.0603 0.0586 0.0596 0.0599 0.0577 0.0598 0.0597 0.0595 0.0571 0.0571 0.0539 0.0549
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.1384 0.1317 0.1317 0.1267 0.1228 0.128 0.13 0.1314 0.128 0.1249 0.129 0.1258 0.1296 0.1265 0.1252 0.1262 0.1242 0.1241 0.1208 0.117 0.1142 0.117 0.1141 0.1189 0.1169 0.1169 0.117 0.1129 0.117 0.1135 0.117 0.1196 0.116 0.1107 0.1126 0.1179 0.1179 0.116 0.1178 0.1154 0.1174 0.119 0.1169 0.119 0.1153 0.119 0.1185 0.1093 0.1107 0.107 0.1041 0.1082 0.1024 0.0997 0.104 0.1014 0.1012 0.1045 0.104 0.1053 0.1038 0.1024 0.1052 0.1059 0.1059 0.0982 0.0996 0.0983 0.0959 0.0983 0.0957 0.0983 0.0994 0.0966 0.0942 0.0989 0.1001 0.0994 0.0981 0.0994 0.0968 0.0994 0.0982 0.0967 0.0989 0.0986 0.0989 0.0948 0.0948 0.0887 0.0909
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.086 0.0818 0.0818 0.0787 0.0763 0.0795 0.0808 0.0817 0.0795 0.0776 0.0802 0.0782 0.0805 0.0786 0.0778 0.0784 0.0772 0.0771 0.0751 0.0727 0.071 0.0727 0.0709 0.0739 0.0726 0.0726 0.0727 0.0702 0.0727 0.0705 0.0727 0.0743 0.0721 0.0688 0.07 0.0733 0.0733 0.0721 0.0732 0.0717 0.073 0.0739 0.0726 0.0739 0.0716 0.0739 0.0736 0.0679 0.0688 0.0665 0.0647 0.0672 0.0636 0.062 0.0646 0.063 0.0629 0.0649 0.0646 0.0654 0.0645 0.0636 0.0654 0.0658 0.0658 0.061 0.0619 0.0611 0.0596 0.0611 0.0595 0.0611 0.0618 0.06 0.0585 0.0615 0.0622 0.0618 0.061 0.0618 0.0602 0.0618 0.061 0.0601 0.0615 0.0613 0.0615 0.0589 0.0589 0.0551 0.0565
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.1378 0.1315 0.1315 0.1263 0.1225 0.1278 0.1296 0.1309 0.1278 0.1246 0.1287 0.1254 0.1293 0.1261 0.1248 0.1257 0.1241 0.1234 0.1201 0.1166 0.1137 0.1166 0.1137 0.1182 0.1165 0.1165 0.1165 0.1125 0.1165 0.1131 0.1165 0.1192 0.1156 0.1103 0.1123 0.1174 0.1173 0.1156 0.1171 0.1142 0.1168 0.1183 0.1163 0.1182 0.1147 0.1177 0.1179 0.109 0.11 0.1064 0.1036 0.1075 0.102 0.0993 0.1035 0.1009 0.1006 0.1039 0.1035 0.1046 0.1031 0.1017 0.1045 0.1054 0.1054 0.098 0.099 0.0977 0.0953 0.0977 0.0951 0.0977 0.0987 0.0962 0.0938 0.0983 0.0997 0.0987 0.0974 0.0987 0.0961 0.0984 0.0977 0.0956 0.0981 0.0979 0.0979 0.0939 0.0939 0.0881 0.0902
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/km) 0.0856 0.0817 0.0817 0.0785 0.0761 0.0794 0.0805 0.0813 0.0794 0.0774 0.08 0.0779 0.0803 0.0783 0.0776 0.0781 0.0771 0.0767 0.0746 0.0725 0.0707 0.0725 0.0706 0.0735 0.0724 0.0724 0.0724 0.0699 0.0724 0.0703 0.0724 0.074 0.0718 0.0686 0.0698 0.0729 0.0729 0.0718 0.0728 0.071 0.0726 0.0735 0.0723 0.0735 0.0713 0.0731 0.0733 0.0677 0.0684 0.0661 0.0644 0.0668 0.0634 0.0617 0.0643 0.0627 0.0625 0.0646 0.0643 0.065 0.0641 0.0632 0.065 0.0655 0.0655 0.0609 0.0615 0.0607 0.0592 0.0607 0.0591 0.0607 0.0614 0.0598 0.0583 0.0611 0.062 0.0614 0.0605 0.0613 0.0597 0.0611 0.0607 0.0594 0.061 0.0608 0.0609 0.0584 0.0584 0.0547 0.056
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.4049 0.399 0.399 0.407 0.399 0.399 0.407 0.413 0.399 0.399 0.405 0.405 0.408 0.408 0.405 0.405 0.3971 0.404 0.413 0.401 0.401 0.4058 0.401 0.411 0.402 0.402 0.399 0.399 0.4022 0.399 0.399 0.4153 0.393 0.393 0.393 0.404 0.4092 0.393 0.3948 0.3858 0.393 0.406 0.406 0.4128 0.406 0.4209 0.407 0.3889 0.399 0.395 0.395 0.4 0.385 0.385 0.393 0.393 0.393 0.397 0.394 0.399 0.399 0.399 0.4 0.393 0.393 0.383 0.3899 0.389 0.389 0.3956 0.389 0.389 0.396 0.382 0.382 0.393 0.4046 0.395 0.395 0.4021 0.395 0.395 0.39 0.3747 0.3837 0.3824 0.4068 0.382 0.382 0.385 0.39
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.2516 0.2479 0.2479 0.2529 0.2479 0.2479 0.2529 0.2566 0.2479 0.2479 0.2517 0.2517 0.2535 0.2535 0.2517 0.2517 0.2468 0.251 0.2566 0.2492 0.2492 0.2522 0.2492 0.2554 0.2498 0.2498 0.2479 0.2479 0.2499 0.2479 0.2479 0.2581 0.2442 0.2442 0.2442 0.251 0.2543 0.2442 0.2453 0.2397 0.2442 0.2523 0.2523 0.2565 0.2523 0.2615 0.2529 0.2417 0.2479 0.2454 0.2454 0.2486 0.2392 0.2392 0.2442 0.2442 0.2442 0.2467 0.2448 0.2479 0.2479 0.2479 0.2486 0.2442 0.2442 0.238 0.2423 0.2417 0.2417 0.2458 0.2417 0.2417 0.2461 0.2374 0.2374 0.2442 0.2514 0.2454 0.2454 0.2499 0.2454 0.2454 0.2423 0.2328 0.2384 0.2376 0.2528 0.2374 0.2374 0.2392 0.2423
XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.3374 0.3325 0.3325 0.3392 0.3325 0.3325 0.3392 0.3442 0.3325 0.3325 0.3375 0.3375 0.34 0.34 0.3375 0.3375 0.3309 0.3367 0.3442 0.3342 0.3342 0.3382 0.3342 0.3425 0.335 0.335 0.3325 0.3325 0.3352 0.3325 0.3325 0.3461 0.3275 0.3275 0.3275 0.3367 0.341 0.3275 0.329 0.3215 0.3275 0.3383 0.3383 0.344 0.3383 0.3508 0.3392 0.3241 0.3325 0.3292 0.3292 0.3333 0.3208 0.3208 0.3275 0.3275 0.3275 0.3308 0.3283 0.3325 0.3325 0.3325 0.3333 0.3275 0.3275 0.3192 0.3249 0.3242 0.3242 0.3297 0.3242 0.3242 0.33 0.3183 0.3183 0.3275 0.3372 0.3292 0.3292 0.3351 0.3292 0.3292 0.325 0.3123 0.3198 0.3187 0.339 0.3183 0.3183 0.3208 0.325
AREA aluminum (kcmil) 672.8 714.6 714.6 715 715 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 715.5 716 742 742 753 762.8 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 795 848 848 874.5 874.5 874.5 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 900.5 900.5 940 943 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 954 957.2 1011 1011 1033 1033
AREA total (sq-in.) 0.5578 0.6889 0.6889 0.634 0.6896 0.6929 0.634 0.6014 0.6896 0.6901 0.6535 0.6535 0.6355 0.6348 0.6535 0.655 0.6612 0.6684 0.6966 0.7049 0.7049 0.7053 0.7053 0.6416 0.7053 0.7053 0.7264 0.7264 0.7261 0.7261 0.7264 0.6565 0.7669 0.7669 0.7668 0.6857 0.6857 0.7704 0.659 0.725 0.668 0.6674 0.6674 0.6676 0.6676 0.6676 0.6678 0.8212 0.751 0.7766 0.7766 0.7347 0.8711 0.8711 0.7984 0.7984 0.7985 0.7766 0.7981 0.7555 0.7555 0.7555 0.7555 0.7989 0.7989 0.912 0.8334 0.8462 0.8462 0.8464 0.8463 0.8462 0.801 0.9238 0.9238 0.8226 0.7877 0.801 0.801 0.8011 0.8011 0.801 0.8466 0.8712 0.7908 0.8009 0.8038 0.9565 0.9565 0.9163 0.8673
AREA total (sq-mm) 359.8702 444.4507 444.4507 409.0314 444.9023 447.0314 409.0314 387.9992 444.9023 445.2249 421.6121 421.6121 409.9992 409.5476 421.6121 422.5798 426.5798 431.2249 449.4185 454.7733 454.7733 455.0313 455.0313 413.9347 455.0313 455.0313 468.6442 468.6442 468.4507 468.4507 468.6442 423.5475 494.7732 494.7732 494.7087 442.3862 442.3862 497.0313 425.1604 467.741 430.9669 430.5798 430.5798 430.7088 430.7088 430.7088 430.8378 529.8054 484.5152 501.0313 501.0313 473.9991 561.9989 561.9989 515.0957 515.0957 515.1603 501.0313 514.9022 487.4184 487.4184 487.4184 487.4184 515.4183 515.4183 588.3859 537.6763 545.9344 545.9344 546.0634 545.9989 545.9344 516.7732 595.9988 595.9988 530.7086 508.1925 516.7732 516.7732 516.8377 516.8377 516.7732 546.1925 562.0634 510.1925 516.7086 518.5796 617.0955 617.0955 591.1601 559.5473
OD -(in.) 1.12 1.0807 1.0807 1.036 1.081 1.081 1.036 1.009 1.081 1.081 1.051 1.051 1.036 1.044 1.051 1.0524 1.0996 1.063 0.99 1.092 1.092 1.055 1.092 1.04 1.092 0.993 1.108 1.108 1.077 1.108 1.01 0.999 1.14 1.14 1.14 1.077 1.034 1.14 1.216 1.282 1.231 1.063 1.063 1.013 1.063 0.958 1.063 1.1768 1.1268 1.146 1.146 1.115 1.212 1.212 1.162 1.162 1.141 1.146 1.162 1.131 1.131 1.131 1.131 1.1634 1.1634 1.2402 1.187 1.196 1.196 1.147 1.196 1.084 1.165 1.248 1.248 1.18 1.088 1.165 1.165 1.103 1.165 1.061 1.196 1.405 1.333 1.347 1.063 1.2717 1.2717 1.245 1.212
#STD-OL outer -12 18 18 24 18 18 24 21 18 18 16 16 15 15 16 24 18 24 12 24 24 12 24 18 15 12 16 16 13 16 12 11 18 18 18 14 12 18 12 16 13 21 21 11 21 10 13 18 24 24 24 21 18 18 24 24 24 14 15 21 21 21 13 24 24 18 24 24 24 13 24 12 13 18 18 14 13 21 21 13 21 14 15 16 12 13 14 20 20 24 21
STR-DIA outer (in.) 0.1367 0.154 0.154 0.1151 0.1544 0.1544 0.1151 0.1261 0.1544 0.1544 0.1659 0.1659 0.1727 0.1727 0.1659 0.1169 0.1571 0.1181 0.1953 0.1213 0.1213 0.2018 0.1213 0.1486 0.182 0.1994 0.1749 0.1749 0.1926 0.1749 0.1996 0.216 0.1628 0.1628 0.1628 0.1901 0.2033 0.1628 0.1486 0.1236 0.14 0.1329 0.1329 0.2144 0.1329 0.2162 0.1994 0.1681 0.1252 0.1273 0.1273 0.1394 0.1732 0.1732 0.1291 0.1291 0.1291 0.2033 0.1936 0.1414 0.1414 0.1414 0.2121 0.129 0.129 0.1772 0.1319 0.1329 0.1383 0.2122 0.1329 0.2184 0.2184 0.1785 0.1785 0.2082 0.2178 0.1456 0.1456 0.2163 0.1456 0.1726 0.1994 0.1354 0.1628 0.1544 0.1729 0.104 0.104 0.1383 0.1515
STR-DIA outer (mm) 3.4722 3.9116 3.9116 2.9235 3.9218 3.9218 2.9235 3.2029 3.9218 3.9218 4.2139 4.2139 4.3866 4.3866 4.2139 2.9693 3.9903 2.9997 4.9606 3.081 3.081 5.1257 3.081 3.7744 4.6228 5.0648 4.4425 4.4425 4.892 4.4425 5.0698 5.4864 4.1351 4.1351 4.1351 4.8285 5.1638 4.1351 3.7744 3.1394 3.556 3.3757 3.3757 5.4458 3.3757 5.4915 5.0648 4.2697 3.1801 3.2334 3.2334 3.5408 4.3993 4.3993 3.2791 3.2791 3.2791 5.1638 4.9174 3.5916 3.5916 3.5916 5.3873 3.2766 3.2766 4.5009 3.3503 3.3757 3.5128 5.3899 3.3757 5.5474 5.5474 4.5339 4.5339 5.2883 5.5321 3.6982 3.6982 5.494 3.6982 4.384 5.0648 3.4392 4.1351 3.9218 4.3917 2.6416 2.6416 3.5128 3.8481
STR-DIA core (in.) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
STR-DIA core (mm) 3 2 2 3 2 4 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 3 2 4 4 3 5 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 5 5 3 2 2 2 2 4 2 3 3 4 2 2 3 3 4 3
UTS -(lb) 17400 35745 35745 25300 33400 34400 26300 20600 34600 30800 28400 23300 25500 19500 27500 26640 35138 27179 30500 28200 27800 28200 21700 16800 27900 28200 31500 30500 31800 25900 31800 19800 38400 37100 34300 24800 25100 38300 19900 32600 22200 22100 21500 21900 14200 21800 21800 40128 29652 31400 30600 25000 43300 38700 31900 31000 24500 27800 31600 24400 23970 15800 24100 33114 33114 44580 32800 33800 32900 33500 26000 33500 25600 46000 41100 29400 23700 25900 25400 26100 16700 25900 33500 39000 23600 26400 26000 48109 48109 35200 27200
UTS WGT --(kg) (lb/1000 ft) 7892.6 732 16213.8 1129.6 16213.8 1107.4 11476 883.4 15150.1 1044 15603.7 1119 11929.6 921 9344.1 807 15694.5 1110 13970.8 1111 12882.2 984.8 10568.8 985 11566.7 922 8845.1 922 12473.9 937.3 12083.8 950.2 15938.5 1157.8 12328.3 969.7 13834.7 1047 12791.4 1024 12610 981.3 12791.4 1023 9843.1 1024 7620.4 804.7 12655.4 1024 12791.4 1021 14288.3 1094 13834.7 1042 14424.4 1093 11748.2 1094 14424.4 1092 8981.2 856 17418.1 1235 16828.4 1161 15558.4 1235 11249.2 958 11385.3 956 17372.8 1246 9026.6 864 14787.3 1094 10069.9 893 10024.5 895.8 9752.3 873.4 9933.8 893 6441.1 896 9888.4 892.2 9888.4 896 18201.9 1325.1 13450.1 1089.9 14242.9 1126 13880.1 1081 11339.9 987 19640.8 1410 17554.2 1410 14469.7 1159 14061.5 1111 11113.1 1159 12610 1084 14333.7 1159 11067.8 1015 10872.7 988.9 7166.8 1015 10931.7 1015 15020.4 1187.4 15020.4 1158.5 20221.4 1471.6 14878 1208.9 15331.6 1229 14923.3 1178 15195.5 1227 11793.5 1229 15195.5 1226 11612.1 1075 20865.5 1493 18642.8 1493 13335.8 1149 10750.2 1027 11748.2 1076 11521.4 1049 11838.9 1073 7575.1 1075 11748.2 1076 15195.5 1229 17690.3 1314 10704.9 1036 11975 1070 11793.5 1079 21822.1 1534.1 21822.1 1503.9 15966.6 1275 12337.8 1135
WGT -(kg/km) 1089.4 1681.1 1648.1 1314.7 1553.7 1665.3 1370.7 1201 1651.9 1653.4 1465.6 1465.9 1372.1 1372.1 1394.9 1414.1 1723.1 1443.1 1558.2 1523.9 1460.4 1522.4 1523.9 1197.6 1523.9 1519.5 1628.1 1550.7 1626.6 1628.1 1625.1 1273.9 1838 1727.8 1838 1425.7 1422.7 1854.3 1285.8 1628.1 1329 1333.1 1299.8 1329 1333.4 1327.8 1333.4 1972 1622 1675.7 1608.8 1468.9 2098.4 2098.4 1724.8 1653.4 1724.8 1613.2 1724.8 1510.5 1471.7 1510.5 1510.5 1767.1 1724.1 2190.1 1799.1 1829 1753.1 1826 1829 1824.6 1599.8 2221.9 2221.9 1710 1528.4 1601.3 1561.1 1596.9 1599.8 1601.3 1829 1955.5 1541.8 1592.4 1605.8 2283.1 2238.1 1897.5 1689.1
Amps -(A) 917 840 840 830 840 840 830 835 840 865 835 855 835 850 835 850 860 855 860 885 885 890 895 860 885 885 890 890 890 925 890 870 900 900 925 895 880 900 1001 1030 1007 875 875 875 895 865 890 930 925 940 940 935 955 1000 955 955 970 965 970 945 945 965 960 950 950 995 990 995 995 990 1005 995 995 995 1035 1000 970 980 980 975 1000 980 1010 1162 1128 1134 970 1100 1100 1025 1030
!NAME !'-!'-CURLEW CURLEW/SD CURLEW/SSAC CURLEW/TW NONAME ORTOLAN ORTOLAN/SD ORTOLAN/SSAC ORTOLAN/TW SNOWBIRD/SD T2CREEPER T2FLYCATCHER MOOSE SNOWBIRD MORCULLA BLUEJAY BLUEJAY/AW BLUEJAY/SD BLUEJAY/SSAC FINCH FINCH/SD FINCH/SSAC REYN3 T2KINGLET T2PARAKEET FINCH/AW RAIL/OD GRACKLE/AW BUNTING BUNTING/SD BUNTING/SSAC GRACKLE GRACKLE/SD GRACKLE/SSAC OXBIRD/SD T2KITTIWAKE BUNTING/AW GATINEAU T2SKUA ORTOLAN/OD ALCAN2 ALCAN3 ALCOA1 ALCOA2 BITTERN BITTERN/AW BITTERN/SD BITTERN/SSAC BITTERN/TW PHEASANT PHEASANT/AW PHEASANT/SD PHEASANT/SSAC PHEASANT/TW REYN1 SCISSORTL/SD T2GROSBEAK T2ROOK T2TURACOS T2FLAMINGO T2JAEGER DIPPER/AW MARTIN/AW DIPPER DIPPER/SD DIPPER/SSAC FRIGATE/SD MARTIN MARTIN/SD MARTIN/SSAC MARTIN/TW RINGDOVE/SD BERSIMIS BOBOLINK BOBOLINK/AW BOBOLINK/SD BOBOLINK/SSAC PLOVER PLOVER/AW PLOVER/SD PLOVER/SSAC POPINJAY/SD T2DUNLIN BUNTING/OD NUTHATCH/AW PARROT/AW NUTHATCH NUTHATCH/SSAC PARROT PARROT/SSAC ALCAN4
R_DC -(ohm/mi) 0.089 0.0889 0.0865 0.089 0.089 0.0898 0.0896 0.0873 0.0898 0.09 0.0889 0.0889 0.088 0.0888 0.0848 0.0833 0.0821 0.0833 0.0809 0.083 0.0826 0.0808 0.0966 0.0825 0.0816 0.081 0.079 0.0756 0.0777 0.0776 0.0756 0.0775 0.077 0.0754 0.078 0.0771 0.0767 0.076 0.0757 0.0728 0.0724 0.072 0.0706 0.0675 0.0729 0.0719 0.0718 0.0708 0.0719 0.0727 0.0708 0.0724 0.0707 0.0727 0.0837 0.0732 0.072 0.0714 0.0721 0.069 0.0688 0.0677 0.0667 0.0686 0.0688 0.0666 0.0709 0.0684 0.0682 0.0665 0.0684 0.0688 0.0674 0.0648 0.0639 0.0649 0.063 0.0646 0.063 0.0643 0.0629 0.065 0.0641 0.0626 0.0605 0.0595 0.0614 0.0597 0.0612 0.0595 0.06
R_DC -(ohm/km) 0.0553 0.0552 0.0538 0.0553 0.0553 0.0558 0.0557 0.0542 0.0558 0.0559 0.0552 0.0552 0.0547 0.0552 0.0527 0.0518 0.051 0.0518 0.0503 0.0516 0.0513 0.0502 0.06 0.0513 0.0507 0.0503 0.0491 0.047 0.0483 0.0482 0.047 0.0482 0.0478 0.0469 0.0485 0.0479 0.0477 0.0472 0.047 0.0452 0.045 0.0447 0.0439 0.0419 0.0453 0.0447 0.0446 0.044 0.0447 0.0452 0.044 0.045 0.0439 0.0452 0.052 0.0455 0.0447 0.0444 0.0448 0.0429 0.0428 0.0421 0.0414 0.0426 0.0428 0.0414 0.0441 0.0425 0.0424 0.0413 0.0425 0.0428 0.0419 0.0403 0.0397 0.0403 0.0391 0.0401 0.0391 0.04 0.0391 0.0404 0.0398 0.0389 0.0376 0.037 0.0382 0.0371 0.038 0.037 0.0373
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.091 0.091 0.0886 0.091 0.091 0.0922 0.0922 0.0897 0.0922 0.0934 0.0916 0.0918 0.0901 0.0908 0.0869 0.0859 0.0848 0.0859 0.0837 0.0851 0.0851 0.083 0.0966 0.0853 0.0841 0.0831 0.0824 0.0779 0.0805 0.0805 0.0785 0.0798 0.0798 0.0778 0.0817 0.0804 0.0795 0.0777 0.0789 0.0763 0.0743 0.074 0.0706 0.0675 0.0759 0.0749 0.0759 0.0739 0.0759 0.0751 0.0733 0.0751 0.0732 0.0751 0.0837 0.0769 0.0725 0.0742 0.0753 0.071 0.0721 0.0709 0.0693 0.0717 0.0717 0.0699 0.0718 0.071 0.071 0.0692 0.071 0.0726 0.0692 0.0681 0.0673 0.0681 0.0664 0.0673 0.0658 0.0673 0.0656 0.069 0.0677 0.0663 0.0641 0.0624 0.0649 0.0633 0.0641 0.0625 0.0618
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.0565 0.0565 0.0551 0.0565 0.0565 0.0573 0.0573 0.0557 0.0573 0.058 0.0569 0.057 0.056 0.0564 0.054 0.0534 0.0527 0.0534 0.052 0.0529 0.0529 0.0516 0.06 0.053 0.0523 0.0516 0.0512 0.0484 0.05 0.05 0.0488 0.0496 0.0496 0.0483 0.0508 0.05 0.0494 0.0483 0.049 0.0474 0.0462 0.046 0.0439 0.0419 0.0472 0.0465 0.0472 0.0459 0.0472 0.0467 0.0455 0.0467 0.0455 0.0467 0.052 0.0478 0.0451 0.0461 0.0468 0.0441 0.0448 0.0441 0.0431 0.0446 0.0446 0.0434 0.0446 0.0441 0.0441 0.043 0.0441 0.0451 0.043 0.0423 0.0418 0.0423 0.0413 0.0418 0.0409 0.0418 0.0408 0.0429 0.0421 0.0412 0.0398 0.0388 0.0403 0.0393 0.0398 0.0388 0.0384
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.0904 0.0904 0.088 0.0904 0.0904 0.0915 0.0914 0.089 0.0915 0.0924 0.0908 0.0909 0.0895 0.0902 0.0863 0.0851 0.084 0.0851 0.0829 0.0845 0.0844 0.0823 0.0966 0.0845 0.0834 0.0825 0.0814 0.0772 0.0797 0.0796 0.0776 0.0791 0.079 0.0771 0.0806 0.0794 0.0787 0.0772 0.0779 0.0753 0.0737 0.0734 0.0706 0.0675 0.075 0.074 0.0747 0.073 0.0747 0.0744 0.0726 0.0743 0.0725 0.0744 0.0837 0.0758 0.0724 0.0734 0.0743 0.0704 0.0711 0.0699 0.0685 0.0708 0.0708 0.0689 0.0715 0.0702 0.0702 0.0684 0.0702 0.0715 0.0687 0.0671 0.0663 0.0671 0.0654 0.0665 0.065 0.0664 0.0648 0.0678 0.0666 0.0652 0.063 0.0615 0.0639 0.0622 0.0632 0.0616 0.0613
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/km) 0.0562 0.0562 0.0547 0.0562 0.0562 0.0568 0.0568 0.0553 0.0568 0.0574 0.0564 0.0565 0.0556 0.0561 0.0536 0.0529 0.0522 0.0529 0.0515 0.0525 0.0524 0.0512 0.06 0.0525 0.0518 0.0512 0.0506 0.048 0.0495 0.0495 0.0482 0.0492 0.0491 0.0479 0.0501 0.0493 0.0489 0.048 0.0484 0.0468 0.0458 0.0456 0.0439 0.0419 0.0466 0.046 0.0464 0.0453 0.0464 0.0462 0.0451 0.0462 0.045 0.0462 0.052 0.0471 0.045 0.0456 0.0462 0.0437 0.0442 0.0435 0.0426 0.044 0.044 0.0428 0.0444 0.0436 0.0436 0.0425 0.0436 0.0444 0.0427 0.0417 0.0412 0.0417 0.0406 0.0413 0.0404 0.0413 0.0403 0.0421 0.0414 0.0405 0.0392 0.0382 0.0397 0.0387 0.0393 0.0383 0.0381
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.385 0.3908 0.385 0.385 0.386 0.39 0.3975 0.39 0.39 0.3941 0.3772 0.3789 0.3851 0.3942 0.3862 0.386 0.386 0.3875 0.386 0.38 0.3865 0.38 0.38 0.3727 0.3678 0.38 0.395 0.376 0.382 0.3836 0.382 0.376 0.3824 0.376 0.3863 0.3702 0.382 0.3862 0.3675 0.39 0.3725 0.3725 0.38 0.38 0.378 0.378 0.38 0.378 0.3897 0.372 0.372 0.3725 0.372 0.372 0.372 0.3827 0.3645 0.3597 0.3645 0.3568 0.3616 0.374 0.368 0.374 0.3767 0.374 0.3729 0.368 0.3691 0.368 0.368 0.379 0.3862 0.371 0.371 0.3734 0.371 0.365 0.365 0.3666 0.365 0.3756 0.3575 0.3818 0.367 0.362 0.367 0.367 0.362 0.362 0.372
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.2392 0.2428 0.2392 0.2392 0.2399 0.2423 0.247 0.2423 0.2423 0.2449 0.2344 0.2354 0.2393 0.245 0.24 0.2399 0.2399 0.2408 0.2399 0.2361 0.2402 0.2361 0.2361 0.2316 0.2285 0.2361 0.2454 0.2336 0.2374 0.2384 0.2374 0.2336 0.2376 0.2336 0.24 0.23 0.2374 0.24 0.2284 0.2423 0.2315 0.2315 0.2361 0.2361 0.2349 0.2349 0.2361 0.2349 0.2422 0.2312 0.2312 0.2315 0.2312 0.2312 0.2312 0.2378 0.2265 0.2235 0.2265 0.2217 0.2247 0.2324 0.2287 0.2324 0.2341 0.2324 0.2317 0.2287 0.2294 0.2287 0.2287 0.2355 0.24 0.2305 0.2305 0.232 0.2305 0.2268 0.2268 0.2278 0.2268 0.2334 0.2221 0.2372 0.228 0.2249 0.228 0.228 0.2249 0.2249 0.2312
XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.3208 0.3257 0.3208 0.3208 0.3217 0.325 0.3313 0.325 0.325 0.3284 0.3143 0.3158 0.3209 0.3285 0.3218 0.3217 0.3217 0.3229 0.3217 0.3167 0.3221 0.3167 0.3167 0.3106 0.3065 0.3167 0.3292 0.3133 0.3183 0.3197 0.3183 0.3133 0.3187 0.3133 0.3219 0.3085 0.3183 0.3218 0.3063 0.325 0.3104 0.3104 0.3167 0.3167 0.315 0.315 0.3167 0.315 0.3248 0.31 0.31 0.3104 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.3189 0.3038 0.2998 0.3038 0.2973 0.3013 0.3117 0.3067 0.3117 0.3139 0.3117 0.3108 0.3067 0.3076 0.3067 0.3067 0.3158 0.3218 0.3092 0.3092 0.3112 0.3092 0.3042 0.3042 0.3055 0.3042 0.313 0.2979 0.3182 0.3058 0.3017 0.3058 0.3058 0.3017 0.3017 0.31
AREA aluminum (kcmil) 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1033.5 1044 1051.3 1110.5 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1114 1158 1192 1192.5 1192.5 1192.5 1192.5 1192.5 1192.5 1192.5 1192.5 1193 1208.2 1210 1257.1 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1272 1334 1334 1351 1351 1351.5 1351.5 1351.5 1351.5 1351.5 1351.5 1351.5 1351.5 1351.5 1360.8 1431 1431 1431 1431 1431 1431 1431 1431 1431 1431 1462.1 1510 1510 1510.5 1510.5 1510.5 1510.5 1533
AREA total (sq-in.) 0.9163 0.9169 0.9163 0.9163 0.9168 0.8673 0.8678 0.8673 0.8673 0.8534 0.8675 0.8564 0.9254 0.8536 0.9171 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.9854 0.985 0.9854 1.137 0.9334 0.9874 0.9854 0.9733 1.055 1.001 1.0013 1.001 1.055 1.055 1.055 0.9848 0.9882 1.001 0.9976 1.016 1.0557 1.126 1.269 1.202 1.325 1.068 1.068 1.068 1.068 1.0681 1.126 1.126 1.126 1.126 1.126 0.999 1.0503 1.1616 1.1286 1.068 1.1834 1.12 1.134 1.196 1.134 1.134 1.134 1.155 1.196 1.196 1.196 1.196 1.116 1.1238 1.201 1.201 1.202 1.201 1.267 1.267 1.267 1.267 1.179 1.201 1.2274 1.268 1.336 1.268 1.268 1.336 1.336 1.3605
AREA total (sq-mm) 591.1601 591.5472 591.1601 591.1601 591.4827 559.5473 559.8698 559.5473 559.5473 550.5795 559.6763 552.515 597.0311 550.7086 591.6762 603.2246 603.2246 603.2246 603.2246 635.7407 635.4826 635.7407 733.5469 602.1923 637.031 635.7407 627.9342 680.6438 645.8052 645.9987 645.8052 680.6438 680.6438 680.6438 635.3536 637.5471 645.8052 643.6116 655.4826 681.0954 726.4502 818.708 775.4823 854.837 689.0309 689.0309 689.0309 689.0309 689.0954 726.4502 726.4502 726.4502 726.4502 726.4502 644.5148 677.6115 749.4179 728.1276 689.0309 763.4823 722.5792 731.6114 771.6114 731.6114 731.6114 731.6114 745.1598 771.6114 771.6114 771.6114 771.6114 719.9986 725.0308 774.8372 774.8372 775.4823 774.8372 817.4177 817.4177 817.4177 817.4177 760.6436 774.8372 791.8694 818.0629 861.9338 818.0629 818.0629 861.9338 861.9338 877.7402
OD -(in.) 1.245 1.191 1.245 1.129 1.245 1.212 1.145 1.212 1.102 1.185 1.403 1.387 1.2508 1.2031 1.248 1.258 1.258 1.243 1.258 1.293 1.233 1.293 1.387 1.496 1.496 1.293 1.165 1.338 1.302 1.284 1.302 1.338 1.274 1.338 1.266 1.49 1.302 1.3 1.518 1.213 1.3781 1.419 1.301 1.382 1.345 1.345 1.323 1.345 1.2198 1.382 1.382 1.378 1.382 1.264 1.382 1.305 1.62 1.599 1.557 1.637 1.594 1.386 1.424 1.386 1.361 1.386 1.389 1.424 1.417 1.424 1.3 1.334 1.3799 1.427 1.427 1.398 1.427 1.465 1.465 1.448 1.465 1.381 1.65 1.302 1.465 1.505 1.465 1.465 1.505 1.505 1.382
#STD-OL outer -24 14 24 14 15 21 14 21 14 21 13 12 24 21 21 21 21 21 21 24 15 24 14 13 15 24 15 24 21 21 21 24 16 24 21 12 21 21 13 16 21 21 15 17 21 21 21 21 16 24 24 21 24 17 24 21 16 15 13 15 13 21 24 21 21 21 21 24 21 24 17 21 21 21 21 21 21 24 24 24 24 21 13 15 21 24 21 21 24 24 21
STR-DIA outer (in.) 0.1383 0.2129 0.1383 0.2168 0.2075 0.1515 0.2167 0.1515 0.1798 0.1481 0.1607 0.1694 0.139 0.1571 0.1614 0.1573 0.1573 0.1553 0.1573 0.1436 0.2133 0.1436 0.1809 0.1667 0.1523 0.1436 0.1877 0.1486 0.1628 0.1604 0.1628 0.1486 0.2138 0.1486 0.1582 0.182 0.1628 0.1697 0.1739 0.1895 0.1723 0.1723 0.1723 0.1723 0.1681 0.1681 0.1653 0.1681 0.1097 0.1535 0.1535 0.1723 0.1535 0.1806 0.1535 0.1631 0.1819 0.1628 0.1783 0.1667 0.1826 0.1733 0.1582 0.1733 0.1701 0.1733 0.1735 0.1582 0.1772 0.1582 0.186 0.168 0.1799 0.1783 0.1783 0.1747 0.1783 0.1628 0.1628 0.1609 0.1628 0.1726 0.1891 0.211 0.1832 0.1672 0.1832 0.1832 0.1672 0.1672 0.1723
STR-DIA outer (mm) 3.5128 5.4077 3.5128 5.5067 5.2705 3.8481 5.5042 3.8481 4.5669 3.7617 4.0818 4.3028 3.5306 3.9903 4.0996 3.9954 3.9954 3.9446 3.9954 3.6474 5.4178 3.6474 4.5949 4.2342 3.8684 3.6474 4.7676 3.7744 4.1351 4.0742 4.1351 3.7744 5.4305 3.7744 4.0183 4.6228 4.1351 4.3104 4.4171 4.8133 4.3764 4.3764 4.3764 4.3764 4.2697 4.2697 4.1986 4.2697 2.7864 3.8989 3.8989 4.3764 3.8989 4.5872 3.8989 4.1427 4.6203 4.1351 4.5288 4.2342 4.638 4.4018 4.0183 4.4018 4.3205 4.4018 4.4069 4.0183 4.5009 4.0183 4.7244 4.2672 4.5695 4.5288 4.5288 4.4374 4.5288 4.1351 4.1351 4.0869 4.1351 4.384 4.8031 5.3594 4.6533 4.2469 4.6533 4.6533 4.2469 4.2469 4.3764
STR-DIA core (in.) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
STR-DIA core (mm) 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 4 4 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 5 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
UTS -(lb) 36600 36300 28200 36300 35900 27700 28100 18100 28100 25900 28300 25500 36194 26527 26977 29800 29300 30300 19500 39100 39100 30400 53400 30500 39600 37500 31600 40200 32000 32400 20900 41900 41900 32500 29500 29800 31300 30799 33200 34200 48000 72900 55300 71345 34100 33400 34600 22300 34600 43600 42400 44100 34100 44100 62500 31400 50400 45400 34800 47600 36600 35400 46351 36200 36700 23700 41700 46300 46800 36200 46800 33400 34621 38300 37600 38900 25100 49100 47700 49600 38400 35300 39200 39200 39700 50500 40100 26500 51700 40500 53200
UTS WGT --(kg) (lb/1000 ft) 16601.7 1330 16465.6 1329 12791.4 1330 16465.6 1327 16284.1 1331 12564.6 1164 12746.1 1161 8210.1 1164 12746.1 1164 11748.2 1115 12836.8 1164 11566.7 1122 16417.5 1342.6 12032.6 1113.5 12236.7 1196.8 13517.2 1255 13290.4 1224 13744 1254 8845.1 1255 17735.6 1431 17735.6 1424 13789.3 1431 24222.1 1808 13834.7 1254 17962.4 1434 17009.9 1374 14333.7 1308 18234.6 1471 14515.1 1344 14696.5 1343 9480.2 1344 19005.7 1533 19005.7 1526 14741.9 1533 13381.1 1286 13517.2 1294 14197.6 1311 13970.3 1300.9 15059.4 1363 15513 1417 21772.7 1632 33067.2 2115 25083.9 1782.6 32361.9 2137 15467.7 1434 15150.1 1398 15694.5 1433 10115.2 1434 15694.5 1433 19776.8 1635 19232.5 1570 20003.6 1632 15467.7 1635 20003.6 1632 28349.8 1570 14242.9 1372 22861.3 1750.4 20593.3 1638 15785.2 1434 21591.2 1718 16601.7 1504 16057.3 1485 21024.7 1667 16420.2 1523 16647 1522 10750.2 1523 18915 1629 21001.5 1737 21228.3 1733 16420.2 1737 21228.3 1734 15150.1 1458 15704 1465.6 17372.8 1613 17055.2 1572 17644.9 1612 11385.3 1613 22271.6 1840 21636.6 1766 22498.4 1835 17418.1 1840 16012 1544 17781 1612 17781 1646 18007.8 1660 22906.6 1862 18189.2 1703 12020.3 1703 23451 1940 18370.7 1940 24131.4 1968
WGT -(kg/km) 1979.3 1977.8 1979.3 1974.9 1980.8 1732.3 1727.8 1732.3 1732.3 1659.4 1732.3 1669.8 1998.1 1657.1 1781.1 1867.7 1821.6 1866.2 1867.7 2129.6 2119.2 2129.6 2690.7 1866.2 2134.1 2044.8 1946.6 2189.2 2000.2 1998.7 2000.2 2281.4 2271 2281.4 1913.9 1925.8 1951.1 1936 2028.4 2108.8 2428.8 3147.6 2652.9 3180.3 2134.1 2080.5 2132.6 2134.1 2132.6 2433.2 2336.5 2428.8 2433.2 2428.8 2336.5 2041.8 2605 2437.7 2134.1 2556.8 2238.3 2210 2480.9 2266.6 2265.1 2266.6 2424.3 2585 2579.1 2585 2580.6 2169.8 2181.1 2400.5 2339.5 2399 2400.5 2738.3 2628.2 2730.9 2738.3 2297.8 2399 2449.6 2470.4 2771.1 2534.4 2534.4 2887.1 2887.1 2928.8
Amps -(A) 1025 1040 1055 1025 1060 1030 1025 1050 1030 1025 1194 1188 1025 1025 1120 1060 1060 1080 1100 1080 1090 1100 950 1254 1275 1080 1090 1125 1110 1125 1150 1125 1135 1150 1120 1304 1110 1120 1324 1145 1190 1190 1200 1200 1155 1155 1170 1195 1155 1175 1175 1190 1195 1175 1050 1155 1368 1391 1368 1434 1410 1205 1225 1205 1205 1240 1205 1225 1225 1240 1225 1205 1120 1250 1250 1255 1280 1270 1270 1270 1285 1250 1474 1250 1295 1315 1295 1325 1315 1330 1300
!NAME !'-!'-BITTERN/OD FALCON FALCON/AW FALCON/SD FALCON/SSAC FALCON/TW LAPWING LAPWING/AW LAPWING/SD LAPWING/SSAC LAPWING/TW T2TURBIT DIPPER/OD CHUKAR/SD CHUKAR/TW SMEW/SD CHUKAR CHUKAR/AW CHUKAR/SSAC T2TWINSTONE LAPWING/OD KATE1 T2ORTOLAN BLUEBIRD BLUEBIRD/AW BLUEBIRD/SD BLUEBIRD/SSAC BLUEBIRD/TW KIWI KIWI/AW KIWI/SD T2BLUEJAY THRASHER THRASHER/AW THRASHER/TW KINGFISHER KINGFISHER/AW JOREE JOREE/AW JOREE/TW TURKEY/AW TURKEY(#6) SQUIRREL SWAN/AW SWANATE/AW SWAN(#4) SWANATE(#4) GOPHER WEASEL SPARATE(#2) SPARROW(#2) SPARATE/AW SPARROW/AW FOX ROBIN(#1) FERRET ROBIN/AW RABBIT RAVEN(1/0) RAVEN/AW MINK QUAIL/AW QUAIL(2/0) BEAVER RACCOON OTTER PIGEON/AW PIGEON(3/0) CAT DOG HARE PENGUIN(4/0) PENGUIN/AW GROUSE PETREL MINORCA LEGHORN GUINEA DOTTEREL DORKING BRAHMA COCHIN GROUSE PETREL MINORCA LEGHORN GUINEA DOTTEREL DORKING BRAHMA COCHIN
TYPE --ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER ACSR/1LAYER/HS ACSR/1LAYER/HS ACSR/1LAYER/HS ACSR/1LAYER/HS ACSR/1LAYER/HS ACSR/1LAYER/HS ACSR/1LAYER/HS ACSR/1LAYER/HS ACSR/1LAYER/HS ACSR/EHS ACSR/EHS ACSR/EHS ACSR/EHS ACSR/EHS ACSR/EHS ACSR/EHS ACSR/EHS ACSR/EHS
R_DC -(ohm/mi) 0.0587 0.0581 0.0567 0.0582 0.0565 0.0581 0.0583 0.0576 0.0582 0.0566 0.0576 0.0586 0.0552 0.0521 0.0519 0.0561 0.0522 0.0516 0.0508 0.051 0.0469 0.0459 0.0449 0.0431 0.0426 0.0431 0.0419 0.0429 0.0431 0.0424 0.0436 0.0417 0.0404 0.0397 0.0404 0.0392 0.0378 0.0371 0.0367 0.0364 3.459 3.458 2.184 2.102 2.046 2.172 2.149 1.817 1.487 1.35 1.365 1.285 1.321 1.188 1.083 1.0829 1.0466 0.8686 0.858 0.8301 0.735 0.6588 0.6814 0.6198 0.5891 0.5506 0.523 0.5404 0.4817 0.4376 0.4376 0.4284 0.4146 1.112 0.853 0.7833 0.645 0.546 0.4909 0.455 0.412 0.4108 1.112 0.853 0.7833 0.645 0.546 0.4909 0.455 0.412 0.4108
R_DC -(ohm/km) 0.0365 0.0361 0.0352 0.0362 0.0351 0.0361 0.0362 0.0358 0.0362 0.0352 0.0358 0.0364 0.0343 0.0324 0.0323 0.0349 0.0324 0.0321 0.0316 0.0317 0.0291 0.0285 0.0279 0.0268 0.0265 0.0268 0.026 0.0267 0.0268 0.0263 0.0271 0.0259 0.0251 0.0247 0.0251 0.0244 0.0235 0.0231 0.0228 0.0226 2.1494 2.1488 1.3571 1.3062 1.2714 1.3497 1.3354 1.129 0.924 0.8389 0.8482 0.7985 0.8209 0.7382 0.673 0.6729 0.6503 0.5397 0.5332 0.5158 0.4567 0.4094 0.4234 0.3851 0.3661 0.3421 0.325 0.3358 0.2993 0.2719 0.2719 0.2662 0.2576 0.691 0.53 0.4867 0.4008 0.3393 0.305 0.2827 0.256 0.2553 0.691 0.53 0.4867 0.4008 0.3393 0.305 0.2827 0.256 0.2553
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.0626 0.0611 0.0597 0.0611 0.0596 0.0611 0.062 0.0613 0.062 0.0605 0.062 0.0616 0.0592 0.0561 0.0556 0.0561 0.0561 0.0553 0.0548 0.0554 0.0506 0.0509 0.0461 0.0477 0.0471 0.0477 0.0466 0.0472 0.0484 0.0481 0.0484 0.043 0.0454 0.0453 0.0454 0.0447 0.0439 0.0425 0.0424 0.0419 3.459 3.46 2.1869 2.102 2.046 2.175 2.15 1.82 1.4899 1.353 1.368 1.285 1.321 1.1911 1.087 1.087 1.047 0.8723 0.862 0.8304 0.7406 0.6588 0.687 0.6256 0.5947 0.5562 0.5233 0.546 0.4871 0.4432 0.4432 0.434 0.4149 1.114 0.858 0.787 0.651 0.552 0.499 0.462 0.417 0.418 1.114 0.858 0.787 0.651 0.552 0.499 0.462 0.417 0.418
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.0389 0.038 0.0371 0.038 0.037 0.038 0.0385 0.0381 0.0385 0.0376 0.0385 0.0383 0.0368 0.0349 0.0345 0.0349 0.0349 0.0344 0.0341 0.0344 0.0314 0.0316 0.0286 0.0296 0.0293 0.0296 0.029 0.0293 0.0301 0.0299 0.0301 0.0267 0.0282 0.0281 0.0282 0.0278 0.0273 0.0264 0.0263 0.026 2.1494 2.15 1.3589 1.3062 1.2714 1.3515 1.336 1.1309 0.9258 0.8407 0.8501 0.7985 0.8209 0.7401 0.6754 0.6754 0.6506 0.542 0.5356 0.516 0.4602 0.4094 0.4269 0.3887 0.3695 0.3456 0.3252 0.3393 0.3027 0.2754 0.2754 0.2697 0.2578 0.6922 0.5332 0.489 0.4045 0.343 0.3101 0.2871 0.2591 0.2597 0.6922 0.5332 0.489 0.4045 0.343 0.3101 0.2871 0.2591 0.2597
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.0614 0.0602 0.0588 0.0602 0.0587 0.0602 0.0609 0.0602 0.0609 0.0593 0.0607 0.0607 0.058 0.0549 0.0545 0.0561 0.0549 0.0542 0.0536 0.0541 0.0495 0.0494 0.0457 0.0463 0.0458 0.0463 0.0452 0.0459 0.0468 0.0464 0.047 0.0426 0.0439 0.0436 0.0439 0.0431 0.0421 0.0409 0.0407 0.0403 3.459 3.4594 2.186 2.102 2.046 2.1741 2.1497 1.8191 1.489 1.3521 1.3671 1.285 1.321 1.1902 1.0858 1.0858 1.0469 0.8712 0.8608 0.8303 0.7389 0.6588 0.6853 0.6238 0.593 0.5545 0.5232 0.5443 0.4855 0.4415 0.4415 0.4323 0.4148 1.1134 0.8565 0.7859 0.6492 0.5502 0.4966 0.4599 0.4155 0.4158 1.1134 0.8565 0.7859 0.6492 0.5502 0.4966 0.4599 0.4155 0.4158
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/km) 0.0382 0.0374 0.0365 0.0374 0.0365 0.0374 0.0378 0.0374 0.0378 0.0369 0.0377 0.0377 0.036 0.0341 0.0339 0.0349 0.0341 0.0337 0.0333 0.0336 0.0308 0.0307 0.0284 0.0288 0.0284 0.0288 0.0281 0.0285 0.0291 0.0288 0.0292 0.0265 0.0273 0.0271 0.0273 0.0268 0.0261 0.0254 0.0253 0.025 2.1494 2.1496 1.3584 1.3062 1.2714 1.351 1.3358 1.1304 0.9253 0.8402 0.8495 0.7985 0.8209 0.7396 0.6747 0.6747 0.6505 0.5413 0.5349 0.5159 0.4592 0.4094 0.4258 0.3877 0.3685 0.3446 0.3251 0.3382 0.3017 0.2744 0.2744 0.2686 0.2578 0.6919 0.5322 0.4883 0.4034 0.3419 0.3086 0.2858 0.2582 0.2584 0.6919 0.5322 0.4883 0.4034 0.3419 0.3086 0.2858 0.2582 0.2584
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.3776 0.358 0.358 0.3606 0.358 0.358 0.364 0.364 0.3675 0.364 0.377 0.3565 0.374 0.3589 0.3704 0.363 0.355 0.355 0.355 0.3435 0.3634 0.3523 0.3342 0.344 0.344 0.3476 0.344 0.3594 0.348 0.348 0.3477 0.3296 0.342 0.342 0.342 0.342 0.342 0.337 0.337 0.3523 0.774 0.774 0.723 0.723 0.746 0.723 0.746 0.701 0.678 0.683 0.673 0.683 0.673 0.662 0.645 0.645 0.645 0.6211 0.621 0.621 0.6079 0.601 0.601 0.59 0.583 0.579 0.579 0.579 0.568 0.5601 0.5601 0.557 0.557 0.553 0.538 0.537 0.527 0.517 0.512 0.505 0.493 0.499 0.677 0.674 0.664 0.641 0.624 0.61 0.601 0.587 0.59
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.2346 0.2225 0.2225 0.2241 0.2225 0.2225 0.2262 0.2262 0.2284 0.2262 0.2343 0.2215 0.2324 0.223 0.2302 0.2256 0.2206 0.2206 0.2206 0.2134 0.2258 0.2189 0.2077 0.2138 0.2138 0.216 0.2138 0.2233 0.2162 0.2162 0.2161 0.2048 0.2125 0.2125 0.2125 0.2125 0.2125 0.2094 0.2094 0.2189 0.481 0.481 0.4493 0.4493 0.4636 0.4493 0.4636 0.4356 0.4213 0.4244 0.4182 0.4244 0.4182 0.4114 0.4008 0.4008 0.4008 0.3859 0.3859 0.3859 0.3777 0.3735 0.3735 0.3666 0.3623 0.3598 0.3598 0.3598 0.3529 0.348 0.348 0.3461 0.3461 0.3436 0.3343 0.3337 0.3275 0.3213 0.3182 0.3138 0.3063 0.3101 0.4207 0.4188 0.4126 0.3983 0.3877 0.379 0.3735 0.3648 0.3666
XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.3147 0.2983 0.2983 0.3005 0.2983 0.2983 0.3033 0.3033 0.3063 0.3033 0.3142 0.2971 0.3117 0.2991 0.3087 0.3025 0.2958 0.2958 0.2958 0.2863 0.3028 0.2936 0.2785 0.2867 0.2867 0.2897 0.2867 0.2995 0.29 0.29 0.2898 0.2747 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.285 0.2808 0.2808 0.2936 0.645 0.645 0.6025 0.6025 0.6217 0.6025 0.6217 0.5842 0.565 0.5692 0.5608 0.5692 0.5608 0.5517 0.5375 0.5375 0.5375 0.5176 0.5175 0.5175 0.5066 0.5008 0.5008 0.4917 0.4858 0.4825 0.4825 0.4825 0.4733 0.4668 0.4668 0.4642 0.4642 0.4608 0.4483 0.4475 0.4392 0.4308 0.4267 0.4208 0.4108 0.4158 0.5642 0.5617 0.5533 0.5342 0.52 0.5083 0.5008 0.4892 0.4917
AREA aluminum (kcmil) 1557.4 1590 1590 1590 1590 1590 1590 1590 1590 1590 1590 1590 1657.4 1780 1780 1780 1781 1781 1781 1800 1949 2034 2067 2156 2156 2156 2156 2156 2167 2167 2167 2226 2312 2312 2312 2385 2385 2515 2515 2515 26.2 26.2 41.7 41.7 41.7 41.7 41.7 52.6 63.9 66.4 66.4 66.4 66.4 73.3 83.7 83.7 83.7 105 105.6 105.7 125 133 133.1 150 155 158 167.7 167.8 189 198 198 211.6 211.6 80 101.8 110.8 134.6 159 176.9 190.8 203.2 211.3 80 101.8 110.8 134.6 159 176.9 190.8 203.2 211.3
AREA total (sq-in.) 1.3079 1.407 1.407 1.407 1.407 1.407 1.335 1.335 1.335 1.335 1.335 1.336 1.3919 1.513 1.512 1.467 1.513 1.513 1.513 1.511 1.6337 1.6669 1.735 1.8309 1.8309 1.8311 1.8309 1.8314 1.7758 1.7758 1.7758 1.87 1.9144 1.9144 1.9144 1.954 1.954 2.0826 2.0826 2.0826 0.024 0.024 0.0379 0.0382 0.0411 0.0382 0.0411 0.0475 0.0572 0.0654 0.0608 0.0654 0.0608 0.0663 0.0767 0.0767 0.0767 0.0956 0.0968 0.0968 0.1142 0.1221 0.1221 0.1357 0.1425 0.1518 0.1537 0.1537 0.1725 0.1838 0.1899 0.1939 0.1939 0.0847 0.1266 0.1378 0.1674 0.1977 0.22 0.2373 0.302 0.2628 0.0847 0.1265 0.1378 0.1674 0.1977 0.2199 0.2373 0.302 0.2628
AREA total (sq-mm) 843.8048 907.7401 907.7401 907.7401 907.7401 907.7401 861.2886 861.2886 861.2886 861.2886 861.2886 861.9338 897.9982 976.1271 975.4819 946.4497 976.1271 976.1271 976.1271 974.8368 1053.9979 1075.4172 1119.3526 1181.2234 1181.2234 1181.3525 1181.2234 1181.546 1145.6751 1145.6751 1145.6751 1206.4492 1235.0943 1235.0943 1235.0943 1260.6426 1260.6426 1343.6102 1343.6102 1343.6102 15.4838 15.4838 24.4516 24.6451 26.5161 24.6451 26.5161 30.6451 36.9032 42.1935 39.2257 42.1935 39.2257 42.7741 49.4838 49.4838 49.4838 61.6773 62.4515 62.4515 73.6773 78.774 78.774 87.5482 91.9353 97.9353 99.1611 99.1611 111.2901 118.5804 122.5159 125.0965 125.0965 54.6451 81.6773 88.903 107.9998 127.5481 141.9352 153.0965 194.8383 169.548 54.6451 81.6127 88.903 107.9998 127.5481 141.8707 153.0965 194.8383 169.548
OD -(in.) 1.345 1.545 1.545 1.521 1.545 1.408 1.504 1.504 1.468 1.504 1.358 1.742 1.386 1.565 1.46 1.531 1.602 1.602 1.602 1.851 1.504 1.681 1.984 1.762 1.762 1.716 1.762 1.599 1.735 1.735 1.725 2.059 1.802 1.802 1.629 1.82 1.82 1.88 1.88 1.696 0.198 0.198 0.2492 0.25 0.257 0.25 0.257 0.2787 0.3059 0.325 0.316 0.325 0.316 0.3295 0.354 0.3543 0.354 0.3957 0.398 0.398 0.4323 0.447 0.447 0.4713 0.483 0.4984 0.502 0.502 0.5315 0.5571 0.5575 0.563 0.563 0.367 0.461 0.481 0.53 0.576 0.607 0.631 0.714 0.663 0.367 0.461 0.48 0.529 0.576 0.607 0.631 0.714 0.664
OD STRAND -- outer/core (mm) -34.163 345/7 39.243 54/19 39.243 54/19 38.6334 54/19 39.243 54/19 35.7632 54/19 38.2016 45/7 38.2016 45/7 37.2872 145/7 38.2016 45/7 34.4932 245/7 44.2468 40/14 35.2044 345/7 39.751 84/19 37.084 84/19 38.8874 176/7 40.6908 84/19 40.6908 84/19 40.6908 84/19 47.0154 40/14 38.2016 342/7 42.6974 72/7 50.3936 90/14 44.7548 84/19 44.7548 84/19 43.5864 184/19 44.7548 84/19 40.6146 84/19 44.069 72/7 44.069 72/7 43.815 172/7 52.2986 90/14 45.7708 76/19 45.7708 76/19 41.3766 76/19 46.228 72/7 46.228 72/7 47.752 76/19 47.752 76/19 43.0784 76/19 5.0292 1-Jun 5.0292 1-Jun 6.3297 1-Jun 6.35 1-Jun 6.5278 1-Jul 6.35 1-Jun 6.5278 1-Jul 7.079 1-Jun 7.7699 1-Jun 8.255 1-Jul 8.0264 1-Jun 8.255 1-Jul 8.0264 1-Jun 8.3693 1-Jun 8.9916 1-Jun 8.9992 1-Jun 8.9916 1-Jun 10.0508 1-Jun 10.1092 1-Jun 10.1092 1-Jun 10.9804 1-Jun 11.3538 1-Jun 11.3538 1-Jun 11.971 1-Jun 12.2682 1-Jun 12.6594 1-Jun 12.7508 1-Jun 12.7508 1-Jun 13.5001 1-Jun 14.1503 7-Jun 14.1605 1-Jun 14.3002 1-Jun 14.3002 1-Jun 9.3218 1-Aug 11.7094 7-Dec 12.2174 7-Dec 13.462 7-Dec 14.6304 7-Dec 15.4178 7-Dec 16.0274 7-Dec 18.1356 16/19 16.8402 7-Dec 9.3218 1-Aug 11.7094 7-Dec 12.192 7-Dec 13.4366 7-Dec 14.6304 7-Dec 15.4178 7-Dec 16.0274 7-Dec 18.1356 16/19 16.8656 7-Dec
#STD-OL outer -16 24 24 24 24 18 21 21 21 21 16 13 16 21 22 21 30 30 30 13 19 27 21 30 30 21 30 20 27 27 24 21 28 28 28 27 27 28 28 28 6 6 6 6 7 6 7 6 6 7 6 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 12 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 12
STR-DIA outer (in.) 0.208 0.1716 0.1716 0.169 0.1716 0.1946 0.188 0.188 0.1835 0.188 0.2146 0.1994 0.2145 0.1957 0.1681 0.1914 0.1456 0.1456 0.1456 0.2121 0.2155 0.1681 0.1515 0.1602 0.1602 0.2145 0.1602 0.1836 0.1735 0.1735 0.1917 0.1573 0.1744 0.1744 0.1744 0.182 0.182 0.1819 0.1819 0.1819 0.0661 0.0661 0.0831 0.0834 0.0772 0.0834 0.0772 0.0929 0.102 0.0974 0.1052 0.0974 0.1052 0.1098 0.1181 0.1181 0.1181 0.1319 0.1327 0.1327 0.1441 0.149 0.149 0.1571 0.161 0.1661 0.1672 0.1672 0.1772 0.1858 0.1858 0.1878 0.1878 0.1 0.0921 0.0961 0.1059 0.1151 0.1214 0.1261 0.1127 0.1327 0.1 0.0921 0.0961 0.1059 0.1151 0.1214 0.1261 0.1127 0.1327
STR-DIA outer (mm) 5.2832 4.3586 4.3586 4.2926 4.3586 4.9428 4.7752 4.7752 4.6609 4.7752 5.4508 5.0648 5.4483 4.9708 4.2697 4.8616 3.6982 3.6982 3.6982 5.3873 5.4737 4.2697 3.8481 4.0691 4.0691 5.4483 4.0691 4.6634 4.4069 4.4069 4.8692 3.9954 4.4298 4.4298 4.4298 4.6228 4.6228 4.6203 4.6203 4.6203 1.6789 1.6789 2.1107 2.1184 1.9609 2.1184 1.9609 2.3597 2.5908 2.474 2.6721 2.474 2.6721 2.7889 2.9997 2.9997 2.9997 3.3503 3.3706 3.3706 3.6601 3.7846 3.7846 3.9903 4.0894 4.2189 4.2469 4.2469 4.5009 4.7193 4.7193 4.7701 4.7701 2.54 2.3393 2.4409 2.6899 2.9235 3.0836 3.2029 2.8626 3.3706 2.54 2.3393 2.4409 2.6899 2.9235 3.0836 3.2029 2.8626 3.3706
STR-DIA core (in.) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
STR-DIA core (mm) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 2 5 5 5 4 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 3
UTS -(lb) 41900 54500 53000 55100 42600 55100 42200 41700 42600 27900 42200 43600 44000 51100 50700 43600 51000 49700 35300 48200 51900 46800 55400 60300 59000 60700 42100 60700 49800 49130 50700 59600 56700 55300 57100 54400 54000 61700 60600 62100 1190 1190 1778 1860 2360 1860 2360 2158 2572 3640 2850 3640 2850 2958 3550 3424 3550 4127 4380 4380 4901 5310 5310 5789 6130 6479 6620 6620 7342 7347 8082 8350 8350 5200 10400 11300 13600 16000 17300 18700 28400 20700 5200 10400 11300 13600 16000 17300 18700 28400 20700
UTS WGT --(kg) (lb/1000 ft) 19005.7 1755 24721 2044 24040.6 1962 24993.2 2039 19323.2 2044 24993.2 2040 19141.8 1792 18915 1748 19323.2 1791 12655.4 1792 19141.8 1791 19776.8 1792 19958.3 1868 23178.8 2068 22997.4 2069 19776.8 1921 23133.4 2075 22543.8 2015 16012 2075 21863.4 2030 23541.7 2199 21228.3 2162 25129.3 2328 27351.9 2511 26762.2 2439 27533.3 2504 19096.4 2511 27533.3 2505 22589.1 2303 22285.2 2265 22997.4 2296 27034.4 2510 25719 2526 25083.9 2475 25900.4 2517 24675.7 2535 24494.2 2475 27986.9 2749 27488 2693 28168.4 2738 539.8 34.3 539.8 36.1 806.5 57.1 843.7 54.6 1070.5 62.7 843.7 57.4 1070.5 67 978.9 71.2 1166.7 86 1651.1 106.7 1292.8 91.3 1651.1 99.9 1292.8 86.8 1341.7 100.1 1610.3 115.1 1553.1 114.9 1610.3 109.5 1872 143.8 1986.8 145.3 1986.8 138.2 2223.1 171.4 2408.6 174.2 2408.6 183.2 2625.9 203.6 2780.5 214 2938.9 227.8 3002.8 219.4 3002.8 230.8 3330.3 259.4 3332.6 264.8 3666 285.6 3787.5 291.1 3787.5 276.8 2358.7 148.9 4717.4 253.8 5125.6 276.3 6168.9 335.5 7257.6 396.3 7847.2 440.9 8482.3 475.7 12882.2 674.6 9389.5 526.8 2358.7 149 4717.4 254.1 5125.6 276.6 6168.9 335.9 7257.6 396.9 7847.2 441.4 8482.3 476.3 12882.2 676.9 9389.5 527.5
WGT -(kg/km) 2611.8 3041.9 2919.9 3034.5 3041.9 3036 2666.9 2601.4 2665.4 2666.9 2665.4 2666.9 2780 3077.6 3079.1 2858.9 3088.1 2998.8 3088.1 3021.1 3272.6 3217.5 3464.6 3736.9 3629.8 3726.5 3736.9 3728 3427.4 3370.8 3417 3735.4 3759.2 3683.3 3745.8 3772.6 3683.3 4091.1 4007.8 4074.7 51 53.7 85 81.3 93.3 85.4 99.7 106 128 158.8 135.9 148.7 129.2 149 171.3 171 163 214 216.2 205.7 255.1 259.2 272.6 303 318.5 339 326.5 343.5 386 394.1 425 433.2 411.9 221.6 377.7 411.2 499.3 589.8 656.2 707.9 1004 784 221.7 378.2 411.6 499.9 590.7 656.9 708.8 1007.4 785
Amps -(A) 1300 1360 1360 1350 1370 1360 1335 1335 1335 1365 1315 1577 1350 1425 1395 1435 1435 1435 1465 1703 1480 1540 1853 1615 1615 1615 1635 1570 1600 1600 1585 1939 1670 1670 1670 1695 1695 1755 1755 1710 95 95 130 130 130 130 130 150 175 175 175 175 175 185 200 200 200 230 230 230 255 265 265 285 295 310 310 310 330 345 345 350 350 204 237 248 273 297 312 324 341 340 200 250 265 300 330 350 370 380 390
!NAME !'-!'-3#10AW 3#9AW 3#8AW 3#7AW 7#10AW 3#6AW 7#9AW 3#5AW 7#8AW 7#7AW 7#6AW 19#10AW 7#5AW 19#9AW 19#8AW 37#10AW 19#7AW 37#9AW 19#6AW 37#8AW 19#5AW 37#7AW 37#6AW 37#5AW CU_SOLID_#8 CU_SOLID_#7 CU_SOLID_#6 CU_SOLID_#5 CU_SOLID_#4 CU_SOLID_#3 CU_SOLID_#2 CU_SOLID_#1 CU_SOLID_1/0 CU_SOLID_2/0 CU_SOLID_3/0 CU_SOLID_4/0 3#10CW 3#9CW CU_7STR_#4 3#8CW CU_7STR_#3 3#7CW 2K-CWC CU_7STR_#2 7#10CW 3#6CW 1K-CWC 7#9CW 3#5CW 1/0K-CWC CU_7STR_1/0 7#8CW 2/0K-CWC CU_7STR_2/0 7#7CW 3/0EK-CWC CU_7STR_3/0 7#6CW 4/0EK-CWC CU_7STR_4/0 19#9CW 250E-CWC 250EK-CWC CU250 7#4CW 300E-CWC 300EK-CWC 19#8CW 350E-CWC 350EK-CWC 19#7CW 19#6CW CU500 19#5CW CU1000 1/2EHS 3/8EHS 5/16EHS 5/8EHS 7/16EHS 1/2HS 3/8HS 5/8HS 7/16HS
TYPE --ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD ALUMOWELD CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/SOLID CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND CU/STRAND EHS/CLASS A EHS/CLASS A EHS/CLASS A EHS/CLASS A EHS/CLASS A HS/CLASS A HS/CLASS A HS/CLASS A HS/CLASS A
R_DC -(ohm/mi) 8.87 7.04 5.58 4.42 3.81 3.51 3.02 2.78 2.4 1.9 1.507 1.409 1.217 1.118 0.8864 0.7278 0.703 0.5773 0.5574 0.4577 0.442 0.363 0.2879 0.2282 3.5141 2.7868 2.2144 1.7532 1.3903 1.103 0.8747 0.6938 0.5459 0.4329 0.3437 0.273 6.14 4.87 1.418 3.86 1.1248 3.06 0.871 0.881 2.64 2.43 0.691 2.09 1.926 0.548 0.555 1.658 0.434 0.445 1.315 0.346 0.35 1.042 0.274 0.276 0.773 0.232 0.232 0.234 0.656 0.1934 0.1934 0.613 0.1658 0.1658 0.486 0.386 0.117 0.306 0.0585 3.56 6.74 8.96 2.26 4.61 3.44 6.51 2.19 4.45
R_DC -(ohm/km) 5.5117 4.3746 3.4673 2.7465 2.3675 2.1811 1.8766 1.7275 1.4913 1.1806 0.9364 0.8755 0.7562 0.6947 0.5508 0.4522 0.4368 0.3587 0.3464 0.2844 0.2747 0.2256 0.1789 0.1418 2.1836 1.7317 1.376 1.0894 0.8639 0.6854 0.5435 0.4311 0.3392 0.269 0.2136 0.1696 3.8153 3.0262 0.8811 2.3986 0.6989 1.9014 0.5412 0.5474 1.6405 1.51 0.4294 1.2987 1.1968 0.3405 0.3449 1.0303 0.2697 0.2765 0.8171 0.215 0.2175 0.6475 0.1703 0.1715 0.4803 0.1442 0.1442 0.1454 0.4076 0.1202 0.1202 0.3809 0.103 0.103 0.302 0.2399 0.0727 0.1901 0.0364 2.2121 4.1882 5.5676 1.4043 2.8646 2.1376 4.0452 1.3608 2.7652
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 8.87 7.04 5.58 4.42 3.88 3.51 3.08 2.78 2.44 1.937 1.536 1.437 1.24 1.14 0.9038 0.7409 0.7171 0.5886 0.5683 0.4667 0.4507 0.3702 0.2935 0.2327 3.5141 2.7868 2.2144 1.7532 1.3903 1.103 0.8747 0.6938 0.5459 0.4329 0.3437 0.273 6.15 4.88 1.418 3.87 1.1248 3.07 0.902 0.882 2.66 2.44 0.722 2.11 1.938 0.579 0.555 1.678 0.466 0.445 1.335 0.351 0.354 1.062 0.279 0.278 0.798 0.248 0.237 0.235 0.676 0.209 0.1981 0.638 0.1812 0.1705 0.511 0.411 0.1196 0.331 0.0634 3.66 6.93 9.2 2.32 4.74 3.57 6.75 2.27 4.62
R_AC60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 5.5117 4.3746 3.4673 2.7465 2.411 2.1811 1.9139 1.7275 1.5162 1.2036 0.9545 0.8929 0.7705 0.7084 0.5616 0.4604 0.4456 0.3657 0.3531 0.29 0.2801 0.23 0.1824 0.1446 2.1836 1.7317 1.376 1.0894 0.8639 0.6854 0.5435 0.4311 0.3392 0.269 0.2136 0.1696 3.8215 3.0324 0.8811 2.4048 0.6989 1.9077 0.5605 0.5481 1.6529 1.5162 0.4486 1.3111 1.2043 0.3598 0.3449 1.0427 0.2896 0.2765 0.8296 0.2181 0.22 0.6599 0.1734 0.1727 0.4959 0.1541 0.1473 0.146 0.4201 0.1299 0.1231 0.3964 0.1126 0.1059 0.3175 0.2554 0.0743 0.2057 0.0394 2.2743 4.3062 5.7168 1.4416 2.9454 2.2184 4.1944 1.4106 2.8708
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 8.87 7.04 5.58 4.42 3.859 3.51 3.062 2.78 2.428 1.9259 1.5273 1.4286 1.2331 1.1334 0.8986 0.737 0.7129 0.5852 0.565 0.464 0.4481 0.368 0.2918 0.2314 3.5141 2.7868 2.2144 1.7532 1.3903 1.103 0.8747 0.6938 0.5459 0.4329 0.3437 0.273 6.147 4.877 1.418 3.867 1.1248 3.067 0.8927 0.8817 2.654 2.437 0.7127 2.104 1.9344 0.5697 0.555 1.672 0.4564 0.445 1.329 0.3495 0.3528 1.056 0.2775 0.2774 0.7905 0.2432 0.2355 0.2347 0.67 0.2043 0.1967 0.6305 0.1766 0.1691 0.5035 0.4035 0.1188 0.3235 0.0619 3.63 6.873 9.128 2.302 4.701 3.531 6.678 2.246 4.569
R_AC50 50 Hz (ohm/km) 5.5117 4.3746 3.4673 2.7465 2.3979 2.1811 1.9027 1.7275 1.5087 1.1967 0.949 0.8877 0.7662 0.7043 0.5584 0.4579 0.443 0.3636 0.3511 0.2883 0.2784 0.2287 0.1813 0.1438 2.1836 1.7317 1.376 1.0894 0.8639 0.6854 0.5435 0.4311 0.3392 0.269 0.2136 0.1696 3.8197 3.0305 0.8811 2.4029 0.6989 1.9058 0.5547 0.5479 1.6492 1.5143 0.4429 1.3074 1.202 0.354 0.3449 1.039 0.2836 0.2765 0.8258 0.2172 0.2192 0.6562 0.1724 0.1724 0.4912 0.1511 0.1463 0.1458 0.4163 0.127 0.1222 0.3918 0.1097 0.1051 0.3129 0.2507 0.0738 0.201 0.0385 2.2556 4.2708 5.672 1.4304 2.9211 2.1941 4.1496 1.3956 2.8391
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.777 0.763 0.749 0.735 0.777 0.721 0.763 0.707 0.749 0.735 0.721 0.715 0.707 0.701 0.687 0.674 0.673 0.66 0.659 0.646 0.645 0.632 0.618 0.604 0.665 0.651 0.637 0.623 0.609 0.595 0.581 0.566 0.553 0.538 0.524 0.51 0.724 0.71 0.602 0.696 0.588 0.682 0.612 0.574 0.725 0.668 0.589 0.711 0.654 0.584 0.546 0.697 0.57 0.532 0.683 0.495 0.518 0.668 0.481 0.497 0.6489 0.484 0.471 0.487 0.64 0.473 0.46 0.635 0.463 0.45 0.621 0.606 0.445 0.592 0.4 1.2 1.44 1.6 1.08 1.28 1.24 1.5 1.12 1.33
XL_60 60 Hz (ohm/km) 0.4828 0.4741 0.4654 0.4567 0.4828 0.448 0.4741 0.4393 0.4654 0.4567 0.448 0.4443 0.4393 0.4356 0.4269 0.4188 0.4182 0.4101 0.4095 0.4014 0.4008 0.3927 0.384 0.3753 0.4132 0.4045 0.3958 0.3871 0.3784 0.3697 0.361 0.3517 0.3436 0.3343 0.3256 0.3169 0.4499 0.4412 0.3741 0.4325 0.3654 0.4238 0.3803 0.3567 0.4505 0.4151 0.366 0.4418 0.4064 0.3629 0.3393 0.4331 0.3542 0.3306 0.4244 0.3076 0.3219 0.4151 0.2989 0.3088 0.4032 0.3008 0.2927 0.3026 0.3977 0.2939 0.2858 0.3946 0.2877 0.2796 0.3859 0.3766 0.2765 0.3679 0.2486 0.7457 0.8948 0.9942 0.6711 0.7954 0.7705 0.9321 0.696 0.8264
XL_50 50 Hz (ohm/mi) 0.6475 0.6358 0.6242 0.6125 0.6475 0.6008 0.6358 0.5892 0.6242 0.6125 0.6008 0.5958 0.5892 0.5842 0.5725 0.5617 0.5608 0.55 0.5492 0.5383 0.5375 0.5267 0.515 0.5033 0.5542 0.5425 0.5308 0.5192 0.5075 0.4958 0.4842 0.4717 0.4608 0.4483 0.4367 0.425 0.6033 0.5917 0.5017 0.58 0.49 0.5683 0.51 0.4783 0.6042 0.5567 0.4908 0.5925 0.545 0.4867 0.455 0.5808 0.475 0.4433 0.5692 0.4125 0.4317 0.5567 0.4008 0.4142 0.5408 0.4033 0.3925 0.4058 0.5333 0.3942 0.3833 0.5292 0.3858 0.375 0.5175 0.505 0.3708 0.4933 0.3333 1 1.2 1.3333 0.9 1.0667 1.0333 1.25 0.9333 1.1083
XL_50 XC_60 XC_60 XC_50 XC_50 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz (ohm/km) (mohm-mi) (mohm-km) (mohm-mi) (mohm-km) 0.4023 0.1391 0.2239 0.1669 0.2686 0.3951 0.1356 0.2182 0.1627 0.2619 0.3878 0.1322 0.2127 0.1586 0.2553 0.3806 0.1288 0.2073 0.1546 0.2487 0.4023 0.1293 0.2081 0.1552 0.2497 0.3734 0.1253 0.2016 0.1504 0.242 0.3951 0.1258 0.2024 0.151 0.2429 0.3661 0.1219 0.1962 0.1463 0.2354 0.3878 0.1224 0.197 0.1469 0.2364 0.3806 0.119 0.1915 0.1428 0.2298 0.3734 0.1155 0.1859 0.1386 0.223 0.3702 0.1141 0.1836 0.1369 0.2203 0.3661 0.1121 0.1804 0.1345 0.2165 0.363 0.1107 0.1781 0.1328 0.2138 0.3557 0.1073 0.1727 0.1288 0.2072 0.349 0.1042 0.1677 0.125 0.2012 0.3485 0.1038 0.167 0.1246 0.2005 0.3418 0.1007 0.1621 0.1208 0.1945 0.3412 0.1004 0.1616 0.1205 0.1939 0.3345 0.0973 0.1566 0.1168 0.1879 0.334 0.097 0.1561 0.1164 0.1873 0.3273 0.0939 0.1511 0.1127 0.1813 0.32 0.0904 0.1455 0.1085 0.1746 0.3128 0.087 0.14 0.1044 0.168 0.3444 0.1552 0.2498 0.1862 0.2997 0.3371 0.1517 0.2441 0.182 0.293 0.3299 0.1483 0.2387 0.178 0.2864 0.3226 0.1449 0.2332 0.1739 0.2798 0.3154 0.1415 0.2277 0.1698 0.2733 0.3081 0.138 0.2221 0.1656 0.2665 0.3009 0.1345 0.2165 0.1614 0.2597 0.2931 0.1311 0.211 0.1573 0.2532 0.2864 0.1276 0.2053 0.1531 0.2464 0.2786 0.1242 0.1999 0.149 0.2399 0.2713 0.1208 0.1944 0.145 0.2333 0.2641 0.1173 0.1888 0.1408 0.2265 0.3749 0.1392 0.224 0.167 0.2688 0.3677 0.1358 0.2185 0.163 0.2623 0.3117 0.1377 0.2216 0.1652 0.2659 0.3604 0.1324 0.2131 0.1589 0.2557 0.3045 0.1342 0.216 0.161 0.2592 0.3532 0.1289 0.2074 0.1547 0.2489 0.3169 0.1232 0.1983 0.1478 0.2379 0.2972 0.1308 0.2105 0.157 0.2526 0.3754 0.1294 0.2082 0.1553 0.2499 0.3459 0.1255 0.202 0.1506 0.2424 0.305 0.1198 0.1928 0.1438 0.2314 0.3682 0.126 0.2028 0.1512 0.2433 0.3387 0.1221 0.1965 0.1465 0.2358 0.3024 0.1164 0.1873 0.1397 0.2248 0.2827 0.124 0.1996 0.1488 0.2395 0.3609 0.1226 0.1973 0.1471 0.2368 0.2952 0.112 0.1802 0.1344 0.2163 0.2755 0.1204 0.1938 0.1445 0.2325 0.3537 0.1191 0.1917 0.1429 0.23 0.2563 0.1143 0.1839 0.1372 0.2207 0.2682 0.117 0.1883 0.1404 0.2259 0.3459 0.1157 0.1862 0.1388 0.2234 0.2491 0.1109 0.1785 0.1331 0.2142 0.2574 0.1132 0.1822 0.1358 0.2186 0.336 0.1109 0.1785 0.1331 0.2142 0.2506 0.1064 0.1712 0.1277 0.2055 0.2439 0.1084 0.1744 0.1301 0.2093 0.2522 0.1108 0.1783 0.133 0.214 0.3314 0.1088 0.1751 0.1306 0.2101 0.2449 0.1037 0.1669 0.1244 0.2003 0.2382 0.1057 0.1701 0.1268 0.2041 0.3288 0.1074 0.1728 0.1289 0.2074 0.2398 0.1014 0.1632 0.1217 0.1958 0.233 0.1034 0.1664 0.1241 0.1997 0.3216 0.104 0.1674 0.1248 0.2008 0.3138 0.1005 0.1617 0.1206 0.1941 0.2304 0.1005 0.1617 0.1206 0.1941 0.3066 0.0971 0.1563 0.1165 0.1875 0.2071 0.0901 0.145 0.1081 0.174 0.6214 0.115 0.1851 0.138 0.2221 0.7457 0.1244 0.2002 0.1493 0.2402 0.8285 0.1287 0.2071 0.1544 0.2485 0.5592 0.1083 0.1743 0.13 0.2091 0.6628 0.1188 0.1912 0.1426 0.2294 0.6421 0.115 0.1851 0.138 0.2221 0.7767 0.1244 0.2002 0.1493 0.2402 0.58 0.1083 0.1743 0.13 0.2091 0.6887 0.1188 0.1912 0.1426 0.2294
AREA aluminum (kcmil) 31.2 39.3 49.5 62.5 72.7 78.7 91.6 99.3 115.6 145.8 183.7 197.3 231.6 248.7 313.7 384.2 395.6 484.2 498.6 611 628.7 770.4 971 1224.2 16.5 20.8 26.3 33.1 41.7 52.6 66.4 83.7 105.5 133.1 167.8 211.6 31.2 39.3 41.7 49.5 52.6 62.5 66.4 66.4 72.7 78.8 83.7 91.7 99.3 105.6 105.6 115.6 133.1 133.1 145.7 167.8 167.8 183.8 211.6 211.6 248.8 250 250 250 292.2 300 300 313.7 350 350 395.5 498.8 500 628.9 1000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
AREA total (sq-in.) 0.0245 0.0308 0.0389 0.049 0.0571 0.0618 0.072 0.078 0.0908 0.1145 0.1443 0.1549 0.182 0.1954 0.2464 0.3017 0.3107 0.3805 0.3917 0.4798 0.494 0.605 0.7629 0.9619 0.013 0.0164 0.0206 0.026 0.0328 0.0413 0.0521 0.0657 0.0829 0.1045 0.1318 0.1662 0.0245 0.0309 0.0328 0.0389 0.0413 0.0491 0.0521 0.0829 0.0571 0.0619 0.0657 0.072 0.078 0.0829 0.0829 0.0908 0.1045 0.1045 0.1144 0.1318 0.1317 0.1444 0.1662 0.1662 0.1954 0.1964 0.1964 0.3927 0.2295 0.2356 0.2356 0.2464 0.2749 0.2749 0.3106 0.3918 0.3927 0.4939 0.7854 0.1497 0.0792 0.0595 0.2355 0.1156 0.1497 0.0792 0.2355 0.1156
AREA total (sq-mm) 15.8064 19.8709 25.0967 31.6128 36.8386 39.8709 46.4515 50.3225 58.5805 73.8708 93.0966 99.9353 117.4191 126.0643 158.9674 194.6448 200.4512 245.4834 252.7092 309.5478 318.709 390.3218 492.1926 620.5794 8.3871 10.5806 13.2903 16.7742 21.1612 26.6451 33.6128 42.387 53.4838 67.4192 85.0321 107.2256 15.8064 19.9354 21.1612 25.0967 26.6451 31.6774 33.6128 53.4838 36.8386 39.9354 42.387 46.4515 50.3225 53.4838 53.4838 58.5805 67.4192 67.4192 73.8063 85.0321 84.9676 93.1611 107.2256 107.2256 126.0643 126.7094 126.7094 253.3543 148.0642 151.9997 151.9997 158.9674 177.3545 177.3545 200.3867 252.7737 253.3543 318.6445 506.7087 96.5805 51.0967 38.387 151.9352 74.5805 96.5805 51.0967 151.9352 74.5805
OD -(in.) 0.22 0.246 0.277 0.311 0.306 0.349 0.343 0.392 0.385 0.433 0.486 0.509 0.546 0.572 0.642 0.713 0.721 0.801 0.81 0.899 0.91 1.01 1.134 1.273 0.1285 0.1443 0.162 0.1819 0.2043 0.2294 0.2576 0.2893 0.3249 0.3648 0.4096 0.46 0.22 0.247 0.2316 0.277 0.2601 0.311 0.377 0.292 0.306 0.349 0.423 0.343 0.392 0.475 0.368 0.385 0.534 0.4137 0.433 0.509 0.4644 0.486 0.571 0.522 0.572 0.666 0.621 0.574 0.613 0.729 0.68 0.642 0.788 0.735 0.721 0.81 0.811 0.91 1.151 0.495 0.36 0.312 0.621 0.435 0.495 0.36 0.621 0.435
OD STRAND -- outer/core (mm) -5.588 3 6.2484 3 7.0358 3 7.8994 3 7.7724 7 8.8646 3 8.7122 7 9.9568 3 9.779 7 10.9982 7 12.3444 7 12.9286 19 13.8684 7 14.5288 19 16.3068 19 18.1102 37 18.3134 19 20.3454 37 20.574 19 22.8346 37 23.114 19 25.654 37 28.8036 37 32.3342 37 3.2639 1 3.6652 1 4.1148 1 4.6203 1 5.1892 1 5.8268 1 6.543 1 7.3482 1 8.2525 1 9.2659 1 10.4038 1 11.684 1 5.588 3 6.2738 3 5.8826 7 7.0358 3 6.6065 7 7.8994 3 9.5758 7 7.4168 7 7.7724 7 8.8646 3 10.7442 7 8.7122 7 9.9568 3 12.065 7 9.3472 7 9.779 7 13.5636 7 10.508 7 10.9982 7 12.9286 8 11.7958 7 12.3444 7 14.5034 19 13.2588 7 14.5288 19 16.9164 19 15.7734 19 14.5796 19 15.5702 7 18.5166 19 17.272 19 16.3068 19 20.0152 19 18.669 19 18.3134 19 20.574 19 20.5994 19 23.114 19 29.2354 37 12.573 7 9.144 7 7.9248 7 15.7734 7 11.049 7 12.573 7 9.144 7 15.7734 7 11.049 7
#STD-OL outer -3 3 3 3 6 3 6 3 6 6 6 12 6 12 12 18 12 18 12 18 12 18 18 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 6 3 6 3 6 6 6 3 6 6 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 12 6 6 0 12 12 6 0 12 12 0 12 12 12 12 12 18 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
STR-DIA outer (in.) 0.0733 0.0823 0.0923 0.1037 0.102 0.1163 0.114 0.1307 0.128 0.144 0.162 0.1018 0.182 0.1144 0.1284 0.1019 0.1442 0.1144 0.162 0.1284 0.182 0.1443 0.1614 0.1814 0.1285 0.1443 0.162 0.1819 0.2043 0.2294 0.2576 0.2893 0.3249 0.3648 0.4096 0.46 0.1019 0.1144 0.0772 0.1285 0.0867 0.1443 0.1257 0.0974 0.1019 0.162 0.1412 0.1144 0.1819 0.1585 0.1228 0.1285 0.178 0.1379 0.1443 0.1018 0.1548 0.162 0.1143 0.1739 0.1144 0.1332 0.1242 0.1147 0.204 0.1459 0.1361 0.1285 0.1576 0.147 0.1443 0.162 0.1622 0.1819 0.1644 0.165 0.12 0.104 0.207 0.145 0.165 0.12 0.207 0.145
STR-DIA outer (mm) 1.8618 2.0904 2.3444 2.634 2.5908 2.954 2.8956 3.3198 3.2512 3.6576 4.1148 2.5857 4.6228 2.9058 3.2614 2.5883 3.6627 2.9058 4.1148 3.2614 4.6228 3.6652 4.0996 4.6076 3.2639 3.6652 4.1148 4.6203 5.1892 5.8268 6.543 7.3482 8.2525 9.2659 10.4038 11.684 2.5883 2.9058 1.9609 3.2639 2.2022 3.6652 3.1928 2.474 2.5883 4.1148 3.5865 2.9058 4.6203 4.0259 3.1191 3.2639 4.5212 3.5027 3.6652 2.5857 3.9319 4.1148 2.9032 4.4171 2.9058 3.3833 3.1547 2.9134 5.1816 3.7059 3.4569 3.2639 4.003 3.7338 3.6652 4.1148 4.1199 4.6203 4.1758 4.191 3.048 2.6416 5.2578 3.683 4.191 3.048 5.2578 3.683
STR-DIA core (in.) 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 9999 9999 9999 0 9999 9999 0 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999
STR-DIA core (mm) 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 3 9999 9999 9999 4 9999 9999 4 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999
UTS -(lb) 4532 5715 7206 8621 10020 10280 12630 12230 15930 19060 22730 27190 27030 34290 43240 52950 51730 66770 61700 84200 73350 100700 120200 142800 826 1030 1280 1590 1970 2440 3000 3690 4520 5520 6720 8140 3509 4250 1940 5174 2430 6291 9730 3045 7758 7639 11900 9393 9262 14490 4752 11440 17600 5930 13910 12370 7360 16890 15370 9154 25500 23920 17840 11360 24780 27770 20960 31040 32420 23850 37740 45830 21950 55570 43830 26900 15400 11200 42400 20800 18800 10800 29600 14500
UTS WGT --(kg) (lb/1000 ft) 2055.7 70.4 2592.3 88.8 3268.6 112 3910.5 141.2 4545 164.7 4663 178.1 5728.9 207.6 5547.5 224.5 7225.8 261.8 8645.6 330 10310.3 416.3 12333.3 448.7 12260.7 524.9 15553.8 565.8 19613.5 713.5 24018 879 23464.6 899.5 30286.7 1108 27986.9 1134 38192.9 1398 33271.3 1430 45677.2 1762 54522.4 2222 64773.7 2802 374.7 50 467.2 63 580.6 79 721.2 100 893.6 126 1106.8 159 1360.8 201 1673.8 253 2050.3 320 2503.9 403 3048.2 508 3692.3 641 1591.7 87.1 1927.8 109.9 880 128.9 2346.9 138.5 1102.2 162.5 2853.6 174.7 4413.5 322.2 1381.2 204.9 3519 203.8 3465 220.3 5397.8 406.1 4260.6 256.8 4201.2 277.8 6572.6 473.9 2155.5 325.8 5189.1 323.9 7983.3 646 2689.8 411 6309.5 408.5 5611 593.6 3338.5 517.9 7661.3 514.9 6971.8 748.3 4152.2 653.3 11566.7 700 10850 1002 8092.2 884.3 5152.9 772 11240.1 818.9 12596.4 1203 9507.4 1061 14079.7 882.6 14705.6 1403 10818.3 1237.9 17118.8 1113 20788.4 1403 9956.5 1544 25206.4 1770 19881.2 3088 12201.8 517 6985.4 273 5080.3 205 19232.5 813 9434.8 399 8527.6 517 4898.8 273 13426.5 813 6577.2 399
WGT -(kg/km) 104.8 132.2 166.7 210.1 245.1 265.1 309 334.1 389.6 491.1 619.5 667.8 781.2 842 1061.8 1308.1 1338.7 1648.9 1687.6 2080.5 2128.2 2622.2 3306.8 4170 74.4 93.8 117.6 148.8 187.5 236.6 299.1 376.5 476.2 599.8 756 953.9 129.6 163.6 191.8 206.1 241.8 260 479.5 304.9 303.3 327.9 604.4 382.2 413.4 705.3 484.9 482 961.4 611.7 607.9 883.4 770.7 766.3 1113.6 972.3 1041.8 1491.2 1316 1148.9 1218.7 1790.3 1579 1313.5 2088 1842.3 1656.4 2088 2297.8 2634.1 4595.6 769.4 406.3 305.1 1209.9 593.8 769.4 406.3 1209.9 593.8
Amps -(A) 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 96 111 128 147 170 197 228 263 306 354 409 473 110 120 174 140 201 160 240 230 170 190 270 200 220 310 310 230 360 360 270 420 417 310 490 480 360 540 540 540 410 600 610 410 660 680 470 540 840 620 1300 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999
Index
A
acceleration factors A-33 adding a branch 2-6 adding a shunt 2-5 adding items to a group 2-9 adding items to a load category 2-12 adding nodes 2-4 analysis conventions 4-2 phases 4-2 analysis options CAPO 4-39 general 4-5 load flow 4-15 motor starting 4-33 short circuit 4-26 TOPO 4-45 construction dictionary 1-27, 1-29, A-31 construction dictionary formats basic data record B-16 one-phase data records B-17 rating data record B-17 reliability data record B-17 two-phase data records B-17 coordinate scale factors 1-28, 1-30 coordination view annotation 7-29 list 7-30 menu bar 7-29 printing 7-31 settings 7-29 corridor files 6-21 adjusting circuit properties 6-26 analyzing 6-28 automatic validation 6-28 calculation results 6-32 copying a circuit 6-26 deleting a circuit 6-27 deleting all circuits 6-28 modifying 6-25 pasting a circuit 6-27 selecting a curcuit 6-25 user-initiated validation 6-29 creating a diagram 2-1 creating a network 2-1
B
branches adding 2-6 copying 3-33 deleting 3-33 moving 3-32
C
cable/conductor damage curves editing 7-18 capacitor changing properties 3-81 properties F-20 user-specified validation criteria C-4 CAPO result options 4-14 changing properties 2-2 color coding 1-33, 4-7 branches under power factor limit 4-8 by group 4-7 items by category 4-8 nodes by calculated voltage 4-7 nodes by nominal voltage 4-7 overloaded branches 4-7 unbalanced nodes, branches 4-8 compensating impedance 3-46 conductor/cable damage properties F-31
D
defining a group 2-8 defining economics 2-14 defining item ordering method 2-15 defining load categories 2-11 deleting a group 2-10 deleting a load category 2-13 deselecting items all 3-19 device database interface adding fuses 7-42 adding reclosers 7-44 adding relays 7-43 modifying fuses 7-45 modifying reclosers 7-47 modifying relays 7-46
IX-1
Index
removing devices 7-49 updating manufacturers 7-48 diagram annotating 3-25 creating 2-1 knee points 2-32 layers 2-29 locking 2-34 navigating 2-28 panning 2-28 ports and links 2-39 symbol position 2-39 viewing results 4-5 diagram coordinates scaling/offsetting 2-27 diagram differences load and branch labels A-32 load flow results A-32 node labels A-32 shunt device labels A-33 transformer symbols A-32 diagram view 1-7 print preview 2-22 printing 2-20, 2-23 saving 2-28 zooming 2-26 displaying hidden diagram items 1-28, 1-30 distribution reliability analysis 9-1 automatic reclosing devices 9-5 breakers 9-5 construction dictionary 9-17 default parameters 9-8 fuses 9-6 fuseswitches 9-6 options 9-22 performing 9-26 reliability parameters 9-14 result display options 9-24 switches 9-6 tie switches 9-6 documentation conventions 1-2 abbreviations 1-2 click 1-2 double-click 1-2 right-click 1-2
F
fault all result options 4-11 nodes 4-11 filters selecting 3-24 flat transformers 1-25 flow arrows 4-8 fuses edting 7-11 properties F-26
G
getting help 1-2 grid editor 3-2 copy/paste 3-7 exporting data 3-8 finding data 3-8 formatting 3-9 modifying network items 3-4 opening 3-3 printing 3-11 zooming 3-14 groups A-34 adding items 2-9 defining 2-8 deleting 2-10 selecting 3-19 viewing 2-9
H
harmonic analysis 8-1 adding harmonic injections 8-2 analysis options 8-10 editing harmonic filters 8-8 editing harmonic injections 8-6 harmonic filters 8-7 harmonic models 8-18 nodes 8-5 shunt items 8-3 transformers 8-4 viewing results 8-12 help online 1-3 technical support 1-3
E
economics A-34 defining 2-14 editing 7-3 editing a network 3-1 equipment list view 1-9
I
image files 2-31 induction machine automatic validation criteria C-3 available designs E-1 changing properties 3-67
IX-2
Index
grounding impedance 3-69 properties F-14 user-specified validation criteria C-4 input file 1-27, 1-29 islands selecting 3-20 item ordering method defining 2-15 items centering 2-28 deselecting all 3-19 labels 2-34 rotating 2-39 selecting 3-15 selecting all 3-19 selecting multiple adjacent 3-17 selecting multiple nonadjacent 3-18 selecting single 3-16
K
knee points 2-32
L
labels 2-34 branch results 2-38 fonts 2-36 point nodes 2-37 result visibility 2-37 layers 2-29 limits loads A-33 network size A-33 number loops A-33 power factor 4-54 line properties calculator 6-1 corridor view 6-46-5 menu bar 6-12 saving impedances 6-40 setting options 6-14 status bar 6-12 toolbar 6-13 lines changing properties 3-34 properties F-4 user-specified validation criteria C-4 links 2-39 load categories A-34 adding items 2-12 defining 2-11 deleting 2-13 selecting 3-21 viewing 2-12
load flow and short circuit result options 4-9 all 4-11 branches 4-10 branches and shunts 4-11 nodes 4-9 shunts 4-10 load flow solutions constant current load 4-24 constant impedance load 4-24 constant power load 4-23 induction machines 4-23 lines and cables 4-20 machine modeling 4-21 network representation 4-20 sources 4-20 static load modeling 4-23 synchronous machines 4-21, A-14 transformers 4-21 load snapshots A-34 creating 3-102 loads automatic validation criteria C-2 locking the diagram 2-34
M
machine protection edting 7-24 properties F-34 main menu analysis 1-18 help 1-18 network 1-17 using 1-17 view 1-17 window 1-18 menus file 1-17 main 1-17 merging files 1-40 motor starting result options 4-11 motor starting solutions auto-transformer starting 4-35 machines being started 4-35, A-16 running machines 4-35 sources 4-35 MWh load changing properties 3-60 properties F-11 MWh loads A-34
N
name identifiers A-33
IX-3
Index
navigating the diagram 2-28 network automatic validation criteria C-1 creating 2-1 editing 3-1 properties F-1 rephasing 3-98 nodes adding 2-4 automatic validation criteria C-1 changing properties 3-30 copying 3-27 deleting 3-29 moving 3-27 properties F-3 resizing 3-29 selecting in base voltage range 3-22 toggling symbols 3-29
O
opening files 3-15 corridor files 6-21 Hub files 1-39 native files 1-38 raw data files 1-39, A-6 over current relays properties F-27
coordination study 7-27 coordination view 7-27 device database 7-32 device database interface 7-41 editing cable/conductor damage curves 718 editing fuses 7-11 editing machine protection curves 7-24 editing reclosers 7-21 editing relays 7-12 editing transformer damage curves 7-14 equipment packs 7-1, 7-3 fuse tables 7-32 importing customized database tables 7-53 printing device database 7-52 recloser tables 7-38 relay tables 7-35 protection equipment properties F-25
R
raw data file asynchronous machine load B-12 capacitor data section B-14 format B-1 line or cable data B-4 load data section B-10 load type definitions B-10 machine loads B-12 MWh load data section B-13 node declaration section B-3 series capacitor or series reactor data B-6 source data section B-3 switch data B-5 synchronous machine load B-12 system parameters section B-2 tie switch data B-5 title section B-2 transformer data B-6 transformer tap changing data section B-7 transformer type codes B-8 reclosers edting 7-21 properties F-33 relays edting 7-12 report database branch results G-1 capacitor properties G-5 CAPO results G-4 CAPO summary G-4 CAPO switching schedule G-5
P
panning the diagram 2-28 parameter file differences A-31 performing analysis CAPO 4-43 load flow 4-19 motor starting 4-34 short circuit 4-28 TOPO 4-46 ports 2-39 print options 2-20 print preview diagram view 2-22 print settings 2-21 printing files corridor files 6-23 printing the diagram 2-20, 2-23 progress view 1-14 properties diagram view 1-32 network 2-2 nodes 3-30 reliability 2-3 protection and coordination 7-1
IX-4
Index
device groups G-6 device limits G-6 DRA G-28 fault all current results G-7 induction machine properties G-8 line/cable properties G-9 load flow summary G-10 load properties G-11 load snapshots G-12 network economics G-12 node properties G-13 node results G-13 series capacitor/reactor properties G-15 shunt status G-16 source properties G-18 standard fault properties G-19 static load summary G-19G-20 switch properties G-21 synchronous machine properties G-22 system totals G-23 titles and comments G-25 TOPO results G-24 transfomer properties G-25 voltage levels G-28 report file 1-27, 1-29 report options 5-8 description 5-8 sort by 5-8 report preview 1-15, 5-9 report units 5-6 angle 5-7 current 5-7 power and losses 5-7 voltage 5-6 reports creating and designing 5-11 exporting 5-10 restoring last saved workspace 1-28, 1-30 root node 2-3, 2-15
S
saving diagram views 2-28 saving files 2-19 corridor files 6-22 image 2-31 raw data A-8 scaling automatic 3-91 loads 3-87 machines 3-89 MWh loads 3-90 scaling/offsetting diagram coordinates 2-27
selecting groups 3-19 selecting islands 3-20 selecting items 3-15 all 3-19 filters 3-24 multiple adjacent 3-17 multiple nonadjacent 3-18 single 3-16 selecting load categories 3-21 series capacitor/reactor automatic validation criteria C-2 changing properties 3-50 properties F-23 user-specified validation criteria C-4 setting default item properties 1-35 setting diagram view properties 1-32 color coding 1-33 colors 1-33 default 1-34 fonts 1-33 item labels 1-33 resetting 1-34 setting network properties 2-2 root node 2-3 setting program properties 1-27 construction dictionary 1-27, 1-29 coordinate scale factors 1-28, 1-30 displaying hidden diagram items 1-28, 1-30 input file 1-27, 1-29 report file 1-27, 1-29 restoring last saved workspace 1-28, 1-30 static load property sheet display 1-28, 130 tooltips 1-30 transformer symbols 1-28, 1-30 setting reliability properties 2-3 short circuit solutions lines and cables 4-29 machine modeling 4-30, A-15 sources 4-29 static load modeling 4-30 transformers 4-29 shunt capacitors automatic validation criteria C-2 shunts adding 2-5 copying 3-55 deleting 3-55 moving 3-54 source angle A-34 automatic validation criteria C-2
IX-5
Index
changing properties 3-63 grounding impedance 3-65 multiple A-34 properties F-13 user-specified validation criteria C-4 specifying print options 2-20 specifying print settings 2-21 standard fault changing properties 3-83 properties F-24 static load A-35 changing properties 3-56 grounding impedance 3-57 properties F-9 static load property sheet display 1-28, 1-30 status bar using 1-16 switches automatic validation criteria C-1 changing properties 3-38 properties F-22 synchronous machine automatic validation criteria C-3 changing properties 3-74 grounding impedance 3-78 properties F-16 user-specified validation criteria C-4
T
tabular reports branch current 5-2 branch power 5-2 branch power losses 5-2 CAPO 5-5 DRA 5-5 fault all current 5-5 input list of network data 5-2 network summary 5-4 node voltage 5-2 power flow summary 5-4 shunt current 5-3 shunt power 5-4 status 5-4 TOPO 5-5 thevenin equivalent impedance 4-30 toolbars 1-18 analysis 1-25 copying a button 1-21 creating 1-21 customizing 1-20 deleting a button 1-22 diagram 1-23
file 1-23 hiding 1-21 moving 1-20 report 1-27 resetting 1-22 results 1-26 saving 1-22 tooltip 1-18 zoom 1-26 tooltips 1-30 TOPO result options 4-13 transformer damage properties F-29 transformer damage curves edting 7-14 transformer modeling A-1 auto A-13 grounding A-13 impedance A-10 regulating A-12 size A-10 three winding A-10 three-legged core A-11 transformer symbols 1-28, 1-30 transformers automatic validation criteria C-2 calculating compensating impedance 3-46 changing properties 3-41 compensating impedance 3-46 conversions not supported A-8 grounding impedance 3-43 properties F-5 user-specified validation criteria C-4 tree selecting 3-23
U
unbalance current 4-51 voltage 4-48 using PSS/ADEPT diagram view 1-61-7 equipment list view 1-6, 1-9 exiting 1-5 installing 1-5 main menu 1-17 opening files 3-15 opening native files 1-38 opening PSS/Engines Hub files 1-39 opening raw data files 1-39 progress view 1-6, 1-14 report preview 1-6, 1-15, 5-9
IX-6
Index
saving files 2-19 starting 1-5 status bar 1-16 toolbars 1-18
V
validation automatic 4-2 user-initiated 4-4 viewing a group 2-9 viewing a load category 2-12 views diagram 1-7 docking 2-24 equipment list 1-9 floating 2-25 hiding 1-7, 2-23 progress list 1-14 report preview 1-15, 5-9 showing 1-7
W
workspace creating 3-86 deleting 3-86 restoring last saved 3-85 retrieving 3-85 saving 3-86
IX-7
IX-8

PSS Adept

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PSS Adept

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PSS/ADEPT 5.

Chapter 2 - Creating a Network Model

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Defining a Load Category ..........................................................................................2-11 Defining Network Economics ....................................................................................2-14

Chapter 3 - Editing a Network Model

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Chapter 4 - Analyzing Network Models

4.10 How PSS/ADEPT Calculates Power Factor Limits ...................................................4-54

Chapter 5 - Results Reporting

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Chapter 6 - Line Properties Calculator

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Chapter 7 - Protection and Coordination

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Chapter 8 - Harmonic Analysis

8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8

Chapter 9 - Distribution Reliability Analysis

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9

Appendix A - Modeling and File Differences Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

A.3.2.6 A.3.2.7 A.3.2.8 A.3.2.9

A.4 A.5 A.6

A.7 A.8 A.9

Appendix B - PSS/U Input File Formats

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Appendix C - Validation Criteria

D.4 D.5 D.6

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

D.6.2 D.6.3 D.7 D.8

Appendix E - NEMA Machine Classes Appendix F - Device Properties Summary

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Synchronous Machines ............................................................................................ F-16

Appendix G - Database Field Formats

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Appendix H - Conductor Database

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

This page intentionally left blank.

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Figure 3-8. Figure 3-9.

Display Settings Dialog ........................................................................................3-10 Page Setup Dialog ...............................................................................................3-11

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International

PSS/ADEPT-5.2 Users Manual

Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc., Power Technologies International